Ghana Oil Services Terminal ESIA Report

Ghana Oil Services
Terminal
Environmental and Social Impact Assessment
(ESIA)
Final ESIA Report and

Environmental Impact Statement
Volume I
April 2014
www.erm.com
Delivering sustainable solutions in a more competitive world

Lonrho plc
Ghana Oil Services Terminal:

Environmental and Social Impact
Assessment
Final ESIA Report and Environmental Impact
Statement
April 2014
For and on behalf of

Environmental Resources Management
Approved by: Henry Camp
Signed:
Position: Partner
Date: 03 April 2014
This report has been prepared by Environmental Resources

Management the trading name of Environmental Resources
Management Limited, with all reasonable skill, care and diligence
within the terms of the Contract with the client, incorporating our
General Terms and Conditions of Business and taking account of the
resources devoted to it by agreement with the client.
We disclaim any responsibility to the client and others in respect of

any matters outside the scope of the above.
This report is confidential to the client and we accept no responsibility

of whatsoever nature to third parties to whom this report, or any part
thereof, is made known. Any such party relies on the report at their
own risk.
CONTENTS
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY XVII
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS LX
1 INTRODUCTION AND PURPOSE OF REPORT 1-1
1.1 OVERVIEW 1-1

1.2 PROJECT JUSTIFICATION 1-1
1.3 PURPOSE OF ESIA 1-2
1.4 ESIA PROCESS 1-3
1.4.1 Project Registration 1-3
1.4.2 Project Screening 1-4
1.4.3 Scoping Phase 1-4
1.4.4 Baseline Data Collection 1-5
1.4.5 Stakeholder Consultation 1-6
1.4.6 Impact Assessment 1-7
1.4.7 Mitigation and Management Planning 1-8
1.4.8 Reporting and Disclosure 1-8
1.5 SUMMARY OF STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION 1-9
1.5.1 Background and Objectives 1-9
1.5.2 Stakeholder Engagement within the ESIA Process 1-10
1.5.3 Reporting of Stakeholder Engagement Activities 1-10
1.5.4 Stakeholder Identification 1-10
1.5.5 Stakeholder Engagement Process 1-14
1.5.6 Key Issues Raised 1-19
1.5.7 Project Grievance Mechanism 1-21
1.6 ESIA TEAM 1-22
1.7 STRUCTURE OF THIS REPORT 1-23
2 LEGAL AND POLICY FRAMEWORK 2-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2-1

2.2 GHANAIAN GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION FRAMEWORK 2-1
2.2.1 Ghana Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 2-2
2.2.2 Ghana Maritime Authority and Ghana Ports and Harbours Authority 2-2
2.2.3 Ministry of Agriculture (Fisheries Commission) 2-3
2.2.4 Ministry of Energy 2-4
2.2.5 Ministry of Finance and Economic Planning 2-4
2.2.6 Ministry of Trade and Industry 2-5
2.2.7 Free Zones Board 2-5
2.2.8 Ministry of Roads and Highways 2-5
2.2.9 Ministry of Lands and Natural Resources 2-6
2.2.10 Ministry of Transport 2-6
2.2.11 Civil Aviation Authority 2-7
2.2.12 Western Region Administration 2-7
LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

I
2.2.13 Ellembelle District Authority 2-7
2.3 RELEVANT DEVELOPMENT POLICY AND PLANS 2-8
2.3.1 Relevant National Policies 2-8
2.3.2 The Coordinated Programme of Economic and Social Development Policies, 2010
– 2016 2-12
2.3.3 Land Commission Guidelines for Considering Large-Scale Land Transactions for
Agricultural and other Purposes 2-13
2.3.4 Resettlement Policy Framework (RPF) 2-13
2.3.5 Western Region Spatial Development Framework (WRSDF) 2-14
2.3.6 Ellembelle District Assembly Medium-Term Development Plan 2010-2013 2-15
2.4 GHANAIAN LAWS AND REGULATIONS 2-17
2.4.1 The Ghanaian Constitution 2-17
2.4.2 Ghana Environmental Legislation 2-17
2.4.3 Ghanaian Social Legislation 2-27
2.4.4 National Environmental and Social Legislation under Preparation 2-29
2.4.5 Marine State, Conventions and Classification Requirements 2-30
2.5 INTERNATIONAL LAWS AND AGREEMENTS 2-30
2.5.1 International Conventions and Agreements 2-30
2.6 INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL INSTITUTION (IFI) ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 2-36
2.6.1 Equator Principles 2-37
2.6.2 IFC Performance Sustainability Framework and Performance Standards 2-38
2.6.3 World Bank Group Guidelines 2-39
2.6.4 African Development Bank Policies and Guidelines 2-41
2.7 LONRHO HSE POLICIES AND STANDARDS 2-42
2.7.1 Introduction 2-42
2.7.2 Lonrho’s Engineering Standards 2-42
2.7.3 Lonrho HSE Policy 2-43
2.7.4 Lonrho’s International Commitments 2-43
2.7.5 Project Environmental and Social Regulations and Controls 2-45
3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 3-1

3.1.1 Overview of the Project 3-1
3.1.2 Project Components 3-1
3.1.3 Project Site 3-2
3.2 FACILITIES AND OPERATIONS 3-4
3.2.1 Marine Facilities 3-4
3.2.2 Service Facilities 3-5
3.2.3 Airstrip and Helipad 3-10
3.2.4 Infrastructure 3-10
3.3 SITE PREPARATION 3-18
3.3.1 Activities 3-18
3.3.2 Facilities 3-20
3.4 CONSTRUCTION 3-25
3.4.1 Construction of Breakwater and Groyne 3-26
3.4.2 Construction of Quay Walls 3-33
3.4.3 Construction of Onshore Facilities 3-34
3.4.4 Construction Schedule 3-35

II
3.4.5 Decommissioning 3-35
3.5 TRAFFIC 3-38
3.5.1 Marine Traffic 3-38
3.6 EMISSIONS, DISCHARGES AND WASTES 3-39
3.6.1 Air Emissions 3-39
3.6.2 Noise Emissions 3-40
3.6.3 Liquid Effluents 3-42
3.6.4 Solid Waste 3-43
3.7 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS 3-44
3.8 HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) AND SECURITY 3-45
3.9 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES 3-46
3.9.1 Consideration of Alternatives During Project Design 3-46
3.9.2 No Project Alternative 3-47
3.9.3 Alternative Projects 3-47
3.9.4 Location Alternatives 3-48
3.9.5 Layout Alternatives 3-50
4 BIOPHYSICAL BASELINE 4-1

4.2 CLIMATE AND METEOROLOGY 4-1
4.2.1 Rainfall 4-2
4.2.2 Temperature 4-3
4.2.3 Relative Humidity 4-4
4.2.4 Wind 4-5
4.2.5 Oceanography 4-6
4.3 BATHYMETRY AND SEABED TOPOGRAPHY 4-12
4.4 GEOLOGY, SOILS AND TOPOGRAPHY 4-12
4.4.1 Geology 4-12
4.4.2 Soils 4-15
4.4.3 Terrestrial Topography 4-21
4.5 HYDROLOGY AND HYDROGEOLOGY 4-24
4.5.1 Regional Hydrogeology 4-24
4.5.2 Groundwater Quality 4-25
4.5.3 Surface Water 4-34
4.5.4 Trace/ Heavy Metal Analysis 4-42
4.6 MARINE WATER QUALITY 4-43
4.6.1 Water Temperature and pH 4-43
4.6.2 Total Dissolved Solids, Conductivity and Resistivity 4-44
4.6.3 Turbidity and Total Suspended Solids 4-45
4.6.4 Nutrient (nitrates, phosphate and silicate) 4-45
4.6.5 Elemental Analysis (Heavy/Trace metals) 4-47
4.6.6 Bacteriology 4-48
4.6.7 Productivity (Chlorophyll concentration) 4-48
4.7 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY 4-49
4.7.1 Dust and Particulate Matter (TSP, PM1, PM2.5, PM10) 4-49
4.7.2 Toxic Gas Pollutant (NOx, SO2, CO, H2S, VOC,) 4-53
4.8 NOISE AND VIBRATION 4-55
4.9 ROAD TRAFFIC 4-57
4.10 TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGY 4-58

III
4.10.1 Flora 4-58
4.10.2 Fauna 4-65
4.10.3 Avian Fauna 4-66
4.11 MARINE AND INTERTIDAL ECOLOGY 4-67
4.11.1 Plankton 4-67
4.11.2 Sandy Beach Ecology (Intertidal Flora and Fauna) 4-69
4.11.3 Fish Ecology 4-70
4.11.4 Marine Mammals 4-73
4.11.5 Turtles 4-74
4.12 LOCAL FISHERIES 4-77
4.12.1 Marine Beach Seine Fishery 4-77
4.12.2 Marine Fish Catch 4-77
4.12.3 Freshwater Fishery (Asemdasuazo) 4-79
4.13 PROTECTED AREAS 4-79
4.13.1 Objectives of Protected Areas 4-79
4.13.2 Designated and Protected Areas 4-80
4.13.3 Ankasa Conservation Area 4-80
4.13.4 Amansuri Wetlands 4-81
5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC BASELINE 5-1
5.1 DEFINING THE SOCIO-ECONOMIC STUDY AREA 5-2

5.2 INSTITUTIONAL CONTEXT 5-4
5.2.1 Formal and Traditional Administrative Structures 5-4
5.2.2 Traditional Authorities 5-7
5.3 Macro-Economic History Of Ghana 5-8
5.3.1 The Development Policy Context 5-9
5.4 LAND TENURE SYSTEM AND LAND USE 5-10
5.4.1 Local Land Use, Rights and Entitlements 5-13
5.5 NATIONAL, REGIONAL AND DISTRICT SOCIO-ECONOMIC SETTING 5-13
5.5.1 Demographic Profile 5-15
5.5.2 Migration Patterns 5-19
5.5.3 The Economy 5-19
5.5.4 Education 5-23
5.5.5 Health 5-25
5.5.6 Vulnerable Groups and Human Trafficking 5-30
5.6 NATIONAL, REGIONAL AND DISTRICT UTILITIES, INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES
5-32
5.6.1 Water 5-32
5.6.2 Sanitation 5-32
5.6.3 Waste Disposal 5-33
5.6.4 Fuel Sources 5-33
5.6.5 Transport and Road Infrastructure 5-33
5.6.6 Telecommunications 5-34
5.7 THE LOCAL SOCIO-ECONOMIC AND CULTURAL SETTING 5-34
5.7.1 History 5-35
5.7.2 Local Authority Structures 5-36
5.7.3 Demographic Characteristics 5-39
5.7.4 Settlement Patterns 5-45
5.8 LIVELIHOOD PRACTICES 5-48

IV
5.8.1 Agriculture and Fisheries 5-49
5.8.2 Natural Resource Use 5-71
5.8.3 Petty trading 5-73
5.8.4 Salaried and Self-Employment 5-74
5.8.5 Other Livelihood Strategies 5-75
5.9 COMMUNITY LIFESTYLE, IDENTITY AND RELATIONSHIPS 5-75
5.9.2 Sense of Place 5-76
5.9.3 Inter-Community Relationships 5-77
5.9.4 Cultural Practices and Modernisation 5-81
5.9.5 Poverty and Vulnerability 5-82
5.10 UTILITIES, INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES 5-84
5.10.1 Water 5-85
5.10.2 Electricity 5-85
5.10.3 Roads and Transport 5-85
5.10.4 Waste management 5-86
5.10.5 Sanitation 5-86
5.10.6 Telecommunications 5-86
5.10.7 Emergency Services 5-86
5.10.8 Financial Institutions 5-87
5.10.9 Education 5-87
5.10.10 Health 5-90
5.10.11 Tourism 5-93
6 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT 6-1

6.2 SCOPE OF THE IMPACT ASSESSMENT 6-1
6.2.1 Project and Associated Activities 6-1
6.2.2 Resources and Receptors 6-2
6.2.3 Area of Influence 6-3
6.3 IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY 6-4
6.3.1 Overview of Process 6-4
6.3.2 Characterising Impacts 6-5
6.3.3 Determining Impact Magnitude 6-6
6.3.4 Sensitivity of Resources and Receptors 6-7
6.3.5 Assessment of Significance 6-9
6.3.6 Mitigation Measures 6-12
6.3.7 Determining Residual Impacts 6-13
6.4 UNCERTAINTY 6-13
6.4.1 Implications of Baseline Data Uncertainty 6-14
6.4.2 Implications of Uncertainty in the Response of the Environment 6-15
6.4.3 Implications for the Impact Assessment 6-15
6.5 IMPACTS ON THE BIOPHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT – TERRESTRIAL 6-15
6.5.2 Impacts on Soils 6-16
6.5.3 Impacts on Groundwater 6-19
6.5.4 Impacts on Surface Water 6-23
6.5.5 Impacts on Terrestrial Flora and Habitats: Construction 6-26
6.5.6 Impacts on Terrestrial Flora and Habitats: Operation 6-29
6.5.7 Impacts on Terrestrial Fauna 6-30

V
6.5.8 Impacts on Avian Fauna - Bird Strikes 6-32
6.5.9 Impacts to Freshwater Fish 6-35
6.5.10 Impacts on Air Quality: Construction 6-36
6.5.11 Impacts on Air Quality: Operation 6-40
6.5.12 Impacts on Air Quality: Construction and Operation 6-42
6.5.13 Noise and Vibration Impacts: Construction 6-44
6.5.14 Noise and Vibration Impacts: General Noise during Operations 6-46
6.5.15 Noise and Vibration Impacts: Airstrip Operations 6-49
6.5.16 Impacts on Traffic: Construction 6-54
6.5.17 Impacts on Traffic: Operation 6-57
6.5.18 Impacts on Visual Character 6-60
6.6 IMPACTS ON THE BIOPHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT – MARINE 6-65
6.6.1 Impacts on Marine Water Quality 6-66
6.6.2 Impacts on Marine Sediment Quality and Benthic and Intertidal Ecology 6-69
6.6.3 Impacts on Coastal Processes 6-72
6.6.4 Impacts on Underwater Noise 6-75
6.6.5 Impacts on Marine Mammals 6-77
6.6.6 Impacts on Sea Turtles 6-80
6.6.7 Impacts on Fish 6-82
6.7 IMPACTS ON THE SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT 6-85
6.7.1 Impacts on the National and Regional Economy 6-86
6.7.2 Economic and Physical Displacement 6-99
6.7.3 Impacts on Ecosystem Services 6-109
6.7.4 Impact on Livelihoods 6-115
6.7.5 Impact on Social Infrastructure, Governance and Service Delivery 6-133
6.7.6 Socio-Cultural Impacts 6-145
6.7.7 Impacts On Health 6-166
6.8 UNPLANNED AND ACCIDENTAL EVENTS 6-175
6.8.1 Accidental Spills 6-176
6.8.2 Fires and Explosions 6-182
6.8.3 Waste 6-182
6.8.4 Vehicle Accidents 6-188
6.9 CUMULATIVE IMPACTS 6-191
6.9.1 Defining Cumulative Impacts 6-191
6.9.2 Identifying of Relevant Development(s) 6-192
6.9.3 Cumulative Impact Assessment 6-192
6.9.4 Cumulative Impacts of the Biophysical Environment - Terrestrial 6-193
6.9.5 Cumulative Impacts of the Biophysical Environment – Marine 6-195
6.9.6 Cumulative Impacts on the Socio-economic Environment 6-196
7 MITIGATION AND MANAGEMENT MEASURES 7-1
8 DECOMMISSIONING 8-1

8.2 REGULATIONS AND AUTHORITY 8-1
8.3 INTERNATIONAL CONVENTIONS AND GUIDELINES 8-1
8.4 DECOMMISSIONING PLAN 8-2

VI
8.4.1 Approval Process 8-2
8.5 DECOMMISSIONING METHODS 8-3
8.5.1 General Approach 8-3
8.5.2 Marine Infrastructure 8-4
8.5.3 Wastes 8-5
8.5.4 Contaminated Soil 8-5
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ESMP) 9-1
9.1 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE 9-1

9.1.2 Objectives 9-1
9.1.3 Scope 9-2
9.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 9-3
9.2.2 Ghanaian Regulatory Requirements 9-3
9.2.3 Performance Standards 9-3
9.2.4 AfDB Requirements 9-4
9.2.5 Project Standards 9-4
9.3 PLANNING 9-5
9.3.1 Impact Assessment 9-5
9.3.2 Project Commitments 9-5
9.3.3 Management Plans 9-6
9.3.4 Contractor and Tenant Environmental and Social Management Plan(s) 9-9
9.4 IMPLEMENTATION 9-10
9.4.1 Environmental and Social Management Organisation 9-10
9.4.2 Roles and Responsibilities 9-11
9.4.3 Competence, Training and Awareness 9-13
9.4.4 Communication 9-14
9.4.5 Documentation 9-15
9.4.6 Development of Procedures 9-17
9.4.7 Management of Change 9-17
9.4.8 Stakeholder Engagement 9-18
9.5 CHECKING AND CORRECTIVE ACTION 9-19
9.5.1 Inspection 9-19
9.5.2 Monitoring 9-19
9.5.3 Auditing 9-20
9.5.4 Corrective Action 9-21
9.5.5 Reporting 9-21
9.6 GRIEVANCE MECHANISM 9-22
10 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS 10-1
10.1 THE ESIA PROCESS 10-1

10.2 SUMMARY OF IMPACTS AND MITIGATION 10-1
11 REFERENCES 11-1

VII
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1.1 Overview of ESIA Process, Indicating Stakeholder Consultation Activities 1-5
Figure 1.2 Community Meetings and Introduction to Project 1-18
Figure 2.1 Relationship between Lender Requirements 2-37
Figure 3.1 Layout of the proposed Project 3-3

Figure 3.2 Semi-submersible Rig 3-6
Figure 3.3 Jack-up Rig 3-6
Figure 3.4 Drill Ship 3-7
Figure 3.5 Indicative Representation of Warehousing and Waste Management Activities
(Luba Freeport, Equatorial Guinea) 3-8
Figure 3.6 Drill Cuttings Desorption Plant 3-9
Figure 3.7 Bulk Storage Facility 3-13
Figure 3.8 Proposed Sewage Treatment and Outfall Facilities 3-17
Figure 3.9 Temporary Construction Facilities 3-21
Figure 3.10 Layout of Laydown Areas 3-22
Figure 3.11 Photograph of Similar Temporary Fabrication Yard 3-23
Figure 3.12 Trucks Delivering Rock during a Rock Placement 3-25
Figure 3.13 Cross-section of Breakwater Design 3-25
Figure 3.14 Long-boom Excavator Shaping the Breakwater Slope 3-26
Figure 3.15 Portal Cranes Working on a Breakwater. 3-27
Figure 3.16 Installation of X-Block Armour by Crane 3-28
Figure 3.17 Installation of Armour by Excavator 3-28
Figure 3.18 Map Showing the Proposed Transportation Routes for Breakwater Rock
Material 3-30
Figure 3.19 Existing Road Conditions along the Transport Route (gravel conditions for the
last 20 km to the Project site) 3-31
Figure 3.20 Existing bridge along the Transport Route (may require upgrading) 3-32
Figure 3.21 Proposed Drainage System for the Project site 3-35
Figure 3.22 Planned Construction Schedule (including Dredging Activities during Site
Preparation) 3-36
Figure 3.23 Modelled Aircraft Noise Contours (55, 65 and 75 dB) 3-40
Figure 3.24 Different Layout Options for the Proposed Project facilities 3-49
Figure 4.1 Average Monthly Rainfall for Half Assini and Axim from 2002 to 2011 3
Figure 4.2 Monthly Average Temperature for Axim and Half Assini from 2002 to 2011 4
Figure 4.3 Average Monthly Relative Humidity for Axim and Half Assini from 2002
to 2011 5
Figure 4.4 Average Monthly Wind Speed for Axim from 2002 to 2011. 6
Figure 4.5 Major Current Systems Influencing the Gulf of Guinea 7
Figure 4.6 The Guinea Current 8
Figure 4.7 Primary Productivity (mg C m-2 d-1) Offshore Ghana during August
and April. 10
Figure 4.8 Coastline of Ghana showing the Net Direction of Longshore Drift 11
Figure 4.9 Geological map of south western Ghana 14
Figure 4.10 Location of Soil, Air, Noise and Water Sampling Study Sites in the Vicinity of
the Project area 16

VIII
Figure 4.11 Distribution of pH Levels across the Soil Profile Pits 17
Figure 4.12 Distribution of Nitrogen and Phosphorus Levels across the Soil Profile
Pits 18
Figure 4.13 Locations of Beach Profile, Intertidal and Fisheries Sampling 23
Figure 4.14 Diagram Showing the Two Upper Aquifers along the Coast 25
Figure 4.15 Distribution of Water Temperature and pH for Groundwater Samples
(community hand dug wells) 27
Figure 4.16 Conductivity and Dissolved Solids Concentrations of Groundwater
Samples 28
Figure 4.17 Distribution of Turbidity and Suspended Solids Concentrations across
Groundwater Sample Stations. 29
Figure 4.18 Nutrient Levels across Groundwater Sampling Stations. 30
Figure 4.19 Microbial Load in Groundwater, Surface Water Resources and Sea Water
(Atuabo) 34
Figure 4.20 Estimated Amansuri wetland areas and Amansuri Lake as well as the
assumed drainage basin of the Amansuri Wetland area 35
Figure 4.21 Fresh water Stream/ pond close (south east) to Asemdasuazo 37
Figure 4.22 Freshwater Ponds within the Project Site south east of Asemdasuazo 37
Figure 4.23 Water Temperature and pH Distribution of Surface Streams of
Atuabo Area 38
Figure 4.24 Conductivity and Dissolved Solids Concentrations in Surface Streams 39
Figure 4.25 Distribution of Turbidity and Suspended Solids in Surface Streams at
Atuabo Area 40
Figure 4.26 Nutrient Levels across Surface Water Sampling Stations 41
Figure 4.27 Water Temperature and pH Distribution of Seawater Samples at Low
and High Tides 43
Figure 4.28 Conductivity and Dissolved Solids Concentrations in Seawater Samples
during Low and High Tides 44
Figure 4.29 Distribution of Turbidity and Suspended Solids Concentrations in Seawater
Samples 45
Figure 4.30 Nutrient Levels of Seawater Samples 45
Figure 4.31 Chlorophyll Concentration in Seawater Samples at Atuabo 48
Figure 4.32 Time Series of Particulate Matter Concentration at Atuabo (error bars
indicating standard deviation) 51
Figure 4.33 Time Series of Particulate Matter Concentration at Anokyi (error bars
indicating standard deviation) 51
Figure 4.34 Time Series of Particulate Matter Concentration at Asemdasuazo
(error bars indicating standard deviation) 52
Figure 4.35 Mean Concentrations of Air Pollutants in the Three Communities 53
Figure 4.36 Time Series of Noise Levels in Atuabo
(error bars indicate standard deviation) 55
Figure 4.37 Time Series of Noise Levels in Anokyi
(error bars indicate standard deviation) 55
Figure 4.38 Time Series of Noise Levels in Asemdasuazo (error bars indicate standard
deviation) 56
Figure 4.39 Location of terrestrial flora sampling sites in the vicinity of the
Project area 59
Figure 4.40 Coconut Plantations on sand dunes, in the vicinity of the Project site. 60
Figure 4.41 Grassland vegetation interspersed with thicket clumps 61

IX
Figure 4.42 Freshwater Swamp Forest with Cyrtosperma senegalense (foreground) and
Raphia hookeri (background). 61
Figure 4.43 Percentage Composition of species by Life Form 62
Figure 4.44 Percentage Composition of Species by Ecological Guild 63
Figure 4.45 Percentage Composition of species by Star Rating 63
Figure 4.46 Dendogram for hierarchical clustering (using group average linking)
of Stations within the project area based on Bray-Curtis similarity. 69
Figure 4.47 Location of interviews conducted as part of the turtle study 75
Figure 4.48 The Graphical Relationship of the Species Range and the Indices
of Abundance 77
Figure 5.1 Contextual Map: Region, District and Study Area 5-2
Figure 5.2 Study Area Communities: Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo 5-3
Figure 5.3 Project Spheres of Influence 5-3
Figure 5.4 Ellembelle District Organogram 5-6
Figure 5.5 Ellembelle District Traditional Leadership Organogram 5-8
Figure 5.6 Health Care System in Ghana 5-26
Figure 5.7 Atuabo Elderly Focus Group Meeting 5-40
Figure 5.8 Role of Elderly Women in the Family 5-41
Figure 5.9 Gender Representation at Mixed Interest Focus Groups 5-43
Figure 5.10 Town Layouts in the Study Area 5-45
Figure 5.11 Settlement Patterns and Trading Structures 5-47
Figure 5.12 Housing in the Study Area 5-48
Figure 5.13 Slash and Burn Agricultural Practice 5-52
Figure 5.14 Crops 5-52
Figure 5.15 Transportation of crops from the Fields 5-53
Figure 5.16 Coconut Trade 5-55
Figure 5.17 Trade in un-processed coconuts with buyers from Nigeria 5-56
Figure 5.18 Coconut Processing Steps 5-57
Figure 5.19 Coconut Processing Steps cont 5-58
Figure 5.20 Fish mongering 5-60
Figure 5.21 Atuabo Fishermen Mapping Net Casting and Tie-off Areas 5-61
Figure 5.22 Atuabo Net Casting and Tie-off Areas 5-61
Figure 5.23 Atuabo Fishers 5-62
Figure 5.24 Anokyi Net Casting and Tie-off Areas 5-63
Figure 5.25 Anokyi Casting and Tie-off sites 5-64
Figure 5.26 Fish catches (low season) 5-65
Figure 5.27 Asemdasuazo Community Mapping of Freshwater Fishing Sites 5-66
Figure 5.28 Asemdasuazo Translated Freshwater Fishing Map (areas only indicative) 5-67
Figure 5.29 Asemdasuazo Freshwater Fishing Gear 5-68
Figure 5.30 Crab Traps laid by Children 5-70
Figure 5.31 Use of Natural Resources 5-73
Figure 5.32 Petty Trading 5-73
Figure 5.33 Sense of Place in the Study Area 5-76
Figure 5.34 Inter-Community Footpaths 5-79
Figure 5.35 Inter-Community Relationships 5-80
Figure 5.36 School Infrastructure and Educational Planning 5-88
Figure 5.37 Locally Gathered Herbal Medicine for Measles 5-92
Figure 6.1 Prediction, Evaluation and Mitigation of Impacts 6-5

X
Figure 6.2 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Soils 6-17
Figure 6.3 Impact Diagram - Impacts to Groundwater 6-21
Figure 6.4 Impact Diagram – Impact on Surface Water 6-24
Figure 6.5 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Terrestrial Flora and Habitats (Construction)6-27
Figure 6.6 Impact Diagram - Impacts on Terrestrial Flora and Habitats (Operation) 6-29
Figure 6.7 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Terrestrial Fauna 6-31
Figure 6.8 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Avian Fauna (Bird Strikes) 6-33
Figure 6.9 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Freshwater Fish 6-35
Figure 6.10 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Air Quality (Construction) 6-39
Figure 6.11 Impact Diagram – Impacts to Air Quality (Operation) 6-41
Figure 6.12 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Air Quality (Construction and Operation) 6-43
Figure 6.13 Impact Diagram – Noise and Vibration Impacts (Construction) 6-45
Figure 6.14 Impact Diagram – Noise and Vibration Impacts (Operation) 6-47
Figure 6.15 Impact Diagram – Noise and Vibration Impacts (Airstrip Operations) 6-50
Figure 6.16 Aircraft Noise 6-53
Figure 6.17 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Traffic (Construction) 6-56
Figure 6.18 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Traffic (Operation) 6-58
Figure 6.19 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Visual Character 6-62
Figure 6.20 Computer-Generated Depiction of the Project 63
Figure 6.21 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Marine Water Quality 6-68
Figure 6.22 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Marine Sediment Quality and Benthic and
Intertidal Ecology 6-71
Figure 6.23 Diagram of Effects on Coastal Processes 6-74
Figure 6.24 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Coastal Processes 6-74
Figure 6.25 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Underwater Noise 6-76
Figure 6.26 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Marine Mammals 6-78
Figure 6.27 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Turtles 6-81
Figure 6.28 Cause-Effect Diagram of Impacts on the Fish 6-83
Figure 6.29 Impact Diagram – Increased Government Revenue (Construction) 6-87
Figure 6.30 Impact Diagram – Increased Government Revenue (Operation) 6-89
Figure 6.31 Impact Diagram – Economic Development and Diversification of the Economy
6-93
Figure 6.32 Impact Diagram – Increased Business Experience, Training and Skills 6-97
Figure 6.33 Impact Diagram – Loss of Farming, Agro-processing and Grazing Land 6-101
Figure 6.34 Impact Diagram – Loss of Access to Fishing Areas and Related Resources6-104
Figure 6.35 Anokyi Net Casting and Tie-off Areas 105
Figure 6.36 Asemdasuazo Freshwater Fishing Areas 106
Figure 6.37 Impact Diagram – Decreased Availability of Land for Settlement 6-110
Figure 6.38 Impact Diagram – Access to/ Increased Competition for Flora and Fauna 6-113
Figure 6.39 Impact Diagram – Employment Creation 6-118
Figure 6.40 Impact Diagram – Impact on Prices and Exacerbation of Economic Vulnerability
6-121
Figure 6.41 Inter-community Relationships 6-125
Figure 6.42 Impact Diagram - Change in Livelihoods 6-129
Figure 6.43 Impact Diagram – Increased Potential for Income Stability 6-132
Figure 6.44 Impact Diagram – Transfer of Skilled and Semi-skilled Perconnel from Public
Sector Institutions to the Project 6-135
Figure 6.45 Impact Diagram – Pressure on Basic Infrastructure, Services and Local
Government Capacity 6-139
Figure 6.46 Impact Diagram – Growth in Informal Settlements 6-143

XI
Figure 6.47 Impact Diagram – Change in Sense of Place 6-147
Figure 6.48 Impact Diagram – Changes to Social and Cultural Norms 6-152
Figure 6.49 Impact Diagram - Increase in Social Pathologies 6-158
Figure 6.50 Impact Diagram – Tension and Conflict between Towns (and possibly Districts)
6-161
Figure 6.51 Impact Diagram - Unmet Expectations Resulting in Community Anger and
Resentment towards the Project 6-164
Figure 6.52 Impact Diagram – Increased Prevalence of Sexually Transmitted Infections,
HIV/ AIDS and other Communicable Diseases 6-169
Figure 6.53 Impact Diagram – Nuisance and Irritants related to Air Emissions 6-172
Figure 6.54 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Tourism 6-174
Figure 6.55 Impact Diagram – Unplanned and Accidental Events 6-176
Figure 6.56 Impact Diagram – Traffic Accidents 6-189
Figure 9.1 HSE Organisational Structure (Construction and Operation) 9-11

Figure 9.2 Draft Environmental Incident Report Form 9-16
Figure 9.3 Draft Monthly Environmental Audit Summary Sheet 9-16
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1.1 Primary and Secondary Stakeholder Groups 1-11

Table 1.2 Summary of Scoping consultation meetings (February and March 2012) 1-15
Table 1.3 Summary of Engagements with Affected Communities 1-16
Table 1.4 Summary of Issues 1-19
Table 1.5 The ESIA team 1-22
Table 1.6 ESIA Report Structure 1-23
Table 2.1 List of Relevant National Environmental Legislation 2-17

Table 2.2 Ambient Air Quality Guidelines 2-20
Table 2.3 Sector specific effluent quality guidelines for discharges into natural water
bodies (maximum permissible levels) as stipulated by the EPA 2-20
Table 2.4 Ambient Noise Level Standards in Ghana 2-21
Table 2.5 Summary of Relevant Social Legislation 2-27
Table 2.6 International Conventions Relating to the Project 2-31
Table 2.7 Relevant MARPOL 1973/1978 Provisions 2-35
Table 3.1 Facilities and Dimensions of the Rig Repair Yard 3-5
Table 3.2 Overview of requirements for the facilities to be included in the MOSB 3-8
Table 3.3 Overview of Other Port-related Facilities 3-10
Table 3.4 Product Storage and Delivery Specifications for each Product Type 3-12
Table 3.5 Spatial requirements of the associated waste management facilities 3-14
Table 3.6 Dredging Equipment 3-20
Table 3.7 Expected Vessel Types and Sizes 3-37
Table 3.8 Number of Vehicle Registrations During Operations 3-37
Table 3.9 Air Emissions Inventory for the Project during Construction and Operation3-39
Table 3.10 Employment requirements for the Project 3-42
Table 3.11 Site Evaluation 3-46

XII
Table 4.1 Concentrations of Oil & Grease and Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons in soil
samples 4-18
Table 4.2 Concentration of Heavy Metals in Soils of the Proposed Atuabo Project Area18
Table 4.3 Description of surface and ground water sampling locations 4-25
Table 4.5 Microbial Concentrations of Groundwater and Surface Water Resources
(Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo) 4-31
Table 4.4 Trace/ Heavy Metal Concentrations of Groundwater and Surface Water
Resources 4-32
Table 4.6 Trace/Heavy Metal Concentrations of Seawater of Atuabo Area 4-44
Table 4.7 Microbial Concentrations of Seawater at Atuabo and Anokyi 4-45
Table 4.8 Threatened Fish Species in Ghanaian Waters (IUCN, 2011) 4-70
Table 4.9 Dolphins and Whales of Ghana and IUCN Conservation Status 4-71
Table 4.10 Turtles in the Gulf of Guinea, IUCN Conservation Status 4-71
Table 4.11 Population of Sea Turtle Species that Nest on Beaches of Ghana 4-72
Table 4.12 List of Species Caught and Weights 4-74
Table 5.1 List of Area Councils and Population within Ellembelle District 5-5
Table 5.2 Development Policies Relevant to the Project 5-9
Table 5.3 Ghana Socio-Economic Indicators 5-13
Table 5.4 Population Distribution in Ellembelle District and Communities of the Study
Area 5-15
Table 5.5 Population Growth by Region, 2000 – 2010 5-15
Table 5.6 Urban/ Rural Population Trend 5-16
Table 5.7 National to District Age Cohorts as a Percentage of the Population 5-16
Table 5.8 Population by Region and Sex, 2010 5-17
Table 5.9 Educational Facilities in Ellembelle District 5-23
Table 5.10 Ellembelle School Enrolment by Gender 5-23
Table 5.11 Top ten causes of Outpatient Morbidity in Ellembelle District, 2011 5-27
Table 5.12 HIV Cases by Age Group, Ellembelle District 5-29
Table 5.13 Ellembelle District - 2010 Water and Sanitation Facilities and 2013 projections
5-33
Table 5.14 Population of Affected Communities 5-39
Table.5.15 Seasonal Calendar for Agricultural Activities 5-50
Table 5.16 Prices of Popular Goods 5-74
Table 6.1 Biophysical and Species Value / Sensitivity Criteria 6-8

Table 6.2 Socio-economic and Health Sensitivity Criteria 6-8
Table 6.3 Overall Significance Criteria for Environmental Impacts in the ESIA 6-11
Table 6.4 Impact Summary: Impacts on Soil Resources 6-19
Table 6.5 Impact Summary: Impacts on Groundwater 6-23
Table 6.6 Impact Summary: Impacts on Surface Water 6-26
Table 6.7 Impact Summary: Impacts on Flora and Habitats (Construction) 6-28
Table 6.8 Impact Summary: Impacts on Flora and Habitats (Operation) 6-30
Table 6.9 Impact Summary: Impacts on Terrestrial Fauna (during Construction and
Operation) 6-32
Table 6.10 Impact Summary: Impacts on Avian Fauna – Bird Strikes 6-35
Table 6.11 Impact Summary: Impacts on Freshwater Fish 6-36
Table 6.12 Mean Hourly Levels of Gas Pollutants 6-37
Table 6.13 Impact Summary: Impacts on Air Quality (Construction) 6-40
Table 6.14 Impact Summary: Impacts on Air Quality (Operation) 6-42

XIII
Table 6.15 Impact Summary: Impacts on Air Quality (Construction and Operation) 6-43
Table 6.16 Impact Summary: Impacts on ambient Noise and Vibration During Construction
6-46
Table 6.17 Noise Level Guidelines 6-47
Table 6.18 Impact Summary: Impacts on ambient Noise and Vibration: General Noise
during Operations 6-49
Table 6.19 Impact Summary: Impacts on Ambient Noise and Vibration: Operation of the
Airstrip 6-54
Table 6.20 Impact Summary: Impacts on Traffic (Construction) 6-57
Table 6.21 Impact Summary: Impacts on Traffic (Operation) 6-60
Table 6.22 Impact Summary: Impacts on Visual Character 6-65
Table 6.23 Impact Summary: Impacts on Marine Water Quality 6-69
Table 6.24 Impact Summary: Impacts on Marine Water Quality (Construction and
Operations) 6-72
Table 6.25 Impact Summary: Impacts on Coastal Processes 6-75
Table 6.26 Impact Summary: Impacts on Underwater Noise 6-77
Table 6.27 Impact Summary: Impacts on Marine Mammals 6-79
Table 6.28 Impact Summary: Impacts on Turtles 6-82
Table 6.29 Impact Summary: Impacts on Fish 6-85
Table 6.30 Impact Summary: Increased Government Revenue (Construction) 6-88
Table 6.31 Impact Summary: Increased Government Revenue (Operation) 6-90
Table 6.32 Impact Summary: Economic Development and Diversification of the Economy6-
95
Table 6.33 Impact Summary: Procurement of Local Goods and Services and Associated
Increased Business Experience, Training and Skills 6-98
Table 6.34 Impact Summary: Loss of Farming, Agro-processing and Grazing Land 6-102
Table 6.35 Impact Summary: Loss of Access to Fishing Areas and Related Resources6-108
Table 6.36 Impact Summary: Decreased Availability of Land for Settlement 6-112
Table 6.37 Impact Summary: Reduced Access to/Increased Competition for Flora and Fauna
6-115
Table 6.38 Employment requirements for the Project 6-115
Table 6.39 Impact Summary: Employment Creation 6-120
Table 6.40 Impact Summary: Impact on Prices and Exacerbation of Economic Vulnerability
6-123
Table 6.41 Impact Summary: Changes to Livelihood Strategies 6-131
Table 6.42 Impact Summary: Increased Potential for Income Stability 6-133
Table 6.43 Impact Summary: Transfer of Skilled and Semi-Skilled Personnel from Public
Sector Institutions to the Project 6-136
Table 6.44 Impact Summary: Pressure on Basic Infrastructure, Services and Local
Government Capacity 6-141
Table 6.45 Impact Summary: Growth of Informal Settlements 6-145
Table 6.46 Impact Summary: Changed Sense of Place 6-149
Table 6.47 Impact Summary: Changes to Cultural and Social Norms 6-154
Table 6.48 Impact Summary: Increase in Social Pathologies 6-160
Table 6.49 Impact Summary: Tension and Conflict between Towns (and possibly Districts)
6-163
Table 6.50 Impact Summary: Community Anger and Resentment over Not Sharing in
Project Benefits 6-166
Table 6.51 Impact Summary: Increased Prevalence of STIs, HIV/AIDS and other
Communicable Diseases 6-171

XIV
Table 6.52 Impact Summary: Irritated and Allergic Eye Conditions and Respiratory
Problems 6-173
Table 6.53 Impact Summary: Impact on Tourism 6-175
Table 6.54 Impact Summary: Potential Impacts from Accidental Spills 6-181
Table 6.55 Events and Potential Consequences at Fuel Storage Facility 6-182
Table 6.56 Impact Summary: Potential Impacts from Fire and Explosions 6-184
Table 6.57 Impact Summary: Impacts due to Waste Management Activities 6-188
Table 6.58 Impact Summary: Vehicle Accidents 6-190
Table 7.1 Design Phase: Environmental and Social Management Measures 7-2
Table 7.2 Site Preparation and Construction: Environmental and Social Management
Measures 7-8
Table 7.4 Operational Phase: Environmental and Social Management Measures 7-23
Table 9.1 Summary and Hierarchy of ESMP Document and Specific Management Plans9-7
Table 9.2 Environmental and Social Management Organisation Roles and
Responsibilities 9-12
LIST OF BOXES
Box 1.1 Key Components of an Effective Grievance Mechanism 1-22
Box 2.1 “Better Ghana Agenda” priority interventions 2-12

Box 2.2 Ellembelle Supplementary Programme and Policy Areas 2-16
Box 2.3 Equator Principles 2-37
Box 2.4 Lonrho Environmental Policy 2-43
Box 2.5 Global Compact Principles 2-43
Box 5.1 Key Aspects of the National Economy 5-19

Box 5.2 Summary of Ghana’s Economic Outlook 5-21
Box 5.3 Educational Initiatives in Ghana 5-25
Box 5.4 The PROMISE Programme 5-28
Box 5.5 Definition of Human Trafficking 5-31
Box 5.6 Key Socio-economic and Cultural Characteristics of Study Area 5-35
Box 5.7 Key Aspects of the Livelihood Characteristics of the Study Area 5-49
Box 5.8 Key Aspects of Lifestyle, Identity and Relationships 5-75
Box 5.9 Key Aspects of Infrastructure and Services 5-84
Box 6.1 Impact Characteristics 6-5

Box 6.2 Magnitude Criteria for Ecological Impacts 6-7
Box 6.3 Categories of Significance 6-10
Box 6.4 Mitigation Hierarchy for Planned Activities 6-13
Box 6.5 Mitigation Hierarchy for Unplanned Events 6-13
Box 6.6 Types of Cumulative Impacts Relevant to the Project 6-191
Box 9.1 Lonrho Environmental Policy 9-4

Box 9.2 ESMS Process 9-5
Box 9.3 Type of Commitments 9-6

XV
Box 10.1 List of Major Negative Impacts (Pre-mitigation) 10-2

XVI
1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
1.1 INTRODUCTION
The proposed Project involves the development of an ‘Exclusive Deepwater

Petroleum and Hydrocarbon Logistics Base Port’ (hereafter referred to as ‘the
Project’) on the coast of Ghana’s Western region. The port, located
approximately 200 km west of the country’s capital, Accra, will provide support
services to the offshore oil and gas field developments off the coast of Ghana’s
Western Region.
According to Ghanaian Environmental legislation the proposed Project requires

a full ESIA process and submission of this ESIA Report to the Ghanaian
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for their decision on whether to issue
an environmental permit for the Project.
1.1.1 Project Overview
The development of the Project will comprise the construction of two

breakwaters, quays, an airstrip, ship berths, a naval forward operating base, a
turning circle and a variety of onshore facilities including a clinic, warehousing,
storage facilities for hydrocarbon products, offices and accommodation. Potable
water, power and telecommunications utilities and infrastructure will also be
constructed as part of the development.
1.1.2 Project Justification
The Project has been proposed in order to service the newly developed offshore
oilfields located to the south and southwest of the Project site, and also within
the Gulf of Guinea. Oilfield related support services are presently not provided
in close proximity to the site and oilfield operators have to travel great distances
to other ports, including Abidjan (Cote d’Ivoire), Takoradi, Sekondi, and Tema in
order to receive rig repair and other services.
The development of the project will also provide local employment and other
economic benefits to the local communities as well as the Western Region and
Ghana in general and to assist in ensuring economic benefits from the oil and gas
industry also accrue directly to Ghana.
1.1.3 ESIA Process
The ESIA for the Project was undertaken in accordance with the Ghanaian
Environmental Assessment Regulations (1999), as well as the African
Development Bank’s Environmental and Social Safeguards and the Equator
Principles which reflect the International Finance Corporation’s Performance
Standards. An overview of the ESIA process undertaken is provided below.

XVII
Screening and scoping
The Project was registered with the EPA on 12 February 2012 who confirmed
that a full ESIA was necessary. The Scoping Report, presenting an overview of
the project, consultation process, baseline information and the terms of reference
for the ESIA, was submitted to the EPA on 5 April 2012 and approved on 22 May
2012. This was subsequently disclosed in hardcopy and electronic forms for
stakeholder comment.
Baseline data collection
Available data on the existing environmental and social conditions was gathered
as a basis against which the impacts of the project can be assessed. In addition to
a desktop review, primary data was collected during field studies carried out by
qualified specialists ie dry season biophysical surveys undertaken by ESL
Consulting and a socio-economic field survey undertaken by ERM/ ESL
Consulting in April 2012. As per the EPA approved terms of reference for the
ESIA, the wet season baseline results (available during September 2012) will be
appended to the Final ESIA Report.
Stakeholder engagement
The objective of stakeholder engagement is to ensure that sources of existing

information and expertise are identified, legislative requirements are met and
that stakeholder concerns and expectations are addressed. The stakeholder
engagement process comprised the following activities:
identification of a preliminary list of stakeholders;

creation of background information document (BID) for use in
communicating with stakeholders;
meetings with a number of government departments and stakeholder
groups; and
various focus group meetings with local community members.
During scoping, a total of 25 meetings were held with 28 stakeholder groups.

Stakeholders consulted included national, regional and district authorities,
traditional leadership, Non-Governmental Organisations (NGOs), international
organisations and fisher associations. Stakeholder engagement continued
through the ESIA phase with ad hoc communication with Project stakeholders
through email and telephone and meetings between Lonrho and local
community members who engaged with the process. A summary of the key
issues and further details on the stakeholder consultation process are included in
Chapter 1 and Stakeholder Engagement Plan (SEP) (Annex A).
Impact assessment
Using the baseline information gathered and the project description of the
proposed activities, the impact assessment process followed four steps:
1. Prediction of what will happen as a consequence of project activities.

XVIII
2. Evaluation of the importance and significance of the impact.
3. Development of mitigation measures to manage significant impacts where
practicable.
4. Evaluation of the significance of the residual impact.
The impact assessment considered both predictable and unpredictable impacts

(such as accidents). Those that were assessed as significant were further rated as
being of minor, moderate or major significance. For significant impacts,
mitigation measures were developed to reduce the residual impacts to as low as
reasonably practicable (ALARP) levels. This approach takes into account the
technical and financial feasibility of mitigation measures.
Management plans
The EIA process identified a range of mitigation measures, management actions

and monitoring plans to be implemented during the project to eliminate or
reduce adverse environmental and social impacts and enhance positive impacts.
Delivery of these will be through the Project’s Environmental and Social
Management Plan (ESMP).
Reporting and disclosure
The results of the ESIA process are drawn together into a draft ESIA report and
submitted to Ghana EPA for review. The EPA will disclose the ESIA report to
the public for review and comment and it may also be the subject of a technical
review by the EPA and appointed experts. The EPA will then base its decision to
grant or deny the Environmental Permit for the project on the outcome of this
review process. The draft ESIA report will also be disclosed to the affected
community and key stakeholders as per international lender requirements.
1.2 LEGAL AND POLICY FRAMEWORK
1.2.1 Ghanaian Administrative Framework
The EPA is the key government authority responsible for ensuring compliance
with Ghanaian EIA procedures and is the lead EIA decision-maker. The EPA is
responsible for issuing environmental permits for relevant projects and ensuring
that Project;s control waste discharges, emissions, deposits or other sources of
pollutants.
The Government of Ghana has established a number of development policies

and plans that are relevant to the Project and will be taken into account by the
Project. These include the National Environmental Policy (NEP), National
Wetlands Conservation Strategy the National Energy Policy (SNEP), the Local
Content Policy. The Project will also take the Land Commission Guidelines for
Considering Large-Scale Land Transactions for Agricultural and other Purposes
and the Resettlement Policy Framework (RPF) into account. In terms of local
planning for the Project, Western Region Spatial Development Framework

XIX
(WRSDF) and the Ellembelle District Assembly Medium-Term Development
Plan 2010-2013 are important documents to take into account.
1.2.2 National Laws and Regulations
The Constitution of Ghana (Article 41(k) in Chapter 6) requires that all citizens
(employees and employers) protect and safeguard the natural environment of
the Republic of Ghana and its territorial waters. The Environmental Protection
Agency Act 1994 which establishes the EPA who is responsible for enforcement
of a number of environmental laws. Ghanaian legislation relating to social
aspects is also considered in terms of the described Project, and all the relevant
legislation is listed in Table 1. Further detail on each piece of legislation is
provided in Chapter 2.
Table 1 List of Relevant National Environmental and Social Legislation
Applicable Legislative Instrument Issue

Environmental Protection Agency Act, 1994 (Act 490) Environmental Protection
Environmental Assessment Regulations, 1999 (LI 1652) EIA requirements and process
Environmental Assessment (Amendment) Regulations
Wild Animals Preservation Act, Act 235 1964 Biodiversity
Wildlife Conservation Regulations 1971 (LI 685), Biodiversity
Wild Reserves Regulations 1971 (LI 740) Biodiversity
Wetland Management (RAMSAR sites) Regulation, 1999 Biodiversity
Water Resources Commission Act (Act 522 of 1996) Water Resources
Water and Sewerage Corporation Act (Act 310 of 1965). Water Resources
Oil in Navigable Waters Act (Act 235 of 1964) Pollution Control
Maritime Zones (Delimitation) Law 1986 (PNDCL 159) Seabed Infrastructure
Development
Beaches Obstructions Act, 1987 (CAP. 240) Beaches and coastal areas
Ghana Building Regulations (LI 1630) Development of physical
structures
Ghana National Petroleum Corporation Act (Act 64 of 1983) Petroleum activities
Petroleum (Exploration and Production) Law (Act 84 of 1984) Petroleum activities
National Petroleum Authority Act (Act 691 of 2005) Petroleum activities
Ghana Civil Aviation Authority (aerodrome) regulations 2011 Aerodromes
(LI 2004)
Ghana Maritime Authority Act (Act 360 of 2002) Maritime law
Petroleum Commission Act Petroleum activities
Shipping Act (Act 645 of 2003) Maritime law
Hazardous Goods Act Hazardous goods
Local Government Act (Act 462 of 1993) Local Government structure
Ghana Highways Authority (Act 540 of 1997) Transport activities
Fisheries Act 2002, Act 625 Fisheries and Access to Fishing
Fisheries Regulation, LI 1968 Fisheries and Access to Fishing
Labor Act, 2003, Act 651 Economic Activities
Industrial Relation 1965, Act, 299 Economic Activities
Labor Decree of 1967, NLCD 157 Economic Activities
Local Government Act 462 Social Responsibilities
Lands Commission Act, 1994 (Act 483) Land management
Land Planning and Soil Conservation Act , 1953 (Act 32) Land management
Stool Lands Act, 1994 (Act 481). Land management

XX
1.2.3 International Conventions
Ghana is signatory to a number of international conventions and agreements

relating to industry, development and environmental management. The key
conventions and protocols related to this Project are listed in Box 1.1.
Box 1.1 List of Key Conventions Ratified by Ghana
The Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and

their Disposal (Basel Convention) (2003);
Guinea Current Large Marine Ecosystem Project (GCLME) (1999);
Memorandum of Understanding Concerning Conservation Measures for Marine Turtles of
the Atlantic Coast of Africa (1999);
United Nations (UN) Convention on Biological Diversity (1994);
Convention on the Ban of the Import into Africa and the Control of Transboundary
Movement of Hazardous Wastes within Africa - Bamako Convention (1991);
Convention of Fisheries Cooperation among African States Bordering the Atlantic Ocean
(1991);
African Charter on Human and Peoples' Rights (1989);
United Nation Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), Montego Bay, Jamaica (1983);
Convention Concerning the Protection of the World Cultural and Natural Heritage (World
Heritage Convention), Paris (1975);
International Convention on the Establishment of an International Fund for Compensation
of Oil Pollution Damage (1971);
Convention on Wetlands of International Importance, Especially as Waterfowl Habitats
(1971);
African Convention on Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources (1968); and
Convention on International Civil Aviation (Chicago Convention) (1944).
1.2.4 Project Environmental and Social Standards
There is possibility that Lonrho Ghana Ports Limited may seek financing from
international lending institutions which have specific requirements in terms of
the environmental and social performance of the Project. In anticipation of this,
the ESIA is aligned to comply with the relevant standards and guidelines set out
or adopted by the various lending institutions, namely the Equator Principals
which refer to the IFC Performance Standards on Environmental and Social
Sustainability (2012) and the African Development Bank’s Social and
Environmental Safeguards. The ESIA also references the World Bank Group
Environmental Health and Safety (EHS) General Guidelines (2006),
Guidelines for Ports, Harbours and Terminals (2007) and Airports ((2007)
Lonrho International is also a signatory to the United Nations Global Compact

(Global Compact) and committed to aligning their operations and strategies with
ten universally accepted principles in the areas of human rights, labour,
environment and anti-corruption.
Lonrho Ghana Ports Limited and its contractors or tenants will be bound by
Lonrho’s internal HSE policies, guidelines, rules and requirements which will be
explicitly stated in all contracts, contractor systems, plans and procedures. These

XXI
include the draft Environmental Control Rules and Requirements (ECRR), draft
Environmental / Waste management and Emergency Response Procedures; and
Port Rules and Regulations. In addition, all Project-related infrastructure will be
required to be built in accordance with the relevant international safety,
construction and design standards and a local procurement policy
1.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.3.1 Project Location
The Project site comprises approximately 514 ha (1270 acres) and is located at
Atuabo, in the Ellembelle District of Ghana’s Western Region approximately 100
km west of Takoradi. The proposed site is a green field development situated
between the three towns of Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo. The port will be
within a Free Zone and the service facilities, airstrip, and other onshore
infrastructure, as well as temporary facilities, will be located within the 514 ha,
while the harbour area (including the ship berths, turning circle and approach
channel) will occupy approximately 214 ha (544 acres) of the marine
environment. The total land take for the project (including Greenfield and
marine sites) is therefore 728 ha.
1.3.2 Project Components and Facilities
The main components of the proposed Project presented in Figure include:
Temporary Construction Facilities: During construction, there will be a

number of temporary facilities including structures, workshops, work areas
(eg laydown yards) and material staging areas. These will be located within
the Project footprint.
Port Infrastructure: Including a harbour protected by a rock breakwater to

the west and a rock groyne to the east, a dredged approach channel, a
turning circle, berth pockets and quays.
Service Facilities: Located in the port along the quays providing support
services to the offshore oil and gas industry including: rig repair facility;
waste treatment and management facility; fabrication facility; and supply
facility.
Airstrip and Helipad: Located in the north west section of the Project site to
facilitate aircraft and helicopter transport.
Supporting Infrastructure: Supporting facilities will include power

generation, boreholes, accommodation, offices, a naval base, hydrocarbon
fuels storage area and roads (internal to the port and the public road). Waste
management facilities for the port operations and its users include a
wastewater treatment plant, sewage treatment plant, incinerator and waste
storage and sorting areas.

XXII
Measures and design aspects to mitigate identified impacts are presented in Table
2.
1.3.3 Project Activities
The construction of the Project is expected to commence in January 2013 and

continue through to December 2014.
Site Preparation
The landside site preparation activities will include mobilisation of equipment

and material transport, site clearance including clearing vegetation, grading and
infill (with dredged material) and construction of internal roads. The marine
works during this phase will include capital dredging of an entrance channel,
berths and a turning basin as well as limited land reclamation.
Construction Phase
Construction activities will involve construction of the breakwater and groyne by

placement of rock from a quarry site or mine overburden as well as the onshore
facilities, including buildings, workshops, warehousing, laying of hardstanding
for the airstrip and construction of the roads around the Project site. The
construction phase will require use of cranes, trucks, generators, earthworks
vehicles, piling equipment, concrete mixers and dredging equipment.
Operational Phase
Operational phase activities include providing services to the offshore oil and
gas industry, such as rig repairs and recertification, treatment of drill cuttings
and other ship wastes and will act as a supply base. Activities will include ship
and rig movements into the port as well as fixed and rotating wing flights
landing at the airstip.
Decommissioning
The proposed Project and facilities have been designed for a 50 year lifespan.
There is currently no agreement in place, which defines the plans for the facility
at the end of its lifecycle and it is expected that the facility will continue to
operate. All decommissioning activities will need to be reviewed for
environmental and social permitting and international best practice
requirements.
Consideration of Alternatives
The design of the Project is based on proven engineering techniques and design
methods, safe working conditions and consideration of environmental and social
constraints. Various site options and layout design iterations were considered
during the refinement process. Sites were considered in terms of their socio-
economic, environmental and engineering attributes and the proposed site was
considered most appropriate, most notably because physical settlement was

XXIII
avoided. The iterative design process aimed to ensure optimum re-use of
dredged material, realigning the breakwaters to minimise the effects of coastal
sediment transport, re-designing the roads and site boundary for better access by
communities and locating the airstrip to minimise noise effects. The No Project
alternative is also considered. This alternative implies no additional
employment opportunities, foreign investment or efficiency benefits to oil and
gas operators.
1.3.4 Emissions, Discharges and Wastes
Key sources of air emissions will include dust during construction, air emissions
from combustion engines associated with vessel, vehicle and air traffic as well as
diesel generators and air emissions from the operation of the incinerator. The
majority of the noise emissions during construction phase result from vegetation
clearing, piling and the movement of heavy vehicles. During the operational
phase, noise emissions will result from the operation of machinery, generators,
compressors and other equipment, vessel movements as well as during landing
and take-off of the fixed-wing and rotary aircraft.
The Project will generate a range of liquid effluents and waste water discharges
which will be treated to meet Ghanaian legislative requirements, World Bank
group EHS guidelines as well as International Convention for the Prevention of
Pollution From Ships (MARPOL 73/78 (1)) requirements (whichever is more
stringent) prior to discharge. Various solid wastes will be generated by the
Project including vegetation, scrap metal, paper, packaging materials, wood,
plastic, empty containers, old machinery, excavated road material, food wastes,
glass, empty drums and hazardous waste such as oily rags, spent oil and medical
wastes. This will be disposed of at an approved facility by a contractor.
Waste Management Activities
Wastes generated onsite will be sorted and stored in the assigned areas either for
treatment (effluent, sewage and drill cuttings) or transportation for offsite
disposal (hazardous wastes) via the waste contractor (with appropriate
documentation). General solid domestic and industrial waste will be disposed of
offsite at a suitably approved waste disposal facility. Ships’ slops and oil will be
transferred from berthed ships to the shore and stored within the tank farm,
treated and disposed of in a suitable manner.
1.3.5 Personnel requirements
During construction, approximately a peak maximum of 600 workers will be

employed, primarily in unskilled and semi-skilled positions. Approximately 330
permanent port staff as well as approximately 1200 employed by tenants and
port users will be employed during operation of the port. Additionally up to 500
contract workers will be required to support the large rig repair and other ad hoc
projects.
(1) MARPOL stands for marine pollution and is commonly used to refer to the International Convention for the Prevention of
Pollution From Ships

XXIV
Figure 1 Location and layout of the proposed Project site
1.3.6 Health and Safety (H&S)
Lonrho will require all employees, contractors and tenants to adhere to the
Lonrho H&S Policies for the site as well as Ghanaian H&S legislation, including
access control and security measures. All employees will need to use
appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and follow relevant
procedures for work at height, work in confined spaces and hot work. The entire
Project site will be fenced off to the general public, and access to the port will be
strictly controlled.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIO-ECONOMIC BASELINE
1.4.1 Description of the Existing Environment – Biophysical
For the purposes of this Executive Summary, the description of the baseline
environmental conditions is limited to those aspects that are directly relevant to
the proposed project and anticipated impacts.
Oceanography and Bathymetry
Three main current systems influencing the movement of water masses in the
region, the eastward flowing Guinea Current, a small westward counter current
and the westward flowing south Equatorial current. The coastal currents are
under the influence of tides and local winds but generally transport sediment in
an easterly direction at flow rates of less than 1 m/s. The swell direction is
generally from the south or south west and wave height averages between 0.9
and 1.4 m. Sea Surface Temperatures (SST) typically vary between 27 - 29°C,
although strong seasonal cooling (<25 °C) occurs related to coastal upwelling.
The continental shelf (200 m water depth) off the coast of the Western Region of
Ghana is at its narrowest (20 km wide) off Cape St Paul in the east and at its
widest (90 km) between Takoradi and Cape Coast in the west. The near shore
zone comprises various sediment types including soft sediment, sandy bottom
and hard bottom substrates.
Geology, Soils and Topography
The rocks of the project area comprises of limestone, marl, mudstone with
intercalated sandy beds and may be divided as follows from older to younger in
ascending succession:
The major soils of the area are forest and savannah ochrosols, which are usually
red and brown in colour and moderately well-drained and generally fertile. Soil
samples collected indicate acidic soils but with elevated nitrate levels in the top
soil layers (ie 0-25 cm) as expected for agricultural land use. Although oil and
grease, TPH, mercury and manganese concentrations were low/ below detection
indicating generally uncontaminated soils, nickel, copper and aluminium levels
were relatively high.

XXVI
The coastline alongside the Project site comprises regular sandy beaches with no
headlands or rocky outcrops, while the adjacent inland areas are generally low
lying and relatively flat. The beach within the Project area has a moderate profile
with intermittent sharp scarps, and appeared stable although there was evidence
of limited erosion (likely as a result of wave action) to the west of the Project site.
Hydrology and Hydrogeology
Ground Water
The Project site is situated within an area dominated by Cenozoic and Mesozoic
sediments with three aquifers, namely a shallow, sandy, unconfined aquifer (2-4
m deep) containing fresh meteoric water, and intermediate aquifer (6-120 m)
which is mostly saline and a deep limestone aquifer (120-300 m) where fresh
groundwater occurs under artesian conditions. Recharge to the freshwater
aquifer systems is mainly by direct infiltration of precipitation through fractured
highland fronts and the sandy weathered zone. Saltwater infiltration occurs
from the sea to create an interface at some depth, away from the coastline.
The local communities draw water that they consider to be potable from hand
dug wells which are fed by the upper freshwater aquifer and possibly deeper
boreholes. Turbidity and orthophosphate levels as well as microbial content of
the shallow groundwater sampled was found to be above World Health
Organisation (WHO) drinking water limits indicating contamination of the
shallow aquifer by anthpogenic sources and agricultural activities. pH levels,
conductivity levels, heavy metals and nutrient levels were, however, less than
the prescribed WHO drinking water limits. Water users close to the site were
also identified during wet season sampling and results will be included in the
Final ESIA Report.
Surface and Marine Water

The largest rivers in the west of the country are the Ankobra, Bia, Pra and Tano
rivers, while the largest lagoons in the region are the Domini Lagoon near Half
Assini and the Amansuri coastal Lagoon near Esiama. The Amansuri River is
located approximately 3 km to the north of the Project site and flows eastwards,
this river drains the Amansuri wetland system and seasonally inundated areas
(flooding up to 1 m in the wet season) are situated approximately <1 km north
and to the north west of the Project site. The Amansuri wetland system is a
proposed (but not designated) wetland site under the Convention on Wetlands
of International Importance (known as the Ramsar convention).
The low lying grasslands directly to the north of the community of Atuabo are
reportedly seasonally flooded during the wet season and there is evidence of
both ephemeral and permanent ponds within this wetland area. Only isolated
permanent ponds were present southeast of Asemdasuazo during the dry
season. These ponds host various fish species and are associated with freshwater
fishing activities.

XXVII
Surface water sampling was found to be relatively uncontaminated. Water is
mildly acidic with high levels turbidity, total suspended solids and
orthophosphate levels (stream north of Asemdasuazo). Except for copper and
aluminium, heavy metals and microbial levels were below the WHO guidelines.
Ambient Air Quality
There are no major industrial activities present in the region and most emissions
arise from the smoke of cooking fires, generators used for power supply and
bush clearing for clearing of lands for farming. Winds generally blow from the
south west.
The particulate matter concentrations recorded at Asemdasuazo were low when

compared to the concentrations recorded from Atuabo and Anokyi and the main
source is vehicles using the dusty untarred coastal road although the PM10
concentration was still very much below the Ghana EPA permissible limit. Mean
concentrations of toxic gas pollutants (NOx, SO2, CO, H2S, VOC) were low
within the three communities, and confirm the rural nature and lack of industrial
development close to the Project area. CO concentrations were higher than other
gas pollutants, possibly from vehicle emissions and SO2 (all communities) and
H2S (Atuabo and Anokyi) levels also exceeded WHO limits.
Noise and Vibration
Current noise sources are those related to vehicular movements, children

playing, voices, music/radio and sea waves breaking at the beach. At night
ambient noise includes limited vehicle traffic and noise from the wave action.
The noise levels in Asemdasuazo were recorded as lower than in Atuabo and
Anokyi corresponding with observations of less activity within this community
and distance from the coastal road.
Road Traffic
The roads surrounding, and within the Project site are gravel contain relatively
low volumes of traffic on a daily basis. Bridges on surrounding roads are in a
fair condition, although the bridge across the Amansuri River would need to be
reinforced to carry heavy vehicles traffic for construction. The Tarkwa-Esiama
road (used to transport rock to the Project site) is currently used by light and
heavy vehicles including trucks from mining operations. The Tarkwa to Axim
route has traffic volumes of between 120 and 435 vehicles per hour (Ghana
Highway Authority, 2012) and this is used by a variety of vehicles (light
passenger vehicles to heavy trucks). Many of the secondary roads in the region
are narrow, with narrow intersections. These roads, (such as the route from
Bokazo to Esiama) pass directly through village centres and are used by
passenger vehicles, minibuses and taxis.

XXVIII
Terrestrial Ecology
Flora
Ghana forms part of the Upper Guinea forest ecosystem, a region once
characterised by dense forests which have shrunk in response to human
influence and the growth of cities. The coastal region also includes vegetation
comprising of palm trees and thorny shrubs.
Apart from widespread agricultural activities (coconut palm, corn, raffia palms,
cassava, plantain), the main vegetation types identified on the Project site are
Coastal Strand and coconut plantation, grassland (with seasonal flooding) and
thicket as well as isolated patches of Freshwater Swamp forest (west of
Asedasuazo) . The patches of swamp forest are seasonally inundated wetland
areas with emergent tall trees (and areas of cultivation) but are unconnected to
the permanent swamp forests to the north of the site. Project site is largely
disturbed by agricultural activities (including grazing and wood collection) as
well as the development of towns, roads. According, the floral diversity of the
Project site was considered low as six plant families with five members each
accounted for 44 percent of the species identified on the site. Green star species
(44.2 percent) which are of no conservation concern, together with species ‘Not
Evaluated’ (46.5 percent), mostly common weeds, dominated the floral
composition of the area (90.7 percent).
Fauna
Ghana has large and viable populations of wildlife but mostly found in the
protected areas which offer the only refuge against illegal hunting and habitat
degradation. The closest protected area to the project area is the Ankasa
Conservation Area which is located about 20 km north of the site, with limited
possibilities for migration to the Project area. Apart from avian species, limited
natural terrestrial faunal species occur within the Project site and the grassland
areas do not support any large mammals. Terrestrial fauna include relatively
small animals living in primary or secondary vegetation in the region.
Species that could be expected in region include frogs, toads, snakes and mice as
well as smaller antelope species such as bushbuck. Notable among the mammals
in the Western Region are forest elephant, Red River Hog, and Leopards. The
Primates species include Senegalese bush baby, Bosman’s potto, Mona monkey,
Spot-nosed monkey, and Black-and-white colobus. There are over 230 species of
birds and 600 butterfly species. Reptiles are also fairly represented in Ankasa
(approximately 20 km north of the Project site) and the surrounding areas and
there are reports of crocodiles being caught in freshwater areas around the
Project site. Over 250 bird species are known in the western coastal areas of the
Western Region and about ten of these including the hooded vulture (Necrosyrtes
monachus), green-tailed Bristlebill (Bleda eximia), grey parrot (Psittacus erithacus),
and the yellow-throated olive greenbul (Criniger olivaceous) are listed on the
IUCN Red List of Threatened species

XXIX
1.4.2 Description of the Baseline Environment - Marine and Intertidal Ecology
Sampling within the nearshore indicated that the seawater is relatively

uncontaminated. The pH, total dissolved solids, conductivity, resistivity,
turbidity, suspended solids, nutrients, bacteriology and elemental analysis of the
sea water samples proved to be within the recommended limits.
The marine and inter tidal fauna and flora vary in relation to the seasonal
upwelling of nutrients. The primary production values in the Gulf of Guinea
(4,305 to 5,956 mgC/m2/day) obtained within the near shore areas indicates a
system of relatively high productivity. Offshore zooplankton assemblages are
dominated by copepods, followed by Ostracods (1), Appendicularians (2) and
Chaetognaths (3). WAGP (2004) surveys in the nearshore area (15-65 m depth)
identified 52 zooplankton species with Penilia avirostris, Temora stylifera and Para-
Clausocalanus spp. dominating the zooplankton community.
Green algae blooms of non-toxic marine green algae (Enteromorpha flexuosa) have
been occurring along the coastline of western Ghana and the Ivory Coast since at
least the 1990s. These blooms occur seasonally first appearing between August
and October and remaining in the inshore region for anywhere from a few
months up to a whole year (Kraan, 2009). The seasonal occurrence of the blooms
are expected to be a result of over-fertilisation of soils alongside rivers draining
into the sea, as well as the outflow of untreated sewage into rivers and the sea
Sandy Beach Ecology

Species diversity was found to be relatively low across the sampled locations
(three across the beach between Atuabo and Anokyi). The species richness
(Margalef’s index) ranged from 1.1-3.1 and high densities of Donax pulchellus
recorded at two of the three stations.
Fish Ecology
The fish species found in Ghanaian waters can be divided into four main groups,
namely pelagic species, demersal species and deepwater species.
The most important pelagic fish species found in the coastal and offshore waters
of Ghana, and are expected in the Project area, are round sardinella (Sardinella
aurita), flat sardinella (S. maderensis), European anchovy (Engraulis encrasicolus)
and chub mackerel (Scomber japonicus) and represent approximately 80 percent of
the total catch landed in the country (approximately 200,000 tonnes per annum).
Large pelagic fish stocks off the coast of Ghana include tuna and billfish, which
are highly migratory are important species as both predators and prey and for
commercial fisheries.
The demersal species that are most important commercially (in terms of catch
volumes) are cassava croaker (Pseudotolithus senegalensis), bigeye grunt
(Brachydeuterus auritus), red pandora (Pellagus bellottii), Angola dentex (Dentex
(1) Ostracoda is a class of the Crustacea, sometimes known as the seed shrimp because of their appearance.
(2) Larvaceans (Class Appendicularia) are solitary, free-swimming underwater saclike filter feeders found throughout the
world's oceans.
(3) Chaetognatha is a phylum of predatory marine worms that are a major component of plankton worldwide.

XXX
angolensis), Congo dentex (Dentex congoensis) and West African Goatfish
(Pseudupeneus prayensis).
A number of fish species are commercially important and are subjected to heavy
exploitation, particularly Albacore tuna and swordfish.
Marine Mammals
The ecological significance of Ghana’s coastal waters for dolphins and whales
has only recently become the subject of scientific studies, which partially
explains the lack of population abundance estimates and why their natural
history in the region remains largely unknown. Specimens derived from by-
catches and strandings sho Ghana to have moderately diverse cetacean fauna,
comprising at least 18 species belonging to five families: 14 species of
Delphinidae (dolphins) and one species each of families Ziphiidae (beaked
whales), Physeteridae (sperm whales), Kogiidae (pygmy sperm whales) and
Balaenopteridae (rorquals).
Turtles
The Gulf of Guinea serves as an important migration route, feeding ground and
nesting site for sea turtles. Five species of sea turtles have been identified within
Ghanaian waters, namely the loggerhead (Caretta caretta) (endangered) the olive
ridley (Lepidochelys olivacea) (vulnerable), the hawksbill (Erectmochelys imbricata)
(critically endangered), the green turtle (Chelonia mydas) (endangered), and the
leatherback (Dermochelys coriacea) (critically endangered). The olive ridley is the
most abundant turtle species that occurs in Ghana, and although turtles spend
most of their lives at sea, they come ashore to their natal beaches to lay their
eggs. The beaches of Ghana from Keta to Half-Assini, including the Project site,
are important nesting areas for sea turtle species especially during July to
December.
Local Fisheries
Beach seine fishing is carried out by local community members from the three
communities at various landing sites along the coast and is a key livelihood
activity within the Project area. Eighteen species of fish are reportedly caught
(dry season sampling) within the Project area.
There appears to be an increasing decline in local stocks as reported by local

elders (H&N Mpoano, 2004), which is reflected by reports from local
communities in Ivory Coast and Nigeria. The decline has been attributed to the
improved fishing ability of the shore-based fleets through a change of fishing
gear (such as smaller mesh sizes on nets) as well as the influence of foreign
offshore fishing vessels.
Freshwater fishing also takes place in the surface water ponds within and
surrounding the Project site. During the dry season the fishing activities at these
fresh water features is low, however the fishing yield and effort increase in the
rainy season.

XXXI
Protected Areas
Ghana has 18 wildlife protected areas that include seven national parks, six
resources reserves, four wildlife sanctuaries and five coastal Ramsar sites. The
Western Region holds two of these protected areas namely, the Ankasa and Bia
Conservation Areas. There are also 40 Important Bird Areas (IBAs) designated
by Birdlife International within Ghana (Birdlife International, 2011). One of
which, the Amansuri wetland system, is located to the north and northwest of
the Project site and contains the largest stand of intact swamp-forest in Ghana.
Although not a protected area, conservation efforts exist in the area eg ACID
Project (Amansuri Conservation and Integrated Development Project), which
aim to develop eco-tourism.
1.4.3 Description of the Existing Environment - Socio-Economic
A socio-economic study was undertaken in the three communities of Atuabo,

Anokyi and Asemdasuazo and was based on a review of available secondary
information and primary data collected from key informant interviews, village-
level surveys and focus group discussions.
Macroeconomic Context
As a result of the economic challenges of the 1970s, 80s and 90s, Ghana struggled
with the huge foreign debt and until recently was regarded by the World Bank as
“poor”, with a per capita annual income of less than 1 USD per day. On 1 July
2011 the World Bank reclassified Ghana from a low-income to lower middle-
income status country, in response to the recent discovery and production of oil
in Ghana (World Bank, 2011). Ghana is reportedly positioned as the fastest
growing economy in Sub-Saharan Africa for 2012, with a forecast GDP growth of
13.4 percent (World Bank, 2012).
The Western Region is the highest contributor to the country’s GDP (55 percent)
(Ghana Government Portal, 2012), with a wide variety of mineral deposits and
the largest producer of various agricultural products. The discovery of oil off the
coast of the Western Region has already enhanced its significance within the
National economy. This Project will help to focus development in the Ellembelle
District as an industrial node.
Institutional Context
The Project site is located within the Western Region, the Ellembelle District and
the Atuabo Area Council. Since the Ellembelle District Assembly (EDA) was
inaugurated in February 2008, the strategic development planning for the
District is only in its early phase. Paramount chiefs are the local traditional
heads of the people and custodians of the land, and they carry great local
influence. Traditional councils (comprised of elders) carry out the instructions of
the chief and safeguard traditional customs and knowledge. The Ellembelle
District has one Paramountcy, the Eastern Nzema Traditional Council, which is
headed by Awulae Amehere Kpanyinle II and is situated at Atuabo. All three

XXXII
towns pay allegiance to the Awulae in Atuabo, and Anokyi and Asemdasuazo
sub-chiefs fall under the Awulae.
Land Tenure
Land tenure within Ghana is governed through a flexible combination of
customary and statutory laws. Chiefs remain the custodians of traditional lands
but do not have absolute control as land acquisition registration and revenue
collection is done through the Office of the Administrator of Stool Lands. The
Project Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) confirms that the Stool would
offer the land in return for an equity stake in the Project with the GoG providing
a guarantee on the provision of the land. In Atuabo, all the land originally
belonged to the chief but he “gives” access to the land to different families and in
return receives some form of rent. A number of residents believe that they
“own” the land and compensation for land users with no legal title would be
agreed to through the Livelihood Restoration Plan (LRP) with all affected
individuals and families and settled separately.
Demographics and Settlement Patterns
Ghana currently has a population of 24,223,431 (National Population Census,

2010), while the Western Region comprises nine percent of the total population
(2,325,597 people) and the fifth highest population density of 97 people per km2.
There are approximately 95,306 people in the Ellemebelle District. The
populations of Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo are 1,419 and 874 and 558
respectively (SRC LRP fieldwork) and are considered small towns in the district.
The Atuabo Area Council has the second lowest population (2000 census) and
this is considered to have lowered development and service delivery.
Populations in all three towns are predominantly stable, limited to seasonal
influx at present, and residents say that they know everyone in the community
and would recognise newcomers.
The Ghanaian population is relatively young and the Western Region, the age-
structure of all the districts depicts the same pattern of a high proportion of
persons between the ages of 0 and 14, and a decrease in the populations with an
increase in age (Modern Ghana, 2012). Ellembelle District and the three
communities follow the same pattern, resulting in a relatively high dependency
ratio as a result of the high proportion of youth. All three towns reported having
more women than men in their communities and focus groups emphasised the
fact that women live longer than their male counterparts. This reflects the
regional and district patterns.
Migration
There is a significant amount of internal migration within the Western Region
with people migrating to areas with employment opportunities such as Ahanta
West, Takoradi (Modern Ghana, 2012) and Cote d’Ivoire. The Ellembelle District
experiences a surge of in-/out-migration related to seasonal fishing activities and
mining and a similar migration trend exists across the Study Area. The
population figures swell during peak fishing season (July-October) when
migrants from the north of Ghana and even from Cote d’Ivoire, mainly men,

XXXIII
come to work in the area. There are also two refugee camps in the Western
Region although the numbers of refugees in the District has now stabilised at
approximately 4000 people.
Settlement Patterns
All three towns are laid out in a linear pattern, alongside the main road. All
three towns have at least one school along the main road, and shops and much of
the petty trading takes place along the main road. The space behind the houses
usually extends to the beach or bushes. The majority of houses are built of local
materials such as clay, cane/ bamboo/ raffia, or sandcrete blocks (for walls).
Besides very small areas for growing subsistence crops within a household’s
property, all agricultural activities happen outside of the three communities.
Local Historical Context
All three communities have long histories of settlement in the area dating back
over 600 years. According to the Awulae in Atuabo, the history of the Study Area
dates back to the 13th Century when ancestors of the current inhabitants migrated
from the northern part of Ghana through the Ashanti area, then through the
Aowin and the Wassa areas before settling along the coast. Settlement in the
Anokyi area reportedly began with the arrival of a woman and her family about
600 years ago, and after some disputes were granted land title to continue their
salt mining activities.
Ethnicity, Language and Religion
Akan is the dominant ethnic group in the Region and represents 89 percent of
Ellembelle’s population with Twi and Fante being the dominant languages. In the
Study Area Nzema is the dominant group and the major language spoken is
Nzema; other dialects like Evalue and Gwira, Fante (particularly in Atuabo and
Anokyi) and Twi are also widely spoken. The ability to speak Nzema is also
emphasised as important for cultural continuity and older community members
felt the language could be at risk if there is an influx of outsiders.
Nationally, Christianity is the main religion practiced by the majority of the

population, and this trend is reflected in the three communities by the high
number of churches in the three communities. There are also small numbers of
Muslims in both Atuabo and Anokyi, but not in Asemdasuazo. Although
people reported that many traditional practices (and followers), are looked down
on as “uncivilised”, even those strongly following monotheistic religions
reportedly harbour some traditional beliefs.
Education
Basic education is comprised of primary school (six years) and Junior High
School (JHS) (three years), while secondary level education is comprised of
Senior High School (SHS) (three years) and tertiary education (usually four
years). Many children, particularly those from the rural areas, are unable to
access SHS due to distance and affordability.

XXXIV
Each town in the Study Area has a public primary school (and Atuabo a private
lower primary school), including a kindergarten, and a Junior High School (JHS).
There are no SHS in the communities and JHS graduates are selected through a
national exam into SHS elsewhere. The Atuabo community has an Information
Communication Technology (ICT) centre, which is important as this subject is
required for access to SHS. Ellembelle District 2009/2010 overall school
enrolment was 10 - 15.7 percent and this is likely representative of the
communities in the Study Area. Dropout rates at both the primary and JHS
sections are low, with reasons including teenage pregnancy, economic
constraints, emigration as well as perceptions that it is easy for people to access
employment without an education (due to abundance of natural resources).
The primary school buildings in the communities (notably Atuabo and Anokyi)
are in a poor condition (leaks, no electricity, potable water or office space), while
the JHS structure is in a better condition, with water available via a community
well and borehole. Teachers emphasised low salaries and difficult teaching
environments as hurdles to teacher satisfaction and reported inadequate
textbooks, teaching materials, and a lack of sports facilities or equipment.
Literacy and Skills Development

The current rate of literacy is approximately 57.9 percent (nationally, Ghana
National Census 2000), 58.2 percent (Western Region) with females (47.9 percent)
recording a lower proportion compared to males (68.0 percent). No literacy
statistics for the Study Area are currently available but District statistics would
suggest that literacy amongst adults (over 35) in rural areas would be
approximately 49 percent (with males significantly higher than females),
highlighting very high attrition rates between primary and JHS levels. All focus
groups raised the need for skills development and training, particularly aimed at
younger men and women, as pre-requisites for local communities to benefit from
development in the area.
Health
Common Illnesses and Associated Issues

The most common diseases treated in the closest hospital to the Project site are
malaria, respiratory tract infections, skin infections (eg measles), diarrhoea and
acute ear infections and reproductive health care assistance is available.
Typhoid, cholera, dysentery and gastritis are also known and there are particular
health risks to women in the Western Region and Study area with respect to
pregnancy and associated complications as a result of distances to health
facilities and poor transport.
In 2010, Ghana’s HIV/AIDS infection rate was reported as the lowest rate in
West Africa (1.7 percent) but rates are reportedly increasing in the Region and
recorded as 14.8 percent in the Ellembelle District. Infection rates are higher in
women, which is attributed to multiple sexual partners and trading sex for
livelihoods as well as an influx of infected foreigners. There are no reported cases
of HIV in the local communities, although the stigma of the virus discourages
reporting.

XXXV
Health Care Facilities
Approximately 90 percent of the population in the Region is within a five km
radius of a medical facility but with a doctor patient ratio of 1:18,500 (2000).
There are no health facilities within any of the three communities, and the closest
is Ekabaku Health Centre (4 km west of Atuabo) with two clinical nurses, two
community health nurses, three casual employees and a volunteer but no doctor.
This facility offers out-patient care and emergency first aid but facilities are
dilapidated, awaiting repair and it can only cope with current levels of demand.
Emergency cases are referred to the Eikwe Hospital about 8 km away (although
there is no ambulance). Some local fishermen reported being National Health
Insurance Scheme (NHIS) members, (and therefore receive free services and
medication).
Traditional Medicine
Traditional healers generally use herbs (leaves, roots, branches, tree bark) to treat
illnesses, which are often collected locally. There are two healers and a
traditional priestess in Atuabo and a healer in Asemdasuazo. Access to these
natural remedies is an important part of people’s medical regimes, especially in
the light of poor access to formal health care facilities. Many residents also
reported collecting their own herbs and plants for basic medical treatments.
Utilities, Infrastructure and Services
Infrastructure and service delivery is extremely poor. Atuabo seems the best
serviced and Asemdasuazo, which is less accessible, has the least infrastructure
and no services.
Water. There is no piped water to the three communities. Each of the three
towns has a number of shallow hand-dug wells (3-5 m deep), a number of
private covered wells and at least one operational hand-pump operated
public borehole (and generally there is at least one other that is not working).
In Atuabo four out of five boreholes are not operational. Communities
expressed concerns about the adequate supply of water for an increased
population.
Electricity and Fuel Sources. Although all three towns are on the national
electricity grid and most households are reportedly connected, wood and
charcoal are still extensively used for cooking. Electricity and kerosene
lamps provide 99 percent of lighting source in the Western Region. Liquid
petroleum gas (LPG) and coconut husks are also used for heating.
Sanitation. Approximately 70 percent of Ellembelle households do not have

toilets and where facilities do exist, the most common types are Kumasi
Ventilated-Improved Pit (KVIP), pit latrine or bucket/pan systems. Where
no facilities exist, people make use of the beaches, outlying bushes and
gutters. Apart from private facilities, Anokyi has one public KVIP, Atuabo
two KVIPs while Asemdasuazo has no KVIPs.

XXXVI
Waste Disposal. The most common way of disposing of household waste is
to dump it at specified dumping sites or in the absence of such sites, ad hoc
disposal on open land. Zoomlion and ZOIL (private companies) operate as a
waste disposal and beach-clearing agent in parts of Ellembelle District
(including the Study area). Atuabo and Anokyi each have specifically
allocated, informal and unlined waste sites. Community members are
expected to take their waste to the sites for disposal. Asemdasuazo has no
allocated waste dump and people dispose of their waste by burning.
Transport and Road Infrastructure. The road network in the Western Region
is limited and the conditions of the roads can be very poor. Ellembelle
District road network consists of 154 km of trunk roads (64 km are metalled)
and the rest of the trunk roads are gravel or earth-surfaced. While all roads
in the Study Area are untarred, the main east to west road is graded and the
streets within the towns are sand roads. The road linking Asemdasuazo to
the main coastal road is sand/ dirt and in poor condition. During the rainy
season the roads are reported to weather badly with erosion and potholes.
There is no public transport servicing the Study Area and only limited and
expensive small taxis.
Ports/ Harbours and Airports. The closest port to the Project Area is at
Takoradi and handles approximately 37 percent of the total national seaborne
traffic. Other ship traffic is associated with ports such as Abidjan (Côte
d’Ivoire) and Lagos (Nigeria). There are fishing harbours located at Sekondi
and Axim. The Takoradi Airport is a military airbase that allows civilian
flights and is the only one in the Region.
Telecommunications. In the Western Region there are 0.3 telephones per 100
persons, which is below the national average of 0.7 and no landlines
servicing the Study area. Most adults reported owning a cellular phone and
the Region has the second highest locality coverage by MTN.
Emergency Services. There are no emergency services in any of the Study

Area communities, including no ambulances. The police station in Anokyi
has not been rebuilt after a fire and the police station building in Atuabo is
not currently in operation. Focus group participants commented on the low
levels of crime and stated that the elders and the chiefs were involved in
solving conflicts.
Financial Institutions. There are no banking institutions in or near to the

Study Area although some local coconut oil producers have loan
arrangements with rural banks. There is reportedly insufficient economic
activity to motivate local banks to open in the area.
Livelihood Practices
Farming, fishing and fish mongering and agro-processing are the key livelihood
activities in the Study area, and most communities report consuming small

XXXVII
amounts for subsistence, while selling the larger proportion for cash. There are
very few formal employment positions.
Farming
Almost every household in the towns participates in small-scale and subsistence
agricultural activities, with men clearing and preparing fields and women
involved in the sowing of seeds and in harvesting. Some individuals (generally
the elderly or unwell) employ labourers. Cultivation is done manually and the
size of plots depends on the strength of the individual or family. There are no
irrigation systems. Farming is done using slash and burn agriculture with two
seasons of planting (March-April and September-October).
The primary agricultural products are cassava, groundnuts (the two most
common), corn, tomatoes, banana and plantain. Asemdasuazo is seen to have
the most fertile soil and higher productivity. Some farmers leave plots fallow
and alternate planting, but overall reduced fertility rates are reported due to
farming methods and pressure for land. All three towns reported selling
significant proportions of their crops (particularly cassava) although the lack of
storage facilities means that prices remain low during times of surplus.
Agro-processing
Agro-processing is one of the dominant livelihood activities in the Study Area.
The major cash crops used are coconuts and oil palm and raffia palms for oil and
gin (in Asemdasuazo) respectively. There are a small number of processing mills
in each town and the oil produced is sold within the Study Area but is also
exported to Takoradi and even Accra. There is limited informal employment
associated with these activities, notably gin production.
Fishing
Probably the largest income-generating livelihood activity in Atuabo and Anokyi
is seasonal fishing (and fish mongering). Marine fishing activities are divided
along gender lines with men catching the fish and women processing and
selling. There are two fishing seasons, towards the end of June and peaking
during August and September and towards the end of November, peaking
between late January and March. April to May is a rest period for mending nets,
boat repair and fishermen engage in onshore artisanal work to supplement their
income. Children catch crabs along the beach, near the river and streams and
these are eaten at home or sold.
Marine fishers employ traditional artisanal (small scale) methods, predominantly

beach seining. Fishing boats are not mechanised and require companies of up to
nine people per boat (and up to 70 as land crew) for paddling and net casting.
The company (including land crew) divides income from a catch with the
company owner taking approximately 50 percent. Five marine fishing
companies operate from Atuabo, while four operate from Anokyi and one from
Asemdasuazo. The shore around Anokyi is rocky and fishers therefore use the
major portion of the beach between Anokyi and Atuabo.

XXXVIII
Freshwater fishers (men and women) fish in the Amansuri River, streams
leading to the river, flood plains and perennial ponds in the area. There are two
freshwater fishing seasons, peak season in May-July and minor season
November-February. Freshwater fishing gear includes basket traps, chicken
wire traps, gill nets, scoop nets and hook and line. Various species are caught
and Asemdasuazo fishermen reported rare additional amphibious catches
including crocodiles, alligators and tortoises.
Fishermen reported locally declining catches over the past number of years,
attributed to increased human populations and consumption, increase in fishing
activities, increase in fishing canoes working the area and illegal fishing. Many
community members in the Study Area believe that the offshore oil production
activities have contributed to the decline in fisheries. Fishermen reportedly
consider mechanisation (outboard motors) as a possible solution, which would
allow them to fish further from shore where they believe the fish catch will be
higher. Crews (and therefore employment) for these craft would be significantly
smaller.
Fish mongering
Fish mongering is also an important livelihood activity for women who process
both marine and freshwater fish by salting and drying or smoked. The women
buy fish locally and transport for sale either 30 km away at Aiyinaseor. Large
catches are also sold to hotels in Axim. Income from fish mongering is reduced
due to lack of cold storage such that fish prices are lowered by the high levels of
supply during fishing seasons.
Livestock
Livestock rearing is carried out on a smaller scale than the other livelihood
activities and domestic animals are raised predominantly for ceremonial
occasions rather than for home consumption or market sale. Most households
keep a few chickens, goats, sheep and pigs and some community members’ cattle
pool their livestock (reportedly approximately 400 heads of cattle) and a Fulani
herdsman oversees all of them. The grassland area between Atuabo and
Asemdasuazo is used for grazing in the dry season, while herdsmen travel
outside of the Study area for grazing during the wet season.
Trade, Employment and Other Livelihood Strategies

Small scale or petty trading is undertaken, mainly on the side of the main roads,
and is focussed on fishing and agriculture products but also includes some
manufactured goods, household goods, medicines, clothing and food and
beverages. A small number of local residents are formally employed in the
Study Area in jobs including District assemblyman, teachers, waste management
activities, fishing crews, farm labourers as well as hairdressers, carpenters,
drivers and electricians.
Other livelihood strategies include remittances from migrant workers/ family

members, rent from land or property, and pensions as well as marriage or
informal sexual relationships.

XXXIX
Other Natural Resource Use
Silica Sand Mining (clay). Licenced silica sand mining is undertaken in an

area a few hundred meters north-east of Atuabo (within the Project site) and
to the north of Anokyi (outside of the Project site) by women and men within
the communities.
Wood and Charcoal. Collecting wood is a supplementary livelihood activity

undertaken daily (except Sunday) by women inside and outside of the
Project area. There is only limited charcoal making in the Study Area.
Ethnobotanical activities. Traditional healers grow or collect species outside

the Project site and community members also gather local flora for personal
medicinal uses. Raffia palm fronds are used for roofing materials and walls;
and sand is used in brick making. There is no reported hunting.
Community Lifestyle, Identity and Relationships
Sense of Place
The topography is generally flat and consistent with no large structures and
double-storey buildings being extremely unusual. Extended tracts of palm tree
plantations and bush screen areas from one another and dominant sounds are
the sea, the winds, voices and birds. Residents reportedly valued the quiet rural
nature of the area and the sense of community identity and the general absence
of crime is an appealing asset. Overuse/ abuse of alcohol appears to be rare and
there are reportedly no hard drugs in the Study area. Asemdasuazo in particular
is characterised by a cultural “wholesomeness” that includes no smoking and no
reported teenage pregnancies.
Socio-cultural Cohesion
The three towns describe one another as family as there is significant
intermarriage between all three towns. There are also strong trade links of
agricultural produce and fish being traded between the communities. The fairly
remote location of the communities has resulted in maintenance of traditional
beliefs and practices, which contribute to the sense of community identity. The
community demonstrated respect for the chiefs and elders as a core social
behaviour and respect for elders. Cultural practices such as puberty rites for
girls are important activities that are seen to help maintain social order and
family structures. There is already reported tension between Ellembelle District
and Jomoro related to the re-siting of the Gas Plant from the Jomoro District to
adjacent to the Project site.
Poverty and Vulnerability
The communities’ perceptions that they have enough food for their own
consumption points to a general sense of food security in the Study Area.
General poverty levels are, however, considered to be high and the involvement
of all family members in labour activities, children included, is common.

XL
Vulnerable groups in the Study area include the elderly, children (especially
orphans or those cared for grandparents), women (particularly female-headed
households), share-croppers, fishermen and disabled people. The declining
fisheries sector, high illiteracy levels and a lack of employment opportunities
contribute to vulnerability.
Human trafficking is recognised as a problem within the Western Region,

especially for domestic work, with the majority of trafficked children originating
from the poorer areas of Ghana. Ghana is regarded as a key origin, transit and
destination country for internationally trafficked women and children. Drug
trafficking is also on the increase in West Africa with growing government and
international concerns (VibeGhana.com, 2012).
Tourism
Tourism in Ghana has become a major socio-economic activity and one of the
most important and fastest growing sectors (Jubilee EIA, 2009). Tourism
potential in the Western Region is related to its pristine tropical beaches as well
as forests and game reserves featuring tropical rainforests, inland lakes and
rivers. Fort Appolonia (built by the British in 1770) is the only fort in close
proximity to the Study Area in the town of Beyin (approximately 1 km away
from Atuabo). The other recognised tourist attraction in the area is the Nzulezu
stilted village on Lake Amansuri about 3.5 km inland of Atuabo.
1.5 IMPACT ASSESSMENT
1.5.1 Introduction
The Project activities will give rise to a range of impacts of varying magnitude
and significance. The impacts for the short-term construction phases and the
long-term operational phase were considered separately, where appropriate.
The assessment methodology used to assess the significance of impacts took into
account impact magnitude and sensitivity of receptors and/or resources
affected. Impacts were assessed pre-mitigation and a significance rating
determined.
Mitigation measures to avoid, reduce, remediate or compensate for potential

negative impacts and actions to be taken to enhance benefits were identified.
Residual impacts were then assessed taking into account any mitigation and
enhancement measures that Lonrho Ports Ghana has agreed to implement. All
impacts identified and assessed within the ESIA as well as the cumulative
impacts and proposed mitigation measures are outlined in Chapter 6. Table 2
provides a summary of all biophysical and socio-economic impacts identified in
the impact assessment as well as the proposed mitigation measures.
1.5.2 Cumulative Impacts
Cumulative impacts are considered to be Project impacts that act with impacts
from other projects such that the sum of the impacts is greater than the parts or

XLI
the sum of the impacts reaches a threshold level such that the impact becomes
significant.
The other project considered in the cumulative assessment is the construction

and operation of the gas processing plant on a site directly adjacent to the north
and east of the Project site. Cumulative noise, vibration and light impacts are
considered to be of moderate significance as the security lighting from both
Projects is expected to increase the light levels in the area significantly. Ambient
noise and vibration levels are also expected to increase due to the noise
associated with the Port construction and operation as well as the compressor
systems associated with the gas plant. The impacts on livelihoods and ecosystem
services are also considered to be of moderate significance as the construction of
both Projects in the same region is expected result in accumulated land take and
disturbance of livelihoods. Influx of people into the area would also be
accelerated, increasing the potential for the establishment of informal settlements
and overcrowding.

XLII
Table 2 Summary of Impacts, Mitigation and Residual Significance
Impact Impact Phase Pre-mitigation Summary of Mitigation and Enhancement Measures Residual
Description Significance Significance
Impacts on the Biophysical Environment – Terrestrial
Soils Disturbance Construction MODERATE Implement site drainage/ storm water management plan, including monitoring of over land run-off MINOR
and loss of Operation NEGATIVE and sedimentation. NEGATIVE
soil reserves Minimise vegetation clearance.
Remove and stockpile topsoil for later use (eg less than 4m high and side slope of < 3:1).
Restrict preparation and clearing activities and vehicles to demarcated work areas.
Increased Construction MINOR Implement site drainage plan, including monitoring of over land run-off and sedimentation. MINOR
potential for Operation NEGATIVE Rehabilitate and revegetate areas (not to be developed) using locally sourced indigenous plants. NEGATIVE
soil erosion
Groundwater Drawdown Construction MINOR Considers technologies and controls to minimise water use. MINOR
Operation NEGATIVE Final design of Project water supply to be informed by comprehensive groundwater study. NEGATIVE
Supplement community potable water supply, if necessary.
Deterioratio Construction MODERATE Final design of Project water supply to be informed by comprehensive groundwater study. MODERATE
n of water Operation NEGATIVE Develop and implement a groundwater monitoring programme, with corrective actions. NEGATIVE
quality
Surface Water Removal of Construction MINOR Implement site drainage/ storm water management plan, including monitoring of over land run-off MINOR
surface Operation NEGATIVE and sedimentation. NEGATIVE
water bodies Use silt traps.
Change in Construction MODERATE Capture and treat contaminated storm water to meet applicable regulatory standards. MINOR
drainage Operation NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
patterns
Increased Construction MINOR NEGLIGIBLE
siltation Operation NEGATIVE
Terrestrial Loss and Construction MINOR Minimise vegetation clearance. MINOR
Flora and disturbance NEGATIVE Restrict construction activities to demarcated work areas. NEGATIVE
Habitats of existing Rehabilitate and revegetate areas (not to be developed) using locally sourced indigenous plants.
flora and Plan clearing to habitat corridors if possible.
habitats
XLIII
Change in Operation MINOR MINOR
habitat and NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
floral
composition
Terrestrial Disturbance Construction MODERATE Staff induction to include environmental awareness (including impacts to fauna). MINOR
Fauna and Operation NEGATIVE Develop an anti-poaching policy and communicate this to staff. NEGATIVE
mortality Train all drivers on driving techniques to minimise environmental impacts.
Establish and enforce appropriate speed limits on site.
Fit vehicles and machinery with appropriate noise reducing devices, where feasible and appropriate.
Bird Strikes Construction MODERATE Develop Aircraft Control Plan to coordinate flight paths and schedules with input from an MINOR
Operation NEGATIVE appropriately qualified ornithologist/ecologist. NEGATIVE
Maintain clearance of vegetation along the length of the airstrip and helipad; keep grass short.
Good housekeeping within waste storage areas.
Implement site drainage/ storm water management plan to avoid ponding around the airstrip and
helipad.
Discourage perching and nesting of birds on buildings.
Implement a bird strike monitoring programme.
Freshwater Disturbance Construction MODERATE Implement mitigation measures for surface water management. MINOR
fish of Operation NEGATIVE Implement monitoring programme in freshwater bodies identified offsite (north of Asemdasuazo), NEGATIVE
freshwater with corrective action.
fish
Air Quality Degradation Construction MINOR Generators and incinerator design to not exceed air quality standards and compliant with World MINOR
of air NEGATIVE Bank Ground EHS Guidelines. NEGATIVE
quality: air Operate equipment in accordance with design specifications and ensure regular maintenance.
pollutants Use energy efficiency equipment, where possible.
Monitor GHG emissions and implement a programme for identifying and implementing GHG
Degradation Construction MINOR reduction actions. MINOR
of air NEGATIVE Undertake dust monitoring, with corrective actions. NEGATIVE
quality: dust Implement operational rules to minimise vehicle/ vessel emissions (eg restricting engine idling,
restrictions on badly-maintained equipment).
Degradation Operation MINOR MINOR
of air quality NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
XLIV
Contributio Construction SIGNIFICANT SIGNIFICANT
n to Operation NEGATIVE
NEGATIVE
Greenhouse
gas
emissions
Noise and Increased Construction MINOR Plan construction activities to limit noisy activities close to sensitive receptors. MINOR
Vibration Noise and NEGATIVE Use lowest noise producing equipment and methods to minimise noise, including alternatives to NEGATIVE
Vibration diesel/petrol engines, where feasible.
Implement a noise monitoring programme in liaison with local communities, with corrective actions.
Maintain and operate equipment and engines in accordance with of noise rating specifications.
Ensure balling of noisy equipment and operate equipment with original noise baffling systems.
Limit construction activities (including vehicle movements) to local daylight hours, schedule
activities to avoid important social activities (eg festivals) and no noisy activities at night.
Communicate work schedules to interested and affected parties.
Implement grievance mechanism, with corrective action.
Increased Operation MODERATE Minimise noisy activities near communities (ie near the Project boundaries). MINOR
noise and NEGATIVE Limit noisy activities (including vehicle movements and aircraft flights) to local daylight hours,
vibration schedule activities to avoid important social activities (eg festivals) and no noisy activities at night.
(port Enforce guidelines for contractors/ port users specified noise emission limits and activities
activities) specifications.
Airstrip Operation MODERATE Implement a noise monitoring programme in liaison with local communities, with corrective actions. MODERATE
Operation NEGATIVE Implement grievance mechanism, with corrective action. NEGATIVE
Develop Aircraft Control Plan to coordinate flight paths to avoid local communities and ground
operations to minimise noise (eg minimise idling).
Traffic Increased Construction MAJOR Undertake a Traffic Impact Assessment (TIA) for the construction phase traffic to identify measures MODERATE
Traffic NEGATIVE to minimise risks to local people and fauna. NEGATIVE
Volumes, Implement Traffic Management Plan (TMP), including requirements for road maintenance (in
Strain on cooperation with local and regional government).
Road Train all drivers on driving techniques to minimise environmental impacts, obey local road rules
Network and compliance with TMP.
and Sensitisation programme with roadside communities.
potential Implement grievance mechanism, with corrective action.
deterioratio
n of Road
Infrastructur
e
XLV
Increased Operation MINOR Update the TMP to consider specific operations requirements. MINOR
Traffic NEGATIVE Train all drivers on driving techniques to minimise environmental impacts, obey local road rules NEGATIVE
Volumes and compliance with TMP.
and Implement grievance mechanism, with corrective action.
Potential Ensure road quality monitoring.
Deterioratio
n of Road
Infrastructur
e
Improved Operation MINOR Liaise with local government to ensure maintenance and timely repair of roads used by Project MINOR
Road POSITIVE vehicles. POSITIVE
Conditions
Visual Impacts on Construction MAJOR Limit construction activities (including vehicle movements and aircraft flights) to local daylight MODERATE
Character visual Operation NEGATIVE hours. NEGATIVE
character Minimise security lighting and design lighting to minimise light spill to adjacent areas.
Minimise vegetation clearance.
Plan vegetation clearing to retain sections of existing vegetation to act as screening.
Rehabilitate and revegetate areas (not to be developed) using locally sourced indigenous
planReduce light spill by using direction covers on lights.
Impacts on the Biophysical Environment – Marine

Marine water Increased Construction MODERATE See mitigation for Impacts on Soils and Surface Water MODERATE
Quality turbidity Operation NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Complete the bulk of breakwater and groyne construction before commencing dredging activities, if
possible.
Minimise dredging as far as possible.
Ensure high performance of dredge spoil dewatering system.
Plan dredging to minimise turbidity plume, especially near marine habitats.
Dredging vessels will comply with the MARPOL 73/78 Convention.
XLVI
Marine Impacts on Construction MODERATE See mitigation for Impacts on Marine Water Quality MODERATE
Sediment Marine Operation NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Quality and Sediment Liaise with EPA and local fishers to identify disposal sites and obtain necessary permits.
Benthic and Quality and Survey disposal sites (grab sampling) to avoid ecologically sensitive areas and spawning areas.
Intertidal Benthic and Carry out dredging activities (capital and maintenance) in line with the conditions of the dredge
Ecology Intertidal disposal permit.
Ecology Identify dredging dump sites to original substrate as far possible.
Ballast water not permitted to be released into Port waters, but to be pumped ashore for treatment.
Coastal Impacts on Construction MAJOR Monitor coastal erosion, with corrective action ie implementing beach nourishment (sand pumping/ MODERATE
Processes coastal Operation NEGATIVE physical transport and redistribution). NEGATIVE
processes
Underwater Increased Construction MINOR Begin noisy activities (including piling) slowly, gradually increasing noise levels. NEGLIGIBLE
noise underwater Operation NEGATIVE Choose low noise equipment as far as possible and limit duration of noisy activities.
noise Vessels to be powered down and switched off while berthed or moored, where possible.
Marine Impacts on Construction MINOR See mitigation for Impacts on Marine Water Quality and Underwater Noise NEGLIGIBLE
Mammals marine Operation NEGATIVE
mammals Implement marine mammals observation procedure (including sightings, any injured animals and
reporting) during marine works.
Vessels are to avoid collisions or disturbance of marine mammals, while maintaining safe operation
of the vessel.
Sea Turtles Lighting, Construction MAJOR Implement procedure for identifying (daily inspections) relocating nesting turtles within the Project MODERATE
habitat loss, Operation NEGATIVE area, involving a specialist ecologist. NEGATIVE
and Liaise with and support local NGOs to promote community sensitisation on turtles.
poaching Fit directional covers (and use sodium lamps where feasible) on lighting infrastructure close to the
beach.
Restore beach profile outside port area after construction.
Marine Fish Disturbance Construction MODERATE See mitigation for Impacts on Marine Water Quality, Surface Water Resources and Underwater Noise MINOR
of Fish Operation NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Establish baseline and monitor contamination levels in fish through fish catch surveys and
monitoring.
Require all construction and dredging vessels to have an on-board ballast water management plan.
Prohibit and prevent ballast water release within the port.
Implement marine fish catch monitoring programme.
XLVII
Impacts on the Socio-Economic Environment
National and Increased Construction MODERATE Make taxation payments in a transparent, accurate and timely manner. MODERATE
regional government POSITIVE POSITIVE
economy revenue
Operation MODERATE MODERATE
POSITIVE POSITIVE
Economic Construction MINOR Disseminate procurement information and requirements as early as possible. MINOR
Developmen POSITIVE Provide quality standards for procurement of goods and services. POSITIVE
t and Operation MINOR- Support the development of a supplier training programme. MINOR
Diversificati MODERATE Encourage unbundling of certain contracts by its selected D&B contractors. POSITIVE
on of the POSITIVE Identify and implement livelihood replacement Projects that fit with the National agenda for
Economy diversified but sustainable economic development. MODERATE-
Consider Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) activities that promote sustainable Projects, and MAJOR
training. POSITIVE
(Lonrho’s
intervention)
Increased Construction MODERATE MODERATE
Business POSITIVE POSITIVE
Experience,
Training Operation MODERATE MAJOR
and Skills POSITIVE POSITIVE
Economic and Loss of Construction MAJOR Develop and implement Livelihood Restoration Plan (LRP) with alternative livelihood and MINOR
Physical Farming, NEGATIVE compensation options (cash compensation as a secondary option). NEGATIVE
Displacement Agro- Investigate acquiring alternative agricultural and grazing land, in liaison with the Awulae Livelihood
processing Restoration Sub Committee tasked and relevant authorities.
and Grazing Participate in local/ district government initiatives to develop of a sustainable land use and
Land settlement plan for the area.
Loss of Construction MAJOR Consider assistance with relocation of fishers, if necessary. MINOR
Access to Operation NEGATIVE Explore development of small-scale commercial fish farming, with extension programmes and the NEGATIVE
Fishing community companies, if necessary.
Areas and Assist in improving levels of mechanisation to allow fishers to access fishing areas further from
Related shore , if found to be necessary and appropriate.
Resources
XLVIII
Ecosystem Decreased Planning MODERATE Collaborate with traditional authorities, regional government and planning authorities in the MINOR
Services Availability Construction TO MAJOR development and implementation of Spatial Development Framework (SDF) for the area NEGATIVE (if
of Land for NEGATIVE Initiate a capacity building/ institutional strengthening programme within the three communities. successful
Settlement MODERATE Provide technical support to the relevant government bodies, where possible, and promote joint relationships are
TO MAJOR planning approaches for agricultural and housing Projects. established)
NEGATIVE Assist traditional authorities and government with the identification of transitional zones for MODERATE TO
settlement, business and informal trading within the three communities. MAJOR
Promote/support the establishment of a joint stakeholder forum for the broader Project area. NEGATIVE
Decreased Operation MINOR

availability NEGATIVE (if
for land for successful
settlement relationships are
established)
MODERATE TO
MAJOR
NEGATIVE
Reduced Construction MAJOR See mitigation for Economic and Physical Displacement MINOR TO
Access to / Operation NEGATIVE MODERATE
Increased Communities to participate in pre-construction harvesting of resources as part of vegetation NEGATIVE
Competition clearing. Identify optimal methods of storing harvested materials.
for Flora Consider partnering with district government and communities in establishing nurseries to replace,
and Fauna harvest and re-plant species of local significance.
Implement fish farming activities. MODERATE
Develop codes of conduct (to include contractually) for Project contractors, tenants and employees NEGATIVE (with
regarding local natural resource use. no alternative non-
Include sensitisation on conservation and sustainable harvesting of natural resources into subsistence-based
stakeholder engagement strategies. livelihood)
Livelihoods Employmen Construction MODERATE Maximise local employment and training where possible directly and through contractual MODERATE TO
t Creation POSITIVE requirements for contractors and tenants. MAJOR
Apply principles of hiring first from three communities, then neighbouring communities... POSITIVE
Operation MODERATE Train and employ appropriate local construction workers during operations and develop succession MAJOR
TO MAJOR plan to guide this. POSITIVE
POSITIVE Undertake a skills audit of the towns and surrounding communities.
Assist in the development of a Community Based Manpower Agency and where possible institute
pre-construction training to empower local residents to meet Project standards.
Advertise employment opportunities (and skills requirements) timeously, locally and to be easily
XLIX
accessible.
Prohibit and prevent labour-brokering (paying for job applications) and employee to pay any
recruitment fees.
Implement skills development and training programmes for Project employees.
Distribute certificates of employment on conclusion of successful employment.
Impact on Construction MAJOR Focus social investment, welfare and development activities towards the most vulnerable. MODERATE
Prices and NEGATIVE Promote ongoing dialogue with vulnerable groups through a stakeholder forum. NEGATIVE
Exacerbatio Operation MODERATE MINOR
n of NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Economic (vulnerable
Vulnerabilit groups)
y MINOR MINOR
POSITIVE POSITIVE (those
(those able to able to access
access opportunities)
opportunities)
Changes to Construction MAJOR See mitigation for Impacts on Livelihoods: Employment Creation MINOR
Livelihood NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Strategies Commit to the principles of sound corporate governance, responsible corporate citizenship, and
MODERATE transparent business interactions with affected communities. MODERATE
POSITIVE Develop and implement Livelihood Restoration Plan (LRP) with alternative livelihood and POSITIVE
compensation options (cash compensation as a secondary option).
Support and/or develop information and awareness programmes related to economic
Operation MAJOR entrepreneurialism and small business development within the local communities. MINOR
NEGATIVE Focus social investment, welfare and development activities towards the most vulnerable. NEGATIVE
Implement HIV/AIDS programme for contractors, employees and local communities.
Make condoms easily available to all contractors and employees and work with local health services
MODERATE to ensure condoms are accessible in the communities. MODERATE
POSITIVE Implement a grievance procedure. POSITIVE
Increased Construction MINOR See mitigation for Impacts on Livelihoods: Employment Creation MODERATE
Potential for POSITIVE POSITIVE
Income
Stability Operation MODERATE MAJOR
TO MAJOR POSITIVE (with
POSITIVE on-the-job training
L
and commitment
to localisation
Social Transfer of Construction MODERATE No direct mitigation measures. MODERATE
Infrastructure, Skilled and NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Governance Semi-Skilled
and Service Personnel MINOR
Delivery from Public NEGATIVE for
Sector local education
Institutions Operation MINOR- MINOR-
to the MODERATE MODERATE
Project NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Pressure on Construction MAJOR Meet all practical needs of employees within the Project footprint for access to services and NEGLIGIBLE
Basic NEGATIVE infrastructure. NEGATIVE (for
Infrastructur Initiate discussions with the Ministry of Health in order to plan for anticipated increased demands direct impacts)
e, Services on local health facilities due to influx
and Local Develop a Community Health, Safety and Security Management Plan. MAJOR
Government Support government initiatives that ensure local education’s capacity. NEGATIVE (for
Capacity Maintain transport routes in the area that are directly impacted by Project vehicles. indirect impacts
Explore ways in which to support local policing if there is increased pressure on the limited associated with in-
resources as a result of the Project. migration)
Promote the implementation of joint planning (government/ key stakeholders) for strategically
important housing Projects.
Consider forming partnerships with government and organised business to address the provision of
bulk services and infrastructure, transportation services, sites for informal trading and related
community services.
Growth of Operation MAJOR Implement planned settlement of construction contractors and employees within the Project NEGLIGIBLE
Informal NEGATIVE footprint during construction. NEGATIVE
Settlements Collaborate with traditional authorities, regional government and planning authorities in the (indirect impacts -
development and implementation of Spatial Development Framework (SDF) for the area construction
Community awareness on H&S related to operations, hazards areas and future development. workforce and
Securely fence site to discourage informal settlement. contractors)
Prohibit informal recruitment at the Project gate. MODERATE to
MAJOR
NEGATIVE
(indirect impacts -
in-migration)
LI
Construction MAJOR MODERATE
NEGATIVE NEGATIVE (direct
impacts - Project
workforce)
MODERATE to
MAJOR
NEGATIVE
(indirect impacts -
in-migration)
Socio-Cultural Changed Construction MAJOR Locate contractor accommodation to retain sense of place. MODERATE
Impacts Sense of Operation NEGATIVE Pursue a proactive Stakeholder Engagement Programme. NEGATIVE
Place (especially Use LRP to identify alternative livelihood opportunities appropriate for existing culture and sense of (especially elderly
elderly and place. and vulnerable)
vulnerable) Where opportunities exist to maximise the benefits of changed sense of place, consider these as part
MODERATE of a social development plan. MODERATE
POSITIVE Work with local health services to monitor community health and well-being. POSITIVE (those
(those eagerly eagerly desiring
desiring change)
change)
Changes to Construction MAJOR Implement induction programmes, including a Code of Conduct, for all employees/ contractors/ MODERATE to
Cultural and NEGATIVE tenants. MAJOR
Social Work with local health services to monitor community health and well-being (especially HIV/ AIDS NEGATIVE
Norms MINOR rates). MINOR
POSITIVE Implement a grievance procedure and continued local engagement as guided by the SEP. POSITIVE
Operation MODERATE MINOR

NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Increase in Construction MODERATE Implement induction programmes, including a Code of Conduct and cultural awareness MINOR TO
Social TO MAJOR programme. MODERATE
Pathologies NEGATIVE Include the Code of Conduct in contractual agreements with tenants. NEGATIVE
LII
Operation MODERATE Develop a Community Health Safety and Security Management Plan. MINOR TO
NEGATIAVE Develop and implement an HIV/AIDS programme for contractors, employees and communities. MODERATE
Make condoms easily available to all contractors and employees and work with local health services NEGATIVE
to ensure condoms are accessible in the communities.
Implement a grievance procedure.
Work with local health services to monitor community health and well-being.
Provide a range of sport and recreational facilities for all employees.
Tension and Construction MODERATE Collaborate with traditional authorities, regional government and planning authorities in the MINOR
Conflict Operation NEGATIVE development and implementation of Spatial Development Framework (SDF) for the area NEGATIVE
between (for inter-town Collaborate with traditional authorities, regional government and planning authorities in the
Towns (and tension & development and implementation of Spatial Development Framework (SDF) for the area and
possibly conflict) promote inclusion of consultations with local communities.
Districts) Ensure that all affected towns receive equal access to opportunities, including employment.
MINOR Establish information office and appoint a permanent community liaison officer accessible to all NEGLIGIBLE
NEGATIVE local communities. NEGATIVE
(for inter Establish a site-based grievance/complaints office.
district tension
Where skill-levels allow, recruit for employment opportunities that cannot be filled from three
& conflict)
communities, from neighbouring communities.
Community Construction MODERATE See mitigation for Impacts on Livelihoods: Employment Creation MINOR
Anger and NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Resentment Communicate pre-employment and internal training efforts in a transparent, timely and accessible
over Not manner, highlighting achievements or milestones in local employment.
Sharing in Operation MINOR TO MINOR
Project MODERATE NEGATIVE
Benefits NEGATIVE
LIII
Health Increased Construction MAJOR Employees’ Code of Conduct designed to limit the direct impact of the Project on communicable MODERATE
Prevalence Operation NEGATIVE diseases in the Study Area. NEGATIVE
of Sexually Develop and implement a management plan and Project policy for HIV/AIDS and other
Transmitted communicable diseases.
Infections, Include HIV/AIDS awareness and education as part of mandatory induction.
HIV/ AIDS Support, or facilitate, ongoing awareness programme with the local residents and workers around
and other the risks of HIV/AIDS and STIs and support initiatives in local schools.
Communica Make condoms easily available to all contractors and employees and work with local health services
ble Diseases to ensure condoms are accessible in the communities.
Nuisance Construction MINOR See mitigation for Impacts on Air Quality MINOR
and Operation NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Irritants: air
pollutants
Nuisance Construction MINOR – MINOR
and Operation MODERATE NEGATIVE
Irritants:
dust
Tourism Impacts on Construction MINOR See mitigation for Impacts on Visual Character and Socio-cultural Impacts: Changed Sense of Place MINOR
Tourism NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Operation NEGLIGIBLE Ensure that the road rerouting is safe and easily visible for tourists. NEGLIGIBLE TO
TO MINOR MINOR
POSITIVE POSITIVE
Impacts of Unplanned and Accidental Events
Accidental Soils Construction MINOR Bund fuels and lubricant storage areas, with raised outflow pipes MINOR
Spills Operation NEGATIVE All chemical storage areas will have impermeable bases. NEGATIVE
Surface Construction MINOR Regularly inspect bonded area outflow pipes to prevent blockages. MINOR
water Operation NEGATIVE Develop detailed spill response plan. NEGATIVE
Immediate cleaning and remediation of spills with post remediation verification.
Ground Construction MINOR Implement a site drainage/storm water management plan, including oil-water separators, silt traps MINOR
water Operation NEGATIVE and sufficient maintenance, including construction. NEGATIVE
Refuelling in designated areas and on hard standing ground/ using spill protection measures and
will collection systems to be reused, treated or removed.
Implement a ground and surface water monitoring programme.
Drip trays when servicing vehicles or equipment.
LIV
Marine Construction MINOR Vessel effluents will be treated in accordance with MARPOL 73/78 requirements. MINOR
water and Operation NEGATIVE Oil discharge monitors are placed on all construction/ dredging vessels. NEGATIVE
sediments Develop an oil spill contingency plan.
All vessels entering the terminal to comply with MARPOL 73/78 requirements.
Ballast, bilge and sanitation water disposed only of at port reception facilities.
No discharge of sewage or food waste while in the port.
Fire and Damage to Construction MODERATE Undertake a Quantitative Risk Assessment (QRA) to quantitatively assess the explosion and fire MINOR
Explosions buildings Operation NEGATIVE risks associated with the bulk storage facility and infrastructure. NEGATIVE
and harm to Use QRA results to refine the location of the tank farm in location to the neighbouring communities.
people Training for workers handling flammable materials and fire response.
Fire issues and good housekeeping awareness to be included in mandatory induction.
Flammable storage in line with Ghanaian laws and with international good practice.
Adequate and maintains (through regular inspections) fire response equipment and systems.
Undertake Fire and life safety assessment.
Waste Impacts Construction MODERATE Develop a waste inventory and Waste Management Plan. MINOR
related to Operation NEGATIVE The incinerator, sewage treatment plant, sewage outfall designed and constructed to industry best NEGATIVE
incorrect practice.
waste Storage of waste products on the Project site will only be permitted within designated areas with
disposal hard standing.
Wastes will only be disposed of at an appropriately licenced facility.
All effluent discharge from terrestrial sources will meet IFC EHS guideline limits, with regular
monitoring and corrective action.
Effluent associated with vessel repair facilities and wash-down areas will be contained and flow
through oil/ water separator before disposal.
Vehicle Traffic Construction MAJOR See mitigation for Impacts on Traffic MODERATE
Accidents accidents Operation NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
The Project will undertake sensitisation in the local communities (including along the construction
route), including appropriate warning signs and notifications of the risks of traffic accidents.
LV
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
Introduction
The ESMP describes the mitigation and enhancement measures identified

through the ESIA process that the Project will undertake and the systems that
will be developed to ensure their effective implementation. The ESMP will be
refined and updated through the Project development process, especially
following completion of the detailed design plans, and will be incorporated
into a comprehensive Project Environmental and Social Management System
(ESMS). Although Lonrho, as the port operator, will retain overall
responsibility, mitigation will also be implemented by the port tenants and/
or contractors (during construction).
Regulatory Requirements
An ESMP is required as part of an ESIA in terms of the Environmental

Assessment Regulations of 1999. In addition, Performance Standard 1, 2012 (1)
requires that the ESMP be part of the client’s overall management system for
the project and this is also required in terms of the AfDB’s Environmental
Review Procedures for Private Sector Operations of the African Development Bank.
This ESMP is also consistent with the Lonrho Environmental Policy.
Planning
The Project has utilised the ESIA process as a tool to identify mitigations and
draft this ESMP. The ESMP is an outline ESMP, based on available design
information and provides a delivery mechanism for environmental and social
mitigation and monitoring. Lonrho will develop a Project ESMP as a ”live”
document, which will include specific management plans and functions as an
overarching plan linking other plans with the Project ESMS. The following
specific management plans will also be developed:
Waste Management Plan

Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan
Spill Response Plan
Traffic Management Plan
Marine Logistics Plan
Aircraft Control Plan
Stakeholder Engagement Plan (SEP)
Chance Finds Procedure
Employment and Workforce Management Plan
Occupational Health and Safety Plan
Influx Management Plan
Preventative Maintenance Plan
Livelihood Restoration Plan
(1) Performance Standard 1: Social and Environmental Assessment and Management Systems from IFC Performance
Standards on Social and Environmental Sustainability (2012)

LVII
Implementation and Checking
Lonrho is committed to providing resources and establishing the systems and

components essential to the implementation and control of the ESMP
including appropriate human resources and specialised skills, training
programmes, communication procedures, documentation control,
communications with authorities and communities as well as a procedure for
the management of change. Lonrho will have an HSE department with an
external affairs function as well as contractor management structure, with
competent staff on the basis of appropriate education, training and experience.
Checking includes inspections and monitoring activities as well as audits to

confirm effectiveness of the mitigation measures and proper implementation
of checking systems. Checking will be undertaken through continual
inspection and reporting of HSE incidents, monitoring and auditing and will
be documented through a formal non-compliance tracking procedure.
Monitoring will be conducted to ensure compliance with regulatory
requirements as well as to evaluate the effectiveness of operational controls.
Grievance Mechanisms
Grievances may be verbal or written and are usually either specific claims for
damages/injury or complaints or suggestions about the way that the Project is
being implemented. A Grievance Mechanism has been developed as part of
the SEP (Annex A), in accordance with the Performance Standards and will be
implemented by the Project to manage and address all public grievances
including livelihood compensation and restoration. Labour-related grievances
will be dealt with internally through Lonrho’s HR department.
1.7 CONCLUSIONS
The findings of the EIA presented in Chapter 6 indicate that there is only one
issue of Major negative significance that could not be mitigated. This is the
indirect impact on social infrastructure, governance and services delivery
through an increased pressure on basic infrastructure, services and local
government capacity as a result of influx (during construction). The
mitigation relies on Lonrho finding ways to support government initiatives
and liaise with the relevant government bodies to assist with their planning
processes.
A number of other impacts are also considered to be of major negative

significance prior to mitigation. These are related to traffic, visual character,
coastal processes, sea turtles, economic and physical displacement, ecosystem
services, livelihoods and changes in livelihood strategies, social infrastructure,
governance and services delivery, changed sense of place, changes to social
and cultural norms, health impacts and vehicle accidents. The contribution of
the Project to greenhouse gases is also considered to be significant. These

LVIII
negative impacts require careful implementation of effective mitigation
measures and ongoing monitoring. With mitigation, these impacts are
reduced to moderate or moderate-major significance. In addition, impacts
related to ecosystem services (decreased land availability), groundwater
quality, aircraft noise, marine water quality and sediment/ benthic/ intertidal
impacts remain of moderate significance after mitigation.
A range of positive impacts of major positive significance are also identified,

namely impacts on the national and regional and livelihoods (employment
creation and increased potential for income stability). Impacts on national and
regional economy and impacts on livelihoods during construction are also
considered of moderate–major significance.
Apart from those cumulative impacts (with the neighbouring gas plant)
considered to be minor, cumulative impacts on noise, vibration and light and
negative impacts on livelihoods and ecosystem services related to additional
influx are considered to be of moderate negative significance. Increased
employment and income stability in the area is identified as a cumulative
positive impact of minor significance.
All mitigation and monitoring measures identified through the impact

assessment are summarised into Chapter 7 and, along with the ESMP in
Chapter 9, form the basis of Lonrho’s commitments to reducing the
significance of negative impacts and enhancing Project benefits. Together
with the Stakeholder Engagement Plan (Annex A), these detailed plans will
provide support for the implementation of Lonrho’s commitments in the
construction and operation of the Project.

LIX
ABBREVIATIONS
ABS American Bureau of Shipping

AfDB African Development Bank
AIDS Acquired Immuno Deficiency Syndrome
ALARP As Low As Reasonably Practicable
ARI Acute Respiratory Infection
ARV Anti-retroviral
ATK Aviation Turbine Kerosene
BDT Basic Design and Technology
BECE Basic Education Certificate Examination
BID Background Information Document
CBO Community Based Organisation
CCG Christian Council of Ghana
CHPS Community-based Health Planning and Services
CHRAJ Commission for Human Rights and Administrative Justice
CIA Central Intelligence Agency
CO Carbon Monoxide
CO2 Carbon Dioxide
COLREG International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea
CRC Coastal Resources Centre
CSR Corporate Social Responsibility
CTD Conductivity Temperature Depth
DCE District Chief Executive
DDT Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane
DFI Developmental Finance Institutions
DMTDP District Assembly Medium Term Development Plan
DNV Det Norske Veritas
EA Electoral Area
ECC Equatorial Counter Current
ECOWAS Economic Community of West African State
EDP Ellembelle District Profile
EDA Ellembelle District Assembly
EEZ Economic Exclusion Zone
EHS Environmental, Health and Safety
EIS Environmental Impact Statement
EMP Environmental Management Plan
EPs Equator Principles
EP Environmental Permit
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
EPFI Equator Principles Financial Institutions
ERM Environmental Resources Management
ESL ESL Consulting Limited
ESIA Environmental and Social Impact Assessment
ESMP Environmental and Socio-economic Management Plan
ESR Economic Recovery Programme
FAD Fish Aggregating Devices
FPSO Floating Production Storage and Offloading Vessel

LX
GARFUN Ghana Aids Response Project Fund
GCLME Guinea Current Large Marine Ecosystem Project
GDP Gross Domestic Product
GEF Global Environmental Fund
GES Ghana Education Services
GHS Ghana Health Service
GIIP Good International Industry Practice
GIS Geographical Information System
GMA Ghana Maritime Authority
GNPC Ghana National Petroleum Corporation
GoG Government of Ghana
GPHA Ghana Ports and Harbour Authority
GPRTU Ghana Private Road Transport Union
GPRII Growth and Poverty Reductions Strategy
ha Hectare
HFO Heavy Fuel Oil
HIV Human Immunodeficiency Virus
IBA Important Bird Area
ICT Information Communication Technology
ICCAT International Commission for the Conservation of Atlantic
Tunas
IFC International Finance Corporation
ILO International Labour Organisation
IMF International Monetary Fund
IMO International Maritime Organisation
IOM International Organisation for Migration
ITCZ Inter-tropical Convergence Zone
IUCN International Union for the Conservation of Nature
JHS Junior High School
KVIP Kumasi Ventilated-Improved Pit
LLMC Limitation of Liability for Maritime Claims
Lonrho Lonrho Ghana Ports Limited
LPG Liquid petroleum gas
LRP Livelihood Restoration Plan
MARPOL International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution
from Ships
MGO Marine Gas Oil
MOSB Marine Offshore Supply Base
MOU Memorandum of Understanding
MOWAC Ministry of Women and Children
MPV Multi-Purpose Vessel
MoH Ministry of Health
MTDP Medium Term Development Plan
NDC National Democratic Congress
NEAP National Environmental Action Plan
NEP National Environmental Policy
NHIS National Health Insurance Scheme
NGO Non-Governmental Organisation
NOx Oxides of Nitrogen

LXI
nm Nautical mile
OPRC Oil Pollution Preparedness, Response and Co-operation
OSPAR Oslo and Paris Conventions for the protection of the marine
environment of the North-East Atlantic
OST Oil Services Terminal
PC Paramount Chief
PEA Preliminary Environmental Assessments
PNDC Provisional National Defence Council
PNDCL Provisional National Council Law
PPP Purchasing Power Parity
PS Performance Standards
PTA Parent Teacher Association
RAP Resettlement Action Plan
RCC Regional Coordinating Council
RME Religious and Moral Education
SAEMA Shama Ahanta East Metropolitan Assembly
SEMP Stakeholder Engagement Management Plan
SEP Stakeholder Engagement Plan
SHS Senior High School
SIA Social Impact Assessment
SNEP Strategic National Energy Plan
SOLAS International convention for the Safety of Life At Sea
SOPEP Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan
SPV Special Purpose Vehicle
SRC SRC consulting
STCW International Convention on Standards of Training,
Certification, and Watch keeping for Seafarers
STI Sexually Transmitted Infection
STM Sekondi-Takoradi Metropolis
STMA Sekondi-Takoradi Metropolitan Assembly
TB Tuberculosis
TH Teaching Hospital
ToR Terms of Reference
UN United Nations
UNCLOS United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea
USD United States Dollars
VOCs Volatile Organic Compounds
VCT Voluntary Counselling and Testing
WAEC West African Examination Council
WRCC Western Region Coordinating Council
WRSDF Western Region Spatial Development Framework

LXII
1 INTRODUCTION AND PURPOSE OF REPORT
1.1 OVERVIEW
Lonrho Ghana Ports Limited (Lonrho) signed a Memorandum of

Understanding (MOU) with the Government of Ghana in August of 2011 to
develop, construct and manage an ‘Exclusive Deepwater Petroleum and
Hydrocarbon Logistics Base Port’ (hereafter referred to as ‘the Project’) along
the coast of the Western Region in Ghana. The Project is being developed to
meet the infrastructure development requirements related to Ghana’s growing
oil and gas industry.
Following an extensive site selection study conducted by Royal Haskoning,

Lonrho proposes to situate the Project on a green-field site (Figure 1.1)
between the communities of Atuabo and Anokyi within the Western Region.
The MOU provides Lonrho with 12 months to conduct site selection,

feasibility studies for the construction and operation of the Project and to
make a decision on the viability of the Project and whether or not to proceed.
If Lonrho decides to proceed, it will be awarded a 50 year concession contract
to develop and operate the Project pending all necessary government
approvals including environmental permits.
Lonrho’s original agreement stated that the Government of Ghana would

acquire the land through a compulsory acquisition process and that this
would be provided as equity into the project. The traditional leadership in the
community have proposed an alternative arrangement for the land to be
provided directly, in exchange for equity in the Project. Discussions with the
GoG are ongoing in which this approach is developed further with the GoG
providing guarantee for the land. In this way, the proposed port would form
a special purpose vehicle (SPV) with the majority share owned by Lonrho, and
the Government of Ghana and the traditional leadership as shareholders, the
percentage of which will be based on the value of the land and the overall
capital investment of the Project (Lonrho, 2011).
The development of the Project will comprise the construction of the main
breakwater, quays, an airstrip, ship berths, a naval forward operating base, a
turning circle and a variety of onshore tenant facilities including a clinic,
warehousing, storage facilities for hydrocarbon products, offices and
accommodation. Potable water, power and telecommunications utilities and
infrastructure will also be constructed as part of the development.
1.2 PROJECT JUSTIFICATION
The Project is being developed to support the oil and gas industry in Ghana
and in the wider region. It is intended to provide services necessary for oil
LONRHO OST ESIA FINAL ESIA REPORT

1-1
and gas exploration development and production. This will be of benefit to
the oil and gas developers because support services will be in closer proximity
to their operation. It will also benefit the local economy by providing local
employment opportunities and other economic benefits as well as offering the
infrastructure to attract transformational industries.
The Jubilee Field, discovered in 2007, is one of the largest oil discoveries in
West Africa in the past decade. Together with a second oilfield, established in
2011, total production of both oilfields is estimated to reach approximately 125
000 barrels per day (Ghana Online, 2012 as cited in Lonrho, 2011). Although
the Jubilee Field is currently the most high-profile development in Ghana,
numerous additional fields have been identified for exploration and potential
development in and around the western part of Ghana. It is estimated that
Ghana could reach an output of 500,000 barrels of oil per day by 2014
(Bloomberg, as cited in Lonhro, 2011). In order to realise this potential, the oil
industry requires efficiently operated ports that are designed to meet the
industry’s servicing needs.
Currently the logistics of the offshore supply to the Jubilee field is very
inefficient with goods brought in from a wide range of ports in the region
including Abijan, Takoradi, Sekondi, and Tema. This inefficiency adversely
affects the production level of the Jubilee field. The location of the Port close
to the Jubilee fields will significantly increase the efficiency of offshore supply
services assisting to ensure that oil production remains efficient.
1.3 PURPOSE OF ESIA
Lonrho has commissioned Environmental Resources Management (ERM) in

collaboration with ESL Consulting (ESL) to undertake the Environmental and
Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) (1) for the development of the Project. The
ESIA report has been compiled in accordance with the Ghanaian
Environmental Assessment Regulations (1999) (as amended), the International
Finance Corporation’s (IFC) Performance Standards’ (hereafter referred to the
Performance Standards), the Equator Principles and the African Development
Bank (AfDB) standards and will be submitted to the EPA for review and
consideration for approval.
Lonrho recognizes that comprehensive planning and management of

environmental and socio-economic issues are essential to the execution of any
successful project and, therefore, intends to fully integrate environmental and
socio-economic considerations into the lifecycle of the proposed Project. A
key objective of the ESIA is thus to assess the potential impacts of the Project
and Project-related activities on the biophysical and socio-economic resources
and receptors, and where necessary to design mitigation measures to avoid,
mitigate, reduce or compensate for negative impacts and enhance benefits.
(1) Please note that apart from specific references relating to the Ghanaian EIA Regulations and requirements, this report
uses the term ESIA rather than an EIA

1-2
Furthermore, this ESIA aims to achieve an acceptable level of conformance
with the applicable international standards ie the Equator Principles in
particular, in order to provide potential international lenders with assurance
that environmental and social risks are comprehensively understood by
Lonrho and that systems and processes are in place to manage these to an
acceptable level.
In addition, the ESIA process focused on the following objectives:
identify, and enhance, positive impacts and opportunities arising from the
development of the Project;
be thoroughly integrated, meaning that impacts and related mitigation

measures for environmental and socio-economic aspects are coordinated;
communicate at key points with a full range of stakeholders and

incorporate stakeholder feedback throughout the process; and
use the results of the ESIA to provide input to the Lonrho Project team and
design engineers to ensure an optimised design that reduces as far as
practicable, environmental and socio-economic impacts (Chapter 3).
1.4 ESIA PROCESS
Section 11 of the Ghanaian Environmental Assessment Regulations (1999), as

amended, requires that an EIA is undertaken for the construction and
operation of a port. The Ghanaian Environmental Assessment Regulations
(1999) also require Project registration and authorisation by the Ghana
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). This assessment investigates the
effects of Project infrastructure and related activities on the social, economic
and environmental settings of the region.
The overall process and schedule for applying for an Environmental Permit
(EP) under Ghanaian regulations is shown schematically (Figure 1.1). The
ESIA process for the Project is aligned with the requirements of the
Environmental Assessment Regulations (1999) and Environmental
Assessment in Ghana Guidelines (1995) as well as the Equator Principles and
the IFC requirements.
This section outlines the ESIA process followed to date, represented

graphically in Figure 1.1.
1.4.1 Project Registration
Undertakings likely to have significant impacts on the environment (eg those

listed in Schedule 2 of the Environmental Assessment Regulations) must
register with the EPA and obtain an environmental permit before

1-3
commencement of construction and operations. The proposed Project was
submitted for registration with the EPA on 12 February 2012.
1.4.2 Project Screening
According to the Environmental Assessment Regulations, within 25 days from

the time a registration form is received the EPA will place the development at
the appropriate level of assessment. The EPA has determined that the
development falls into the category of undertakings (Regulation 3) for which a
full ESIA is required.
1.4.3 Scoping Phase
One of the main objectives of scoping is to identify the potentially significant

environmental issues relating to the implementation, operation and
decommissioning of the proposed development that should be addressed as
part of the ESIA. This enables the developer to address the key issues from
the outset and allows early recognition of these issues in the design and
evolution of the scheme. The process also facilitates the ‘scoping out’ of
aspects that would not be expected to experience significant adverse impacts.
Ultimately, it helps define the scope for the ESIA, which will examine and
report the full suite of impacts associated with the Project.
Scoping is an iterative process and the scope of the ESIA may change during
project development, for example, as a result of the findings of technical
studies or information supplied by stakeholders. The main objectives of
scoping phase were as follows:
Provide an overview description of the Project.
Describe the existing environmental and socio-economic baseline, using

secondary data only.
Undertake a preliminary assessment of the potential environmental and

social impacts associated with the proposed Project in both offshore and
onshore settings.
Identify key data gaps.
Obtain early input from key stakeholders in the identification of potential

impacts and mitigation measures.
Define a proposed Terms of Reference (ToR) for an ESIA study and define
an appropriate program for consultation with stakeholders for approval
by EPA.
A scoping report, including ToR for the ESIA, was submitted to the EPA on 5
April 2012. The scoping report was approved on 22 May 2012. The approved
scoping report was then made available to the public on a website (www.

1-4
www.erm.com/Lonrho-oil-services-ESIA), at public libraries and the EPA
offices as well as through the delivery of hard copies to stakeholders during
the last week of May 2012.
Figure 1.1 Overview of ESIA Process, Indicating Stakeholder Consultation Activities
Note: the red arrows indicate the points at which key stakeholder activities occur..
1.4.4 Baseline Data Collection
The ESIA report provides a description of the existing environmental and

socio-economic conditions as a basis against which the impacts of the Project
can be assessed. The baseline includes information on receptors and resources
that were identified during scoping as having the potential to be significantly
affected by the proposed Project. The description of the baseline has the
following main objectives:

1-5
To identify the key environmental and socio-economic resources and
conditions in areas potentially affected by the Project (such as atmosphere,
geology and soil, groundwater, surface water, fauna and flora and the
marine environment).
To describe, and where possible quantify, their characteristics ie their

nature, condition, quality and extent.
To provide data to aid the prediction and evaluation of possible impacts.
To inform judgements about the importance, value and sensitivity or

vulnerability of resources and receptors.
For the current Project, baseline data collection was obtained from existing
sources including the following:
stakeholders consulted during the Project including government agencies,

local communities and Non-Governmental Organisations (NGOs);
local experts and research and academic organisations; and
published sources.
Additional primary baseline data was collected as follows:
Dry season sampling was under taken in April 2012. This sampling
included assessing baseline soil, geology, groundwater, air quality, noise,
fauna and flora conditions.
Wet season (May to October) sampling was undertaken during July and
August 2012 after the drafting of the ESIA report, and the relevant data
will be attached as an addendum to the main report.
Socio-economic field surveys were carried out in April 2012. These surveys
involved focus group interviews with different groups and organisations
in the three towns directly affected by the Project; Atuabo, Asemdasuazo
and Anokyi.
1.4.5 Stakeholder Consultation
The objective of the consultation process was to present the proposed Project
and ESIA process as well as identify associated issues, concerns and
opportunities. Further details on the stakeholder consultation process for the
Project are included below in Section 1.5 and in the Stakeholder Engagement
Plan (SEP) included in Annex A.

1-6
1.4.6 Impact Assessment
Impact assessment and development of mitigation measures is an ongoing

process that commences during the scoping stage and continues throughout
the ESIA process. The key objectives of this process are as follows:
To analyse how the Project may interact with the baseline in order to
define, predict and evaluate the likely extent and significance of
environmental and social impacts that may be caused by the Project.
To develop and describe acceptable and cost effective mitigation measures

that avoid, reduce, control, remedy or compensate for negative impacts
and enhance positive benefits.
To evaluate the predicted positive and negative residual impacts of the

Project.
To develop a system whereby mitigation measures will be integrated with

the Project and will be taken forward as commitments. This is achieved
through the development of a provisional ESMP.
The impact assessment process has the following four main steps:
1. Prediction of what will happen as a consequence of Project activities.
2. Evaluation of the importance and significance of the impact.
3. Development of mitigation measures to manage significant impacts where

practicable.
4. Evaluation of the significance of the residual impact.
Where significant residual impacts remain, further options for mitigation may
be considered and impacts re-assessed until they are reduced to as low as
reasonably practicable (ALARP) levels. This approach takes into account the
technical and financial feasibility of mitigation measures.
In addition to predicted impacts from planned activities, those impacts that

could result from an accident or unplanned event within the Project (such as a
pollution event from a petroleum product spill or explosion/fire) are taken
into account. In these cases the likelihood (probability) of the event occurring
is considered. The impact of non-routine events is therefore assessed in terms
of the risk, taking into account both the consequence of the event and the
probability of occurrence.
The methodology used for the assessment of the environmental and social
impacts identified is included in Section 6.2.

1-7
1.4.7 Mitigation and Management Planning
The range of different measures to mitigate impacts identified through the

ESIA process is reported in the ESIA report within the project description and
mitigation chapters. These have been brought together in a framework
Environmental and Socio-economic Management Plan (ESMP) for the Project
(see Chapters 7 and 9).
The provisional ESMP consists of the set of management, mitigation and

monitoring measures to be taken during implementation of the Project to
eliminate adverse environmental and social impacts, offset them, or reduce
them to acceptable levels. The plan details the specific actions that are
required to implement the controls and mitigation measures that have been
agreed through the ESIA process.
1.4.8 Reporting and Disclosure
The outputs of the above tasks are drawn together into the draft ESIA report
and submitted to the EPA for review.
Regulatory Requirements
Once the draft ESIA report is submitted, this is subjected to a review by a

panel of experts constituted by the EPA. The EPA distributes the draft ESIA
to the relevant experts and Ministers and following the review period, their
findings are presented to the Project team for revision of the report to produce
the final ESIA Report.
Lender Requirements
The ESIA Report will also be disclosed in line with potential lender
requirements and timeframes. This will include disclosure of an Executive
Summary on the relevant institutions website for public review and comment.
Public Disclosure
At this stage, as part of the formal regulatory process, the EPA will make a
public notice of the opportunity for information and comment on the draft
ESIA report for the Project. The EPA will publish a notice concerning the
details of the ESIA report in mass media for a period of 21 days. Display
venues will be decided by the EPA but would be expected to include at least:
EPA offices, Accra;

Ministry of Environment; and
Ellembelle District Authority headquarters.
The EPA has indicated their intention to hold a public review meeting
regarding the proposed Project within the local communities at the end of
August 2012.

1-8
Decision Making
Comments received on the draft ESIA report from the EPA and stakeholders’
written comments are addressed in the final ESIA report which is submitted to
the EPA for their decision on whether to issue certification for the ESIA, which
provides environmental authorisation for the Project.
1.5 SUMMARY OF STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION
1.5.1 Background and Objectives
This Chapter represents a summary of the consultation and disclosure

activities undertaken during the ESIA process. This includes a description of
the stakeholder mapping activities, consultation undertaken during the ESIA
phases, development of a grievance mechanism in addition to an overview of
the key issues raised through the ESIA consultation process.
ERM have also compiled a Stakeholder Engagement Plan (SEP) (Annex A) on

behalf of Lonrho which is intended to act as a ’live’ document and be updated
and adjusted as the Project progresses.
Stakeholder engagement is a key component of sustainable development and

the ESIA process. It involves those stakeholders interested in, or affected by a
proposed development working to actively highlight opportunities, risks and
issues of concern. Stakeholder engagement assists in accounting for locally
relevant conditions rather than imposing potentially insensitive processes and
designs onto an existing social and biophysical environment.
The primary objectives of stakeholder engagements and disclosure are

outlined below:
ensure that adequate and timely information is provided to identified

stakeholders;
provide sufficient opportunity to stakeholders to voice their opinions and

concerns, and to ensure that these concerns influence Project decisions;
and
establish a relationship and form of communication between the

proponent, Lonrho, and affected communities for the lifetime of the
Project.
Stakeholder engagement is also a regulatory requirement in Ghana and a

requirement in terms of the Equator Principles as it is recognised that failure
to engage stakeholders can create significant risks to a project development.

1-9
1.5.2 Stakeholder Engagement within the ESIA Process
Ideally, stakeholder engagement occurs continuously throughout an ESIA

process. In the Ghanaian ESIA process, consultations are required at specific
stages. These are identified in Figure 1.1.
During the Screening phase a list of key informants were established and this
list was used to plan Scoping phase consultations. During Scoping phase
consultations, Project information was presented and discussions were held
with stakeholders to understand their views, identify sensitivities, and to
identify additional stakeholders. The Scoping Report was also distributed to
relevant stakeholders for their input.
1.5.3 Reporting of Stakeholder Engagement Activities
Minutes were recorded during all formal meetings during the ESIA process.
The issues raised during meetings were extracted and captured in an Issues
Table, along with additional issues raised through written correspondence
received during the ESIA process.
Records of all engagement activities (stakeholder database, minutes, lists of

attendees, copies of comments received and issues trail) are presented in
Annex B. ESIA engagement materials have been kept on file in order for the
Project team to refer to them for consideration during implementation, to
identify any trends in grievances, and to design necessary corrective actions.
The Ghana ESIA process also includes a number of formal consultation and
disclosure steps. These occur in the Scoping phase with the public disclosure
of the ESIA Draft Scoping Report and Terms of Reference (ToR),following the
submission of the Draft ESIA report to the relevant authority through public
disclosure and in some cases public hearings.
1.5.4 Stakeholder Identification
The objective of stakeholder identification is to establish which organisations

and individuals may be directly or indirectly affected (positively and
negatively) by, or have an interest in, the Project. Stakeholder identification is
an on-going process, requiring regular review and the updating of the
stakeholder database as the Project proceeds. The sections that follow provide
an overview of stakeholder groups that have been identified to date, as well as
an indication of their interest in the Project.
As part of ESIA Scoping phase, a stakeholder mapping exercise was

undertaken to identify key stakeholder groups and organisations. This
mapping exercise drew on knowledge of the Project area, and prior experience
of ESIAs in Ghana particularly in the Western Region. It also incorporated
experience gained by Lonrho through stakeholder engagement activities,
primarily related to commercial matters.

1-10
Stakeholders were selected on the basis that they would have an interest in the
Project, and would also have knowledge through which to provide insight
into possible issues and concerns related to the Project. Further stakeholder
groups were identified through consultation activities. A full list of the
stakeholders consulted in the ESIA (up to the time that the SEP was
published) is provided in Annex A.
During this process stakeholders were grouped in order to develop

appropriate tools and methodologies, and to maximise the value of
engagement activities. Stakeholders were divided into two main categories:
primary stakeholders and secondary stakeholders (Table 1.1).
Table 1.1 Primary and Secondary Stakeholder Groups
Primary Stakeholders Secondary Stakeholders

Directly affected communities and residents, Non-governmental organisations (NGOs) and
landowners and land users (with special Community Based Organisations (CBOs)
consideration of the various disaggregated active at a national and local level, as well as
groupings within these categories, including those having international representation in
vulnerable groups) the country
Regulatory authorities, councillors and Other groups including media, environmental

traditional authorities covering national, associations, business groups
regional, district and stool levels with
authority in the directly affected Project area.
Ghana National Petroleum Corporation
(GNPC) and Ghana Maritime Authority.
Ministry representatives in political positions Relevant sector specific agencies operating

nationally or locally
Primary Stakeholders
This category of stakeholders includes those directly affected by Project

activities, as well as the regulatory authorities and other ministries of
government authorities with direct authority over aspects of the Project
activities.
Directly Affected Stakeholders
Within this range of stakeholders, affected communities were identified to be

the communities located on or adjacent to the Project footprint. In the case of
the Project, this includes the communities of Atuabo, Anokyi and
Asemdasuazo, in the Ellembelle District. While none of the physical
infrastructure of the communities will be directly affected by the Project,
farming, plantation and fishing areas are within the Project’s footprint. The
directly affected stakeholder groups that were engaged included:
local residents: men, women and children;

traders;

1-11
fishers;
farmers and plantation owners;
agricultural producers (particularly palm oil, coconut oil and palm wine);
youth;
religious groups;
elderly; and
traditional healers.
The Paramount Chief (Awulae) of the Stool sits in Atuabo and is the
owner/custodian of the land. As a result, the Chief was identified to be
directly affected on many levels, in addition to his traditional council and
elders in addition to the Community District Assembly based in Atuabo. The
traditional leadership in both Anokyi and Asemdasuazo were also identified
to be directly affected stakeholders.
The disaggregated stakeholder groups in this category were identified

through map work, scoping meetings and socio-economic and fisheries
fieldwork. Emphasis was placed on identifying potentially vulnerable groups
within this category.
Government Authorities
Relevant regulatory and ministerial authorities were identified as those

departments and divisions representing the Ghanaian Project decision-makers
with direct involvement in the planning and permitting for the Project.
Authorities are also key role-players in the implementation of aspects of the
management plans during Project implementation.
Regulatory authorities were identified from existing databases, liaison with

government officials, prior project experience and consultation, government
databases and telephone directories.
The affected National, Western Region and Ellembelle District regulatory

authorities that were engaged through the ESIA process included:
Ghana EPA;
Ministry of Energy;
Western Regional EPA;
Western Region Coordinating council (WRCC);
Western Regional Office of the Minister; and
Ellembelle District Assembly.
Ministerial representatives were also engaged directly by the developer in

order to update them regarding the progress and to ensure on-going and
regular interactions. These included the following:
Ministry of Environment, Science and Technology;

Ministry of Energy;
Ministry of Lands and Natural Resources;

1-12
Ministry of Road and Highways;
Ministry of Transport;
Ministry of Water Resources, Works and Housing;
Ministry of Finance and Economic Planning;
Ministry of Tourism;
Ministry of Food and Agriculture.
National Security;
Petroleum Commission;
Ghana Customs and Preventive Service;
Town and Country Planning Department (Western Region); and
Ghana Civil Aviation Authority.
Secondary Stakeholders
This group of stakeholders was identified to comprise of interest groups who

have a personal, business or civil interest in this Project. These groups include
NGOs and CBOs from Accra, and other major towns in the nearby area, as
well as locally relevant schools, clinics and businesses. A small number of
Ghana-based international organisations involved in sustainable
development, environmental issues, health, media, academia and research
organisations and other such potentially interested groups were also
identified
These stakeholders were identified from existing databases, internet resources

and local telephone directories. Further identification took place during
informal contact between Lonrho and individuals or organisations. Additional
stakeholders were identified during the baseline data collection process where
special interest groups that may have been overlooked were recognised as
clear stakeholders in the Project’s development. These secondary stakeholders
included:
Fisheries Commission;
Friends of the Earth;
Oilwatch;
National Fisheries Association;
Interim Guinea Current Commission;
Wildlife Division of Forestry Commission;
Marine Fisheries Research Division;
Ricerca e Cooperazione;
Friends of the Nation/ Coastal Resources Centre (CRC);
Ghana Tourism Authority;
Wildlife Department of the Forestry Commission;
Ghana National Canoe Fishermen Association - Western Region;
Hydrological Society; and
Ghana Wildlife Society.

1-13
Vulnerable Groups
In addition, it is important to consult with groups classified by the World

Bank as potentially marginalised or vulnerable. Vulnerable groups may be
affected by the Project by virtue of their physical disability, social or economic
standing, limited education and a lack of employment or housing. They may
also have difficulty participating in the stakeholder engagement process and
thus may not be able to fully express their concerns regarding the Project.
Potential vulnerable groups identified as part of the ESIA included women,

the elderly, children, sharecroppers and fishermen. Vulnerability of these
groups is based on reduced opportunities to participate in local decision-
making, as well as their economic vulnerability, particularly with regard to
land access, employment and dependence on other community members. As
such, engagement activities were designed to ensure representation of these
groups among stakeholders, and to seek to understand potential Project
interactions with their livelihood opportunities and agency within the
communities. The ESIA team held women’s meetings at times and places that
suited the women in each community. These meetings were led by a female
member of the ESIA team, where possible.
1.5.5 Stakeholder Engagement Process
This section provides an overview of the stages of stakeholder engagement in

the Project. The stakeholder engagement and disclosure process has been
divided into four key stages, each having different objectives for engagement:
Scoping consultation, including notifications and consultations with key

informants and community representatives;
Engagement during detailed ESIA baseline studies;
ESIA Disclosure; and
Project Execution.
The key elements of each stage of the stakeholder engagement process are
outlined in the sections that follow.
Stage 1: Scoping
Background Information Document (BID)

A Background Information Document (BID) was developed to provide an
overview of the proposed Project, potential environmental and social issues
and a description of the ESIA process and timeline. BIDs were used during
Scoping to provide basic information to stakeholders. A response sheet was
included with the BID and gave interested parties an opportunity to register
for the Project and to raise their concerns, issues or suggestions.
Notifications
The stakeholder mapping exercise identified stakeholders that would be best
engaged through face-to-face meetings. A copy of the BID and a covering

1-14
letter requesting a meeting were hand-delivered to these stakeholders.
Meetings were confirmed through subsequent telephone and email
communication.
Consultations with Key Informants and Community Representatives

Scoping engagement was carried out in February and March 2012 to identify
the potentially significant environmental and social issues relating to the
implementation and operation of the Project. These issues were used to
define the ESIA approach, to inform the design of the environmental and
socio-economic baseline studies, and to ensure that there is sufficient
information to address all potential impacts and issues in the ESIA process.
During Scoping, a total of 25 meetings were held with 28 stakeholder groups

or organisations. Stakeholders consulted included national, regional and
district authorities, traditional leadership, Non-Governmental Organisations
(NGOs), international organisations and fisher associations. A list of the
Scoping consultation meetings undertaken is provided in Table 1.2.
Table 1.2 Summary of Scoping consultation meetings (February and March 2012)
No. Organisation’/Group Date Location Attendees

1 Fisheries Commission 14-Feb-12 Accra 1
2 EPA 15-Feb-12 Accra 4
3 Friends of the Earth 15-Feb-12 Accra 1
4 Oilwatch 15-Feb-12 Accra 1
5 National Fisheries Association 15-Feb-12 Accra 2
6 Ministry of Energy 15-Feb-12 Accra 2
7 Ghana National Petroleum Corporation (GNPC) 16-Feb-12 Accra 2
8 Interim Guinea Current Commission 16-Feb-12 Accra 1
9 Wildlife Division of Forestry Commission 16-Feb-12 Accra 1
10 Marine Fisheries Research Division 16-Feb-12 Tema 3
11 Ricerca e Cooperazione 17-Feb-12 Accra 4
12 Community District Assembly representatives, 19-Feb-12 Atuabo 44
Atuabo Traditional council
13 Nzema East Council of Chiefs 19-Feb-12 Atuabo As above
14 Chief Fisherman of Atuabo, 19-Feb-12 Atuabo As above
15 Anorkyi District Assembly representatives and 20-Feb-12 Anorkyi 23
chief fisherman
16 Ellembelle District Assembly 21-Feb-12 Ellembelle 6
17 Western Region Coordinating council (WRCC) 21-Feb-12 Takoradi 1
18 Friends of the Nation/ Coastal Resources Centre 21-Feb-12 Takoradi 4
(CRC)
19 Ghana Tourism Authority 22-Feb-12 Takoradi 1
20 Wildlife Department of the Forestry Commission 22-Feb-12 Takoradi 1
21 EPA: Western Region 22-Feb-12 Takoradi 4
22 Ghana National Canoe Fishermen Association - 22-Feb-12 Takoradi 2
Western Region
23 Fisheries Commission 22-Feb-12 Takoradi 1
24 Ghana Navy 24-Feb-12 Accra 2
25 Ghana Maritime Authority 24-Feb-12 Accra 3
26 Hydrological Society 24-Feb-12 Accra 1
27 Ghana Wildlife Society 5-Mar-12 Accra 1
Note: Additional stakeholder consultation activities were undertaken during April 2013. The details of
these interactions are included in Annex K.

1-15
Each of the face-to-face meetings followed a general format:
introduction by the meeting facilitator;

introduction to Lonrho and a brief description of Lonrho operations;
description of the proposed port development and the Project
components; and
discussion of the key issues and any information that may be relevant to
the Project.
The stakeholders that participated in each consultation meeting were recorded

in an attendance register. The consultation team also included translators
who spoke Fante and Nzema so that the key elements of the Project and the
main issues arising could be discussed with non-English-speaking
stakeholders. Notes of the consultation meetings, attendance registers and
written comments received are provided in Annexes F, E and H of the SEP.
Distribution of Scoping Report

In line with the EPA’s requirements the Scoping Report was submitted to the
EPA in April 2012. Copies of the Scoping Report were also delivered to key
stakeholder groups. Hard copies of the Report were also made available
within affected communities, where a public copy was left with each of the
towns’ Community District Assembly representatives, the Chief or a
Traditional Council member.
Stage 2: Detailed Baseline Studies
Socio-economic Baseline Field Research

Socio-economic baseline field research fieldwork (undertaken from 10 - 17
April 2012) included meetings with traditional authorities and town elders,
Focus Group Discussions (FGDs) with identified special interest groups in the
towns, and Key Informant Interviews (KII) with individuals who had
information of particular relevance to the Project (eg education and health).
A schedule of these meetings is outlined in Table 1.3.
Table 1.3 Summary of Engagements with Affected Communities
Day Community Team 1 Team 2

10th April (pm) Atuabo Elders
11 April (am) Women Youth
(pm) Coconut Oil Co-Op Fishermen
12 April (am) Land Users Markets
Elderly Teachers
(pm) Economic Activity Observation Herbalists
Religious Leaders Market Area
13 April (am) Anokyi Sub Chief Sub Chief
Women Youth
(pm) Land Users; Coconut-Oil And Fishermen
Farmers

1-16
Day Community Team 1 Team 2
14 April Sat Elders – History & Culture Museum
Museum
16 April (am) Asemdasuazo Sub-chief Sub Chief
Women Fishermen
(pm) Land Users Elders
17 April (am) Ekabaku Clinic (Beyin) Youth
Teachers
Each engagement was facilitated in English, Fante and Nzema as appropriate,

and structured using all or some of the following methodologies (1):
an introduction to the Project using the BID along with photographic

representations of similar projects;
community mapping;
seasonal calendars;
land-use mapping;
walkabouts by the social specialists accompanied by members of a
stakeholder group to locations of significance to the group.
These methods provided mechanisms where no one group member would

dominate an engagement activity, but rather facilitated broad participation
with an emphasis on ensuring that women and vulnerable groups were heard
and recorded. Information derived from the activities has been used in the
ESIA to highlight community strengths and vulnerabilities, and to identify
potential Project impacts.
Significantly, this type of active engagement contributes to the development of

relationships based on trust between stakeholders and the Project that can act
as a bridge for future phases of the Project cycle.
Figure 1.2, provide photographs illustrating the different methodologies used

for engagement.
Scoping Report Disclosure through Field Work

The socio-economic specialist studies within the local communities began
shortly after the submission of the Scoping Report, which outlined the ToR for
specialist studies. Stakeholder groups in these affected communities were
informed of the Scoping Report, locations for reviewing the Report, and the
timeframes for submitting comments during the socio-economic assessment
using the following:
Posters (in English and Nzema) and maps to the location of each Scoping
Report were put up in affected communities (Annex F of the SEP); and
A set of key Project Messages (in English and Nzema), posted alongside
the posters (Annex G of the SEP).
(1) The detailed methodologies used during these engagements are described in Chapter 5.

1-17
Figure 1.2 Community Meetings and Introduction to Project
Stage 3: ESIA Disclosure
A Draft EIS/ ESIA Report (referred to in this report as an ESIA Report) has
been compiled and submitted to the EPA for their consideration. At this stage
consultation will take place through the EPA-led disclosure process, likely to
include an open public comment process and potential public hearings. If
convened, the hearings would likely be held in Accra, Takoradi, the
Ellembelle District and in the affected communities.
Once the Environmental and Social Management Plans (ESMP) are finalised,
and as the Project enters into the construction phase, key stakeholders and
communities will receive meaningful and accessible information of the
mitigation and management measures contained in the ESMP. Information
from the ESMP will be presented through a number of briefing sessions and
community meetings. Various forms of supporting material will be
developed specifically for this ESMP disclosure purpose, such as posters and
flyers.

1-18
Stage 4: Project Execution
An output of the ESIA process is the development of ESMPs during Project

construction and operations. This SEP is one component of the ESMPs and
will be further refined prior to the next phase of the Project, once more
detailed information on implementation structures, roles, responsibilities and
resources is available.
Information on the contents and implementation of the ESMP will be

presented through a number of briefing sessions and on-going meetings with
local communities. These will take place at different levels within the Western
Region, Ellembelle District and in affected communities.
In addition, the grievance mechanism (Appendix J to the SEP in Annex A) will

be implemented to be effective throughout the Project lifecycle.
Ad hoc Consultations Led by Lonrho
Lonrho, through its corporate and communications team, is continuing

engaging stakeholders on a regular and ad hoc basis. Meetings between the
Paramount Chief and Lonrho regarding access to land for the Project’s
development are on-going.
In the same way, Lonrho continues to meet with interest groups in affected
communities, NGOs and regulatory authorities. These interactions, together
with the outcomes of Scoping and baseline data activities, are influencing the
design of the Project on a day-to-day basis. This will continue until the
submission of the ESIA at which point the design will be finalised in order for
environmental permitting, on a set Project design, to take place.
1.5.6 Key Issues Raised
This section provides an overview of the key issues raised by stakeholders

during the Scoping phase. A summary of these comments raised during the
Scoping consultations is provided in Table 1.4.
These comments have been recorded and considered in developing the Terms
of Reference for the ESIA (see Annex C) and are presented in the full issues
trail in Annex D of the SEP.
Table 1.4 Summary of Issues
Issue Group Summary of issues

Project Benefits The majority of stakeholders voiced support for the Project as well as
expectations of employment and other opportunities that it would create
for local communities. A number of stakeholders noted the importance
of local content. Government stakeholders voiced support for a new
port facility in the region, especially as a new hub for other development.

1-19
Livelihoods and Stakeholders indicated that the proposed Project area is currently used
compensation for fishing, farming, grazing and sand mining and expressed concern
regarding the loss of livelihoods and the stressed the need for
compensation of any lost livelihood.
Cultural heritage Stakeholders expressed concern over the loss of local culture (including
language and traditional structures), the potential effect on sacred sites
and the rural sense of place of the community. Stakeholders identified
that any archaeological resources in the area need to be well-understood.
In-migration Stakeholders expressed concern that there would be in-migration of

people (especially job-seekers) into the area resulting in impacts to the
socio-economic structure, traditional values, demographics and cultural
heritage.
Tourism impacts Some stakeholders expressed concern regarding the conflicting proposed
industrial land use and activities with the plans for the development of
the Western Region coastline as an area for sustainable tourism.
Site selection Stakeholders queried the choice of Atuabo East as the best site for the
Project and requested details of the site selection process.
Access, security and While a number of stakeholders indicated that the people should be
port control allowed access for traditional fishing and tourism activities, others
stressed that the port would need to meet Ghanaian and International
Maritime Organisation control and security requirements.
Sensitive Stakeholders voiced concern regarding the impacts of the Project on

biodiversity sensitive biodiversity receptors such as the mangroves, benthic
environment and wetlands (especially the Amansuri wetland area). The
impacts on nesting turtles and other marine fauna (fish, marine
mammals) were raised as important aspects for consideration. Concerns
were also raised regarding the Project’s impacts on the annual algal
bloom, as well as impacts of the bloom on the Project.
Coastal erosion Stakeholders expressed concern with regard to potential coastal erosion
and the impacts of the Project on coastal sediment transport.
Stakeholders highlighted the importance of monitoring erosion during
operation.
Pollution and waste Stakeholders highlighted the importance of marine and onshore
management pollution control and ensuring responsible waste management at the
port
Community and Stakeholders voiced concern regarding community safety risks related to
worker Health and construction traffic and activities. Stakeholders also encouraged Lonrho
Safety (H&S): to ensure that occupational H&S would be addressed.
Fishing Apart from the livelihoods aspects (above), stakeholders indicated their
concerns regarding disturbance to fishing activities including damage to
fishing gear, access to fishing areas and potential catch reduction.
Air emissions Stakeholders were concerned about the potential air emissions from
waste management facilities (eg incinerator and waste storage) on site
and from vessels.

1-20
Noise Stakeholders expressed concerns regarding the noise generated from
aircraft using the airstrip and associated disturbance of local
communities.
ESIA process and A number of stakeholders requested that they receive copies of the
stakeholder Scoping Report and highlighted the need for consultation with the
engagement traditional authorities and the local communities. The EPA highlighted
the requirements for thorough stakeholder consultation process as part
of the ESIA.
Alignment with Stakeholders indicated that the planning and design for the Project
regional planning, should be integrated with other local and regional planning processes.
industrial growth Planning for the Project was encouraged to include and anticipate future
and other or other developments in the area.
developments
Cumulative impacts Stakeholders highlighted that cumulative impacts need to be thoroughly

assessed in the ESIA.
1.5.7 Project Grievance Mechanism
Grievances are complaints or comments concerning the way in which a Project

is being implemented. A grievance mechanism provides a formal and on-
going avenue for stakeholders to engage with the company, whilst the
monitoring of grievances provides signals of any escalating conflicts or
disputes.
Identifying and responding to grievances supports the development of

positive relationships between the Project proponent and the communities,
and other stakeholders. An effective grievance management process should
include the components described in Box 1.1 below.
A preliminary Grievance Mechanism has been developed as part of the SEP,

in accordance with the IFC’s Performance Standards and the Equator
Principles (Annexure J of the SEP). This procedure will be refined once a
decision on the ESIA Report has been taken. This procedure will outline staff
responsibilities and allocate financial resources to implementing and
managing the Mechanism.
The process for managing grievances will be through the External Affairs
Department, with a Manager based in Accra and a Community Liaison Officer
(CLO), based on site. The Manager will be responsible for co-ordinating
grievances as they come into the Project and will follow the Grievance
Procedure in ensuring resolution. The CLO will likely be the first port of call
for people wishing to submit grievances and so s/he will be responsible for
ensuring adherence to the grievance procedure.

1-21
Box 1.1 Key Components of an Effective Grievance Mechanism
Simple Process: It should be convenient to submit complaints. There should be several,

appropriate channels through which community stakeholders can submit complaints free of
charge.
Simple Internal Procedure: A simple and consistent procedure is required to record grievances,
identify those responsible for addressing them and ensure that they are resolved.
Staff Arrangements: Roles and responsibilities in the grievance management process need to be
defined and agreed.
Training: The launch or modification of the grievance management process should include
internal induction and/or training for operational staff and a Community Liaison Officer.
A Set Timeframe: The grievance process should set a timeframe within which complainants
can expect acknowledgement of receipt of grievance and a response and/or resolution of
grievance.
Sign Off: Actions planned to resolve grievances considered to be of significant concern by the
Grievance Officer should be signed-off by a member of the senior management, suitably
qualified to assess the effectiveness of the response.
System of Response: A clear system of response is required to identify who should respond to
the complainant and how.
Monitoring Effectiveness: Mechanisms should be set in place for monitoring the effectiveness
with which complaints are being recorded and resolved.
Source: ERM, 2011
1.6 ESIA TEAM
ERM and ESL are jointly referred to as the ESIA team. The ESIA team
comprised environmental and social specialists with a combination of ESIA
experience in Ghana and experience in undertaking ESIAs for oil and gas and
infrastructure development projects elsewhere.
In addition, a series of studies were undertaken by a number of other

specialists to address key issues. The core ESIA team members that are
involved in this ESIA are listed in Table 1.5.
Table 1.5 The ESIA team
Name Role Qualifications, Experience

Henry Camp (ERM) Project Director BA, 27 years
Andrew Bradbury (ERM) Technical Advisor BSc (Hons), MSc, 18 years
Karen Opitz (ERM) Project Manager, Environmental BSc (Hons), MPhil, 6 years
Lead
Lydia du Toit (ERM) GIS Specialist BSc, 20 years

1-22
Name Role Qualifications, Experience
AK Armah (ESL Consulting) Marine specialist, Lead Local MSc, MPhil, 20 years
Specialist
Andy Spitz (ERM) Social specialist MA, 15 years
Samantha Button (ERM) Social consultant MA, 2 years
Kate Munnik (ERM) ESIA consultant BSc (Hons), MSc, 1 year
ESIA team contact details are provided below.
Assistant Project manager Karen Opitz

Address: ERM Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd
Building 32, Woodlands Office Park
Woodlands Drive, Woodmead
Sandton, 2148
Tel: +27 (0)11 798 4300
Email: karen.opitz@erm.com
1.7 STRUCTURE OF THIS REPORT
An outline of the ESIA report is provided in Table 1.6. The structure follows
guidance provided by the EPA.
Table 1.6 ESIA Report Structure
Chapter Title Description

Executive Summary Summary of the report written in non-technical
language.
1 Introduction Introduction to the Project; overview of stakeholder

engagement activities; introduction to ESIA
methodology and legislation ad standards.
2 Legal and Policy framework Legislation and lender requirements and guidelines
determining Project design and operation.
3 Project Description Technical description of the Project infrastructure

and activities.
4 Description of Existing Description of the relevant environmental conditions

Biophysical Environment in the area surrounding the Project Site.
5 Description of Existing Description of existing social, economic and health

Socio-economic conditions.
Environment
6 Associated and Potential Additional description of methodology; potential

Impacts impacts; identification of residual impacts.

1-23
Chapter Title Description
7 Mitigation Measures Summary of mitigation measures to reduce, remove
or avoid negative impacts to environmental and
social receptors.
8 Decommissioning Plan Description of approach for decommissioning

including planned mitigation measures.
9 Environmental and Social Outline of the Environmental and Social

Management Plan Management Plan (ESMP) taking into account
identified impacts and planned mitigation measures
and monitoring requirements.
10 Summary and Conclusions Summary of the consultations from the ESIA.
11 References A list of references and websites cited in the text.
Annex A Stakeholder Engagement A summary of the consultations undertaken during

Plan (SEP) and associated the ESIA as well as a list of stakeholders, meeting
Annexes minutes, attendance records and photos.
Annex B Comprehensive Baseline Comprehensive baseline study data from wet and
Study Data dry season baseline surveys.
Annex C Terms of Reference for the The terms of reference for the ESIA.
ESIA
Annex D Scoping Report Approval Confirmation of the approval of the Scoping Report
Letter by the EPA.
Annex E Relevant Design and The design and engineering standards which will be
Engineering Standards adopted by the proposed Project.
Annex F Terms of Reference for the Outline of how the issues and concerns raised
ESIA report during scoping will be addressed in the ESIA report.
Annex G Environmental Control Lonrho’s Environmental Control Rules and

Rules and Regulations Regulations
Annex H Memorandum of
Understanding between
Lonrho and the Ministry of
Transport
Annex I Livelihood Restoration Plan
Annex J Topographical Map
Annex K Additional Stakeholder

Engagement Materials(2013)
Annex L Proposed Stormwater
Management Plan
Annex M Oil Services Terminal
Masterplan (2013)

1-24
2 LEGAL AND POLICY FRAMEWORK
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This Chapter summarises the institutional framework applied to the Project, as

well as the most relevant national legislation and applicable international best
practice policies (including the Equator Principles, the International Finance
Corporation (IFC) Performance Standards and AfDB guidelines) that have
been taken into consideration in the preparation of the ESIA. In particular,
this Chapter provides a description of the following:
Ghanaian administrative and legislative organisation;
the Ghanaian environmental and social laws and regulations applicable to

the Project;
status of protected areas and species that may have an effect on the
proposed development;
international conventions and standards to which Ghana is a signatory

and which the Project must therefore take into account;
consideration where relevant, of other international conventions and

standards with which the Project will also be consistent; and
international treaties, conventions and protocols relevant to the Project

relate to such issues as biodiversity, climate change, marine pollution and
employment conditions.
2.2 GHANAIAN GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION FRAMEWORK
Ghanaian legislation is issued at the national level through policies, acts,

regulations and guidelines. These pieces of legislation are enforced by a
number of administrative bodies.
The key ministries and other administrative organisations that are relevant to
the Project are summarised in the following sections. Those government
agencies with interest or decision-making authorities for the Project include:
Ghana Environmental Protection Agency (EPA);

Ghana Maritime Authority (GMA);
Ghana Ports and Harbor Authority (GPHA);
Ministry of Agriculture (Fisheries Commission);
Ministry of Finance and Economic Planning;
Ministry of Energy;
Ministry of Water Resources, Works and Houses;

1
Ministry of Trade and Industry;
Ministry of Roads and Highways;
Ministry of Transport;
Free Zone Authority;
Ministry of Lands and Natural Resources;
Civil Aviation Authority;
Western Region Administration; and
Ellembelle District
2.2.1 Ghana Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
The EPA falls under the Ministry of Environment Science and Technology and
is the leading public body for protecting and improving the environment in
Ghana. The EPA is charged with carrying out Government policy and
legislation, inspecting and regulating businesses and reacting when there is an
emergency such as a pollution incident.
In addition, the EPA’s objectives are to create awareness of the environmental

considerations in the development process at the national, regional, district
and community levels and ensure implementation of environmental policy to
promote the maintenance of environmental quality in Ghana. The EPA is also
tasked with ensuring environmentally sound and efficient use of both
renewable and non-renewable resources and guiding development to prevent,
reduce, and as far as possible, eliminate pollution.
The main pieces of legislation enforced by the EPA are:
Environmental Protection Agency Act, 1994 (Act 490);

Environmental Assessment Regulations, 1999;
Fees and Charges (Amendment) Instrument, 2011 (LI 1986); and
Fees and Charges (Amendment) Regulations (2011)
The EPA is the primary decision-making authority in the EIA process and
environmental permitting authority for the Project.
2.2.2 Ghana Maritime Authority and Ghana Ports and Harbours Authority
The Ghana Maritime Authority (GMA) and the Ghana Ports and Harbours
Authority (GPHA) fall within the Ministry of Transport. The Ghana Maritime
Authority Act, 2002 (Act 630) establishes the GMA with responsibility to
monitor regulate and coordinate activities in the maritime industry, and the
responsibility to implement the provisions of enactments on shipping in
Ghana. The primary objectives of the GMA are to regulate, monitor and
coordinate the country’s maritime industry.
These aims are met through various obligations including:
the implementation of the provisions of the Ghana Shipping Act 2003 (Act
45);

2
ensuring safe navigation in Ghanaian waters;
regulating the activities of shipping agents, freight-forwarders and similar

shipping service providers; and
ensuring the implementation of international maritime conventions.
The Ghana Ports and Harbours Authority Act, 1986 under the PNDC Law 160
established the Ghana Ports and Harbour Authority (GPHA). The GPHA, a
merger of the former Ghana Ports Authority, Ghana Cargo Handling
Company Limited and Takoradi Lighterage Company Limited, is a Statutory
Corporation operating under the Provisional National Council Law (PNDCL
160) of 1986 and owns Ghana's two main ports, Takoradi and Tema built in
1928 and 1962 respectively. The GPHA is charged with the responsibility of
planning, building, managing, maintaining and operating the seaports of
Ghana that are outlined in this Act.
The Project is being developed privately by Lonrho, with the Government of

Ghana and the Stool being equity partners. Although the port is being
developed in line with the principles and guidelines of the GMA, the
overseeing governmental body is in fact the Free Zone Board under the Free
Zone Act (504/1995) (see Section 2.2.7), as the development is expected to be
designated as a Free Port.
The Shipping Act 2002, (Act 645) regulates shipping activities including
requirements for access and prohibition of trade in Ghanaian waters. The Act
details the qualifications for the ownership of Ghanaian ships, registration and
importation of foreign vessels and details on obtaining registration.
2.2.3 Ministry of Agriculture (Fisheries Commission)
The Fisheries Regulation LI 1968 was introduced on the 16th June 2010 by the
Minister responsible for fisheries based on section 139 (1) of the Fisheries Act,
2002 (Act 625) and on recommendation of the Fisheries Commission. The
Fisheries Commission was established in order to regulate, manage and
sustainably develop the fisheries in Ghanaian waters.
The key functions of the Fisheries Commission are to facilitate the formulation
and implementation of appropriate policies and programmes in support of a
sustainable fishing industry and ensure the implementation of fisheries laws
and regulations. In addition, the Fisheries Commission is tasked with
generating social economic data as basis for improving the human capacity of
the fishing industry and collaborating with sub-regional and international
organisation in the study and management of shared fisheries resources.
The Fisheries Commission also plays a facilitating role in the acquisition and
marketing of produce to fishers, fish farmers, fish processors and traders

3
provides technical support to fishermen, fish farmers, fish processors and
traders on efficient management of fisheries resources.
The Fisheries Commission is an important stakeholder in terms of planning

for livelihood restoration associated with the loss of fishing areas as a result of
the Project.
2.2.4 Ministry of Energy
The Ministry of Energy is tasked with the development, implementation,

monitoring and evaluation of energy sector policies, including petroleum,
power and renewable energy sectors. The Ministry is tasked with providing
easily accessible energy services to the citizens of Ghana in an
environmentally sustainable manner. Specifically, the Ministry leads the
following activities:
development of infrastructure for the production and supply of adequate

energy services to meet national requirement and for export;
developing the required infrastructure to ensure universal access and

efficient and reliable supply of energy services;
ensuring that energy is produced and supplied in a form that minimises

adverse health, safety and environmental impacts; and
ensuring that energy is produced, transported and used efficiently.
The Ministry has also developed a Local Content Policy (Section 2.3.1) to
ensure Ghanaian involvement and employment in energy-related projects.
Although no resulting legislation has been enacted, the policy aims to ensure
that local Ghanaians share in the development and profit potential associated
with major oil and gas projects within the country.
2.2.5 Ministry of Finance and Economic Planning
The Ministry of Finance and Economic Planning is responsible for the

following activities:
mobilisation of external and internal resources;

allocation of resources to all economic sectors;
ensuring sustainability of public debt;
preparing and implementing Ghana’s annual budget and financial
statements;
management of public expenditure; and
development and implementation of financial sector policies.
As part of its objectives, the Ministry aims to promote sustainable economic

growth and development of Ghana and its people (Ministry of Finance and
Economic Planning, 2012). As part of the Ghana public private partnership

4
programme, the Ministry has also compiled a draft resettlement policy
framework which sets out the requirements for project developers with regard
to physical and economic resettlement of Ghanaians potentially affected by
their Projects.
Although all forms of physical resettlement are being avoided by the

proposed Project, there will be economic resettlement as a result of the Project.
The resettlement planning and implementation will need to take cognizance of
this policy.
2.2.6 Ministry of Trade and Industry
The Ministry of Trade and Industry has overall responsibility for the
formulation, implementation and monitoring of Ghana's internal and external
trade. It is the sector ministry that ensures that Ghana derives maximum
benefit from internal trade relations and that domestic trade is conducted in a
smooth and orderly manner. The Ministry seeks to strengthen trade relations
with all friendly countries with a particular focus on African countries.
To meet the challenges posed by the changing domestic and international

trade environment; the Ministry is pursuing proactive policies designed to
create conditions for the renewal of Ghanaian industry and commerce. One of
the major policy measures being employed for the achievement of accelerated
and sustainable growth is the Ghana Trade and Investment Gateway
Programme, which seeks to promote foreign direct investment and to
establish Ghana as a major manufacturing, value-added, financial and
commercial centre in West Africa. The Ministry of Trade and Industry
oversees the Free Zone Board, which will oversee the proposed Project.
2.2.7 Free Zones Board
The Free Zone Act (504/1995) established the Free Zones Board as responsible
for implementation of the Act. The Act enables the establishment of free zone
areas in Ghana, where incentives and tax-free operations are used to make
these areas attractive to foreign investment. The Free Zones programme has
become an important tool ensuring Ghana is an attractive investment
destination for foreign countries.
Through the Free Zones programme, Export Processing Zones are also being
developed. These areas are established to encourage the development of
commercial and service activities at air and seaport areas, thus ensuring the
whole country is accessible to potential investors.
The Project will be located in one of the Export Processing Zones and will
therefore be regulated by the Free Zone Board (rather than the Ghana Harbour
and Ports Authority).

5
2.2.8 Ministry of Roads and Highways
The Ministry of Roads and Highways is mandated to provide and maintain an

integrated, cost-effective and sustainable road transport network. The main
objective of the ministry is to create and sustain an accessible and efficient
transport network and to integrate land use, transport and development
planning with effective service provision.
2.2.9 Ghana Highways Authority
This Act is in place to establish the authority responsible for the

administration, control, development and maintenance of trunk roads and
related facilities. The Act designates this Ghana Highways Authority as
responsible for the upkeep, management and construction of bridges, road
closures, trunk road excavations and toll roads.
2.2.10 Ministry of Lands and Natural Resources
The Ministry of Lands and Natural Resources manages the lands, forests,
wildlife and mineral resources of Ghana. Their aim is to ensure the
sustainable management and utilisation of Ghana’s natural resources for
socio-economic growth and development. In order to achieve this goal the
ministry has set out the following objectives, namely to:
• develop and manage sustainable lands, forest, wildlife and mineral

resources;
• facilitate equitable access and benefit sharing;
• promote both public awareness and local communities participation as

well as private sector involvement;
• to review, update, harmonise and consolidate existing legislation and

policies and support and lead research initiatives; and
• develop effective institutional capacity at the national, regional, district

and community levels.
In addition, the Land Commission was established under the Ministry Lands
and Natural Resources to oversee all Land issues. The commission comprises
four divisions:
• Land Registration Division (Formerly Land Title Registry and the Deeds
Registry);
• Land Valuation Division (Formerly Land Valuation Board);
• Survey and Mapping Division (Formerly Survey Department); and
• Public and Vested Lands Management Division (Formerly Lands
Commission) (Common wealth of nations, 2012).

6
The Land Commission governs land acquisitions, as will be required for the
Project.
2.2.11 Ministry of Transport
The Ministry of Transport was created to oversee infrastructural development

and service delivery predominantly for the maritime and rail transporation
subsectors and to complement the other modes of transport in the country. As
mentioned above, the Ghana Maritime Authority (GMA) and the Ghana Ports
and Habour Authority (GPHA) all fall under the National Ministry of
Transport (refer to Section 2.2.2).
In addition to this, two authorities relating to road and vehicle usage have
been established under the Ministry of Transport, the Road Safety
Commission and the Driver and Vehicle Licencing Authority. The Road
Safety Commission aims to develop and implement interventions to ensure
the sustainable management of road safety in Ghana. In line with this
mandate, the Road Safety Commission have developed the Road Safety
Strategy III 2011-2020, a strategic framework which aims to address and
reduce the increasing trend in road traffic related fatalities and injuries.
With assistance from the GMA and GPHA, the ministry aims to ensure the
provision of an efficient, safe, economic and reliable movement of goods and
people using the rail and maritime systems and ensure the rail, inland
waterways, ports and harbours contribute significantly to the socio-economic
development of the country.
The roads and transportation infrastructure related to the Project will need
authorised and approved by the Ministry of Transport. All construction and
operation of these roads will have to be carried out in accordance with the
above mentioned Road Safety Strategy III 2011-2020.
A copy of the Memorandum of Understanding (2011) that exists between

Lonrho and the Ministry of Transport in relation to the proposed Project is
provided in Annex M.
2.2.12 Civil Aviation Authority
The main objective of the Civil Aviation Authority is to provide safe, secure
and effective aviation regulations and air navigation services. This authority
issues licences and certification for airports and airstrips and provides training
and technical support for the Ghanaian aviation industry.
The airstrip on the Project site (as well as associated aircraft and helicopters)
will need to be authorised by the Civil Aviation Authority and therefore must
comply with the associated regulations.

7
2.2.13 Western Region Administration
The local government system, as defined under the Local Government Act 462
of 1993, is made up of the Regional Coordinating Council (RCC), four-tier
Metropolitan and three-tier Municipal/District Assemblies with
Urban/Town/Area/Zonal Councils Unit Committees. The RCC is the head
of the local government system and is the highest decision-making body.
There are ten RCCs corresponding to ten Regions within Ghana. The RCC is
made up of the following:
regional minister as chairman, and his deputies;

presiding member of each district assembly;
district Chief Executive of each district in the region;
two chiefs from the Regional House of Chiefs;
regional coordinating director (secretary to the RCC and the head of the
civil administration of the region); and
regional heads of decentralised ministries.
The RCCs under Act 462 are non-executive bodies responsible for monitoring,
coordinating and evaluating the performance of the district assemblies and
any agency of the central government, rather than a political and policy-
making body.
The Western region Administration is the regional administrative body in the

province associated with the Project and will have decision-making powers in
terms of infrastructure development and planning.
2.2.14 Ellembelle District
The Western Region has 19 parliamentarians at the National Assembly

representing the people of the district and each of the district assemblies
within the region. The Project site falls within the Ellembelle District, which
comprises one constituency with seven area councils and 31 electoral areas.
The district capital is Nkroful. These area council authorities complement the
functions of the district assemblies. The Project site falls within the Atuabo
Area Council.
Until 2007, the Ellembelle District Assembly (EDA) was part of the Nzema
East District. In December 2007, the EDA was created by Legal Instrument
1918, and was inaugurated in February 2008. Strategic development planning
for the District is in its early phase, including planning related to the
emergence of the oil and gas industry and related industrial activities.
2.3 RELEVANT DEVELOPMENT POLICY AND PLANS
The following is a summary of known policy and project development plans

with relevance to the Project.

8
2.3.1 Relevant National Policies
The National Environmental Policy (NEP)
The Ghanaian Government has been working towards a comprehensive

environmental strategy since 1988. The National Environmental Policy (NEP)
was adopted in 1991 with the aim to improve the living conditions and the
quality of life of all Ghanaian citizens while seeking to ensure increasing
economic and social development and conserving natural resources and
ensuring a high environmental quality. In particular, the NEP specifically
seeks to:
maintain ecosystems and ecological processes essential for the functioning

of the biosphere;
ensure sound management of natural resources and the environment;
adequately protect humans, plants and animals, their biological

communities and habitats against harmful impacts and destructive
practice, and preserve biological diversity;
guide development in accordance with quality requirements to prevent,

reduce and as far as possible, eliminate pollution and nuisances; and
integrate environmental considerations in sectoral, structural and socio-

economic planning at the national, regional district and “grassroots”
levels.
The Government of Ghana has undertaken to apply the precautionary

principals to environmental issues and has committed itself to the following
actions:
commit to environmentally sound use of both renewable and non-

renewable resources in the process of national development;
develop procedures for the utilisation of land resources in a manner that

will ensure the maximum efficiency and avoid conflict;
take appropriate measures to protect critical ecosystems, including the

flora and fauna; and
promote and support research programmes aimed at better understanding

of the different ecozones, health-related environmental problems and
appropriate technologies for environmentally sound management
(including renewable energy resources).
The NEP provided a framework for the implementation of the National

Environmental Action Plan (NEAP) as well as a number of other policies
relating to conservation and environmental management. The NEAP is a

9
comprehensive document based on the extensive review of large sectors of the
country’s economy including land management, forestry and wildlife, water
management, marine and coastal ecosystems, mining, manufacturing
industries, hazardous chemicals, and human settlements. This plan is based
on the managing the environment in a sustainable manner and calls for the
establishment of monitoring and reporting programmes on the local, regional
and national level. The NEAP also makes mention of the need for Ghana to
participate and collaborate internationally in international environmental
conservation efforts.
Strategic National Energy Plan (SNEP) (2006 to 2020)
The Ghanian Energy Commission has developed a Strategic National Energy

Plan (SNEP) (July, 2006) to plan to meet the future demands for energy in
Ghana (from 2006 to 2020) in a sustainable manner. The direct objective of
SNEP is to contribute to the overall development of an energy market which
provides sufficient, viable and efficient energy services for Ghana. The
implementation of SNEP is considered important to contribute to Ghana’s
long-term development plans (ie Ghana Poverty Reduction Strategy) and the
transformation its low-income developing country status into an upper
middle-income one by 2020. The plan sets out ten key objectives for
implementation within the energy sector, namely to:
1) “Stimulate economic development by ensuring that energy plays a catalytic role

in Ghana’s economic development.
2) Consolidate, improve and expand existing energy infrastructure.
3) Increase access to modern energy services for poverty reduction in off-grid rural
areas.
4) Secure and increase future energy security by diversifying sources of energy
supply.
5) Accelerate the development and utilization of renewable energy and energy
efficiency technologies.
6) Enhance private sector participation in energy infrastructure development and
service delivery.
7) Minimise environmental impact of energy production, supply and utilisation.
8) Strengthen institutional and human resource capacity and R&D in energy
development.
9) Improve governance of energy sector.
10) Sustain and improve commitment to energy integration as part of economic
integration of West Africa”.
In line with Objective 2, this Project provides supporting infrastructure and

facilities to service Ghana’s oil and gas industry’s operations.
Local Content Policy
The Ghanaian “Policy on Local Content and Local Participation in the

Petroleum Industry” was announced by the Minister of Energy during March
2012. The primary objective of the policy is to ensure a minimum percentage
of the monetary value of goods and services is sourced from Ghana and the

10
minimum level of Ghanaian equity ownership within the industry. The policy
is intended to assist with the sustainable development of the oil and gas
industry in Ghana and help to avoid social and political instabilities, by
promoting and requiring involvement of Ghanaian citizens, goods and
services.
The policy requires that local content and participation should be embedded
into the planning and development phases of every oil and gas-related Project.
The policy requires that a minimum of 90 percent of supplies and services
should be sourced within Ghana within ten years of the commencement of a
Project. These minimum local content requirements increase from 10 percent
at the commencement of the Project, to 20 percent in the second year and a
further 10 percent each year thereafter until the targeted 90 percent is reached.
In addition, the policy provides that priority should be given to Ghanaian

citizens for the ownership of concession areas such that local participation by
the Ghanaian private sector should be at least 5 percent in petroleum licenses,
permits and contract operators and at least 10 percent for providers of
supplies and services.
The policy also outlines that the submission of a detailed annual recruitment
and training programme for recruiting and training Ghanaians within 12
months of receiving a grant or license. The staffing requirements of the policy
are as follows:
management staff: at least 50 percent Ghanaian from start of Project

activities, increasing to a target of 80 percent in the first five years.
core technical staff: 30 percent at commencement increasing to 80 percent

in five years and further to 90 percent in ten years.
other staff: a target of 100 percent Ghanaians.
As part of Lonrho’s Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) policies the Project

will strive to meet the Government of Ghana’s targets in respect of local
content. This will be reflected in terms of contracting and employment.
National Wetlands Conservation Strategy
The National Wetlands Conservation Strategy, implemented in 1999 by the

Ministry of Lands and Forestry, provides the formalised guidelines,
recommendations and frameworks necessary to ensure the conservation of
Ghana’s wetlands and their associated ecosystem goods and services. The
Government of Ghana has recognised the importance of wetlands in
maintaining the water table, mitigating floods as well as in the process of
water purification. In order to conserve these functions this strategy seeks to
discourage:
the physical draining of wetland water;

11
draining of streams and water courses feeding the wetlands;
human settlements and their related infrastructural developments in
wetlands;
disposal of solid waste and effluents in wetlands; and
mining in wetlands.
The policy also seeks to promote the use of wetlands for farming, grazing,
fishing, timber production and salt-winning, provided that such uses also
serve to conserve the ecosystem, biodiversity and sustainable productivity of
the wetlands.
The strategy identifies the major threats to wetland systems as water loss
through drainage, salt water intrusion in coastal areas (as a result of drainage
or excessive use of the water resources) and pollution through discharge of
contaminated effluent, including sewage.
Through this strategy, Ghana has initiated a number of conservation projects

to conserve and restore wetlands and is part of the RAMSAR convention
which recognises environmentally important wetlands throughout the world.
The wetlands conservation strategy aims to achieve the following five
objectives:
promote the participation of local communities, traditional authorities,

and other stakeholders in sound management and sustainable utilisation
of Ghana’s wetland resources;;
maintain the ecological, cultural, recreational and aesthetic values of

wetlands;
ensure that national policies, local knowledge, regulations and activities

contribute to the sound management of Ghana’s wetland resources;;
ensure that capacity-building and appropriate legal and institutional

frameworks are in place for effective wetland conservation; and
create awareness on the importance of wetlands and encourage a

commitment from the people of Ghana to conservation and wise use of
wetlands.
The term ‘wetland’ refers to a “wide range of habitats that share common features,
the most important of which is continuous, seasonal or periodic standing water or
saturated soils” (National Wetlands Conservation Strategy, 1999). In addition
to the Amansuri Wetland areas (classified as freshwater swamp forests)
located approximately 3 km to the northwest of the site, the baseline studies
indicate seasonal inundation of areas within the Project site. These low-lying
areas will be cleared and possibly elevated as part of the construction phase of
the Project.

12
The Project design and operation will therefore need to minimise the removal
of seasonally inundated areas on the Project site as well as possible
disturbance to neighbouring wetland areas.
2.3.2 The Coordinated Programme of Economic and Social Development Policies,

2010 – 2016
In 2011, Ghana’s Parliament adopted a report by the Committee on Poverty

Reduction Strategy entitled The Coordinated Programme of Economic and
Social Development Policies for 2010-2016. The strategy was dubbed “Agenda
for Shared Growth and Accelerated Development for a Better Ghana (2010 – 2016)”
(hereafter called “Agenda”) and was designed to address historical economic
and social challenges that are seen to have hampered national development.
The Agenda is driven by a medium-term vision of shared growth through
accelerated job creation, integrated industrial development and agricultural
modernisation, via policy measures that the government plans to pursue in
order to “transform the economy from its over-dependence on primary raw materials
to a diversified and prosperous 21st Century nation” (President Atta Mills, State of
the Nation Address, 2010).
The Agenda stipulates that in the medium term, government’s policy choices
should be designed to ensure an annual minimum average real Gross
Domestic Product (GDP) growth rate of 8.0 percent to guarantee the
attainment of a per capita income of at least 3,000 USD by the year 2020. In
the long-term, the vision is to deliver an industrial economy with sustainable
quality jobs.
This “strategic blueprint” document is set to drive sectoral and district

programmes and strategic initiatives including:
agricultural modernisation;
infrastructure development;
integrated industrialization funded through innovative financing
combining public and private sector resources;
infrastructural expansion and modernisation;
human development (including a commitment to gender equity);
private sector development;
transparent and accountable governance; and
bilateral state-to-state arrangements.
To achieve this Agenda the Government of Ghana (GoG) has identified priority
areas for intervention (Box 2.1).

13
Box 2.1 “Better Ghana Agenda” priority interventions
• Economic Development
• Social Development
• Science, Technology and Innovation
• Infrastructural Development
• Special Development Zones
• Natural Resource Management and Environmental Governance
• Transparent and Accountable Governance
As a country, Ghana has political stability, a stable macro-economic

environment and an abundance of natural resource endowments. The GoG,
in further exploring the country’s various strengths, has recognised the
discovery of oil and gas and its associated activities as a major development
opportunity that has introduced a potential paradigm shift for the nation’s
development prospects, policy dynamics and potential risks. As the world
economy hinges on oil and gas, the GoG has asserted that all policy decision-
making at all levels should be designed to take advantage of this strategic
resource. The international community’s interest in Ghana as a result of this
discovery could bring in significant investment and catalyse the anticipated
industrial development and increased employment opportunities, with
concomitant spin-offs.
The Agenda as a national policy document thus recognises that all

programmes and initiatives should be developed in a strategic manner in light
of planned exploitation of the newly discovered oil and gas and other natural
resource endowments. It is this position that has driven the World Bank to
reclassify Ghana from a low-income status country to lower middle-income
status.
2.3.3 Land Commission Guidelines for Considering Large-Scale Land Transactions

for Agricultural and other Purposes
In February 2012 the Land Commission released a policy document aimed at

providing guidelines when faced with acquisitions of tracts of land larger than
50 acres (20.2 hectares). The Commission points out that most land in Ghana
is owned by traditional leaders (from chiefs to family heads) who generally
have not had experience in managing such large transactions. In addition, the
Commission highlights that most of the land users in rural areas (where the
majority of large scale land acquisitions are occurring in Ghana) are
smallholder farmers without registered title deeds or interests on those lands.
Most of these farmers only have rights to use the land and are thus vulnerable
to negotiations undertaken by a higher interest holder (like a chief or family
head) over the release of the land.
The Policy outlines processes that should be followed during such

transactions and emphasises the participation of all stakeholders in the
process to ensure first-hand access to information on all aspects of the

14
acquisition and the ability to express concerns. Furthermore, it emphasises
the need for the full range of participants to find solutions to address those
concerns (Land Commission Policy Document, February 2012).
2.3.4 Resettlement Policy Framework (RPF)
This draft framework was developed in 2011 by the Ministry of Finance and
Economic Planning as part of the Government of Ghana’s Public-Private
Partnership (PPP) programme. This programme was established in an
attempt to increase investment in public service delivery and infrastructure in
support of the country’s growing development needs. The developments and
projects proposed by the PPP are likely to involve land acquisition and
resettlement impacts which are addressed by the RPF.
The RPF has been developed in line with the Performance Standards’ and as
part of a World Bank funding application for support of the PPP programme.
The RPF guidelines and requirements must be adhered to during the
planning, construction and operation of any PPP project.
This Project will be developed and operated by Lonrho, with the Government
of Ghana as a shareholder in the Project. As such, the Project can be
considered as PPP, and these guidelines will be taken into consideration in the
planning and implementation of the resettlement aspects related to land
acquisition.
2.3.5 Western Region Spatial Development Framework (WRSDF)
The preparation of the Western Regional Spatial Development Framework

(WRSDF) is a project funded by NORAD under its “Oil for Development
Programme Agreement” together with the Government of Ghana. The
WRSDF is a spatial plan and platform for the integration of social, economic
and environmental policies and plans for the region and is currently in a draft
form. The key focus areas of the WRSSDF are settlements, economic
development, infrastructure and the environmental protection.
Settlements
The WRSDF has identified that the Western Region has an uneven population
distribution with the majority of high grade settlements (Grade 1:
metropolitan cities, Grade 2: regional capitals) within the coastal districts. In
order to balance the distribution, the WRSDF proposes to enhance the capacity
of market towns (Grade 3) in the western and northern districts (by linking
them to district capitals) which would then provide increased access to the
neighbouring smaller Grade 4 and 5 settlements.
Economic Development
The WRSDF lays out planning provisions for economic development and
divides the regional economy into four key sectors: agriculture, mining/

15
quarrying, oil and gas development and tourism and lays out the following
priorities for the region:
Agriculture: the WRSDF highlights the importance of understanding food

production potential, storage, processing and exporting and maximising
land use by increasing the yields of industrial crops (eg cocoa). The
document recognises the importance of protecting forest reserves for
future timber crops and biodiversity.
Mining: The WRSDF proposes the delineation of all mineralised areas,

marking areas for future mining concessions over approximately 20 years
and to avoid resettlement.
Oil and gas: In order for the oil and gas sector to become a key
employment and business opportunity for Ghanaians, the WRSDF
recommends the establishment of training and business facilities in
growth nodes throughout the Western Region and that oil and gas
activities be confined within two specified zones.
Tourism: For tourism development, the document recommends support of

top-end tourism and the protection of high biodiversity, cultural and
conservation sites.
Infrastructural Development
The WRSDF recommends an Integrated Transport Policy for the Western

Region compliant with the National Plan and including road, rail, port and
harbours and airports. The energy supply of the region is expected to be
boosted by the developing oil and gas exploration and future production
although a high level of investment is required to develop water resources to
meet expected future requirements.
Environmental Protection
The WRSDF includes implementation measures for environmental protection,

including measures against illegal logging and delineation and protection of
remaining pockets of high biodiversity such as primary forests and wetland
areas. The WRSDF identifies the need for better monitoring of land
rehabilitation following gold mining operations and improvements in
measuring and monitoring pollution sources. The report determines that
future developments be constructed outside the 100 year flood line of rivers
and 1 m above the 100 year rise in sea level.
Of significance to the Study Area is the WRSDF’s recognition of the discovery

of oil and gas as a key driver of development in the region. This is seen in the
following plans for onshore oil and gas developments including:

16
the Western Corridor gas infrastructure project (comprising the
construction of a gas processing plant at Atuabo and onshore trunk
pipelines);
an oil refinery and a large scale facility that would store Liquefied
Petroleum Gas and other petroleum products at Pumpuni (Ahanta West);
gas powered electricity generation at Domini Lagoon/ Bonyere (Jomoro),

Aboadze (Shama) and Prestea (Prestea Huni Valley); and
a specialist oil and gas harbour with associated supply facilities at Atuabo
(Ellembelle) (namely this proposed Project).
As mentioned above, a key objective driving this Regional sector and which
will apply to this Project, is the recognition that maximising employment
opportunities requires long term strategic plans for training as well as wide
access to business procurement in institutional, structural and future land use
and infrastructure terms.
As above, the Project has been highlighted as a key project for the
development of the oil and gas sector within the Western Region. Although
the WRSDF is still in a draft form, the Project will take cognizance of the other
plans within the WRSDF in the development and design of the Project.
2.3.6 Ellembelle District Assembly Medium-Term Development Plan 2010-2013
The Ellembelle District Assembly (EDA) was carved out of the then Nzema
East District and was created in December 2007 by Legal Instrument 1918.
The District was inaugurated in February 2008. The creation of the District
came at a time when the implementation of the four year Development Plan
(2006 – 2009) prepared under the Growth and Poverty Reductions Strategy
(GPRII) was being implemented, thus after its birth the District adopted the
relevant strategies enshrined in the Nzema East District Assembly Medium
Term Development Plan 2006-2009 (DMTDP). Although the EDA attempted
to implement these programmes and projects, it was confronted with
significant challenges and constraints relating to the inadequate and untimely
release of government and donor funds, limited human resources, inadequate
data for planning purposes and the high cost of goods and services. As a
result, the District Assembly in consultation with its stakeholders
subsequently re-aligned District strategies within the context of the Agenda
2010-2013, and formulated the Medium Term Development Plan (MTDP) 2010
– 2013.
The overarching goal of the Ellembelle District through the MTDP is to:
“coordinate social services and environmental sustainability, improve

security and develop accessibility to production areas and strengthen
local institution for equitable growth and sustainable
development” (Ellembelle MTDP, 2010).

17
The MTDP strives to harness both internal and external resources to
implement programmes and projects that are in line with the national Agenda,
referred to above.
Box 2.2 Ellembelle Supplementary Programme and Policy Areas
The Ellembelle District MTDP supplements the national “Better Ghana Agenda” through
policies and programmes under the following priorities and thematic areas:
Ensuring and sustaining of Macroeconomic Stability
Accelerated Agricultural Modernization and Sustainable Natural Resource Management
Oil and Gas Development
Infrastructure, Energy and Human Settlements
Enhancing Competitiveness in Ghana’s private Sector
Transparent and Accountable Governance
Human Development, Productivity and Employment
As highlighted in Box 2.2, in addition to the national Agenda, and the Regional
WRSDF, the Ellembelle MTDP also takes into account and prioritises oil and
gas-related development, through a variety of associated thematic areas.
Thus, the current Project is likely to profit from a focus in the Project area on
improved infrastructure as well as concerted administrative efforts to create a
socially and physically enabling environment. When designing the Project
and planning for impact mitigation and the maximisation of opportunities,
Lonrho would benefit by engaging with these national, regional and district
development policy documents – particularly when identifying non-core
activities, like corporate social responsibility (CSR) projects that could partner
with broader regional and district programmes to ensure sustainability
beyond the life of the Project.
2.4 GHANAIAN LAWS AND REGULATIONS
2.4.1 The Ghanaian Constitution
The Constitution of Ghana (Article 41(k) in Chapter 6) requires that all citizens
(employees and employers) protect and safeguard the natural environment of
the Republic of Ghana and its territorial waters. In response to this,
Parliament promulgated the Environmental Protection Agency Act 1994
which establishes the EPA who is responsible for enforcement of
environmental laws.
The right to information is guaranteed by the Constitution under Article 21(1)

(f) such that ‘All persons shall have the right to information subject to such
qualifications and laws as are necessary in a democratic society.’ This principle is
shown also in the stakeholder consultation requirements within the ESIA
process.

18
2.4.2 Ghana Environmental Legislation
In consideration of national environmental legislative requirements, the

following issues form some of the important environmental aspects of the
Project:
fisheries and access for fishing;

biodiversity and habitat disturbance;
coastal processes and geomorphology;
effluent and waste management and disposal;
seabed infrastructure development and dredging; and
noise emissions impacting local communities
Table 2.1 presents a summary of the most relevant and significant national
legislation that may apply to the Project, which are summarised in further
detail below.
Table 2.1 List of Relevant National Environmental Legislation

Environmental Protection Agency Act, 1994 (Act 490) Environmental Protection
Environmental Assessment Regulations, 1999 (LI 1652) EIA requirements and process
Environmental Assessment (Amendment) Regulations
Wild Animals Preservation Act, Act 235 1964 Biodiversity
Wildlife Conservation Regulations 1971 (LI 685), Biodiversity
Wild Reserves Regulations 1971 (LI 740) Biodiversity
Wetland Management (RAMSAR sites) Regulation, 1999 Biodiversity
Water Resources Commission Act (Act 522 of 1996) Water Resources
Water and Sewerage Corporation Act (Act 310 of 1965). Water Resources
Oil in Navigable Waters Act (Act 235 of 1964) Pollution Control
Maritime Zones (Delimitation) Law 1986 (PNDCL 159) Seabed Infrastructure
Development
Beaches Obstructions Ordinance, 1987 (CAP. 240) Beaches and coastal areas
Ghana Building Regulations (LI 1630) Development of physical
structures
Ghana National Petroleum Corporation Act (Act 64 of 1983) Petroleum activities
Petroleum (Exploration and Production) Law (Act 84 of 1984) Petroleum activities
National Petroleum Authority Act (Act 691 of 2005) Petroleum activities, including
the regulation of transport of
petroleum products
Ghana Civil Aviation Authority (aerodrome) regulations Aerodromes
2011 (LI 2004)
Ghana Maritime Authority Act (Act 630 of 2002) Maritime law
Petroleum Commission Act (Act 821 of 2011) Petroleum activities
Shipping Act (Act 645 of 2003) Maritime law
Ghana Highways Authority (Act 540 of 1997) Transport activities
Merchant Shipping (Dangerous Goods) Rules, 1974 (LI 971) Hazardous materials, maritime
law
The Environmental Protection Act
The Environmental Protection Agency Act (Act 490 of 1994) establishes the
authority, responsibility, structure and funding of the EPA. Part I of the Act

19
mandates the EPA with the formulation of environmental policy, issuing of
environmental permits and pollution abatement notices and prescribing
standards and guidelines. The Act defines the requirement for and
responsibilities of the Environmental Protection Inspectors and empowers the
EPA to request that an ESIA process be undertaken. The Act establishes and
mandates the EPA to seek and request information on any undertaking that in
the opinion of the Agency can have adverse environmental effects and to
instruct the proponent to take necessary measures to prevent the adverse
impacts.
Environmental Assessment Regulations
The ESIA process is legislated through the Environmental Assessment

Regulations (LI1 652, 1999) as amended (2002), the principal enactment within
the Environmental Protection Act (Act 490 of 1994). The ESIA Regulations
require that all activities likely to have an adverse effect on the environment
must be subject to environmental assessment and issuance of a permit before
commencement of the activity. The ESIA Regulations set out the requirements
for the following:
• Preliminary Environmental Assessments (PEAs);

• Environmental Impact Assessments (EIAs);
• Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) (also termed the ESIA Report);
• Environmental Management Plans (EMPs);
• Environmental Certificates; and
• Environmental Permitting.
Schedules 1 and 2 of the Regulations provide lists of activities for which an

environmental permit is required and ESIA is mandatory, respectively. Those
Activities for which an environmental assessment is mandatory include:
agricultural (including fishing) and related services;

all forms of mining;
manufacturing;
construction;
communication and other utilities; and
power generation and transmission.
The Environmental Assessment Regulations, 1999 (LI 1652), as amended in

2002 establishes the requirements for environmental assessment in Ghana.
The Act requires that an environmental permit be issued prior to starting any
undertaking listed in Schedule 1 to the Act. Section 3 then states that no
environmental permit shall be issued for undertakings listed in Schedule 2
unless an EIA, in terms of these regulations, has been submitted to the agency.
The regulations require that an application for an environmental permit be

submitted to the Agency. The Agency will then screen this application and
compile a report stating whether the application has been approved, is
objected to, requires submission of a preliminary environmental report or

20
requires the submission of an environmental impact statement. This decision
will be communicated to the applicant within 25 days from the date of receipt
of the permit application.
Sections 11, 13(1), 15(1), 16(3), 17(2, 3), 18 and 19 of the Regulations also
provide specific requirements for stakeholder engagement within the ESIA
process. This includes the requirements for engagement with relevant
Ministries, government departments and organisations and Metropolitan,
Municipal or District Assembly, distribution of ESIA documentation
(including the Scoping Report and EIS). The regulations also outline the
discretionary responsibilities of the EPA for stakeholder engagement within
the ESIA process, including disclosure of the EIS through notification and
public meetings.
In terms of the Environmental Impact Assessment regulations (1999), this

Project requires a full EIA process to obtain the environmental permit. The
ESIA process followed by Lonrho has been undertaken in accordance with the
national EIA regulations and guidelines.
Environmental Guidelines
The EPA has issued formal guidance on regulatory requirements and the ESIA
process. The following document is relevant to the ESIA process and the
Project: Environmental Assessment in Ghana, a Guide to Environmental Impact
Assessment Procedures (EPA, 1996). This is an EPA guidance document which
outlines procedures to be adhered to during the EIA process.
Included in the EPA’s EIA guidance document are a number of supporting

standards. Those that are considered applicable to the Project are presented
below. The design and operation of the Project will need to comply with these
limits.
Air Quality
The Ambient Air Quality Guidelines as described in the EPA’s EIA guideline
document are provided in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2 Ambient Air Quality Guidelines
Substance Time Weighted Average (TWA) Averaging Time

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) 900 μg/m3 Industrial 1 hour
700 μg/m3 Residential 1 hour
150 μg/m3 Industrial 24 hours
100 μg/m3 Residential 24 hours
80 μg/m3 Industrial 1 year
50 μg/m3 Residential 1 year
Nitrogen Oxides 400 μg/m3 Industrial 1 hour
(Measured as N02) 200 μg/m3 Residential 1 hour
150 μg/m3 Industrial 24 hours

21
Substance Time Weighted Average (TWA) Averaging Time
Total Suspended 230 μg/m3 Industrial 24 hours
Particulate 150 μg/m3 Residential 24 hours
75 μg/m3 Industrial 1 year
60 μg/m3 Residential 1 year
PM10 70 μg/m 3 24 hours
Smoke 150 μg/m3 Industrial 24 hours
50 μg/m3 Industrial 1 hour
30 mg/m3 Residential 1 hour
Carbon Monoxide 100 mg/m3 15 min
60 mg/m3 30 min
30 mg/m3 1 hour
10 mg/m3 8 hours
Hydrogen Sulphide 150 μg/m3 24 hours
Mercury 1 μg/m3 1 year
Lead 2.5 μg/m3 1 year
Cadmium 10 - 20 ng/m3 1 year
Manganese 1 μg/m3 24 hours
Dichloromethane 3 mg/m3 24 hours
(Methylene Chloride)
1,2-Dichloroethane 0.7 mg/m3 24 hours
Trichloroethane 1 mg/m3 24 hours
Tetrachloroethene 5 mg/m3 24 hours
Sector Specific Effluent Discharge Guidelines

These are provided for a number of different industries, although those
applicable to project activities include the Food and Beverages Industry and
the Hospitals and Clinics Industry. The specific effluent limits are laid out in
Table 2.3.
Table 2.3 Sector-specific effluent quality guidelines for discharges into natural water
bodies (maximum permissible levels) as stipulated by the EPA
Parameter Sectors
Food and Beverages Hospitals and Clinics
pH 6-9 6-9
Oil and Grease 5 5
Temperature Increase < 3 °C above ambient < 3 °C above ambient
Colour (TCU) 200 150
COD (mg/l) 250 250
BOD3 (mg/l) 50 50
Total dissolved Solids 1000 1000
(mg/l)
Cadium (mg/l)
Chromium (+6) mg/l 0.1
Sulphide (mg/l) 1.5 1.5
Phenol (mg/l) 2 2
Total Coliforms 400 400
(MPN/100 ml)
E.Coli (MPN/100 ml) 10 10
Turbidity (N.T.U) 75 75
Total suspended solids 50
(mg/l)
Lead (mg/l) 0.1 0.1

22
Parameter Sectors
Food and Beverages Hospitals and Clinics
Nitrate (mg/l) 50 50
Total Phosphorus (mg/l) 2 2.0
Conductivity (µS/cm) 1500 1500
Mercury (mg/l) 0.005 0.005
Ammonia as N (mg/l) 1.0
Zinc (mg/l)
Total Pesticides (mg/l) 0.5
Total Arsenic (mg/l) 1.0
Soluble Arsenic (mg/l) 0.1
Alkalinity as CaCO3 150
(mg/l)
Fluoride (mg/l) 10
Chloride (mg/l) 250
Total Chromium (mg/l)
Total Iron (mg/l)
Copper (mg/l)
All effluent generated by Project related activities (including the planned

hospital and catering facilities) will need to comply with the Ghanaian effluent
limits and/ or World Bank EHS Guidelines (described further in Section 2.6.3
below), whichever are more stringent.
Ambient noise level guidelines

The maximum permissible noise levels during day and night time hours are
presented in Table 2.4.
Table 2.4 Ambient Noise Level Standards in Ghana
Zone Description of Noise Receptor Permissible Noise Level in dB (A)
Day Night
06:00 – 22:00 22:00 – 06:00
A Residential areas with negligible or 55 48
infrequent transportation
B1 Educational (school) and health (hospital 55 50
clinic)
Facilities
B2 Area with some commercial or light 60 55
industry
C1 Area with some light industry, place of 65 60
entertainment or public assembly and place
of worship such as churches and mosques
C2 Predominantly commercial areas 75 65
D Light industrial areas 70 60
E Predominantly heavy industrial areas 70 70
The Project will need to take these ambient noise level standards into account
for the planning of construction and operation phase activities to ensure that
these are not exceeded.

23
Biodiversity
The pieces of legislation which regulate biodiversity in Ghana are the Wild
Animals Preservation Act, Act 235 1964, Wildlife Conservation Regulations 1971
(LI685), the Wild Reserves Regulations 1971 (LI 740).
The Wild Animals Preservation Act, Act 235 1964 provides for various matters
relating to the protection of wildlife in Ghana including the appointment of
game officers, collection of specimens for scientific purposes and hunting and
the identification of wholly or partially protected faunal species. The Wildlife
Conservation Regulations 1971 (LI685), as amended, provide further regulations
for hunting, commercialisation of animals and various other provisions for the
conservation and protection of faunal species in Ghana.
The Wild Reserves Regulations 1971 (LI 740) allow for the designation and
proclamation of protected areas, in various categories. The regulations
prohibit certain activities (eg hunting, removal of faunal or floral species)
allowed within the various reserves without a permit. The regulations forbid
the pollution of water resources and littering within a protected area.
Project activities will need to take into account the requirements with respect
to the preservation of faunal species and minimising pollution of the
environment set out in the above legislation.
Water Resources
Water resources in Ghana are government by two pieces of legislation, namely

the Water Resources Commission Act (Act 522 of 1996) and the Water and
Sewerage Corporation Act (Act 310 of 1965).
The Water Resources Commission Act (Act 52 of 1996) establishes a commission

to regulate and manage the water resources of the Republic of Ghana. The
commission is tasked with establishing comprehensive plans for the use,
conservation, protection, development and improvement of Ghana’s water
resources and is able to grant water rights for the exploitation of water
resources. Water rights must be obtained for the use of water resources, on
application from the Commission. The Act specifies the requirements and
process for the application and transfer of water rights.
Section 14(e) of the Water and Sewerage Corporation Act (Act 310 of 1965)
establishes a body mandated with:
‘(a) the provision, distribution and conservation of the supply of water in

Ghana for public, domestic and industrial purposes; and
(b) the establishment, operation and control of the sewerage systems for
such purposes.’

24
In addition, the Water and Sewerage Corporation is authorised to formulate
regulations regarding the prevention of water pollution.
The Project will need to ensure that any associated water use as well as
effluent and sewage released into the environment complies with the
requirements under these Acts.
Pollution Control
There is currently no single integrated pollution legislation in Ghana.

Pollution control exists as part of the environmental and water resource
legislation and marine pollution is dealt with by the Oil in Navigable Waters Act
(Act 235 of 1964) (see below). The Act makes the discharge of any oil or
mixture containing oil from any vessel or from land, an offence.
The EPA is also entitled to issue pollution abatement notices under section 2(f)
of the Environmental Protection Act (Act 490 of 1994) for:
“controlling the volume, types, constituents and effects of waste

discharges, emissions, deposits or other sources of pollutants and of
substances which are hazardous or potentially dangerous to the quality if
the environment or any segment of the environment…”
Furthermore, Section 2(h) of the same act permits the EPA to prescribe
standards and guidelines relating to air, water, land and other forms of
environmental pollution.
The operations of the port, including effluent management, ships wastes and
disposal of dredged materials will need to comply with these guidelines and
legislation regarding discharges to the environment.
Coastal and Marine Areas
Ghana subscribes to a number of international conservation programmes,

however, Ghana has at present no nationally legislated coastal or marine
protected areas and there are no international protection programmes
specifically covering the Project area. The Wetland Management (RAMSAR
Sites) Regulations 1999 are made under the Wild Animals Preservation Act 1961
(Act 43) and provide for the establishment of RAMSAR sites within Ghana.
There are five designated RAMSAR wetland sites along the coast of Ghana
including: Keta Lagoon Complex, Densu Wetland, Muni-Pomadze, Sakumo
and Songor. There is a sixth RAMSAR site (Owabi Wildlife Sanctuary)
situated inland. These are located within the Volta, Greater Accra and Central
regions and do not lie close to the Project site.
Ghana also has two UN Biosphere Reserves (Bia and Songor) and two World
Heritage Convention sites. The World Heritage Convention sites include the
Asante Traditional Buildings, located near Kumasi, as well as Forts and

25
Castles, most of which are located along the coast in the Central and Western
Regions (UNESCO, 2009).
The Beaches Obstructions Ordinance, 1897 (CAP. 240) details the permissions
and authorisations required prior to the removal of sand from the beach and
coastal areas as well as digging of channels etc. The legislation also details
repercussions for any activities or persons causing obstructions for navigation.
Ghana Maritime Authority Act establishes the Ghana Maritime Authority

(GMA) as responsible for the regulation and coordination of activities in the
maritime industry and for the implementation of the provisions of enactments
on shipping. The act requires that the GMA advise on policies for the
development and maintenance of maritime infrastructure such as ports and
harbours in the country and regulate the activities of shipping agents, freight
forwarders and similar shipping service providers.
The Shipping Act (Act 645 of 2003) regulates trade in Ghanaian waters and
stipulates the grounds on which trade is permissible. The Act includes details
such as how a party may qualify for the ownership of Ghanaian ships,
registration as well as the importation of foreign vessels. The Merchant
Shipping (Dangerous Goods) Rules, 1974 (LI 971) provide requirements for
the management and handling of dangerous goods.
The Project will need to conform to the above-mentioned legislation in terms

of all activities carried out in along beaches and coastal area, including
permissions for the marine and beach works
Protected Areas and Species
The following is a summary of the status of protected areas in Ghana,

including those identified as environmentally sensitive areas, terrestrial
protected areas, coastal and marine protected areas and protected species.
Nationally Recognised Sensitive Areas

In terms of LI 1652 (the EIA regulations), the following are recognised as
environmentally sensitive areas:
All areas declared by law as national parks, watershed reserves, wildlife

reserves and sanctuaries including sacred groves;
Areas with potential tourism value;
Areas which constitute the habitat of any endangered or threatened

species of indigenous wildlife (flora and fauna);
Areas of unique historic, archaeological or scientific interests;
Areas which are traditionally occupied by cultural communities;

26
Areas prone to natural disasters (such as geological hazards, floods,
rainstorms, earthquakes, landslides, volcanic activity);
Areas prone to bushfires;
Areas classified as prime agricultural lands;
Recharge areas of aquifers; and
Water bodies characterised by one or any combination of water tapped for

domestic purposes, water within the controlled and/or protected areas
and water which support wildlife and fishery activities.
This Project would therefore be considered an environmentally sensitive area

in terms of LI 1652. As such, the EIA process aims to understand existing
conditions on the Project site, the sensitivity of the receptors to Project-
induced changes and assess the significance of the impact of the Project on the
receptors. The results of the sensitivity analysis and impact assessment are
presented in Chapter 6.
Terrestrial Protected Areas

In Ghana, the protected areas are administered through the Department of
Game and Wildlife, Ministry of Lands and Natural Resources. There are three
types of protected areas, namely national parks, game production reserves,
strict nature reserves and wildlife sanctuaries.
Ghana has 18 wildlife protected areas that include seven national parks (Bia,
Bui, Digya, Kakum, Kyabobo Range, Mole and Nini-Suhien), six resources
reserves, four wildlife sanctuaries and five coastal Ramsar sites.
Two of these protected areas are situated within the Western Region, namely
the Ankasa resource reserve and Bia National Park, also designated as a
UNESCO Biosphere reserve. The Ankasa reserve is located approximately 20
km to the north of the Project site and as such is not expected to be directly
impacted by the development of the Project (Chapter 6).
Coastal and Marine Protected Areas

The most widely used definition of a Marine Protected Area (MPA) is the one
of IUCN:
“Any area of intertidal or subtidal terrain, together with its overlying

waters and associated flora, fauna, historical and cultural features, that
has been reserved by legislation or other effective means to protect part or
all of the enclosed environment.”
This intentionally broad definition covers all types of marine areas under
some level of protection provided their primary objective is to protect
biodiversity.

27
Ghana has at present no nationally legislated coastal or marine protected
areas. There are no international protection programmes that specifically
cover the Project site. There are regional programmes that promote the
sustainable use of the regional marine environment but no protection
programmes per se.
The Project will need to adhere to the guidelines laid out in any regional
coastal conservation strategies with regards to marine and coastal
development.
Protected and Endangered Flora and Fauna

At least 26 species of marine mammals and five species of sea turtles occur in
the region, including several endangered, critically endangered, or vulnerable
species. Endangered and threatened flora and fauna are protected through
national law. There are eight globally threatened bird species in Ghana, but
none are seabirds or are specifically associated with coastal habitats, and are
therefore unlikely to be associated with the Project site.
Ghana’s coastal wetlands provide feeding and roosting sites for thousands of
resident and migratory birds including at least 11 species of tern. Thirty-six
sites in Ghana have been designated as Important Bird Areas, of which five
are along the coast. Two sites, the Anlo-Keta and Songor Lagoons, each
support over 100,000 shore birds as well as internationally important numbers
of several species of wading birds. In terms of conservation areas, the
Amansuri Wetlands (situated < 1 km to the north west of the site) are
considered an Important Bird Area (IBA) and rated as A4i. Although this
rating indicates least concern wetland area, Project activities will need to be
planned and designed to minimise impacts on this IBA.
The impact assessment process considered the potential impacts of the

proposed development on notable habitats, flora and fauna as discussed in
Chapter 6.
Petroleum Legislation
National petroleum related legislation includes the Ghana National Petroleum

Corporation Act (Act 64 of 1983), the Petroleum (Exploration and Production) Law
(Act 84 of 1984) and National Petroleum Authority Act (Act 691 of 2005).
The Ghana National Petroleum Corporation Act (Act 64 of 1983) established the
Ghana National Petroleum Corporation (GNPC) as mandated to promote
exploration and planned development of the petroleum resources of the
Republic of Ghana.
The Petroleum (Exploration and Production) Law (Act 84 of 1984) establishes the
legal and fiscal framework for petroleum exploration and production activities
in Ghana. The Act sets out the rights, duties and responsibilities of
contractors; details for petroleum contracts; and compensation payable to
those affected by activities in the petroleum sector.

28
The National Petroleum Authority Act (Act 691 of 2005) establishes the National
Petroleum Authority (NPA) of Ghana to regulate, oversee and monitor
downstream petroleum activities.
The Petroleum Commission Act (Act 821 of 2011) establishes the Petroleum
Commission with the objective to manage Ghana’s petroleum resources. The
Act establishes the responsibilities, functioning and governance of the
commission as well as the interaction of this commission with other
government bodies in relation to petroleum resources.
The Project will also take the relevant pieces of legislation in account in the
design and operation of the petroleum storage activities on site.
Air and Road Transportation
As a signatory to the Convention on International Civil Aviation (Chicago

Convention, 1944), Ghana is required to adhere to international aviation safety
standards. The Ghana Civil Aviation Authority (GCAA) has recently
formulated regulations pertaining to the design and safety of airports and
aerodromes. The Ghana Civil Aviation (aerodrome) Regulations (LI 2004) of 2011
provides specific guidelines for the design, construction and operation of
aerodrome facilities, as well as regulations pertaining to the extent of noise
emissions and permitted land use types in their vicinity.
Of particular relevance to the proposed Project is Section A 22.4, which

outlines the specific noise limits and prohibited land use types in the areas
surrounding aerodromes. The Project will need to ensure that the airstrip is
not situated unsuitably close to sensitive receptors (such as local communities
or towns).
The Ghana Highways Authority Act (Act 540 of 1997) is in place to establish and
authority responsible for the administration, control, development and
maintenance of trunk roads and related facilities. The Act places the
responsibility for the upkeep, management and construction of bridges, road
closures, trunk road excavations and toll roads on the Ghana Highways
Authority.
2.4.3 Ghanaian Social Legislation
Ghanaian legislation relating to social aspects is also considered in terms of

the described Project. Specifically, the social aspects covered by this
legislation are as follows:
labour, working conditions and employment;

resettlement and economic displacement;
economic activities;
community health and safety; and
cultural property and natural heritage.

29
A list of the relevant social legislation is included in Table 2.5 below. This
legislation is then described in more detail below.
Table 2.5 Summary of Relevant Social Legislation

Fisheries Act 2002, Act 625 Fisheries and Access to Fishing
Fisheries Regulation, LI 1968 Fisheries and Access to Fishing
Labor Act, 2003, Act 651 Economic Activities
Industrial Relation 1965, Act, 299 Economic Activities
Labor Decree of 1967, NLCD 157 Economic Activities
Local Government Act 462 Social Responsibilities
Lands Commission Act, 1994 (Act 483) Land management
Land Planning and Soil Conservation Act , 1953 (Act Land management
32)
Stool Lands Act, 1994 (Act 481). Land management
Fishing
The Fisheries Act (Act 625 of 2002) repeals the Fisheries Commission Act (Act 457
of 1993) to consolidate and amend the law on fisheries. The Act provides for
the regulation, management and development of fisheries and promotes the
sustainable exploitation of fishery resources. Section 93 of the Fisheries Act
stipulates that if a proponent plans to undertake an activity which is likely to
have a substantial impact on the fisheries resources, the Fisheries Commission
should be informed of such an activity prior to commencement. The
Commission may require information from the proponent on the likely impact
of the activity on the fishery resources and possible means of preventing or
minimising adverse impacts.
The Project will need to ensure that it meets the requirements of this Act with
regard to any impacts on fishing, including any notification activities.
Economic Activities
The Labour Act, 2003 (Act 651) and the Labor Decree of 1967, NLCD 157 outline
the Ghanaian standards and conditions of employment for all economic
sectors. This legislation covers the protection of: wages, contracts,
employment terms and conditions and recruitment as well as classification of
workers and special worker types. The Industrial Relation 1965, Act, 299
regulates the registration of trade unions and conditions of membership to
registered unions.
The Project will need to ensure that these conditions are adhered to and that
contactor employment contracts follow the guidelines laid out in the
abovementioned legislation.
Local Government

30
The Local Government Act, 1993 (Act 462) was developed in accordance with
the constitution and details the establishment and regulation of local
government systems. The Act was created to establish and regulate the local
government system in accordance with the Ghanaian constitution and
outlines the stipulations and qualifications regarding local elections, provides
requirements for the functioning of district assemblies and outlines the
responsibility of each level of local government. Lonrho will need to ensure
that they communicate and build relationships with the correct levels of local
government in the region where the Project site is located.
Land
The Lands Commission Act, 1994 (Act 483) details the management frameworks
for public and other lands and establishes a commission to assist and advise
the government, local and traditional authorities on land related issues, usage
and management concerns. The management and administrative processes
applicable to Stool land are described in the Stool Lands Act, 1994 (Act 481).
Stool lands are defined as that which belongs to or is controlled by a stool or
skin, the head of a particular community or the captain of a company, for the
benefit of the subjects of that stool or the members of that community or
company. This act also describes (in Section 8) the appropriate distribution of
any revenue accrued from stool lands, which should be divided as follows:
ten per cent of the revenue accruing from stool lands shall be paid to the
Office to cover administrative expenses,
the remaining revenue shall be disbursed in the following proportions by

the Administrator:
25 percent to the stool through the traditional authority for the
maintenance of the stool in keeping with its status;
20 percent to the traditional authority; and
55 percent to the District Assembly within the area of authority in
which the stool lands are situated.
The Land Planning and Soil Conservation Act, 1953 (Act 32) was established to
ensure better utilisation of land and to allow for proper land use planning
through the establishment of committees. These committees are formed in
order to avoid land degradation.
Lonrho will need to adhere to the regulations laid out in these acts and ensure
the project is implemented according to the management structures in place in
the region. This will be particularly necessary in considering the resettlement
aspects of the Project and the development and implementation for the
Livelihood Restoration Plan (LRP).

31
2.4.4 National Environmental and Social Legislation under Preparation
It is recognised that in view of the developing oil and gas industry, the
Ghanaian government is drafting new environmental and marine regulations
and guidelines, which are now at the stage of revision by the Parliament.
These include the following.
Draft Oil and Gas Policy for Ghana (2008);

Ghana Petroleum Regulatory Authority Bill;
Hazardous Waste Regulations, 2012;
Marine Pollution Bill, 2010;
Maritime Security (Amendment) Act, 2010;
Shipping (Safety Zone and Pipeline Protection Area) Regulations, 2010;
and
Shipping Amendment Bill, 2010.
The design of the port should take these draft pieces of legislation, into
account in order to plan for compliance once this legislation comes in to force.
Draft Oil and Gas Policy for Ghana
This policy has as its goal to become a net exporter of Oil and Gas and a major
player in the global petroleum industry, through the development and
management of Ghana’s petroleum resources and revenue streams in a
transparent and environmentally responsible manner for the benefit of every
Ghanaian, now and in the future.
The Policy addresses two main areas for the successful regulation and
monitoring of petroleum operations, namely:
the guiding principles for governmental monitoring; and

the regulatory and legal framework.
The policy will be supported by a master plan which shall embody a

Strategies and Action Plan based on the principles and ground rules for
governmental monitoring and management of petroleum operations. This
policy has not yet been finalised.
Ghana Petroleum Regulatory Authority Bill
The Ghana Petroleum Regulatory Authority (GPRA) Bill of 2008 proposes the
formation of a regulatory authority to regulate, oversee and monitor activities
in Ghana's petroleum industry.
The GPRA has a variety of objectives which include enabling increased

private sector participation and investment, and a strengthening of the
regulatory framework for healthy competition in Ghana's petroleum sector.
Petroleum agreements are also initiated, negotiated and administered under
the GPRA.

32
Marine Pollution Bill
The GMA has drafted a Marine Pollution Bill, which will empower the GMA
to regulate marine pollution. The bill deals with all aspects of marine
pollution and notably will include the provisions related to the Protocol of the
London Dumping Convention (1996), which Ghana has ratified. This includes
the requirement that all dredge disposal sites will need to be authorised by
either the Ghanaian EPA or the GMA prior to the commencement of dredging
activities. The Bill was brought before parliament in March 2012, but had not
yet been approved at the time of compilation of this report (August 2012).
2.4.5 Marine State, Conventions and Classification Requirements
The regulatory requirements for an offshore vessel are generally set out by the
coastal state or shelf state, the flag state, international conventions and the
classification society. The dredging vessels and tug boats will need to satisfy
all of the requirements from these authorities before they are approved fit for
purpose.
Coastal State Regulations
All countries have full sovereignty to regulate activities on their continental

shelves. As the dredging vessels will be operational within Ghanaian waters,
Ghana regulations, as administered by the Ghana Maritime Authority, are the
governing regulations and take precedence over all flag state and class
requirements. However, many jurisdictions, including Ghana, refer to
maritime codes, rules and standards related to flag and classification
requirements as described below.
Flag State Regulations
Ships or offshore facilities trading internationally have to comply with the

safety regulations of the maritime authority from the country whose flag the
unit is flying. A dredging vessel does not need a flag unless required by the
coastal state (ie GMA in Ghana) or when in transit through international
waters. Flag states require classification and implementation of the safety
regulations such as those of the International Maritime Organisation (IMO).
Classification Societies
The dredging vessels will be classed by a classification society that is

recognised by the maritime administrator of the flag state, such as the
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) or Det Norske Veritas (DNV).

33
2.5 INTERNATIONAL LAWS AND AGREEMENTS
2.5.1 International Conventions and Agreements
Ghana is signatory to a number of international conventions and agreements

relating to industry, development and environmental management. In certain
cases, conventions and agreements have influenced policy, guidelines and
regulations and therefore are relevant to planning, construction and operation
of the Project.
Table 2.6 lists the relevant international conventions and protocols to which
Ghana is signatory. Those most pertinent to the project are explained in
further detail below.
Table 2.6 International Conventions Relating to the Project
Date Name of Convention

2003 The Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of
Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal (Basel Convention)
2001 The International Labour Organisation (ILO) Fundamental Conventions

related to forced labour, freedom of association, discrimination and child
labour
2000 International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights
2000 International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights
1999 Guinea Current Large Marine Ecosystem Project (GCLME)
1999 Memorandum of Understanding Concerning Conservation Measures for

Marine Turtles of the Atlantic Coast of Africa
1994 United Nations (UN) Convention on Biological Diversity
1992 Framework Convention on Climate Change
1991 Convention on the Ban of the Import into Africa and the Control of
Transboundary Movement of Hazardous Wastes within Africa - Bamako
Convention
1991 Convention of Fisheries Cooperation among African States Bordering the
Atlantic Ocean
1989 African Charter on Human and Peoples' Rights
1989 Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer
1988 Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals

34
Date Name of Convention
1987 Convention Concerning the Protection of Workers against Occupational
Hazards in the Working Environment due to Air Pollution, Noise and
Vibration (ILO No 148)
1983 United Nation Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), Montego
Bay, Jamaica
1981 Convention for Co-operation in the Protection and Development of the

Marine and Coastal Environment of the West and Central African Region
(Abidjan Convention)
1975 Convention Concerning the Protection of the World Cultural and Natural
Heritage (World Heritage Convention), Paris
1971 International Convention on the Establishment of an International Fund

for Compensation of Oil Pollution Damage
1971 Convention on Wetlands of International Importance, Especially as

Waterfowl Habitats
1969 International Convention on Civil Liability for Oil Pollution Damage
1956 Supplementary Convention on the Abolition of Slavery, the Slave Trade,

and Institutions and Practices Similar to Slavery
1968 African Convention on Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources

1944 Convention on International Civil Aviation (Chicago Convention)
Note: The date refers to the date of aaccession or ratification in Ghana
Basel Convention
The Basel convention aims to protect human health and the environment
against the harmful effects of hazardous waste. The convention’s provisions
relate to reducing hazardous waste generation, promoting environmentally
sound waste management and restricting transboundary movement. The
provisions of the convention include a range of wastes defined as “hazardous”
as well as “other wastes” including household waste and incinerator ash.
In particular, the convention prohibits the export of hazardous wastes to

Antarctica, a state not party to the Basel Convention, or to a state that has
banned the import of hazardous wastes. This is unless the transboundary
movement of hazardous and other wastes is an environmentally responsible
solution, permission is obtained from all states concerned and it is carried out
in line with environmentally responsible and sound methods and principles
(Secretariat of the Basel Convention, 2012). Ghana is in a process of restricting
the importation of hazardous and other wastes to Ghana for recovery and
final disposal.

35
There is ongoing consideration of the interaction between the Basel
Convention and other IMO treaties regulating maritime activities with regard
to disposal of wastes generated on marine vessels. In this regard the Basel
Convention Secretariat and Secretariat of the IMO are undertaking a
participatory legal analysis which identifies the waste types which are
controlled under the Basel Convention. The analysis suggests that the
MARPOL provisions with regard to management at sea are supportive of the
Basel Convention and that the Basel Convention requirements related to
transboundary movement and environmentally sound management apply
only once the waste is offloaded from the vessels (Secretariat of the Basel
Convention, 2012a).
The Project will need to take the application of both the Basel Convention and
IMO requirements into account and monitor the legal analysis process to
ensure compliance of the waste management facilities and operations planned
for the port.
Guinea Current Large Marine Ecosystem (GCLME)
Established in 1999 after the end of the Global Environmental Fund’s (GEF)
pilot Gulf of Guinea Large Marine Ecosystem project, this is an eco-system
based effort to assist countries associated with the Guinea current to move
towards environmental and resource sustainability (http://gclme.org/). The
project involves establishing long-term management objectives and
frameworks to sustain the production potential of the system as a whole.
United Nations (UN) Convention on Biological Diversity (UNcoBD)
This international treaty is legally binding with its main objectives being to
conserve biological diversity and to ensure sustainable use of natural
resources as well as fair and equitable sharing of benefits arising from
resources. The precautionary principle is used to guide conservation
strategies recommended by the convention and built around ecosystem
management and protection.
As Ghana is a signatory of this treaty, Project activities will need to be aligned

with the objectives mentioned above.
United Nations Convention on the Laws of the Sea (UNCLOS)
Ghana is signatory to the United Nations Convention on the Laws of the Sea
(UNCLOS). Under this convention Ghana claims rights within 12 nm of
territorial water and a 200 nm Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ). Clearance for
Project vessels (eg dredging vessels, tug boats) travelling into the territorial
waters (eg to and from the onshore base) must be obtained from the Ghana
Maritime Authority (GMA) and notification should also be made to the
Ghanaian Navy.
Local Jurisdiction

36
Ghana is signatory to the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea
(UNCLOS). Under this Ghana claims rights within a 12 nautical mile (Nm)
territorial sea and a 200 Nm Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ). EEZs and
territorial seas are defined by UNCLOS and specific rules apply within them.
Article 145 of the UNCLOS agreement is relevant to the Project and requires
all signatory states to implement measures to ensure the protection of the
marine and coastal environment, including preventing, controlling hazardous
activities or cause marine pollution ie from harmful effects of dredging,
excavation, waste disposal and construction activities.
Article 194 outlines measures through which the Project can control, reduce
and prevent pollution and damage to the marine environment. All applicable
mitigation measures listed here should be applied as far as possible to Project
design and activities.
International Maritime Organisation Conventions
Ghana is signatory to the following International Maritime Organisation

(IMO) Conventions.
International Convention Relating to Intervention on the High Seas in

Cases of Oil Pollution Casualties (Intervention Convention), 1969;
Convention on the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at

Sea (COLREGs), 1972;
International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974;
Convention on Limitation of Liability for Maritime Claims (LLMC), 1976;
International Convention on Standards of Training, Certification, and

Watch keeping for Seafarers (STCW), 1978;
International Convention for the Prevention of Marine Pollution from

Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL
73/78); and
International Convention of Oil Preparedness, Response and Co-operation

(OPRC), adopted 1990.
Further details of the MARPOL Convention and the OPRC Convention are
provided below.
The MARPOL Convention

The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships
(MARPO L 73/78) contains a number of the provisions relevant to the Project.
These include general requirements regarding the control of waste oil, engine
oil discharges as well as grey and black waste water discharges. Table 2.7

37
provides a list of MARPOL provisions relevant to oil and gas developments.
Annexes I and II were ratified first and in 2010, Ghana ratified the remaining
Annexes III to V which came into force in January 2011. The draft Marine
Pollution Bill will adopt the remaining three annexes of the MARPOL
standards into Ghanaian legislation but is yet to be enacted.
Table 2.7 Relevant MARPOL 1973/1978 Provisions
Environmental Provisions of MARPOL 1973/1978 Annex

Aspect
Drainage water Ship must be proceeding en route, not within a 'special area' I
and oil must not exceed 15 parts per million (ppm) (without
dilution). Vessels must be equipped with oil filtering,
automatic cut-off and an oil retention systems.
Accidental oil Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan (SOPEP) is I

discharge required.
Bulked chemicals Prohibits the discharge of noxious liquid substances, II

pollution hazard substances and associated tank washings.
Vessels require periodic inspections to ensure compliance.
All vessels must carry a Procedures and Arrangements
Manual and Cargo Record Book.
Sewage discharge Discharge of sewage is permitted only if the ship has IV

approved sewage treatment facilities, the test result of the
facilities are documented, and the effluent will not produce
visible floating solids nor cause discoloration of the
surrounding water.
Garbage Disposal of garbage from ships and fixed or floating V

platforms is prohibited. Ships must carry a garbage
management plan and shall be provided with a Garbage
Record Book.
Food waste Discharge of food waste ground to pass through a 25 mm V

mesh is permitted for facilities more than 12 nm from land.
Air pollutant Sets limits on sulphur oxide and nitrogen oxide emissions VI
emissions from ship exhausts and prohibits deliberate emissions of
ozone-depleting substances including halons and
chlorofluorocarbons. Sets limits on emissions of nitrogen
oxides from diesel engines. Prohibits the incineration of
certain products on board such as contaminated packaging
materials and polychlorinated biphenyls.
The Project will need to ensure that all port vessels and visiting vessels to
comply with MARPOL requirements.
OPRC Convention
Ghana is a signatory to the International Convention on Oil Pollution

Preparedness, Response and Co-operation (OPRC) which was entered into

38
force in 1995. This convention facilitates co-operation and assistance between
member states regarding major oil related incidents (such as spills and fires).
As a signatory Ghana is required to have established a national system for

response to oil pollution incidents including, at least, a national contingency
plan for such incidents. This plan is required to make the following
provisions:
a minimum level of pre-positioned oil spill combating equipment;

a programme of exercises for oil pollution response organisations;
training programme for relevant personnel;
mechanisms or arrangements to co-ordinate the response to an oil
pollution incident; and
capabilities to mobilise resources.
These provisions were extended to hazardous and noxious substances in 2007,

through the establishment of the OPRC-HNS protocol. Ghana has developed
a National Oil Spill contingency plan (2010) in line with this convention.
Project activities will need to comply with the requirements of this plan.
2.6 INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL INSTITUTION (IFI) ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL

PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
At this stage of the Project development, details about how it would be

financed are not fully decided. However, there is the possibility that Lonrho
or other parties may seek financing from financial institutions that have
specific requirements for environmental and social performance. These may
include commercial banks that have adopted the Equator Principles as well as
Developmental Finance Institutions (DFIs) such as the AfDB and the IFC. In
anticipation of this possibility, the Project is being developed to meet certain
requirements as described in this section.
The requirements and standards of lending organisation have similarity and

linkages, with the greatest being the connection of the Equator Principles to
the IFC Sustainability Framework through specific reference to the Performance
Standards’ on Environmental and Social Sustainability (2012). In this way,
reference to and conformance with the Performance Standards’ covers a major
part of the Equator Principle requirements. The relationships between the
Equator Principles, the Performance Standards and the World Bank Group
Guidelines are shown schematically in Figure 2.1.

39
Figure 2.1 Relationship between Lender Requirements
Source: ERM 2012
2.6.1 Equator Principles
The Equator Principles (EPs) are an approach by financial institutions to

determine, assess and manage environmental and social risk in project
financing. The EPs emphasise that lenders will seek to ensure that the Project
is developed in a manner that is socially responsible and reflects sound
environmental management practices.
These Principles have been adopted by a wide range of banks and lenders all
over the world in order to manage the social and environmental risks
associated with their potential investments and are listed in Box 2.3 below.
Box 2.3 Equator Principles
The principles comprise the following:

Principle 1 Categorisation of projects
Principle 2 The borrower has to conduct an Environmental and Social Impact
Assessment (ESIA)
Principle 3 Applicable Social and Environmental Standards
Principle 4 Action Plan and Management System
Principle 5 Consultation and Disclosure
Principle 6 Grievance Mechanism
Principle 7 Independent Review
Principle 8 Covenants
Principle 9 Independent Monitoring and Reporting
Principle 10 Equator Principles Financial Institutions (EPFI) Reporting

40
Principle 3 requires that the borrower apply the applicable social and
environmental standards to the Project. In this regard, the Project references
the Performance Standards’ (PSs) as summarised below and will apply these
standards in the implementation of the Project.
The 2006 version of the Equator Principles is currently under review and due
to be updated at some point in 2012. Further major changes are not expected
with the exception that the EPs might be applied to situations other than those
involving purely project finance (eg to corporate loans). This may have
implication to the Project depending on how the financing is structured.
2.6.2 IFC Performance Sustainability Framework and Performance Standards
The IFC Sustainability Framework (2012) comprises three elements:
IFC’s Policy on Environmental and Social Sustainability;;

the Performance Standards’ on Environmental and Social Sustainability;;
and
IFC’s Access to Information Policy.
Since the IFC is not directly engaged in financing the Project, only the
Performance Standards’ apply as they are incorporated in the Equator
Principles. The Project has committed to complying with the updated 2012
edition of the Performance Standards’ throughout the implementation of the
Project.
The following Performance Standards are considered to be relevant to this

Project (1):
PS1: Assessment and Management of Social and Environmental Risks and

Impacts;
PS2: Labour and Working Conditions;
PS3: Resource Efficiency and Pollution Prevention;
PS4: Community Health, Safety and Security;
PS5: Land Acquisition & Involuntary Resettlement;
PS6: Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Management of Living
Natural Resources; and
PS8: Cultural Heritage.
Additional guidance is contained in the Guidance Notes to the Performance

Standards. The IFC’s set of Guidance Notes corresponds to the Performance
Standards and provide guidance on the requirements contained in the
Performance Standards, including reference materials on good sustainability
practices to improve Project performance. The following IFC handbooks are
also relevant to the Project:
(1) Not all of these Performance Standards are addressed through the ESIA Process

41
Stakeholder Engagement: A Good Practice Handbook for Companies
Doing Business in Emerging Markets;
Strategic Community Investment: A Good Practice Handbook for
Companies Doing Business in Emerging Markets; and
Projects and People: A Handbook for Addressing Project-Induced In-
Migration.
2.6.3 World Bank Group Guidelines
The EHS Guidelines are technical reference documents that address IFC’s
expectations regarding the industrial pollution management performance of
projects. The updated EHS Guidelines serve as a technical reference source to
support the implementation of the Performance Standards’, particularly in
those aspects related to PS3: Resource Efficiency and Pollution Prevention, as
well as certain aspects of occupational and community health and safety.
This information supports actions aimed at avoiding, minimising, and

controlling EHS impacts during the construction, operation, and
decommissioning phase of a project or facility. The relevant World Bank
Group EHS Guidelines that will apply to the Project are the following:
EHS General Guidelines (World Bank Group, 2006;

EHS Guidelines for Ports, Harbours and Terminals (World Bank Group,
2007);
EHS Guidelines for Airports (World Bank Group, 2007):
EHS Guideline for Waste Management Facilities (World Bank Group,
2007); and
EHS Guidelines for Shipping (World Bank Group, 2007.
EHS General Guidelines (World Bank Group, 2006)
The Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) General Guidelines are technical
reference documents, which promote Good International Industry Practice
(GIIP). The General EHS Guidelines contain information on cross-cutting
environmental, health, and safety issues potentially applicable to all industry
sectors and should be used together with the relevant IFC industry sector
guidelines.
When a member of the World Bank Group is involved in a project, the General
EHS Guidelines are to be used in conjunction with the appropriate industry
sector EHS Guidelines. Recommendations for the management of EHS
impacts typical to most large industrial facilities are included in these
Guidelines (World Bank Group, 2007a).
EHS Guidelines for Ports, Harbours and Terminals (World Bank Group, 2007)
The Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Ports, Harbors
and Terminals apply to commercial ports, harbors and terminals for cargo and
passenger transfer. These EHS Guidelines address environmental,

42
occupational health and safety as well as community health and safety issues
that can arise in port and terminal construction, operation and/ or
decommissioning. These EHS Guidelines request the implementation of
monitoring against Performance Indicators of all the activities that have been
identified to have potentially significant impacts in order to monitor these
impacts over time (World Bank Group, 2007b).
EHS Guidelines for Airports (World Bank Group, 2007)
The Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Airports apply to
the operation of commercial airports. These Guidelines identify EHS issues
that can arise during the operational phase of a commercial airport and
provide recommendations of their management in relation to the
environment, occupational health and safety as well as community health and
safety. The guidelines request the implementation of Performance Indicators
of all the activities that have been identified to have potentially significant
impacts in order to monitor these impacts over time (World Bank Group,
2007c).
EHS Guideline for Waste Management Facilities (World Bank Group, 2007)
The Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Waste

Management Facilities is applicable to facilities that are committed to the
management of municipal solid waste and industrial waste, including waste
collection and transport, waste receipt, unloading, processing and storage;
landfill disposal, physico-chemical and biological treatment and incineration
projects. The guidelines identify EHS issues that can arise during the
operational and decommissioning phases of waste management and provide
recommendations of their management in relation to the environment,
occupational health and safety as well as community health and safety. These
guidelines request the implementation of monitoring against identified
performance indicators of all the activities that have been identified to have
potentially significant impacts in order to monitor these impacts over time and
to compare them to Industry Benchmarks (World Bank Group, 2007d).
EHS Guidelines for Shipping (World Bank Group, 2007)
The Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Shipping relate to
the operation and maintenance of ships used for the transportation of bulk
cargo and goods and only to fossil-fuel-operated vessels. These Guidelines
identify EHS issues associated with the shipping industry which occur during
the operation and decommissioning phase and provide management
recommendations in relation to the environment, occupational health and
safety as well as community health and safety. These EHS Guidelines request
the implementation of monitoring according to identified Performance
Indicators of all the activities that have been identified to have potentially
significant impacts in order to monitor these impacts over time (World Bank
Group, 2007e).

43
2.6.4 African Development Bank Policies and Guidelines
The AfDB has a number of policies and guidelines which will apply to this
Project, and must be taken into account through the development of the
Project and ESIA process. These are the following:
The Bank Group Policy on the Environment (2004);

The Bank Group Involuntary Resettlement Policy (2003);
Environmental Review Procedures for Private Sector Operations (2001);
Integrated Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (IESIA)
Guidelines (2003); and
Bank Group's Handbook on Stakeholder Consultation and Participation
(2001).
The Bank Group Policy on the Environment (2004)
The Bank Group Policy on the Environment sets out the policy and strategic
framework for all lending and non-lending AfDB operations with the
objective of promoting environmentally sustainable development, to help
improve the quality of life of the people of Africa and to help preserve and
enhance the Africa’s ecological capital and ecological services.
The Bank Group Involuntary Resettlement Policy (2003)
The Bank Group involuntary resettlement policy is intended to provide a

framework for addressing the involuntary displacement of people as a result
of a Project. This policy applies when the Project results in loss or relocation
of shelter, loss of assets or when livelihoods are affected, and requires that
livelihoods be enhanced as a result of a Project.
Environmental Review Procedures for Private Sector Operations (2001)
The environmental review procedures provide AfDB’s environmental and

social impact assessment requirements for private sector projects. The
procedures document the processes that the AfDB follows to assist in ensuring
that Projects are environmentally sustainable and socially responsible.
Integrated Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (IESIA) Guidelines (2003)
The IESIA Guidelines have been developed as a tool to guide the

implementation of the AfDB’s Environmental and Social Assessment
Procedures. The guidelines include an overview of potential impacts and
benchmark enhancement/mitigation measures as well as a summary of
Project risks for a number of sectors. The guidelines also contain monitoring
requirements and indicators as well as additional references. These guidelines
are currently available for the following sectors: Irrigation and Agriculture,
(Crop Production, Livestock and Rangeland Management), Forestry, Fisheries,
Hydropower Production, Roads and Railways, Water Supply, Infrastructure,
Dams and Reservoirs as well as Transportation and Distribution.

44
Bank Group's Handbook on Stakeholder Consultation and Participation (2001)
The AfDB Handbook on Stakeholder Consultation and Participation is

intended to provide guidelines for AfDB-funded projects. The guidelines
provide an overview of participatory tools, and techniques, identify
constraints and recommended activities to ensure that the AfDB’s policy
commitments are implemented.
2.7 LONRHO HSE POLICIES AND STANDARDS
2.7.1 Introduction
Lonrho and its contractors or tenants will be bound by Lonrho’s internal HSE
policy as well as their specific guidelines, rules and requirements. These
result from Lonrho’s commitment to developing environmentally, socially and
health & safety sound/conscious Projects globally as well as project specific
rules and requirements developed for the Project.
Lonrho’s requirements are designed to ensure limited negative impacts on the

environment and local communities during the construction and operational
phases of the proposed Project.
2.7.2 Lonrho’s Engineering Standards
Project-related infrastructure will be built in according to the appropriate

international safety, construction and design standards. This is to ensure the
integrity of all structures as well their safe construction and safe and
longstanding operation. The standards that are relevant to the proposed
Project are summarised below (a full list can be viewed in Annex E):
Marine construction and infrastructure: PIANC criteria, CIRIA, Eurocode,

Eurotop, BS EN, ASME among others;
Navigational Aids: IALA standards;
Testing and Investigation Standards including Quarry testing, ISRM, EN
and other strength tests;
General construction: ACI, AISC, API, ASCE, ASTM International and
AWS.
2.7.3 Lonrho HSE Policy
Lonrho has developed an HSE policy which provides the context for HSE
performance by the Project (Box 2.4).

45
Box 2.4 Lonrho Environmental Policy
Lonrho Ghana Ports Ltd expects all parties involved in his projects (Self-perform and Sub-
Contractors) to comply with all applicable environmental, health and safety legislation as a
minimum standard. The adoption of best practice will be positively encouraged, and all parties
will be required to demonstrate their application of best practice and innovation in order to
reduce adverse environmental impacts.
On top of the applicable legislation, this document identifies relevant environmental protection,
which is applicable to all Lonrho Ghana Ports Operations and any other commitments. It details
action to be taken to meet the target of 100% Environmental Compliance.
2.7.4 Lonrho’s International Commitments
United Nations Global Compact
Lonrho is a signatory to the United Nations Global Compact (Global

Compact), which is an initiative for businesses committed to aligning their
operations and strategies with ten universally accepted principles in the areas
of human rights, labour, environment and anti-corruption (Box 2.5). Lonrho’s
approach to stakeholder engagement has incorporated processes to ensure
adherence to the Global Compact Ten Principles. The company formally
adopted the Global Compact on 4th January 2012.
Box 2.5 Global Compact Principles
Human Rights
Principle 1: Businesses should support and respect the protection of internationally proclaimed
human rights.
Principle 2: Businesses should make sure that they are not complicit in human rights abuses.
Labour
Principle 3: Businesses should uphold the freedom of association and the effective recognition
of the right to collective bargaining.
Principle 4: Businesses should eliminate of all forms of forced and compulsory labour.
Principle 5: Businesses should effectively abolish child labour.
Principle 6: Businesses should eliminate discrimination in respect of employment and
occupation.
The Environment
Principle 7: Businesses should support a precautionary approach to environmental challenges.
Principle 8: Businesses should undertake initiatives to promote greater environmental
responsibility.
Principle 9: Businesses should encourage the development and diffusion of environmentally
friendly technologies.
Anti-corruption
Principle 10: Businesses should work against corruption in all its forms, including extortion and
bribery.
Source: www.unglobalcompact.org

46
ISOA Code of Conduct
Lonrho is a member of the International Stability Operations Association

(ISOA) and as of 20 October 2012 a signatory to the ISOA Code of Conduct
(Version 13). Elements of the Code of Conduct relevant to stakeholder
engagement are as follows:
Human Rights, Property and the Environment:
“Signatories shall respect the dignity of all human beings and adhere
to all applicable international humanitarian and human rights laws.”
Transparency
“Signatories shall operate with integrity, honesty and fairness.”
“Signatories shall, to the extent possible and subject to contractual

and legal limitations, be open and forthcoming on the nature of their
operations and any conflicts of interest that might reasonably be
perceived as influencing their current or potential ventures.”
Accountability
“Signatories, understanding the unique nature of the complex

environments in which many of their operations take place, fully
recognize the importance of clear and operative lines of accountability
to ensure effective peace and stability operations and to the long-term
viability of the industry.”
Signatories are also required to adhere to rules of international humanitarian

and human rights laws as set out in:
Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948);

Geneva Conventions (1949);
Voluntary Principles on Security and Human Rights (2000); and
UK Bribery Act (2010).
In practice, this requires the following:
broad and inclusive stakeholder engagement;

active engagement with government;
transparency; and
a grievance mechanism.
2.7.5 Project Environmental and Social Regulations and Controls
Draft Environmental Control Rules and Requirements (ECRR)
This Project specific document aims to ensure that Project related activities
carried out by Lonrho or its tenants are 100 percent compliant with relevant
international and local standards and regulations (full text available in Annex

47
G). This will ensure that the environmental and social impacts associated with
Project activities are managed and mitigated as far as practicably possible.
In particular, this document regulates the activities of Lonrho’s tenant and

Lonrho itself to ensure:
a clean and safe working environment;
the design, construction and operation of facilities in accordance with

international best practice methodology;
a high standard of air quality through the control of dust and air pollution
including monitoring and performance testing requirements;
marine and freshwater pollution control and protection as well as the

establishment of adequate monitoring activities;
safe and responsible treatment, storage, handling and disposal of

hazardous wastes and materials; and
noise control and monitoring.
Additionally the ECRR provides details regarding the requirements for

environmental reporting and auditing as well as stipulating fines and relevant
penalties issued in cases of non-compliance. Relevant EHS tariffs and service
charges relating to the Project site are also presented.
Lonrho and its tenants will construct, design and operate all Project related
activities and facilities in line with the requirements of this document.
Draft Environmental / Waste management and Emergency Response Procedures
This document covers potential threats or risks to the environment, local

communities or Project employees resulting from Project activities. These
risks include the possibility of events such as spills, leaks, explosions or
contamination events and outline relevant controls to prevent these as well as
details of emergency responses.
The environmental and management issues that have specifically been

considered within this document include the following:
water quality;
air quality;
noise and vibration;
traffic management;
waste management;
contaminated land;
public relations and community liaison;
wildlife flora and fauna;

48
visual intrusion, signage and lighting; and
worksite housekeeping.
The document aims to provide a framework for incorporating the identified

controls into the Project’s design, construction and operational phases and will
be integrated into the Project ESMP.
Port Rules and Regulations
The Rules and regulations identified by Lonrho Ghana Ports Limited describe
the specific requirements of tenants or contractors wishing to operate within
the free trade zone associated with the port. The tax and customs regulations
that are unique to free trade zone areas are also identified.
Furthermore, the document presents guidelines and requirements for

specifications of buildings and the management of tenant’s plots within the
Project site. These include methods to prevent fires and treat sewage and
industrial waste in accordance with local and international best practice, as
well as the protocols to follow when reporting incidents and emergencies.

49
3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This Chapter provides a description of the Project in terms of the facilities and
equipment required for the port and associated project activities during all
phases of the Project. In addition, the Chapter outlines the emissions,
discharges, personnel requirements and provides an analysis of alternatives
considered.
3.1.1 Overview of the Project
Lonrho is proposing to construct and operate an Exclusive Deepwater

Petroleum and Hydrocarbon Logistics Base Port at Atuabo (4° 58' 37.73"
North; 2° 32' 20.01" West) in the Western Region of Ghana. The port,
infrastructure, and services will be constructed by Lonrho. The construction
will be carried out by various contractors selected through a competitive
tender process, the scope of which will include the general infrastructure
requirements and specific tenant requirements. Once constructed, Lonrho will
retain overall management of the port, including security and the supporting
infrastructure. Lonrho will also manage certain operations. Some facilities
and operations will be managed by tenants of the port who will build facilities
or customise existing facilities. All port users will need to comply with the
Port Rules and Regulations, which will contain requirements for adherence to
Lonrho’s environmental, health, safety and security policy and , where
applicable, the environmental and social requirements contained within the
ESMP as well as applicable Ghanaian and international legislation.
During operations, the activities at the port would involve movement of

vessels in and out of the harbour and transport of personnel and goods to and
from the offshore oil and gas operations. Offshore drilling rigs would also
move in and out of the port for repairs and certification. Activities in the port
would include ship repair, storage, fabrication, loading and offloading of
goods as well as fixed-wing aircraft and helicopter movements transporting
personnel and goods. There will be additional vessel movements associated
with the naval base and infrequent maintenance dredging of the port areas.
Onshore support operations would include the import, storage and

distribution of fuels products, generation and supply of electricity, water
treatment and supply and the operation of accommodation, recreation and
office facilities. The port will include waste management facilities for solid
waste, waste water, and sewage. A drill cuttings treatment facility would also
be installed and operated.
3.1.2 Project Components
The Project will comprise the following main elements:

3-1
Port, comprising a harbour protected by a rock breakwater to the west and
a rock groyne to the east, a dredged approach channel, a turning circle,
berth pockets; and quays;
Service Facilities, located in the port along the quays providing support
facility;
Airstrip, located near the port to facilitate aircraft and helicopter transport;
and
Infrastructure, including supporting facilities (accommodations, offices;

naval logistics support base, hydrocarbon fuels storage area) and roads
(internal to the port and the public road).
During construction, there will be a number of Temporary Facilities including

structures, workshops, work areas (eg laydown yards) and material staging
areas. These will be located in the Project footprint
Although the area around the port may be used in the future for development
by others, this ESIA considers only the listed components.
3.1.3 Project Site
The total amount of land allocated to the Project will be approximately 514 ha
(1271 acres). The port, service facilities, airstrip, and infrastructure, as well as
temporary facilities, will be located within this area (Figure 3.1). The harbour
area (including the ship berths, turning circle and approach channel) is
approximately 214 ha (544 acres).
The areas within the Project site that are not developed will be restored if
necessary and left in the natural condition. In those areas that are suitable,
controlled grazing may be permitted as a means of land management.

3-2
Figure 3.1 Layout of the proposed Project
3.2 FACILITIES AND OPERATIONS
3.2.1 Marine Facilities
Harbour, Turning Basin and Access Channel
The Project consists of a harbour area protected from rough water and storms
by constructed breakwaters. The harbour will be accessed through a dredged
channel from the southeast between the larger breakwater to the west and
shorter groyne to the east. A deepened turning circle will also be dredged to
allow vessels to turn within the harbour before exiting along the access
channel.
Sheltered Waiting Area
An area for temporary anchorage of vessels and rigs will be provided within
the harbour, to the west of the entrance channel. An area of 200 x 100 m in a
water depth of 12.5 m has been designated for this purpose, providing
sufficient space for two waiting vessels.
Breakwater and Groyne
The marine infrastructure comprises two seawalls including a breakwater on

the western portion of the site approximately 500 m east of Atuabo and a
small groyne approximately 200 m west of Anokyi. The breakwater will be
approximately 2 km in length extending towards the southeast, while the
groyne will extend approximately 1 km to the southwest. The two seawalls
will create a sheltered harbour for the port.
Quays
The Project will include a number of quays or berthing areas to allow vessels
to dock, and load and unload personnel and cargo. The quayside is formed
from fixed platforms, located on pilings or alternatively using combi-walls
with the deck laid on compacted ground, and will be approximately 1150 m in
total length. The quay walls will include a naval logistics base and four berths
as detailed below:
Berth 1: Marine Offshore Supply Base (MOSB) (300 m length);

Berth 2: Storage and supply of liquid bulk products (200 m length) (Oil
Berth);
Berth 3: Rig repair facilities (400 m length); and
Multi-Purpose Vessel (MPV) berth (200 m length).
In addition, a 50 m pier will be installed for the mooring of various service

vessels in a water depth of 6 m. This will provide berths for seven general
service vessels. These service vessels will include tugs, pilot vessels and a
mooring launch.

3-4
3.2.2 Service Facilities
Rig Repair Facility
One of the main facilities in the port will provide repair and maintenance
services for offshore drilling rigs. The facility would be located along the quay
with landside workshops, warehouses and offices in an area totalling
approximately 16 ha. The types and sizes of the various facilities is
summarised in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Facilities and Dimensions of the Rig Repair Yard
Rig Repair Facilities Size Quantity

Fabrication hall/Mechanical shop 100x150 m (1.5 ha)
Blast shop 25x25 m (0.3 ha) 4
Pipe shop 50x50 m (0.3 ha) 4
Electrical shop 25x25 m (0.3 ha) 4
Cutting shop 25x25 m (0.3 ha) 4
Office block 50x50 m (0.3 ha)
Workshop facilities 50x50 m (1.0 ha) 4
Warehouse 200x100 m (2.0 ha)
Outside storage 250x250 m (6.3 ha)
Roads, car parks, fences As needed
The different types of drilling rigs and expected at the facility include:
Semi-submersible rig (18 m length x 120 m beam x 15 m draft) (Figure 3.2);
Jack-up rig: (80 m length x 60 m beam x 8 m draft) (

Figure 3.3); and
Drill ship (sixth generation type): (250 m length x 40 m beam x 13 m draft)

(Figure 3.4).
This facility will be situated near the deepest section of the harbour, in a water
depth of approximately 16.5 m. It would have a quay length of approximately
400 m to allow for the simultaneous repair of two semi-submersible drilling
rigs or up to eight jack-up platforms drilling rigs (or a combination).
Approximately eight rig repair programmes are expected to be commissioned
per year. The nature of the repairs made to rigs requires that each vessel
remains in its assigned berth for an extended period, while the repair work
(including welding, painting, refitting of piping, scaffolding and replacement
of key machinery and equipment) takes place.
A floating dry dock will be moored alongside the rig repair facility to allow
for speciality type repairs and to increase the capacity of the yard. The size of
the dry dock is expected be approximately 140 m x 35 m.

3-5
Figure 3.2 Semi-submersible Rig
Source: Shutterstock stock photo
Figure 3.3 Jack-up Rig
Source: Shutterstock stock photo

3-6
Figure 3.4 Drill Ship
Source: Oil Rig Jobs, 2012
Marine Offshore Supply Base (MOSB) and Fabrication Yard
Activities
The port will include facilities to supply goods and equipment to the offshore
oil and gas exploration and production areas. Supplies will be delivered to
the port via ship (eg container vessel), offloaded, and stored. In some cases,
supplies would undergo a fabrication process at the port. In other cases,
materials will be delivered to the terminal areas overland in trucks. Once on
the site, supplies will then be transferred offshore using vessels. Goods stored
and supplied would include ship’s chandlery-type goods (eg food,
maintenance supplies, cleaning supplies), operating supplies (eg barite for
drilling, drill pipe), and equipment (spare parts, subsea equipment).
The MOSB and Fabrication Yard will occupy approximately 300 m of quay
with three or four general purpose berths of approximately 9 m water depth.
A further berth using approximately 200m of quay will be used for a Multi-
Purpose Vessel (MPV) which will have a low occupancy of approximately one
vessel per week. This MPV will supply offshore facilities with general cargo
including cement, drilling muds and containers.
In total, approximately 2500 vessel calls per year are anticipated, each for
duration of six to eight hours. The quay allocated to the MOSB is shared with
the liquid bulk quay.
The MSOB will use 9 ha behind the quay to accommodate various facilities
(Table 3.2). An example photograph of similar warehousing is included in
Figure 3.5. The major facilities are described further below.

3-7
Table 3.2 Overview of requirements for the facilities to be included in the MOSB
Marine Offshore Supply Base Facilities Size Size (ha) Remarks

Open storage area (lay down yard) 100x100m 4.0 4
Main warehouse 100x50m 0.5
Other storage facilities 50x50m 1.0 4
Machine and workshop facilities 50x50m 1.0 4
Hazardous material storage 25x25m 0.1
Waste storage/incineration 25x25m 0.1
Scrap yard 25x25m 0.1
Oil based mud treatment plant 50x50m 0.3
Oil spill response facility 25x25m 0.1 On waterside at
bunkering quay
Liquid bulk and dry bulk storage (cement, 100x50m 0.5 Including pipelines to
barite, fresh water, drill water) quay vessel supply
Truck waiting areas 30mx20m 0.06 Inside main gate
Roads, car parks, fences As needed
Figure 3.5 Indicative Representation of Warehousing and Waste Management Activities

(Luba Freeport, Equatorial Guinea)
Source: Lonrho, 2012
Fabrication Facility
A fabrication / assembly facility will be established for the manufacture of
subsea structures for use in offshore production. The process involves the
assembly of subsea equipment by welding, finishing (including grinding),
then inspecting, testing and coating according to specified use.

3-8
The facility will include a number of areas for storage and maintenance of
equipment and a large covered workshop (approximately 9 ha) for welding,
grinding, drilling, etc. Other facilities will likely include the following:
sand-blasting and paint shops;

storage areas for engine tools and spare parts;
an electrical instrument workshop;
a laboratory; and
male and female toilets, washing facilities and changing rooms.
Raw materials will be imported directly into the port via ship, or if sourced
locally, these materials will be brought into the terminal area overland.
Port Reception Facilities and Drilling Waste Treatment and Management Facility
A facility will be constructed for the handling and treatment of wastes

generated during offshore drilling. These include the ‘cuttings’ that are
generated from the borehole, some of which are contaminated with petroleum
hydrocarbons or with drilling fluids. The facility would treat the drill cuttings
to remove the hydrocarbons and dispose of the remaining solids. The treated
solids can also be used in building materials. The process involves heating of
the cuttings to ‘desorb’ the contaminants.
Figure 3.6 Drill Cuttings Desorption Plant
Source: M-I SWACO, 2012
Port Reception facilities will be a mixture of mobile (trucks) and fixed (storage
tanks within the tank farm) to receive waste from vessels and rigs. The

3-9
facilities site will also have a fire fighting facility to supplement fire fighting
installations within the individual tenant facilities.
The equipment associated with the port reception and waste treatment and
management facility includes:
air compressor;
generator;
switch and control room;
air and nitrogen supply room;
diesel tank;
recovered oil /water tanks;
fin fan cooler and cooling conveyors;
steam condensing system;
oil condensing system;
cyclone and scrubbing;
mill and motor drive; and
access platforms;
workshop/laboratory; and
locker room/toilet, mess room/kitchen and offices.
3.2.3 Airstrip and Helipad
An airstrip will be constructed for small aircraft for crew changes and to
support supply logistics for the offshore oil and gas activities. The length of
the airstrip will be approximately 1350 m. The total area of the airstrip and
surrounding area will be approximately 10 ha. In addition, a helipad of
approximately 1 ha (100 x 100 m) will be situated towards the centre of the
airstrip. The aircraft will be used to transport supplies and personnel for the
Project and to be transported offshore. There will be no access or use by the
public.
The airstrip and helipad are expected to accommodate approximately 1633

fixed wing and approximately 2700 helicopter landings annually.
3.2.4 Infrastructure
Offices and Accommodations
Required support services include port control and port operations offices,
general office space, medical services (clinic), fire-fighting facilities, power
supply, waste water and sewage treatment infrastructure, potable water
supply and purification plant, telecommunications network and road access.
Living and leisure facilities will also be installed. The requirements of these
facilities are described in Table 3.3 below.

3-10
Table 3.3 Overview of Other Port-related Facilities
Facility Size
Office block (including the harbour master office, pilot office, 100x50 m (0.5 ha)
customs, security office, Ghana Port Authority)
Communications Building 10x10 m (0.1 ha)
Medical Facility 200 m2 (0.02 ha)
Staff accommodation and recreational facilities 10 ha
Generator (supplying power to the port) 150x200 m (0.3 ha)
Roads, car parks, fences
Medical Facility
The medical facility is expected to provide day-to-day assistance for minor

injuries or illness and act as a first response support for injured personnel
(before transport to hospital). The facility will comprise an emergency room, a
consulting and examination room, a pharmacy, and a small two-bed ward and
bathroom facilities.
Naval Logistics Support Base
This will be a facility for naval operations and personnel with access to a 50 m
long floating pier with area enough for two berths and a water depth of
approximately 6 m. Small onshore facilities will also be constructed to
accommodate a training centre and an office block. The total area of the
onshore facilities is expected to be approximately 200 m2.
Bulk Storage Facility
A bulk storage facility will be built to store fuels for use in port operations and
for vessel fuelling. It would also handle bulk storage of other liquids. The
facility would comprise a number of large, steel tanks and interconnecting
pipeline and control equipment. The facility is expected to have a total tank
storage capacity of approximately 46,100 m3. The facility will store fuels such
as:
gasoline;
Heavy Fuel Oil (HFO);
Aviation Turbine Kerosene (ATK);
Marine Gas Oil (MGO); and
lubricants/greases.
In addition to storage of fuels, the tanks may also be used for the temporary
storage of industrial water and slops from vessels. Tanks will be designed
and constructed according to international standards. The tanks will be
bunded (in an area at least 110 percent of the volume of the largest tank, or 25
total tank capacity) to contain accidental spills. All tank valves and pipework
will be contained within the bund area.

3-11
The facility will be located on an area of approximately 6 ha. Associated
facilities for the tank farm will include a pipeline along the quayside with
appropriate manholes interspaced alongside, an electrical power source, and
potable water. Approximately 272,000 t of fuel per annum will be transferred
along the pipeline from the fuel storage facility to fuelling vessels. This will
require between five and ten vessel calls per month. Fuelling would occur at
the port however, road tankers may also be used occasionally for the import
or export of heavy fuels from the port.
The storage and delivery mode of each of the fuels and an indicative
photograph of bulk storage facility are included in Table 3.4 and Fig xx.
Table 3.4 Product Storage and Delivery Specifications for each Product Type
Product Form Mode Storage Mode of delivery Tank size

MGO Bulk Vertical steel Delivered through inline flow meter 2 x 10,000m3
tanks and pipelines installed in the quayside
subway, and hose connections
HFO Bulk Vertical steel Delivered through inline flow meter 2 x 10,000m3
HFO/ Bulk Vertical steel Delivered through inline flow meter 4 x 1000m3
MGO tank and pipelines installed in the quayside
Blend tank subway, and hose connections
ATK Bulk Vertical steel Delivered through inline flow meter 4 x 500 m3
Gasoline 91 Bulk Underground Delivered through high speed 2 x 45 m3
tanks dispensers
Lube/ Drums Warehouse Palletised for delivery by forklift. 2 x 27m3 and
Greases /IBCs shed / above /Delivered through inline flow meter warehouse
/ Bulk ground and pipelines installed in the quayside storage
horizontal steel subway, and hose connections and or
tanks lube bay
Industrial Bulk Vertical steel Delivered through inline flow meter Industrial
water tanks and pipelines installed in the quayside water – 2 x
subway, and hose connection 3000 m3
Fire water – 2
x 5000 m3
Slop Bulk Vertical steel From the vessel to the tanks through 2 x 500 m3
tanks pipeline installed in quayside subway

3-12
Figure 3.7 Bulk Storage Facility
The fuelling area requires a deep-water berth (approximately 12.5 m) to

accommodate a wide range of vessels. The largest vessel is expected to be
30,000 DWT.
Roads
Roads are planned around the Project site to provide access to the site from
the existing coastal road (Figure 1.1). The new road will be tarred and will
provide a rerouting of the coastal road and will run from Anokyi and follow
the Project site boundary to the north. The road will then turn to run
westwards approximately 400 m north of the site for approximately 2 km
before turning towards the southwest and Atuabo. This section of the road
will run between the airstrip portion to the west and the remainder of the port
facility to the east. A road will also be constructed to connect Asemdasuazo to
the new re-routed coastal road from close to the northern portion of the
airstrip.
Power Generators
A set of diesel generators (approximately 5 x 1 600 KVA 400 Volt and 50 Hz)
will be used to provide power to the Project site during the construction and
operation phases of the Project. A step up transformer will also be
constructed and electricity distributed across the site to the various operations.
Diesel fuel for the generators will be stored in a 10,000 gallon (approximately
38 m3) horizontal steel tank located adjacent to the generators.

3-13
Fresh Water Supply
Water for drinking, washing, bathing and for use for industrial purposes on
site will be sourced from boreholes drilled on site. The extracted water will be
filtered and treated to meet Ghanaian and WHO potable water standards and
will include a desalination plant. The area for the water purification/
treatment plant will cover approximately 0.3 ha. Sludge from this plant will
be disposed of either by dilution of the brine with the output from the effluent
treatment plant or direct disposal to the sea.
Borehole water will also be used for fire-fighting. Water will be pumped from
boreholes on site and stored in fire/service water storage tanks. The size of
the tanks will be determined during detailed design in accordance with the
calculated requirements for fire-fighting.
The total annual water demand for the site is expected to be approximately
110,000 m³ per annum sourced from local boreholes. This value is attributable
to:
Rig repair area (25 m3/day)

MOSB and Offshore Fabrication yard (25 m3/day);
Facilities building (15 m3/day);
Onshore facilities (airstrip side) (15 m3/day);
Hotel (20 m3/day)
Vessel Supply (150 m3/day); and
Miscellaneous (50 m3/day). .
Waste Management Facilities
Waste generated by port users and tenants will be transported, handled and
treated by a qualified waste management contractor. The contractor will
ensure that the necessary waste management facilities required to properly
treat and dispose of Project related waste are compliant with relevant local
and international legislation. The waste management infrastructure expected
to be developed at this facility as well as on the Project site includes:
wastewater treatment plant:

sewage treatment plant and retention pond;
incinerator; and
waste sorting and storage areas (including hazardous waste).
The potential spatial requirements of these facilities are summarised in the

table below (Table 3.5).
Table 3.5 Spatial requirements of the Associated Waste Management Facilities
Waste related facility Size

Wastewater treatment plant 100x200 m (2.0 ha)
Sewage treatment plant 50x50 m (0.3 ha)

3-14
Waste related facility Size
Sewage water retention pond 200x50 m (1.0 ha)
General waste management facilities: incineration, small 50x50 m (0.3 ha)
hazardous waste storage, separation area
Lonrho and its contractors and tenants will explore possibilities for the re-
use/ recycling and recovery of wastes before their disposal. The types of
wastes that will be produced, handled, stored or processed at the port will
include:
domestic solid waste;

sewage and liquid domestic effluent;
industrial effluent;
industrial solid waste; and
hazardous waste.
The effluent and waste volumes generated are discussed in Section 3.6.
Domestic Solid Waste

Domestic waste produced by port users will be collected, managed and
appropriately disposed of at the waste management facility operated by the
appointed contractor. This facility will be established and operated in line
with Ghanaian legislative requirements for waste disposal sites and will be
lined with an impermeable lining. All domestic wastes generated on site will
be managed by controls described in Lonrho’s Environmental Control Rules
and Requirements (ECRR) document which include:
that wastes be stored on-site in leak proof drums/containers;

that wastes are stored in a “Waste Handling/Storage Facility” in a
designated, marked location;
that there is no soil contamination hence wastes are stored on an
impermeable surface;
tenants control the wastes such that wastes are not windblown beyond the
storage area;
any runoff from waste storage areas be controlled; and
that wastes are disposed of regularly and are not allowed to accumulate.
Sewage and Liquid Domestic Effluent

A sewage system will be constructed on site to manage domestic liquid
effluent; no industrial effluent will be permitted to be discharged into such
facilities. No soak-away type systems will be permitted in the port, although
holding tanks (with regular evacuation) may be constructed if required.
The proposed layout of the sewage treatment facility and relevant effluent
discharge infrastructure are included in Figure 3.1.
Industrial Effluent

3-15
Liquid industrial wastes will be treated separately by each user before
disposal into the receiving medium (land, sea, sewage system). Liquid
effluent discharged to the port’s system will be metered with the ability to cut
off input.
Lonrho will implement controls and requirements for tenants including the
following:
no effluent discharge to the sea will be permitted without prior

authorisation from Lonrho as well as the Ghanaian EPA;
the authorisation from Lonrho will detail the type of waste and the
maximum daily effluent volumes allowed as well as a reference to
chemical concentration limits;
no pesticides, herbicides, oils or solvents, radioactive substances or paint

residues will be permitted to be discharged into the fresh or marine water
environments;
each outflow point will be located below the water surface and will
include a sampling point to enable monitoring; and
requirement for a monitoring programme to ensure compliance with the

stipulations of the authorisation.
Solid Industrial Waste

Solid, non-hazardous wastes, including general industrial wastes, metal
offcuts, wooden pallets and waste pieces, plastics and paper will be collected
and stored separately from domestic waste. The solid industrial waste will be
disposed of at the onshore waste disposal facility with the domestic solid
waste (described above).
Hazardous Waste
Hazardous waste generated onsite will be separated, stored for transport and
disposal at an approved hazardous waste disposal site. The hazardous waste
temporary storage area will be built on hardstanding surface and covered.
Waste will be transported for offsite disposal at a licenced disposal site.
Hazardous waste disposal documentation will be retained for all hazardous
waste disposed.

3-16
Figure 3.8 Proposed Sewage Treatment and Outfall Facilities
3.3 SITE PREPARATION
3.3.1 Activities
Site preparation will include the following activities:
mobilisation, equipment and material transport (using existing roads) and

office set-up;
site clearing, grubbing, and grading of land areas;
installation of temporary security fencing and lighting;
construction of a construction vessel berth;
construction of a heavy-haul road linking the site to the existing road
network;
development of internal road networks;
dredging of shipping channel, berths and turning basin;
land reclamation in the shallow waters to create area for onshore facilities;
and
additional geotechnical studies will be carried out during this phase.
Vegetation Clearance
The total area to be cleared of vegetation is approximately 514 ha in extent and

will include the area within the site boundary (including the airstrip portion)
fence. The environmental characteristics of this area are described in Chapter
4.
The initial clearing activities will involve the clearing and stripping of existing
vegetation and the provision of suitable access to the project site. A large area
of vegetation will be cleared to enable access of general and breakwater
construction machinery to the water’s edge. The cut trees will be transported
to an area on or near the site and will be available for community use.
Marine Site Preparation Works
The marine site works will include the dredging for the channel, turning
basin, channel and associated land reclamation area for the onshore facilities.
The marine facilities will include a level reclaimed area for a portion of the
Project’s onshore facilities (may or may not require soils improvement), a
dredged access channel, turning basin and 900 m of berth space. This berth
space would include 400 m rig repair berths, 300 m MOSB berths and 200 m
liquid bulk/multi-purpose berths.
Road Upgrading
Construction material for the breakwater will be transported along existing

roads between the Project site and the Tarkwa mines. The roads are a mix of
asphalt and gravel and are in relatively good shape and only minor upgrade is
expected to be required, including strengthening or replacement of a small
bridge along the route near Bakanta.

3-18
Lonrho will undertake a detailed Traffic Impact Assessment (TIA) to confirm
the requirements for upgrading any intersections, roads and any additional
bridges.
Dredging and Land Reclamation
The current construction plans include capital dredging of the approach and
entrance channel, the harbour basin, and the service berths. The dredging
work to be executed consists of:
dredging of the new harbour basin and turning circle to -16.5 m CD; and
dredging of the approach and entrance channel to -17.5 m CD.
[Note: CD is ‘chart datum‘, the level at which both tidal levels and water
depths are lowest. On marine charts it is the level of the predicted lowest
astronomical tide (LAT).]
The total quantity of capital dredged materials is estimated to be in the order

of 13 million m3. Two dredgers operating for 360 days will remove this
volume of sediment over 2600 trips (each dredger has the capacity to dredge
3000 m3 of sediment per hour).
Engineering studies have confirmed that most of the marine sediment is

suitable for fill without treatment. The majority of the dredged material
will be pumped to the shore for re-use for infill, land reclamation as well as
for any beach-erosion compensation at the eastern side of the main
breakwater. For dredging of the new harbour basin, turning circle and quay
wall, materials dredged from these areas will be transported via a pipeline
system consisting of floating pipeline, sinker line (optional) and landline and
pumped a maximum distance of 2000 m onto the reclamation area. Some of
the excess of the suitable dredged material will be pumped onto the
construction area for future re-use.
Non-suitable material and possibly excess suitable material will be disposed

offshore. The clayey material cannot be pumped on to the reclamation area
and will be dumped at a designated offshore location by means of ‘bottom
dumping’ ie release from the bottom of the dredge material vessel.
The disposal site will be selected in consultation with Ghana EPA. The site
will be located in waters of 30-40 m depth (or greater) to minimise risk to
artisanal fishing activities and to fish spawning and feeding grounds. A
preliminary survey will need to be undertaken to determine the nature and
ecological health of marine sediments of the location. This will likely be
through sediment grab sampling with laboratory analysis for contamination
levels and sediment characteristics (physical properties such as particle size
distribution) as well as consultations with local artisanal fishers. Sensitive
ecological areas identified during the physical sampling and engagement with

3-19
fishers will be avoided. Once a preferred site has been selected, monitoring
will be undertaken of the site to determine recovery of ecological health.
A detailed list of equipment required for dredging activities is provided in

Table 3.7.
Table 3.6 Dredging Equipment
Name Number
Medium-size Trailer Suction Hopper Dredger 1
Cutter Suction Dredger 1
Survey boat 1
Bunker barge 1
Small tug boat 1
Multi Cat 1
Pipeline 1
The level down to -7 m CD can only be dredged by using stationary Cutter

Suction Dredgers, while a Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger will be used to
remove the clayey materials.
Maintenance Dredging
Maintenance dredging is expected to be required to ensure that the entrance

channel, turning circle and vessel berths remain at their required depths and
free of debris. This is important in order to ensure the safe passage and
manoeuvring of vessels in the terminal area. The approach channel and
turning circle will be maintained at a depth of 16.5 m CD, and up to 25 m CD
in some areas.
Maintenance dredging activities are planned to occur every three years and
are expected to remove approximately 1 million m3 of sediment for each
dredging programme. If suitable, the dredged material will be used for sand
replenishment to the east of the Project site. If found to be unsuitable, the
dredged material will be disposed of at the offshore dump sites identified for
the capital dredging during site preparation and construction.
3.3.2 Facilities
Temporary Work Facilities
The following temporary facilities and infrastructure will be required during

the construction phase. These will include the following:
equipment and bulk materials lay down and storage areas (including rock
storage);
pre-fabrication yard;
construction worker accommodation;
segregated waste storage facilities;

3-20
potable water treatment facility;
waste treatment/ sewage treatment facility;
diesel-powered generation facilities and electrical grid;
concrete batching plant;
aggregate dock;
storm water and drainage system;
offices; and
temporary fencing and security lighting.
The location of temporary facilities is shown in Figure 3.9.

3-21
Figure 3.9 Temporary Construction Facilities

Boundary Security and Lighting
Temporary fencing will be installed primarily to identify the site boundary.
Approximately 20 km of temporary fencing will be established around the site
perimeter.
Laydown Areas
Laydown areas will be established and used for storage areas for permanent
materials and consumables required for construction of the works. The yard
will include facilities for:
lay-down and general storage areas;

tubular steel piles storage;
cement storage shed;
rock storage and stock-pile area (approximately 150 t and 200 x 200 m);
and
equipment and vehicles parking areas.
These facilities are expected to be laid out as shown in Figure 3.10.
Figure 3.10 Layout of Laydown Areas
Temporary Fabrication Yard

A temporary fabrication yard will be established on site to fabricate materials
used in the construction of the breakwater and quay such as the X-Blocs
(Figure 3.11), core-lac and berthing members. This facility is expected to
occupy approximately 4410 m2 while a further approximately 19,000 m2 will
be required for a stockpiling area where the precast units produced over four
months will be stored in three layers. A steel processing workshop will also
be established and requires an area of approximately 6000 m2.
Fuel Storage
Fuel for generators, vehicles and machinery used in construction will be
stored in metal or plastic containers, placed within a bunded area or double
walled tanks. This fuel will be transported to the site via road and it is

3-23
anticipated that approximately 10 million litres will be used during
construction. The tanks will be located in a central storage area, and will be
serviced by a bowser which will transport fuel to where it is needed on the
Project site.
Figure 3.11 Photograph of Similar Temporary Fabrication Yard
Temporary Offices and Accommodations
Site Offices
Site offices including toilet facilities will be located at the project site in a
designated area. The construction contractor will provide necessary
communications infrastructure within the site offices to enable phone, email,
and internet access. A satellite office will be established at the Tarkwa mine.
Worker Housing
Construction worker housing will be temporary style accommodations located
within the Project site to the south of Asemdasuazo and the proposed tank
farm location. Water will be sourced from boreholes drilled on site. The
extracted water will be filtered and treated to meet Ghanaian and WHO
potable water standards. It is anticipated that approximately 30 m3 of water
will be required per day.
Provision within the temporary construction camp will be made for

approximately 200 (non-local) workers to be accommodated over the 18 to 24
month construction period. Junior managers and labourers are expected to be

3-24
housed in 16 to 20 man accommodation units with individual rooms and with
shared ablutions.
Septic tanks will be installed for the collection of sewage during the
construction phase. Solids and liquids will be periodically recovered and
disposed of at an approved sewage treatment facility.
Port Village
Medium and long-term stay accommodation will be provided in an
accommodation block designed to meet the needs of senior business
executives. These will include accommodation facilities equivalent to a four-
star hotel and will include a living room and cooking areas as well as
communal lounge, dining and recreational area.
In additional, an “EasyHotel” is expected to be constructed within the project

area to accommodate visitors to the port for short periods.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION
Following site preparation, construction of the port facilities will commence.

This will include:
construction of the breakwater and groyne;

construction of quay walls;
construction of the onshore facilities; and
road construction around the site and between Anokyi and Atuabo.
The construction phase will require use of cranes, trucks, generators,

earthworks vehicles, piling equipment, concrete mixers and dredging
equipment. Table 3.7 below provides details on the materials that will be used
during the construction phase, the approximate volume of each and a listing
of the expected source.
Table 3.7 General construction phase
Material Quantity Source

Cement 3,000T From suppliers outside of Ghana
Construction Steel 3,000T From suppliers outside of Ghana
Rock / Aggregate 1,300,000m³ Existing quarries in Ghana
Diesel 1,000,000 ltr Purchased from suppliers in Ghana
Timber for 1,000m³ From suppliers in Ghana
construction
Mechanical & Various From suppliers outside of Ghana
electrical equipment
The planned construction schedule is presented in Figure 3.22.

3-25
3.4.1 Construction of Breakwater and Groyne
Approach
The seawalls will consist of a core rock material, an under layer of placed rock
material and a cover layer of concrete armour units. The total rock and
armour unit volumes are estimated at about 2 million m3 of rock. The rock
will be placed in layers on the beach and near shore area, in accordance with
the breakwater design.
Construction methods for the breakwater are predominantly land-based, and

are developed to ensure working onshore as much as possible. Because of the
wave patterns, the area is not considered appropriate for the development of a
floating plant and construction using sea-based approaches.
Rock Placement
The rock material used to form the core of the seawall (0.5 – 500 kg rock) is
placed by means of direct tipping from the trucks. Rock material is supplied
to the work front using tipper trucks, each with a payload of 25 t, starting from
the shore. The seawall core will be formed from rock placement at an
elevation of 2.5 m with a width of 9 m. This allows the tipper trucks to pass
each other while driving over the section of breakwater already constructed
(Figure 3.12). In addition, Figure 3.13 shows a cross-section of the seawall
design. It is anticipated that the core material will adopt a natural slope of
approximately 3:4.

3-26
Figure 3.12 Trucks Delivering Rock during a Rock Placement
Figure 3.13 Cross-section of Breakwater Design
Slope Refinement
To construct the slope in the required profile of 2:3, additional core material is
placed using a long-boom excavator and the 200 t crawler crane to form the
toe of the core. This will be carried out in conjunction with the construction of
the breakwater core as it formed. The under-layer will be placed on top of the
rock and directly behind the advancing core face to limit the exposure of the
core material.
The long-boom excavator will be used to shape the slopes of the core
(coloured orange in Figure 3.5). This will be undertaken at night so that the

3-27
operation of the excavator does not obstruct the supply of rock used to form
the core during the daytime.
Figure 3.14 Long-boom Excavator Shaping the Breakwater Slope
A crawler crane will be operated on a purpose-designed and constructed

portal structure (Figure 3.15) to enable the tipper trucks to pass underneath
and not to obstruct the supply of rock to the work fronts. The portal frame is
mounted on tracks is able to move along the alignment of the breakwater and
place rock along the toe of the breakwater.
Placement of Armour Layer
Installation of the armour layer (x-blocks) will follow closely behind the
under-layer to limit the duration of exposure. This will be done using a second
crane portal (as for placement of the toe). The initial focus will be installation
of the armour on the more exposed sea-side, followed by installation of the
armour on the port-side of the breakwater (Figure 3.16). All armour will be
installed by the crane using a 10 t rock grab. The remainder of the breakwater,
from elevation +2.5 to +6.0 m will then be constructed working back towards
the shoreline.
An excavator will then be used to place the materials (Figure 3.17). At this
stage, the main equipment can be released to commence working on the lee
breakwater.

3-28
Figure 3.15 Portal Cranes Working on a Breakwater.
Figure 3.16 Installation of X-Block Armour by Crane

3-29
Figure 3.17 Installation of Armour by Excavator
Breakwater Construction Material
The rock for the breakwater construction is planned to be sourced either from
the overburden 1from the mines at Tarkwa, approximately 120 km to the
northeast of the Project site or from the Eagle Star quarry (8 ha) alongside the
Tarkwa-Esiama road approximately 140 km from the Project site. Rock would
be loaded from overburden stockpiles or blasted from the quarry rock faces.
Rock will be transported from the source to the Project site using 35 t payload
tipper trailers that are loaded by a front end loader. It is anticipated that
approximately 65 trailer/head combinations will be involved with the supply
of rock from the quarry to site. Once the rock has been transported to the
Project site, via the preferred route, the trucks will dump the rock off an
elevated road into stockpiles located within the site boundary. The material
can then be loaded into separate dump trucks to haul the rock to the
breakwater construction area.
The Eagle Star quarry is not included in the ESIA report and should this site
be selected as the preferred source of rock for the Project, the environmental
and social impacts associated with resuming operations at the site may need
to be assessed and addressed prior to commencement of blasting.
1Overburden refers to the rock and soil material situated above a mine’s target material. During mine operations,
overburden is removed and stockpiled either for final disposal or for re-use in mine rehabilitation.

3-30
Two transportation route alternatives are currently being considered. The
shortest route from both the quarry and the mines at Tarkwa is Route 1 on
Figure 3.19 via the Tarkwa-Esiama road to the coast.. An alternative route via
Barso and the Agona-Elubo Road (Route 2, Figure 3.19) is also proposed.
The existing road conditions and bridge which may require upgrading are
shown below in Figure 3.18and Figure 3.20. The heavy volume of trucks will
require a dedicated team and equipment to maintain the condition of the last
20 km stretch of gravel road for the duration of the project. A mechanical
service team including roadside assistance trucks will be dedicated to support
the fleet of trucks.
Figure 3.18 Existing Road Conditions along the Transport Route (gravel conditions for
the last 20 km to the Project site)
The technical, social and environmental considerations of these three

alternatives will be assessed in the Traffic Impact Assessment (TIA). The TIA
will also assess the strain on local road traffic infrastructure (such as
intersections, road surfaces and bridges) as a result of the increase heavy
vehicle traffic. Once all aspects of the two routes have been assessed, the most
suitable will be identified. It is anticipated that the proposed routes along the
public road network to the quarry/mine site may require some upgrading
work, including repair of a bridge, prior to the commencement of rock cartage.
The TIA will also identify a number of mitigation measures to ensure the
safety and satisfaction of local communities as well as the preservation of the
natural environment alongside the selected transport route. The results and
recommendations of the TIA will be submitted to EPA for their approval.

3-31
Figure 3.19 Map Showing the Proposed Transportation Routes for Breakwater Rock Material
Figure 3.20 Existing bridge along the Transport Route (may require upgrading)
3.4.2 Construction of Quay Walls
Construction of the quay walls will commence at the same time as the
breakwaters. Construction operations will be undertaken continuously
starting from one side of the wall and working towards the other.
The construction of the quay walls involves piling equipment such as a

hydraulic hammer, a vibrator and a pile driver. Additionally various
construction cranes including crawler cranes (for sheet piles and king piles
installation), mobile crane and a tower crane are required. Other equipment
to be mobilised includes a backhoe, dumpers, trucks and a mobile concrete
pump.
The surface will be levelled to a working platform (approximately +3.8 m

above mean sea level). Additional ground materials will be removed by trucks
and placed in designated areas onshore. A dewatering system will be
installed. The open excavation pit will be protected with fencing as the works
progresses.
Next, foundation piling will be done using a crawler crane with vibratory
hammer. Longer piles will be driven to toe elevation in the mudstone layer
using a hydraulic impact hammer. Pre-drilling is not expected to be required.
Sheet piles will be driven using the crawler crane using hydraulic vibrator and
a hydraulic hammer to reach the final depth. Once the concrete slabs have
been poured for the quayside, additional dredging is required and used to fill
the final berth pocket. Low level cathodic protection anodes will also be

3-33
installed on the quay walls using in-house professional divers or a qualified
diving sub-contractor.
All steel piles and tie-rods will be shipped to Takoradi Port from where they
will be transported to site by road on trucks and stored in the lay-down area.
A pile-splicing yard will be developed where the piles will be fabricated to the
required length and provided with clutches (ie joint seals) before delivery to
the work areas.
3.4.3 Construction of Onshore Facilities
Following site clearance, the construction of the onshore facilities will

commence. This will include pouring of concrete slabs, building construction
for administration buildings, offices, warehousing and industrial units,
workshops, accommodation and other buildings living quarters as well as the
construction of onsite roads, laydown yards and paved areas.
A temporary precast and stack yard for rock and backfill materials will be
established (approximately 102,000 m2). The temporary precast yard will
include the following facilities:
a fabrication yard covering a total area of 4,410 m² and have a production

capacity of approximately 55 pieces (of Core-lac and berthing member) per
day;
a stockpiling area, which will cover a total area of 19,860 m² , to stockpile

the precast units produced in four months in three layers;
a steel processing workshop, which will cover a maximum area of 6,000

m²; and
an 8 m wide access road.
An access road of approximately 5.6 km in length will be built on the Project

site for use during construction. In addition to this, five existing small
bridges/ water crossings on site will be reinforced with steel works.
In addition, water reticulation drainage and storm water systems will be laid
across the site and will include drainage systems for low-lying areas, which
may become waterlogged. The proposed layout for the storm water drainage
system is presented in Figure 3.21.
Tanks and associated piping and infrastructure will be installed for the
hydrocarbon storage facilities. The wastewater treatment facilities will also be
constructed and installed along with any waste storage infrastructure and any
landfill areas.

3-34
After levelling of the area for the airstrip, it will be covered with hardstanding.
This will be designed and constructed in accordance with Ghanaian aviation
requirements as well as the relevant international standards.
Entry control points will also be established for the entire site.
After around 18-24 months from the start of construction, general site activity
will decrease as the Project moves into commissioning.
3.4.4 Construction Schedule
The planned construction schedule is presented in Figure 3.22.
3.4.5 Decommissioning
The proposed Project and facilities have been designed for a 50 year lifespan,
and to withstand 100-year storms. It is expected that the facility will continue
to operate beyond its designed lifespan. At the end of the 50 year concession
period the Government of Ghana will have the right to purchase the assets on
the Project site.
All decommissioning activities at the eventual end of the Project’s life will
need to be reviewed for environmental and social permitting requirements
(See Chapter 8).

3-35
Figure 3.21 Proposed Drainage System for the Project site
Figure 3.22 Planned Construction Schedule (including Dredging Activities during Site Preparation)
3.5 TRAFFIC
3.5.1 Marine Traffic
Approximately 2,548 calls of supply vessels and 174 calls of liners are
expected per annum. Approximately eight rig calls are expected per annum.
This number may increase in future years.
The number of tug boats required will depend on the number of the number
of rigs visiting the port per annum and the number of liquid bulk vessel calls.
The demand for oil field related services (and therefore the vessel activity) is
expected to be continuous throughout the year, although during the months
where bad weather and rough seas persist; there will be a greater requirement
for tugboats, to ensure safe passage of vessels into the terminal area. The
vessel types expected at the port, and their sizes, are outlined below in Table
3.8.
Table 3.8 Expected Vessel Types and Sizes
Vessel Size
Supply Vessel 80 m length x 15 m beam x 7 m draft
Liner/ Multipurpose vessel 139.9 m length X 21.5 m beam x 8.40 m draft
Rig
Barge 110 m length x 32 m beam x 7 m draft
AHT 60 m length x 15 m beam x 5 m draft
MPV 150 m length x 25 m beam x 8 m draft
Product carrier (liquid bulk) 180 m length x 25 m beam x 11 m draft
Tugs 29 m length x 8.8 m beam x 4.5 m draft, 3 berths
Pilot vessel 10 m length x 2.5 m beam x 1.5 m draft
Mooring launch 5 m length x 1.5 m beam x 0.5 m draft
Service vessel 29 m length x 8.8 m beam x 4.5 m draft
Naval patrol vessel 30 m length x 9 m beam x 4.5 m draft
Vehicle Traffic
All roads within the Project site boundary will be tarred to allow efficient and
safe transport of goods and personnel within the port. The number of vehicles
expected to be registered on site, during the operational phase of the Projects
is provided in Table 3.9.
Table 3.9 Number of Vehicle Registrations During Operations
Vehicle Type Number of Annual Number of Daily

registrations Registrations per annum
Car 124 8 711
Truck 98 320
Minibus 42 30
Crane and Forklift 53 20
Bus 10 5

3-38
In addition, approximately 2790 vehicles are expected to have access to the
quayside per annum. Parking of all vehicles will only be permitted in
designated areas and an onsite speed limit of 30 km/h will be enforced.
3.6 EMISSIONS, DISCHARGES AND WASTES
The Project will result in air, noise, and liquid emissions and the generation of
liquid and solid waste during both the constructi
on and operations phases. These are described in further detail below.
3.6.1 Air Emissions
The port activities, including waste facilities, possible incinerator and site
clearance and construction activities will generate emissions to the
atmosphere during the operational and construction phases respectively. Key
sources of air emissions will include the following:
dust during construction;

air emissions from combustion engines associated with vessel, vehicle and
air traffic as well as diesel generators; and
air emissions from the operation of the incinerator.
Combustion engines, which are expected to contribute to a large portion of

project related emission emit greenhouse gases and varying amounts of other
pollutants such as carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and
sulphur (SOx), volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and particulate matter.
Additional air emissions (eg methane) will result from waste management
activities. Small volumes of fugitive emissions will also likely result from the
storage of hydrocarbon fuels within the tank farm.
The main sources of emissions are the following:
generators;
incinerator;
vehicles during construction including quarry trucks, abnormal load size

trucks, construction trucks, construction/ plant equipment and cranes;
vehicles during operation including passenger vehicles, trucks, minibuses,

cranes and forklifts and passenger busses;
vessels during construction including dredging vessels and marine

construction vessels; and
vessels during operation ie tug boats, liners and support vessels.

3-39
The typical estimated values of the emissions generated by the Project during
construction and operation are summarised in Table 3.10. The list of
assumptions supporting these estimations is presented in Annex F.
Table 3.10 Air Emissions Inventory for the Project during Construction and Operation
Equipment Capacity Quantity Emissions (tonnes/year)

tCO2e NOx CO PM Hydrocar
bons
Generator 1.44 MW 7 67 100.22 812 1 007 48 115
Diesel
Incinerator 30 000 1 13 666 60 15 3 3
(operational m3 waste
phase)
Vehicles Range Approx. 9 388 5.86 47.48 Not 1.93
(construction 115 available
phase)
Vehicles Range Approx. 1 336.52 0.88 6.00 0.14 0.44
(operational 327
phase)
Vessels Support 10 705.23 179.61 126.42 3.58 0.94
(construction vessels
phase)
Vessels Range 20 6 064.98 351.6 252.80 25.28 Not

(operational available
phase)
Aircraft Range 3 1 450.04 3.55 2.22 0.72 0.92
3.6.2 Noise Emissions
The construction and operation activities will create noise emissions. The
majority of the noise emissions during construction phase result from
vegetation clearing, piling and the movement of heavy vehicles. During the
operational phase, noise emissions will be generated from the general port
operations including noise associated with the operation of machinery,
generators, compressors and other equipment as well as during landing and
take-off of the fixed-wing and rotary aircraft. Vessel manoeuvrings and
vehicle operations are also expected to produce noise emissions.
A modelling study was carried out to estimate the extent of noise emissions
associated with the airstrip. The results of this study (Figure 3.23) indicated
that aircraft associated noise at the DNL 65 dB level will extend between
approximately 500 – 1300 m from the airstrip, with a skewing to the northeast.
Figure 3.23 further indicates that no sensitive receptors fall within the area
affected by the aircraft noise emissions.

3-40
Figure 3.23 Modelled Aircraft Noise Contours (55, 65 and 75 dB)
3.6.3 Liquid Effluents
The port operations, including the repair and spooling operations and the
effluent treatment plants as well as the support vessels will produce a series of
effluent and wastewater discharges. All effluent will be treated to meet
Ghanaian legislative requirements, World Bank group EHS guidelines as well
as MARPOL requirements (whichever is more stringent) prior to discharge.
Lonrho will require all port tenants monitor the effluent composition through
regular monitoring.
Potential contaminants from project related activities may include

polychlorinated biphenyl (PCBs), polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs),
heavy metals (such as copper, zinc, mercury, lead, chromium and iron),
arsenic, chloride, sulphates, boron as well as petroleum products and phenols.
This effluent generated will be routed to a central effluent treatment plant,

which is expected to receive approximately 25 m3 per day. Effluent will be
treated on an EFLO constant transfer system, where it will be exposed to
extended aeration and biological treatment. The treated effluent will be
discharged to sea through an outfall pipeline and will be monitored for
compliance with the relevant standards and guidelines. Current IFC General
EHS Guidelines (for Environmental Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality)
do not specify limits for heavy metals in effluent; however the World Bank’s
Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook (PPAH) guidelines for the
discharge of heavy metal concentrations to surface waters will be considered.
This guideline is set at a maximum limit of 10 mg/l. The sludge generated
through the effluent treatment process will be categorised and disposed as
required. If considered hazardous, this will be disposed of at a suitable
licenced landfill, with the required hazardous waste disposal documentation.
Box 3.1 below provides the design criteria that will be used during the
construction of the central effluent treatment plant.
For storm water generated at the quayside, oil-water separator will be located
on each end of the quay to capture the potentially contaminated runoff. The
total oily waste water discharged from the site is expected to be approximately
6000 m3 per annum.

3-42
Box 3.1 Design Criteria for Effluent Treatment Plant
Plant Operation
The plant shall operate automatically with the minimum of supervision required. Process units
shall be arranged in parallel. Where pumps, compressors, etc. are required, duty / standby
operation shall be provided, with automatic switching between duty and standby equipment
after each cycle to ensure even wear. An in-built alarm system is intended to warn of any failure
events. It should be noted that the oil-sludge waste from ships and drill-cuttings are not meant
to be included in the processes of the effluent treatment plant; however the design criteria
proposed are deemed appropriate and feasible.
Requirements
The wastewater treatment plant shall be of modular construction initially designed to serve a
workforce of 1,500 persons, with the ability to be extended to serve an ultimate workforce of
3000 persons. The plant will be designed to treat crude sewage to produce a final effluent which
shall comply with the following discharge standard on a 95 percentile basis:
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5): 25 mg/l

Suspended Solids (SS): 35 mg/l
Total Nitrogen: 15 mg/l
Feacal Coliform 100 CFU/100ml
Total Coliform 500 CFU/100ml
Turbidity 1 NTU
Dissolve Oxygen 80 to 120 %of Sat.
Chlorine residual 1 ppm
pH 6 to 9
Domestic effluent requirements
Population 3000 (Final)

Dry weather flow: 45 litres/head/day
Peak flow (4 x DWF): 180 litres/head/day
Biochemical Oxygen Demand: 400 mg/l
Suspended Solids: 500 mg/l
Trade effluent requirements
The effluent treatment plant shall be capable of receiving and treating trade effluents which
may contain contaminants as scheduled in Section 3.3.4.2 of the Environmental Control Rules
and Requirements.
General
The effluent treatment plant shall be robust in design, construction and operation and be
arranged for ease of maintenance. All materials used shall be entirely suited to the climate and
aggressive environment in which they are to be installed.
3.6.4 Solid Waste
Waste generated during the site preparation and construction phase will
include vegetation, scrap metal, paper, packaging materials, wood, plastic,

3-43
empty containers, old machinery, oily rags, excavated road material and food
wastes.
Operations will generate solid waste including metal, paper, plastic, wood,
glass, empty drums and hazardous waste such as oily rags, spent oil and
medical wastes. This waste would include machinery and parts, sludge from
effluent treatment plants, organic and food wastes, and from operational
supplies such as shipping pallets, containers, office waste from the
administrative facilities and domestic waste from the accommodation
facilities. Solid waste, effluent and drilling wastes from the offshore vessels
and rigs would be brought to the port for disposal, storage and transfer and/
or treatment. The site is expected to produce approximately 6500 m3 of
general garbage annually.
Lonrho aims to achieve 100 percent compliance with all relevant regulations
and guidelines in place for the emission, discharge and disposal of wastes and
effluents, noise and air pollution associated with this Project.
Waste Management Activities
There will be slops and oil transferred from berthed ships to the shore of up
approximately 1500 l per year, and will be stored within the tank farm. This
value includes only the residues from this cleaning process that cannot be
reused on the ship (or burned). In cases where the supply of oil waste is
higher, the appropriate capacity increase for processing will be installed by
the responsible contractor. These waste products will be stored and treated by
the contractor in charge of waste and will be disposed of in a suitable manner.
The vessels calling at the OST will have oily-water separators on board and
will clean the bilge water on board the ship.
Wastes generated onsite will be sorted and stored in the assigned areas either
for treatment (effluent, sewage and drill cuttings) or transportation for offsite
disposal (hazardous wastes) via the waste contractor. General solid domestic
and industrial waste will be disposed of offsite at a suitably certified waste
disposal facility. It is estimated that approximately 434 t of general waste will
be generated onsite per annum.
Hazardous wastes will be removed from site by a suitably certified contractor,

and all handling, storage and transfer of hazardous wastes will be undertaken
and documented in compliance with Ghanaian legislation and international
best practice. It is estimated that approximately 166 t of hazardous waste will
be generated per annum during operations.
3.7 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
During construction, approximately a peak maximum of 600 workers will be

employed, primarily in unskilled and semi-skilled positions. Unskilled labour
will be drawn from the neighbouring communities as far as possible.

3-44
Approximately 330 permanent port staff as well as approximately 1200
employed by tenants and port users will be employed during operation of the
port. In addition, up to 500 contract workers would be required for large rig
repair and other ad hoc projects. These will comprise a mix of highly skilled
managerial positions likely to be filled by expatriates and Ghanaian staff, and
other skilled, semi-skilled and un-skilled positions. These positions would
primarily be semi-skilled workers such as welders, fitters, turners, painters,
electricians, for approximately 3-6 months at a time.
Lonrho will ensure the EPC contractor takes due recognition of the local
content policy and requirements issued by the Government of Ghana.
A breakdown of the number of employees required for the different phases of

the Project is provided below (Table 3.11).
Table 3.11 Employment requirements for the Project
Employment Level Number

Construction Phase
Senior managers 30
Technical staff 260
Skilled local personnel 330
Unskilled people 230
Dredging Operations
Senior staff 23
Technical crew operators 79
Semi and unskilled personnel 56
Operation of the port
Senior expat staff 7
Senior/junior staff 37
Skilled and semi-skilled staff 180
Unskilled staff 106
3.8 HEALTH AND SAFETY (H&S) AND SECURITY
All port employees as well as tenants and contractors will be required to

adhere to rules and guidelines stipulated in the HSSE requirements developed
by Lonrho, which include requirements for health and safety, access control
and security measures.
Lonrho will require all employees, contractor and tenants to adhere to the
Lonrho H&S Policy for the site as well as Ghanaian H&S legislation. This will
include use of suitable personal protective equipment (PPE), hearing
protection and implementation of and adherence to a permitting system for
activities associated with particular H&S risks. These would include working
at heights, work in confined spaces and hot work.
As the port will be a ‘free zone’, the entire perimeter of the project site will be
fenced, and therefore entry into the terminal area will only be permitted
through controlled access gates. Identification cards and access permits will

3-45
be required for staff and visitors. The site security will include permanent
perimeter fencing and lighting which will be monitored by a security force of
ten security guards. The fence will be fitted with the appropriate warning and
information signs related to Project activities.
All employees will be issued with a Company Employment Card (CEC) which
provides a unique identification for each employee. This card will serve as a
permit allowing access into the Free Zone and also is the source of
identification and must be carried by the client’s employee at all times when
in the Free Port area. Vehicles entering the Project site will be subject to
security checks and searches. No firearms will be allowed in or out of the
Project site, including security personnel. Any required armed response will
be provided by the Ghanaian National security Forces.
3.9 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES
This chapter describes the proposed Project design. In developing the concept
and the design of the Project, a number of alternatives were considered. This
Section provides a description of the following:
No Project alternative;
alternative projects;
location alternatives; and
layout design and/ or technology alternatives.
3.9.1 Consideration of Alternatives During Project Design
The Project has been developed in consideration of the environmental and

technical engineering constraints. The design is based on proven engineering
techniques and design methods, safe working conditions and consideration of
environmental and social constraints. Within the constraints, consideration of
environmental and social impacts was considered in the design process and
consideration of alternatives was embedded in the approach and taking
measures to optimise the design to:
minimise of the overall footprint;

minimising the materials required;
ensuring optimum re-use of dredged material;
including measures to mitigate negative impacts on the biophysical and
social environment into the design of the Project and methods; and
avoiding physical resettlement of existing communities.
Any additional structures or infrastructure constructed or designed tenants

will be required to comply with the procedures and specifications stipulated
in the ESMP.
The primary activities and steps in the planning and technical engineering
design process included the following:

3-46
information gathering and site surveys (including for construction
material);
defining of design conditions and criteria;
selection of preferred Project layout;
technical studies including wave tranquillity studies, ship manoeuvring
studies, dredging and sedimentation study and operational downtime
assessment;
refining of the Project layout based on the results of the technical studies;
conceptual engineering of main Project elements;
refining the CAPEX estimates;
value engineering workshop; and
finalisation of implementation schedule.
This process of refining the site is described in Section 3.9.
3.9.2 No Project Alternative
One of the potential alternatives is the No Project alternative. In this scenario

the Project would not be developed and the Project site would remain as is
with agriculture and fishing activities continuing, unaffected. The
environmental and social effects as well as the negative impacts of the
construction and operations activities would therefore not occur. Additionally,
there would be no additional noise, air and effluent emissions into the
environment. Furthermore, local livelihoods remain at risk from diminishing
fish catches and manual, inefficient farming practices.
If the Project does not go ahead, the positive impacts would not occur. There
would be no additional employment during the construction and operational
phases. At a national level, Ghana will forgo foreign currency injections as a
result of the operations. The oil and gas operators will need to travel further
to service the rigs in other countries (South Africa and the Canary Islands).
The Project need is justified on the basis of commercial benefits as well and
developmental benefits. The growth of the oil and gas sector in Ghana has
created a demand for services to offshore oil and gas operations and
development of services in Ghana is in line with the government’s objective to
increase local content in oil and gas sector. It is also in line with regional
development plans.
3.9.3 Alternative Projects
The existing port at Takoradi is currently congested as a result of high levels

of traffic and use. This prompted the Government of Ghana to invite
proposals from a number of experienced developers for a new port (with oil
and gas facilities) that would help to alleviate the strained infrastructure at the
Takoradi port.

3-47
Lonrho was selected by the Government of Ghana to develop a new port, on
the basis of their conceptual design as well as their recent experience
developing the Luba Freeport Project, a similar facility in Equatorial Guinea.
3.9.4 Location Alternatives
In developing the Project, Lonrho carried out a site selection process prior to
selecting the preferred Project location near Atuabo. The selection process
began with the identification of ten possible sites which matched the initial
criteria for a port development to service the offshore oil and gas fields. The
sites considered were all located to the west of Takoradi due to proximity to
offshore oil and gas operations as well as the directive of the Government of
Ghana. The sites for consideration were initially identified from maps and
aerial photographs and based the following criteria:
a minimum size of 2000 acres (approximately 809 ha) for development;

avoid lagoons and wetland areas;
minimise impacts on the environment and avoid designated wildlife areas;
and
limit resettlement of people as much as possible and avoid location close
to settlements of more than 1000 people.
Information about the sites was gathered through a combination of desktop

research and a site visits. The long list of sites was evaluated using a form of
Criteria Analysis (MCA) whereby technical, environmental, and social criteria
were compared, weighted and ranked (Table 3.12). Five of the sites were
rejected due to technical feasibility reasons (proximity to the border,
insufficient space for future development). Of the remaining five, one site
(near Cape Three Points) was ranked significantly lower than the others and
was discarded.
The four short-listed sites included Axim East, Esiama, Atuabo-West and
Atuabo-East. These were examined more closely to establish the best-suited
area.
Esiama was not preferred as a result of high population densities and land
ownership disputes. The undesirable location close to a sensitive lagoon and
tourist resort were also key factors in Esiama’s rejection. Axim was also not
preferred due to the potential high cost of levelling the site and dredging
relevant channels in the rocky substrate. The two sites at Atuabo were
therefore considered most suitable for the development of the port.
Atuabo-East (the selected Project site) was found to be most favourable as

physical resettlement could be avoided. The site also effects less (seasonal)
wetland area than the other sites and is further from tourism activities and the
ecologically sensitive areas.

3-48
Table 3.12 Site Evaluation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cape Three points

Weighing Factor
Atuabo -West
Atuabo-East
Half Assini
Axim East
Egyambra
Bakanta
Kengen
Esiama
Benyin
From East to West
Techno / Costs
Technical
Distance to service area (offshore oil
fields) 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 -3
Presence of natural sheltered water 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Wind, Wave / climate conditions 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Onshore soil conditions 2 2 -2 0 0 -2 2 2 2 2 0
Presence of rocky areas (offshore) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 -3 -3 -3
Need for onshore land levelling / land fill 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 -2 -2 -2
Construction & Maintenance costs
Distance to construction materials - Land
fill 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Distance to construction materials -
Quarry 2 -2 0 -2 -2 -2 -2 0 2 -2 2
Distance to deep water / Dredging
Volume 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 -2 -2 2 2
Availability and condition of hinterland
connections 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 -1
Removal or reconfiguration of existing
roads 1 -1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 1 1 1
Availability of utilities (power and water) 1 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
Socio - Environmental
Ecological & Environmental
Offshore ecosystem (fish & turtles) 1 -1 0 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 1 1
Intertidal ecosystem (turtles, birds,
microalgae) 1 -1 0 -1 -1 -1 0 -1 1 1 1
Onshore ecosystem (lagoons) 1 0 0 -1 0 -1 -1 1 0 0 1
RAMSAR-site - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Socio-economic environment
Population density 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 1 0 -1
Resettlement 3 0 0 0 -3 -3 0 -3 0 0 0
Tourism developments 2 0 0 -2 -2 0 -2 0 -2 -2 -2
Visual impact 2 2 2 -2 -2 2 -2 2 2 -2 -2
Existing industrial activities 2 2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 2 -2 -2
Human use ranking 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Other
Safety of navigation 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 -3 -3 -3 -3
Distance to labour force 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 -1
Growing potential - 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 1 1 -1 1
Distance to border Ivory Coast - -1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overall Suitability - 6 9 7 8 -7
Source: Royal Haskoning, 2012

3-49
3.9.5 Layout Alternatives
Aspects of the Project design process have been interactive and have taken the
input from the ESIA process, baseline studies and technical studies as well as
community engagement into account.
A number of layout alternatives were considered for the port to maximise the
use of the coastal land available and to avoid sensitive features (Figure 3.24).
The other criteria used to evaluate the various options were functionality of
operations on the site and minimising social impacts, ie avoiding physical
resettlement or the need to disturb culturally sensitive features (eg cemetery).
Reconfiguration of the breakwaters: The initial configuration of the

breakwaters in a mainly north-south orientation was revised to account for
coastal current and to minimise the effects on coastal sediment transport
from the west to the east. The breakwaters are now oriented in a more
south-westerly manner.
Reconfiguration of the access roads: The access road between

Asemdasuazo and Atuabo was re-designed for better access between
communities after implementation of the Project. The design team
subsequently revised the proposed access route and the updated layout
and Project site boundary to allow the road to pass to the east of the
airstrip rather than be routed around the airstrip.
Refinement of the site boundary: The site boundary was revised such
that the Asemdasuazo community is not isolated from the all of the
surrounding fields currently used for farming.
Location of the airstrip: The airstrip was sited to avoid the communities
and to minimise the effects of noise. Noise emissions’ modelling was
conducted to determine emissions levels and confirm the location and
buffer areas.
The results of this site refinement process are shown in Figure 3.24below.

3-50
Figure 3.24 Different Layout Options for the Proposed Project facilities
4 BIOPHYSICAL BASELINE
4.1 INTRODUCTION
The biophysical baseline survey is a description of the current biophysical

environment of the Project site and surrounding area. This chapter presents an
overview of the terrestrial and marine aspects of the environment which may be
directly or indirectly affected by the proposed Project infrastructure and
activities. In this way this baseline can also be used to develop mitigation
measures which will ensure that the present state of the environment is upheld as
far as possible.
For the purposes of this chapter the area of influence is considered to be the direct
Project footprint including the marine infrastructure, dredging disposal sites and
environment immediately surrounding the Project site. The Study Area for air
and noise extends to the wider area including the three neighbouring
communities of Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo.
The information on the biophysical baseline is derived from published sources as

well as from the dry season field surveys that were conducted during April 2012.
The laboratory analysis of all groundwater and soil sample analysis was
conducted by ESL Consulting. Information is also drawn from secondary data
sourced from the EIA report for the development of the Jubilee Field, as well as
published journal articles and online sources.
4.2 CLIMATE AND METEOROLOGY
The regional climate is controlled by two air masses: one over the Sahara desert
(tropical continental) and the other over the Atlantic Ocean (maritime). These
two air masses meet at the Inter-Tropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ). During the
boreal winter, the tropical continental air from the northern anticyclone over the
Sahara brings in north-easterly trade winds which are dry and have a high dust
load. During the boreal summer, warm humid maritime air reaches inland over
the region. In general, the region is characterised by two distinct climatic periods,
namely the dry and wet seasons.
The coastal part of the western region is influenced by the dry North-East Trade
Winds and the wet South-West Monsoon Winds of West Africa. The north-south
oscillation of the warm, humid south westerly winds and the hot, dry north
easterly winds of the ITCZ determines the two main seasons in this area (the dry

4-1
season and the wet season). The dry season usually begins in late September or
early October and ends in April while the wet season usually starts from May
and ends in October. The dry season is characterized by the dry dusty wind
blowing across the Sahara Desert from the northwest coast of Africa while the
wet season brings in rains. The hazy dry north-east wind is locally called
Harmattan. The prevailing wind is from the south-west and the swell direction is
predominantly from the south to south west. The region experiences few storms
and moderate wave action.
Meteorological conditions in the western region are characterised by relatively

stable temperatures throughout the year. Daily maximum temperatures range
from an average of 27°C from July to September and between 30 and 31°C
between November and April. The mean daily temperature ranges between 21
and 23°C. Average relative humidity shows a consistent daily variation, reaching
95 percent overnight and decreasing to 70 percent to 80 percent during the day
(HPI, 2009). The Project area is located in between two weather stations of the
Ghana Meteorological Agency, Axim on the east and Half Assini on the west.
Data from these two stations was be used to describe the climatic conditions in
the Project area.
4.2.1 Rainfall
Generally, in Ghana there are two rainy seasons, the first begins in May and ends
in mid-July and the second begins in late August and ends in October. The
average annual rainfall is about 730 mm. Half Assini and Axim experience
rainfall throughout the year. The average rainfall recorded in the Project area
during the last ten year period ranged from 0 to 1290.2 mm.
A bi-modal pattern is observed with peaks in May - June and October -

November (Figure 4.1.). During the peak periods, Half Assini records slightly
higher rainfall than Axim. Mean peak value for Half Assini in June is about 568.3
mm and the mean peak value for Axim is about 479.0 mm, normally in June.
Both stations experience lowest rainfall in January of 33.9 mm and 50.9 mm for
Half Assini and Axim respectively.

4-2
Figure 4.1 Average Monthly Rainfall for Half Assini and Axim from 2002 to 2011
Source: Ghana Meteorological Agency, 2012.
4.2.2 Temperature
The Project Area is relatively warm with very little variation throughout the year.
The average temperature is higher between February to May and from November
to December with peak temperatures recorded in March. Lower temperatures for
the two areas were recorded between June and October with the coolest month
usually being August. In Axim, the mean monthly temperature ranges from
23.57°C in August (the coolest) to 31.53°C in March (the hottest) while in Half
Assini, the coolest month is August with a temperature average of 23.7°C and
March is the hottest with a temperature average of 32.35°C (Figure 4.2).

4-3
Figure 4.2 Monthly Average Temperature for Axim and Half Assini from 2002 to 2011
4.2.3 Relative Humidity
Average relative humidity shows a consistent daily variation, reaching over 95

percent overnight and decreasing to 70 to 80 percent during the day (HPI, 2009).
The relative humidity tends to be slightly higher in Half Assini than in Axim.
Mean monthly relative humidity (RH) values for early morning (at 0600 GMT)
and mid-afternoon (at 1500 GMT) for Axim and Half Assini are presented in
Figure 4.3. The morning values range from 90 to 94 percent and 94.6 to 96.3
percent for Axim and Half Assini respectively. This suggests a westward
decrease in morning humidity regimes. The afternoon values also indicate a
similar trend with values ranging from 71 to 82 percent and 79.6 to 87.1 percent
for Axim and Half Assini respectively. Humidity over the sea, according to the
US Navy Marine Climatic Atlas of the World, varies between 80 and 85 percent
throughout the year (Jubilee EIA, 2009).

4-4
Figure 4.3 Average Monthly Relative Humidity for Axim and Half Assini from 2002 to 2011
4.2.4 Wind
Surface atmospheric circulation in the region is largely influenced by north and

south trade winds and the position of the ITCZ. Onshore wind direction for
Axim almost consistently from south-westerly such that the average wind
direction from 2002 – 2011 at Axim (1) was measured as from the southwest except
for January and February 2006 (westerly) (Ghana Meteorological Agency, 2012).
The wind direction in the Project Area can confidently be considered to be
southwest. During the day the wind circulation is generally from southwest
while at night it is usually from northwest due to a land breeze which occurs at
night. However, inter-annual variability in direction occurs for some months.
(1) There was no wind data from the Ghana Meteorological Agency’s station at Half Assini thus data from Axim was used

4-5
The average monthly wind speed for Axim ranges between 2.4 and 3.2 knots for
the past ten years (Figure 4.4.). Over the past ten years, averagely wind speeds
tend to be low from November to January and increases in speed from February
to October with a slight decrease in May. Winds speeds normally range between
4.3 – 10.8 knots. Daily wind speeds are lowest during the night and early
morning and highest in mid-afternoon. Extreme high winds are caused by
squalls (storms), associated with the leading edge of multi-cell thunderstorms
(Jubilee EIA, 2009).
Figure 4.4 Average Monthly Wind Speed for Axim from 2002 to 2011.
4.2.5 Oceanography
The Project site is located on the coast of western Ghana, of the Gulf of Guinea.
The oceanography of the Gulf of Guinea is largely influenced by the
meteorological and oceanographic processes of the South and North Atlantic
Oceans. The circular ocean currents called gyral (Fontaine et al, 1999; Merle and
Arnault, 1985) drive the oceanographic processes in the region.
Currents
The thermal cycle occurs in the upper two elements of the water column which
together form the tropical surface water mass. There are three main water
current systems influencing the movement of water masses in the region of the
Project site. These are the eastward flowing Guinea Current, a small westward
counter current and the westward flowing south Equatorial current (Bernacesk,
1986 and Armah, 1987), as shown in Figure 4.5. In addition, the oceanic gyral
currents of the North and South Atlantic Oceans create a counter current, the
Equatorial Counter Current (ECC) which becomes known as the Guinea Current
(Figure 4.6) as it flows from Senegal to Nigeria.

4-6
Figure 4.5 Major Current Systems Influencing the Gulf of Guinea
Source: WACS PER, 2010
The principal current along the Ghana coastline is the Guinea Current, which is
an offshoot of the Equatorial Counter Current (EEC). The ECC (Figure 4.5) is
driven by westward wind stress. When this subsides during February to April
and October to November, the direction of the ECC is reversed. The Guinea
Current (Figure 4.6) reaches a maximum strength between May and July during
the strongest South-West Monsoon Winds when it peaks at 1 to 2 knots
[approximately 1 m/s]. For the rest and greater part of the year, the current is
weaker.
Near the coast, the strength of the current is attenuated by locally generated
currents and winds. The current is less persistent near-shore than farther
offshore. Geotropic effects induce the tendency of the Guinea Current to drift
away from the coast especially during its maximum strength.

4-7
Figure 4.6 The Guinea Current
Source: Jubilee EIA, 2009
The coastal surface currents are predominantly wind-driven and confined to a

layer approximately 10 - 40 m in diameter. Littoral drift, main driving force
behind local coastal circulation, is predominantly generated by breaking waves.
These littoral drifts generally flow in an eastward direction, with flow rates of less
than 1 m/s. They are also responsible for transporting large volumes of
sediments.
Stratification of Oceanic Water Masses
Water masses offshore the Ghanaian coast consist of five principal layers
(Longhurst, 1962). These are Tropical Surface Water (TSW); South Atlantic

4-8
Central Water (SACW); Antarctic Deep Water (ADW); North Atlantic Deep
Water (NADW); and Antarctic Bottom Water (ABW).
The topmost layer is the Tropical Surface Water (TSW), warm and of variable
salinity which extends down to a maximum of about 45 m depending on the
seasonal position of the thermocline. Below the thermocline (which varies from 5
to 35 m) occurs the South Atlantic Central Water (SACW, cool and high salinity)
down to a depth of about 700 m. Below this are consecutively, three cold layers,
namely the Antarctic Deep Water (ADP, 700-1,500 m), the North Atlantic Deep
Water (NADP, 1,500-3,500 m) and the Antarctic Bottom Water (ABW, 3,500-
3,800).
Sea surface Temperatures (SST) typically vary between 27 - 29°C, although strong
seasonal cooling occurs during the season related to coastal upwelling processes.
In general, the surface waters are much warmer than waters at greater depth.
Most of the year, the coastal waters are thermally stratified with a well-mixed
layer of warm, low salinity water (33.67 – 34.22 percent) 30 – 40 m above a sharp
thermocline. Salinity is at maximum (35.05 – 35.38 percent) below the
thermocline at 60 – 80 m depth. During upwelling, the thermocline weakens and
rises to the surface resulting in a vertically homogeneous salinity profile above
the shelf (Mensah and Anang, 1998)
Upwelling
Seasonal changes in the hydrographic regime come in the form of minor and
major upwelling events, alternating with periods of stratification (strong
thermocline). The position and dynamics of the upwelling are varied. The
movement of colder, nutrient-rich SACW from depth to replace TSW at the
surface, leading to the breaking of the thermocline, occurs in a process termed
Upwelling. This phenomenon results in increased primary productivity (Figure
4.7).
The major upwelling occurs from July through to September or October, while
between December and February, the surface waters tend to be slightly cooler,
indicating a minor upwelling. The rest of the year is characterised by the strong
thermocline fluctuating at depth between 10 and 40 m. The two upwelling
seasons are characterised by decreasing sea surface temperature (SST), typically
<25°C, increasing salinity and decreasing dissolved oxygen.
Seasonal coastal upwelling periodically modifies the physicochemical parameters

of the water masses and controls the biology of the sub-system (Minta, 2003). The
major and minor upwellings increase primary production thus has considerable
influence on the local fisheries in the sub-region. The upwelling influences the

4-9
migratory patterns of pelagic fish and is linked with the marine fish catch. Years
of higher upwelling indices seem to coincide with those of high yield for the
Sardinella spp (Koranteng, 1991).
Figure 4.7 Primary Productivity (mg C m-2 d-1) Offshore Ghana during August and April.
Source: Sea Around Us Project, 2008
Tides and Waves
The nature of the tide on the coast of Ghana is regular and semi-diurnal (Armah
et al, 2003). The average range of neap and spring tides increases from west to
east. The tidal currents are low and have insignificant influences on coastal
processes except within tidal inlets.

4-10
Waves reaching the shores of Ghana consist of swells originating from the
oceanic area around the Antarctica Continent and seas generated by locally
occurring winds (Noble-Denton, 2008). The coast is open south-south-easterly
long swells induced by dominant wind forcing over a large fetch in the South
Atlantic Ocean. Wave heights are generally between 0.9 m and 1.4 m and rarely
greater than 2.5m or more. During occasional swells, the wave amplitude may
peak to six meters.
Longshore Drift
Longshore drift is caused by wave and current action and is the primary method
of sediment transport. The wave regime described in this Section is characteristic
of strong sustained longshore drift that prevails along much of the coastline of
Ghana. Due to the orientation of the coastline, the Guinea Current arrives at the
coast of Ghana such that the waves are positioned at oblique angles of between 10
to 15 degrees to the coastline. As a result of this, longshore currents along the
Ghanaian coast (including the coastal area at the Project site) move
predominantly in an easterly direction, as is shown in Figure 4.8.
Figure 4.8 Coastline of Ghana showing the Net Direction of Longshore Drift
Source: Boateng (2006), adapted from Ly (1980) and Benneh and Dickson (1988)
Note: cross used to indicate approximate Project location.
The Ghanaian coastline can be divided into three regions based on

geomorphological features ie Eastern, Central and Western Coasts. The littoral
sediment is dominated by fluvial (river) sources across the length of the coastline,

4-11
and sediments forming the beaches of the Western Coast region are likely from
the Ankobra and Tano rivers.
The Eastern and Central Coastal areas are considered high and medium energy
environments (Boateng, 2006), while the Western Coast is characterised by low
energy environment with wide, flat beaches backed with coastal lagoons.
Due to the general eastwards direction of longshore drift along the coast of
Ghana, and the relatively limited supply of sediment from areas to the west
(Tsidzi and Kumapley, 2001), coastal erosion has been found to be present within
all three of the coastal regions. Erosion is particularly significant along the
Eastern Coast, particularly in close proximity to the Volta delta due to the high
energy environment. The beaches along the Western Coast are however
generally considered to be stable (Tsidzi and Kumapley, 2001). Longshore
currents move eastwards at speeds averaging 0.2 – 0.4 m/s along this coastline
(Boateng, 2006).
4.3 BATHYMETRY AND SEABED TOPOGRAPHY
The continental shelf (200 m water depth) off the coast of the Western Region of
Ghana is at its narrowest (20 km wide) off Cape St Paul in the east and at its
widest (90 km) between Takoradi and Cape Coast in the west (Armah and
Amlalo, 1998). The continental slope is steep and the depths increase sharply
from approximately 100 m on the shelf, dropping to approximately 1,500 m at the
deepest part of the slope.
Ghana’s near shore area comprises various sediment types, varying from soft
sediment (mud and sandy-mud), sandy bottoms to hard bottoms (Martos et al,
1991). On the continental shelf, seabed sediments range from coarse sand on the
inner shelf to fine sand and dark grey mud on the outer shelf (Armah et al, 2004).
Sediments on the shelf and upper continental slope are predominantly
terrigenous (derived from erosion of rocks from land), with smaller amounts of
glauconite-rich (iron silicate) sediments, and biogenic carbonate from mollusc
shells.
4.4 GEOLOGY, SOILS AND TOPOGRAPHY
4.4.1 Geology
Most of the coastal region of Ghana comprises of hard granites, granodiorites,

metamorphosed larva and pyroclastic rock. These formations would have been

4-12
created during the Cretaceous period (135 million years ago). In some cases these
coastal formations are covered by Ordovician, Silurian and Devonian sandstone
and shale (HPI, 2009).
The project area lies within the Western Region of Ghana and forms the
southernmost part of the Ashanti volcanic belt. The area has a comparatively
prominent morphology, defined by NE-SW trending ranges of hill mostly
underlain by volcanic rocks. The geology of south western Ghana is dominated
by greenstone belts composed of mafic volcanic rocks and intervening basins
typically consisting of fine-grained deep marine sediments metamorphosed at
green schist facies. The sedimentary rocks of the Tano Basin, which includes the
project area, are grouped together as “Apollonian System” of the lower
cretaceous, Mesozoic rocks. These rocks overlie a pre-Cambrian basement of
metamorphic rocks known as the Birimian System. The Birimian rocks are
schists, phyllites and greywackes.
The rocks of the project area comprises of limestone, marl, mudstone with
intercalated sandy beds and may be divided as follows from older to younger in
ascending succession:
Unit I: Beach deposits of loose sand with occasional layers of clays and shaly
clays.
Unit II: Nauli-type limestones with interbedded black-shaly clays.
Unit III: Sandstones with minor shales.
Unit IV: Conglomerates consisting of beds of pebbles and cobbles of igneous

and metamorphic rocks firmly cemented with calcareous cement.
Unit V: Sandstones with minor shales.
Unit VI: Black carbonaceous shales. The unit is entirely composed of thin-
bedded black, carbonaceous shales which are separated from each other by
much thinner layers of grey silt. The black shales are very rich in
carbonaceous matter.

4-13
Figure 4.9 Geological map of south western Ghana
Source: Ghana Geological Survey Department, 2009
Higher ground in the region, which is considered to represent a deeply dissected

peneplain, reaches elevations of 70-120 m above sea level and rises distinctly
above the adjoining lower ground, which is frequently underlain by intrusive
rocks and does not exceed 50 m in elevation. The terrain covered by basin
sediments and Cretaceous rocks is very flat and swampy in most parts.
With regards to seismic activity, southern Ghana is not considered a highly active
area; however it is capable of experiencing significant earthquakes (HPI, 2009).
The crustal evolution of coastal Ghana was characterised by the development of a

series of spatially restricted shallow, mostly marine coastal basins roughly along
a line running close to the present-day Ghanaian coastline during the
Phanerozoic eon about 540 million years ago. The Phanerozoic constitutes the
age of multicellular animal life on Earth. During this time micro- and
multicellular organisms left a detailed fossil record, and built up complex and
diverse ecosystems. Oil in commercial quantities has recently been discovered in
the Phanerozoic coastal basins offshore the project area.
Extensional coastal basin formation began as early as the Ordovician (Sekondian

Group) and was followed by formation of basins represented by the Devonian

4-14
(Accraian Group), the Upper Jurassic (Amisian Group) and the Upper Lower
Cretaceous (Apollonian Group). Sedimentation in coastal basins continued as
evidenced by Tertiary and Quaternary clastic sediments widespread in the Keta
and Tano basins (Figure 4.8).
4.4.2 Soils
The major soils of the area are forest and savanna ochrosols, which are usually
red and brown in colour and moderately well-drained. Fertile soils exist in the
low lying coastal regions as a result of the previous dominance of thick coastal
forests combined with high levels of rainfall (CRC-URI, 2010).
Soil samples for analysis were taken at depth intervals of 0-25, 25-50 and 50-75 cm
at the sampling points shown in Figure 4.10. A composite sample made up of
equal samples from all the depth intervals was also prepared. These samples
were analysed to determine the pH, conductivity, nutrients, soil elements, soil
organics and organic matter content.

4-15
Figure 4.10 Location of Soil, Air, Noise and Water Sampling Study Sites in the Vicinity of the Project area
Note: The sample at the stream at Eikwe is located to the east of the Project site.
pH and Conductivity
The soil samples were found to be acidic, ranging in pH from 4.70 to 6.20 and
with an average pH value of 5.52±0.48. The pH increased moderately in all the
levels towards the sea at S 3 (ATU-03) although there was no discernible pattern
between the profile depths. Average conductivity of the soil samples was
0.05±0.06 mS/cm and ranged between 0.01 and 0.22 mS/cm.
Figure 4.11 Distribution of pH Levels across the Soil Profile Pits
Notes: These labels refer to the following sites on the sampling locations map: ATU-01 = S1, ATU-02
= S2 and ATU-03 = S3
Nitrate and Phosphorus
Average concentration of nitrate in the soil samples was found to be 0.42±0.13

mg/l with a range of 0.21 to 0.56 mg/l. Nitrate levels were elevated in the top
soil layers (ie 0-25 cm) as well as in the composite samples (Figure 4.12). Average
levels of phosphorus values in the soil sample were 4.66±1.24 mg/l with a range
of 3.08 to 7.1 mg/l and were higher in the top soils (0-25 cm) compared to the
other profile depths. This is as would be expected an agricultural land use and is
likely as a result of the higher levels of organic matter.

4-17
Figure 4.12 Distribution of Nitrogen and Phosphorus Levels across the Soil Profile Pits
Oil and Grease and Total Petroleum Hydrocarbon (TPH)
The results of the oil and grease, and TPH in the soil samples are presented in
Table 4.1. As would be expected considering the rural nature of the site, the oil
and grease and TPH concentrations were low across the site, indicating a largely
uncontaminated site.
The concentration of oil and grease ranged from 1- 3 ppm with an average of
1.00±1.04 ppm. A similar trend was observed for TPH levels in soil samples with
a minimum value of 1 ppm and a maximum value of 4 ppm and an average of
2.42±1.24 ppm.

4-18
Table 4.1 Concentrations of Oil & Grease and Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons in soil
samples
SID Oil and grease (ppm) TPH (ppm)

ATU-01 (0-0.25 m) 1.00 2.00
ATU-01 (0.25-0.50 m) 1.00 1.00
ATU-01 (0.50-0.75 m) 1.00 4.00
ATU-01 composite 3.00 3.00
ATU-02 (0-0.25 m) 0.00 1.00
ATU-02 (0.25-0.50 m) 1.00 1.00
ATU-02 (0.50-0.75 m) 0.00 4.00
ATU-03 (0-0.25 m) 1.00 2.00
ATU-03 (0.25-0.50 m) 0.00 1.00
ATU-03 (0.50-0.75 m) 0.00 4.00
Heavy Metals in Soil Samples
The levels of mercury (Hg) and manganese (Mn) in the soil samples were found
to be below laboratory detection levels (<100 ppt). The other trace/heavy metals
analysed showed varied levels in the soil with declension in average
concentration following the sequence as Ni>Cu>Al>Zn=Mg>Cr>Fe>Cd>Pb.
According to this sequence, the levels of nickel, copper and aluminium in the soil
were relatively high, likely reflecting the natural the rock composition in the area
and any anthropogenic contribution could pose environmental concern.
A summary table of heavy metal soil concentrations is included as Table 4.2.

below.
Table 4.2 Concentration of Heavy Metals in Soils of the Proposed Atuabo Project Area
SID Cd Pb Cu Cr Al Ni Zn Mg Hg Fe Mn
µg/kg µg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg
ATU-01
(0-0.25 m) 25.61 34.63 168.95 10.93 41.74 392.57 18.88 18.88 <0.001 1.49 <0.01
ATU-01
(0.25-
0.50m) 34.73 9.70 164.11 3.96 40.61 658.68 16.84 16.84 <0.001 3.47 <0.01
ATU-01
(0.50-0.75
m) 22.16 10.38 159.14 7.96 35.81 497.31 16.71 16.71 <0.001 2.98 <0.01
ATU-01
COMP 47.84 6.98 184.45 0.80 53.84 478.56 17.75 17.75 <0.001 6.48 <0.01

4-19
SID Cd Pb Cu Cr Al Ni Zn Mg Hg Fe Mn
µg/kg µg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg mg/kg
ATU-02
(0-0.25 m) 31.98 76.40 169.19 5.97 40.80 403.07 17.12 17.12 <0.001 3.98 <0.01
ATU-02
(0.25-0.50
m) 19.69 37.33 164.05 0.50 33.80 521.97 20.48 20.48 <0.001 2.98 <0.01
ATU-02
(0.50-0.75
m) 21.88 6.78 144.71 3.99 35.93 444.11 41.92 41.92 <0.001 2.50 <0.01
ATU-02
COMP 26.92 11.15 173.47 1.19 58.49 446.07 31.42 31.42 <0.001 7.43 <0.01
ATU-03
(0-0.25 m) 49.97 44.10 189.09 19.90 40.80 373.21 23.49 23.49 <0.001 2.79 <0.01
ATU-03
(0.25-0.50
m) 17.67 12.27 168.85 4.97 34.76 645.61 35.96 35.96 <0.001 3.38 <0.01
ATU-03
(0.50-0.75
m) 15.94 4.64 144.97 13.00 33.99 609.88 19.80 19.80 <0.001 1.00 <0.01
ATU-03
COMP 15.51 3.95 159.62 1.70 55.87 558.66 35.32 35.32 <0.001 2.49 <0.01
Nickel levels were reported at an average value of 502.48±98.08 mg/kg with a

range of 373.21 to 658.68 mg/kg. The average concentration of copper in the soil
ranged from 144.71 to 189.09 mg/kg with an average of 165.88 mg/kg. Copper
and its compounds are naturally present in the earth's crust and rock, either in its
pure form or in compounds. Both nickel and copper levels were therefore above
the critical level of 100 mg/ kg suggested by EPA/ROC (1989). Geological,
meteorological, and biological processes disperse copper into the air, soil, and
water as well as into organisms. Human activity also accounts for much of the
copper found in air, soil, and water as industrial operations such as smelters,
foundries, power stations, incinerators and other combustion sources emit copper
into the atmosphere, where it can return to the earth in precipitation.
Aluminium is the most abundant metal in the earth's crust, making up

approximately 7 percent of the mass of the earth crust. Aluminium is not an
essential element for either plants or animals and excess soluble or available
aluminium (Al3+) is toxic to plants. Average Aluminium concentration in the
soils in the vicinity of the project site was found to be 42.20 mg/kg and ranging
between 33.99 and 33.80 mg/kg.
Cadmium in soils is derived from natural and anthropogenic sources. Cadmium

is much less mobile in soils than in air and water. The major factors governing

4-20
cadmium speciation, adsorption and distribution in soils are pH, soluble organic
matter content, hydrous metal oxide content, clay content and type, presence of
organic and inorganic ligands ( ion or molecule able to bond to a central metal
atom), and competition from other metal ions. Cadmium occurs in the earth’s
crust at an abundance of 0.1–0.5 ppm and exposure is known to potentially cause
the following health effects in humans: nausea, vomiting, diarrhoea, muscle
cramps, salivation, sensory disturbances, liver injury, convulsions, shock and
renal failure and can cause kidney, liver, bone and blood damage during long
time exposure. The average cadmium levels identified in the Project area were
found to be 27.49 µg/kg (ie ranging from 15.51-49.97µg/kg). this is less than the
limit suggested by the EPA/ROC (1989) of 10 mg/kg of dry soil.
Lead is a naturally occurring element and exposure to lead may cause a range of
health effects from behavioural problems and learning disabilities to seizures and
death. Natural levels of lead in soil range between 50 parts per million (ppm)
and 400 ppm. Mining, smelting, and refining activities have resulted in
substantial increases in lead levels in the environment, and lead concentration in
soils is an important indicator of local industrial contamination. Average
concentration of lead in the samples was found to be 21.53µg/l with a minimum
and maximum value of 3.95 and 76.40 µg/l respectively. This is below the
permitted level as suggested by EPA/ROC (1989) of 120 mg/kg and therefore
confirms the rural nature of the Project site..
Chromium is a naturally occurring element found in rocks, animals, plants, soil,

and in volcanic dust and gases. Chromium enters soil as chromium (III) and
chromium (VI) through natural processes as well as human activities. Chromium
in soils attaches to soil particles and as a result is not particularly soluble in
groundwater. Chromium concentration in the soils samples analysed ranged
from 0.50 to 19.90 mg/kg with an average value of 6.24±5.86 mg/kg. The
suggested critical level of Chromium in dry soil is 16 mg/kg (EPA/ROC 1989)
and most of the samples recorded levels below this limit.
4.4.3 Terrestrial Topography
The coastline where the Project site is located is comprised of regular sandy
beaches with no headlands or rocky outcrops. The hinterland is generally low
lying and relatively flat. These costal low lying areas extend inland after which
the topography of the region becomes hilly.
Beach Profiling
The shores of Ghana have been reported to exhibit variable beach morphology.
Furthermore, coastal erosion, flooding, and shoreline retreat are serious problems

4-21
along the coast (Boateng, 2009). The eastern coast of Ghana and notably low-
lying areas such as the Volta Delta, Ada and Keta lagoon seem to be more
affected than the Western Region.
The topography of a beach determines the effect of wave energy on that beach.
An important feature of beach profiles is their overall gradient, ie the average
slope between seaward and landward limits which can be either steep or shallow
(Pethick, 1984). Textural properties of beach sediments and the size of waves
have been documented to significantly influence beach slope variation (King,
1959).
The study measured the beach profile at six points (Figure 4.13) in the vicinity of
the proposed Project site to provide a baseline of the beach topography. The full
report on the beach profiling study is reported at Annex B6 with a summary of
the major results presented here. Refer to Annex J for a topographical map
illustrating the shoreline topography of the proposed Project site and
surroundings.

4-22
Figure 4.13 Locations of Beach Profile, Intertidal and Fisheries Sampling
Beach profiles for all the six points are provided in Annex B6. Beach gradient
(height: distance) measured for all the sites, revealed that approximately 80
percent of the stations showed relatively high gradients. Generally, the beach
within the Project area exhibited a moderate profile, with intermittent sharp
scarps at certain stations. The mean beach width recorded during the study
was 29.55 m. Stations BP 3 and BP 4 had similar profile and revealed very
gentle slopes. Alternatively, stations BP 1 and BP 2 (both close to Atuabo
Town) showed steep profiles with sharp scarps alluding to the impact of
shore waves causing erosion of the beach material. Although the greater part
of the project area appeared firm in terms of beach stability, erosion along the
beach profile was observed near the water level at stations BP 1 and BP 2.
4.5 HYDROLOGY AND HYDROGEOLOGY
4.5.1 Regional Hydrogeology
Two main hydrogeological provinces are found within Ghana, namely the
Basement Complex (consisting of Precambrian crystalline igneous and
metamorphic rocks) and the Palaeozoic consolidated sedimentary formation
(Voltain formation). The Basement Complex and the Voltaian formation
cover 54 percent and 45 percent of Ghana respectively. The Cenozoic and
Mesozoic sediments form the remaining 1 percent of the rock cover, including
that within the south western regions of Ghana, including the Project site.
The Cenozoic and Mesozoic sediments occur mainly in the extreme south
eastern part of the country (ie the location of the Project site). Three aquifers
occur in this formation:
upper unconfined freshwater aquifer in the sandy layer;

intermediate saltwater aquifer in sandy clays; and
deep freshwater aquifer in limestone.
Diagrammatically the upper two aquifers occur as depicted in Figure 4.14.
The first aquifer is a sandy unconfined aquifer and occurs in the recent sand
close to the coast. It is between 2 m and 4 m deep and contains fresh meteoric
water. The intermediate aquifer is either semi-confined or confined and
occurs mainly in the Red Continental deposits of sandy clay and gravels. The
depth of this aquifer varies from 6 m to 120 m, and it contains mostly saline
water. The third aquifer is a deep limestone aquifer, which varies in depth
between 120 m and 300 m. The groundwater in this aquifer occurs under
artesian condition and is fresh.
Recharge to the freshwater aquifer systems is mainly by direct infiltration of

precipitation through fracture and fault zones along the highland fronts and

4-24
also through the sandy portions of the weathered zone. Some amount of
recharge also occurs through seepage from ephemeral stream channels during
the rainy seasons. The infiltration of saltwater occurs from the sea and there
is an interface of the fresh water and saltwater at some depth, deeper away
from the coast line but still generally shallow across the coastal strip.
Figure 4.14 Diagram Showing the Two Upper Aquifers along the Coast
Source: USGS, 2003
4.5.2 Groundwater Quality
Groundwater sampling was carried out in the dry season by assessing the
characteristics of water samples taken from hand dug community wells in
each of the three communities. The locations of these wells and those of the
surface water sampling locations are presented in (hand dug well sites are
WS 1, WS 4 and WS 6). The water in these wells is considered potable by
local residents. The depth of the water table is high and varies slightly across
the Project site.
The assessment of the groundwater drawdown and groundwater interactions

of the seasonal wetland system has been based on professional opinion and
available secondary baseline data, and dry season primary baseline sampling.
No predictive modelling has been undertaken. Further details on the
groundwater users close to the site and the extent of the inundated areas
during the wet season will be investigated during wet season sampling. The
results of the wet season sampling will be appended to the Final ESIA Report
for submission to EPA..
In terms of the quality of local groundwater, the full report for the water
quality analysis is included in Annex B, while summaries are provided below.
A summary of each sampling location is provided in Table 4.3.

4-25
Table 4.3 Description of Surface and Ground Water Sampling Locations
SID Samplin Co-ordinates Water Description

g Name Syste Community
m
ATU-1(LT) IT 1 N 04° 58′ 43.5″ Sea Low tide seawater at
W 002° 33′ 22.6″ water Atuabo east of the project
area
ATU-2 (LT) IT 2 N 04° 58′ 29.5″ Atuabo Low tide seawater at
W 002° 32′ 10.6″ Atuabo at the mid-way
of the project area
ATU-1 IT 1 N 04° 58′ 43.5″ High tide seawater at
(HT) W 002° 33′ 22.6″ Atuabo east of the project
area
ATU-2 IT 2 N 04° 58′ 29.5″ High tide seawater at
(HT) W 002° 32′ 10.6″ Atuabo at the mid-way
of the project area
ANO-1 IT 3 N 04° 58′ 21.3″ Low tide seawater at
(LT) W 002° 31′ 22.1″ Anokyi Anokyi
ANO- (HT) IT 3 High tide seawater at
Anokyi
ATU-HW WS 4 N 04° 58′ 54.1″ Groun Atuabo Community well at
W 002° 33′ 26.5″ d Atuabo
ASE-HW WS 6 N 04° 59′ 23.6″ water Asemdasuazo Community hand dug
W 002° 32′ 22.8″ well at Asemdasuazo
ANO-HW WS 1 N 04° 58' 25.6 Anokyi Community hand dug
W 002° 31' 19.2 well at Anokyi
EKW-BR WS 9 N 04° 59' 06.9 Surface Eikwe Stream at Eikwe at the
W 002° 26' 26.9 water bridge
ASM-STR WS 7 N 04° 59′ 39.5″ Stream north of
W 002° 32′ 23.5″ Asemdasuazo Asemdasuazo
ASM-PD WS 8 N 04° 58′ 46.1″ Fresh water pond
W 002° 31′ 56.5″ southeast of
Asemdasuazo
Note: There are no established names for the two streams at WS9 and WS7 and are considered
tributaries of the Amansuri system
Temperature and pH
The average temperature of the ground water samples (from hand dug wells)
were found to be 28.25±1.50 ºC, ranging from a minimum value of 26.75 ºC to
a maximum value of 29.74 ºC. There are no WHO standards for the
temperature of drinking water. However, high water temperature in a well
will increase the extent at which elements dissolve in the water hence
affecting its quality.
The pH of the shallow well samples in the each of the three communities were
found to be near neutral with an average pH of 6.97 with a minimum pH of
6.74 to a maximum value of 7.36. pH values fall within the WHO standard of
6.5-8.5.
The community well at Atuabo recorded slightly higher values of temperature

and pH (Figure 4.15.) than at Anokyi and Asemdasuazo.

4-26
Figure 4.15 Distribution of Water Temperature and pH for Groundwater Samples
(community hand dug wells)
Note: the stations presented here correspond to the following on the sampling locations map:
ATU-HW = WS 4, HSE-HW = WS 6 and ANO-HW = WS 1.
Total Dissolved Solids, Conductivity and Resistivity
The total dissolved solids (TDS) concentration measures the amount of

substances dissolved in the water samples while the conductivity measures
the electrical conductance as a result of the presence of dissolved ions. The
United States Pharmacopeia (USP) states that the maximum permissible
conductivity of drinking water at a pH of approximately 7, should be below
5.8 µS/cm (micro siemens per centimetre) (Drinking Water Standards, 2003 ).
High concentrations of TDS may affect taste adversely and deteriorate
plumbing and appliances and there are WHO health-based limited for
drinking water. The WHO has identified that TDS concentrations below 1000
mg/l are normally acceptable to consumers (WHO, 1996).
The average TDS and electrical conductivity values of the groundwater

samples were 0.21±0.06 mg/l and 0.32±0.10 mS/cm respectively, which are
well below the generally accepted TDS limits. The community hand dug well
at Asemdasuazo recorded the highest conductivity and TDS values followed
by the Community hand dug well at Anokyi which was slightly higher than
the Community well at Atuabo (Figure 4.16.)

4-27
Figure 4.16 Conductivity and Dissolved Solids Concentrations of Groundwater Samples
Turbidity and Total Suspended Solids
Turbidity measures the light scattering properties of water samples relative to

a standard (in this case formazine) while total suspended solids (TSS)
measurement determines the amount of matter suspended in the water
samples. Turbidity and TSS both affect the aesthetic qualities of water and
may indicate problems such as silt, chemicals and/or contamination.
Twenty-five percent of the water samples were found to have turbidity values
outside of the WHO guidelines (0-5 NTU).
The average turbidity of the ground water samples was 1.25±0.16 NTU and
ranged from 1.13 to 1.43 NTU. The community hand dug well at Anokyi
recorded the highest turbidity value (1.43 mg/l) while the average TSS value
was 8.0 mg/l with a range of 6.0 and 9.0 mg/l. The samples at Atuabo and
Anokyi recording similar concentrations, which were slightly higher than that
reported in Asemdasuazo (Figure 4.17).

4-28
Figure 4.17 Distribution of Turbidity and Suspended Solids Concentrations across
Groundwater Sample Stations.
Nutrient (nitrates, phosphate and silicate)
Nitrates generally occur in trace quantities in surface water but high levels
may occur in some groundwater sources. Excessive concentrations of nitrates
may contribute to methemoglobinemia in infants, a blood disorder in which
an abnormal amount of methemoglobin (form of haemoglobin is produced).
A limit of 10 mg/litre is usually imposed on drinking water in order to
prevent this disorder. Average nitrate value in the ground water samples was
1.45±1.24 mg/l ranging from 0.24 to 2.71 mg/l. The nitrate values for two of
the three samples were lower than the WHO guideline value of 0.2 mg/l for
short-term although the one value above this level indicates a potential
sensitivity to increased nitrate levels. The community hand dug well at
Asemdasuazo recorded the highest concentration of nitrates, silicate and
orthophosphate followed by Anokyi and Atuabo groundwater samples
(Figure 4.18.).
Orthophosphate levels ranged from 0.1 (Atuabo) to 3.70 mg/l (Asemdasuazo)

with an average value of 2.27±1.91 mg/l. Phosphorus occurs in natural
waters solely as phosphates with a concentration of approximately 0.02 mg/l.
Phosphate sources in water include leaching from agriculture lands where it is
applied as fertilizer, or from domestic waste water. Although the WHO does
not regulate the amount of phosphate permissible in drinking water, they

4-29
recommend a safe level of 5 mg/l and a recommended daily allowance (RDA)
total of 800 mg. The phosphate levels within the study area are therefore
above those considered to be natural, and are indicative of the agricultural
land use and potential use of fertilisers in the area, although do not pose a
health hazard to local communities.
There are low levels of silicates recorded for the three communities, with the
highest concentration of silicate at Asemdasuazo, followed by the Anokyi
(Figure 4.18.). No limits are prescribed for silicate levels.
Figure 4.18 Nutrient Levels across Groundwater Sampling Stations.
Elemental Analysis (Heavy/Trace metals)
The effects of heavy metals in water range from beneficial to dangerously

toxic. Some metals are essential to growth while others may adversely affect
local communities ingesting the through drinking water.
Cadmium and lead

Cadmium occurs in sulphide minerals that also contain zinc, lead or copper.
The solubility of cadmium in water is linked to the hardness of the water (the
lower the hardness, the lower the level of cadmium in the water). Cadmium
is extremely toxic and accumulates in the kidneys and liver, with prolonged
intake at low levels leading to kidney failure.

4-30
The results of the groundwater samples showed some traces of cadmium
(Table 4.5). The levels of cadmium ranged from 0.1037 to 0.2188 µg/l with an
average value of 0.1741±0.06 µg/l, which are all below WHO drinking water
limits (0.003 mg/l equivalent to 3 µg/l).
The average lead concentration in the groundwater was 0.1613 µg/L, also far
lower than the WHO guideline of 10 µg/l.
Iron, Aluminium, Copper and Zinc

Almost all the water samples recorded iron concentration below the US EPA
drinking water standard of 0.3 mg/l. The WHO does not provide a drinking
water limit for iron, but water containing levels above the US EPA
recommended 0.3 mg/l level is known to cause a nuisance in terms of staining
laundry. A similar trend was observed for aluminium in the water samples
(where most samples were below 0.01 mg/l and the US EPA non-enforceable
guideline is 0.05 -0.2 mg/l). As with iron, the WHO does not provide a health
based limit for the amount of aluminium present in drinking water. This is
because high levels of aluminium in drinking water are not known to result in
direct health implications, but may cause cosmetic (such as skin or tooth
discolouration) or aesthetic (such as taste, odour or colour) effects (US EPA,
2012).
Copper concentrations in groundwater are usually less than 0.1 mg/l. Copper
is considered an essential trace element but some compounds may be toxic.
Excessive concentrations of copper in drinking water may lead to liver or
kidney damage. The maximum WHO guideline for copper is 2.0 mg/l. The
results showed copper levels in the various samples to be below the WHO
guideline with average value of 0.13±0.04 mg/l (Table 4.5). The copper
chronic toxic effect level in a marine environment is 3.1 mg/l (NOAA, 2009).
Average zinc concentration of the groundwater samples was 0.01 mg/l and
ranged from 0 to 0.01 mg/l and was below the US EPA drinking water limit of
5 mg/l. The WHO does not have a health based limit on the amount of zinc
in drinking water (WHO, 2012). The solubility of zinc in natural water is
controlled by adsorption to mineral surfaces, carbonate equilibrium and
organic complexes. Zinc is an essential growth element but elevated levels
may prove toxic to some aquatic life.
Nickel , Magnesium and Mercury

Nickel concentration of the groundwater samples (1.40-2.10 mg/l) were all
below laboratory detection limits (<0.001 mg/l).
Average magnesium concentration in the borehole water samples was 12.67

mg/l ranging from 9- 13.0 mg/l.

4-31
Mercury is extremely toxic to human health and accumulates in the kidneys
and liver, with prolonged intake at low levels leading to kidney failure. The
WHO recommended drinking water limit for mercury is 0.002 mg/l. The
results showed mercury levels in the water samples to be below laboratory
detection limits (<100 ppt) (Table 4.5).
Microbial Content
The microbial load of the freshwater water samples analysed (1) (Figure 4.10.)
is presented in the Table 4.4.. The results indicate a widespread load of total
heterotrophic bacteria counts with the community borehole at Atuabo
dominating the total heterotrophic bacteria contamination.
None of the boreholes samples meet the WHO Guideline (for all the microbial
parameters measured) and E. coli levels are within the range (0-1000
cfu/100ml) to be considered as high (WHO, 2006), indicating contamination,
likely from anthropogenic sources such as sewage and organic wastes. The
total heterotrophic bacteria concentrations (ranging between 68 and 1344
cfu/100ml) also exceeded the Ghanaian standard for four of the six samples
(Ghanaian Specifications for Drinking Water, 2009).
Table 4.4 Microbial Concentrations of Groundwater and Surface Water Resources

(Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo)
SID Total Heterotrophic

Total Coliform Faecal Coliform E. Coli Bacteria
(cfu/100ml) (cfu/100ml) (cfu/100ml) (cfu/1ml)
ATU-HW 744 232 136 1536
ASE-HW 264 72 35 1024
ANO-HW 152 96 24 1152
EKW–BH 789 176 49 68
ASM-STR 14 0 0 120
ASM-PD 1395 796 16 1344
WHO Guideline Below detection Below detection Below detection Below detection limits
limits limits limits
Ghanaian 0 0 0 1000
Standard
Note: Water sampling labels correspond to the following locations on the sampling site map:
ATU-HW = WS 4, HSE-HW = WS 6, ANO-HW = WS 1, EKW-BR = WS 9, ASM-STR = WS 7and
ASM-PD = WS 8
(1) Only groundwater and surface water samples were analysed for microbial content. These are considered the primary
receptors in terms of understanding microbial contamination of resources which form habitat for freshwater species and
used by local communities(drinking, domestic uses).

4-32
Table 4.5 Trace/ Heavy Metal Concentrations of Groundwater and Surface Water Resources
SID Hg Cd Pb Cu Cr Al Ni Zn V Mg Fe Sn
Ppm Ppb ppb ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm
Ground Water
ATU-HW <0.001 0.2188 0.135 0.00 0.03 <0.01 0.00 0.01 0.03 16 <0.01 <0.01
ASE-HW <0.001 0.1037 0.2232 0.00 0.06 <0.01 0.00 0.00 <0.01 9 <0.01 <0.01
ANO-HW <0.001 0.1999 0.1258 0.04 0.02 <0.01 0.00 BDL <0.01 13 <0.01 <0.01
Surface Water
EKW -BR <0.001 3.486 2.808 0.16 0.11 <0.01 0.10 0.03 0.02 55 <0.01 <0.01
ASM-STR <0.001 4.016 3.152 0.30 0.21 0.05 0.30 0.02 <0.01 5 0.5 <0.01
ASM-PD <0.001 5.153 3.179 0.14 0.10 <0.01 0.00 0.00 0.03 12 <0.01 <0.01
Figure 4.19 Microbial Load in Groundwater, Surface Water Resources and Sea Water
(Atuabo)
4.5.3 Surface Water
Ghana’s western region experiences the country’s highest rainfall and as a result
many brackish and freshwater lagoons and wetlands occur in the low lying
coastal region of this province (Aggrey-Fynn et al, 2011 and Yankson 1999). An
increasing number of these lagoon and wetland systems are becoming degraded
due to the influence of anthropogenic activities (Aggrey-Fynn et al, 2011, Karikari
et al 2006). These regions are particularly important as they serve as ecotones
between freshwater, marine and terrestrial environments, and as a result exhibit
high species diversity and heterogeneous habitat types (Aggrey-Fynn et al, 2011
and Basset et al, 2006). These areas are typically surrounded by mangrove
forests.
The largest rivers in the west of the country are the Ankobra, Bia and Pra rivers,
with the Tano River forming part of the Ghana’s western border. The Amansuri
River is located to the north of the Project site and flows eastwards. The
Amansuri wetland system and seasonally inundated areas are situated from
approximately <1 km north and to the north west of the Project site (Figure 4.20).

4-34
Figure 4.20 Estimated Amansuri wetland areas and Amansuri Lake as well as the assumed drainage basin of the Amansuri Wetland area
Lagoons and Wetlands
The largest lagoons in the region are the Domunli Lagoon near Half Assini
and the Amansuri Lagoon near Esiama. The Amansuri wetland is located to
the north and northwest of the Project site. These areas are seasonally flooded
up to a depth of approximately 1 m in some areas (Ramsar, 2012) and have
been proposed (but not designated) as a Ramsar wetland site (1) . This is the
largest freshwater marsh in the western region (approximately 8 000 ha), with
a catchment of approximately 1010 km3 (Ramsar, 2012). The wetland area
feeds into the Amansuri Lake (approximately 2.5 x 1 km in size) and finally
(via the Amansuri River) into the Amansuri coastal lagoon (further to the east,
at approximately 2°23’ W) - (FAO, 2012) (Figure 4.20.). The Amansuri system
which receives water from several streams including the Adenimumio, Evini,
Bosoke, Eivla and Myejini, drains to the east behind an elevated coastal area
(including the Project site), which obstructs drainage seawards (Ramsar,
2012). A second important wetland is the system of Tano, Aby and Ehy
lagoons on the south-western border with Ivory Coast. Six Ramsar wetlands
exist in the country (World Bank, 2006) but are located in the Volta and
Central Regions, ie are not located close to the Project site.
Table 4.6 Details of lagoons found within the projects area of influence
Name Latitude Longitude

Domunli Lagoon N 05°01.198' W 002°44.882'
Allenzule lagoon N 05°00.554' W002°41.635'
Twenen Lagoon N 05°00.345' W 002°40.684'
Elloenyi N 04°59.716 W 002°37.727'
Bakanta N 04°57.210'' W 002°25.601'
The low lying grasslands to the north of the community of Atuabo are
reportedly (by local community members) seasonally flooded during the wet
season and are considered to be a seasonal wetland area. There is evidence of
both ephemeral and permanent ponds located within this wetland area
(Figure 4.21). At the time of the field visit (dry season) only isolated
permanent ponds were present on the Project site close (southeast) to
Asemdasuazo. The permanent ponds identified in the vicinity of the Project
site at WS 8 (fresh water ponds at Asemdasuazo) (Table 4.3, Table 4.6) host
numerous fish species and play an important role in the livelihoods of the
local people, particularly from Asemdasuazo and Atuabo. In the dry season a
hand held grab net is used, whereas in the rainy season a trap/cylindrical
basket type system is used to catch species such as tilapia (see Chapter 5).
(1) Named after the Ramsar Convention on Wetlands held in Ramsar, India in 1971

4-36
Local communities reported these permanent ponds to be approximately 2 ha
in dimension, but the local communities reported that they could grow as
much as ten times this size in the main rainy season, when they were flooded.
One of the ponds, sampled in this study is located within the Project site (WS
8, Figure 4.22). The pond was observed to contain a number of aquatic plant
species, which may serve as refugia for other aquatic fauna. Observations
also indicate that though the pond may contain appreciable tilapia species,
which are fished by local communities (the level of fishing is unknown).
It is possible that these water bodies are linked through upper aquifer
groundwater flow to the Amansuri system to the north and northwest but it is
not expected that these seasonal areas of inundation on the Project site are
connected to this system via surface water flows. The extent of the areas of
inundation across the Project site will be further investigated during the wet
season sampling, and results will be appended to the Final ESIA Report.
Figure 4.21 Fresh water Stream/ pond close (south east) to Asemdasuazo
Figure 4.22 Freshwater Ponds within the Project Site south east of Asemdasuazo

4-37
Temperature and pH
The stream at Eikwe (further downstream of the sampling location at the

stream north of Asemdasuazo) and that north of Asemdasuazo recorded
temperatures of 28.03 °C and 25.83 °C respectively (Figure 4.23).
The pH of the stream at Asemdasuazo was mildly acidic (5.11) while that of
Eikwe (further along the Amansuri system) was moderately acidic (6.22).
These levels were outside of the WHO permissible range of 6.5-8.5. Pollution
can change water’s pH, which in turn can harm animals and plants living in
the water. The acidic nature of the surface water could be attributed to run-
offs high levels of exchangeable aluminium ions as a result of rock type and
human activities.
Figure 4.23 Water Temperature and pH Distribution of Surface Streams of Atuabo Area
EKW-BR = WS 9, ASM-STR = WS 7and ASM-PD = WS 8
Total Dissolved Solids, Conductivity and Resistivity of surface streams
The stream at Eikwe at the bridge recorded the highest conductivity and TDS
values among the surface water bodies as shown in Figure 4.24. The averaged
conductivity and TDS value of the surface water were 1.30±2.09 mS/cm and
0.85±1.36 mg/l respectively. There were high variability in both conductivity
and dissolved solids concentration between the sampled locations.

4-38
Turbidity and Total Suspended Solids of surface streams
Elevated turbidity and TSS values were recorded at stream west of

Asemdasuazo, fresh water pond at Asemdasuazo and the stream at Eikwe
(Figure 4.25).
Figure 4.24 Conductivity and Dissolved Solids Concentrations in Surface Streams

4-39
Figure 4.25 Distribution of Turbidity and Suspended Solids in Surface Streams at Atuabo
Area
Nutrient (nitrates, phosphate and silicate)
The highest value for orthophosphate was recorded for the stream west of
Asemdasuazo with a value of 28.80 mg/l followed by the stream at Eikwe
(close to the bridge), which was slightly higher than the fresh water pond at
Asemdasuazo (Figure 4.26.). The elevated concentration of orthophosphate in
the stream of west Asemdasuazo could be ascribed possibly to poor sanitary
conditions.

4-40
Figure 4.26 Nutrient Levels across Surface Water Sampling Stations
4.5.4 Trace/ Heavy Metal Analysis
Cadmium and Lead

The concentration of cadmium in surface water ranges between 3.486 – 5.153
µg/100ml, which is below the recommended drinking water standard for
cadmium is 10 µg/100ml.
The average lead concentration in surface water resources are higher than
groundwater levels and are recorded as 2.808, 3.152 and 3.179 µg/100ml, also
far lower than the WHO guideline of 10 µg/l.
Iron, Copper and Zinc

Two of the three surface water samples recorded iron concentration below
detection limits. The stream west of Asemdasuazo recorded a value of 0.5
mg/l, which is slightly higher than the US EPA drinking water standard of 0.3
mg/l. A similar trend was observed for aluminium in the water samples.
Copper concentrations in the surface water resources were all below the WHO
guideline for copper of 2.0 mg/l. The copper chronic toxic effect level in
marine environment is 3.1 mg/l (NOAA, 2009). The surface streams recorded
moderately higher copper with an average of 0.20±0.09 mg/l but this value is

4-41
lower than the 9.0 mg/l of exposure concentration for chronic toxic effect in
surface water?(NOAA, 2009).
The zinc levels were recorded as 0.02 and 0.03 mg/ l and therefore below
detection limits and below the US EPA drinking water standard of 5 mg/ l.
The solubility of zinc in natural water is controlled by adsorption to mineral
surfaces, carbonate equilibrium and organic complexes and elevated levels
may be toxic to some aquatic life.
Microbial Content
The stream west of Asemdasuazo reported a faecal coliform and E. coli
concentrations of zero whiles the stream at Eikwe reported concentrations of
176 and 49 (cfu/100 ml) respectively for faecal coliform and E. coli (Table 4.5.
These are below the WHO Guideline (1000 cfu/ 100ml), indicating relatively
uncontaminated surface water resources. The elevated levels of faecal
coliform and E. coli at the Eikwe stream sampling location could be a result of
this site being downstream of a number of settlements being located between
the two sampling sites.
4.6 MARINE WATER QUALITY
4.6.1 Water Temperature and pH
The average temperature of low tide sea water samples was 26.86±1.220C with
a range between 25.870C and 29.190C. Average temperatures of the low tide
samples (27.0 °C) were moderately higher than that of the high tide samples
(26.71oC) as depicted in Figure 4.27.
The pH of both the low and high tide sea water samples were found to be
moderately alkaline with a minimum value of 8.17 and a maximum of 8.34.
However, the average pH of the high tide sea water samples (8.27) was
slightly higher than that of the low tide samples (8.24).

4-42
Figure 4.27 Water Temperature and pH Distribution of Seawater Samples at Low and
High Tides
Note: The sampling sites referred to here, correspond to the following sites on the sampling
location map: ATU-1(LT)/ (HT) = IT 1, ATU-2(LT)/ (HT) = IT 2, ANO-1(LT)/ (HT) = IT 3;
ATU-HW = WS 4, HSE-HW = WS 6
4.6.2 Total Dissolved Solids, Conductivity and Resistivity
Average conductivity and dissolved solids of the sea water samples was
49.46±0.23 mS/cm and 32.13 ±0.17 mg/l respectively. The dissolved solids
concentrations ranged between 39.90 mg/l and 32.95 mg/l. However,
average conductivity and TDS values of the high tide samples were slightly
higher than the low tide samples (Figure 4.28.). This could be attributed to
dilution of the seawater from land drainages during the low tide periods.

4-43
Figure 4.28 Conductivity and Dissolved Solids Concentrations in Seawater Samples
during Low and High Tides
4.6.3 Turbidity and Total Suspended Solids
Average turbidity and TSS values of the sea water samples were 1.96±0.45
NTU and 10.67±1.37 mg/l respectively. However, average turbidity and TSS
values were highest in the low tide periods as compared to the high tide
periods Figure 4.29. with samples from Anokyi recording the highest
concentrations.
4.6.4 Nutrient (nitrates, phosphate and silicate)
The average value of phosphate for the sea water samples was 3.35±1.57 mg/l
with a minimum value of 1.60 mg/l and a maximum value of 5.80 mg/l
(Figure 4.29.). Nitrate in the sea water samples on the other hand recorded an
average value of 0.70±0.08 with a range of 0.62 to 0.84 mg/l. The highest
concentrations were recorded at high tide period.

4-44
Figure 4.29 Distribution of Turbidity and Suspended Solids Concentrations in Seawater
Samples
Figure 4.30 Nutrient Levels of Seawater Samples

4-45
4.6.5 Elemental Analysis (Heavy/Trace metals)
Cadmium and Lead

Cadmium in the sea water samples ranged from 3.614 to 4.431 µg/L with an
average value of 4.021±0.33 µg/l. The average lead concentration in the sea
water samples was 3.73µg/L. The WHO limit for Cadium in seawater is 0.003
mg/l (Table 4.7).
Iron, Copper and Zinc

All the water samples recorded iron and aluminium concentration below
detection limits. Copper concentration in sea water is approximately 10 mg/l.
The results showed copper levels in the various sea water samples to be below
the US EPA action level of 1.3 mg/l with average value of 0.13±0.04 mg/l
ranging from a minimum value of 0.1 to 0.2 mg/l in the seawater samples.
Average zinc concentration of the sea water samples was 0.18±0.02 mg/l.
Nickel and Magnesium

The average nickel concentrations of the sea water samples were 1.75±0.26
mg/l. Magnesium is present in sea water in amounts of about 1300 ppm.
Average magnesium concentration in the seawater samples was
1633.33±121.11 mg/l ranging from 1500 to 1800 mg/l. The results showed
mercury levels in the water samples to be below laboratory detection limits.
Table 4.7 Trace/Heavy Metal Concentrations of Seawater of Atuabo Area
SID Hg Cd Pb Cu Cr Al Ni Zn V Mg Fe Sn
Ppm ppb ppb ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm ppm
Salt Water
ATU- <0.00 4.431 4.673 0.10 0.04 <0.01 2.10 0.16 <0.01 1500 <0.01 <0.01
1(LT) 1
ATU- <0.00 4.105 4.584 0.10 0.01 <0.01 1.95 0.17 <0.01 1500 <0.01 <0.01
1 1
(HT)
ATU- <0.00 3.614 5.372 0.12 0.04 <0.01 1.65 0.21 0.02 1800 <0.01 <0.01
2 1
(LT)
ATU- <0.00 3.666 1.382 0.20 0.02 <0.01 1.40 0.16 <0.01 1700 <0.01 <0.01
2 1
(HT)
ANO <0.00 4.311 4.743 0.12 0.00 <0.01 1.55 0.18 <0.01 1700 <0.01 <0.01
-1 1
(LT)
ANO <0.00 3.998 1.642 0.14 0.04 <0.01 1.85 0.20 <0.01 1600 <0.01 <0.01
(HT) 1

4-46
4.6.6 Bacteriology
Levels of heterotrophic bacteria in the sea water samples fell below the Ghana
Standard of 1000. The values are presented in the table below Table 4.8.
Table 4.8 Microbial Concentrations of Seawater at Atuabo and Anokyi
SID Total Heterotrophic

Total Coliform Faecal Coliform E. Coli Bacteria
(cfu/100ml) (cfu/100ml) (cfu/100ml) (cfu/1ml)
ATU-1(LT) 172 68 18 384
ATU-2(LT) 136 28 3 8
ANO-1 (LT) 104 8 2 14
ATU-1 (HT) 92 16 3 92
ATU-2(HT) 35 0 0 34
ANO (HT) 164 17 5 208
WHO 0 0 0 0
GUIDELINE
GHANA 0 0 0 1000
STANDARD
Note: The sampling sites referred to here, correspond to the following: ATU-1(LT)/ (HT) = IT 1,
ATU-2(LT)/ (HT) = IT 2, ANO-1(LT)/ (HT) = IT 3; ATU-HW = WS 4, HSE-HW = WS 6
4.6.7 Productivity (Chlorophyll concentration)
Average concentration of chlorophyll in the water sample was 33.16 µg/l

ranging from 27.39 to 36.81µg/l. The results of chlorophyll analysis in the
water samples are presented in Figure 4.31. below.

4-47
Figure 4.31 Chlorophyll Concentration in Seawater Samples at Atuabo
4.7 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
There are no major industrial activities present in the region and most
emissions arise from the smoke of cooking fires, generators used for power
supply and bush clearing for clearing of lands for farming.
The baseline data for the project area was collected during the dry season over
a period of three consecutive days (one day at each Town) at the locations
presented in Figure 4.10. The air quality parameters measured in all the three
sampling locations in Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo were Local
Meteorological Conditions (including Air Temperature, Relative Humidity,
Rainfall, Wind speed and Wind direction); Dust and Particulate Matter
(including TSP, PM1, PM2.5 and PM10); Toxic gas pollutants (including Oxides
of Nitrogen (NOx), oxides of sulphur (SOx), Carbon monoxide (CO), hydrogen
sulphide (H2S), volatile organic compounds (VOC); and Noise were measured
using AQM60 air monitor.
The complete air quality technical report can be found in Annex B4.
4.7.1 Dust and Particulate Matter (TSP, PM1, PM2.5, PM10)
The concentrations of TSP, PM2.5, PM1, and PM10 in Atuabo, Anokyi and
Asemdasuazo were analysed using the particle profiler of the AEROQUAL
AQM 60 Air Quality Station.

4-48
Particulate matter may be generated by natural processes (eg pollen, bacteria,
viruses, fungi, mould, yeast, salt spray, soil from erosion) or through human
activities, including vehicles, power plants, wood stoves, firewood burning,
refuse burning and industrial processes. The particulate matter
concentrations found in a particular location is dependent on the source, on
the wind or other influencing factors at that particular time such as rain,
temperature and humidity. Particulates can cause a health risk if they occur
in high concentrations. This is because when inhaled by humans they can
result in respiratory problems. The size of dust and particulates determines
the possible impacts on human health as most particles above 10 micrometres
(PM10) are filtered out (by hairs etc) before inhalation into the lungs (Ecotech,
2012); therefore the harmful particulates are those smaller than 10
micrometres. These include PM1, PM2.5 and PM10, where the number refers
to the size, in micrometres, of the relevant particulates. Together the dust and
particulates make up the total suspended particulates (TSP), which is a further
measure of the amount of particulate matter (PM) in the air. The pollutant is
PM, while the measurements of TSP, PM1, PM2.5, and PM10 are different
indicators of the amount of PM polluting the air in a given area (Buser et al.
2001)
Total Suspended Particles (TSP)
The hourly averages of TSP (1) recorded for Atuabo during the study ranged
from 7.20 µg/m³ to 13.20 µg/m³ with a mean concentration of 9.70 µg/m³.
The concentration of TSP was high at about 6 am, stabilising and then peaking
again at 2-4 pm. This time corresponded with a high period of activity of local
communities and relative strong wind movement within the community. The
TSP concentrations recorded in Anokyi during the study were higher than
that recorded at Atuabo.
The mean of the hourly concentrations of TSP was calculated to be 12.32

µg/m³ which was higher than the 9.70 µg/m³ calculated for Atuabo. The TSP
concentration recorded for Asemdasuazo during the study was lower than
that recorded at Atuabo. The mean of the hourly concentrations of TSP was
calculated to be 5.56 µg/m³ which is lower than the 9.70 µg/m³ calculated for
Atuabo. The concentration deceased from 5.94 µg/m³ at 6am to 3.08 µg/m³ at
about 7am (Figure 4.32.) peaking at 6.97 µg/m³ and stabilising at about 5.4
µg/m³ for the most part of the rest of the day.
(1) The size usually differentiates the various categories of particulates. Tiny airborne particles or aerosols that are less
than 100 micrometres (mm) are collectively referred to as total suspended particulate matter (TSP). PM10 are particles
with aerodynamic diameter smaller than 10 mm. Ten microns is approximately one seventh the diameter of a human hair.
PM2.5 are also particles with aerodynamic diameter smaller than 2.5 mm while PM1 has an aerodynamic diameter of less
than 1 mm

4-49
PM1
PM1 concentration recorded in Atuabo followed a similar trend as the TSP.

however the highest recorded reading for the day was at 4 pm having been
stable through the morning to early afternoon. The PM1 concentration
recorded in Anokyi on the sampling day followed a similar trend as the
concentration recorded for TSP but with a slight fluctuations in the morning.
The mean hourly concentration of PM1 of 3.28 µg/m³, Asemdasuazo was
generally low and did not fluctuate much during the day.
PM2.5
The PM2.5 concentration recorded in Atuabo during the day followed similar
trends as TSP and PM1 concentration. However, the PM2.5 concentration
peaked at 3 pm and 4 pm recording concentrations of 10.40 µg/m³ and
10.51µg/m³ respectively and then dropping sharply to 6.53 µg/m³ at 5pm. In
Anokyi, the concentration was stable for the most part of the day. The hourly
average concentrations of PM2.5 recorded during the day followed similar
trends as TSP and PM1 concentration with a mean concentration of 9.20
µg/m³. PM2.5 concentrations recorded in Asemdasuazo followed a similar
trend as PM1 concentrations. The lowest concentration of 2.33 µg/m³ was
recorded at about 7 am while the highest concentration was 3.69 µg/m³
recorded at about mid-day, see Figure 4.33. The day’s average concentration
of PM 2.5 was calculated to be 3.25 µg/m³. The PM2.5 concentrations recorded
in the three communities were below WHO permissible limit of 25µg/m3.
PM10
PM10 which consist of particulate matter with equivalent aerodynamic

diameters 10µm or less (PM 10) was stable for the most part of the day in
Atuabo. It however, peaked at 3pm recording a concentration of 12.83 µg/m³
and dropped at 4 pm and then sharply to 8.17 µg/m³ at 5 pm. The mean
hourly concentration of PM10 recorded for Anokyi (Figure 4.33.) was 12.11
µg/m³ which is well below the WHO permissible limit of 70 µg/m³ for the
annual mean. PM10 recorded in Asemdasuazo showed a similar trend as TSP
with the lowest concentration of 2.91 µg/m³ recorded at 7 am. The highest
concentration of 6.27 µg/m³ was recorded at midday after which the
concentrations were relatively stable for the rest of the day. The day’s average
concentration was calculated to be 5.19 µg/m³ which is also below WHO’s
permissible limit of 70 µg/m³

4-50
Figure 4.32 Time Series of Particulate Matter Concentration at Atuabo (error bars
indicating standard deviation)
Figure 4.33 Time Series of Particulate Matter Concentration at Anokyi (error bars

4-51
Figure 4.34 Time Series of Particulate Matter Concentration at Asemdasuazo (error bars
The particulate matter concentrations recorded at Asemdasuazo were low

when compared to the concentrations recorded from Atuabo and Anokyi.
The low concentrations of particulate matter recorded at Asemdasuazo may
be due to the low wind speed in the community and the fact the community is
located about 4 km away from the coastal road (major source of dust).
Vehicles plying the dusty untarred road generate dust which is the main
source of particulate matter in the three communities. The activities
witnessed in Asemdasuazo were also low, as there were virtually no cars
seen moving in the community and no burning of refuse or firewood was
observed on the day of sampling. The particulate matter concentration (PM10)
was very much below the Ghana EPA permissible limit of 70 µg/m³ for
annual mean.
4.7.2 Toxic Gas Pollutant (NOx, SO2, CO, H2S, VOC,)
The toxic gas pollutants monitored during the study period were oxides of
Nitrogen, (NOx), Sulphur dioxide (SO2), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Hydrogen
Sulphide (H2S) and Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) which was recorded
as Photoionization Detector (PID) by the AEROQUAL AQM 60 Air Station.
The ambient concentrations of the toxic gas pollutants were recorded for
every minute between the hours of 6 am to 6pm, from which the hourly
concentrations were calculated and daily mean concentration determined.
The results of the air quality study are summarised in Figure 4.35 below.

4-52
Figure 4.35 Mean Concentrations of Air Pollutants in the Three Communities
In general, the mean concentrations of toxic gas pollutants were within the
three communities, which is consistent with the rural environment.
The levels of each were higher in Atuabo with the exception of NOx which
seem to be relative constant in all three communities. CO concentrations in
the three communities were higher than all the other gas pollutants, possibly
from vehicle emissions associated with local traffic, see Figure 4.35.
In Atuabo, the mean concentration of CO (0.823ppm) recorded during the

sampling period was lower than the WHO permissible limit of 10 ppm for 8 h.
The mean concentration of NOx recorded was 0.0118ppm which was lower
than WHO permissible limit of 0.096ppm (200µg/m3) for 1 hour and Ghana
EPA annual permissible limit of 0.154ppm (320µg/m3). The hourly
concentrations of PID were relative stable throughout the study period with
mean concentrations of 0.104 ppm. The mean concentration of SO2 recorded
during the sampling period was 0.065 ppm and above the WHO permissible
limit of 0.04 ppm (125µg/m3) for 24 hours but was below the Ghana EPA
permissible limit of 0.070 ppm (200 µg/m3) for 24 hours. The mean
concentration of H2S recorded was 0.181 ppm and above the WHO
permissible limit of 0.1005 ppm (150g/m3) for 24 hour period.
For Anokyi, the mean hourly concentration of CO measured during the study
period representing the day’s mean concentration was 0.639 ppm which is
lower than the WHO permissible limit of 10 ppm for 8hours. The mean
concentration of NOx for the sampling period was 0.0106 ppm, also lower
than WHO permissible limit of 0.096 ppm (200 µg/m3) for 1 hour and Ghana
EPA annual permissible limit of 0.154 ppm (320µg/m3). The hourly
concentrations of PID were relative stable throughout the study period with
mean concentrations of 0.122ppm. The mean concentration of SO2 recorded

4-53
during the sampling period was 0.072 ppm and above the WHO permissible
limit of 0.04ppm (125 µg/m3 (possibly as a result of vehicle emissions) for 24
hours but was below the Ghana EPA permissible limit of 0.070 ppm (200
µg/m3) for 24 hours. The mean concentration of H2S recorded was 0.185 ppm
and above the WHO permissible limit of 0.1005 ppm (150 g/m3) for 24 hour
period.
In Asemdasuazo, the mean hourly concentration of CO measured during the

study period representing the day’s mean concentration was 0.167 ppm,
which was lower than the WHO permissible limit of 10 ppm for 8hours. The
mean concentration of NOx recorded was 0.010 ppm which was lower than
WHO permissible limit of 0.096 ppm (200 µg/m3) for 1 hour and Ghana EPA
annual permissible limit of 0.154 ppm (320 µg/m3). The hourly concentrations
of SO2, H2S and PID were also relatively low with mean concentrations of
0.068 ppm, 0.078 ppm and 0.042 ppm (Annex B4) but the mean concentration
of SO2 recorded for Asemdasuazo was above the WHO permissible limit of
0.04 ppm (125µg/m3) for 24 h. This was however below the Ghana EPA
permissible limit of 0.07 ppm (200 µg/m3) for 24 hrs. . The mean
concentration of H2S recorded was below the WHO permissible limit of 0.1005
ppm (150 g/m3) for 24 hour period.
The air quality results indicate and confirm the rural nature and lack of
industrial development close to the Project area. Key exceptions are the SO2
and which exceed the WHO limits at each of the communities and H2S which
exceeded WHO limits at Atuabo and Anorkyi (over the sampling period).
4.8 NOISE AND VIBRATION
The noise levels were monitored in the three communities between 6 am and
6 pm at the locations indicated in. Noise levels were measured in the three
communities during the dry season using the AEROQUAL AQM 60 air
quality station mounted on a platform at selected sites in each of the three
communities. The machine was calibrated daily.
The results of the monitoring at Atuabo showed that the noise levels fell
gradually from a value of 58 dBA recorded at 6 am to the lowest of 54 dBA at
1 pm and then increased gradually from then to the highest of 59 dBA
recorded at 5pm (Figure 4.36.).

4-54
Figure 4.36 Time Series of Noise Levels in Atuabo (error bars indicate standard
deviation)
The average noise level recorded in Anokyi for the sampling day was 58.39
dBA. The daily trend observed was that the noise levels fell gradually from a
value of 58.86 dBA recorded at 6 am to the lowest of 54.51 dBA at about 10 am
and then increased gradually to the highest of 62.04 dBA recorded at 6pm as
seen in Figure 4.37.
Figure 4.37 Time Series of Noise Levels in Anokyi (error bars indicate standard deviation)

4-55
Figure 4.38 Time Series of Noise Levels in Asemdasuazo (error bars indicate standard
deviation)
At Asemdasuazo, the noise levels were approximately 55 dBA throughout the

day while the highest levels (58.47 dBA) were recorded towards the evening
when there was a lot of activity in the community see Figure 4.38.
Across the three communities, the main sources of noise in the community
was noise generated are likely related to vehicular movements, children
playing, adults chatting, people listening to music/radio and sea waves
breaking at the beach.
The noise levels in Asemdasuazo were recorded as lower than in Atuabo and
Anokyi corresponding with observations of less activity within this
community. Asemdasuazo is also located about 3km from the main road thus
the contribution to the noise level from vehicles is relatively minimal.
4.9 ROAD TRAFFIC
The national roads of the region are generally wide, tarred and in good
condition but many of the secondary roads in the region are narrow with
narrow intersections, which do not allow heavy vehicles to pass safely
through them. These roads, (such as the route from Bokazo to Esiama) pass
directly through villages and are used by people and livestock. Routes such
as these are frequented by light vehicles such as passenger vehicles, minibuses
and taxis.
The Tarkwa-Esiama road, which may be used to transport rock to the Project
site, is currently used by light and heavy vehicles including trucks carrying
mined rock from the Awaso area (approximately 150 km north of Tarkwa).
The Tarkwa to Axim route (another alternative), has traffic volumes of 120 -
435 vehicles per hour (Ghana Highway Authority, 2012). Various types of

4-56
vehicles use this section of road, ranging from light passenger vehicles to
medium and heavy duty trucks. Most bridges along the route proposed for
construction transportation appear to be in reasonable condition, except for
one crossing the Amansuri River, which is not suitable for use by heavy
vehicles.
The roads surrounding, and within the Project site are gravel and contain
relatively low volumes of traffic.
4.10 TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGY
4.10.1 Flora
Ghana is part of the Upper Guinea forest ecosystem, a region once

characterised by dense forests. Human influence and the growth of cities in
the region have resulted in the shrinking of these natural forests (CRC-URI,
2010, World Bank 2006). Deforestation is therefore a national problem and is
estimated to occur at a rate of approximately 65,000 ha per annum, at a cost of
3.5 percent of Ghana’s GDP as well as habitat and species losses (World Bank
2006). The natural vegetation in Western Region is primary rain forest but as
a result of anthropogenic disturbance to this habitat, secondary forest
comprising pioneer species and their successors, now dominates over the
naturally forested areas. As a result of continued collection of wood for
fuel/cooking and poor agricultural practices, disturbed areas are prone to
increasing rates of desertification (Allotey, 2007).
The coastal region is dominated by vegetation comprising of palm trees and

thorny shrubs (HPI, 2009). Previously forested land is now used for
plantations (coconuts, palm oil, rubber), forestry activities and farming.
The physical environment of the area has been affected by human activities
and no fully natural habitats were observed, although natural areas are
reported to occur to the north of Asemdasuazo (north of the Project site). No
rivers or other surface water features were observed on the site between
Atuabo and Anokyi, although it is understood that the grassland area is
flooded during the wet season and that there are small waterways and
streams, as well as the Amansuri River and wetland system to the north and
northwest of the community of Asemdasuazo.
The project area lies in the Wet Evergreen forest type of Ghana. This type is
floristically very rich and has more characteristic species than any forest type
in Ghana (Hall and Swaine, 1981). The typical undisturbed Wet Evergreen
forest type has trees occurring in three layers with the upper most or the
emergent layer hardly exceeding 40 m in height. Some of the characteristic
species are Soyauxiagrandifolia, Trichomanesguineense, Agelaeatrifolia, Cola

4-57
umbratilis, Scaphopetalumamoenum, Coulaedulis, Placodiscusoblongifolia,
HeritierautilisPentadesmabutyracea and Cola chlamydantha. Permanently flooded
areas are occupied by well-developed freshwater swamp forest dominated by
the palm Raphia hookeri (rhaphia palm) and the aroid Cyrtospermasenegalense
(swamp arum). Local communities report (and mapping indicates) that areas
behind the coast are subjected to seasonal freshwater flooding. These areas
are expected to have heavily leached podzolic soils which support only short
grassland with many herbaceous species.
Terrestrial flora sampling was carried out at the sites identified in Figure 4.39,
a summary of the results of the study (Annex B1) is provided below.

4-58
Figure 4.39 Location of terrestrial flora sampling sites in the vicinity of the Project area
Three main vegetation types were identified in the project area ie, Coastal
Strand, Grassland and thicket and Freshwater Swamp forest.
Coastal Strand and Coconut Plantation (Atuabo to Anokyi along the

beach – Harbour): The coastal stretch from Atuabo to Anokyi has poorly
developed strand vegetation confined to the foreshore, above high-water
mark. The vegetation is typified by Cyperus maritimus (sedge family),
Ipomoea pes-caprae (beach morning-glory), Canavalia rosea (bay bean),
Sesuvium portulacastrum (sea purslane) and Paspalum vaginatum (seashore
paspalum). On top of the dune the vegetation is composed of species such
as Calophyllum inophyllum (alexandrian laurel), Grewia mollis (grewia
mollis) and Triumfetta rhomboidea (burr bush) as well as the tree Baphia
nitida (barwood). Coconut plantations occur along the entire stretch of the
dune (Figure 4.40.). Coconut plantations occupy most of the well-drained
soils beyond the white sand grasslands. Where the canopy of the coconut
plantation is open, food crops such as cassava are cultivated.
Figure 4.40 Coconut Plantations on sand dunes, in the vicinity of the Project site.
The Grassland and Thicket Vegetation (Atuabo to Asemdasuazo –

Airport and other facilities): The site proposed for the construction of the
airport and other facilities is seasonally flooded grassland and thicket
vegetation. The grassland occurs on white sands which are shallow and
subject to seasonal flooding which does not support forest vegetation. The
grasses found here include Anadelphia afzeliana, Rhytachne rottboellioides,
Panicum congoense, Setaria anceps, Hyparrhenia mutica and Axonopus
flexuosus. The thicket clumps are composed of species such as Elaeis
guineensis, Syzygium sp., Grewia carpinifolia, Baphia nitida, B. pubescens and
Alchornea cordifolia. Borassus aethiopum is scattered widely on the site
(Figure 4.41.).

4-60
Figure 4.41 Grassland vegetation interspersed with thicket clumps
Freshwater Swamp Forest (Asemdasuazo): Isolated patches of freshwater

swamp forest (less than 1 percent of the Project site) are found to the west
of Asemdasuazo, and further west, on the northern section of the airstrip
portion of the site (Figure 4.42.). These are seasonally inundated wetland
areas with emergent tall trees and include areas of cultivation. These
swamp forest patches are not directly connected with the larger wetland
system to the north and northwest and species diversity is very low
compared with conventional dryland or lowland tropical forests.
Permanent freshwater swamp forest is located outside of the Project site to
the north which is connected to the greater Amansuri wetlands and
provides freshwater fishing grounds. Raphia hookeri and Cyrtosperma
senegalense are the dominant species of this area, while Bridelia micrantha,
Anthocleista djalonensis, Macaranga barteri and Uapaca heudelotii are also
common.
Figure 4.42 Freshwater Swamp Forest with Cyrtosperma senegalense (foreground) and
Raphia hookeri (background).

4-61
Floristic Composition of Project Site
The survey encountered 86 species in 77 genera belonging to 37 families

(Annex B1.1). The dominant families were the Papilionaceae (10), Graminae (7),
Rubiaceae (6) and the Euphorbiaceae, Cyperaceae and Mimosaceae with 5 members
each. These families account for 44.2 percent of the species encountered – an
indication that the floral diversity of the project site is poor. Very few Species
dominated the flora. The thicket clumps that dot the grassland between
Atuabo and Asemdasuazo are dominated by the small tree Syzygium
guineense, which occurs in almost pure stands (groups of growing trees or
vegetation in a particular area). The swamp forest was dominated by
Raphiahookeri in the upper storey and by Cyrtosperma senegalense in the under
story. A dominance of Calophyllum inophyllum was observed from the dune to
the roadside, within the project area, which existed in pure stands under the
broken canopy of the coconut plantation along the sand dune, behind the
coastal vegetation.
The percentage life form composition of the species encountered in the survey
indicated a clear dominance of trees over the other life forms (Figure 4.43).
Figure 4.44 shows a preponderance of the Pioneer guild, an indication that the
vegetation is in a state of recovery from disturbance. Green star species (44.2
percent) which are of no conservation concern, together with species ‘Not
Evaluated’ (46.5 percent), mostly common weeds, dominated the floral
composition of the area (90.7 percent). The species of conservation concern, ie
Blue, Red and Pink Star species are species exploited for timber or food and
were found to represent fewer than 10 percent of the flora in the Project area
(Figure 4.45.).
Figure 4.43 Percentage Composition of species by Life Form
Percentage,
Tree, 37.2
Percentage Composition (%)
Percentage,
Climber, 23.3 Percentage,
Herb, 20.9 Percentage,
Shrub, 18.6
Life Form

4-62
Figure 4.44 Percentage Composition of Species by Ecological Guild
Figure 4.45 Percentage Composition of species by Star Rating
Flora in Wetland Areas
The vegetation in the Amansuri wetland area (closest portion located

approximately <1 km to the northwest of the Project site) is Wet Evergreen
Forest, with swamp-forest in wetter parts. The most common tree in the
wetland areas is the Raffia Palm (Raphia vinifera), which grows in stands along
with the large spiny aroid (Cyrtosperma senegalense). The drier portions
adjacent to the wetland areas comprise mainly sedges and grasses. The areas
around the Amansuri wetland experience seasonal flooding during the wet
season. The resulting difficulties to access these areas mean that large areas
surrounding the Amansuri wetlands are undisturbed.
The Amansuri wetland system (including the larger wetland areas, the
Amansuri Lake, Amansuri River and Amansuri Lagoon) are unique habitats
of the Western Region (Figure 4.20.). The Amansuri wetland is one of the
largest stands of wetlands vegetation within the wet evergreen forest zone of

4-63
Ghana with rich indigenous flora and fauna species. About 33 percent of the
237 plant species in the area are native to the wetland while 5 percent are
internationally fairly rare (gold and blue star species) (Enu-Kwesi and
Vordzogbe, 2001). The wetland is a largely pristine ecosystem and comprises
several wetland categories such as peat, swamp and mangrove forests, flood
plains, intertidal mud flats and sandy shores with streams, rivers, fresh water
lake, lagoons and the sea as the environmental features. More than 70 percent
of the area is covered by swamp and mangrove forest with the rest being flood
plains, estuary, intertidal mud flats and sand shores.
4.10.2 Fauna
Ghana, centrally located on the coast of West Africa, has large and viable
populations of wildlife and wild assets (natural heritage) that support a
growing eco-tourism industry to complement the nation’s strong cultural and
historical attractions. Most of these wildlife estates are located in the Western
Region dues to the suitable microclimate and diverse habitats provided by the
evergreen forest found in most parts of the Region. The wildlife is however
found in the protected areas which are the only refuge for them against illegal
hunting and habitat degradation. The Western Region therefore holds viable
samples of wildlife in the country.
Terrestrial fauna include relatively small animals living in primary or

secondary vegetation in the region. These include frogs, toads, snakes and
mice as well as smaller antelope species such as bushbuck. Notable among
the mammals in the Western Region are forest elephant, Red River Hog, and
Leopards. The Primates species include Senegalese bush baby, Bosman’s
potto, Mona monkey, Spot-nosed monkey, and Black-and-white colobus.
There are over 230 species of birds and 600 butterfly species. Reptiles are also
fairly represented in Ankasa (approximately 20 km north of the Project site)
and the surrounding areas.
Eighteen of the mammal species including Loxodonta africana cyclotis (African

forest elephant) and Leopard (Panthera pardus), present in the large Amansuri
catchment including the Ankasa Resource Reserve (Figure 4.20) are of global
and national conservation interest (GWS 2006). There are about twenty-seven
medium to large mammal species in the Amansuri wetlands and the adjoining
coastal areas of western Ghana. This suggests a fairly diverse mammalian
community inhabiting the wetland. The herpetofauna of the wetland and the
nearby coastal area of Western Region comprise about 25 species including
three endangered marine turtle species (Leatherback turtle (Dermochelys
coriecea), Green turtle (Chelonia mydas), Olive ridley turtle (Lepidochelys olivacea)
and several other species such as the Slender-snouted crocodile (Crocodylus
cataphractus) and Dwarf crocodile (Osteolamus tetraspis). Most of the
herpetofauna species are quiet common and widespread throughout Ghana
(Attuquayefio, 2001).
Over 250 bird species are known in the western coastal areas of the Western
Region and about ten of these including the hooded vulture ( Necrosyrtes

4-64
monachus), green-tailed Bristlebill (Bleda eximia), grey parrot (Psittacus
erithacus), (Criniger olivaceous) are listed on the IUCN Red List of Threatened
species (GWS, 2006). Terrestrial invertebrates of the area include 62 butterfly
species as well as 21 dragon flies. Whilst the butterflies are mainly in the
forested areas, the dragon flies are in the open areas in farmlands as well as
near bodies
A full list of the faunal species found in the Amansuri region is found in
Annex B9. None of these wildlife reported in the protected areas were sighted
in the project area during this study. This could be due to several reasons
such as the distance of the protected areas to the project area. The closest
protected area to the project area is the Ankasa Conservation Area which is
located about 20 km north of the project area. The project site is separated
from the protected areas by a vast expanse of savanna type grassland which is
not habitable by the wildlife and so they do not migrate between the project
area and the protected areas. The project area which is also mainly grassland
does not support any big mammals.
With the decrease in fish catches in recent years, the hunting of wild animals
for sale and consumption of bushmeat has increased sharply. As a result the
biomass of terrestrial wildlife species has dramatically declined (World Bank
2006, Brashares et al. 2004).
4.10.3 Avian Fauna
The west coast of Africa forms an important section of the East Atlantic
Flyway, an internationally-important migration route for a range of bird
species, especially shore birds and seabirds (Boere et al, 2006, Flegg 2004). The
highest concentrations of seabirds are experienced during the spring and
autumn migrations, around March and April, and September and October.
Waders are present during the winter months between October and March.
Seabirds known to follow this migration route include a number of tern
species (Sterna spp), skuas (Stercorarius and Catharacta spp) and petrels
(Hydrobatidae). Species of waders known to migrate along the flyway
include sanderling (Calidris Alba) and knot (Calidris canuta) and are associated
also with the wetland areas in the Western Region.
Common species reported as occurring at the Amansuri wetlands close to the

Project site include the grey plover (Pluvialis squatarola), the ringed plover
(Charadrius hiaticula), the common sandpiper (Tringa hypoleucos) and the ruddy
turnstone (Arenaria interpres). The eurasian oystercatcher (Haematopus
ostralegus) are also sighted (up to 30 individuals) on the beaches close to the
Amansuri wetland area, the only location in Ghana where this species is
reported with some frequency. The royal tern, (Sterna maxima), sandwich
terns (S. sandvicensis), common tern (S. hirundo) and the black tern (Chlidonias
niger) also regularly roost on sandbanks in the estuary. Other species
occurring in the inland freshwater lagoon and swamp areas include gallinules,
crakes and jacanas. A detailed list of the avifauna found in the Amansuri
region can be found in Annex B9.

4-65
The marine birds of Ghana include storm petrels (Oceanodroma castro) and
Ascension frigate birds (Fregata aquila). Records dating back to the 1960s
reveal only limited sightings of a few species (Elgood et al, 1994). The rarity of
oceanic birds may be attributable to the absence of suitable breeding sites (eg
remote islands and rocky cliffs) off the Ghana coast and in the Gulf of Guinea.
The black tern (Chlidonias niger), white winged black tern (Chlidonias
leucopterus), royal tern (Sterna maxima), common tern (Sterna hirundo),
Sandwich tern (Sterna sandvicensis), great black-back gull (Larus marinus),
lesser black-back gull (Larus fuscus), pomarine skua (Stercorarius pomarinus)
and great skua (Catharacta skua) have also been reported in the offshore
environment of Ghana (WAGP, 2004).
4.11 MARINE AND INTERTIDAL ECOLOGY
4.11.1 Plankton
Plankton community composition and abundance is variable and depends

upon water circulation into and around the Gulf of Guinea, the time of year,
nutrient availability, depth, and temperature stratification.
Information on plankton (phytoplankton and zooplankton) was sourced from

previously documented surveys in offshore areas within the Gulf of Guinea,
including ESIAs for the West Africa Gas Pipeline Project (WAGP, 2004) and
other research programmes (eg Guinea Current Large Marine Ecosystem
project Fisheries Resource Surveys, 2006-2007) and available published
sources (eg Wiafe, 2002).
Phytoplankton
Phytoplankton, grouped as diatoms, dinoflagellates and coccolithophores, are

microscopic and range between 30 µm and 60 µm in size. Primary production
is linked to the amount of inorganic carbon assimilated by phytoplankton via
the process of photosynthesis.
A range of 69 species of phytoplankton were identified between in the

nearshore area (15 to 65 m depth) between Nigeria and Ghana (WAGP, 2004)
and the phytoplankton community was dominated by Chaetoceros spp.
possibly a result of planktonic responses to seasonality of the hydrographic
regime (Wiafe, 2002). Other planktonic species included Dinophysis acuta, a
harmful microalgae with the potential to cause diarrhetic shellfish poisoning
in bloom condition at high concentrations (Anderson et al, 2001). Distribution
of the species indicated that Penilia avirostris, a cladoceran, dominated the
community in terms of number of individuals. However, a dinoflagellate
species, Chaetoceros spp., occurred in high numbers at all locations sampled.
The diversity of phytoplankton species ranked highest compared to those
recorded offshore of Togo, Benin, and Nigeria (WAGP, 2004).

4-66
The primary production values obtained within the near shore areas indicate a
system of relatively high productivity. Primary production determined for
the Gulf of Guinea is about 4,305 to 5,956 mgC/m2/day. Typically,
productivity in the offshore ecosystems (100 to 200 m water depth) range from
10 mg C/m3/day to 100 mg C/m3/day in terms of volume, or from
75 mgC/m2/day to 1,000 mg C/m2/day in terms of area.
Zooplankton
Offshore zooplankton assemblages are dominated by copepods, followed by

Ostracods (1), Appendicularians (2) and Chaetognaths (3). Maximum
abundance is during the primary upwelling although they are also abundant
during the secondary upwelling (4). WAGP (2004) surveys in the nearshore
area (15-65 m depth) identified 52 zooplankton species with Penilia avirostris,
Temora stylifera and Para-Clausocalanus spp. dominating the zooplankton
community.
Species of zooplankton recorded in the nearshore environment in the Western

Region of Ghana included Cyclopoids: Oncaea, Corycaeus, Farranula; Calanoids:
Acartia, Clausocalanus, Calanoides, Temora, Centropages, cirripid nauplius, Podon,
Evadne, Penilia, Lucifer protozoa, Appendicularia/ Oikopleuara, Pontellia nauplius
and Sagitta.
Benthic decapod larvae and large crustacean numbers are at their highest
between February and June and October and December. Carnivorous species
dominate the plankton during the warm season and diversity is high but
abundance low. Herbivorous zooplankton, dominated by Calanoides carinatus
is highly abundant in upwelling conditions. These are later replaced by
omnivorous species (eg Temora turbinate and Centropages chierchise).
Algae
Green algae blooms of non-toxic marine green algae (Enteromorpha flexuosa)

have been occurring along the coastline of western Ghana and the Ivory Coast
since at least the 1990s. These blooms occur seasonally first appearing
between August and October and remaining in the inshore region for
anywhere from a few months up to a whole year (Kraan, 2009). The seasonal
occurrence of the blooms are expected to be a result of over-fertilisation of
soils alongside rivers draining into the sea, as well as the outflow of untreated
sewage into rivers and the sea (CRC-URI, 2010).
(1) Ostracoda is a class of the Crustacea, sometimes known as the seed shrimp because of their appearance.
(2) Larvaceans (Class Appendicularia) are solitary, free-swimming underwater saclike filter feeders found throughout the
world's oceans.
(3) Chaetognatha is a phylum of predatory marine worms that are a major component of plankton worldwide.
(4) The major upwelling begins between late June or early July when sea surface temperatures fall below 25°C and ends
between late September or early October. The minor upwelling occurs either in December, January or February..

4-67
4.11.2 Sandy Beach Ecology (Intertidal Flora and Fauna)
Benthic macro invertebrates refer to organisms that are greater than 0.5 mm in
size, and represent an extremely diverse group of organisms and are largely
represented by different species of polychaetes, molluscs, crustaceans and
echinoderms. They play multiple ecological roles within the intertidal
ecosystem and are a critical part of environmental monitoring and evaluation
programmes. Most macrobenthic animals are relatively long lived and thus
integrate changes and fluctuations in the environment over a longer period of
time. Consequently, macrobenthic fauna constitute good biological
candidates for monitoring ecosystem health and processes.
A study was conducted to provide a baseline data on the macro invertebrates

of the intertidal ecosystem within the project area, at the locations identified in
Figure 4.10. The full report of the study is provided at Annex B6.
The study on the macrobenthos yielded more than 3900 individuals made up
of 16 different species belonging to five major taxa (species). Bivalvia was the
dominant group and in terms of abundance and accounted for about 97
percent of macrobenthic population. Polychaeta was the next dominant,
contributing 1.08 percent, followed by Nemertenia (1.02 percent), Crustacea
(1.02 percent), and Nematoda (0.02 percent). The fauna density ranged from 0
to 25510 ind/m2. The Mid shore of Atuabo recorded the lowest macrofaunal
density whereas the highest was observed at the lower shore of the station
located 1.5 km West of Atuabo, about mid-way of the proposed project area.
The highest frequency of occurrence (44 percent) and abundance (> 3500) were
recorded for the bivalve, Donax pulchellus. Density of polychaetes ranged from
10 to 180 ind.m-2. The most dominant polychaete species was noted for
Capitella capitata (180 ind.m-2) with the highest density occurring at half-way
between Atuabo and Anokyi, within the project area. The other dominant
polychaete species recorded include, Notomastus latriceus, Glycera sp., and
Aglaophamus sp. in the order of decreasing density. The Capitellidae family
was the most diverse with 2 species followed by Glyceridae and Nephtyidae
which were represented by 1 species each. The dominance of these species
particularly those of the capitellidae family can be ascribed to their ability to
survive in harsh and slightly polluted environments.
Among the crustaceans, amphipoda was the dominant group and contributed
to 0.4 percent of the total faunal abundance. Cumacea was next in dominance
and accounted for 0.3 percent, followed by Isopoda and Mysidacea which
together contributed < 0.1 percent.
With regards to the species assemblage pattern, the Shannon-Wiener diversity

was relatively low across the sampled locations, but the highest value was
recorded at the Station located half-way between Atuabo and Anokyi. The
species richness (Margalef’s index) ranged from 1.1 (Atuabo) to 3.1 (Half-way
of project area). This observed spatial pattern is similar to trends observed in

4-68
terms of the Shannon-Wiener diversity. Evenness value ranged from 0.86 to
0.98 at Anokyi and Atuabo respectively. A dendogram divided the stations
into a group and an outlier at a Bray-Curtis similarity of 12.7 (Figure 4.46).
The strongest and only cluster was Anokyi and the Station half-way of the
project area at a Bray-Curtis similarity of 53.81. The cluster of the two can be
attributed to the extremely high densities of Donax pulchellus recorded at both
stations.
Figure 4.46 Dendogram for hierarchical clustering (using group average linking) of
Stations within the project area based on Bray-Curtis similarity.
4.11.3 Fish Ecology
The composition and distribution of fish species found in Ghanaian waters is

influenced by the seasonal upwelling that occurs between Nigeria and the
Ivory Coast mainly in July to September and to a lesser extent in December to
February. The transport of nutrient-rich deep waters to the nutrient-depleted
surface water stimulates high levels of primary productivity. This in turn
increases production in zooplankton and fish. The fish species found in
Ghanaian waters can be divided into four main groups, namely pelagic
species, demersal species and deepwater species.
Pelagic Species
The pelagic fish assemblage consists of a number of species that are exploited
commercially but are also important members of the pelagic ecosystem,
providing food for a number of large predators, particularly large pelagic fish
such as tuna, billfish and sharks. The most important pelagic fish species
found in the coastal and offshore waters of Ghana are round sardinella

4-69
(Sardinella aurita), flat sardinella (S. maderensis), European anchovy (Engraulis
encrasicolus) and chub mackerel (Scomber japonicus). These species represent
approximately 80 percent of the total catch landed in the country
(approximately 200,000 tonnes per annum). In terms of biomass, acoustic
surveys have shown that the two sardinella species and the European
anchovy represent almost 60 percent of the total biomass in Ghanaian waters
(FAO and UNDP, 2006).
Other commercially important pelagic species (1) found in Ghanaian waters

include horse mackerel (Trachurus spp), little tunny (Euthynnus alletteratus),
bonga shad (Ethmalosa fimbriata), African moonfish (Selene dorsalis), West
African Ilisha (Ilisha africana), largehead hairtail (Triciurus lepturus), crevalle
jack (Caranx hippos), Atlantic bumper (Chloroscombrus chrysurus), barracuda
(Sphyraena spp), long-finned Herring (Opisthopterus tardoore), kingfish / West
African Spanish mackerel (Scomberomorus tritor) and frigate mackerel (Auxis
thazard).
Large pelagic fish stocks off the coast of Ghana include tuna and billfish.
These species are highly migratory and occupy the surface waters of the entire
tropical and sub-tropical Atlantic Ocean. They are important species in the
ecosystem as both predators and prey for sharks, other tuna and cetaceans as
well as providing an important commercial resource for industrial fisheries.
The tuna species are skipjack tuna (Katsuwonus pelamis), yellowfin tuna
(Thunnus albacares) and bigeye tuna (Thunnus obesus). Billfish species occur in
much lower numbers and comprise swordfish (Xiphias gladius), Atlantic blue
marlin (Makaira nigricans) and Atlantic sailfish (Istiophorus albicans). Small, but
significant shark fishery in Ghana targets blue sharks (Prionace glauca) and
hammerhead sharks (Sphyrna spp).
Demersal Species
Trawl surveys have shown that demersal fish are widespread on the
continental shelf along the entire length of the Ghanaian coastline (Koranteng
2001). Species composition is a typical tropical assemblage including the
following families.
Porgies or Seabreams (Sparidae) (eg bluespotted seabream Pagrus

caeruleostictus, Angola dentex Dentex angolensis, Congo dentex Dentex
congoensis, canary dentex Dentex canariensis and pink dentex Dentex
gibbosus);
Grunts (Haemulidae) (eg bigeye grunt Brachydeuterus auritus and to a

lesser degree sompat grunt Pomadasys jubelini and bastard grunt Pomadasys
incisus);
(1) ‘Other pelagic species’ include those listed in Jubilee Phase 1 ESIA Report and verified during consultations in Ghana in
April 2011 as part of the Fisheries study.

4-70
Croakers or drums (Sciaenidae) (eg red pandora Pellagus bellottii, Cassava
croaker Pseudotolithus senegalensis);
Goatfishes (Mullidae) (eg West African goatfish/red mullet Pseudupeneus

prayensis);
Snappers (Lutjanidae) (golden African snapper Lutjanus fulgens, Goreean

Snapper Lutjanus goreensis);
Groupers (Serranidae) (eg white grouper Epinephelus aeneus);
Threadfins (Polynemidae) (eg lesser African threadfin Galeoides

decadactylus);
Emperors (Lethrinidae) (eg Atlantic emperor Lethrinus atlanticus); and
Triggerfish (eg grey triggerfish Balistes capriscus).
The seasonal upwelling causes changes in the geographical distribution of

some of the demersal fish species (Koranteng, 2001). During the upwelling
season, the Croakers’s bathymetric range is reduced to a minimum, while the
deep water Porgies are found nearer the coast than at other times of the year.
The demersal species that are most important commercially (in terms of catch
volumes) are cassava croaker (Pseudotolithus senegalensis), bigeye grunt
(Brachydeuterus auritus), red pandora (Pellagus bellottii), Angola dentex (Dentex
angolensis), Congo dentex (Dentex congoensis) and West African Goatfish
(Pseudupeneus prayensis). The cassava croaker is considered the most
commercially important demersal fish in West African waters, although it is
reported that in recent years in Ghana their importance has declined (Froese
and Pauly, 2009). They are distributed along the west coast of Africa as far
south as Namibia and as far north as Morocco. They are a demersal species
occupying both marine and brackish water down to a depth of 70 m and are
found in coastal waters over muddy, sandy or rocky bottoms.
Deep Sea Species
Froese and Pauly (2009) lists 89 deep-sea fish species from 28 families
including Alepocephalidae, Gonostomatidae, Myctophodae and Stomiidae
that are likely to be found in Ghanaian waters. Information on the
distribution of specific deep water species is in Ghanaian waters is limited.
Protected or Endangered Species
The sensitive species in Ghanaian waters according to the International Union

for Conservation of Nature (IUCN) red list (IUCN, 2011) are presented in
Table 4.9. A number of these species are commercially important and are
subjected to heavy exploitation, particularly Albacore tuna and swordfish. It

4-71
should be noted that Albacore catches in Ghanaian waters are not currently
recorded (ICCAT Fish stat data).
In the global context there is concern about the bigeye tuna stocks. The
International Commission for the Conservation of Atlantic Tunas (ICCAT) has
listed it as the species of greatest concern, after the bluefin, in terms of its
population status and the unsustainable levels of exploitation exacted on this
species.
Table 4.9 Threatened Fish Species in Ghanaian Waters (IUCN, 2011)
Scientific name Common name Red List Category

Cephalopholis taeniops African Hind Data Deficient
Dasyatis margarita Ray species Endangered
Epinephelus aeneus White Grouper Near Threatened
Epinephelus caninus Dogtooth Grouper Data Deficient
Epinephelus costae Goldblotch Grouper Data Deficient
Epinephelus goreensis Dungat Grouper Data Deficient
Epinephelus haifensis Haifa Grouper Data Deficient
Epinephelus itajara Goliath Grouper Critically Endangered
Epinephelus marginatus Dusky Grouper Endangered
Hippocampus algiricus West African Seahorse Data Deficient
Pristis pectinata Wide Sawfish Critically endangered
Pristis perotteti Largetooth Sawfish Critically endangered
Raja undulata Undulate Ray Endangered
Rhinobatos cemiculus Blackchin Guitarfish Endangered
Rhinobatos rhinobatos Common Guitarfish Endangered
Rhynchobatus luebberti Lubbert’s Guitarfish Endangered
Rostroraja alba Bottlenose Skate Endangered
Sphyrna lewini Scalloped Hammerhead Endangered
Thunnus alalunga Albacore Tuna Data Deficient
Thunnus albacares Yellowfin tuna Lower Risk
Thunnus obesus Bigeye Tuna Vulnerable
Xiphius gladius Swordfish Data Deficient
The fisheries component of the environmental baseline study will provide

additional information on fishing within the nearshore, inshore and Project-
affected areas.
4.11.4 Marine Mammals
The ecological significance of Ghana’s coastal waters for dolphins and whales
has only recently become the subject of scientific studies, which partially
explains the lack of population abundance estimates and why their natural
history in the region remains largely unknown. The conditions created by the
seasonal upwelling in the northern Gulf of Guinea are however considered to
be favourable for marine mammals.
Specimens derived from by-catches and strandings show Ghana to have

moderately diverse cetacean fauna, comprising at least 18 species belonging to
five families: 14 species of Delphinidae (dolphins) and one species each of
families Ziphiidae (beaked whales), Physeteridae (sperm whales), Kogiidae

4-72
(pygmy sperm whales) and Balaenopteridae (rorquals). These species and the
IUCN conservation status and sensitivity are set out in Table 4.10.
Table 4.10 Dolphins and Whales of Ghana and IUCN Conservation Status
Species IUCN Status

Delphinidae
Common bottlenose dolphin (Tursiops truncatus) Least Concern
Clymene dolphin (Stenella clymene) Data Deficient
Spinner dolphin (Stenella longirostris) Data Deficient
Pantropical spotted dolphin (Stenella attenuate) Least Concern
Atlantic spotted dolphin (Stenella frontalis) (G. Cuvier, 1829) Data Deficient
Long-beaked common dolphin ( Delphinus capensis) Data Deficient
Fraser's dolphin (Lagenodelphis hosei) Least Concern
Rough-toothed dolphin (Steno bredanensis) Least Concern
Risso's dolphin (Grampus griseus) Least Concern
Melon-headed whale (Peponocephala electra) Least Concern
Pygmy killer whale (Feresa attenuata) Data Deficient
Short-finned pilot whale (Globicephala macrorhynchus Data Deficient
Killer whale (Orcinus orca) Data Deficient
False killer whale (Pseudorca crassidens) Data Deficient
Ziphiidae (beaked whales)
Cuvier's beaked whale (Ziphius cavirostris) Least Concern
Kogiidae (pygmy sperm whales)
Dwarf sperm whale (Kogia sima) Data Deficient
Physeteridae (sperm whales)
Sperm whale (Physeter macrocephalus or Physeter catodon) Vulnerable
Balaenopteridae (rorquals)
Humpback whale (Megaptera novaeangliae) Least Concern
4.11.5 Turtles
The Gulf of Guinea serves as an important migration route, feeding ground

and nesting site for sea turtles. Five species of sea turtles have been identified
within Ghanaian waters, namely the loggerhead (Caretta caretta), the olive
ridley (Lepidochelys olivacea), the hawksbill (Erectmochelys imbricata), the green
turtle (Chelonia mydas), and the leatherback (Dermochelys coriacea) (Armah et al,
1997, Fretey, 2001). The olive ridley is the most abundant turtle species in
Ghana. All five of these sea turtle species are listed by the CITES and National
Wildlife Conservation Regulations under Schedule I (Table 4.11).
Table 4.11 Turtles in the Gulf of Guinea, IUCN Conservation Status
Species IUCN Status

Loggerhead (Caretta caretta) Endangered
Olive ridley (Lepidochelys Vulnerable
olivacea)
Hawksbill (Erectmochelys Critically endangered
imbricata),
Green turtle (Chelonia mydas), Endangered
Leatherback (Dermochelys Critically endangered
coriacea)

4-73
Marine turtles spend most of their life at sea, but during the breeding season
they go ashore (to their natal beaches) and lay their eggs on sandy beaches.
Approximately 70 percent of Ghana’s coastline is found suitable as nesting
habitat for sea turtles, and three species, the green turtle, olive ridley and
leatherback turtles have been recorded nesting along the Ghanaian coast
(Armah et al, 1997; Amiteye, 2002). Population estimates from four previous
surveys of these turtle species are provided in Table 4.12, with (86.3 percent)
being olive ridley turtles.
The beaches of Ghana from Keta to Half-Assini are important nesting areas for
sea turtle species. The nesting period stretches from July to December, with a
peak in November (Armah et al, 1997). The Project site is considered to be part
of the turtle nesting area along the Western Region coastline.
Table 4.12 Population of Sea Turtle Species that Nest on Beaches of Ghana
Author, year Leatherback Olive ridley Green Turtle

Amiteye, 2002 46 412 32
Agyemang, 2005 30 190 10
Allman, 2007 418 134 0
Agyekumhene, 74 103 0
2009
Average 142 210 21
Source: Armah et al (1997)
The sandy beaches close to the Project site are reportedly used by nesting
turtles. In addition there are a number of turtle nesting sites reported to be
near the Project site (CRC-URI, 2010). Studies conducted in the project area at
the locations presented in Figure 4.47(full report at Annex B7) revealed that the
communities are largely aware of the important ecological role that turtles
play in marine ecosystems as well as the benefits business (resort) operators
in the region, as a result turtles are mostly protected in the area. Apart from
the national Wildlife laws that conserve sea turtles, some of the communities
have traditional regulations that further protect the species.

4-74
Figure 4.47 Location of interviews conducted as part of the turtle study
4.12 LOCAL FISHERIES
A catch assessment study was performed of the beach seine fishery at Atuabo
in the Ellembelle District of the Western where the proposed Project is to be
situated. An additional study was made of an inland freshwater (pond)
fishery on the proposed Project site. GPS devices were given to local fishers to
record the positions where they cast the net in the water offshore.
4.12.1 Marine Beach Seine Fishery
The Atuabo landing beach covers an area of shore line approximately 1.5 km
long and extends approximately 0.5 km wide into the sea. A total of five
beach seine canoes were identified in the study area at the time this study was
conducted. The average length of the canoes was 4.3 m and none of them
used outboard motors. The particular gear used for fishery constitutes of a net
with a bag about 27.7 m long, and a 19.6 m circumference mouth opening.
The mesh size of the nets is about 5/8th of an inch.
In the major upwelling season (between September and October), when the
stocks are abundant, a fishing crew can cast their nets twice in one day.
4.12.2 Marine Fish Catch
The sampled catch was considered to be average. There was a significant

amount of Jellyfish (Medusae spp.) in the bag and this constituted the biggest
portion of the total landed weight of 50.7 kg. For the fish species landed, the
Threadfin (Galeodis dacadactylus) represented the majority of the total catch
biomass, comprising of a total of 37.2kg, while the Puffer fish (Lagocephalus
spp.) contributed the least to the total weight of the catch with a weight of
(1.2kg) (Figure 4.48.).
After bringing in the nets it was evident that the bag (cod end) of some of the
nets had some amount of Sargassum spp. but was not present in significant
quantities compared to the remainder of the catch. Consequently no attempt
was made to sample the Sargassum as the beach itself as this was already
littered with the weed from previous fishing events.
The list of species and corresponding weights recorded during the fishing
study are provided in Table 4.13 below.
Table 4.13 List of Species Caught and Weights
Common Name Scientific Name Weight (Kg)

Flat sardinella Sardinella eba 5.700
Round sardinella S. auritas 4.950
Threadfin Galeodis spp. 37.158
Burrito Brachdeuterus auritas 3.716
Bumper Chrpomoscumbrus chry 3.963

4-76
Common Name Scientific Name Weight (Kg)
Cassava fish Pseudotholitus senegalensis 7.430
Saflo Scumberomorus tritor 14.863
Horse mackerel Caranx crysos 12.386
Canary Drum Sciaenid 4.958
Barracuda Sphirena sphirena 12.386
African horse mackerel Caranx senegalensis 7.432
Spadefish Drepane africana 7.432
Roncador Pomadysisus 4.954
Ribbonfish Trichiurus lepturus 9.909
Guitar fish Rhinobatos spp. 7.432
Moon fish Selene dosalis 7.432
Puffer fish Lagocephalus laevigatus 1.20
Jellyfish Medusa spp. 50.70
Total 204.0
Figure 4.48 The Graphical Relationship of the Species Range and the Indices of
Abundance
In terms of the state of the regional inshore and offshore marine fisheries,
there appears to be an increasing decline in local stocks. Many of the
community elders included in a recent study carried out by the H&N Mpoano
indicated that the amount of fish caught by local fishermen had decreased and
that their canoes have to travel further out to sea to catch their fill.
Furthermore, this seems to be the case for the local communities in the
neighbouring Ivory Coast and nearby Nigeria (H&N Mpoano, 2010). The
actual extent of the reported decline in local stocks is often distorted because

4-77
of the increased effort by fishermen (such as improved gears and fishing
further offshore) and thus the apparent stability of stocks if based on landed
catches. Even so, the decrease in available fisheries resources is becoming
increasingly apparent. Korangeng (2001) has reported a decrease in demersal
fish on Ghana’s continental shelf from approximately 50 kg per hectare in 1963
to approximately 32 kg per hectare in 1990. Pelagic fisheries have also
experienced a recent decline, after the 1980’s (H&N Mpoano, 2010).
The decline has been attributed to improved fishing ability of the shore-based
fleets through an improvement of fishing gear (such as smaller mesh sizes on
nets) as well as the influence of foreign offshore fishing vessels. Research
undertaken by throughout the GCLME has indicated that overfishing is
becoming a serious issue (H&N Mpoano, 2010).
4.12.3 Freshwater Fishery (Asemdasuazo)
The assessment was conducted in the dry season so the water levels in the
ponds at Asemdasuazo (about 1.8km north east of Atuabo, within the Project
site) were very low and this limited the level of fishing activity. The quantity
of fish caught was therefore very low and not considered enough to be used in
a meaningful assessment of the pond’s fish stocks. The average size of the
pond however is about 2 ha in dimension, but the fishers claimed that the
seasonal areas of inundation cause the ponds to increase in size up to
approximately 20 ha.
Local community members reported that fishing activities in the freshwater

ponds takes an average of 2 hours. There are two forms of gear used in pond
fishing by fishermen from the Asemdasuazo community. One is a hand held
grab net used in the dry season, and the other is a trap/or a cylindrical basket
used mostly in the rainy season. Fish catch from two ponds close (south east)
to Asemdasuazo (referred to as Ehoho and Enupa, represented by W8) were
assessed in the study. The catch was higher form the pond in Enupa than the
pond in Ehoho in terms of both quantity and species variety.
4.13 PROTECTED AREAS
4.13.1 Objectives of Protected Areas
The protected areas have been set aside for biodiversity conservation and also
in some cases for tourism development. In the case of Ankasa and Bia, being
rainforest areas, they may also play a major role in the following contributing
to the maintenance of the rainfall and humidity necessary for agriculture in
surrounding areas; absorbing CO2 to make air safe for humans and mitigate
climate change. The trees act as giant nutrient pumps bringing scarce soil
nutrients to the surface to support the complex biodiversity. The reserves also
preserve representative vegetation for research and regulate stream flow
throughout the year to maintain water supplies (Ankasa protects four

4-78
important watersheds including those of the Ansaka, Nini and Suhien Rivers)
and fishery cycles.
4.13.2 Designated and Protected Areas
Ghana has 18 wildlife protected areas that include 7 national parks, 6

resources reserves, 4 wildlife sanctuaries and 5 coastal Ramsar sites. The
Western Region holds two (2) of these protected areas namely, Ankasa and Bia
Conservation Areas. Each of these Conservation Areas is made up of two
reserves abutting each other. However, for management purposes they are
treated as a single entity and, therefore referred to as Conservation Areas.
The Ankasa reserve (approximately 509 km 2 (Jachmann, 2008), located

approximately 20 km to the north of the Project site, is designated as a
resource reserve, with the highest biodiversity in Ghana (Figure 4.20.). This
reserve includes approximately 800 floral species, including some a number of
endemic species and is considered to be globally important in terms of
biodiversity (World Bank 2006, Burgess et al, 2005, Allotey 2007). The Cape
Three Points Reserve is the last protected remnant of the primary coastal
forest that once extended along the major segments of the coastline of the Gulf
of Guinea (CRC-URI, 2010).
There are 40 Important Bird Areas (IBAs) designated by Birdlife International

within Ghana (Birdlife International, 2011); one of which, the Amansuri
wetland system, is located to the north and northwest of the Project site.
4.13.3 Ankasa Conservation Area
Ankasa Conservation Areas consist of two reserves ie Ankasa Resource Reserve

and Nini-Suhyien National Park. Together they occupy a land area of 509 km2
within three districts namely; Jomoro District Assembly, Nzema East District
Assembly and Amenfi-West District Assembly. The vegetation type is Wet
Evergreen Forest with over 800 species of vascular plants including some
endemic ones like the recently discovered Psychotria. It is considered the
most undisturbed representation of a wet evergreen high forest ecosystem in
Ghana.
Ankasa records at least nine primate species including Chimpanzees, Diana

monkey, Mangabey and the Geoffrey’s Pied Colobus, the white-naped
mangabey and three unconfirmed species which may include western
chimpanzee, the Roloway Diana monkey and the Western black-and-white
colobus. Ankasa still holds viable populations of charismatic mammals such
as the forest elephant, bongo and yellow backed duiker. Reptiles are also
fairly represented in Ankasa. Other rare mammals found in Ankasa are Giant
Forest Hog, Giant Pangolin, Water Chevrotain and Leopards. There are over
200 species of birds and 600 butterfly species.

4-79
4.13.4 Amansuri Wetlands
The Amansuri wetland is the largest stand of intact swamp-forest in Ghana,

with large portions of the wetland still in a relatively pristine condition.
Although the wetland area is not considered a protected area in terms of
Ghanaian legislation, there are conservation efforts related to it for example,
the ACID Project (Amansuri Conservation and Integrated Development
Project), which aims to develop eco-tourism.
The wetland is classified as a blackwater area, and as such, the fauna on the
site is species-poor, but distinctive. The Ghana Wildlife Society (with funding
from the Dutch government) is involved in a process to designate the
Amansuri area as a certified Ramsar site (Birdlife International, 2012) and the
establishment of the area as a Community Nature Reserve. The area is used
by local communities such as the Nzulenso, a community living on stilt
houses within the Amansuri Lake. The Nzulenso community fishes within
the freshwater lagoon and this is regulated by well-enforced cultural practices
to ensure sustainability and pollution prevention (Birdlife International, 2012).

4-80
5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC BASELINE
This Chapter is structured to build up an understanding of the socio-economic

environment in which the Project is planned to take place. The relationship
between the Project and the different levels of this environment is two-way,
with the Project impacting on its host while simultaneously being impacted by
the structure and functioning of that host environment.
The Chapter is therefore presented in the following way:
Section Focus
5.1 Defining the Socio- Defining levels of the Study Area based on the areas of influence
economic Study Area
5.2 Institutional Context Summarising structures of governance and administration
interacting with the Project
5.3 Macro-Economic Presenting a short socio-economic and political history that

History of Ghana motivates current day planning relevant to the Project
5.4 The development Policy Highlighting aspects of development plans impacting on the
Context Study Area
5.5 Land Tenure System Summarising land access issues given the Project’s requirement
and Land Use for land and impact on current land owners and users
5.6 National, Regional and Presenting key socio-economic aspects relevant to the broader
District Socio-economic Project Area
Setting
5.7 National, Regional and Highlighting existing strengths and hurdles in the broader Project
District Utilities, Area
Infrastructure and services
5.8 The Local Socio- Presenting the key socio-economic and cultural setting which will
Economic and Cultural host the Project and on which the Project will impact most directly
Setting
5.9 Livelihood Practices Highlighting current livelihood activities which need to be

understood in developing alternative livelihood activities to
mitigate Project impacts in the Study Area
5.10 Community Lifestyle, Understanding the nature of community life and identity today in
Identity and Relationships order to ensure sensitive Project development and impact
mitigation where relevant
5.11 Utilities, Infrastructure Summarising the current setting into which the Project will be
and Services placed and on which the Project will have direct and indirect
impacts

5-1
5.1 DEFINING THE SOCIO-ECONOMIC STUDY AREA
The geographical focus of the socio-economic study area has been defined,
based on the location of the Project (1) and description of the Project
components (Chapter 3) as the vicinity of Atuabo, Ellembelle District, Western
Region of Ghana (Figure 5.1). Communities identified as directly affected in
this area are Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo (Figure 5.2). These three
towns, together with the physical footprint of the Project will hereafter be
referred to as the “Study Area”.
The Project is anticipated to impact particularly upon these towns (2), but also
on the wider region in general (Figure 5.3). This baseline chapter therefore
examines, briefly, the macro socio-economic environment, the regional and
district context and then looks in more detail at the way in which towns,
households and individuals, directly affected by the Project, currently exist.
(1) When commenting on issues likely to arise from the Project, the reader should note that all comments are based on the
premise of “if the Project is approved” or “if the Project goes ahead”. This decision is to be made by the developer based on
the financial feasibility of the Project and on the approval of the ESIA by the Ghanaian Government.
(2) Although Ghana uses the term “town” to describe settlements of 5000 or more inhabitants, this report refers to the three
directly impacted communities of Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo as towns, even though they are smaller in size than
the official definition.

5-2
Figure 5.1 Contextual Map: Region, District and Study Area
Figure 5.2 Study Area Communities: Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo
Figure 5.3 Project Spheres of Influence

5-4
5.2 INSTITUTIONAL CONTEXT
This section of the Report presents aspects of Ghana’s institutional structures

that are of relevance to the Project as there will be a two-way relationship
between the Project and government institutions. On the one hand, the levels
of government outlined will have varying jurisdiction over the Project and on
the other hand the presence of the Project will impact on the operations of
some of these structures. Therefore an understanding and interaction between
the parties will be necessary throughout the Project’s lifecycle.
5.2.1 Formal and Traditional Administrative Structures
National
Ghana is a multi-party democracy with a President as head of state and head

of the government. Legislative power rests with the parliament and the
judiciary is independent of both the executive and the legislature.
The government administration in Ghana is made up of ten administrative

Regions subdivided into Metropolitan, Municipal and Districts areas, each
with an administrative assembly comprised of a combination of appointed
and elected officials.
Regional
The local government system, as defined under the Local Government Act 462
of 1993, is made up of the Regional Coordinating Council (RCC), four-tier
Metropolitan and three-tier Municipal/District Assemblies with
Urban/Town/Area/Zonal Councils Unit Committees. The RCC is the head
of the local government system and is the highest decision-making body. In
each Region, the RCC is made up of the following:
Regional Minister as Chairman and his deputies;

Presiding Member of each District assembly;
District Chief Executive of each District in the Region;
two Chiefs from the Regional House of Chiefs;
Regional Coordinating Director (Secretary to the RCC and the head of the
civil administration of the region); and
Regional Heads of decentralised ministries.
The RCCs are non-executive bodies responsible for monitoring, coordinating

and evaluating the performance of the District assemblies and any Agency of
the central government.
District
According to the Ellembelle Medium Term Development Plan (MTDP), the

various legal frameworks for local development in Ghana place the District

5-5
Assembly in the centre to reinforce the government’s decentralisation process
and emphasis on participatory development.
The Ellembelle District Assembly (EDA) is therefore the highest

administrative and political body in the district, headed by the District Chief
Executive (DCE). An organisational chart of the EDA authorities is presented
in Figure 5.4. The Ellembelle District has an executive committee, which
formulates and executes policies of the Assembly through a number of sub-
committees including finance and administration, social services,
development planning, works, justice, security, health and sanitation.
The EDA, and specifically the District Planning Coordinating Unit, is

responsible for infrastructure, housing and development planning within the
Ellembelle District and will therefore have significant interaction with the
Project in the pre-construction and construction phases.
In addition, the District comprises ten Area Councils, which are essential to
local level development as they create an interface between the Assembly and
local communities. The Area Council is a sub-structure of the District
Assembly created for a number of settlements/villages which are grouped
together but whose individual populations are less than 5000. Area Councils
cover areas with predominantly rural populations and in some cases can be
identified with spheres of influence of a particular traditional authority.
The Project site falls within the Atuabo Area Council.

Table 5.1 shows the Ellembelle District Area Councils and the total population
figures for each Area Council.
Table 5.1 List of Area Councils and Population within Ellembelle District
Area Council Total Population

Asasetre 4,409
Kikam 6,020
Esiama 9,982
Nkroful 9,327
Awiebo 3,055
Atuabo (1) 3,753
Aiyinase 19, 634
Source: 2000 Population and Housing Census Western Region
As shown in
Table 5.1, the Atuabo Area Council has the second lowest population (2000
census)(2) and this is considered to have lowered development and service
delivery in the Project Area.
The Unit Committee is the last sub-structure in the local governance system. A
Unit is normally a settlement or a group of settlements with a population of
(1) Atuabo area council includes at least Eikwe; Sanzule; Krisan; Ngalekyi Atuabo; Anokyi and Asemdasuazo
2) Wherever possible data from the 2010 National census has been used. However, no data has been made available at the
Council or community level at the time of completing this report.

5-6
between 500–1000 in the rural areas, and a higher population (1500) for the
urban areas. Each Unit is represented by a Unit Committee, which is made up
of elected members. In the project area, the Units coincide with the electoral
area. Each of the five (5) Unit Committees has five (5) members, in addition to
the Assembly Members. The Unit committees being in close touch with the
people play the important roles of revenue collection, organization of
communal labour, monitoring the implementation of self-help development
projects, educating the people on their rights, privileges, obligations and
responsibilities, as well as providing focal points for discussion of local
matters and making recommendations to the Assembly, among others. Each
Unit Committee has a Chairman who steers the affairs of the Committee.
The EDA was inaugurated only recently, in February 2008, and as such the
strategic development planning for the District is in its early phase. The
emergence of the oil and gas industry and related industrial activities will
require careful planning by affected Councils to facilitate development and to
prevent unplanned and un-coordinated growth with concomitant pressures
on existing infrastructure and services which could result in lowering
standards of living rather than an improvement.
Figure 5.4 Ellembelle District Organogram

5-7
Source: Ellembelle Medium Term Development Plan (2010)
5.2.2 Traditional Authorities
Tradition plays an important role in society and is recognised at the national

level where the traditional system is managed through the Ministry of
Chieftaincy and Culture. The objective of the Ministry is to preserve, sustain
and integrate the regal, traditional and cultural values and practices.
At the local level, the paramount chiefs are the traditional heads of the people
and custodians of the land, and they carry great local influence. Traditional
structures, including the paramount chiefs, are intended to be politically
impartial as they are responsible for supporting every member of the
community, irrespective of their political affiliation.
Despite changes and challenges to the traditional structures, in most cases the
chiefs continue to wield considerable authority, respect and influence at the
local level, including quasi-judicial roles. Chiefs and their traditional councils
are often involved in disputes around family and property matters, including
land and they may mediate on issues such as theft and domestic conflicts. The
chief usually also takes on the role of encouraging communities to participate
in development activities in the area.
Traditional councils are composed of the elders who carry out the instructions
of the chief and safeguard traditional customs and knowledge about an area
for future generations.
The Ellembelle District has one Paramountcy, the Eastern Nzema Traditional
Council, which is headed by Awulae Amehere Kpanyinle II and is situated at
Atuabo. The three districts of Nzema East, Ellembelle and Jomoro constitute
the Nzema Manle Council (District House of Chiefs).

5-8
Figure 5.5 Ellembelle District Traditional Leadership Organogram
Nzema Manle Council

(District House of Chiefs)
Nzema East Ellembelle Jomoro
Eastern Nzema Traditional Council
Paramount Chief
Awulae Amehere Kpanyinle II
5.3 MACRO-ECONOMIC HISTORY OF GHANA
This section presents a brief summary of this macro-economic history. This

will feed into the next section and contribute to better understanding of some
of today’s policies, where they come from and how they are shaping the socio-
economic and development planning that is affecting the broader region and
district in which the Project will take place.
In 1957, Ghana (1) gained independence, becoming the first sub-Saharan

African nation to become independent of European Colonialism.
International hopes for successful transition to independence under the first
president Kwame Nkrumah were high. However, Nkrumah’s government
was overthrown in 1966 over the following quarter century Ghana almost
became bankrupt, as a result of political turmoil, a number of military coups,
plummeting GDP and crippling national debt. Ghana along with many other
countries in Africa went through the "African economic crisis" in the early 80s,
which was characterised by a steep decline in the quality of life for an
increasingly large proportion of the population and a decline in the rate of
growth in all the sectors of the national economy.
By 1982, real per capita income had declined by more than 30 percent and the
overall balance of payments’ deficit widened. In response to this crisis, the
Ghanaian government agreed to implement the International Monetary
Fund’s (IMF) Economic Recovery Programme (ERP), which focused on
stabilisation, rehabilitation and liberalisation. This structural adjustment plan
resulted in the changing of many economic policies, and, according to the
(1) During colonial times, the British referred to Ghana as the "Gold Coast". Following independence, the name "Ghana"
was chosen to reflect the ancient Empire of Ghana which once extended throughout much of West Africa.

5-9
Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) Factbook, leading to the beginning of an
economic recovery.
In 1992 a new constitution restoring multi-party politics was promulgated and

since then there have been five successful multi-party elections thereby
confirming Ghana’s status as a stable democracy;; an important criteria for
foreign direct investment. A fourth democratic election is planned for 2012
and international interests remain high to see the re-enforcement of
democracy.
As a result of the economic challenges of the 1970s, 80s and 90s, Ghana
struggled for a long time with the huge foreign debt that had accumulated.
Thus, until recently, Ghana was regarded by the World Bank as “poor”, with a
per capita annual income of less than 1 USD per day. On 1 July 2011 the
World Bank reclassified Ghana from a low-income to lower middle-income
status country, due to increased revisions of GDP by analysts in response to
the recent discovery and production of oil in Ghana (World Bank, 2011). In
the Word Bank’s “Global Economic Prospects” report for 2012, Ghana is
positioned as the fastest growing economy in Sub-Saharan Africa for 2012,
with a forecast GDP growth of 13.4 percent (World Bank, 2012). To the
majority of Ghanaians this reclassification is, however, purely theoretical as
the anticipated socio-economic benefits of the new oil and gas industry are yet
to be felt on the ground.
5.3.1 The Development Policy Context
As detailed in Chapter 2 of the ESIA, a number of national to district

development policies exist that will influence the future of the broader Project
Area. These policies arise in response to Ghana’s history and are summarised
in Table 5.2.
Table 5.2 Development Policies Relevant to the Project
Policy Key Aspects

National Level Policy
The Coordinated Designed to address historical economic and social challenges
Programme of Economic that are seen to have hampered national development.
and Social Development Driven by a medium-term vision of shared growth through
Policies, 2010 – 2016 accelerated job creation, integrated industrial development
(Agenda for Shared and agricultural modernisation, via policy measures that the
government plans to pursue in order to “transform the
Growth and Accelerated
economy from its over-dependence on primary raw materials
Development for a Better
to a diversified economy.
Ghana) (Adopted June
Priority interventions include:
2011) Economic Development;
Social Development;
Science, Technology and Innovation ;
Infrastructure Development;
Spatial Development Zones;
Natural Resource Management;
Environmental Governance; and
Transparent and Accountable Governance.
Land Commission Provides guidelines for acquisitions of tracts of land larger

5-10
Policy Key Aspects
Guidelines for Considering than 50 acres.
Large-Scale Land Highlights that most of the land users in rural areas (where
Transactions for the majority of large scale land acquisitions are occurring in
Agricultural and other Ghana) are smallholder farmers without registered title deeds
Purposes (Approved or interests on those lands.
February 2012) Emphasises that most of these farmers have only use rights to
the land and are thus vulnerable to negotiations undertaken
by a higher interest holder (like a chief or family head) over
the release of the land.
Emphasises the participation of all stakeholders in the process
of such transaction.
Regional Level Policy
Western Region Spatial Presents a spatial plan for the integration of social, economic
Development Framework and environmental development for the Region.
2013--33 (WRSDF) (Draft Zones the Region into three spatial zones.
April 2012) Identifies the Project Area within Zone 3: Coastal - Industrial
Districts.
Recognizes the discovery of oil and gas as a key driver of
development in the Region and the Study Area.
Already takes account a specialist oil and gas harbour with
associated supply facilities at Atuabo (Ellembelle) – this
Project.
Recognises that to maximise employment opportunities
requires long term strategic plans for training as well as wide
access to business procurement in institutional, structural and
future land use and infrastructure terms
District Level Policy
Ellembelle District The overarching goal is to:
Assembly Medium-Term co-ordinate social services and environmental
Development Plan 2010- sustainability;
2013 (Prepared November improve security and develop accessibility to production
2010) areas; and
strengthen local institution for equitable growth and
sustainable development.
Priority focus areas include:
macro-economic stability;
accelerated agricultural modernization and sustainable
natural resource management;
oil and gas development;
infrastructure, energy and human settlement;
enhanced competitiveness;
transparent governance; and
human development, productivity and employment.
When designing the Project and planning for impact mitigation and
maximisation of opportunities, Lonrho would benefit by engaging with the
agencies implementing these national, regional and district development
policies – particularly when identifying non-core activities, like corporate
social responsibility (CSR) projects that could partner with broader regional
and district programmes to ensure sustainability beyond the life of the Project.
5.4 LAND TENURE SYSTEM AND LAND USE
This section of the Report highlights issues of land tenure and access, which is
central to the Project, as the Project requires access to 2000 acres of land
currently under traditional tenure. Gaining title to the land, and the

5-11
repercussions for affected land owners and users, will be a major socio-
economic impact of the Project and an appropriate understanding of tenure
and access issues is therefore significantly important.
According to Godwin Djokoto and Kyeretwie Opoku (2010), customary and

statutory land tenure can be described in terms of the way in which they are
managed because:
“Ghana’s land tenure system is usually characterised as one of legal

pluralism in which customary and statutory laws co-exist in a complex
mix, and range of institutions and regulations having authority over land
rights and multiple bodies through which disputes are resolved”.
Customary tenure is characterised by its essentially unwritten nature, based

on local practices and norms that are said to be negotiable and flexible and
vary dependent upon location. Such tenure is usually managed by a
traditional ruler (the paramount chief or local chiefs); a council of elders; or
family or lineage heads. Its principles stem from rights established through
first clearance of land, conquest or settlement (1).
In contrast, the State land tenure system is usually based on officially

documented statutes and regulations, formalised in a legal system that has, at
its roots, a history of colonial power. Such laws define acceptable behaviour
and processes, and present consequences for non-compliance to these.
Administration of this legal system usually rests with government structures
and individuals delegated with relevant authority. The basis of this system is
citizenship, constitutional rights and nation building and state-recognised
land rights are allocated and confirmed through the issue of titles or other
forms of ownership registration.
It is estimated that 80 percent of the land in Ghana is owned and governed by

traditional authorities (chiefs), while the government owns only 20 percent.
Under the 1992 Constitution, three distinct land tenure systems are
recognised:
Public land is owned by government, or has been acquired by the

government for public use (specifically for infrastructure development);
Stool (or skin) land is communal land held by traditional communities or

a grouping of communities, including stools, skins, and families. This type
of land is characterised by varying tenure and management systems; and
Private freehold land is not owned by government or traditional

authorities, but is held by families or groups who are members of the
community.
(1) Growing Forest Partnership, (2010). “Land Tenure In Ghana: Making A Case For Incorporation Of Customary Law In
Land Administration And Areas Of Intervention”. Commissioned By International Union For The Conservation Of Nature
And Growing Forest Partnership

5-12
Due to the diversity of this land tenure system an individual can hold
multiple rights to one piece of land. There are three different forms of right to
land, namely use rights, control rights and transfer rights as described below:
Use Rights is the right to use the land (conferred either to “natives” or
“settlers”).
Control Rights are the right to make decisions on how the land should be
used and to benefit financially from the sale of the crops etc.
Transfer rights is the right to sell or mortgage the land; to convey the land
to others through intra-community re-allocations or to heirs; and to
reallocate use and control rights.
Under the traditional system, any person who wants to buy or lease land has
to request permission from the chief and follow the correct traditional
protocols. Family land can be bought or leased, and if leased, the family and
the lessee have to agree on the rent before the transaction is regarded as
complete. The same applies if the person who wants to buy the land, a selling
price must be agreed upon. Once this transaction is complete the buyer
becomes the legal owner of the land.
Land ownership is also determined by matrilineal (maternal) and patrilineal

(paternal) inheritance systems. In the Ellembelle District matralineality is the
dominant form and family land may be handed down through the female line
from mother to child but not from father to child. If a man owns family land
he is only able to pass the land on to his sisters’ heirs thereby keeping the
property within the family through the female line.
Chiefs remain the custodians of traditional lands but do not have absolute
control as land acquisition registration and revenue collection is done through
the Office of the Administrator of Stool Lands. In addition, there is a legal
obligation to distribute revenues from Stool Land (Article 267 of the
Constitution and Section eight of the Stool Lands Act 1994) as follows:
The first ten percent of the revenue accruing from Stool Lands shall be
paid to the Administrator of Stool Lands to cover administrative expenses.
The remaining revenue shall be disbursed in the following proportions by

the Administrator:
25 percent to the Stool through the traditional authority for the
maintenance of the Stool in keeping with its status;
20 percent to the traditional authority; and
55 percent to the District Assembly within the area of authority in
which the Stool Land is situated.

5-13
5.4.1 Local Land Use, Rights and Entitlements
In Atuabo, all the land originally belonged to the chief but because it is not
acceptable for a chief to farm he “gives” access to the land to different families
and in return receives some form of rent; a percentage of the crop produced or
of crop sales, or a combination of both. In Atuabo and potentially in the other
communities, a number of residents believe that they “own” the land as it has
been worked by their families for generations. This is a perception of
ownership as discussions between the developer and the Lands Commission
have confirmed that all land in the Project area is stool land. The Awulae has
nevertheless acknowledged that this “confusion” around the perception of
ownership exists and has cautioned the various role-players in the Project on
this issue. Of significance for the Project is the potential vulnerability that this
situation creates for families or individuals with varying entitlements and
thus varying claims on compensation when losing access to land
(sharecroppers in particular). This will need to be clarified during further
compensation-related activities at the next stage of the Project process.
For newcomers to the area, the Awulae emphasised that land could be
accessed by following the appropriate traditional channels of the chiefs and
elders.
For the Project to go ahead it needs to gain access to the identified footprint.
Discussions are underway with the Awulae in this regard and a Memorandum
of Understanding (MOU) has been signed between the two parties. The MOU
confirms that the Stool would offer the land in return for an equity stake in the
Project. The GoG would provide a Government Guarantee on the provision
of the land, in the event of the Stool failing to meet its obligations. Based on
this arrangement the Stool would get revenues from dividend payments
based on its percentage shareholding in the Project and subject to the
dividend declaration approved by the Project’s Board of Directors.
Compensation for land users with no legal title would be agreed to through
the Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) or Livelihood Restoration Plan (LRP) with
all affected individuals and families and settled separately.
5.5 NATIONAL, REGIONAL AND DISTRICT SOCIO-ECONOMIC SETTING
Before providing more detailed information about the socio-economic and

cultural environment of the Study Area, an overview of the National, Regional
and District environment is provided. The selection of this information has
been based on adding value to an understanding of the context in which the
Project and its proposed activities in the Study Area will take place.
An overview of a range of significant national statistics is presented in Table

5.3:
Table 5.3 Ghana Socio-Economic Indicators
Social/ Demographic

5-14
Social/ Demographic
Population estimate (2010 Population and Housing 24,223,431
Census Provisional Results) 11,801,661 males (48.7 percent)
12,421,770 females (51.3 percent)
Age Structure (2011 estimate) 0-14 years: 36.5 percent
(male 4,568,273/ female 4,468,939)
15-64 years: 60 percent
(male 7,435,449/ female 7,436,204)
65 years and over : 3.6 percent
(male 399,737/ female 482,471)
Median age 21.4
Population growth rate (2012. estimate) 1.8 percent
Urban/ Rural population (2010) 51 percent urban
Rate of Urbanization (2010-15 estimate) 3.4 annual rate of change
Birth rate: (2012 estimate) 27 births/1,000 population
Death rate: (July 2012 estimate) 8.6 deaths/1,000 population
Infant mortality rate (2012 estimate) 47.3 deaths/1,000 live births
Life expectancy at birth (2010) 64
Total fertility rate: (2012 estimate) 3.4 children born/woman
HIV/AIDS – adult prevalence rate (2009 estimate) 1.8 percent
HIV/AIDS – people living with HIV/AIDS (2009 260,000
estimate)
HIV/AIDS – deaths: (2009 estimate) 18,000
Literacy (1): (2012 estimate) 57.9 percent (down from 74.8 percent in
(Male/ female figures from 2000 National Census) 2003)
- males 66.4 percent
- females 49.8 percent
Primary School net enrolment ratio 76 percent
(2007-2009)
Economic
GDP - Purchasing Power Parity (PPP) (2) 74.8 billion USD
(2011 estimate)
GDP – real growth rate (2012) 13.5 percent
GDP – per capita PPP (3) 3,100 USD

(2011 estimate)
GDP – composition by sector (2011 estimate) agriculture: 28.3 percent
industry: 21 percent
services: 50.7 percent
Poverty Ratio(4) (2012) 28.5 percent
Unemployment (2000) 11 percent (down from 20 percent in

1997)
Investment - gross fixed (2011 estimate) 20.1 percent of GDP
Source: CIA World Factbook, Ghana; 2010 Population and Housing Census Provisional Results
(1) Literacy: age 15 and over can read and write.

(2) Purchasing Power Parity: An economic theory that estimates the amount of adjustment needed on the exchange rate
between countries in order for the exchange to be equivalent to each currency's purchasing power (Investopedia.com as
accessed 31 May 2012 at http://www.investopedia.com/term)
(3) The value of all final goods and services produced within a country in a given year divided by the average (or mid-
year) population for the same year.
(4) Poverty ration is the percentage of the population living below the poverty line – 1.50 USD /day. This is a significant
reduction from the 51.7 percent in the 1990s.

5-15
5.5.1 Demographic Profile
According to the preliminary results of the National Population Census

(2010), Ghana currently has a population of 24,223,431, with the Western
Region comprising nine percent of the total population (2,325,597 people).
The Western Region has a population density of 97 people per km2, making it
the fifth most densely populated region in the country.
The population characteristics of the Ellembelle District and affected

communities are highlighted in Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 Population Distribution in Ellembelle District and Communities of the Study
Area
District Population Size Expected Population Size Rural/Urban Split

(2013)
Ellembelle 95,306 114,839 Majority rural
Anokyi 874 Not available All rural
Atuabo 1419 Not available All rural
Asemdasuazo 558 Not available All rural
Source: WRSDF: Zone 3: Coastal – Industrial Districts, 2012; SRC LRP Fieldwork 2012
Regional Population Growth
According to the provisional 2010 National Census, since 2000, the overall
population growth in Ghana has been 28.1 percent. The Western Region has
experienced a lower population growth rate (20.8 percent) which is 7.3 percent
below the national average. The decline in the growth rate may be attributed
to a decrease in the numbers of people migrating into the area and an increase
in the people migrating out of the area in search of employment (Johnson,
2010).
Further information about population percentage growth per region is

provided in Table 5.5.
Table 5.5 Population Growth by Region, 2000 – 2010
Region 2000 Percentage 2010 Percentage Percentage

Population share 2000 Population Increase share 2010
Ashanti 3,612,950 19.1 4,725,046 30.8 19.5
Brong Ahafo 1,815,408 9.6 2,282,128 25.7 9.4
Central 1,593,823 8.4 2,107,209 32.3 8.7
Eastern 2,106,696 11.1 2,596,013 23.2 10.7
Greater Accra 2,905,726 15.4 3,909,764 34.6 16.1
Northern 1,820,806 9.6 2,468,557 35.6 10.2
Upper East 920,089 4.9 1,031,478 12.1 4.3
Upper West 576,583 3.0 677,763 17.5 2.8
Volta 1,635,421 8.6 2,099,876 28.4 8.7
Western 1,924,577 10.2 2,325,597 20.8 9.6
Ghana 24,223,431 100.00 11,801,661 28.1 100.00
Source: 2010 Population and Housing Census Provisional Results

5-16
Urban/ Rural Population Patterns
Overall, Ghana demonstrates a population shift towards the urban areas,

which is common amongst most African countries as people seek
opportunities and services which are more easily available in cities. Ghana
defines an urban area as having 5000 or more inhabitants. According to the
2000 National Census, the National and Western Region urban populations
were 43.9 percent and 36.3 percent respectively. That is significantly higher
than the 26.6 percent for Ellembelle District. Over the 16 years leading up to
2000 more than 39 percent of the District’s population migrated towards the
urban centres (Table 5.6). The ramifications of this population movement
suggest a potential long-term emptying of small communities in the District,
which in turn would lead to lower service provision in these areas
contributing to a cycle of even more migration and/or lower standards of
living for those remaining.
Table 5.6 Urban/ Rural Population Trend
Area 1960 (Percent) 1970 (Percent) 1984 (Percent) 2000 (Percent)

Urban Rural Urban Rural Urban Rural Urban Rural
Ghana 23 77 29 71 32 68 43.9 56.1
Western 25 75 27 73 23 87 36.3 63.7

Region
Ellembelle 1.4 98.6 10.7 89.3 15 85 51.06 48.94
District
Source: Axim, 2000
According to the Ellembelle District Profile (EDP) this marked increase in the
urban population is due largely to an unequal distribution of socio-economic
resources. Skewed development planning activities have led to an over-
concentration of social amenities in the small number of urban centres. This is
a situation that the District is now consciously addressing by developing a
rural strategy of development that is also in line with the Regional and
National planning policies.
Population Age Distribution
The Ghanaian population is relatively young, with 36.5 percent aged between
0-14 years old and only 3.6 percent over the age of 65. The division of age
cohorts at National to District levels between 1984 and 2000 are shown in
Table 5.7.
Table 5.7 National to District Age Cohorts as a Percentage of the Population
Cohort Ghana Western Region Ellembelle District

Year 1984 2000 2000 2000
0 – 14 45 41.3 45 43
15 – 64 51 53.4 52 51

5-17
Cohort Ghana Western Region Ellembelle District
Year 1984 2000 2000 2000
65+ 4 5.3 3 6
TOTAL 100 100 100 100
Source: Ellembelle District Profile (2012)
In the Western Region, the age-structure of all the districts depicts the same
pattern of a high proportion of persons between the ages of 0 and 14, but a
decrease in the populations as the age groups increase. (Modern Ghana, 2012).
Ellembelle District echoes this with 43 percent of the population aged between
0 – 14 years old, 51 percent between 15 and 64 and 6 percent above the age of
65. The 51 percent who fall into the economically active population is a
slightly lower figure than that of the regional and national population figures.
This could be as a result of migration out of the area in search of job
opportunities and highlights the skewed economic opportunities within the
region.
In Ellembelle the high proportion of youth, in conjunction with high

unemployment of those economically active individuals, has led to a relatively
high dependency ratio. This dependency places a heavy burden on the
economically active sector of the population in the district and contributes
significantly to high levels of poverty (2010 Population and Housing Census
Provisional Results) and to low standards of living in the area. Addressing
this situation is a focus of Ellembelle’s MTDP. The 51 percent economically
active Ellembelle population also suggests an available workforce for
increased economic development in the District; provided that people are
adequately skilled to access the opportunities.
On the top and bottom range of the age spectrum, the large proportion of
children resident in Ellembelle, as well as the higher than average population
over 65 (six percent compared to the National four percent), highlights the
need for sufficient health, education and recreational facilities to be
established in areas that are currently under-serviced.
Population Gender Distribution
There are more women than men in Ghana (51.3 percent females to 48.7
percent males) and in all regions except in the Western Region and Brong
Ahafo. Population gender distribution is presented in Table 5.8.
Table 5.8 Population by Region and Sex, 2010
Region Total Male Female

Ashanti 4,725,046 2,288,325 2,436,721
Brong Ahafo 2,282,128 1,161,537 1,120,591
Central 2,107,209 998,409 1,108,800
Eastern 2,596,013 1,252,688 1,343,325
Greater Accra 3,909,764 1,884,127 2,025,637
Northern 2,468,557 1,210,702 1,257,855
Upper East 1,031,478 497,139 534,339
Upper West 677,763 333,355 344,408

5-18
Region Total Male Female
Volta 2,099,876 999,190 1,100,686
Western 2,325,597 1,176,189 1,149,408
Ghana 24,223,431 11,801,661 12,421,770
Source: 2010 Population and Housing Census Provisional Results
In contrast to national gender data, the Western region has 26, 781 more men
than women (50.6 percent men vs. 49.4 percent women) (2010 Population and
Housing Census Provisional Results). This is also reflected at the District level
with a fractionally higher male population of 71,673 as against 71,198 for
females (sex ratio of 1:0.7). This may be attributed to male in-migration due to
potential economic activities like fishing, farming, mining and recently small–
scale mining as well as the newly emerging oil and gas sector (EDP, 2012). If
it is the case that men are choosing to locate to or stay in the Western Region
and the Ellembelle District rather than migrating to other parts of Ghana then
this would complement the national, regional and district development
planning policies that have identified the development potential of the District
as part of a coastal – industrial zone (WRSDF, 2012).
It will be important that the Project takes cognisance of this trend and the
National Agenda’s drive towards industrialisation when considering
contractor tenders and employment policies. It is also useful for the Project to
see that various levels of government are planning to implement development
activities that will contribute to servicing the Project’s indirect needs as well as
improving local socio-economic conditions in which the Project will operate.
Ethnicity, Language and Religion
In Ghana, ethnicity is characterised by one’s language or mother tongue.

English is the official language of Ghana and the main medium of teaching at
schools from the fourth year of basic schooling. Akan is the dominant ethnic
group in the Region and represents 89 percent of Ellembelle’s population with
Twi and Fante being the dominant languages.
According to the Ellembelle District Profile, the Akonu ethnic group is

predominantly found in areas around the district capital, while the Nzema
ethnic group is predominantly found in areas around Atuabo. In the Study
Area Nzema is the dominant group and the major language spoken is Nzema;
other dialects like Evalue and Gwira, Fante and Twi are also widely spoken.
Nationally, Christianity is the main religion practiced by the majority of the

population, and this trend is reflected in the Western region where 81percent
of people are Christian, followed by Islam (8.5 percent). According to
Ellembelle’s District Profile, Christians constitute about 79 percent of the
population, while Muslims comprise eight percent, traditionalists three
percent and others ten percent.

5-19
5.5.2 Migration Patterns
There is a significant amount of internal migration within the Western Region,

while inter-regional migration is relatively low. Internal migration occurs
primarily due to the limited employment opportunities in most districts
within the Region, with people migrating to areas with employment
opportunities such as Ahanta West and the Sekondi-Takoradi Metropolitan
Assembly (STMA) (Modern Ghana, 2012). Job seekers also often migrate to
Takoradi, Tarkwa and Cote d’Ivoire (Ellembelle District Profile).
The Ellembelle District experiences a surge of in-/out-migration, which is

attributed to seasonal fishing activities, jobs seekers searching for employment
at the mines and small-scale miners (artisanal).
A similar migration trend exists across the Study Area, as people of

economically active age move to the cities and larger towns in search of
employment opportunities.
Since the early 1990s the United Nations High Commission for Refugees in
Ghana has set up two refugee camps in the Western Region and has hosted
displaced people from Liberia, Cote d'Ivoire, Togo, Sierra Leone, Sudan, DRC,
Ethiopia, Eritrea and Chad as the Krisan camp in Sanzule, Ellembelle District.
This camp is currently home to over 1000 people. Ampain Refugee Camp was
opened in March 2011 in Jomoro District to host what was a growing
population of refugees fleeing post-election conflict in Cote d'Ivoire. The camp
was erected with 300 tents to house 3000 refugees. The numbers of refugees
entering the District has now stabilised.
5.5.3 The Economy
National Economy
An overview of Ghana’s national economy is provided in Box 5.1.
Box 5.1 Key Aspects of the National Economy
In 2011 the economy grew by 14.4 percent boosted by new oil production and a rebounding
construction sector.
Oil production is expected to plateau in 2012 (at least temporarily) and GDP growth is
anticipated to decelerate to 7.5 percent.
Monetary policy contained inflation within the target single digit range at 9 percent.
The fiscal deficit was reduced to 4.1 percent of GDP due to improved revenue collection, in
line with government’s objectives.
The 2011 current account deficit widened by 38 percent to 9.7 percent of GDP as a result of
higher import growth and significant increases in profit repatriation by extractive
industries. This is despite new oil export revenues.
2011 export receipts grew strongly (particularly in cocoa and gold) as did private
remittances totalling 2.4 billion USD.
Ghana exported 2.7 billion USD of crude oil (24 billion barrels) but imported 3.3 billion
USD oil products. The import amounts were similar but oil price increases had a significant
negative effect on the balance of payments.
Food inflation dropped from 4.8 percent to 4.3 percent over 2011 mainly as a result of
government intervention around fertiliser subsidies, irrigation, buffer stock management

5-20
and seed improvement.
Tax revenues increased from 13.1 percent to 15.4 percent of GDP between 2010 and 2011.
This was due largely to improved tax administration, increased taxable import volumes
and modernised customs valuation at the country’s borders.
Oil tax revenue accounted for 1.2 percent of GDP and mining’s contribution increased from
0.9 percent (2010) to 1.5 percent (2011). This was mainly due to two companies paying
corporate taxes after the expiry of their capital allowances.
Non-tax revenue doubled to 1.9 percent of GDP from the sale of gold and oil-related
activities.
Source: World Bank website: Ghana: Country Brief (2011)
A summary of Ghana’s economic outlook data as presented by

AfricanEconomicOutlook.org, an organisation that draws on the expertise of
the AfDB, OECD, UNDP, UNECA and other African think tanks is included
in Box 5.2
Regional and District Economy
The Western Region has considerable natural resources, which give it

significant economic importance within the context of the national economy.
The Region is the highest contributor to the country’s GDP, at 55 percent
(Ghana Government Portal, 2012). It is the country’s largest producer of
cocoa, timber, rubber (including rubber processing) and coconut (Tullow
Jubilee EIA, 2009). In addition, the Region has a wide variety of minerals
including gold, bauxite, iron, diamonds and manganese.
The discovery of oil off the coast of the Western Region has already enhanced
its significance within the National economy and the exploitation of natural
gas and related industrial activities, including the current Project, will focus
development in the Ellembelle District as an industrial node.

5-21
Box 5.2 Summary of Ghana’s Economic Outlook
“GDP growth in 2011 was driven by the industrial sector which grew by 36.2 percent, slightly
below the target of 37.2 percent. The strongest performance came from the mining and
quarrying sub-sector, which includes petroleum, which grew by 225.4 percent as compared
with 7 percent in 2010.
The service sector continues to be the leading contributor to GDP. It grew by 4.2 percent in 2011,
below the target of 9.9 percent and lower than the outturn of 6.1 percent in the previous year...
The agriculture sector expanded by 2.8 percent in 2011, below the targeted growth rate of 5.3
percent. The low growth rate of the sector is largely explained by the sharp decline in
reforestation activities, which led to a drastic contraction of the forestry and logging subsector
by 14 percent. All of the other sectors within this sub-group expanded: crops (5.4 percent),
livestock (5.1 percent) and fishing (1.7 percent). The high growth performance of the crops sub-
sector was largely due to the spectacular growth performance of the cocoa sub-sector which
grew by 14 percent...
Total revenue and grants for the first three-quarters grew by 46.5 percent mainly because of
improved performance of import duties, the value-added tax (VAT), petroleum and domestic
taxes. Oil revenue accruing to government per the petroleum purchase agreement with the
Ghana National Petroleum Company (GNPC), based on a total output of 24.78 million barrels,
is estimated at 337.33 USD million or 7 percent of GDP in 2011. Key challenges for the future
include the prudent management of oil revenues and the maintenance of a competitive non-oil
sector.
In accordance with the Petroleum Revenue Management Act (PRMA), which outlines the
provisions for the management of the petroleum revenue in Ghana, the government has
published the receipts for oil production and export. The 2012 budget announced how the
revenues accruing to government were allocated: 156.1 USD million was transferred to GNPC
as equity financing and carried interest and USD 112 million was transferred into the
Consolidated Fund as the annual budget-funding amount. Another 54.8 USD million went into
the Stabilisation Fund and 14.4 USD million was transferred into the Heritage Fund accounts.
For 2012, the government is projecting a total benchmark oil revenue of GHS 1.24 million (USD
745 million) based on a benchmark price of 90 USD per barrel.”
Source: African Economic Outlook, Ghana 2012
Agriculture
Currently, Ellembelle’s economic activities are dominated by agriculture

(including fishing) and agro-processing, which accounts for approximately 65
percent of the economically active population. Given the undulating
topography, mechanised systems of cultivation are unsuitable and most
activities are done on a small scale for family subsistence and trading. The
coconut sector has historically been a large contributor to the Ellembelle
District’s economy with coconut oil being produced and exported to Accra,
Kumasi, Tarkwa and Obuasi and further a field to Nigeria. In May 2012 the
districts of Jomoro, Nzema East and Ellembelle agreed on the establishment of
a common market for the sale of coconut to improve the profitability of the
business and to enhance the local economy while creating employment
opportunities (Akoto, 2012) Production declined significantly due to Saint
Paul’s Coconut disease which decimated almost half the plantations along the
south-eastern coast and this impacted severely on the livelihoods of people in

5-22
the area over the past two decades. In 2000 a programme was implemented to
re-establish the sector through replanting hybrid coconut seedlings. The
Ellembelle District Chief Executive has stated that the GoG in collaboration
with Zoomlion-Ghana have been developing a hybrid coconut seedlings for
supply to coconut farmers for cultivation. It is hoped that this will bring some
relief to affected farmers and income to the Ellembelle District (EDP, 2012).
Livestock
Livestock production is undertaken on an insignificant scale in Ellembelle.

Pig production is most popular as the by-products from coconut oil
processing are easily accessible and cheap feed for the pigs. Currently, pig
rearing is done on a small and traditional basis. However the Ellembelle
District has identified the potential of large-scale pig husbandry to create
alternative employment opportunities (EDP, 2012).
Fisheries
Marine fishing is a key economic activity in Ellembelle and the district ranks
second in the country in this sector. During the major fishing season there is
an influx of people to the District and economic activities are high. In
contrast, during the off-season, unemployment rises and the economy
experiences a recession as a result of an exodus of non-residents, a lack of
income for individuals and an absence of purchasing power within
communities. This also affects the District Assembly’s revenue base.
Inland fish farming, although it exists, is under-developed in the District with

only a small number of ponds used (approximately 64) (EDP, 2012).
The seasonality of fishing is due, at least in part, to the low-cost low-

mechanised techniques that leave fishermen at the mercy of the elements. The
EDP highlights the need to introduce scientific methods and updated
technology to improve fishing catches.
In keeping with the District’s development policy, seasonality of fishing and

farming and related unemployment could be addressed by creating
opportunities for employment through promotion of small/medium scale,
labour-intensive, rural enterprises. These are potential areas for consideration
as alternative livelihood strategies for the Project’s LRP.1
(1) Rural Enterprise Prorammes (REP) exist in various parts of Ghana. For example, small-scale entrepreneurs in the
municipality of Komenda-Edina-Eguafo-Abrem have been assisted by the REP through the provision of tools including
welding machines, hairdressing equipment, electric sewing machines and vulcanizing machines to assist in developing the
sector and growing the local economy. In the Upper East Region of the country, Rural Technology Facilities have been
established to support the transfer of appropriate technology to farmers, agro-processors, metal-based artisans and other
micro and small entrepreneurs in the area and its adjoining districts. They will also offer apprenticeship training to
unemployed youth in viable artisanal trades.

5-23
5.5.4 Education
The 1992 Constitution of Ghana prescribes that basic education shall be free,
compulsory and available to all. Basic education is comprised of primary
school (six years) and Junior High School (JHS) (three years). Secondary level
education is comprised of Senior High School (SHS) (three years) and tertiary
education (usually four years). Prior to attending basic education, children
are encouraged to attend two years of kindergarten, although there is no law
prescribing this.
Schools are predominantly run by the state, however there are also a number
that are private or run by faith-based organisations. Although government
basic education is freely available and is paid for via the State’s capitation
grant, there are a number of additional charges for which parents are
responsible including Parent Teacher Association (PTA) levies, uniforms,
exam printing fees and purchase of exercise books, notebooks and occasional
textbooks. Much concern has been expressed in the media over the past few
years about the exploitation of parents through the levy system. It is difficult
therefore to provide specific figures for the costs highlighted above but these
seem to vary between ¢30-90 for PTA levies and text books costing from
approximately ¢2 to ¢30 depending on the level of the text book
(Ghanaweb.com, 2012). In many families these fees, though limited, make
school attendance too expensive to manage so only approximately 76 percent
of primary school aged children are enrolled in primary schools.
Education Facilities
There are currently 1,320 primary schools in the Western Region, of which
1,240 are public and 80 are private. The Ministry of Education’s policy states
that there should be a basic school within five km of a community. Thus,
these schools are fairly evenly distributed across ten of the Region’s Districts.
Ellembelle District education facilities are presented in Table 5.9 and the
enrolment of pupils (by gender) in the District is shown in Table 5.10
Table 5.9 Educational Facilities in Ellembelle District
Facility Number in District

Pre-school 73
Primary school 74
JHS 45
SHS 4
Technical/Vocational 2
Special school (Eikwe) 1
Source: EDP, 2012.
Table 5.10 Ellembelle School Enrolment by Gender
Category of School Enrolment

5-24
Category of School Enrolment
Boys Girls Total
Pre-school 3,383 3,450 6,833
Primary 7,158 6,589 13,744
JHS 2,532 2,100 4,632
Source: EDP, 2012.
There are 694 JHS and only 42 SHS in the Region. Approximately 40 percent
of these are found in Ahanta West. As a result some pupils have to travel up
to 30 km to reach the nearest SHS, provided they can get one of the limited
boarding spaces available. Many children, particularly those from the rural
areas, are therefore unable to access education especially SHS due to distance
and affordability.
In the Ellembelle District, there are 73 kindergartens, 74 primary schools, 45

JHS, two SHS and one tertiary institution.
Literacy
The current rate of literacy is approximately 57.9 percent (Ghana National

Census 2000). According to Regional information published on the Ghana
Government website, the level of literacy in the Western Region is 58.2
percent, with females (47.9 percent) recording a lower proportion compared to
males (68.0 percent). Nearly 64.3 percent of those currently in school are at
the primary level, while 21.3 percent are in JHS. This highlights a very high
attrition rate between primary and JHS levels. Several reasons could account
for this including the unavailability of JHS within many rural localities,
resulting in pupils having to travel ten kilometres or more to the nearest
school. Other important factors are affordability and poor infra-structural
facilities. Additional explanations for high drop-out rates highlight the
abundance of natural resources and fisheries in the Region, creating the
perception that it is easy for people to access employment without an
education. In the past, and to a lesser degree now, children were expected to
play a larger role in household economic activities, including agriculture and
fishing and so less priority was placed on education.
The socio-economic risks associated with the lack of accessible educational

facilities read in conjunction with the high level of illiteracy in the District
paints a challenging picture for the education and future of the 43 percent 0-14
age cohort in Ellembelle as well as for the planned development of the
District. The government has recognised the importance of this issue and the
focus on education is apparent in a number of National to District policies and
programmes.
In response to this, there have been a number of government and NGO-led

initiatives for the improvements in the educational system in Ghana. A
summary of these are presented in Box 5.3.

5-25
Box 5.3 Educational Initiatives in Ghana
There have been notable improvements in the quality of education in Ghana due to a number of
government and NGO initiatives. Government initiatives include:
National Education Strategy Plan (2003 – 2015)

The National Education Strategy Plan (ESP), in conjunction with the Ghana Poverty Reduction
Strategy (GPRS) has increased spending in 53 districts, and recognised that a large number of
children remain out of school and that children living in hard to reach areas should be
supported through more innovative programmes. The ESP is also designed to target vulnerable
groups including children with special needs, children living in areas of extreme poverty, out of
school children and girls (Caseley-Hayford, 2004).
The Agenda for Shared Growth and Accelerated Development for a Better Ghana
The Agenda recognises education as a cornerstone of achieving a “better Ghana”, and strives to
improve education through the roll out of various initiatives such as increase in the capitation
grant, free uniforms, free exercise books, expansion of school feeding programme, full tuition
fees for teachers pursuing further studies, replacing schools under trees, revamping collapsed
science resource centres and a reduction in SHS duration to ensure that the needed classroom,
dormitory, library, dining and assembly halls are in place.
5.5.5 Health
The Ghanaian healthcare system is governed through the Ghana Ministry of

Health (MoH), which is divided in two: The Ghana Health Service (GHS) and
the Teaching Hospitals (TH). The MoH is responsible for policy formulation,
monitoring and evaluation, resource mobilisation and regulation of health
services delivery. The GHS oversees services and the TH oversees training of
health professionals.
Following extensive consultation internally and with international health

NGOs, the GoG established the National Health Insurance Scheme (NHIS) in
2003. The mission of the NHIS is the following:
“to ensure equitable universal access for all residents of Ghana to an

acceptable quality of essential health services without out-of-pocket
payment being required at the point of service use” (Ghana Ministry of
Health. 2004).
Although the law now requires every Ghanaian resident to enrol in one of
three NHI schemes, with free membership for the elderly, most citizens
cannot afford to pay monthly for the scheme 1, as many people in Ghana are
unemployed (approximately 11 percent) or are involved in subsistence-based
activities. Thus the security of access to medicines and facilities continues to
be undermined.
(1) The National Health Insurance Council imposes a national minimum and maximum "annual premium" of ¢7 - ¢48
respectively that every consumer has to pay based on their economic status. The premium is paid to the District Mutual
Schemes.

5-26
Health Care Facilities
The public health service is offered through a hierarchy of hospitals, health

centres, maternity homes and clinics including Community-based Health
Planning and Services (CHPS) compounds. There are primary, secondary and
tertiary facilities organised at community, sub-district, district, regional and
national levels. Community and sub-district levels provide primary care, with
district and regional hospitals providing secondary health care (Figure 5.6).
Approximately 90 percent of the population in the Region is within a five km

radius of a medical facility but, in 2000, the doctor patient ratio across the
Region was 1:18,500. In addition, one of the main challenges facing the
provision of medical services is the general lack of ambulances exacerbated by
poor road infrastructure.
Figure 5.6 Health Care System in Ghana
Traditional Healers and Practitioners
The use of traditional healers is common in Ghana and is also recognised by

the GHS as part of the CHPS. In most Districts there is a traditional healer
within a ten kilometre radius. The Department of Health offers basic training
to interested traditional healers such as first aid, safe delivery of babies,
identifying signs of anaemia and good hygiene for the mother and
midwife (Traditional Healer, April 2012).

5-27
Common Illnesses and Associated Issues
The most common illness affecting Ghana’s population is malaria. Others are
mostly water-borne such as diarrhoea and typhoid. In addition, Acute
Respiratory Infection (ARI) colloquially referred to as “the cough” is common
in all communities.
In Ghana, malaria is reported to account for approximately 45 percent of all

hospital admissions and is the leading cause of death amongst young
children. As throughout Ghana, it is extremely common in the Western
Region, with large areas of stagnant water serving as permanent mosquito
breeding sites. According to the UN’s IRIN Humanitarian News and Analysis,
“World Health Organisation studies show that sleeping under a bed net
is the best way to avoid malaria, but many families cannot afford to take
such a precaution. In the markets of Ghana, an insecticide-treated bed net
(ITN) can cost between US $6 and $13 – far beyond the budget of most
people in a country where nearly 80 percent of the population live on less
than $2 a day”1.
The Ghanaian government, in tackling malaria, is subsidising treated bed-nets

which are then sold for under 2 USD to malaria-vulnerable groups, like
pregnant women and mothers with children under age five. Thirty-five
percent of Ghana's population of 20 million people now sleep under treated
bed nets – a tenfold increase compared with 2002 figures. However this figure
is still 25 percent below the targeted 60 percent usage set by 44 African heads
of state in 2000.
There are several local and international organizations working alongside or

independently of government in anti-malarial programmes in the country. All
acknowledge the social and economic impacts of the disease and are working
to counter it through inside spraying of insecticides, the distribution of cheap
treated bed nets and educate people on the use of nets as well as other
precautionary measures.
Aside from malaria, low levels of sanitation in the Region and the District
result in high occurrence of related infections including diarrhoea, typhoid,
cholera, dysentery and gastritis.
The ten top causes of mortality for the Ellembelle District for 2011 are
presented in Table 5.11.
Table 5.11 Top ten causes of Outpatient Morbidity in Ellembelle District, 2011
Diagnosis Total Percent

1 Malaria 106935 36.5
(1) IRIN Humanitarian News and Analysis website:

http://www.irinnews.org/InDepthMain.aspx?InDepthId=10&ReportId=57929&Country=Yes

5-28
Diagnosis Total Percent
2 Other ARI 34927 11.9
3 Rheumatism and joint pains 21499 7.3
4 Diarrhoeal diseases 17685 6.0
5 Skin diseases & ulcers 17083 5.8
6 Pregnancy & related complications 5883 2.0
7 Intestinal worms 5704 1.9
8 Acute eye infection 3946 1.2
9 Sexually Transmitted Infections 3195 1.1
10 Gynaecological condition 2809 1.0
All others 75374 25.7
Total new cases 295040 100
Source: Ellembelle District Health Services Directorate, 2012
Infant and Maternal Health
There are significant challenges for women in the Western Region with
respect to pregnancy and associated complications and even maternal
morbidity. Long distances between where pregnant or birthing women live
and maternity health facilities, together with the poor transport infrastructure
and limited availability of vehicles in the District, exacerbate many of these
complications. As a result, the Regional Director implemented the PROMISE
(Promoting Maternal and Infant Survival Excellence) as described below in
Box 5.4.
Box 5.4 The PROMISE Programme
In 2009 the Regional Health Director initiated the PROMISE programme to address maternal
and infant mortality. Stakeholder meetings were held with all stakeholders as the programme
was centered on community involvement. It was rolled out through 12 “Promise Drivers”,
through which every stakeholder was tasked to undertake particular health improvement
activities.
It is notable that from the time of implementation until the end of 2011 the
number of maternal deaths in the District dropped from 12 to six and then to
three (Ellembelle District Health Services Directorate, 2012). Though these
numbers are small the reality of a 75 percent reduction in maternal deaths is
significant.
HIV/ AIDS and other STIs
In 2010, Ghana’s HIV/AIDS infection rate was recorded as 1.7 percent, the
lowest rate in West Africa. The prevalence rate was reported to have dropped
from three percent in 2004 to 2.7 percent in 2005 and to 1.7 percent in 2010. In
2004 the government developed a National HIV/AIDS and other Sexually
Transmitted Infection (STI) Policy, as well as a National HIV/AIDS Strategic
Framework (2006 – 2010) and a five-year Strategic Plan of Work (2006 to 2010).
In spite of these policies and strategies and a declining National infection rate,
incidences of HIV/AIDS are said to be on the increase in the Region. During

5-29
Project stakeholder engagement, medical professionals in the larger centres
and towns reported that HIV is becoming more prevalent. However the
stigma around HIV discourages people from testing and figures are therefore
under-reported. Health professionals said that HIV infection rates in women
are higher than in men. The causes were attributed to be multiple sexual
partners and trading sex for livelihoods, as well as an influx of infected
foreigners.
Most health centres do not test for HIV or supply Anti-retrovirals (ARVs) and
do not have trained HIV counselors. People are thus referred to the larger
hospitals for any HIV-related treatments. At larger hospitals ARVs, in the
form of injections, are reported to be widely available and highly subsidized
by government, costing only ¢ 5 per shot.
Prevalence of HIV/ AIDS in Ellembelle (1)

The HIV/AIDS prevalence rate of 14.8 percent for the Ellembelle District at
the end of 2008 was more than four times the National average of 3.2 percent.
It is worth noting that these are conservative figures as they cover only the
cases reported at hospitals. With the limited access to medical facilities
coupled with the high illiteracy rate and the fear of stigmatisation, the real
extent of the problem may be under estimated. Table 5.12 below presents
figures from Eikwe and Axim hospitals, which are the two large hospitals
closest to the Ellembelle District communities.
Table 5.12 HIV Cases by Age Group, Ellembelle District
Age 2004 2005 2008

Male Female Total Male Female Total Male Female Total
0 – 11 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 0
months
1 – 4 years 1 0 1 1 4 5 4 8 12
5 – 15 4 7 11 4 7 11 10 13 23
years
16 – 45 125 134 259 83 143 226 359 319 678
years
46 – 60 10 20 30 17 16 33 46 49 95
years
60+ 20 52 72 2 4 6 8 14 22
TOTAL 160 213 373 107 176 283 427 403 830
Source: Regional Health Directorate: Western Region, Half Year Review, 2010
(1) HIV prevalence data has been collected by CRC in some of the communities in the Ellembelle District. While a
commitment was made by CRC to provide this information to the Project Team, the information was unfortunately not
made available, even after several requests. 2008 District information has therefore been used in this section of the Report
and no further analysis of the figures has been accessible.

5-30
The risks of infection for Ellembelle District residents are heightened by their
close proximity to Cote d’Ivoire, which has a 3.4 percent HIV prevalence
(University of California, San Francisco, 2009). Risk are also increased due to
the regular interactions between individuals migrating in both directions
because of the seasonal influx of migrant fishermen and farm labourers into
the Ellembelle District and the migration to Cote d’Ivoire by local residents in
search of jobs and to sell agricultural produce.
Efforts by the Population Advocacy Team, at addressing the problem have so

far been limited to publicity campaigns, forums, seminars to sensitize various
target groups on responsible behaviour and safe sex. There is also a Ellembelle
District Aids Committee under the District Response Initiative. The activities
of NGOs like the Ransom Foundation and End-Time Restoration Ministry
have improved HIV/AIDS awareness through Voluntary Counselling and
Testing (VCT).
Lack of funding for HIV/AIDS Programmes in the District has constrained

efforts at addressing the challenge. However, as the problem threatens to
impact on District development planning and implementation, the Ellembelle
District Administration plans to approach its development partners and other
Agencies, as well as the Ghana Aids Response Project Fund (GARFUND) to
raise funds to address the issue.
It will be important for the Project to be aware of HIV/Aids programmes in

the area and to partner relevant groups in addressing the risks exacerbated by
the Project’s activities.
5.5.6 Vulnerable Groups and Human Trafficking
Understanding vulnerability in the Project environment requires an

awareness of groups who might be particularly vulnerable as a result of the
Project, or deemed vulnerable by Regional and District authorites. These
would include the elderly, children, women (particularly female-headed
households), disabled people, orphans etc. This will be discussed in Section
5.9.5, under the local socio-economic description. It is, however, also
important to highlight the risk of human trafficking which is considered
prevalent in Ghana and exacerbated by poverty and increased levels of
migration. Because of the relationship between ports and increased human
trafficking it is useful to get a better understanding of the potential risks
triggered by the Project in the context of current trafficking within Ghana.
Human trafficking is described by the United Nations Office on Drugs and

Crime (UNODC) as:
“an act of recruiting, transporting, transferring, harbouring or receiving

a person through a use of force, coercion, or other means, for the purpose
of exploiting them” (Central Press Newspaper, 29 April 2012).

5-31
In Ghana, trafficking is prohibited by the Human Trafficking Act (Act 694 of
2005), Human Trafficking Amendment Act (2009) and the Draft Human
Trafficking Regulations of 2011 (Box 5.5 presents a definition of human
trafficking).
Box 5.5 Definition of Human Trafficking
The Ghanaian Human Trafficking Act (Act 694 of 2005) defines human trafficking as the
recruitment, transportation, transfer, harbouring, trading or receipt of persons within and
across national borders by the use of threats, force or other forms of coercion, abduction, fraud,
deception the abuse of power or exploitation of vulnerability or giving or receiving payment
and benefits to achieve consent. Placement for sale, bonded placement, temporary placement
and placement as service where exploitation by another person is the motivating factor are also
considered trafficking.
Exploitation is defined as including prostitution and other forms of sexual exploitation, forced
labour or services, practices similar to slavery or the removal of organs.
Where children are trafficked, the consent of the child, parents or guardian of the child cannot
be used as a defence in prosecution under this Act.
Source: Human Trafficking Act
Trafficking is recognised as a problem within the Western Region. The

Commission for Human Rights and Administrative Justice (CHRAJ) conducts
sensitisation, radio sensitisation and the education of children about
trafficking and human rights. The Ministry of Women and Children
(MOWAC) has been operating education programs for several years, training
law enforcement, judiciary and prosecutors on human trafficking. The issue is
seen to be so significant that in March 2010 MOWAC launched the trafficking
database.
In spite of various legislative instruments and organisations working to

counter trafficking in Ghana, incidents in the country are high. The majority
of trafficked persons are children, and most of the trafficking is domestic.
However adults are also trafficked and Ghana is regarded as a key origin,
transit and destination country for internationally trafficked women and
children.
The majority of trafficked children originate from the poorer areas of Ghana in
the North, the Volta Region in the South, and Sekondi, Takoradi in the West
(ECPAT International, 2008: p 13), with poverty-stricken parents often selling
their children to traffickers for minimal amounts. According to Ghana’s
Regional News, factors that contribute to the practice of parents selling their
children as labourers include poverty, illiteracy, a culture of apprenticeship,
ignorance, unemployment, misplacement of priority and poor parenting
(Regional News of Thursday, 12 April 2012).
Drug trafficking is also on the increase in West Africa with growing

government and international concerns (VibeGhana.com, 2012). Trafficking of

5-32
both drugs and humans is often linked to increased urbanisation and the
opening up of markets in previously undeveloped areas as well as being
linked particularly to the presence of ports or harbours. Although the nature
of the OST will mean that the port is not used commercially it is likely,
nevertheless, to draw people to the area whose intentions are not legal. In a
country where trafficking is known to be a problem the Project needs to be
cognisant of these risks both to its operations, employees and to the local
communities.
5.6 NATIONAL, REGIONAL AND DISTRICT UTILITIES, INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES
The following section presents the provision of infrastructure and services

with particular emphasis on areas of strength and difficulty, which may have
implications for the Project.
5.6.1 Water
There are three major sources of drinking water namely, piped (inside,
outside, tanker supply), well (well, borehole) and natural (spring, river,
stream, lakes, rainwater, dugout) within Ghana. In the Western Region, 32
percent of houses have access to treated piped water with 8.5 percent having
this available within their dwellings. The highly urbanised districts have
almost 100 percent availability of, or accessibility to, piped water. This is in
contrast to rural districts where over 60 percent of households use rivers,
streams, wells, spring or rainwater as their main source of water.
5.6.2 Sanitation
The District has an inadequate waste management system with limited waste
handling facilities and equipment. It has only two waste disposal sites for
both solid and liquid wastes at Aiyinase. Approximately 70 percent of
Ellembelle households do not have toilets. Where facilities do exist, the most
common types are Kumasi Ventilated-Improved Pit(1) (KVIP), pit latrine or
bucket/pan systems. Where no facilities exist, people make use of the
beaches, outlying bushes and gutters.
Ellembelle District has seen some improvement in water services over the
years with an increase in the number of facilities and coverage. Table 5.13
outlines the Ellembelle water and sanitation infrastructure improvement plan
for 2010 to 2013. The implementation of the plan is the responsibility of the
EDA.
(1) The KVIP is a twin-pit VIP latrine, which allows the contents of one pit to compost while the other pit is in use. By the
time the second pit is full, the contents of the first pit should be fully composted, and can therefore be removed manually
and spread.

5-33
Table 5.13 Ellembelle District - 2010 Water and Sanitation Facilities and 2013
projections
2010/TOTAL 2013/TOTAL
Water
1.Hand-dug-well 105 189
2.Borehole 9 70
3.Pipe System 6 9
Toilet Facility
1.KVIP 43 79
2.VIP 426 1,040
3.WC 213 369
Source: EDP 2012
5.6.3 Waste Disposal
In the Western Region the most common way of disposing of household

waste is to dump it at specified dumping sites or in the absence of such sites,
ad hoc disposal on open land. Approximately 60 percent of all households in
all the Districts use a specified public dump while an additional 29 percent
use an unauthorised dumping sites. Only two percent of households within
Ellembelle District have their rubbish collected by a waste removal services,
Zoomlion and local authorities for disposal. Zoomlion and ZOIL operate as a
waste disposal and beach-clearing agent in parts of Ellembelle. Burning and
burying of waste accounts for about a tenth of household waste disposal.
5.6.4 Fuel Sources
Electricity and kerosene lamps are used as the main sources of lighting in the
Western Region, providing about 99 percent. In the urban areas, the majority
of households use electricity while in the rural districts kerosene lamps are the
main source of lighting. Rural households are also gradually gaining access to
electricity through work carried out by the Electricity Company of Ghana
(ECG). The Ellembelle Development Plan suggests that the low electricity
coverage in the District could be addressed through the presence of the ECG
in the District and by support from Central Government for a Rural
Electrification Programme.
Charcoal and fuel wood are the main sources of cooking fuel in the Region
(even for quite a sizeable number of urban dwellers), however liquid
petroleum gas (LPG) and coconut husks are also used in parts of the District.
5.6.5 Transport and Road Infrastructure
The Ghana Private Road Transport Union (GPRTU) and other transport
organisations provide transport services within the districts in the Region. In
small communities, private taxis and small buses owned by private
individuals are also operational. The road network in the Western Region is
limited and the conditions of the roads can be very poor, particularly in the
rainy season.

5-34
Ellembelle District road network consists of 154 km of trunk roads, of which
64 km are metalled. The metalled trunks form part of the Trans-West Africa
Highway. The rest of the trunk roads are gravel or earth-surfaced. Apart
from the trunk roads there are smaller feeder roads, most of which are in poor
condition.
Ports/ Harbours
The Port of Takoradi is the closest port to the Project Area. It handles both
domestic and transit cargoes, approximately 600 vessels annually, which is 37
percent of the total national seaborne traffic. The Port of Takoradi also has a
fishing harbour located at Sekondi and there is a fishing harbour in Axim.
Other ship traffic in the area is associated with ports such as Abidjan (Côte
d’Ivoire) and Lagos (Nigeria).
Airport
The Takoradi Airport is a military airbase that allows civilian flights. It is the
only one in the Region. The airport has one runway, and there is at least one
scheduled domestic flight landing and taking off from the airport daily.
Airlines operating from Takoradi include Fly540 and City.
5.6.6 Telecommunications
Two main types of telephone systems are in operation in the country. These
are fixed line and mobile telephone systems. Other systems being operated
are wireless, radiotelephone and satellite communication systems.
Vodafone Ghana Telecom Company operates over 95 percent of the fixed line
telephones in the country. In the Western Region there are 0.3 telephones per
100 persons, which is below the national average of 0.7. Mobile telephone
operators MTN, Vodafone, Ghana operators of Vodafone, Tigo, Kasapa and
Zain, extensively cover the Western Region. The Region has the second
highest locality coverage by MTN, which is the largest mobile telephone
system in the country.
5.7 THE LOCAL SOCIO-ECONOMIC AND CULTURAL SETTING
Sections 5.2 to 5.6 have outlined the national, regional and district level
environments in which the current Project would be situated. This sets a
backdrop of the existing socio-economic conditions in the area as well as the
short/ medium-term planning frameworks (the Agenda for Shared Growth and
Accelerated Development; the Western Region Spatial Development Framework;
and the Ellembelle District Assembly Medium-Term Development Plan
highlighted in Table 5.2) with which authorities intend to increase
development and improve people’s quality of life.

5-35
The following section of the Report describes the socio-economic and cultural
environment, as it currently exists, in the three towns most directly affected by
the proposed Project, Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo. The focus of the
description is to present information deemed most significant in relation to
the Project and to social planning that could take place around it. There are
large similarities amongst the communities and therefore in describing the
environment a general description will be given and any areas of important
difference will be drawn out as appropriate. Most of the information is based
on comments and descriptions provided by local residents during focus group
engagements, while other comments are based on observations and
extrapolations by the social research team.
Box 5.6 provides an overview of the key socio-economic and cultural

characteristics of the Study Area.
Box 5.6 Key Socio-economic and Cultural Characteristics of Study Area
All three communities have long histories of settlement in the area dating back over 600
years.
There are strong traditional structures operating in the Study Area with the Paramount
Chief (Awulae) based in Atuabo being respected and influential.
The three towns in the Study Area are relatively small with populations ranging from
about 500 – 1500. The population numbers are generally stable with seasonal migration for
fisheries.
There is a large cohort of 0-14 years old in the area with a very small percentage of
residents over the age of 64.
There are more women than men resident locally.
There are a mix of religions including Christianity, Islam and Traditional and religious
tolerance is high.
Nzema is the dominant language spoken in the Study Area. A small number of Fulane
speakers live in the area.
Towns are laid out in a linear fashion, which would allow for relatively easy service
provision and management.
5.7.1 History
According to the Paramount Chief, Awulae Amehere Kpanyinle II, in Atuabo,

the history of the Study Area dates back to the 13th Century when ancestors of
the current inhabitants migrated from the northern part of Ghana through the
Ashanti area, then through the Aowin and the Wassa areas before settling
along the coast, including in the Atuabo area. The Nzema area, which now
includes the lower Axim, Upper Axim, Nsein, Ajomoro and Gwira traditional
areas, stretched from the land between the Ankobra River in the east and the
Tano River/lagoon on the Ghana-Cote d’Ivoire border in the west. Since
these were pre-colonial times and no national borders existed, people/clans
moved fairly freely, inhibited only by the physical environment and conflict
with other groups over territories already settled. This explains why today
Nzema people are settled on both side of the Ghana-Cote d’Ivoire border, and
are still connected by kinship ties.

5-36
In early times what today is Eastern Nzema (with Atuabo as capital) and
Western Nzema (with Beyin as capital) were united under the rule of King
Kaku Acka until 1800. However a set of complex circumstances, including the
abdication by one king to make way for another based on matrilineal
inheritance practices, the division of the kingdom into two smaller parts, a
failed attempt at reunification and resultant protracted clan and territorial
wars (including against colonial powers), has led to the current day makeup
of the area.
According to Anokyi elders, settlement in the Anokyi area began with the
arrival of a woman, Ebelamgbane Alonwabo (1) , her brother and their family
about 600 years ago. They were predominantly salt miners and so settled
about half a kilometre inland from where Anokyi is today. This location gave
them access to fresh water all year round (the marsh area and Lake Ayilela)
for their salt production. Later, a second group of people arrived and settled
in the area, farming the land and later attempting to claim the Anokyi land as
theirs. A dispute ensued and after a decision from the Awulae in Atuabo (in
the 1950s) the descendants of the original salt miners were granted title. A
descendant of the original woman who came to the area was declared Chief
and his name was Anokyi.
Establishing a sense of history in the Project area is useful in trying to

understand the communities’ sense of belonging and connection to their area.
One elder at an introductory meeting in the Atuabo Palace emphasised, “…no
one here knows where we came from – we don’t know. We are of this earth”. Pointing
to the oldest man in the meeting he said, “He was born from his mother here”.
This connection to “place” was evident in meetings with elders at Anokyi and
Asemdasuazo as well.
5.7.2 Local Authority Structures
Section 5.2 above laid out the administrative structures within the country for
both government and traditional institutions.
Traditional Leadership
The Nzema, who are the dominant ethnic group in the Study Area, are made
up of seven clans with the dog as the symbol of the royal clan. Awulae
Amehere Kpanyinle II is from this clan and is the Paramount Chief of Eastern
Nzema and all three towns in the Study Area fall within his stool.
The Paramount Chief of the Eastern Nzema Traditional Area exerts control
over the divisional and sub-chiefs (in the Study Area these are chiefs of the
communities of Anokyi and Asemdasuazo). The Queen Mother is mainly
responsible for selecting a new chief, and in the cases of both Anokyi and
Asemdasuazo the sitting sub-chiefs are relatively new to their roles. The
(1) The significance of noting the woman’s arrival is that, in a matrilineal society, she becomes the woman through whose
line inheritance is established

5-37
traditional structure is hierarchical and inheritance is by matrilineal descent.
Each lineage forms a community signified by a stool and has possession of a
particular plot of land. A lineage is further divided into families. This
concept of family (although, as with all society, in an ongoing state of change)
is made up of a group of people who trace ancestry to one common female
ancestor and each family has a head (abusuapanyin).
Traditional identity in the Study Area, based on these lineages, is strong and
communities reflect a sense of unity as a result. However, there is also an
openness to outsiders as shown when refugees have sought shelter in the
towns. Although most community members in the Study Area emphasized
the limited influx of newcomers to the area, where this does occur any
homesteads or small communities settled by strangers fall under the
jurisdiction of the sub-divisional chiefs and are controlled by the town or
community heads (Adikro). This will be important to recognise when
significant numbers of people begin to migrate to the Study Area as a result of
the Project. The capacity of individual chiefs to manage such an influx may be
limited.
In each of the three towns there is a traditional council that assists the Chief to
administer his area of jurisdiction. The Council will normally be made up of
at least the Chief, the Queen Mother(1), various family heads and the linguist.
The Council is the supreme organisation of the stool and must approve all
decisions taken by the Chief. This traditional structure is used to deal with
family and land disputes and as well as with town development issues.
There is a strong sense of culture in the Study Area and the Awulae is held in
high esteem as a political leader and as the symbol of culture and identity of
the lineage structuring the community, including responsible for evoking the
goodwill of ancestors on behalf of the living subjects. Challenges to the chiefs
are not uncommon, particularly in more urban environments and amongst the
youth. Given the “absolutist” (Akrong, 2006) nature of the traditional
structure there is often little or no space to question decisions or leadership
styles and this sometimes results in suspicion and rumours of corruption –
particularly in situations where large developments are planned for an area.
However, during all engagements with community members in the Study
Area there were no suggestions of a challenge to the Awulae. Rather, people
emphasised a confidence in his leadership while highlighting the importance
of transparency in decisions taken around the Project, moving into the future.
Thus, while recognising and valuing existing traditional decision-making
structures, community members (both men and women) expressed their
expectation to be active participants in the Project and related planning
activities.
Awulae Amehere Kpanyinle II is passionate about the development of the area

at large and has robust opinions on the proposed Project as providing both
(1) The Queen Mother is not necessarily the biological mother of the Chief but is a member of the matrilineal line. Her role
in the system is to keep an eye on the social conditions of the community.

5-38
opportunities and risks for his people. As cultural custodian he is concerned
about the impact that speedy development and the associated influx of
outsiders will have on the “small town mentality” in the area. However, he
believes that communities must begin to prepare for these changes so that
they can meet the newcomers “head on” and not be overtaken by them or the
changes. This, he believes requires timely preparation, particularly for the
school children who will need to compete with in-migrants on a level playing
field.
Similarly, regarding accommodating newcomers, the Awulae believes that the

towns can accommodate “as many people as can fit” and that people will be
welcome as long as they follow the appropriate procedures to access land or
accommodation for rent. This means that newcomers (employees or job
seekers and entrepreneurs) must approach the Chief and elders of the
community to be allocated land. The Awulae also emphasised the need for
traditional authorities to engage with Regional and District planning
authorities to prevent an uncontrolled and uncontrollable settlement situation
in which accommodation, drainage and sanitation and an appropriate
planning system would be developed to prevent the emergence of a squatter
settlement close to the communities. Discussion with the District Planning Co-
ordination Unit have highlighted the intention to develop Aiyinase as a
growth node in the immediate future and to allow for expanded settlement in
communities along the coastal dune system over time.
Local Administration
Even though mobilising people for development is the role of the traditional
leaders, this has been largely taken over by government structures through
the activity of District Assemblies and Unit Committees. The District
Assembly acts as the arm of government that develops and manages projects,
sometimes in collaboration with chiefs and their subjects. Mobilising subjects
for development and communal labour is increasingly becoming the work of
Assemblymen and members of the Unit Committees.
In Atuabo the Assemblyman, who represents the District Assembly on the

ground, assists in co-ordination of all three Study Area towns. He is an
elected representative and as a local resident is well connected to issues on the
ground. His responsibilities include educating local residents on government
policies and District Assembly programmes and projects, supervising and
advising the Unit Committee, lobbying for projects on behalf of his
community, and initiating and taking part in the communal and development
activities. He is also well connected to the Awulae and elders and this should
help to promote integrated planning and implementation in the Study Area.
Residents in all three towns perceive the structures of administration to be

open to favouritism. Therefore they need to be more vigorously transparent
in relation to the Project if benefits are to be fairly shared amongst the towns
and individuals and if conflicts resulting from perceptions, if not realities, are
to be avoided.

5-39
5.7.3 Demographic Characteristics
Population
The 2010 National Population Census data was not yet available at the time of
completing this report, however information about the projected populations
from 2000 – 2012 was accessed from personal communications with the
Ellembelle District Assembly (2012). This information is presented in Table
5.14.
Table 5.14 Population of Affected Communities
Community Total Population Female Male

projected 2000 - 2012
Atuabo 1419 765 654
Anokyi 874 438 436
Asemdasuazo 558 292 226
Source: SRC LRP Fieldwork, June 2012
The towns in the study area are relatively small within the context of the
District and do not feature in the top 16 communities by population.
According to the “Characterisation of Coastal Communities” report of 2010, of
those 16 communities the smallest had a population of approximately 1800 in
2010. Atuabo is the largest of the three communities in the Study Area and
today has a population of 1,419 residents. Anokyi’s population is 874 and
Asemdasuazo is estimated at 558 (SRC LRP Fieldwork, June 2012).
Populations in all three towns are predominantly stable, limited to seasonal

influx at present, and residents say that they know everyone in the
community and would recognise newcomers. However, based on the
Western Region Strategic Development Framework as well as the Agenda
document, the population in the area is expected to grow dramatically as a
result of the Project and other developments planned in the area. Figures
from the WRSDF (Draft 1, 2012) estimate a ten-fold population growth in
Atuabo between 2012 and 2033 from the current population of 1882 to 16318 ie
a growth of 14436 people over 21 years. However, given the nature of project-
induced migrations worldwide it is conceivable that a large portion of this
growth would happen in a very short space of time as this and other projects
are initiated. The population growth would be the result of direct
employment of skilled labour, an influx of job seekers and entrepreneurs as
well as a small number of community members returning home in response to
development opportunities.
Age
It is not surprising, based on National statistics, with a median population age

of 21 and a life expectancy of 64, to report that all three communities seem to
exhibit predominantly young populations.

5-40
The age distribution of the communities seem to mirror the District statistics,
suggesting that households comprise approximately 40 percent of children
under the age of 14 or elderly people over 64 (although this last cohort would
be a very small percentage). The remainder of the population in the three
towns would therefore be in the potentially economically active age group.
This highlights the opportunities for development involving residents in the
Study Area provided the level of skills required is locally available.
The definition of elderly in the communities underscores the relatively low

life expectancy. Of the nine Atuabo participants defining themselves as
elderly three were in their late fifties, four in their early to mid-sixties, one was
67 and one person was 74. In many countries people in their fifties or early
sixties would not be seen as elderly whereas in the context of a 64-year life
expectancy this perception is markedly different.
Figure 5.7 Atuabo Elderly Focus Group Meeting
All the participants in the “elderly” group were women, with the exception of
one man who joined the group late. This uneven gender balance between
elderly men and women was easily observable during the fieldwork and
various focus groups emphasised the fact that women live longer than their
male counterparts.

5-41
Figure 5.8 Role of Elderly Women in the Family
At a Farmers & Agro-processors Meeting Atuabo Elderly Focus Group meeting
Community members perceive population growth in the Study Area to be the

result of high birth rates, as opposed to in-migration. Without current census
information this cannot be substantiated although at most meetings there
were several women actively participating while looking after infants or
young children. Beyond the reality of whether high birth rates are fact or not,
lies the communities’ perception of their continuing growth. This is
significant as an indicator of their sense of future, even against the current
reality of out-migration in search of what some residents called “greener
pastures”. The presence of the Project, and other proposed developments in
the area, gives validation to this optimism and many residents feel it will
bring back the young people who have migrated.
Gender
All three towns reported having more women than men in their communities,
and this is confirmed through the SRC LRP fieldwork undertaken in June 2012
(Table 5.14). The slight majority of participants at group meetings were
women, even when meetings were for the youth or farmers and coconut oil
producers. This is in contrast to most other towns in the District where men
outnumber women and was locally reported to be a result of men leaving the
Study Area in search of employment. Women are also said to seek work in
urban areas and even in Cote d’Ivoire but in smaller numbers, and generally if
they are unmarried.
The population figures swell during peak fishing season (July-October) when
migrants from the north of Ghana and even from Cote d’Ivoire come to work
in the area. These migrants are usually men.

5-42
In mixed-gender focus group meetings (particularly with the youth and
farmers) women seemed at first hesitant but were soon confident and
sometimes outspoken in their opinions. On the whole male participants
comfortably accepted these expressions but there were occasional flare-ups
where stereotypic gender roles were verbally invoked to get younger women
to “know their place”. Older women tended to refer historic and quantifiable
questions to men, even if this meant leaving the meeting to go and source a
male response.
In youth meetings in Atuabo and Asemdasuazo participants agreed that

women have more income-earning opportunities as they do a greater variety
of jobs. However men are said to earn more income annually, much of this
during the fishing season. Both men and women believed that there would be
no problem if women were to get access to jobs or even if a woman had a job
and her husband did not. However, when pushed further, both genders
agreed that if the income discrepancy undermined the man’s ability to “look
after his family” or be the main breadwinner, this could create conflict within
families.

5-43
Figure 5.9 Gender Representation at Mixed Interest Focus Groups
Anokyi Farmers and Agro-Processors Asemdasuazo Farmers and Agro-Processors
Atuabo Youth
Ethnicity and Language
All three towns are ethnically largely homogenous with the Nzema being by
far the dominant ethnic group. There are a small number of Fante,
particularly in Atuabo and Anokyi making up three and five percent of the
population respectively (1). The Fante are migrants whose origins are to the
northeast of Cape Coast and in Atuabo, are usually involved in cattle herding
on behalf of Nzema residents.
Nzema is the local language although many people understand Twi. The
ability to speak Twi, and to a larger degree English, is a sign of some level of
literacy. It is therefore older people, and women in particular, who would
(1) Integrated Coastal and Fisheries Governance Initiative for the Western Region of Ghana, Coastal Resources Centre,
University of Rhode Island. (2010). Report on Characterization of Coastal Communities and Shoreline Environments in the Western
Region of Ghana.

5-44
only speak Nzema. The ability to speak Nzema is also emphasised as important
for cultural continuity and older community members felt the language could
be at risk if an influx of outsiders, speaking different languages, results in the
predominant use of Twi or English.
Religion
Prior to the arrival of Christianity in the area all residents practiced traditional
religions in which there is a supreme being who is not directly worshipped;
and lesser gods who are to be found in sacred places like rivers, trees or
mountains and who act as intermediaries between the supreme being and
society. Ancestors and other spirits are also recognised in traditional
religions.
In a focus group meeting with religious leaders/representatives in Atuabo as

well as in general conversations with other focus groups, it is clear that
Christianity is the primary religion practiced in the Study Area. Churches
include Catholic, Methodist and Sacred Action as the largest three, as well as
Pentecostal, Church of Christ and Jehovah’s Witnesses, the latter having the
smallest following. There are small numbers of Muslims in both Atuabo and
Anokyi but not in Asemdasuazo.
The Twelve Apostles, a syncretic denomination reconciling or fusing the

religious beliefs of Christianity and traditional practices, has a strong
following in all three communities. Although there is religious tolerance
across the communities, through conversation with local residents it became
clear that some stigmas exist around people who follow traditional belief
systems and to some degree the Twelve Apostles are seen in this light. People
reported that many traditional practices are looked down on as “uncivilised”,
“uneducated” or somehow shameful. However, if one interrogates this it
becomes clear that even those strongly following monotheistic religions
harbour some traditional beliefs. Practices like “outdooring(1)” (an infant-
naming ceremony that also invokes traditional belief systems around truth
and morality) as well as traditional weddings are steps taken before a child or
two adults enter the church for the Christian ceremony. In fact local priests
will not marry couples that are not already traditionally married.
All three communities welcome the in-migration of people with other

religious beliefs (particularly Christian groupings) as these are expected to
positively influence the local youth and swell membership numbers. People
are also aware that migrants from more urban areas may introduce various
social vices that would challenge religious adherence but, according to a
young religious leader, that the churches are strong enough to guide their
members through these “tests”.
(1) This is a practice in which an elder puts a small amount of salt on an infants lips and tells them “this is salt, don’t call it
pepper” and then does the same thing with pepper. It is part of a ritual that introduces an infant to truth and morality.

5-45
5.7.4 Settlement Patterns
All three towns are laid out in a linear pattern, alongside the main road (Figure
5.10). Most of the shops are located along this, while some are located in the
small lanes between the houses (Figure 5.11). The space behind the houses
usually extends to the beach or bushes. In the case of Asemdasuazo, buildings
on both sides of the road stretch toward bush or field/plantation areas. The
majority of houses are built of local materials such as clay, cane/ bamboo/
raffia, or sandcrete blocks (for walls). The roof is usually made of palm fronds
or corrugated iron. Figure 5.12 shows typical houses found in the Study Area.
Asemdasuazo has noticeably more raffia-constructed houses and this may be
because the town is further from the shore and thus has less access to sand for
brick making. It may also be that there is less money available in the town for
building materials and a higher reliance on locally available natural materials.
All three towns have at least one school along the main road, and much of the
petty trading takes place on the pavements and verges of the road.
Figure 5.10 Town Layouts in the Study Area
Atuabo Anokyi
Asemdasuazo
Source: ERM, April 2012.
This “grid-style” layout of the town points to communities that are easier for
authorities to manage and service than if households were more widely
dispersed. The layout also fosters a sense of community that is sometimes
absent when families live more remotely and where homesteads are
integrated with agricultural lands. In Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo,

5-46
besides very small areas for growing subsistence crops within a household’s
property, all agricultural activities happen outside of the town.
Conversations between the Project and the Awulae have anticipated town
growth where housing and structures expand to the north for Asemdasuazo
and in a westerly and easterly direction along the coastal dune system for both
Atuabo and Anokyi respectively. This consideration for growth takes the
Project’s footprint into account. Development planning between the District
Planning office, consultants focused on “oil for development” projects and
directly affected government agencies and chiefs is underway. This will
include the development of detailed Structure Plans and Local Plans for both
Jomoro and Ellembelle aimed at anticipating and managing growth and
development in the area resulting from oil and gas related projects. A large
influx of people to the area will put pressure on the existing facilities,
accommodation and service infrastructure, and planning would need to pre-
empt this influx if the process is to be managed and if a sprawling squatter
settlement pattern is to be avoided.

5-47
Figure 5.11 Settlement Patterns and Trading Structures

5-48
Figure 5.12 Housing in the Study Area
Brick housing Sisal housing (and brick adjacent on left)
Settlement along a main road
5.8 LIVELIHOOD PRACTICES
Household livelihood strategies in the Study Area can be understood as an

ongoing process of negotiation between demands for the household to engage
in cash-generating activities, and demands to engage in food-producing
activities, while maintaining the social relationships that also contribute to
sustainable livelihoods. A range of factors ultimately determines household
activities and priorities in relation to these two general types of demands.
In the Study Area, livelihood practices can be broadly divided into agriculture
and fisheries, natural resource use, petty trading and self-employment,
salaried employment and other livelihood strategies. It must be remembered,
though, that these activities overlap and are consciously used in conjunction
with one another to increase family strengths and survival mechanisms.
Changes to, or the loss of, one activity may have significant implications for

5-49
livelihoods. Box 5.7 provides an overview of the key livelihood characteristics
of the Study Area.
Box 5.7 Key Aspects of the Livelihood Characteristics of the Study Area
Farming, fishing and fish mongering and agro-processing are the key livelihood activities
in all three towns.
Most communities report consuming small amounts of their produce for actual subsistence,
and selling the larger proportion for cash.
The absence of storage facilities necessitates the sale of excess produce – usually resulting
in lower prices based on seasonal supply and demand factors.
Agricultural activities rely on low-tech, manual operations with men involved in clearing
of land and women in planting and harvesting of produce.
Roles in fishing activities are divided along gender lines with men catching the fish and
women processing and selling. This is slightly different with inland “pond” fishing where
women participate as fishers.
Fishermen are finding it increasingly difficult to sustain themselves due to lower fish
catches and challenges associated with fisheries in the region.
Petty trading (small and sometimes informal businesses) is a significant supplementary
economic activity for many residents.
Although no communities spoke of periods of sustained hunger general levels of poverty
are high in the three towns and the involvement of all family members in labour activities,
children included, is common.
There are very few formal employment positions in the Study Area. Where these exist they
are in education, health, District Administration and street and beach cleaning.
Some women secure their livelihoods by using informal sexual relationships.
5.8.1 Agriculture and Fisheries
Anecdotal evidence given by participants in the focus group meetings in the

Study Area suggests that agricultural activities are by far the most important
contributors to livelihoods in each affected town. These include farming,
fishing and agro-processing (eg coconut oil production) and there are slight
variations in the dominance of one activity over another, depending on the
town’s location in relation to the sea, rivers and fertile land.
It’s important to note that this Chapter gives only estimates of the value of
some local produce and reports the farmers’ calculations of production per
unit (land, tree or fish). It does not quantify the value of farming activities to
the communities of Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo. Understanding the
size of plots, catches, productivity and related financial values will be a core
component of the next phase of the study, the LRP planning process.
A seasonal calendar of agricultural activities was developed through the

participation of relevant focus groups in each town and is shown in Table.5.15.
This shows the months of heaviest rains, planting and harvesting activities for
different crops and seasonal fishing activities and understanding the timing of
activities so that loss of access to resources resulting from the Project can be
timed to create least vulnerability. For example, the timing of dredge
activities could take peak fishing season into account and ideally begin
thereafter.

5-50
Table.5.15 Seasonal Calendar for Agricultural Activities
Seasonal Calendar (Atuabo, Asemdasuazo, Anokyi)
Months
Activity
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Dry season
(no planting,
Season resting)
Rainy
Season
Fishing
Fish Mongering
Pre- Soil
planting preparation
Cassava At As
Oil Palm
Pineapple
Ground
Planting Nuts At As
Palm Nuts
Maize At
Tomatoes As
Beans An At
Sugar Cane
Cassava
Oil Palm
Pineapple
Ground
Nuts As An
Palm Nuts
Harvesti (3yrs to
ng mature)
Maize At An
Tomatoes As As As As
Beans
Coconut
(5yrs to bear
fruit)
Note: At (Atuabo), An (Anokyi) and AS (Asemdasuaso),
Key General time

Peak time
Secondary/ minor season
Farming
Almost every household in the towns participates in small-scale and

subsistence agricultural activities(1). Roles are divided along gender lines with
men involved in clearing and preparation of fields and women involved in the
sowing of seeds and in harvesting produce. As confirmed by the fishermen in
each of the towns, the men who are involved in fishing are less available to
(1) As discussed above, the type of access or ownership of the land that an individual or family has will vary according to
the categories of land use and entitlements discussed in Section 1.6 and 1.11 above

5-51
assist in the fields but do participate in agriculture during the low fishing
season.
Cultivation is done manually, mainly because of the cost of mechanisation

and the levels of technical agricultural knowledge in the Study Area. The
sizes of plots therefore reportedly depend on the strength of the individual or
family to work an area. As such, an older person, or a single woman, would
work a smaller piece of land and harvest less produce than a family working
together and this would suggest higher vulnerabilities around food security
for particular groups of people. In addition, some individuals (generally the
elderly or unwell) employ labourers for various activities that they cannot
undertake themselves. The cost of such employment, whether in cash or kind,
reduces the amount of produce or income available to the employer and may
increase vulnerability. At the same time, a farm labourer whose only access to
produce/food depends entirely on his/her employment status is extremely
vulnerable if access to land is taken away.
Soil fertility also plays a significant role in the type and quantity of produce
farmed. Asemdasuazo is seen to have the most fertile soil and higher
productivity in comparison to the more sandy soils of Atuabo and Anokyi,
which are closer to the shore.
Key to agricultural production in the area is rainfall levels, as there are no

irrigation systems in the fields and therefore production is directly dependent
upon the amount of rain in a season. The impact can have implications both
ways with too little rain resulting in low yields and too much rain, at the
wrong time of the harvesting cycle, resulting in crops rotting in the fields.
Crops(1)
The primary agricultural products are cassava, groundnuts, corn, tomatoes,

banana and plantain (FGD Women, Land-users, Leaders, April 2012). All are
used for family consumption as well as for sale. Most planting is done in
March-April before the rainy season in June and July and a second smaller
season of planting takes place in September-October. Cassava and
groundnuts, which are the most common crops, are generally intercropped on
one plot. Groundnuts take about three months to mature and are harvested
twice a year. Cassava takes about a year from planting to first harvesting and
is therefore farmed on a continually rotating basis. For commercial sale,
cassava is harvested when plants are young and tender (for fufu), while they
can be left to grow for over a year and still provide food for subsistence use
(cassava dough, gari and ground cassava flour, kokonte).
Farming is done using slash and burn agriculture and farmers reported
decreasing soil fertility. Some farmers manage to leave one of their plots
fallow and alternate their planting to allow for some soil recovery, but overall
(1) All information presented was gathered during focus group meetings with land-users (farmers, agro-producers and
fishermen) as well as elders and youth in the three affected towns

5-52
fertility rates reportedly reduce as a result of the farming methods and land
pressure in the area.
Figure 5.13 Slash and Burn Agricultural Practice
Figure 5.14 Crops
Cassava in the field Produce traded
Farmers estimated that a cassava plot of 1 pole (1.25 acres/ 0.5 hectares)
produces 300 pieces of cassava, which can be sold at ¢900 (475 USD)(1). One
pole of maize can produce 800 cobs of corn, which if sold fresh for commercial
use costs ¢1.5 – 2 (1.10 USD) per cob. Older corn is dried and ground into
flour for home use.
On top of this staple produce, Asemdasuazo grows bananas and plantains, as

the soil conditions in the area allow for better growth than in the other two
towns. Asemdasuazo farmers also reported selling cassava to residents of
Anokyi and Atuabo, further supporting the perception that this town has
more fertile soils and better agricultural produce. Buyers from Atuabo and
Anokyi travel to Asemdasuazo by foot or occasionally by taxi as there is no
regular transport to the area.
Based on Regional and District data, one would initially expect that the
produce in the Study Area would primarily be used for household
consumption and the small surplus sold to generate income for the household.
However all three towns reported selling significant proportions of their
(1) An approximate exchange rate of ¢1 = 0.53 USD has been used for all calculations

5-53
crops, cassava in particular. One woman in Atuabo said that a 2 acre (0.8
hectares) (FGD Women, Land-users, Leaders, April 2012) plot produced too
much cassava for subsistence consumption alone as “you can’t eat cassava
every day”. The applicability of this situation would depend on the size of a
family, the related home consumption and the value of other components of
its livelihood activities. An Asemdasuazo farmer explained that the small
population size in the town meant that there were more surpluses to sell to
Atuabo, Anokyi and other relatively larger towns.
The sale of their produce is made more difficult by the absence of storage
facilities, particularly cold storage that would allow farmers to manage the
supply of produce for sale. Currently, farmers in all three towns have surplus
produce at a similar time, flooding the local market and keeping prices low.
Transporting produce from the field home, or to the consumer/market is a
difficult operation. People usually carry their produce on their heads in open
buckets or bags and therefore someone’s strength will determine the efficiency
with which this job can be done. Some farmers reported selling produce
directly from their fields, which circumvents transporting it oneself. Poor
roads and limited private and public transport makes getting one’s produce to
market costly and time consuming (the closest large market being Aiyinase
approximately 30 km away). A farmer would need to take a substantial
amount of produce to make the costs of such a return trip worthwhile.
The communities’ perceptions that they have enough food for their own
consumption does point to a general sense of food security in the Study Area.
The sustainability of this security depends on continuing access to land and to
markets.
Figure 5.15 Transportation of crops from the Fields

5-54
Agro-processing(1)
The major cash crops grown in the Study Area and used in agro-processing
are coconuts and oil palm and in addition in Asemdasuazo, raffia palms.
Many residents in all three towns are involved in growing and then
processing the coconuts and palm nuts into oil and in Asemdasuazo, in
tapping the raffia palm to make and sell gin.
There are large coconut plantations in the Study Area and coconut-oil
producers reported gaining access to plantations in two ways. Firstly, a
family can allocate land to one of its heirs to work or secondly, one could
approach the owner of a plantation and ask to work a portion of their land in
return for labour on the remainder of their plantation. It is also possible to
work with a plantation owner in the hope that one will be given a portion of
the land as “payment”. Agro-processing is one of the dominant livelihood
activities in the Study Area and the variations in these access arrangements
are important to understand in order to assess the vulnerabilities of different
types of owner/users in the event of a loss of access.
(1) Agro-processing: turning primary agricultural products into other commodities for market

5-55
Figure 5.16 Coconut Trade
Coconut Plantation
Activities involved in Trading in Coconuts
Working a Coconut Plantation
The plantations in the Study Area are reported to be just under 100 years old.
This accounts for some of the lower yield that owners are experiencing. An
existing plantation requires regular maintenance, sometimes daily, to clear the
bush under the trees. Other produce, such as cassava and groundnuts are
often intercropped with the plantation trees. Harvesting of coconuts can be
done throughout the year and on average every second week. Coconut
farmers in the area do not climb the trees but rather harvest what has fallen.
A 15 acre (6 hectares) plot is said to yield approximately 4,000 – 5,000 coconuts
every two weeks. Peak coconut harvesting happens during the rainy season
where up to 7000 nuts can be collected in the same 15 acre plot.

5-56
The nuts are gathered and the husks are cracked, the liquid thrown away. The
remaining contents (the actual nut) is put into sacks and transported either in
a push-type trolley or on someone’s head. Bulk buyers from as far as Nigeria,
drive to the plantations to collect the nuts. Each part of the coconut has a
financial value. 5,000 husks can be sold for ¢150 (79 USD) and they are used
as stuffing for mattresses and upholstery as well as to make mosquito coils.
They are also used domestically for fires.
Figure 5.17 Trade in un-processed coconuts with buyers from Nigeria
Different people are involved in different stages of the coconut agro-process

such that someone producing and selling coconut oil will buy the nuts and
take them to a mill for processing. The flesh (copra) of the nut is extracted and
then processed to make the coconut oil. Producers in the focus group
meetings, who said they are able to produce about 20 drums of coconut oil per
month, reported the following costs:
100 nuts = ¢12 (6.30 USD);
a buyer purchases 4000 nuts to make up one drum (45 gallons/ 170.3
litres) of coconut oil = ¢480 (253 USD);

5-57
a buyer will usually buy 20 drums per month = ¢9600 (5062 USD);
a drum is sold for between ¢500-¢600 (263 – 316 USD); and
the cost of transporting the oil needs to be considered as part of the

buyers’ costs
There are a small number of processing mills in each town and the oil
produced is sold within the Study Area but is also exported to Takoradi and
even Accra. The oil producers reportedly prefer Nigerian buyers because of
the large quantities they purchase. Oil producers now operate on strictly cash
and carry basis.
As shown above, buying the nuts in quantities worth processing can be

expensive and the producers therefore have loan arrangements with two rural
banks (Lower Pra Rural Bank and Nzemanmanle Rural Bank). The loan
process involves the bank collecting an individual’s money about every two
days for three months. After this time the individual can apply for a loan of
double his/her savings amount and is given six months to pay off the loan in
instalments. An interest fee is added to the repayment cost.
Figure 5.18 Coconut Processing Steps
Grind the copra Extract the liquid

5-58
Figure 5.19 Coconut Processing Steps cont
Leave to Stand Heat to allow oil to separate
Palm Nut Plantations
A palm nut tree takes four to six years to produce fruit and has a lifespan of
approximately 15-20 years. Producers in all three Study Area towns reported
using ladders to access the fruit, which is processed for oil, soup and as a
component of soap. One pole (1.25 acres/ 0.5 hectares) has approximately 60
trees on it each producing between three and ten bunches of nuts. The nuts
are sold in containers at between ¢6 (3.10 USD) and ¢10 (5.20 USD) each.
Specific details of plantation density will be confirmed as part of the LRP
agricultural asset survey being undertaken by SRC.
Raffia Palms
Raffia palms grow wild within the Study Area, predominantly in the northern
part. Asemdasuazo is the only town in the Area that uses the tree to produce
gin (Akpeteshie), which is then sold to the other two towns and much further
afield (Tarkwa and Accra among others).
Buyers come to Asemdasuazo and buy ten to 15 drums of gin at a time. These
are then transported by small truck. The brewers also transport their gin to
other areas to sell. For those involved in brewing it is their main income and
they have little involvement in other agricultural activities. The process of
distilling employs a number of people in Asemdasuazo. In one case a brewer
reported employing 10-20 youth and all brewers reported brewing everything
locally and using their own teams. Interestingly, no gin is sold or reportedly

5-59
consumed in the town itself, although limited alcohol is consumed in
Asemdasuazo.
On average a tree can produce about 60 gallons (227.1 litres) of liquid.

Producers were not worried that this process would be unsustainable as they
reported trees self-seeding and taking about five years to mature. The
production of gin begins once five gallons (18.9 litres) of liquid have been
tapped. The five gallons are distilled into one gallon (3.8 litres) of gin which is
sold for about ¢14 (7.40 USD) and five gallons for ¢70 (37 USD).
Fishing and fish mongering
Probably the largest income-generating livelihood activity in Atuabo and

Anokyi is seasonal marine fishing and fish mongering. Activities are divided
entirely by gender, with men catching the fish and women processing and
selling the catch. In Asemdasuazo freshwater fishing is reportedly one of the
main income generators as well with some participation of women in the
actual fishing activities. There are a number of children who are also involved
in marine and freshwater fishing activities, sometimes to the exclusion of their
education.
The main fishing season starts, in general, towards the end of June, then peaks
during August and September and declines in October. A secondary fishing
season begins towards the end of November and peaks between late January
and March, declining towards the end of April. April to May is considered a
rest period and the fishermen use this time to mend nets, repair boats and
plan for future expeditions. Artisanal works such as carpentry and masonry
are done to supplement incomes during rest periods (April/May). Other
fishing-related activities include outboard motor repairs done by the local
mechanic and commercial drivers also work all year round, usually after
fishing.

5-60
Figure 5.20 Fish mongering
Atuabo
Fishing methods employed in the Study Area are traditional artisanal (small
scale) methods, predominantly beach seining(1). Three main mesh sizes of nets
are used, 2 inches (5 cm), 1 (2.5 cm) and 1 7/8 inches (4.8 cm). The fishing
boats are not mechanised and require up to nine people per boat for paddling
and net casting. Migrant fishermen from Elimina and Axim are the only two
groups of fishermen in the area using mechanised boats and drift gill-nets
(watcha).
The traditional fishers fish within the vicinity of Atuabo. Participatory

mapping highlighted the net casting and tie-off sites on the beach, which has
been translated onto a spatial map (Figure 5.21 and Figure 5.22). In
comparison to farming activities that were reportedly done in families or
alone, local fishing is organised into companies/crews.
(1) This is fishing with a cast net anchored to the shore and taken by boat into the shallow waters (4–5 m deep). The fish
are surrounded by a wall of net encompassing a volume of water from the bottom to the surface; the net is dragged
through the water towards the shore, trapping the fish in the net until they can be scooped out.

5-61
Figure 5.21 Atuabo Fishermen Mapping Net Casting and Tie-off Areas

5-62
Figure 5.22 Atuabo Net Casting and Tie-off Areas
Fishermen reported five main canoe companies namely Yesu Mo Boys,
Jamaica Boys, London Boys, Obeyeyei Boys and Psalm 23 Boys. Each
company has a canoe that is operated by about nine fishers at a time, and a
land crew of between 25 and 70 fishers who aid in dragging the beach seine
net onshore. Fishermen in the boats spend about five to six hours fishing per
day and depending on the types of fish to be caught, they leave shore about
6am and return between 2 - 6pm. It is interesting to point out that the
Obeyeyei Boys company belongs to a fisherman from Asemdasuazo and he
employs young men from both towns on his crew. In the main though,
Asemdasuazo fishermen fish in the river, streams and ponds near their town.
The main species reported caught include sardines (eban), ekan, ebue (August –
December), kokoi (August), sukoe (December), Ahinmandi, Aluko, Ekanfla, kukule,
Tantamle (all year round), wawei (December), silverfish (march), tantra
(December), ebueaqua.
Fishermen reported that about 50 – 100 pans of fish (one pan weighing
approximately 50 kg) could be caught on a good day during peak season
(“when it’s raining from late May to end of June”). While some income
estimates seem extremely high, and the research team tried various
approaches to verify the information, Atuabo fishermen consistently reported
potential income per company on a “very good day” of between ¢20,000
(about 10,500 USD) to ¢60,000 (31,500 USD). However, there might be a four
or five such days in an entire season (approximately seven months of fishing)
and general catches are significantly lower. The entire company divides
income from a catch and the company owner will take approximately 50
percent of the value and the remainder will be shared between up to 70
fishers. If the reported amounts are accurate, this can be crudely estimated as
being approximately ¢430 (226 USD) per fisherman on one of these high-catch
days. However, when averaged with lower day-to-day catches over the year’s
fishing activities fishermen’s incomes are substantially lower.
Figure 5.23 Atuabo Fishers

5-64
Anokyi
Anokyi fishers reported very similar fishing methods to Atuabo. However,
they do not fish on the shore directly in front of their town as this is very
rocky and not suitable for seine nets. Therefore the Anokyi fishermen use the
major portion of the beach between Anokyi and Atuabo to cast nets and
pulled to shore (Figure 5.24). Parts of this area are also used by Atuabo
fishermen. The Anokyi fishermen do not use outboard motors but rather use
paddles and as such do not go very far.

5-65
Figure 5.24 Anokyi Net Casting and Tie-off Areas
Currently the canoes bought and used by the Anokyi crews come from
Tsitsewere, Mori and Abura in the forest region to the north of the Study
Area. Buying a canoe would cost about ¢3000 (1582 USD) and transporting it
back to Anokyi ¢1000 (527 USD). In addition to the cost of the canoe and
transport, the company owner is also responsible for buying the necessary
nets and ropes.
There are five mesh sizes of net used by Anokyi fishermen. These are 1, 1.5, 2,
2.5 and 3.5 inches, which currently cost ¢1000, ¢1000, ¢800, ¢600 and ¢1000
respectively (between 316 and 527 USD). There are various sizes of ropes
attached to the nets to aid in pulling on shore. These sizes include 18, 16 and
14 inch ropes costing ¢200, ¢150 and ¢140 respectively (between 78 and 105
USD). The canoes usually last for three years and nets and ropes, with their
additional costs, for two years if maintained well.
Four main fishing companies active in the town, namely Obatan No. 1, Obatan
No. 2, Medeamayefe and Nsuun with 60, 45, 36 and 40 fishermen respectively.
At the beginning of a fishing day, three companies will set off at the same
time, about 6am. The first to reach the starting point on the beach close to
Atuabo casts the net eastwards in a semi-circle to the shore and ties it to a
coconut tree (Figure 5.25). The second company casts its net from the end
point where the first company has tied off its rope. The third follows in the
same manner. By the time the third company casts the net and ties off the
rope there would be no more fishing space for the last company to cast it nets
and still manage to avoid the rocks at Anokyi, so it stands by waiting for the
first company to pull in its catch. The last company would usually cast its net
at around 8 am when all the other companies have tied their rope to coconut
trees on shore. The first three companies would usually finish pulling in their
catch at between 1-2 pm while the last company would finish at about 5 pm.
The fishermen do this every day during the fishing season except for Sundays,
which are rest days. Fishermen in Anokyi fish throughout the year except in
June when the waves are much stronger and thus more dangerous. June is the
rest month, used to mend nets, repair boats and participate in other activities
such as planting.
Figure 5.25 Anokyi Casting and Tie-off sites

5-67
The main species caught include Ekan (abundant in January), Sukoe
(February), Edoe (August), Wanwonyera (ribbonfish) (September and October),
Ebueaqua (March), Eban (sardines) (October) and Amoni (October). For further
information regarding the fish species identified, please refer to the Fisheries
section in Chapter 4.
Over the duration of the high season (August to October and to a lesser
degree January to March), the fishermen of Anokyi could land about 1000 –
1500 pans (50 kg per pan) filled with fish, while in minor the season they land
about 200 pans. The fish are all sold directly to women at the beach.
Depending on the time of the season and availability of the catch, the women
either pay cash for their fish or, when the catch is abundant, the fishermen will
give credit and be paid once the catch is smoked and sold. Fishermen
estimate that ten percent of their catch is consumed at home while 90 percent
is sold. During peak season Anokyi fishermen reported that a catch could be
worth ¢30000 (15,810 USD) on an exceptional day. There are only a small
number of such days in a season and not every day from end May to end June
would produce such catches. Half of the amount is given to the company
owner and the rest is shared among the fishermen ie. based on an equal share
fishermen could earn approximately ¢1500 (790 USD) on an exceptional day
and around ¢50 (26 USD) each in the lean season. It is also important to note
that fishing is not done every day of the year.
Figure 5.26 Fish catches (low season)
Fishermen reported declining catches over the past number of years. They
attribute this to increased human populations and consumption, increase in
fishing activities, increase in fishing canoes working the area, improvement in
fishing gears (such as smaller mesh sizes and the use of outboard motors) and
illegal fishing (using lights, dynamite and poisons such as
dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT)(1). Many community members in the
Study Area express beliefs that the offshore oil production activities have
contributed to the decline in fish for the following reasons:
(1) FGD Fishermen, 2012

5-68
The lights on the Jubilee Floating Production Storage Offloading (FPSO)
attract the fish and result in a decline in the fish populations outside the
safety zone.
The local fishermen do not use motorised boats and therefore cannot
access the fish that have moved further off shore.
The oil production activities have caused the algae bloom, which prevents
fishermen from being able to fish from the shore. This perception persists
even though people commented about algal blooms in 2000, long before
any oil industry activities.
Asemdasuazo
Asemdasuazo is situated about 2 km inland from the coast and in proximity to
the Amansuri River and other smaller streams. Fishermen from the town
therefore participate in freshwater fishing and report that this is their main
occupation. During the focus group meeting fishermen mapped the
approximate freshwater sites on an aerial photograph. This was then
translated onto a spatial map (Figure 5.27 ).
Figure 5.27 Asemdasuazo Community Mapping of Freshwater Fishing Sites

5-69
Figure 5.28 Asemdasuazo Translated Freshwater Fishing Map (Areas Indicative)
There are about 150 – 200 fishermen in the town who fish in the Amansuri
river, streams leading to the river, flood plains and perennial ponds in the
area. Fishing, especially in the streams, river and ponds is done all year round
although the flood plains are seasonally inundated. Peak season fishing
occurs from May to July and the minor season occurs from November to
about February.
The main fishing gear used includes traps (basket traps: sruwa, kpohuro, alia
etc; chicken wire traps), nets (largely gill nets and some scoop nets) and hook
and line (about 70 – 100 hooks set on a line and lowered in the water). The
fishermen fish independently from dug-out canoes which are propelled either
with paddles (when the water level is high) or bamboo poles.
Figure 5.29 Asemdasuazo Freshwater Fishing Gear
Canoes used with bamboo poles in low season A fisherman making fish traps
Fish trap demonstration

5-71
Unlike marine fishing, which is the sole preserve of local men, Asemdasuazo
women also do some fishing especially in the ponds during the dry seasons.
The women reported going to fish about every three days. The women do not
fish in the streams and river because it is deemed dangerous.
There are four fish landing sites in the community found at different streams
leading to the river. They are Elukobabo (the main landing site), Ezakpule,
Nkrumabo and Saanader. The main fish species caught include Tilapia,
mudfish, catfish and several freshwater species. During peak season, when
the major rains fall, from late May to end August, each fisherman could
harvest about two to four bags of fish (50 kg rice bags) per day and about half
a bag during the low season (December to February). The fish caught are sold
to women at the landing sites who in turn process and sell in the markets of
neighbouring communities (Atuabo, Anokye, Baku, Ainyinase among others).
Depending on the species, a bag of fish costs between ¢100 and ¢250 (52 - 156
USD).
Tilapia is deemed very expensive and can therefore be sold for ¢250 a bag (156
USD). A large size fish could be sold for ¢10 (5.20 USD) while three to five
small fish could be sold for between ¢2 and ¢5. In terms of consumption,
fishermen estimated that between ten and 15 percent of their catch is
consumed at home while the rest is sold. Income from the sale of fish and or
farm produce is used to take care of household expenses, pay children’s
school and related educational fees and finance other businesses such as chop
bars, trade, commercial transportation (taxi, buses) etc.
Fish mongering is also an important livelihood activity for Asemdasuazo

women who process both marine fish, bought at Atuabo or Anokyi, and
freshwater fish from the Asemdasuazo fishermen and women. During peak
season the fishmongers could get as many as three pans of fish per day, each
costing about ¢200 (104 USD). These fish are sold to the neighbouring
communities. The women walk to Atuabo and Anokyi or they inform those
communities of large catches and buyers walk to Asemdasuazo. The same
communication works in reverse when there are large marine catches.
Asemdasuazo fishermen reported additional amphibious catches including

crocodiles, alligators and tortoise.
Children catch crabs along the beach and near the river and streams and these
are eaten at home or sold at local markets or around town as small
supplementary family incomes.

5-72
Figure 5.30 Crab Traps laid by Children
Fish mongering
Fish mongering is the domain of women and is a key livelihood activity. The
women wait for the day’s catch to be brought in to buy the fish for sale. Fish
can be sold fresh or smoked and if the seller has a large enough load she
might travel the 30 km to the market in Aiyinase, alternatively she would sell
closer to home in Atuabo, Bekwai and Asemdasuazo. Women reported
buying a bowl of fish containing 800 pieces for ¢180 (63 USD) and selling that
quantity for ¢200 (104 USD). In assessing the profits made one needs to
account for the input costs of processing and transporting the fish to the
consumer.
The cost of fish varies based on size, species and the quantity landed. Atuabo
women reported that one pan or bucket of eban (sardines) would cost about
¢120 - ¢180 (63 – 97 USD). One hundred pieces would be about ¢250 (131
USD). 100 pieces of sukoe (small sized) would cost ¢50 (26 USD) and a large
size would be about ¢100 (52 USD), one pan of amoni would cost ¢80 (42 USD).
Sometime the fishermen catch large fish, which are sold to hotels in the area
(Axim). Women will also travel as far as Cote d’Ivoire to sell their produce
and such a journey involves hiring a vehicle and driving for about an hour to
Jowarf, then taking a boat to Ajeke and a further vehicle to Ebonoa in Cote
d’Ivoire. Selling a load here would earn approximately ¢2500 (1318 USD).
There are a number of options in preparing the fish. Salty fish, like anchovies,
can be dried and salted, while larger fish are smoked. During the peak fishing
season large quantities of wood are needed for smoking fish. At least a truck-
load of wood (¢200/104 USD) and coconut husks (¢100/56 USD) are
reportedly used in a season. However, depending on the amount of fish
caught the fishmongers may have to top up the initial wood purchase. To do
this they hire a truck for ¢80 (42 USD) per trip and often several trips are
needed to bring in enough wood. The distance to collect the wood is about
nine km from Atuabo in the more forested areas to the north.

5-73
As with the cassava, the absence of cold storage facilities in the towns means
that fish have to be processed and sold fairly quickly. Certainly smoking
makes the fish last longer but not by significant amounts of time. Therefore it
is common that in peak season the market is flooded with fish and the prices
are low. If the stream of fish available on the market could be controlled the
income for both fishermen and fishmongers would increase and the security
of income could be balanced and sustained over longer periods of time. Food
security would also be improved, as people would be less dependent on
weather factors and sea conditions.
Development Planning amongst Fisher-folk
In many of the focus groups involving fishermen and fishmongers, planning

for the future, with or without the Project, includes ideas of increased
mechanisation. A key component of this would be cold storage facilities, as
discussed above. However, for the men mechanisation means access to
outboard motors that would allow them to fish further from shore, where they
believe the catches would be better. It is worth noting that the crews required
for this type of fishing would be significantly smaller than the beach seine
method and the potential consequence of this approach would be reduced
employment for a number of fishermen.
Livestock
Livestock rearing is carried out on a much smaller scale than crop farming,
agro-processing and fishing in the Study Area. Domestic animals are raised
predominantly for ceremonial occasions rather than for home consumption or
market sale. Most households do, however, keep a few chickens, goats, sheep
and pigs. The Atuabo elders estimated that about 40 percent of the
community own livestock.
Only Atuabo reported a cattle herder working in the town. Those community
members with cattle pool the livestock (reportedly approximately 400 heads
of cattle) and a Fulane herdsman oversees all of them. Residents of
Asemdasuazo also reported sending their cattle to Atuabo to be raised. The
grassland area between Atuabo and Asemdasuazo is one of the main cattle
grazing areas used by the herdsman in the dry season. The area is a wetland
and usually flooded in the rainy season so herdsmen travel further afield for
grazing, outside of the Study Area.
5.8.2 Natural Resource Use
Silica mining (clay)
Women in the Atuabo focus group identified silica mining as an important

local livelihood activity. The site is a few hundred meters north-east of the
town Community members have licences to mine and the men dig the sand
while the women carry and load the bags onto trucks that have come in from
outside of the area. Trucks usually come once or twice a week and a truckload
of silica earns the participants ¢20000 (1054 USD) as a group. The larger share

5-74
of the income is reportedly allocated to the men. There is also a silica mining
site close to Anokyi, a few hundred meters to the north-west, which is mined
by local residents. This site is outside of the project footprint.
Wood and Charcoal
The sale of wood, as well as the collection and use for the family, is a
supplementary livelihood activity. Wood is collected almost daily (except
Sunday) by women in all three towns and is found both inside and outside of
the Project area. Women in the focus groups reported using some of the wood
for household cooking but selling the majority of what was collected. A
bundle of wood sells for ¢3 (1.50 USD). Usually the women carry the bundles
home and sell from there. The amount of wood collected and carried varies
widely depending on the strength of the individual woman. However, one
woman described how she takes orders for wood and collects bundles from
the bush and delivers directly to her customers.
Charcoal making is not a popular activity in the Study Area. The Awulae
commented that many people depend on charcoal but not many are making it.
He mentioned that some people are moving towards using gas in their homes.
For the small number of individuals involved in charcoal making, however, it
is their main source of income. The wood is collected from the forested areas
to the north of the plantations in the Study Area. Producers rent trucks to
transport the wood and can each produce about 30 bags per month. Each bag
is sold for about ¢13 (6.80 USD).
Ethnobotanical activities
Natural resources in the Project area are used in a variety of supplementary

livelihood activities. Healers earn their income from local plants and ordinary
community members gather them for medicinal uses (reporting that hospitals
are too far away and too expensive). Most herbs collected by healers are
either grown specifically by them or generally collected from outside of the
Project footprint. For community members, herbs are collected from areas
surrounding their towns, including within the Project footprint. Raffia palm
fronds are used for roofing materials and walls; and sand is used in brick
making. The collection and sale of some of these resources was reported on a
small scale as a supplementary income source. In the past, people hunted
various size game in the area but people commented that there are no animals
left to hunt.

5-75
Figure 5.31 Use of Natural Resources
A piece of bark used by an Atuabo healer Palm fronds used for roofing
5.8.3 Petty trading
Small scale or petty trading is undertaken throughout the Study Area, mainly
on the side of the main roads, in small kiosks or at small tables. Women also
carry their goods and sell around the towns. Much of the trading is directly
related to fishing and agriculture, although some manufactured goods are also
sold. Trading is not, however, very lucrative as most people do not have
enough money to purchase sufficient stock to sell. Women and youth
undertake most of the trading and the goods are mainly sold within the local
communities. Stock bought in Agona-Nkwanta, Axim and sometimes in
Takoradi. Some of the main goods traded in the area include, amongst others
fish products, agricultural products, food and beverages, ice, household
products, medicines and cosmetics, clothing and electronic products.
Figure 5.32 Petty Trading
Some stores are more established and the owners have access to enough
financial resources to be able to stock the store. Goods sold in Asemdasuazo
are, in general, slightly more expensive than in the other two towns. This
would be motivated by the additional transport costs or physical efforts
needed to bring products to the town. Table 5.16 shows the current costs of a
mix of popular items in the Study Area. This information can be used as a
baseline to measure inflation in the coming years.

5-76
Table 5.16 Prices of Popular Goods
Item Atuabo Anokyi Asemdasuazo

Price (Gh¢) Price (Gh¢) Price (Gh¢)
A bottle of beer 2.50ps

A bottle of soft drink/soda 1
A bunch of plantain 10 20
A stick/packet of
Cigarette
A tin of rice 1.20ps
Biscuits 50ps (cassava biscuits) 5p,10p,30ps (depending 35ps
on type and quantity)
Bread 50ps 1
Cadbury cocoa powder 15p (small)
30p (large)
Cadbury coffee 30p (small)
50p (large)
Cassava 40
Coconut (100 nuts) 15 12
Coconut oil (5 gallons) 50 55-60 1
deodorants 1.80 1.8 - 2 2
Diapers/nappies; 50ps for one
Ideal milk 1.40ps 1.50ps
Koko (millet porridge) 10ps 10ps
Liquid soap (1.5 l) 2 2
maize dough (1 bucket) 15ps 50ps
Pigs 150-200 80-150 (small) 70
250-300 (large)
Poultry >15 10 10
Soklin washing powder 30ps 25ps
Sugar (1 cup) 1.2ps 1.10ps
Bathing soap (1 bar) 50ps 80ps – 1.40 80ps

toffees (each) 5 - 10ps 10ps
Voltic bottle water 70ps - 1.40 1.50ps
Wood (1 bundle) 3 2 2
Source: Womens’, Fishermens’, Youths’ FGDs, Asemdasuazo separate collection, April 2012
Local residents in all three towns emphasised the need for micro-loan facilities
so that petty traders could become more established and access potential
opportunities related to local developments. They also identified niche
market possibilities, like an internet café (that would have economic as well as
social and educational benefits), catering or sewing of work wear for Project
employees that would all need start-up capital.
5.8.4 Salaried and Self-Employment
A small number of local residents are formally employed in the Study Area.
Jobs include the District assemblyman, teachers and Zoomlion and ZOIL
(privately owned service providers) employees who are responsible for
keeping the streets and the beaches clean. The remainder of those employed
are either self-employed or work for local residents as farm labourers or in

5-77
fishing crews. Salaries do not, therefore, make up a significant portion of
income in the Study Area.
A small number of residents identified themselves as self-employed in

activities other than agriculture including hairdressing, carpentry, drivers and
electricians, Observations during the fieldwork would suggest that a small
number of local residents have taxis and generate income through
transporting people and goods within the Study Area and beyond, towards
the hospital in Eikwe and the markets. However no detailed information was
collected on this.
5.8.5 Other Livelihood Strategies
There are other strategies employed by some local residents to ensure their
survival, which do not fall into the categories discussed above. These
individuals would access support through remittances from migrant
workers/ family members; rent from land or property; and pensions in the
few cases where these are accessible. There is also the strategy of establishing
relationships with people of means as a source of support – in other words,
marriage or an informal sexual relationship through which a woman might
find financial or material support. While local residents do not recognise
prostitution as an activity in the Study Area, they do acknowledge that there
are known relationships through which sex is exchanged for support and care.
5.9 COMMUNITY LIFESTYLE, IDENTITY AND RELATIONSHIPS
Understanding how people identify with their community and the

relationships within and between towns in the Study Area will assist in
anticipating strengths and vulnerabilities to changes in the social
environment. The economic activities, settlement practices and major
concerns and priorities across the Study Area suggest a relatively
homogenous group of inhabitants. This should, however, not be simplistically
interpreted to mean that identity and cleavages do not set communities apart
and negate the need to address each in individual ways.
Box 5.8 Key Aspects of Lifestyle, Identity and Relationships
The Study Area is a quiet rural place.

Local residents value the peace and quiet.
There is a strong sense of community identity and the ability to rely on others in the
community for support if necessary (particularly among the elderly).
The three communities are related by marriage and family ties.
There are strong and ongoing connections between the towns and people travel by foot to
and from Asemdasuazo as part of these relationships.
There is trade of fish and fresh produce between the towns.
Enactment of culture and tradition, although somewhat diminished by monotheistic
religions, continues to be a central part of society and community.
All strata of affected communities are optimistic about the Project and local developments.
However people are not blind to the changes that such development will bring with its
positive and negative implications.

5-78
Source: ERM site visits, April 2012
5.9.2 Sense of Place
It takes a few hours of driving along 88 km of tar and 4 km of graded gravel to

reach the Study Area from Takoradi. The traffic becomes conspicuously
thinner from the end of the tar road and by the time one reaches the Study
Area it is clearly a rural environment. The topography is generally flat and
consistent. There are no large structures, with double-storey buildings being
extremely unusual. Extended tracts of palm tree plantations and bush screen
areas from one another and dominant sounds are the sea, the winds, voices
and birds (mainly yellow-billed kites). Current noise sources are those related
to vehicular movements, children playing, voices, music/radio and sea waves
breaking at the beach. At night ambient noise includes limited vehicle traffic
and noise from the wave action.
Figure 5.33 Sense of Place in the Study Area

5-79
From the Awulae to the community members of all three towns, the main
positive aspect of life in this area was reportedly the “peace and tranquillity”.
Even the youth, who are hoping for local development and “increasing
urbanisation”, said that they enjoyed the quiet of the place.
Residents also value the sense of community and the ability to rely on the
support of others in times of need. The elderly in particular spoke of asking
for support (financial or physical) from other older people in the town and see
this as a cushion to their survival. Other community members said that they
would assist needy people within their own families rather than the broader
community.
The general absence of crime is an appealing asset to residents as is the

negligible occurrence of domestic or other violence. The nurse at the Ekabaku
Health Centre confirmed this saying that the Centre sees, possibly one
incidence of violence in three months.
The overuse/ abuse of alcohol appears to be rare and in most focus group
meetings none of the participants were under the influence of alcohol. There
is a general sense that people drink “to increase their appetites” rather than to
get drunk, and there is little violence as a result. Some of the youth
recognised the use of marijuana in the communities, but emphasised that no
hard drugs like heroin or cocaine were used in the Study Area.
Asemdasuazo sets itself apart from the other towns in its sense of place.
Somehow, by virtue of its 1.5 km distance from the other two towns along the
main road, Asemdasuazo has managed to maintain a cultural “wholesomeness”
that is unusual and perhaps also possible due to its small population size.
Smoking and the sale of cigarettes are common in Atuabo and Anokyi but no
one smokes in Asemdasuazo. It was reported that a resident returned from
working in Cote d’Ivoire and had started smoking but the community made it
clear that this was not acceptable behaviour and he stopped. In addition,
although this is the town known for brewing and selling gin, there is limited
drinking and no examples of violence attached to it. Asemdasuazo is also the
only Study Area town where no teenage pregnancies are reported.
5.9.3 Inter-Community Relationships
All three towns pay allegiance to the Awulae in Atuabo, and Anokyi and
Asemdasuazo Sub-chiefs fall under the Awulae.
The three towns describe one another as family as there is significant

intermarriage between all three towns. There are also strong trade links as
Asemdasuazo claims that its small population size ensures surplus produce,
which is sold to Atuabo and Anokyi, and similarly between the communities
when there is a large catch. There are visible footpaths between the towns
suggesting ongoing interaction and people report walking between Atuabo
and Anokyi along the road or beach and to Asemdasuazo along the road or
through the bush (see visible paths from the aerial image in Figure 5.34.

5-80
Worshippers from different churches reported attending services in other
towns on occasion. Figure 5.35 illustrates the numerous social and trade
relationships between the three towns as identified by various focus group
participants. Understanding these interactions and the disruption that the
Project could cause is important both from the socio-cultural perspective as
well as economic and livelihood one.
Focus group meetings, particularly with the youth highlighted the potential
for competition and even conflict between communities if development and
benefit expectations are not fairly distributed. Many youth asserted that their
town should get 70 percent of the job opportunities but they did later
recognise this to be unreasonable when challenged. It will nevertheless be
important to manage this potential conflict.
It is also worth noting that there is already tension between Ellembelle District
and Jomoro related to the siting of the Natural Gas Processing Plant facility
near Atuabo. The plant was originally planned for the neighbouring district
but has since been moved to land adjacent to the Project site. Relevant
authorities should monitor the potential for conflict around this, and its
impact on the Study Area communities. The Awulae, in recognising this
possibility, has suggested that residents of Jomoro and Nzema are given
preference, along with those of the Study Area, when job opportunities on the
Project are available.

5-81
Figure 5.34 Inter-Community Footpaths
Figure 5.35 Inter-Community Relationships
5.9.4 Cultural Practices and Modernisation
The rural and fairly remote geographic nature of the three towns has resulted
in the maintenance of many traditional beliefs and practices, which contribute
to the sense of community identity and unity reported by local residents. All
communities demonstrated hierarchical structures based on traditional lines
with respect for the chiefs and elders as a core social behaviour. Within
particular focus groups the evidence of such internal structures was present as
older participants were often credited for their cumulative wisdom and
knowledge. Younger participants also assisted the elderly in many of the
participatory activities that involved writing or understanding maps and
landmarks.
Crime
Many traditional practices have become taboo as a result of monotheistic

religious beliefs but this does not mean that they have disappeared completely
or that their role in partly shaping social behaviour has been erased. For
example, in the past people invoked curses on thieves and other criminals.
While this is seen as paganism today, religious representatives admitted that
now people only issue threats of invoking curses and rarely actually proceed.
However, the threats are seen to be effective enough to inhibit some criminal
behaviour and on occasion, to make people confess to their crimes. This
suggests that the power of the traditional belief still plays a role. Surprisingly,
religious representatives highlighted that as this practice falls away
criminality will increase and more formal policing methods will be required,
particularly if there is an influx of people for whom the “curse” holds no
power. Most participants highlighted the need for a coherent safety and
security strategy.
Culture and Sexuality
Another important traditional practice that is seen to help maintain social

order and family structures is that of puberty rites for girls. According to
David Osei-Adu writing on tradition and rites:
“Under the supervision of the queen mother of the town or village in

collaboration with some female opinion leaders, young women who have
had their first menstruation are secluded from the community for a period
between two and three weeks during which they are taught the secrets of
womanhood. During this period of seclusion the girls are given lessons
in sex education and birth control. They are also taught how to relate to
men properly so that they can maintain a good marriage and their dignity
in society” (Akoto, 2012).
Traditional law imposes that no woman is allowed to get married without

having gone through the puberty rites and every young woman is expected to
remain a virgin prior to this. Amongst other considerations of influencing the

5-84
behaviour of women in patriarchal society, the stigma of breaking this law
and risks of being ostracised has traditionally discouraged premature
motherhood and unwanted children. Nowadays there is still a stigma around
such sexuality and pregnancies, but families take responsibility for keeping
both the girl/young woman and her infant within the family.
Teenage pregnancy is recognised in the Region, District and Study Area

communities as a significant problem that affects girls’ education, future
opportunities, and contributes to levels of family poverty. Some residents
believe that the puberty rites are working to limit the numbers of teenage
pregnancies in the communities. Others believe that sex education at school is
urgently required, and this was mentioned with particular reference to social
changes potentially resulting from the Project. The Anokyi women in
particular recognised the potential for cultural changes which could result in
young girls (around 15 years and upwards) becoming “enlightened” (ie
noticing and desiring material objects) and making lifestyle choices, including
the exchange of sex for material comfort.
The communities’ concerns for the health and safety of their children, of all
ages, was a central theme raised in focus group meetings, and sexual practice
and morality/ cultural propriety was acknowledge to be at risk – both from
the realities of modernisation and directly related to the Project.
5.9.5 Poverty and Vulnerability
In the Study Area poverty levels are high given communities’ dependency on
the declining fisheries sector. There are relatively high illiteracy levels and a
lack of employment opportunities. The lack of income is also seen in the small
number of business ventures undertaken by the communities and the
struggles of most small businesses in the communities due to the lack of
disposable income. Poverty on its own contributes to vulnerability.
Vulnerability in the context of this Report is defined as those people who by

virtue of gender, ethnicity, age, physical or mental disability, economic
disadvantage, or social status may be more adversely affected by an activity
and its spin-offs than others and who may be limited in their ability to claim
or take advantage of assistance and related development benefits.
Vulnerability is also measured by the resilience of individuals, households

and communities to withstand shock, as identified in the Growth and Poverty
Reduction Strategy (International Monetary Fund Report, 2004).
The communities in the Study Area are mostly reliant on subsistence-based

livelihood activities that draw on natural resources (specifically the land and
ocean) and there are few alternative livelihood sources available to the local
population. Certain groups are therefore more vulnerable than others to
possible loss of access to resources and changes in the social environment with
which they are currently familiar.

5-85
Based on comments made by participants in the focus groups and on
observations by the research team, the following vulnerable groups have been
identified:
Children
Across the Study Area, many children are left in the care of their grandparents
(in particular, grandmothers) as their parents leave the area in search of
employment opportunities. A relatively low number of parents return to the
area or send money home to their children. As the grandparents are too old to
work, the children are often required to take up such responsibilities and
participate in household livelihood activities. As a result, children (12-13
years) often leave school to work or pursue other opportunities (Health Key
Informant Interview, April 2012). Boys primarily become fishermen and girls
marry early or get involved in relationships of sexual exchange, which this can
result in teenage pregnancy, illegal and unsafe abortions, and the potential for
the transmission of STIs or HIV - all of which entrenches the cycle of poverty.
Children are also vulnerable to being trafficked or sold into slavery as a result
of poverty (Heemskerk and Sertich, 2011). There are a small number of
orphans in the three communities. These children are usually taken care of by
family members however, in situations of dire poverty these children would
be most at risk to neglect, abuse or trafficking.
Women
Women in the area are generally the more consistent breadwinners as they
have a somewhat stable income through their fish mongering and farming
activities. They sell fish and sometimes own small shops where they sell
household products, vegetables and smoked fish. They use most of their
income for their children’s education, as well as for household expenses such
as food and healthcare (FGD Women, April 2012). A major factor contributing
to the women’s vulnerability is that more men than women migrate in search
of other work and often don’t return, leaving the women to take care of the
children alone. The gender demographics in the Study Area highlight the fact
that many women are left to run their households and raise their families as
female headed households.
Elderly
The elderly (aged 65 and above) represent a small percentage of the

population, however, they play an important role in taking care of
grandchildren. They seldom have an income or the means to take care of
these children and rely on remittances from absent family members. Elderly
focus group participants highlighted poor health and immobility as additional
hurdles to sustaining their livelihoods. They are unable to work their fields or
travel around as petty traders. Furthermore, they are often forced to employ
people to help in their fields, diminishing the amount of produce available to
them and the families that they support, thereby undermining food security.

5-86
Sharecroppers
Sharecroppers (farm labourers) have no claim to the land from which they
extract their livelihoods. A loss of access to that land would leave them with
no income or food source. Details of how many people would fall into this
category should be identified through the LRP process.
Fishermen
Fishermen are predominantly dependent upon fishing activities and their

access to the sea. Thus, their ability to catch sufficient fish to ensure an income
makes them vulnerable to changes related to developments along the shore.
In fact, the vulnerability of the fishermen has spin-off risks to the fishmongers
and more broadly to general food security in the Study Area.
5.10 UTILITIES, INFRASTRUCTURE AND SERVICES
The provision of utilities, infrastructure and services in the Study Area is

generally poor (Box 5.9). Regional and District authorities have recognised
this and development of services in the area is part of the strategic planning
documents. The provision of such services is clearly a government
responsibility and the relevant Departments will be under increasing pressure
to provide these if there is a sudden and large influx into the area.
Box 5.9 Key Aspects of Infrastructure and Services
Infrastructure and service delivery is extremely poor. Atuabo seems the best serviced and
Asemdasuazo, which is less accessible, has least infrastructure and no services.
Water quality is said to be low and there are only a few functioning boreholes/wells in
each town. Many community members prioritised potable water when commenting on
development needs.
Road infrastructure cannot easily accommodate existing low levels of traffic.
Waste management is fairly ad hoc and while this may be adequate for current population
sizes it will not cope with any significant population growth.
Sanitation is poor in all three towns with a lack of public KVIP facilities and a small
number of private facilities.
There are kindergarten, primary and junior high schools in the Study Area.
There is no Senior High School in the Study Area, which means that the majority of
children drop out of the education system after a maximum of 8 years of education
(including kindergarten).
None of the towns has its own health care facility and people travel either to the Ekabaku
clinic (on the western border of Ellembelle) or to Eikwe Hospital (approximately 7 km
away). As a result, residents tend to use locally available traditional remedies either self-
sourced or through a traditional healer.
Source: ERM site visits, April 2012

5-87
5.10.1 Water
Each town has at least one operational hand-pump operated borehole and
generally there is at least one other that is not working. In Atuabo four out of
five boreholes are not operational and people use shallow wells about 3-5
meters deep. The towns have a small number of protected/covered wells –
the majority of which are within the boundaries of individual family homes,
although residents have free access to the water.
None of the focus group participants reported paying for water although the
women’s group in Asemdasuazo stated that the town has a tap and collects
small monthly household contributions for its maintenance as well as for
other community development needs (for example, road and school
rehabilitation and aid for orphans). Asemdasuazo residents also reported that
they had contributed money to drilling a new borehole, as the existing one
was not operational.
Communities did express concerns about the adequate supply of water if

there were to be an influx of people to the area and well as concerns regarding
water quality. They also highlighted potable water as a key development
priority in all three towns.
5.10.2 Electricity
All three towns are on the national electricity grid and most households are
reportedly connected. In general, houses have meters and are billed monthly
by the provider. Most households use wood and charcoal for cooking and a
mix of electricity and kerosene of lighting.
Atuabo residents reported concerns that no bills had been delivered for four
months, although in contract Asemdasuazo residents reported that they went
to Eikwe to pay the electricity bills. Asemdasuazo women estimated
household electricity bills of around ¢20-30 per month and for those with a
fridge or freezer the bill went up to about ¢50 per month.
5.10.3 Roads and Transport
All roads in the Study Area are untarred and the main east to west road is
graded and was maintained during the fieldwork in April 2012. Streets within
the towns are sand roads. The road linking Asemdasuazo to the main coastal
road is also sand/ dirt and in poor condition. During the rainy season the
roads are reported to weather badly with erosion and potholes.
There is no public transport servicing the Study Area. A number of small

taxis drive the route (with the exclusion of the road to Asemdasuazo). Taxi
fares seem to vary at the discretion of the driver and depending on the cargo
that is being transported. It is not surprising, given the conditions of these
internal roads and the main artery to Eikwe, that transport is limited and
expensive for local residents.

5-88
People hire small trucks (generically referred to as Kia trucks) to transport
large loads (eg wood, coconuts).
5.10.4 Waste management
The towns of Atuabo and Anokyi each have specifically allocated waste sites.
These are informal in structure, unlined, and once full they are covered over
and a new area is opened for use. Community members are expected to take
their waste to the sites for disposal, while Zoomlion, a private company
contracted and paid by government, is responsible for ensuring that the
streets are kept clean and ZOIL (a subsidiary) is responsible for maintaining
the beaches.
Asemdasuazo has no allocated waste dump and people dispose of their waste
in their yards, mainly by burning. It is likely that no formal waste
management system has been established in this community as it is slightly
more remote (off the main road) and has a smaller population size than other
communities. However, such a system is necessary and would be important if
the community grows as a result of development in the area.
5.10.5 Sanitation
The provision of sanitation facilities is poor in all three towns. Atuabo, with
its population of approximately 1500 has two KVIPs for public use and
according to the elders most community members have their own facility.
Liquid waste is disposed of through a process of soak-aways facilitated by the
sandy soil, while solid wastes are collected by Zoomlion and disposed of.
Anokyi has one public KVIP and many residents have their own facilities at
home, while Asemdasuazo has no KVIPs.
Some community members commented on the health risks of people using the
beach as a toilet as well as the risk of groundwater pollution from the existing
sanitation system.
5.10.6 Telecommunications
The major private mobile telephone networks, with varying degrees of

reception, service the Study Area. Recharge vouchers are available at local
stores and from some roadside traders. Most adults reported owning a
cellular phone. There are no landlines servicing the area.
5.10.7 Emergency Services
There are no emergency services in any of the Study Area communities. There
used to be a police station in Anokyi but it burnt down and has not been
rebuilt or staffed. There was also a police station in Atuabo, but it is not
currently in operation. Focus group participants commented on the low levels
of crime and stated that the elders and the chiefs were involved in solving

5-89
conflicts. For some, crime was reportedly limited to stealing of coconuts that
had fallen from someone else’s tree, while an older Atuabo resident stated that
one could no longer just leave an object, like a bicycle, unattended and expect
it to not be taken.
All communities anticipated an increase in crime if development occurs in the

area and thus the need for more policing, as well as fire fighting equipment.
Several people commented on the lack of ambulances, which made medical
emergencies additionally difficult to deal with.
5.10.8 Financial Institutions
There are no banking institutions in or near to the Study Area. As mentioned

above, some coconut oil producers have loan arrangements with rural banks
but there is currently no economic activity to motivate local banks to open in
the area. This would likely change as the area develops and as more people
have access to regular salaries and as trading incomes increase. The demand
for micro loans may also encourage institutions to locate branches in the
Study Area.
5.10.9 Education
The Western Region’s Health Directorate (Regional Health Directorate,

Western Region, 2010) uses school enrolment as an indicator of poverty. For
the Ellembelle District the 2009/2010 enrolment target (for family
reproductive health – child indicators) was 70 percent and the actual
enrolment was 10 - 15.7 percent. It is unlikely that the communities in the
Study Area differ too much from this average, suggesting very low actual
student enrolment figures. The knock-on effects of low levels of education for
social and economic development have been recognised from national to
District government levels.
Each town in the Study Area has a public primary school, including a
kindergarten, and a Junior High School (JHS). Atuabo also has a private lower
primary school catering to the first three grades.
School Infrastructure
Atuabo has 310 pupils in kindergarten and primary school and 88 in JHS (32
boys and 56 girls). Anokyi has 90 kindergarten pupils (44 boys and 46 girls);
145 primary school pupils (75 boys and 70 girls) and 51 pupils in JHS (33 boys
and 18 girls). Asemdasuazo has 45 children in the kindergarten (20 boys and
25 girls) and 90 pupils in the primary school (42 boys and 48 girls). There is no
JHS in Asemdasuazo.
The primary school building in Atuabo is in bad condition with cracks and a
leaking roof. There is a KVIP within the school grounds and this is used by
the community as well as pupils. There is no electricity or potable water at the
primary school. There are also no teachers’ office spaces aside from the head-

5-90
teacher’s office. The JHS structure is in a good state and water is available via
a community well and borehole. There is no KVIP but a urinal is present.
The Asemdasuazo School is in better condition, although the roof leaks in

places. There is no permanent kindergarten structure and there is no
electricity in the school.
There are no SHS or tertiary educational facilities in the communities. JHS

graduates are selected through a national exam into SHS in other communities
nationwide based on a computerised placement system implemented by the
Ghana Education Service.
Figure 5.36 School Infrastructure and Educational Planning
The Atuabo community has an Information Communication Technology (ICT)

centre for teaching ICT, which is staffed by a permanent trained ICT teacher.
ICT is one of the national subjects required for gaining access to SHS. The
centre was donated by the Member of Parliament of the area and caters for
other neighbouring communities in the Study Area. An Asemdasuazo teacher

5-91
emphasised that without the facilities to teach computer skills there was
almost no chance that local students would find places in SHS. He also
highlighted that students cannot travel to Atuabo regularly to learn ICT given
the distance to walk between the two towns as well as other responsibilities in
school and home that the children have.
Finances and Staff
Kindergarten and primary schooling in Ghana is free but parents are required
to pay some nominal annual fees for the printing of examination materials
(¢1.50 per student per term) and Parent Teacher Association (PTA) levies (¢1
per student per term). There are still a number of families unable to pay these
amounts and it is unclear how many children are not enrolled at school as a
result.
In the absence of school fees, the Government Capitation Grant Scheme,

through the Ghana Education Services (GES), finances schools with additional
assistance from communities to cover the salaries of some staff. The
headmaster reported that the amount is inadequate to run the school and that
bureaucratic procedures delay this payment to the school. This money is also
sometimes spent on repair/maintenance works on school properties such as
desks, infrastructure, as well as field trips, sport trips and other educational
trips.
There are two types of teachers at the local schools, those trained and
employed by GES and untrained teachers (usually trainees who are
completing their studies) who are employed by the community. The trained
teachers and the ICT instructor are employed and paid for by the GES and
salaries vary depending on qualification, number of years in the teaching field
and amount of responsibility (¢250 - ¢650 per month, equivalent to 131 to 342
USD). The community teachers earn ¢70 - ¢100 per month (37 to 52 USD).
Teachers in both Atuabo and Asemdasuazo emphasised low salaries and
difficult teaching environments as hurdles to teacher satisfaction.
Teachers reported inadequate textbooks, teaching aids and materials, and a

lack of sports facilities or equipment. None of the towns has a school library,
although Atuabo is in the process of setting up a public library adjacent to the
palace, which is partially funded by Tullow Oil.
Attendance and Drop Out Rates
School attendance is reportedly high in Atuabo, with an attendance rate for

those enrolled exceeding 90 percent at the primary level. Reasons given for
this include the implementation of the government’s free school-feeding
programme. However, JHS attendance rates were also better than 75 percent
in Atuabo and around 90 percent in Asemdasuazo, even though there is no
feeding program for JHS. On average, the teachers indicated that boys are
more likely to be absent than girls because they engage in fishing and other
menial jobs to supplement family incomes.

5-92
Dropout rates at both the primary and JHS sections are low, at about two
percent according to teachers and in Asemdasuazo, no one has dropped out in
the past two years. Reasons given for students dropping out include teenage
pregnancy, economic constraints and emigration. On average, girls are more
likely to drop out than boys. Notably, more teenage pregnancy cases were
reported in the primary section than the JHS with two cases being reported in
Atuabo for the current academic year alone. Teachers cited a lack of sex
education/awareness on contraception taught at the primary level as a cause.
In general a girl would be unlikely to return to school after giving birth
because of the stigma attached to her pregnancy although some girls do return
to class, leaving their parents to look after the infants.
The Atuabo JHS final year students attained a 100 percent pass rate for the
national BECE exams in 2011.
Skills Development and Adult Education
No literacy statistics for the Study Area are currently available. However,
District statistics would suggest that literacy amongst adults (over the age of
35) would be approximately 49 percent in rural areas (with males significantly
higher than females) and skills levels would be concomitant with this.
All focus groups raised the need for skills development and training,
particularly aimed at younger men and women, as pre-requisites for local
communities to benefit from development in the area. Numerous women in
the three towns asked about the possibility of adult education programmes
and night schools if the Project were to go ahead. Communities asked that
any training, aimed at preparing local people for employment opportunities,
be undertaken with sufficient time to develop the necessary skills. This would
maximise local benefits from the Project.
5.10.10 Health
There are no health facilities within any of the three communities, although
the Ekabaku Health Centre is situated close to Atuabo (approximately 4 km to
the west), just inside the Ellembelle border with Jomoro. The Centre offers
out-patient care and emergency first aid treatment but currently does not
admit patients as the facilities are dilapidated and are awaiting repair.
Emergency cases are referred to the Eikwe Hospital about 8 km away.
However the lack of ambulances makes transporting patients to hospital very
difficult.
There are no doctors at the Centre but two clinical nurses, two community
health nurses and three casual employees as part of the youth employment
programme (as well as a Peace Corp volunteer on a two year contract working
with district community health programmes). There is also a National Health
insurance scheme employee for record keeping as well as a labourer and
security person.

5-93
The most common diseases for which people visit the Centre are:
Malaria;
Respiratory tract infections;
Skin infections (measles);
Diarrhoea; and
Acute ear infections.
The Centre used to offer maternity services, including a midwife who recently
retired. Most women reportedly go to the hospital to deliver. The Centre sees
approximately 25 - 30 patients per day and is currently adequately staffed for
this demand but would struggle to cope with any large increase in patients.
Basic medicines are stored on site and brought from Takoradi and Rhere are
usually sufficient medicines available.
There is no HIV or TB testing at the Centre and there have been no reported
cases of HIV infections in the area. However, the strong stigma attached to
the disease would discourage reporting.
Condoms are available from the Centre but they are not free. A token
payment of ten pesewas is required, in comparison to the 50 pesewas at a
chemist. The Centre does provide oral contraceptives as well as Depo Provera
injectable contraceptives. Representatives of Marie Stopes, which offers
sexual and reproductive health care assistance, visits the Centre monthly and
women attend those clinics. Generally, the ages of women attending are
reported to be 18 years and older.
Traditional Medicines
Traditional healers generally use herbs (leaves, roots, branches, tree bark) to
treat illnesses, and these treatments could be used alone or in addition to
treatment regimes from a hospital. Traditional healing is an age-old practice,
which is usually handed down from generation to generation. There are two
healers and a traditional priestess in Atuabo and a healer in Asemdasuazo.
Anokyi has not trained healer in the community. One of the Atuabo healers is
certified with the Traditional Healers Association (and his son is studying
traditional medicine practice at the Kwame Nkrumah University of Science
and Technology). He has both an out-patient practice and admits more
serious cases to his facility in Atuabo.
The common illnesses treated by the healers are stroke, malaria, sexual
weakness in men, gastrointestinal disorders, appendicitis (hernia), barrenness
and heart disease. Others include insomnia, high fever, mental disorders,
swollen feet (due to kidney infections, animal/snake/scorpion bites),
respiratory (lung) disorder, convulsions, piles and eye infections (including
some cases of partial blindness).

5-94
The healers reported that the causes of most of the illnesses treated were
lifestyle based and natural (eg stress from hard work is the major factor, bad
eating habits, old age related illnesses (weak knees) and “women’s illness”
(menstrual pain/discomfort).
Many residents also reported collecting their own herbs and plants for basic
medical treatments, like coughs and skin rashes, from around the
communities and within the Study Area, and going to a traditional healer for
more serious ailments. The Ekabaku Centre and the Eikwe hospital provide
valuable services that residents would like to access, however the costs
(transport, consultation and medicines) are prohibitive for general health
requirements. Access to these natural remedies is an important part of
people’s medical regimes.
Figure 5.37 Locally Gathered Herbal Medicine for Measles
An Atuabo Resident uses a traditional herbal remedy for measles
National Health Insurance
A number of the fishermen reported being members of one of the National

Health Insurance schemes and paying monthly contributions. In these cases
services and medications are provided free of charge to members. However,
the majority of local residents do not seem to be members and the main reason

5-95
given for this is people’s limited income, and specifically limited predictable
monthly income.
5.10.11 Tourism
Tourism in Ghana has become a major socio-economic activity and one of the
most important and fastest growing sectors of the Ghanaian economy (1). The
number of tourist arrivals and amount of tourist expenditure has steadily
increased while both public and private investment activity in various tourism
sub-sectors have expanded.
Apart from the economic benefits, tourism is used to present Ghana’s unique
cultural, historical and environmental heritage to the international community
and to educate Ghanaians about their own heritage. The Government of
Ghana intends to use tourism as an alternative development strategy to help
address broad national issues.
The tourism potential in the Western Region is related to the number and
extent of pristine tropical beaches as well as wildlife parks, forests and game
reserves featuring tropical rainforests, inland lakes and rivers. Currently none
are being exploited for tourism in the Study Area.
The Western Region also has the second largest concentration of historic forts
and castles in the country, accounting for seven out of the country’s fifteen
tourist forts registered under the Museums and Monuments Board. Fort
Appolonia (built by the British in 1770) is the only fort in close proximity to
the Study Area in the town of Beyin (approximately 1 km away from Atuabo).
The other recognised tourist attraction in the area is the Nzulezu stilted village
on Lake Tadane about 3.5 km inland of Atuabo.
(1) Jubilee EIA, 2009

5-96
6 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT
6.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides an assessment of the environmental and socio-economic

impacts associated with the Project. Both short-term construction phase
impacts and longer-term operational phase impacts are considered and
presented. A description of the methodology used to assess the characteristics
and significance of impacts, taking into account impact magnitude and
sensitivity of receptors and resources affected, is also provided.
Mitigation measures that Lonrho will implement to avoid, reduce, remediate

or compensate for impacts (as well as actions that will be taken to enhance
Project benefits) are provided in Chapter 7. The impacts that remain following
implementation of mitigation measures are assessed and presented as residual
impact in this chapter.
Cumulative impacts of the Project are assessed in Section 6.4.
This chapter provides an overview of the impact assessment methodology and

then describes the various impacts in a structure as follows.
Assessment Methodology;
Biophysical Impacts - Marine;
Biophysical Impacts - Terrestrial;
Socio-economic Impacts;
Unplanned and Accidental Events; and
Cumulative Impacts.
6.2 SCOPE OF THE IMPACT ASSESSMENT
6.2.1 Project and Associated Activities
Impacts are evaluated in the context of the Project and associated activities.
The Project is fully described in Chapter 3. That chapter also provides details
of planned construction and operation activities including inventory of
emissions. Chapter 3 also provides a description of the embedded controls ie
mitigations that are part of the Project’s design such as pollution prevention
technologies and existing operational controls.
In evaluating Project impacts, the following activities associated with the

construction, operation and decommissioning were considered:
Construction - Marine
Awarding of the contract;

Assembly of heavy machinery and equipment for marine works;

6-1
Transport of fill material from quarry;
Construction of jetty for use during construction;
Construction of breakwater and groyne; and
Digging/dredging of channel, turning circle and berths.
Construction – Terrestrial
Surveying of the site;

Site clearing;
Construction of access roads;
Assembly of heavy machinery and equipment;
Bulldozing, grading and compaction of soil;
Disposal of vegetation and excavation spoils;
Soil excavation; and
Construction of airstrip, warehouses and onshore facilities.
Operation
Operation of port related and onshore facilities;

Vessel movements in and out of terminal area;
Maintenance dredging;
Routine maintenance of equipment; and
Security of facilities.
6.2.2 Resources and Receptors
Impacts are described in the context of the effect of the Project or the Project’s
activity on a biophysical or socio-economic resource or receptor. Through the
ESIA process the following resources or receptors were identified as having
the potential to be effected:
Biophysical Resource or Receptors
Air quality;
Noise levels;
Surface water;
Groundwater;
Geology and soils, soil erosion;
Vegetation including economic trees and crops;
Fauna (excluding livestock); and
Unique physical features.
Socio-economic Resources or Receptors
Land use;
Employment and income;
Community population and ethnicity;
Community relations;
Community health and safety;

6-2
Visual and aesthetics; and
Services (eg water and electricity supply).
6.2.3 Area of Influence
The effects of the Project and Project activities on a particular resource or

receptor will have a spatial (distance) and temporal (time) dimensions, the
scale of which is dependent on a number of factors, including:
Nature of the activity;

Specific resource or receptor;
Sensitivity of that resource or receptor; and
Whether the impact is direct or indirect (eg a secondary effect).
These factors are all incorporated in the definition of the Project’s Area of
Influence (AoI). For the ESIA, the definition of AoI used in the Performance
Standards was applied (IFC, 2012):
This area of influence encompasses, as appropriate:
The area likely to be affected by: (i) the project and the client’s activities and
facilities that are directly owned, operated or managed (including by contractors)
and that are a component of the project; (ii) impacts from unplanned but
predictable developments caused by the project that may occur later or at a
different location; or (iii) indirect project impacts on biodiversity or on ecosystem
services upon which Affected Communities’ livelihoods are dependent.
Associated facilities, which are facilities that are not funded as part of the project
and that would not have been constructed or expanded if the project did not exist
and without which the project would not be viable.
Cumulative impacts that result from the incremental impact, on areas or

resources used or directly impacted by the project, from other existing, planned or
reasonably defined developments at the time the risks and impacts identification
process is conducted.
Specifically the Project’s AoI includes the following:
Direct footprint of the land that will be used. This is generally the land
areas that will be fenced and reserved for the Project and where the public
will not be allowed access;
Direct footprint of the marine area that will be used. This includes the
areas where the physical structures will be built and the harbour area;
A physical distance around the direct footprint at a scale depending on the

emissions related to a particular activity. For example light spill may have
an AoI of 50 metres of more whereas noise emissions may have an AoI of
200 m or more;

6-3
A physical distance around the direct footprint at a scale depending on the
indirect effects of a particular activity. For example, the presence of the
jetty could disrupt the normal transport of coastal sediments which in turn
could have an indirect effect on the pattern of beach erosion and accretion;
and
Associated facilities. In the case of the Project this includes mainly the
land based access routes associated with transport of materials during
construction and operations.
The AoI for a specific resource or receptor is described in each section in the
context of the identified impacts.
6.3 IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY
This section describes the overall approach used for the prediction and
assessment of impacts and the identification of mitigations. As applicable,
specific receptor or resource approaches are described in the particular section.
6.3.1 Overview of Process
The assessment of impacts has proceeded through an iterative process as

follows:
1. Predict. Potential impacts were identified and characterised in terms of

magnitude ie the scale of the effect on the biophysical and socio-economic
environment.
2. Evaluate. The significance (or importance) of the impacts was determined
taking into account the sensitivity of the particular resource or receptor.
3. Mitigate. Mitigation measures to avoid, reduce or manage the impacts
where identified and/or developed and applied.
4. Residual Impact. The scale of the remaining impact was determined and
where required additional mitigation measures were developed.

6-4
Figure 6.1 Prediction, Evaluation and Mitigation of Impacts
6.3.2 Characterising Impacts
In describing impacts in this assessment, various characteristics of an impact

are described. These include aspects of the impacts type as well as spatial and
temporal features. The definitions adopted for this ESIA are described in Box
6.1. Where required, additional or more refined definitions for a specific
resource or receptor are provided in the impact discussion.
In this assessment there is a distinction between those impacts that will occur
or are predicted to occur under normal conditions. These are distinguished
from those associated with impacts that would be associated with non-routine
activities such as accidents (vehicle collisions, fires) and upset process
conditions. For these impacts, a probability factor is also applied as low
(event is unlikely to occur), medium (event may occur infrequently) and high
(event may occur frequently).
Box 6.1 Impact Characteristics
1. Nature of Impact
An impact is a change to a resource or receptor brought about by the presence of a project component or by
the execution of a project related activity. The nature is either negative or positive:
Negative – an impact that is considered to represent an adverse change from the baseline or to introduce a
new undesirable factor.
Positive – an impact that is considered to represent an improvement to the baseline or to introduce a new
desirable factor.
2. Type of Impact
Direct (or primary) – impacts that result from the direct interaction between a planned project activity and
the receiving environment (eg between stack emissions and the ambient air quality).

6-5
Secondary – impacts that result from the primary interaction between the Project and its environment as a
result of subsequent interactions within the environment.
Indirect – impacts that result from other activities that are encouraged to happen as a consequence of the
Project.
3. Temporal Scale of Impact

Temporary - impacts are predicted to be of short duration, reversible and intermittent/occasional in nature.
The receptor will return to a previous state when the impact ceases or after a period of recovery.
Short-term - impacts that are predicted to last only for a limited period (ie during construction) but will
cease on completion of the activity, or as a result of mitigation measures and natural recovery (eg non local
construction workforce-local community interactions).
Long-term - Impacts that will continue for the life of the project, but cease when the project stops operating
(ie 20 years). These will include impacts that may be intermittent or repeated rather than continuous if they
occur over an extended time period.
Permanent - impacts that occur during the development of the Project and cause a permanent change in the
affected receptor or resource that endures substantially beyond the Project lifetime.
Continuous – impacts that occur continuously or frequently during the life of the phase of the Project.
4 Spatial Scale of Impact

Local - impacts that affect locally important environmental resources or are restricted to a single (local)
administrative area or a single community. For this ESIA, local impacts are restricted to the Project site and
adjacent areas.
Regional - impacts that affect regionally important environmental resources or are experienced at a regional
scale as determined by administrative boundaries (ie Western Region).
National - impacts that affect nationally important environmental resources; affect an area that is nationally
important/protected; or have macro-economic consequences (ie Ghana).
International - impacts that affect internationally important resources such as areas protected by
International Conventions.
Trans-boundary - impacts that are experienced in one country as a result of activities in another.
6.3.3 Determining Impact Magnitude
The impact assessment describes what will happen by predicting the impacts
and quantifying the impact magnitude to the extent practical. The term
magnitude incorporates the scale of the various dimensions of the predicted
impact:
Status of compliance with relevant Ghanaian legislation, policies and plans

and any relevant Ghanaian and international (eg Performance Standards
of IFC Guidelines) or industry policies, standards or guidelines;
the nature of the change (what resource or receptor is affected and how);
the spatial extent of the area impacted or proportion of the population or

community affected;
its temporal extent (ie duration, frequency, reversibility); and

6-6
where relevant (accidental or unplanned events), the probability or
likelihood of the impact occurring.
The scale of magnitude (from small to large) is in practice a continuum, and

evaluation along the spectrum requires the exercise of careful professional
judgement and experience. Each impact is evaluated on a case by case basis,
and the rationale for each determination is described.
For biophysical impacts, the definitions for the spatial and temporal
dimension of the magnitude of impacts used in this assessment are provided
in Box 6.2.
For impacts on ecological resources, the criteria used to assess the magnitude
of impacts are presented in Box 6.2 (based on Duinker and Beanlands, 1986).
Box 6.2 Magnitude Criteria for Ecological Impacts
A High Magnitude Impact affects an entire population or species at sufficient magnitude to

cause a decline in abundance and/or change in distribution beyond which natural recruitment
(reproduction, immigration from unaffected areas) would not return that population or species,
or any population or species dependent upon it, to its former level within several generations*.
A high magnitude impact may also adversely affect the integrity of a site, habitat or ecosystem.
A Moderate Magnitude Impact affects a portion of a population and may bring about a change
in abundance and/or distribution over one or more generations*, but does not threaten the
integrity of that population or any population dependent on it. A moderate magnitude impact
may also affect the ecological functioning of a site, habitat or ecosystem but without adversely
affecting its overall integrity. The area affected is also important.
A Low Magnitude Impact affects a specific group of localised individuals within a population
over a short time period (one generation* or less) but does not affect other trophic levels or the
population itself.
* These are generations of the animal / plant species under consideration not human generations. It should
be noted that the restoration potential of an affected habitat also needs to be considered in applying the
above criteria.
For social impacts, the magnitude considers the perspective of those affected
by taking into account the likely perceived importance of the impact, the
ability of people to manage and adapt to change and the extent to which a
human receptor gains or loses access to, or control over socio-economic
resources (1) resulting in a positive or negative effect on their well-being (2).
6.3.4 Sensitivity of Resources and Receptors
The significance of an impact of a given magnitude will depend on the

sensitivity of resources and receptors to that impact.
(1) Socio-economic resources in this context refers to natural, physical, social and financial capital (stock of resources)
(2) A concept combining an individual's health, prosperity, their quality of life, and their satisfaction.

6-7
Biophysical Receptors
For ecological impacts, sensitivity is assigned as low, medium or high based

on the conservation importance of habitats and species. For habitats, these are
based on naturalness, extent, rarity, fragility, diversity and importance as a
community resource. For the sensitivity of individual species, Table 6.1
presents the criteria for deciding on the value or sensitivity of individual
species (1). This approach follows the guidelines produced by the Energy and
Biodiversity Initiative (EBI) (2003) (2).
Table 6.1 Biophysical and Species Value / Sensitivity Criteria
Value / Low Medium High

Sensitivity
Criteria Not protected or listed Not protected or listed Specifically protected under
and common / but may be a species Ghanaian legislation
abundant; or not critical common globally but and/or international
to other ecosystem rare in Ghana, one conventions eg CITIES (3).
functions (eg key prey important to Listed as rare, threatened or
species to other species). ecosystem functions or endangered eg IUCN
one under threat or
population decline.
Socio-economic Receptors
For socio-economic impacts, the degree of sensitivity of a receptor is defined

as the level of resilience (or capacity to cope) with sudden social and economic
changes. The sensitivity of a resource is based on its quality and
value/importance, for example, by its local, regional, national or international
designation, its importance to the local or wider community, or its economic
value (Table 6.2).
Table 6.2 Socio-economic and Health Sensitivity Criteria
Sensitivity Low Medium High

Criteria Those affected able to Able to adapt with Those affected will not be
adapt with relative ease some difficulty and able to adapt to changes and
and maintain pre-impact maintain pre-impact continue to maintain-pre
status status but only with a impact status
degree of support
(1) The above criteria should be applied with a degree of caution. Seasonal variations and species lifecycle stage should be
taken into account when considering species sensitivity. For example, a population might be deemed as more sensitive
during the breeding/spawning and nursery periods.
(2) Energy & Biodiversity Initiative, Integrating Biodiversity into Oil & Gas Development, 2003 - A framework formed by
several leading oil and gas companies working alongside conservation organisations to form a partnership designed to
produce practical guidelines, tools and models to improve the environmental performance of energy operations, reduce
harm to biodiversity, and maximise opportunities for conservation wherever oil and gas resources are developed.
(3) Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora

6-8
Stakeholders may be more sensitive for a variety of reasons and for the
purpose of this scheme the following factors have been considered:
age, gender, race or religion;

land rights and ownership patterns;
income/employment/unemployment;
livelihood (current and extent of livelihood alternatives);
services, eg health, amenities (quality and access);
access to, and use of, natural resources including water;
food security and reliance on subsistence farming;
education/skills;
health or disability;
support networks; and
exclusion or marginalisation (eg degree of access to resources, services and
formalised rights).
6.3.5 Assessment of Significance
For the purposes of this ESIA, the following definition of significance has been
adopted:
“An impact is significant if, in isolation or in combination with other

impacts, it should, in the judgment of the ESIA team, be taken into account
in the decision-making process, including the identification of mitigation
measures (by the Project) and consenting conditions (from Regulators and
Stakeholders).”
There is no statutory definition of ‘significance’ and its determination is

therefore necessarily partially subjective. Criteria for assessing the
significance of impacts stem from the following key elements:
The magnitude (including nature, scale and duration) of the change to the
natural or socio-economic environment (eg an increase in noise, an
increase in employment opportunities), expressed, wherever practicable,
in quantitative terms. The magnitude of all impacts is viewed from the
perspective of those affected by taking into account the likely perceived
importance as understood through stakeholder engagement;
The nature and sensitivity of the impact receptor (physical, biological, or

human). Where the receptor is physical, the assessment considers the
quality, sensitivity to change and importance of the receptor. For a human
receptor, the sensitivity of the household, community or wider societal
group is considered along with their ability to adapt to and manage the
effects of the impact (1).
(1) Although not directly relevant to this assessment, in cases where the receptors were biological, its importance (eg its
local, regional, national or international importance) and its sensitivity to the impact would have been considered.

6-9
For this assessment, significance has been defined based on five levels
described in Box 6.4, and application of the latter three is shown in Table 6.3 for
environmental impacts.
Box 6.3 Categories of Significance
Positive impacts provide resources or receptors, most often people, with positive benefits. It is
noted that concepts of equity need to be considered in assessing the overall positive nature of
some impacts such as economic benefits, or opportunities for employment.
In-significant impacts are where a resource or receptor (including people) will not be affected
in any way by a particular activity or the predicted effect is deemed to be ‘negligible’ or
‘imperceptible’ or is indistinguishable from natural background variations.
An impact of minor significance (‘Minor impact’) is one where an effect will be experienced,
but the impact magnitude is sufficiently small (with or without mitigation) and well within
accepted standards, and/or the receptor is of low sensitivity/value.
An impact of moderate significance (‘Moderate impact’) is one within accepted limits and
standards. Moderate impacts may cover a broad range, from a threshold below which the
impact is minor, up to a level that might be just short of breaching a legal limit. Clearly to
design an activity so that its effects only just avoid breaking a law and/or cause a major impact
is not best practice. The emphasis for moderate impacts is therefore on demonstrating that the
impact has been reduced to a level that is As Low as Reasonably Possible (ALARP). This does
not necessarily mean that ‘Moderate’ impacts have to be reduced to ‘Minor’ impacts, but that
moderate impacts are being managed effectively and efficiently.
An impact of major significance (‘Major impact’) is one where an accepted limit or standard
may be exceeded, or large magnitude impacts occur to highly valued/sensitive
resource/receptors. An aim of ESIA is to get to a position where the Project does not have any
major residual impacts, certainly not ones that would endure into the long-term or extend over
a large area. However, for some aspects there may be major residual impacts after all
practicable mitigation options have been exhausted (ie ALARP has been applied). It is then the
function of regulators and stakeholders to weigh such negative factors against the positive ones
such as employment, in coming to a decision on the Project.

6-10
Table 6.3 Overall Significance Criteria for Environmental Impacts in the ESIA
Low Magnitude Moderate Magnitude High Magnitude

Impact Impact Impact
Low value / low
sensitivity receptor
or resource, within Minor Minor Moderate
standards
Moderate value /
sensitivity receptor
or resource, within Minor Moderate Major
standards
High value /
sensitivity receptor or
resource, exceeding Moderate Major Major
standards
While this matrix applies for well-defined levels of sensitivity and magnitude,
in reality these exist and exist over continuum and occur over a range. In the
same way, the significance of the impacts is occasionally reported as a
combination of and/ or graduation of these significance ratings (for example
minor-moderate).
Significance for Socio-economic Impacts
For social impact assessment, the perceptions of stakeholders, expressed as

opinions around certain issues, can be as important as actual impacts.
Consequently, the concept of perception is explicitly brought into the
evaluation of significance after an impact is evaluated. When an impact is of
significant stakeholder concern, this may be cause to raise the significance
rating. This prompts the formulation of more rigorous and appropriate
mitigation measures which focus on the source of the impact and also address
stakeholder perceptions. The risk of not addressing stakeholder perceptions is
that reputational damage could arise, resulting in the loss of a ‘social licence to
operate’.
Significance for Biophysical Impacts
The significance ratings of biophysical impacts are based on a scientific

information from the baseline studies, professional judgement and experience
on potential impacts, modelled results and legislative limits or limits (eg for
water quality). The biophysical impact significance is therefore not influenced
directly by stakeholder concerns.
However, the results of the biophysical impact assessment are used as a basis
for input to the assessment of the impacts/ effects on the socio-economic
receptors (eg the impacts of contaminated groundwater on local
communities). The results of the socio-economic impact assessment, which
takes stakeholder concerns into account, in turn influences the level of rigour

6-11
of the proposed mitigation measures applied to reduce the biophysical impact.
In addition, stakeholder concerns have been taken into account in the
development of the structure of the impact assessment chapter to ensure that
the issues raised are clearly addressed.
6.3.6 Mitigation Measures
One of the key objectives of an ESIA is to identify and define socially,

environmentally and technically acceptable and cost effective mitigation
measures. These should avoid unnecessary damage to the environment;
safeguard valued or finite resources, natural areas, habitats and ecosystems;
and protect humans and their associated social environments.
Mitigation measures are developed to avoid, reduce, remedy or compensate

for any negative impacts identified, and to create or enhance positive impacts
such as environmental and social benefits. In this context, the term
“mitigation measures” includes operational controls as well as management
actions. These measures are often established through industry standards and
may include:
changes to the design of the project during the design process (eg
changing the development approach);
engineering controls and other physical measures applied (eg waste water
treatment facilities);
operational plans and procedures (eg waste management plans); and
the provision of like-for-like replacement, restoration or compensation.
For impacts that are assessed to be of Major significance, a change in design is

usually required to avoid or reduce these. For impacts assessed to be of
Moderate significance, specific mitigation measures such as engineering
controls are usually required to reduce these impacts to ALARP levels. This
approach takes into account the technical and financial feasibility of mitigation
measures. Impacts assessed to be of Minor significance are usually managed
through good industry practice, operational plans and procedures.
In developing mitigation measures, the first focus is on measures that will

prevent or minimise impacts through the design and management of the
Project rather than on reinstatement and compensation measures. A
‘hierarchy’ of mitigation measures for planned activities and unplanned
events is outlined in Box 6.4 and Box 6.5.

6-12
Box 6.4 Mitigation Hierarchy for Planned Activities
Avoid at Source; Reduce at Source: avoiding or reducing at source through the design of the
Project (eg avoiding by siting or re-routing activity away from sensitive areas or reducing by
restricting the working area or changing the time of the activity).
Abate on Site: add something to the design to abate the impact (eg pollution control
equipment).
Abate at Receptor: if an impact cannot be abated on-site then control measures can be
implemented off-site (eg traffic measures).
Repair or Remedy: some impacts involve unavoidable damage to a resource (eg material
storage areas) and these impacts require repair, restoration and reinstatement measures.
Compensate in Kind; Compensate Through Other Means where other mitigation approaches
are not possible or fully effective, then compensation for loss, damage and disturbance might be
appropriate (eg financial compensation for degrading agricultural land and impacting crop
yields). It is emphasised that compensation to individuals with residual impacts to livelihood
or quality of life will generally be non-financial and will have a focus on restoring livelihoods.
Box 6.5 Mitigation Hierarchy for Unplanned Events
Control: this aims to prevent an incident happening or reduce the risk of it happening to
ALARP through reducing the likelihood of the event (eg preventative maintenance regimes,
traffic calming and speed limits, community road safety awareness training);
Reducing the consequence (eg bunds to contain hazardous substance spills); and
A combination of both of these.
Recovery/Remediation: this includes contingency plans and response, eg Emergency Response

Plans and Procedures.
6.3.7 Determining Residual Impacts
Impact prediction takes into account any mitigation, control and operational
management measures that are part of the project design and project plan. A
residual impact is the impact that is predicted to remain once mitigation
measures have been designed into the intended activity. The residual impacts
are described in terms of their significance in accordance with the categories
identified above.
6.4 UNCERTAINTY
The impact assessment process is not entirely quantitative. As a result of this,

there is a degree of uncertainty inherent in the impact assessment
methodology which relates to two main aspects:
uncertainty in the characterisation of the receiving environment (natural,

physical and socio economic) that is being impacted; and

6-13
uncertainty in the manner in which the environment will respond.
The implications are further described in this section.
6.4.1 Implications of Baseline Data Uncertainty
The assessment relied on secondary data collected through research as well as

primary data collected through data acquisition methods as described in
Chapter 4 and Chapter 5). The data has certain limitations in terms of
completeness that need to be considered. These are described here.
Flora and Fauna
The terrestrial flora fauna surveys were undertaken using transects across the
Project site. Although the location of transects were chosen using professional
judgement to be representative of the Project site, there remains some
uncertainty as to the flora and fauna of other areas not covered by transects.
In addition, because data was collected in only the dry season (with the wet
season primary data analysis underway at the time of writing and which will
be used to supplement the ESIA) determination of seasonality relied on
secondary sources and was not entirely site-specific.
Further information on the extent of the areas of inundation during the wet
season will be appended to the EIS/ ESIA Report after the wet season
sampling during July and August 2012.
Ground and Surface Water Resources
Similarly the identification of surface water bodies and areas of inundation on

and around the site was conducted in the dry season through anecdotal
information from local communities, review of available maps (including
satellite maps) as well as transects through the Project site. Currently there is
limited data available regarding surface water quality (a single sample) as the
baseline description is based on dry season results and no quantitative data
relating to flow in the stream to the north of the Asemdasuazo community.
There remains some uncertainty of these areas of inundation until the wet
season baseline survey is completed.
Further information on the groundwater users will be appended to the EIS/

ESIA Report after the wet season sampling during July and August 2012.
Seasonality
The wet season baseline results will be appended to the Final EIS/ ESIA
Report along with any additional biodiversity mitigation (and further socio-
economic mitigation as required) if it becomes apparent that important species
of plants and animals are present in areas heretofore not considered sensitive.

6-14
6.4.2 Implications of Uncertainty in the Response of the Environment
With regard to uncertainty in the manner in which the environment will

respond, this is common for all impact assessments and particularly pertains
to assessments based on quantitative modeling (ie hydrodynamic modeling
carried out for this impact assessment) and in terms of the response of people
and communities to the Project and its impacts. Site-specific information was
used to the extent possible to form the basis of quantitative modeling. In some
cases this was only available at the regional level (eg for noise). In some cases
estimates were used (eg some economic data). Where uncertainty in response
was considered important it is noted as such in the assessment discussion.
To ensure adequate protection of the environment, the implications of

assessment error associated with uncertainty is addressed in two ways:
First, through the establishment of a monitoring program that will support

the Project through construction and operation. This monitoring program
will evaluate if mitigation measures are being implemented effectively and
if the environment is responding as predicted.
Second, through a systematic community consultation program that aims

to clearly communicate to communities regarding the activities and
predicted impacts of the Project and to listen and respond to their
concerns. Both these programs are discussed further in ESMP in Chapter 9
and the SEP in Annex A.
6.4.3 Implications for the Impact Assessment
As a result of these uncertainties in the baseline data collection and the

anticipation of the response of the environment, a conservative approach has
been developed in the impact assessment. In this way, the implication of the
uncertainty within the impact assessment is therefore that the impact
significance may be overstated.
6.5 IMPACTS ON THE BIOPHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT – TERRESTRIAL
6.5.1 Introduction
This section describes the impacts of the Project and Project activities on
aspects of the terrestrial (land) biophysical environment. This is discussed in
terms of impacts on:
Soils;
Groundwater;
Surface Water;
Flora and Habitats;
Avian Fauna;
Freshwater Fish;

6-15
Air Quality;
Noise and Vibration;
Traffic; and
Visual Character.
Where impacts are predicted to occur, they are discussed in terms of Project
construction, operations or both.
6.5.2 Impacts on Soils
Impact Description
Impacts on soils will occur primarily during Project construction. Site

preparation activities include vegetation clearance, grubbing and grading of
the 514 ha Project site as well as disposal of dredged materials onto the Project
site as infill for site levelling. Site preparation also involves the mobilisation of
equipment and materials and heavy vehicle traffic on the Project, resulting in
soil compaction within the work areas. Impacts associated with site works
include destruction of soil resources and increased potential for soil erosion
(see Figure 6.2).
Disturbance and Loss of Soil Resources

The vegetation clearance, site works and levelling activities across the Project
site involves the removal of large trees, agricultural crops and shrubs as well
as the clearance of any fences and roads using bushcutters, chainsaws,
bulldozers and other machinery. The removal of the vegetation (including
large root systems) and the subsequent excavation and site levelling will result
in the disturbance and removal of top soil across the site.
In addition, the majority of the dredged marine sediments from the capital
dredging works will be used for site fill and to raise the level of the site by
between 1.5 and 3 m. The marine sediments have been identified as suitable
for use as fill material and are expected to be uncontaminated, given the lack
of industrial development in the area. The dredged sediments will be
pumped from the dredging vessels to the Project site in a seawater slurry.
Excess seawater from the dredged material slurry will be drained back to the
sea. However, a portion of this seawater will seep through the dredged
material into the underlying soils, increasing the salinity and changing the soil
characteristics.
Increased Potential for Soil Erosion

The vegetation removal and site works will result in the removal of top soil
layers and general disturbance of soils across the site. This results in the
exposure of bare soils, which increases the susceptibility to erosion by wind
and water from rainfall. This risk of erosion has the potential to result in the
further loss of soils in these areas through soil erosion. This is particularly
severe during periods of heavy rain, during the wet season.

6-16
The effects of increased suspended solids from soil erosion are discussed in
Section 6.5.4.
Figure 6.2 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Soils
Impact Assessment
Loss of Soil Resources

Vegetation removal and levelling activities will be confined to the Project site
and since the site is already relatively flat, levelling will only occur on
localised areas within the footprint of the Project site. Infilling with dredged
material will occur mainly within the footprint of the port infrastructure and
the various facilities. Therefore this negative and direct impact is considered
to have a local extent. The increased soil salinity due to seawater runoff from
the dredged material will be short-term but since the loss of soil resources will
extend after the life of the Project, and the temporal scale of the impact overall
is considered to permanent. The magnitude of this impact is thus considered to
be moderate.
The soils of the area are forest and savannah ochrosols, which are moderately
well-drained and considered fertile, but are easily depleted through exposure
to rainfall. This soil is also common within the area, the sensitivity of the soil
resources are therefore considered to be medium.
The overall significance of this impact prior to mitigation is therefore

considered to be moderate.
Increased Potential for Soil Erosion

Soil erosion is expected to be limited to areas where vegetation has been
cleared and no construction has yet taken place or and the area has not been
revegetated. These areas will be within the Project site and the spatial extent

6-17
of the potential erosion is therefore considered to be local. Areas of bare soil
will be covered with hardstanding or form part of the areas used for facilities
as the Project moves into the operational phase. The temporal scale of the
negative indirect impact is thus considered to be short-term. The magnitude of
this impact is therefore considered to be small.
As above, the affected soils are forest and savannah ochrosols type and are
considered to be of medium sensitivity.

considered to be minor.
Mitigation Measures
The following mitigation measures will be implemented to reduce the impact

on soils:
Suitable top soils will be removed and stockpiled for reuse during site
rehabilitation and landscaping. The topsoil stockpiles shall be stored,
shaped and sited in such a way that they do not interfere with the flow of
any surface water course or to cause water runoff damming or erosion, or
itself be eroded by the action of water. It is recommended that top soil
stockpiles be limited to a height of less than 4 m and side slope of less than
3:1 to maintain soil fertility and to reduce potential erosion.
Areas of the site not used for buildings and infrastructure and not covered
with hard-standing surface will be revegetated and rehabilitated as soon
as possible after disturbance.
Construction zones will be created so as to minimise the work footprint.

Zones will be demarcated and crews will restrict works to demarcated
areas.
Heavy vehicles will be confined to designated working areas and access

roads.
A construction-phase site drainage plan will be established to include

measures to reduce runoff across the site and to minimise erosion.
A monitoring programme shall be established to include a site evaluation

of over land run-off and sedimentation in water courses as well as
effectiveness of erosion control measures (ie netting and sand bags).
Residual Impacts
With strict implementation of the above mentioned mitigation measures, the

magnitude of the loss of soil resources will be decreased such that the
significance is reduced to minor. In the same way, the mitigation measures

6-18
will decrease the magnitude of the potential for increased soil erosion such
that the residual impact will be minor.
Table 6.4 Impact Summary: Impacts on Soil Resources
Impact Pre-mitigation Significance Residual Impact

Significance
Loss of soil resources MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
Increased potential for soil MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE

erosion
6.5.3 Impacts on Groundwater
Impact Description
Impacts on groundwater would occur during construction and operations

associated with: drawdown of available fresh water groundwater resources
due to extraction of water for Project operations; and changes in fresh water
groundwater quality due to infiltration of seawater (Figure 6.3).
Drawdown
The construction and operation of the facility will require fresh water mainly
for domestic purposes at offices and accommodation facilities. Apart from
domestic use, water will also be required for operation of the industrial
facilities for routine cleaning of equipment, plant and storage areas. Water
will be required for fire fighting systems on a non-routine basis. There are no
requirements for large-volumes of fresh water for processes (eg cooling
water).
The Project will install boreholes into the deep fresh water limestone aquifer
(located at between 120 and 300 m below ground level) to provide water for
the Project. Although the aquifer is relatively large in terms of volume, there
is the potential that this extraction of water could cause a reduction in the
availability to other users of the deep fresh water aquifer through drawdown
effects on the groundwater table. However, abstraction from the limestone
aquifer is not expected to have a major influence on the upper sand aquifer as
these aquifers are separated already by a saline intermediate aquifer layer and
are likely not hydraulically connected. The wet season sampling will identify
the groundwater users close to the site and confirm the results of the impact
assessment and be appended to the Final ESIA Report.
Deterioration of Water Quality

The harbour will be created by digging out a portion of the land near the coast
and the near shore area will also be dredged to deepen the approach and inner
harbour area. As described above (Section 6.5.2), excess seawater from the
dredged material slurry used for infill across the site will be drained back to
the sea. However, a portion of this seawater will seep through the dredged
material into the underlying soils and groundwater as it flows towards the

6-19
sea. The intrusion and flow of excess seawater will increase the salinity of the
shallow aquifer groundwater resources. This has the potential to affect
groundwater users within the three local communities, who access water for
domestic and drinking purposes from shallow hand-dug wells into the sandy
upper aquifer.
Removal of the land and capital dredging during construction has the
potential to alter the physical characteristics of the interface between the
aquifer and sea water. Removal of the land at the shoreline and dredging of
sediment will place salt water in direct contact with the soil horizon and will
allow seawater intrusion into the shallow sandy aquifer (2-5 m). In addition,
removal of fine sediment would result in increased soil permeability and
increase in the rate by which sea water is able to permeate the upper sandy
aquifer, potentially affecting the water quality (ie becoming more saline). The
extent of the salt water infiltration was not modelled but is expected to be
limited to within the site boundary. Infiltration of salt water into the fresh
water groundwater layers would negatively affect the fresh water
groundwater quality in the upper aquifer with the potential to render it
unusable as potable water.
Equilibrium will be reached following construction and the salt and fresh
water interaction zone will return close to its original location in the
subsurface.
Abstraction of fresh water for the Project from the deep freshwater aquifer
also has the potential to lower the static water levels between the main aquifer
systems and affect the rate and extent of salt water infiltration. Abstraction
from the limestone aquifer is not expected to have a major influence on the
sand aquifer as these aquifers are separated already by a saline intermediate
aquifer layer and are likely not hydraulically connected. The linkage between
the upper fresh water aquifer (in primarily sand) and the deeper freshwater
aquifer (primarily limestone) at the specific location where boreholes will be
installed must still be investigated.

6-20
Figure 6.3 Impact Diagram - Impacts to Groundwater
Impact Assessment
Drawdown
The drawdown impacts leading to increased depth to groundwater are likely
to be confined to the local area (around the location below the ground where
water is extracted by the borehole) but will persist for the life of the Project ie
long term. The negative and direct impact is therefore considered to be of small
magnitude.
In terms of sensitivity, local users predominantly extract water from the

shallow fresh water aquifer using shallow-dug wells. The Project will
however draw from the deeper fresh water aquifer and because of the high
storativity and transmissivity of the sand aquifer the abstraction system could
create a relatively large sphere of influence and potentially effect infiltration in
the upper freshwater aquifer. Given the high dependence of local
communities on groundwater from the shallow sandy aquifer, the sensitivity
is thus considered to be medium.
The overall significance is therefore considered to be minor.
Deterioration of Water Quality

The impact of saltwater intrusion and increased salinity from seawater runoff
is not expected to extend beyond the Project site and immediate surroundings.
The extent of the deterioration of fresh water groundwater resources is
therefore considered to be local (around the areas where sediment is used as
fill and around the harbour). The negative and direct impact is considered to
be short-term as the effect will decrease following construction as a new salt
and freshwater equilibrium is established close to the current location. The
impact magnitude is therefore considered to be small.
The three communities predominantly use the shallow fresh water aquifer for
drinking water and domestic water. The water is generally fresh (in terms of

6-21
salinity) although certain wells were determined to be high in bacterial
contamination. Regardless, the sensitivity of the receptor to an increase in
salinity is therefore considered to be of high.
The significance of the impact on groundwater (increased salinity) is therefore

Impact Mitigation
The following mitigation measures will be implemented to mitigate impacts

on groundwater:
Prior to installation of boreholes for Project water supply, the Project will
undertake a comprehensive study of groundwater resources with the
intention to consider the specific groundwater conditions in the final
design of the water abstraction and supply systems (ie borehole locations
and rates). On a site-specific level (ie for the Project site and neighbouring
areas), the study will characterise the various groundwater aquifers and
interconnection/relationship and include measurements of depths of
groundwater, determination of groundwater characteristics, determination
of aquifer flow properties, and extraction groundwater yield estimates. It
is recommended that a hydrogeological field work programme be
undertaken to include a geophysical survey, drilling of testing and
monitoring wells, aquifer testing and numerical modelling to assess the
groundwater regime. This will provide information to guide the siting of
well locations with consideration of sustainable yields and minimising
effects on the groundwater regime.
The Project will develop and implement a Groundwater Management Plan

to ensure that Project water use is optimised. The plan will consider the
results of groundwater studies and specify means to minimise water use
and abstraction through technologies (eg low-flow devices) and
operational controls.
The Project shall develop and implement a groundwater monitoring

programme to monitor water quality during construction and over the life
of the Project. Monitoring will cover groundwater near the harbour as
well as in the communities and both the sand and limestone aquifers.
Monitoring will include evaluation of groundwater conditions and water
quality.
Residual Impacts
The demand for Project water from the shallow sandy aquifer is avoided by
sourcing water from the deeper limestone aquifer. In addition, any potential
for effects would be reduced by proper water supply design and
implementation of water use reduction programmes. This will reduce the
localised groundwater drawdown magnitude but remains minor significance
impact.

6-22
There are no feasible mitigation measures to manage seawater intrusion due
to dredging and this impact will remain of moderate significance on the
groundwater resource.
Table 6.5 Impact Summary: Impacts on Groundwater

Significance
Drawdown MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
Deterioration of water quality MODERATE NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE
6.5.4 Impacts on Surface Water
There are no permanent water courses on the Project site. There are however
a number of small ponds as well as wetlands that are reported (by local
communities) to have seasonal water inundation patterns. The nearest major
permanent surface water course outside of the site is more than 1 km from the
site (close to Asemdasuazo) and upstream of the surface water flow direction
(generally north to south) (Figure 4.19).
Amansuri Lake is approximately 3 km to the northwest of the site. The lake

receives perennial flow from two rivers located upstream of the site. There is
no detectable connection to the lake through groundwater either. Therefore
impacts with respect to changes in surface water levels or quality of the Lake
due to the Project are considered to be negligible and are not assessed further.
Impacts on surface water resources during construction and operations

include permanent loss of surface water resources on the site; and effects
related to permanent changes in surface water drainage patterns. During
construction there is the potential to increase siltation and effect surface water
quality through runoff of exposed soils (Figure 6.4).
The secondary ecological effects that could result from the removal of the
seasonal wetland within the project footprint or to changes to drainage
patterns hydrology and water quality in the seasonal wetland system are
addressed in Section 6.5.5 and Section 6.5.7.
Impact Description
Removal of Surface Water Bodies

Small area of perennial surface water within the Project footprint will be
permanently removed through site levelling and infill which is expected to
occur across the Project site. Further information on the extent of the areas of
inundation during the wet season will be appended to the EIS/ ESIA Report
after the wet season sampling during July and August 2012.

6-23
The impacts of the removal of these surface water bodies on freshwater fish
are assessed in Section 6.5.9.
Change in Drainage Patterns

The development of the Project will require infill and levelling. In some
locations fill will be used to raise the ground elevation. The result will be a
change in topography and thus a change in surface water drainage patterns
within portions of the site as well as areas directly adjacent to the site. The
During periods of high rainfall, the seasonal wetland located on the western
portion of the Project site may have a weak hydraulic connection to the larger
wetland system to the north and west of the site. During these periods there
may be impacts on the hydrology and water quality of the neighbouring
seasonal wetlands due to the change in flow patterns created by development
of the site. Impacts could include an increase in water flow due to runoff from
the site drainage systems, or damming effects caused by raised areas of the
Project site.
Increased Siltation
As assessed in Section6.5.2, the vegetation removal and exposure of bare soils
will result in increased risks of erosion across the site. This has the potential
to cause a secondary impact on the water quality as a result of increased
sedimentation should runoff from the site enter neighbouring surface water
bodies during high rainfall events. The nearest permanent surface water
bodies are a stream and pond located approximately 1 km to the north of the
Asemdaduzo community. Although this is hydraulically upstream for the
current drainage pattern, changes in drainage could result in flow from the
site to the stream and pond. Runoff could increase siltation and affect the
general surface water quality.
Figure 6.4 Impact Diagram – Impact on Surface Water
Impact Assessment
Removal of Surface Water Bodies

The impact of the removal of surface water bodies through infilling of the
Project site will be negative, direct but limited to areas on the Project site and

6-24
as such is considered local in extent. The impact will be permanent as the
removal of the surface water bodies will be a permanent change. The
magnitude is therefore considered to be small.
Based on limited sampling, the pH of the nearby stream was found to be

mildly acidic with elevated concentrations of metals associated with
anthropogenic activities (ie caused by people). Based on this water quality
sample the stream is considered to be a medium value receptor.
The overall impact due the removal of the surface water bodies on the Project
site is therefore considered to be minor.
Change in Drainage Patterns

The change in site topography will result in a change in drainage patterns of
seasonal freshwater bodies on the Project site as well as the immediately
neighbouring areas and the negative, direct and indirect impact are thus
considered to be local. The change in topography and therefore drainage
patterns will extend beyond the operational phase and will be permanent.
The overall magnitude is therefore considered to be medium.
The surface water systems are seasonal in nature, located at the bottom of a
catchment and relatively small in a regional scale. In addition, they are not
unique and many similar small systems occur along the coast and do not
provide surface water flow to the sensitive Amansuri wetland areas to the
northwest. The affected surface water bodies are therefore considered to be of
medium sensitivity.
The overall significance of the impacts due to the change in surface water
drainage is therefore considered to be moderate.
Increased Siltation
The impact on water quality on the closest stream close to Asemdasuazo due
to increased sedimentation would only occur during high rainfall events as
the site is more than 1 km from the stream. This sedimentation would result
in increased in turbidity and levels of suspended solid material during the
high rainfall events, after which the suspended solids will settle from the
water column. The impacts would therefore be temporary as the turbidity
levels will return to previous levels. The impact will be limited to the local
area and therefore considered to be of small magnitude.
As above, the sensitivity of the surface water systems is considered to be

moderate and the overall impact is therefore considered to be of minor
significance.
Mitigation Measures
The following mitigation measures will be implemented:

6-25
The Project will develop a site drainage and stormwater management plan
(refer to Annex L for preliminary plan). The plan will include the design of
drainage system to address runoff from the site to the adjacent areas. The
system design will account for seasonal periods of heavy rainfall and be
sized to handle for 1 in 100 year 24 hour storm event. The design of the
system should be based on further studies of groundwater and surface
water flows surrounding the site to ensure that changes in flows to
neighbouring surface water bodies are avoided or minimised.
All potentially dirty stormwater (eg has come in contact with industrial
areas, equipment, highly silted) will be treated (using silt traps and oil/
water separators) to meet the applicable regulatory standards prior to
discharge to the environment.
The construction activities will be carried out using best practice erosion
and sediment control measures. This would include use of equipment and
operational controls such as silt traps, covering soil stockpiles in high-
wind conditions and during the wet season; silt fences, interceptor ditches
and berms, rock check dams, sediment ponds, mulches, mats or netting.
Residual Impact
The implementation of the mitigation measures will further reduce the

potential for sediment runoff and act to control the change in surface water
flow to neighbouring areas, reducing the magnitude of these impacts. The
residual impacts will remain of minor significance for removal of surface
water bodies and change in drainage pattern. The impact of increased
siltation will be reduced to negligible after the implementation of mitigation.
Table 6.6 Impact Summary: Impacts on Surface Water

Significance
Removal of surface water bodies MINOR NEGATIE MINOR NEGATIVE
Change in drainage patterns MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
Increased siltation MINOR NEGATIVE NEGLIGIBLE
6.5.5 Impacts on Terrestrial Flora and Habitats: Construction
Direct impacts to terrestrial flora (plants) and to the habitats that are created
by the flora will occur during construction due to site clearing (Figure 6.5).
The removal of the flora and habitats will also have secondary effects on fauna
that rely on the habitats (described in Chapter 4) including insects and avian
fauna which rely on large trees and local flora for their survival (as assessed in
Section 6.5.7).

6-26
Impact Description
The site preparation activities will include vegetation clearance across the
Project site. In this way, the local, and to some extent the regional, vegetation
composition will be impacted by clearing and levelling during construction.
In addition, the change in the natural drainage regime of the region as a result
of the infill and changes in site topography could also have secondary impacts
on flora related to water supply. This would include the potential to cause
‘die back’ in areas where either the supply of water to the vegetation has been
or the quality of water has changed (ie salinity is increased).
During site clearance and construction activities, approximately 514 ha of

vegetation will be cleared. Topsoil over this area will also be disturbed. This
will result in the loss of habitat and a fragmentation of areas of continuous
habitat. Based on the baseline surveys, the habitats that will be cleared
include low-lying wetland vegetation, secondary growth forest and open
grasslands (some of which are seasonal wetlands).
Vegetation clearing may allow for opportunistic grass species (and any other
species) to grow in place of the original flora and thus change the regional
overall pattern of vegetation. An opportunity for invasion by opportunistic
alien species is also created.
Further reductions in natural vegetation and habitats could occur if new areas
of land outside the Project footprint were cleared for farming and firewood
collection to replace areas that were acquired for the Project.
Figure 6.5 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Terrestrial Flora and Habitats (Construction)
Impact Assessment
The loss of vegetation is expected to affect local species and habitats as the
impact is restricted to the Project site and immediate surroundings. This

6-27
impact is, however, permanent as the cleared areas will be converted to
hardstanding in many places and in all cases converted for industrial use. The
magnitude of this impact is thus considered to be medium.
The vegetation in the area is largely already disturbed for agricultural

purposes and no fully natural habitats occur within the Project site, although
some natural areas occur to the north. The number of endemic or rare species
in the vicinity of the Project site is low and the sensitivity of local flora and
habitats is therefore considered to be low.
The overall significance of the loss of vegetation and habitats during

construction is therefore minor.
Mitigation Measures
The following measures will be carried out specifically to reduce impacts on

terrestrial flora and habitats:
To the extent possible vegetation clearance will be limited to the areas

required for the Project development. Work areas will be clearly
demarcated to ensure that the disruption of vegetation does not occur
outside of designated areas.
Areas that are cleared for temporary facilities should be restored and
revegetated. Ensure that any re-vegetation uses locally sourced and
indigenous plants.
To the extent possible, plan clearing such that it retains habitat corridors
that allow movement of animal species between disconnected areas of
natural habitat.
Residual Impacts
Limiting vegetation clearance to what is require and restricting disturbance to

the Project site will help to reduce the magnitude of the impacts on habitats
and flora. The residual impact of destruction of vegetation and habitats is
however expected to remain minor.
Table 6.7 Impact Summary: Impacts on Flora and Habitats (Construction)
Impact Pre-mitigation Residual Impact

Significance Significance
Loss and disturbance of existing MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
flora and habitats

6-28
6.5.6 Impacts on Terrestrial Flora and Habitats: Operation
Impact Description
As discussed in Section 6.5.4, the change in topography as well as the Project’s

drainage system will result in an overall change in surface water drainage
patterns on the site as well as to areas adjacent to the site. This could affect
vegetation in these areas and cause die back (Figure 6.6).
Figure 6.6 Impact Diagram - Impacts on Terrestrial Flora and Habitats (Operation)
Impact Assessment
The spatial extent of reduced habitat health as a result of operational activities

associated with the Project is considered to be local. The temporal extent of
this impact is expected to be long-term as changes to drainage or the
introduction of new plant species into the region will not be easily reversible.
Thus the magnitude of this impact is medium.
The sensitivity of the vegetation is considered to be low, as the plant

composition is dominated by green star species (those of no conservation
concern) and those “Not Evaluated” by the IUCN (primarily weeds) (Section
4.9). Furthermore the type of vegetation found in the area is not endemic, and
occurs throughout the region.
The overall magnitude of this impact is thus considered to be minor.
Mitigation Measures
Effects to flora and habitats during operation are related to changes in surface
water drainage (Section 6.5.4). Implementation of measures for management
of surface water will act to reduce or eliminate the secondary effects on flora
and habitats.
Residual Impacts
The implementation of the mitigation measures will reduce the magnitude of

the impact, but the residual impact is will remain of minor significance.

6-29
Table 6.8 Impact Summary: Impacts on Flora and Habitats (Operation)
Impact Pre-mitigation Residual Impact

Significance Significance
Change in habitat and floral MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
composition
6.5.7 Impacts on Terrestrial Fauna
Project activities have the potential to impact terrestrial fauna during

construction and operations. During construction, there would be indirect
impacts due to the loss of habitat. There will also be direct impacts due to the
effects of noise, light and dust. During operation, there is also the potential for
direct impacts from traffic, noise, light and dust (Figure 6.7).
Baseline surveys indicate that only limited wild animals occur in the area of
the Project. There are a number of species of conservation importance within
the Ankasa Resource Reserve, but this area is more than 25 km from the
Project site and none of these species were sighted within the Project site and
surroundings during the baseline surveys and there are no impacts expected.
However, there are approximately ten bird species that are listed on the IUCN
Red List of Threatened Species (GWS, 2006), which occur within the region
and can be expected to fly through the Project site, due to the proximity of the
Amansuri Wetland. For example, although there are no recent confirmed
sightings (during baseline studies), the hooded vulture (Necrosyrtes monachus)
(one of these endangered species) could occur in open grassland, as it is
characteristic of their feeding habitat.
Impact Description
Construction activities such as chopping and clearing of vegetation, site

levelling, site filling, and construction of roads, infrastructure and buildings
will result in the disturbance of local fauna. This would be in terms of direct
loss of habitats, restriction of movement, as well as direct loss of nests and
burrows. Vegetation destruction will also result in fragmentation of habitat
with implications for animals which migrate or move through the Project site
to different areas.
The dust, light, noise and vibration from construction activities such as truck
movements, piling, dumping of breakwater rock and other construction
activities and the presence of larger numbers of people in the area will also
result in direct disturbance to local fauna. It could also affect breeding and
nesting patterns. Bird species in particular are sensitive to noise, vibration,
and light, which would have an effect on their behaviour.
During operation, the noise emissions from the port operations and the
aircraft will result in further disturbance of fauna close to the site. This will

6-30
have particular impacts on avian fauna which may have the Project site
included as part of their habitat distribution.
Hunting may also increase during construction and operation in the areas
surrounding the Project site due to higher population numbers related to
influx into the area (Section 6.7.3).
Figure 6.7 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Terrestrial Fauna
Impact Assessment
The disturbance and possible mortality of animals is expected to affect species

within the Project site and direct surroundings, and the impacts is considered
to be negative and direct, but local in extent. The temporal nature of this
impact is considered to be permanent as the fauna on the site will have limited
opportunity to re-establish former distribution, and due to the permanent
change in habitats. The magnitude of this impact is thus considered to be
moderate.
The local fauna are considered to have an overall moderate sensitivity to this
impact.
The overall significance of disturbance and mortality to fauna is considered to

be moderate.
Mitigation Measures
The following measures will be carried out specifically to reduce impacts on

terrestrial fauna:
The Project will ensure that all workers are aware of the importance of
ecological resources and how to protect them (including awareness-raising
regarding illegal hunting and bushmeat). This will be done through
training and awareness raising campaigns. The training will include

6-31
instruction on how to reduce impacts on ecological resources through
construction approaches and techniques.
The Project will establish rules and ensure that equipment and vehicle
drivers are trained to minimise disturbance to fauna, especially those
which may be nocturnal or have specific migratory routes. At a minimum
speed controls shall be established and enforced.
The Project will take measures to minimise dust, light, noise and vibration
to reduce disturbance to animals during construction and operations
(described elsewhere).
Residual Impacts
Increased awareness of the importance of local fauna species amongst workers

should act to minimise effects. However, as a result of vegetation clearing and
the associated habitat loss, the significance of this impact remains minor.
Table 6.9 Impact Summary: Impacts on Terrestrial Fauna

Significance
Disturbance and mortality MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
6.5.8 Impacts on Avian Fauna - Bird Strikes
Due to the unique interaction with of activities associated with the operation
of the airstrip potential impacts on birds due to collisions with aircraft (termed
bird strikes) are discussed separately in this section (Figure 6.8).
Impact Description
The airstrip and helipad is expected to accommodate 1633 fixed wing and
2700 helicopter landings annually. The significant number of landings
increases the potential for bird strikes. Bird strike risk is highest during
aircraft take-off and approach for landing, and generally occurs at a height of
about 250 m above the ground. Thus, bird strikes are more likely to occur
beyond the perimeter of the Project site.
A great diversity of bird species are known to inhabit the Western Region.
The diversity is attributed to the unique habitats of the evergreen forest
characterising the region, in particular in the area of the Amasuri wetland.
The Amansuri wetland is a relatively pristine complex consisting of a
freshwater lagoon, forests, grasslands and rivers, and has an extensive
remaining stand of intact swamp forest (Microfere, 2012).

6-32
The Amansuri wetland, located approximately 3 km from the Project Site
(Figure 4.19), has relatively high bird species diversity and also is associated
with a significant number of migrant bird species. The wetland is classified by
Birdlife International as an Important Bird Area (IBA) in Ghana.
The wetland is a community-protected area that was formed by a partnership

between the Ghana Wildlife Society and the people of the Western Nzema
community.
The risk of bird strikes is dependent on various factors, which include the
specific behavioural characteristics of the bird species present. Those species
which are likely to inhabit open plains, flock together and take flight from
open areas, are more likely to interact with aircraft movement. Avian species
with these characteristics include the hooded vulture, green-tailed bristlebill,
grey parrot, olive greenbull and copper-tailed glossy starling. These are all
known to be located within neighbouring habitats such as wetlands or the
seashore.
There are approximately ten bird species that are listed on the IUCN Red List
of Threatened Species (GWS, 2006), which occur within the region and can be
expected to fly past or around the Project site (due to the proximity of the
Amansuri wetland). However, the bird species that characterise the area are
also known to fly at a height of more than 250 m, where bird strikes from
aircraft are less likely.
Figure 6.8 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Avian Fauna (Bird Strikes)
Impact Assessment
The impact will be direct and negative. The temporal extent of this impact is
continuous throughout the operational phase. The spatial extent of the impact
will be local as the bird strikes would also be experienced outside of the Project
site. The magnitude is therefore considered to be medium.
The sensitivity is thus considered to be medium since some of the sensitive

birds around the site are known to fly in lower risk areas of above 250 m
height.
The overall significance of this impact is therefore considered to be moderate

prior to mitigation.

6-33
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures are designed to reduce the risk of bird strikes through
avoidance techniques.
Flight Path Design

The following measures will be implemented to reduce the potential for
interaction with birds:
The Project will develop landing and take-off flight paths in consideration
of bird flight patterns especially with respect to the Amansuri wetland.
The flight path design, as well as the flight schedules (times for take-off
and landing) will be developed in consultation with a qualified bird
specialist so that bird flight patterns and other activities (migration,
nesting) are considered and the effects minimised.
Reduce Habitat Suitability

The following measures will be taken to reduce the suitability of habitat
around the airstrip for birds:
Vegetation around the airstrip and helipad will be maintained to avoid

attracting bird species. The grass along the length of the airstrip and
helipad will be kept short to decrease the suitability of the habitat for
birds.
The Project will maintain adequate waste management practices to avoid

the attracting birds to open waste storage and food waste. Measures will
include good housekeeping and reducing access by covering waste.
The Project will take measures to ensure that no water ponds are created
around the airstrip by proper levelling and drainage.
Buildings and structures close to the runway will be designed so as to

restrict bird perching or nesting. Protective equipment will be installed as
necessary (eg reflective devices, spikes).
The Project will implement a programme to monitor and record any and
all Project-related birdstrike incidents. This data shall be used to determine
additional mitigation measures to reduce birdstrikes, if required. In
particular records should record species, number of birds affected, time of
the strike, height and location of the strike. Should patterns emerge
specifically on the time of day or height at which bird strikes occur, this
will be mitigated through changes in the flight schedule or flight path.
The Project will consider the need for methods to chase birds away from
the airstrip such as noise, lighting, or use of animals. The need for such
measures will be dependent on consultation with a bird specialist and in
the event that bird strikes are occurring routinely.

6-34
Residual Impacts

residual impacts on avian fauna is expected to be minor.
Table 6.10 Impact Summary: Impacts on Avian Fauna – Bird Strikes
Impact Pre-mitigation Significance Residual Impact Significance

Bird strikes MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
6.5.9 Impacts to Freshwater Fish
The potential impacts on freshwater fish are discussed in this section (Figure
6.9). Impacts on local communities associated with reduction in fish catches
are discussed in Section 6.7.3.
Impact Description
As assessed in Section 6.5.4, the infilling of the site will result in the removal of
small freshwater bodies on the Project site. This will result in the removal of
suitable habitat, mortality of freshwater fish within these ponds as well as the
decrease in suitable habitat within the Project area.
Similarly changes in the drainage pattern around the Project site (see Section
6.5.4) may impact on the freshwater habitats by increasing flow regimes and
increasing input of silt. The increased turbidity could in turn effect freshwater
fish that inhabit the water bodies through abrasion of gills, disturbance of
feeding patterns (especially when visual feeders) and smothering of smaller
aquatic organisms which could be food for fish species.
Further contamination could occur as a result of unplanned events and

accidents (see Section 6.1.1). This may result in decreased suitability of habitat
for freshwater fish as a result of increased toxicity levels.
Figure 6.9 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Freshwater Fish

6-35
Impact Assessment
The spatial extent of the destruction of aquatic habitat is considered to be

regional as although areas within the Project site will be levelled and cleared,
the changes in drainage pattern may impact surrounding freshwater bodies.
The effects of habitat destruction will be long standing the topography and
drainage of the Project site will be altered permanently. The magnitude of
habitat destruction on fresh water fish is considered to be medium.
Freshwater fish are vulnerable to major decreases in surface water levels but
the freshwater species identified in the areas surrounding the Project sites are
not considered particularly sensitive (no IUCN listed species). The sensitivity
is therefore considered to be medium.
The overall significance of this impact on freshwater fish is considered to be

moderate.
Mitigation Measures
Measures implemented to avoid or minimise the impact on surface water will

in turn reduce the impact on fish.
The Project will establish a baseline for remaining fishing ponds used by the
three local communities (outside of the Project site) and monitor the fish
populations throughout the construction and operational phase.
Residual Impacts
With the strict implementation of the mitigation measures the magnitude of

the dust impact will be reduced such that the residual significance is
Table 6.11 Impact Summary: Impacts on Freshwater Fish

Significance
Disturbance of freshwater fish MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
6.5.10 Impacts on Air Quality: Construction
Project activities will result in pollutants released to the air. During

construction this will include pollutants in exhaust gases from engines,
including greenhouse gases (GHG) (assessed in Section 6.5.12) and dust.
Emissions have the potential to degrade air quality and to cause indirect
effects such as impacts on ecological and community health. The significance
ratings of construction phase impacts on air quality are described in this
section.

6-36
Impacts to ecological and human receptors are discussed in Section 6.5.7 .
Impact Description
Pollutants
The air in the Project area is at present generally non-polluted as evidenced by
low levels of nitrogen oxides (NOx), sulphur dioxide (SO2), carbon monoxide
(CO) and volatile organic compounds detected by photo-ionisation detector
(PID) detected in the Project area including the three communities adjacent to
the Project site. These levels are shown in Table 6.12along with a comparison
with WHO air quality guidelines limits for each parameter, indicating that all
parameters are well below WHO limits. These low levels of pollutants are
consistent with the low levels of industrial activity in the region and evidence
of the rural setting.
Table 6.12 Mean Hourly Levels of Gas Pollutants
Pollutant WHO Air quality Atuabo (µg/m³) Anyorki Asemdasuazo

guideline (µg/m³) (µg/m³) (µg/m³)
NOx 200 (hourly maximum) 18.3 16.5 15.5
SO2 500 (10 minute mean) 170 188 178
CO 30,000 (1 hour mean) 942 732 191
VOC n/a 0.104 ppm 0.122 ppm 0.042 ppm
TSP n/a 9.70 12.3 5.56
PM1 n/a 3.65 3.28 1.13
PM2.5 25 (24 hour mean) 7.44 9.20 3.25
PM10 50 (24 hour mean) 9.82 12.1 5.19
Note: The WHO do not set a 1 hour mean standard for SO2, PM10 or PM2.5; the 10 minute mean
and 24 hour mean is presented for comparison
Based on a comparison with the UK Daily Air Quality Index (recommended

by the Committee on Medical Effects of Air Pollutants (COMEAP))
(COMEAP, 2012), the baseline air pollution banding of the Project area is
considered to be low (Chapter 4), not is not associated with negative health
effects.
The main sources of air emissions (continuous and non-continuous) during

construction will be machinery associated with construction (both onshore
and offshore), diesel-fired power generators, vehicles, and marine vessels
used for supply and logistics. In summary air emissions will be associated
with the following activities:
operation of fuel-powered construction machinery, vehicles, marine

vessels and temporary power generators;
welding; and
hydrocarbons and other volatile chemicals associated with the storage and
handling of fuels and chemicals.

6-37
Emissions during construction will vary in magnitude, frequency, and
duration depending on the activity.
Dust
Construction activities have the potential to generate emissions of particulate
matter (in the way of dust) by vehicles on dirt roads, site levelling, earth
moving, vegetation clearing, rock dumping and onshore fill activities.
Elevated levels of dust are primarily associated with nuisance effect; however
dust can have effects on human and ecological health at high levels. Nuisance
effects are created by dust depositing on surfaces, such as window sills, roofs,
and vehicles. In considering potential receptors, the United States
Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) (EPA, 1995) guidance is the
following:
“… [dust particles 10-30µm in diameter] are likely to settle within a few

hundred feet [30-90m]… from the edge of the road or other point of emission.”
Spread of dust is affected by weather conditions such as rainfall and wind

speed. Dust emissions would be negligible during wet periods and periods of
low wind. Precipitation of greater than 0.2 mm/h will affectively attenuate
dust and wind speeds of >5.3 m/s (approx. 19 km/h) would be required to lift
dust from open surfaces. Besides natural effects, dust can be created by
mechanical movement over exposed surfaces and the wind speed required to
lift dust generated by mechanical means (ie during excavation and due to the
movement of vehicles over unpaved surfaces) is lower, at around 3 m/s
(approximately 10 km/h).
Average wind speed in the area ranges from 1.23 m/s to 1.65 m/s. Conditions
for dust generation do not occur year-round, and are limited to periods when
the wind speed is above the annual average. In terms of Project construction
and dust emissions, the following is predicted:
At all but the very high wind speeds, dust will travel up to a maximum of
200 m from source before settling to the ground;
Even at high wind speeds, dust is unlikely to travel more than 500 m from
source; and
Precipitation of >0.2 mm/hour is likely to effectively attenuate dust

emissions.

6-38
Figure 6.10 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Air Quality (Construction)
Impact Assessment
Air Pollutants
Some degradation in air quality is expected as a result of exhaust emissions
and of release pollutants such as CO, NOx, SO2 and VOCs into the
atmosphere. The construction period is expected to last approximately 18
months and the activities associated with emissions are likely to occur for the
duration of this period but will cease after the construction period (although
other emissions will occur during operations) and are thus considered short-
term. The spatial extent of degradation in air quality resulting from emission
sources and activities on the site will be local. The magnitude of this direct,
negative impact is therefore considered small.
The current air quality is good with adequate capacity to buffer pollutants at
the levels expected to be emitted by Project activities (Chapter 3). The
sensitivity of the air is considered to be low.
The significance of the impact is thus minor.
Dust
The construction period is expected to last approximately 18 months and the
dust-generating activities are likely to occur for the duration of this period but
will cease after the construction period ends and are thus considered short-
term.
Dust would travel less than 200 m from the source area and areas that would
be predicted to be worst affected are those to the north east of the Project site
(ie including the community of Asedasuazo) as a result of the prevailing
south-westerly wind direction. Therefore the spatial extent of degradation in
air quality resulting from emission sources and activities on the site will be
local. However, because there will be a significant amount of rock and
equipment transported along gravel and national roads to the Project site so
spatial extent of the effects is regional. The magnitude of this impact is
therefore expected to be medium.
In terms of sensitivity, air quality in the Project area is good. Dust already
occurs from existing natural areas, cleared areas and along roads. It is

6-39
however currently low with capacity for buffering additional inputs.
Sensitivity is therefore considered to be low.
The significance of the impact is thus minor.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigations measures associated with pollutants are focussed on minimising

emissions from equipment.
The Project will ensure that all equipment and engines are maintained and
operated as original designed and not allow use of, poorly operated
equipment for Project activities.
Mitigation measures for dust are designed to reduce potential release through
management approaches.
The Project will monitor dust emissions at onsite and offsite sources. If it
is determined that dust is a problem, the Project will implement a
programme to control dust emissions including measures such as wetting
and covering.
Residual Impacts
While emissions during construction are already predicted to be low, the

Project will ensure environmental protection through monitoring and
implementation of controls as required. The significance of these impacts
remains minor.
Table 6.13 Impact Summary: Impacts on Air Quality (Construction)

Significance
Degradation of air quality: air MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
pollutants
Degradation of air quality: dust MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
6.5.11 Impacts on Air Quality: Operation
Air emissions in the operational phase are primarily associated with the use of
electricity generation and waste incineration. Emissions from other sources,
such as marine vessels and aircraft will have a minimal contribution to air
quality impacts.
Impact Description
Sources of air pollutants during operations include emissions from:

6-40
marine vessels;
vehicles;
power generators;
waste incineration; and
aircraft and helicopters.
Ship repair and maintenance activities may emit small amounts of pollutants
in the way of particulate matter (in smoke) from welding. Any emissions
from fuel storage would be incidental and occur during handling. Routine
emissions may include small volumes at valves and flanges.
Figure 6.11 Impact Diagram – Impacts to Air Quality (Operation)
Impact Assessment
The extent of pollutants emitted by Project sources would be generally limited

to on-site in the immediate area of the source and to the northeast in line with
the prevailing wind direction. Some transport might be expected to areas near
the Project site. Off-site activities (eg transport of construction phase
materials) will have ceased so impacts along transport routes would be greatly
reduced. The spatial extent of the impact is considered to be local. Emissions
are associated with normal operations will continue throughout the life of the
Project, thus their temporal scale is considered to be long-term. The overall
magnitude of this impact is expected to be small.
Assuming no degradation of the local air quality has occurred by the time
operations begin and the quality remains good, there will be adequate
capacity to buffer minor volumes of pollutants. The sensitivity is therefore
low.
The overall significance of this impact is considered to be minor.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures are focused on ensuring that Project related emissions are
kept to a minimum.
The Project should implement operational rules to ensure that engine

emissions by port users are minimised such as restricting engine idling,

6-41
ensuring that properly maintained equipment, vehicles, and vessels are
allowed in the port.
The electricity generation equipment should be compliant with EHS

Guidelines for a small combustion plant (World Bank Group, 2007a).
The incineration plant should be designed to be compliant with emission

limits set out in the European Waste Incineration Directive (WID), as cited
by the EHS Guidelines: Environmental Air Emissions and Ambient Air
Quality (World Bank Group, 2007a).
The electricity generation plant and waste incineration plant will be

designed to ensure that air quality standards are not exceeded as a result
of emissions to air.
Residual Impacts
Implementation of mitigation measures will ensure that sources of air

pollutants will remain minimal. The residual impact is expected to remain
minor.
Table 6.14 Impact Summary: Impacts on Air Quality (Operation)

Significance
Degradation of Air Quality MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
6.5.12 Impacts on Air Quality: Construction and Operation
Impact Description
Construction and operation will require use of equipment and vehicles with
combustion engines. Routine operation of the equipment will result in
emissions of greenhouse gases to the atmosphere.
Significance criteria have been defined based upon IFC guidance for
greenhouses gases (GHG), in this case, CO2. The GHG assessment criteria are
based on Performance Standard 3: Resources Efficiency and Pollution Prevention,
which sets the threshold for significance as 25,000 tonnes CO2-equivalents per
year for a single project or development. The total GHG emission forecast is
presented as tonnes of CO2 equivalent (CO2-e). GHG emissions of above the
Performance Standard limit are therefore considered to be significant, while
those below this limit are considered to be not significant.

6-42
Figure 6.12 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Air Quality (Construction and Operation)
Impact Assessment
Based on the equipment and activities expected to be used for construction

and operation, the Project would produce approximately 30,000 tonnes CO2-
equivalents per year tCo2(e). This is above the Performance Standard
requirements for monitoring and reporting of 25,000 tonnes.
The significance of this impact is therefore considered to be significant.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures are focused on ensuring that Project construction and

operations activities are designed and operated in consideration of energy
efficiency and minimisation of emissions of greenhouse gases.
Project equipment especially that the main power generator and waste
incinerators shall be selected in consideration of energy efficiency and
shall be maintained and operated in accordance with manufacturers
specifications to ensure optimal operation.
The Project will monitor GHG emissions and implement a programme for
identifying and implementing GHG reduction actions.
Residual Impacts
If mitigation measures are adhered to, release of GHGs into the atmosphere
will be reduced. The significance will however remain significant.
Table 6.15 Impact Summary: Impacts on Air Quality (Construction and Operation)

Significance
Contribution to Greenhouse gas SIGNIFICANT SIGNIFICANT
emissions

6-43
6.5.13 Noise and Vibration Impacts: Construction
Noise is described in terms of changes in ambient noise impacts and effects on

receptors. Project construction activities will generate noise from operation of
heavy equipment and construction of facilities especially the breakwater and
jetty.
The nearest human sensitive receptors would be in the three communities all
situated at the perimeter of the Project site. This also includes the cemetery
located to the east of Atuabo.
Impact Description
Baseline noise levels within the communities averaged 55-58 dBLAeq,1hr during
the day. This is relatively high given the location and is likely related to
natural sources such as the ocean wave noise. There are currently no man-
made sources of routine emissions of high levels of noise. As there are no
current sources of industrial noise the area, communities will be
unaccustomed to the types of noise associated with the Project.
During construction the main sources of noise will be the movement of heavy
earthmoving vehicles, operation of construction equipment for concrete
mixing, sheet piling and steel works and breakwater construction. Other
noise sources will include the use of generators, vessels and heavy vehicles.
Noise will also be created during site clearance and earth moving activities as
well as by marine vessels involved in the dredging processes.
Noise emitted during construction activities will act to increase the ambient
noise levels. Sensitive receptors include local community members,
households, schools, cemeteries, sports fields and religious buildings. At the
closest receptors (including the outskirts of Atuabo and Anokyi and the
cemetery) ambient noise level will be increased considerably over the short
periods when construction works are closest to those locations. Schools
located within the centre of the towns are less likely to be affected. If
construction traffic is routed through towns this would elevate levels of road
traffic noise considerably. During most of the construction phase,
construction noise is likely be audible only intermittently, and for much of the
time not at levels to create a disturbance. Locations away from the Project site
will be screened from noise sources by outlying properties, buildings and
vegetation. In addition, ambient noise levels are higher here, so noise from
the site will be less noticeable.
Noise from Project activities will not be at levels that would affect human
health but could cause disturbance to normal activities and sleep. Social
activities (including religious activities, ceremonies and festivals) and
schooling could also be disrupted.

6-44
Figure 6.13 Impact Diagram – Noise and Vibration Impacts (Construction)
Impact Assessment
At this stage of design the specific details on the construction programme

have not been finalised and is not possible to quantify construction noise
levels or durations. However, from an understanding of receptor type,
proximity and baseline, and assuming typical construction methods, a
qualitative assessment is possible, based on professional judgement and using
the project information available at this stage.
Ambient noise levels will be elevated to varying degrees at various times in

various places. It is likely that there will be periods of noise disturbance, at
the nearest receptors and during the noisiest periods, whilst much of the local
communities will not notice the elevated noise levels. The extent would be
local and would occur short-term and the magnitude is therefore considered to
be small.
In terms of sensitivity, the Performance Standards provides guidance. The

World Bank Group General EHS Guidelines differentiates between two
principal receptor categories, residential and industrial, but are not specific to
any particular source. The Guidelines set out prevention and control
measures, noise level guidelines and advice on monitoring. The Guidelines
do not however address temporary noise impacts that may occur during
construction. Given our understanding of the existing conditions, the
sensitivity of the receiving environment is medium.
The potential negative noise impacts, prior to mitigation, are therefore

considered to of minor significance.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures would be implemented to minimise noise associated

with construction activities as well as minimising disturbance of human
receptors in particular ie sensitive locations and during sensitive
time periods.
The Project will ensure that all equipment is operated and maintained in
accordance with original specifications in terms of noise rating. All
equipment will be operated with original noise baffling systems.

6-45
Construction activities, including vehicle movements to/from site, will be
normally scheduled for local daylight hours and activities that create noise
outside these hours will be limited. Activities that are associated with
high levels of noise will not be conducted at night.
Construction activities will be planned and scheduled in consideration of

important social activities including religious ceremonies and festivals.
The Project will consult with the local communities to inform planning
and to communicate work schedules.
Through the process of construction, as determined by on-going noise

monitoring and in consultation with the communities, the Project will
implement additional noise reduction measures or operational controls.
Residual Impacts
The fact that a large amount of machinery, equipment and construction

material has to be transported from different areas, and major works are
required to construct the Project, even with strict adherence to the above
mentioned mitigation measures, the residual significance of this impact is will
remain minor.
Table 6.16 Impact Summary: Impacts on ambient Noise and Vibration During
Construction

Significance
Increased Noise and Vibration MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
6.5.14 Noise and Vibration Impacts: General Noise during Operations
Noise associated with operations will generally be lower in intensity than

construction noise and much of it will be intermittent. Noise from general
operations and impacts assessment of effects on local communities is
described in this section. Noise from airstrip operations is discussed in Section
6.5.15.
Impact Description
The sources of general noise expected at the various facilities during

operations include:
repair facility and offshore fabrication yard - welding, hammering,

operation of cranes, trucks;
harbour and jetty – ship movements;
MOSB – trucks and crane movements;
drill cutting waste treatment – trucks movement, process equipment,
steam cleaning;

6-46
power generation – power supply engines;
domestic facilities and offices – cars, people noise, air conditioning; and
roads - cars, trucks, buses.
Operational noise is expected to result from the movement of heavy vehicles

such as trucks and fuel tankers along local and regional transport routes. In
addition, operational noise will result from rig and ship repair activities
fabrication operations, generators, effluent treatment, waste management
activities such as the operation of the incinerator. Noise sources will include
welding, hammering, drilling, loading, diesel clatter from the generators,
vehicle movements and manoeuvring as well as movement, dropping and
loading of goods to vessels. Vessel traffic and manoeuvring will also create
additional noise and vibrations.
Noise levels from work carried out in buildings would be buffered and lower
than levels associated with work carried out outdoors.
Ambient noise levels at sensitive human receptors will be increased,

intermittently throughout the lifetime of the project, and most noticeably in
the briefer periods when activities are taking place closest to populated areas.
Figure 6.14 Impact Diagram – Noise and Vibration Impacts (Operation)
Impact Assessment
Methodology
The Performance Standards and EHS Guidelines provide guidelines for noise
emissions. These are commonly applied to industrial operations where there
is a constant source of noise. The limits prescribed are for noise measured at
the receptor, and for design purposes this is typically applied as the fence line
or facility boundary, where people cannot get closer to the noise source(s).
Table 6.17 Noise Level Guidelines
Type of Receptor Daytime (0700 – 2200) Night time (2200 – 0700)

LAeq, 1hr dB(A) LAeq, 1hr dB(A)
Residential, institutional or 55 45
educational
Industrial or commercial 70 70

6-47
Source: World Bank Group, 2007
The guidance recognises that ambient conditions vary and limit the change in
background noise conditions to less than 3 dB(A).
Baseline studies in the Project area indicate that ambient noise levels as
measured within the communities was approximately 55 dB(A). The
relatively high level was due to a combination of natural sources (eg ocean
roar) and community activity, including road traffic. The baseline level is at
the daytime limit for residential receptors (and above the night time limit).
The relatively high background levels will allow for generally high levels of
Project noise to occur during the daytime without a perceptible change in the
overall noise level at receptors. Changes to noise levels will be more
noticeable at night time when ambient levels will be slightly lower due to the
decrease in activity in and around the community.
Results
Noise emissions from Project activities will be mainly limited to the Project
site so local in extent. Noise will occur in various forms over the life of the
Project and so could be considered long-term in duration, although noise
sources are not for the most part constant. The magnitude of the noise is thus
medium.
People in a rural setting would be generally sensitive to noise, however in the

case of the Project, ambient levels are already relatively high, which would act
to ‘mask’ Project noise emissions such that sensitivity to noise can be
considered moderate. People will be more sensitive to abrupt loud noise and to
noise at night.
The overall significance of the impact is therefore moderate.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures are designed to ensure that noise emitted from constant
sources is minimised and that work is carried out in consideration of
minimising noise, especially in local communities.
Project operations should be planned to minimise noisy activities near

communities (ie near the Project boundaries).
Industrial activities that create noise should be limited to daytime hours

and work at night that creates noise should be avoided, especially those
that are carried out outdoors.
The Project will develop work guidelines for port tenants and users that
specify noise emission limits and provide guidance for minimising noise
from activities. This will include requirements for equipment maintenance

6-48
and operation and operational controls such as specification of limits to
engine idling.
The Project will carry out regular monitoring of noise levels at the facility
boundary as well as at sensitive receptors. Should Project noise exceed the
specified noise criteria, corrective measures will be taken including
operational controls and use of sound baffling devices or techniques. The
Project will also monitor for public complaints about noise and take
corrective measures where required.
Residual Impacts
With implementation and enforcement of the mitigation measures the residual

impact will be minor.
Table 6.18 Impact Summary: Impacts on ambient Noise and Vibration: General Noise
during Operations
Impacts Pre-mitigation Significance Residual Impact

Significance
Increased noise and vibration MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
(port activities)
6.5.15 Noise and Vibration Impacts: Airstrip Operations
Noise associated with operation of the airstrip (mainly aircraft landings and
take-off) are discussed in this section
Impact Description
The Project will operate an airstrip for transport of people and supplies
to/from the site from other locations in Ghana as well as in some cases to
offshore locations. Both airplanes and helicopters will use the facility.
Aircraft noise will occur at the airstrip as well as locations offsite over the
flight path and in particular during take-off and landing when aircraft are
closer to the ground and to noise receptors. Some noise from ground activities
is likely to be screened by buildings and vegetation.
Approximately 23 flights each day are expected at the airstrip, clustered into
morning departures and afternoon arrivals, and some portion may
occasionally operate at night (ie between sunset and sunrise).

6-49
Figure 6.15 Impact Diagram – Noise and Vibration Impacts (Airstrip Operations)
Impact Assessment
Methodology
Aircraft operations and noise regulations are enforced by the Ghana Civil
Aviation Authority (GCAA) under the Ghana Civil Aviation Authority
(Aerodrome) Regulations 2011, L.I. 2004. These regulations prescribes noise
limits for airstrip operations and sets the Day-Night Level (DNL, or Ldn)) as
65 dB for residential areas. The DNL is a logarithmic average, LAeq (equivalent
noise level) metric applying a 10 dB weighting to flights at night (2200-0700
hours).
The Performance Standards or related EHS Guidelines do not have specific

requirements for aircraft noise but instead reference international best practice
and local regulations.
To evaluate noise associated with aircraft operations, predictive modelling

was used. The Integrated Noise Model (INM) (v7.0b) was used to compute
flight profiles and noise contours based on the following main forms of data:
runway geometry;
aircraft types;
aircraft performance data;
aircraft numbers:
flight tracks (or routes); and
meteorological data.
INM was developed in the United States specifically for evaluating aircraft
noise and is maintained with a database of current aircraft performance and
noise data. The version used for assessment has data for 138 types of
commercial aircraft, 115 military aircraft and 19 helicopters. IMN is not solely
a noise emissions model, it also computes the three-dimensional flight paths,
based on the two-dimensional flight track and the vertical flight profile
computed from individual aircraft thrust and flap settings, aircraft air speed,
and headwind data specific to each aircraft operation.
Two types of aircraft are expected to use the airstrip routinely and these were
used for modelling:
Beech 1900D, a 19-passenger twin turboprop fixed-wing aircraft assuming

4.5 arrivals and 4.5 departures each day; and

6-50
Aerospatiale SA-365N Dauphin, a small turbo-shaft helicopter, assuming
7.4 arrivals and 7.4 departures each day.
The ATR42, another twin turboprop airplane, may also use the airstrip, but
less commonly. A sensitivity test was carried out which showed that the
ATR42 is less noisy that the Beech 1900D, so modelling assumed all fixed wing
aircraft are to be Beech 1900Ds as a worst case. The flight numbers assumed
the busiest days of the week. The airstrip will be quieter on weekends.
Metrological data was used to derive a suitable mean temperature (25ºC) and
relative humidity (75 percent) and pressure (760 mmHg). These factors
influence aircraft climb rates and hence noise levels on the ground.
The airstrip location was taken from the scheme drawings and the helipad
was assumed to be located 100 m from the northeastern end of the runway.
Analysis of wind data shows a predominant wind from the south-west. For
this reason the runway was orientated northeast to southwest and it was
assumed that all helicopter and fixed wing flights operate towards the
southwest ie departing and arriving on a bearing of approximately 210
degrees. In the absence of routing information, all flights were assumed to be
dispersed around the extended runway centre line.
Standard aircraft operating procedures were assumed, including a three

degree approach slope for fixed wing aircraft and helicopters flying on visual
flight rules to/from altitudes of 1000 ft.
Results
The output of the computer model is provided as Figure 6.16. This figure
shows the predicted levels of aircraft noise from operations on the airstrip.
Noise contours 55, 65 and 75 dB are plotted. The results shows that there are
no sensitive human receptors within the DNL 65 dB contour prescribed by the
GCAA regulations.
It should be noted that the model processes noise levels logarithmically

averaged over the day, in this case comprising 23 relatively brief aircraft
movements. The low overall number of events makes the overall noise
emission levels modest. However, during each event (ie landing or take-off),
peak noise levels will be above the ambient noise levels and would be audible
in at least Atuabo and Asemdasuazo. Helicopters are likely to be the noisiest
aircraft with peak noise level of approximately 70 dB.
Noise effects will be local to the area around the Project site. Duration will be
continuous over the life of the airstrip operations. Noise levels at sensitive
receptors will meet regulated limits, however noise levels will still be elevated
above current baseline levels. The magnitude of the impact is thus moderate.
People in a rural setting would be generally sensitive to noise, however in the

case of the Project, ambient levels are already relatively high, which would act

6-51
to ‘mask’ Project noise emissions. The sensitivity of the receptors to an
increase in noise levels is therefore considered to be medium.
The overall significance of the impact prior to mitigation is thus moderate.
Mitigation Measures
The airstrip has been oriented to align with prevailing wind conditions and
located so as to minimise noise impacts on communities. Mitigation of aircraft
noise is focussed on maintaining flight patterns to the designated path and to
avoid flights directly over local communities and other population centres.
The Project will develop and implement operational controls in consideration

of minimising noise from aircrafts and effects on local communities.
Operational controls will consider the following:
Flights outside of daylight hours are to be avoided.
Flight paths for approach and landing and for take-off that avoid flying
over local communities will be designated.
Use of designated flight paths will be monitored and enforced.
Ground operations will be carried out in a manner that minimises noise,

especially from aircraft engines.
Residual Impact
Even with the application of mitigations and controls, the airstrip operation
will increase noise levels around the Project area and there will be some
instance of unavoidable noise. The residual impact will therefore remain
moderate.
Table 6.19 Impact Summary: Impacts on Ambient Noise and Vibration: Operation of the
Airstrip
Impacts Pre-mitigation Significance Residual Impact

Significance
Noise from air traffic MODERATE NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE

6-52
Figure 6.16 Aircraft Noise
6.5.16 Impacts on Traffic: Construction
The most significant increases in traffic will be experienced during the

construction phase, as Project equipment and construction materials will have
to be transported overland from Takoradi as well as from one of two quarry
sites situated approximately 140 km from the Project site. The transport of
such loads will impact heavily on the conditions of local and regional roads,
especially those with gravel surfaces that exist within approximately 30 km of
the Project site.
The Project will commission a specific Traffic Impact Assessment (TIA) study
after the completion for the ESIA to further quantify the impacts of the Project
on the specific routes used for construction traffic. This study will provide a
baseline description of the status of the integrity of Project transportation
routes with respect to structural properties (load limits, traffic volume limits),
functionality (condition of road surface) and safety (signage, markings, and
potential public safety hazard areas) as well as a description of current traffic
flows.
Based on expected traffic flows and number of trips as a result of construction

traffic, the study will then determine the operating Levels of Service of the
affected roads. Intersection performance, safety issues, requirements for road
or intersection upgrades and the preferred design standard of the roadways
will also be investigated. In addition, the study will identify mitigation
measures to be implemented to reduce the impact on traffic volumes and
degradation of the road infrastructure.
Impact Description
Traffic volumes will increase dramatically during the construction phase of

the Project in areas surrounding the Project site as well as those in the vicinity
of existing major transport routes. The main roads expected to be affected
during the transport of construction material are the Tarkwa-Esiama road and
the Angona-Elubo road as well as the adjoining route to Atuabo. The total
distance of road that will experience increased traffic volumes will be between
60 and 140 km depending on the finalised routing and selected site for the
source of rock material.
Heavy Duty Vehicles (HDVs) will be used to transport equipment and

construction material overland, to the Project site. In terms of sourcing
construction material, approximately 1 million m3 of rock (weighing
approximately 2 million tonnes) will be transported on large trucks from sites
located close to Tarkwa over a period of 18 months. During this process
around 62,500 trips between the site of the rock source and the Project site are
expected. This will result in approximately 90 HDV trips per day (two to
three trips per vehicle) using a fleet of 30 to 45 trucks. Each truck has a
capacity to carry 32 t each. HDVs will also be used to transport the equipment

6-54
and building materials from Takoradi. Smaller vehicles will also be required
during construction activities on and around the site.
The increase in traffic levels on roads will increase the rate of road wear and
could degrade and eventually damage road surfaces. The result could be
breaks in the paved surface (eg potholes, damage at the road shoulders) which
would also increase the risks of road accidents.
Towns and major intersections located on the major transport routes in the
regions surrounding the site and between the chosen site for construction
materials and the Project site may experience increased congestion, especially
at intersections, densely populated areas, and near business centres (including
markets). This would result in driver frustration as well as an increased risk
of accidents.
Figure 6.17 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Traffic (Construction)
Impact Assessment
The spatial extent of the increase in traffic volumes is considered to be regional.

The temporal scale of this impact is expected to be short-term as the majority of
traffic will cease after the completion of the breakwater and groyne
construction activities. The magnitude of these negative, direct and indirect
impacts are considered to therefore be medium.
The existing traffic in the area is comprised of light truck and passenger
vehicles, pedestrians, animals and few heavy vehicles. The composition of
traffic flow will change considerably during the construction phase of the
Project as there will be a major increase in the number of heavy vehicles
transporting large equipment and loads of rock. The regional roads (and
sections of the haulage route) though tarred are not necessarily designed to
handle the pressures of high traffic volumes like those proposed. Considering
also the density of settlements along the route, the sensitivity of impact is
considered to be high.
The significance of increased traffic in the region prior to mitigation is

therefore considered to be major.

6-55
Mitigation Measures
The mitigation measures should include the following:
The Project will prepare and implement a Traffic Management Plan

(TMP), including a Journey Management Plan for the trips between the
site of the source of construction material and the Project site. This will
ensure that the social implications of increased traffic volumes are kept to
a minimum and that local and regional traffic flows are well planned and
managed.
All Project related drivers (employed by the Project or by contractors) will

be required to undergo driver training that includes instruction on speed
limits and the hazards associated with the routes they will be travelling.
Communities and residents along Project routes will be made aware of the
risks associated with heavy vehicle traffic through engagement and
awareness-raising initiatives.
The Project will consider the HSE measures that need to be taken to ensure
the safe passage of pedestrians and animals at narrow sections of the
regional roads.
The Project will work with the local and national government to ensure
the roads that are used by Project related vehicles are properly maintained.
Residual Impacts
If all the above mentioned mitigation measures are adhered to, the negative
impacts associated with increase traffic flows in the region will be reduced
and are considered to have a moderate residual significance rating.
Table 6.20 Impact Summary: Impacts on Traffic (Construction)

Significance
Increased Traffic Volumes, Strain MAJOR MODERATE
on Road Network and potential
deterioration of Road
Infrastructure
6.5.17 Impacts on Traffic: Operation
The impacts on traffic volumes from Project related vehicles during operations
are discussed in this section. Although the traffic volumes will be
considerably less than those expected during construction, the levels
experienced during the operational phase of the Project will still be greater

6-56
than traffic volumes currently experienced in the region. Heavy vehicles will
continue to transport goods from Takoradi to the Project site.
Impact Description
The exact number of vehicles and movements of Project vehicles during

operations is not known at this time. The assessment uses general
assumptions based on similar developments.
Increased Traffic Volumes and Potential Deterioration of Road

Infrastructure
Within the Project site boundary, the number of vehicles will increase during
operation as they are used to carry out operational tasks. The local roads,
those newly constructed and those currently in existence will also experience
increased traffic flows. Besides Project vehicles, this increase will also be
attributed to an increase in passenger vehicles to transport workers and
residents between the three adjacent towns and the Project site.
Furthermore, the influx of people in the area will also contribute to an increase
in the number of road users (including pedestrians, animals and vehicles).
The increased traffic volumes will likely increase congestion and traffic delays
in the three adjacent towns as well as those on the transport routes between
Takoradi and the Project site.
Improved Road Conditions

On the other hand, the Project will undertake construction and upgrading of
roads around the Project site connecting the three communities of
Asemdasuazo, Atuabo and Anokyi as part of the coastal road to the west.
This will benefit current users of the coastal road from Axim to the west and
local users between the three communities as a result of the improved surfaces
and associated lower risk of accidents.
The required upgrading of the bridge along the route between Tarkwa and the
Project site will also benefit the other road users in terms of access along this
route.

6-57
Figure 6.18 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Traffic (Operation)
Impact Assessment

Infrastructure
Increased traffic volumes during the operational phase will be experienced
predominantly on local roads, however there will be greater traffic volumes
on regional roads compared to those currently experienced and the spatial
extent of this impact therefore remains regional during operation. The
temporal nature of the impact is considered to be permanent as these traffic
volumes will not decrease during the life of the Project and may even increase
as the area develops into a more formal industrial hub. The magnitude of this
negative, direct and indirect impact is thus considered to be large.
The sensitivity of this impact is considered to be low as the traffic volumes are
expected to decrease compared to those experienced during the construction
phase. Furthermore, the proposed mitigation measures for the construction
phase should result in well maintained and even improved road surfaces at
least on the local scale.
The significance of the impacts on traffic during operation is therefore


As a result of the continual maintenance of local roads during the operational
phase and the rerouting of the existing coastal road to connect the three towns,
the local road conditions are expected to improve on a local scale. The
temporal nature of this positive impact is expected to be long term and the
magnitude of the impact is considered to be small.
The sensitivity of the area to this impact is medium as the road conditions are
currently fair.
The overall significance of this positive impact is therefore considered to be

minor.

6-58
Mitigation Measures

Infrastructure
Mitigation measures should include the following:
During the operational phase of the Project the TMP created for
construction will be adapted to consider the specific operations
requirements. This will ensure that implications of increased traffic
volumes are kept to a minimum and that local and regional traffic flows
are generally well managed.
All new drivers employed throughout the course of the Project’s operation
will be required to undergo training as required for the operational phase
and as stipulated by the TMP.
The Project will implement a monitoring programme, whereby any road

degradation is reported to the relative authority promptly. The Project
will work closely with the local and regional governments to ensure that
poor road conditions such as these are addressed as quickly as possible.

Enhancement measures should include the following:
The Project will work with the relevant local and regional government to
ensure the roads used by Project vehicles are well maintained, and that
potential problems or hazards are communicated to the relevant authority
timeously. Project planning and operations will be done in consultation
with the government.
Residual Impacts
The implementation of mitigation measures will assist to decrease the

magnitude of the impacts, but the residual significance of this negative impact
is therefore considered to remain be minor.
The residual significance of continuous maintenance of local roads is

considered to remain minor positive.
Table 6.21 Impact Summary: Impacts on Traffic (Operation)

Significance
Increased Traffic Volumes, Strain MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
on Road Network and potential
deterioration of Road
Infrastructure
Improved Road Conditions MINOR POSITIVE MINOR POSITIVE

6-59
6.5.18 Impacts on Visual Character
The development of the Project will require removal of existing landscape

elements, addition of new elements, and the alteration of existing elements.
This will result in a change in the overall visual appearance of the area.
In the case of the proposed Project, effects are less related to physical effects
such as effects of line of sight and visibility but more effects on overall
aesthetic character and ‘sense of place’ (Section 6.7.6).
Impact Description
The Project area is currently a rural in character. The landscape between the
three communities is dominated by vegetation (coconut palms, agriculture
and secondary forest growth), open spaces associated with the seasonal
grassland area and views of open stretches of beach along the coastline.
Receptors sensitive to changes in visual character include the residents of the

three towns adjacent to the project site (Atuabo, Asemdasuazo and Anyoki).
Those using local roads alongside the Project site as well as fishers in the
marine environment are also sensitive to changes to the visual character of the
region.
The construction activities will involve the clearing and levelling the Project
site, fencing, equipment laydown and construction activities for the marine
and onshore structures. Further sources of visual impacts during construction
are expected to arise from the presence and passage of HDVs, the height of
which can exceed 4 m as well as fencing along the cleared site.
Light spill associated with fence line lighting as well as security lights and
those enabling work during the night or low light conditions will also impact
on the sensitive receptors.
During the operational phase of the project, the changes to visual character of
the Project site and surrounds will most likely be altered permanently. This is
expected to be the result of the existence of permanent structures such as the
onshore facilities blocks, the bulk storage facility and warehouses as well as
aircraft, vessel and traffic movements.
Furthermore, the vessels and rigs expected to call at the port are expected to
be up to 100 m tall (above the water level). These would be berthed for up to
three months at a time for repairs and will be highly visible to receptors
within the local communities. Views of trellised structures as well as lights on
the vessels and rigs during the night time will be visible.

6-60
The most sensitive receptors to impact would be the communities of the three
adjacent communities. Each of these towns will experience a slightly different
change in the visual character of their view shed.
Atuabo will be mostly impacted by the presence of the onshore facilities

blocks and the views of the vessels and rigs berthed at the port as they are
located closest to this community. The current views from the beach will
be impacted by views of the breakwater and vessels and rigs entering the
port. This will affect the view shed towards the east and south of the
community.
The community at Asemdasuazo will primarily be impacted by the views

of the tank farm to the southwest. The tank farm is expected to contain a
number of tanks with heights of up to 20 m. Due to the location of the
tanks close to one another and the uniform colouring, the visual intrusion
of the tanks is expected to be high. In addition, the community will
affected by the presence of rigs and vessels berthed at the port to the
south.
The community of Anokyi will similarly be impacted by the tank farm to

the northwest as well as the MOSB warehouses closest to the community
and the vessels and rigs in the background to the west, which would be
visible above the nearer facilities. The current views from the beach will
also be impacted by views of the shorter breakwater affecting the
viewshed towards the south and west.
Figure 6.19 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Visual Character
Impact Assessment
The spatial extent of visual impacts during construction and operations is

considered to be local as changes will take place within the Project site and its
surrounds. The temporal nature of this impact during construction is
considered to be permanent as the changes to the visual character of the region
will not be reversible. The magnitude of this impact is thus medium.

6-61
The sensitivity is considered to be high due to the current rural nature of the
Project site and the surrounding area.
The overall significance of this impact is therefore considered to be major.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures would be designed to minimize the visible effects of the

changes associated with the development. Given the scale of the Project, these
would have limited effect.
Site clearing will be planned to retain vegetation near receptors in order to

acts to act as screening. This could involve retaining existing vegetation on
the site (eg line of trees close to the three communities) or landscaping
after the site clearance phase.
Vegetation clearance should be minimised. Sections of the site that are not
expected to be developed in the operational phase of the Project should be
cleared as little as possible or left in their natural state. This would ensure
the widening of vegetation buffers and would reduce the impact on the
local communities and road users.
Directional covers should be placed over the port lighting to reduce light
spill to areas outside of the Project site. Additionally, work at night should
be reduced as much as possible to reduce the requirement for lights after
dark.
Residual Impacts
With implementation of the mitigation measures, including the establishment

of vegetation buffers alongside sensitive receptors, the residual significance of
the impact would likely be reduced to moderate.
Table 6.22 Impact Summary: Impacts on Visual Character

Significance
Impact on Visual Character MAJOR NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE

6-62
Figure 6.20 Computer-Generated Depiction of the Project

6.6 IMPACTS ON THE BIOPHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT – MARINE
The section describes the impacts on the marine environment. The Project and
Project activities will have direct impacts on aspects of the physical and
ecological aspects of the environment. These effects will in turn have other
effects.
The Project includes a planned breakwater to the west of the port, and a
smaller groyne planned to the east. These will be constructed in coastal and
marine habitats. The Project will require dredging in the nearshore areas to
create a harbour. There will be an increase in turbidity increase associated
with marine works during the construction phase, including the dredging
required to create the entrance channel, turning circle and dock areas. Other
port activities during construction and operation may result in the disturbance
of marine sediments. This may have impacts on marine benthic and intertidal
habitats as well as marine fauna such as fish, turtles and marine mammals.
Other impacts may occur through changes in hydrodynamics of coastal water

as a result of the construction of the breakwater and alteration of coastal
processes in the nearshore. Although the sediment transport along the
Ghanaian coast is largely driven by wave action, new sediment transport
regimes associated with the longshore drift are likely to develop along the
coast, including changes to erosional and depositional patterns. Siltation may
occur to the east of the port structures where the seabed will be sheltered from
currents by the groyne.
The main sources of impacts to marine habitats and biodiversity discussed are
as follows:
a degradation of marine water quality from dredging (mostly transient)

and effluent discharges (effluent, treated water);
disturbance of the marine sediments;
alterations to current sediment transport patterns as a result of the

breakwaters;
impacts to fish, marine mammals, turtles and other marine fauna; and
destruction and disturbance of benthic and intertidal habitats.
6.6.1 Impacts on Marine Water Quality
Project activities, mainly capital dredging will have direct effects on marine
water quality in the way of increased turbidity due to the effects of dredging.
The impacts are discussed in this section.

6-65
Indirect effects of increased turbidity include reduced light penetration,
preventing marine vegetation from growing and smothering of benthic fauna.
These impacts as discussed further in Section 6.6.2.
Impact Description
During construction, the increase in turbidity will be caused by capital

dredging and the construction of the breakwater. Capital dredging will be
undertaken to create the entrance channel, turning circle breakwater prior to
rock placement. Dredging typically results in increased turbidity from the
action of the dredging equipment (hydraulic suction cutter and the suction
pipe) and lifting of the backhoe filled with sediments towards the dredging
ship. This generates a plume of suspended sediments close to the seabed
which spreads through the water column.
The construction of the breakwater and the groyne involves dumping of rock
onto the seafloor sequentially from the shore along the planned breakwater
length. The placement of rock onto the seabed will result in the disturbance of
sediment and increased turbidity.
Dredged sediments will be used as fill on the onshore site. The excess water
from dewatering of dredged sediments used as fill (carried out either on the
dredging vessel or onshore) may also contain fine particles and increase
turbidity. In addition, runoff from the terrestrial construction areas where
there has been increased erosion due to vegetation clearance may contain silt
furthering adding to turbidity.
During the operational phase of the Project, increased turbidity will occur
during maintenance dredging activities which are expected to take place every
three years. Suspended sediments will decrease the water quality of the port
area and the adjacent areas in the path of the dredging plume. Terrestrial
runoff will be highest during heavy rains.
The dredge disposal sites (to still be identified through liaison with the
Government of Ghana) are expected to be within 15 km from the Project site at
a depth of 30-40 m and avoid spawning areas. During capital dredging
activities, the clay materials which cannot be pumped onshore for reclamation
activities will be disposed of at the dump sites via ‘bottom dumping’ ie release
from the bottom of the dredging vessel. If found to be unsuitable for beach
replenishment to the east of the port, the sediment removed as part
maintenance dredging during operation will also be disposed at these site(s)
offshore. The release of dredged material will result in a plume of sediments
within the water column which will gradually settle through the remaining
water depth (approximately 30-40 m) to the seabed. Although the exact area
of the dredge disposal plume will be dependent on local currents and sea
conditions at the time, disposal is expected to have localised effects on water
quality related to increased turbidity within the water column.

6-66
Figure 6.21 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Marine Water Quality
Impact Assessment
The scale of the increased turbidity during construction is local, affecting the
areas surrounding the Project site as well as the areas around the dredging
disposal sites located approximately 15 km from the Project site. The impact
would be experienced during the construction phase only and therefore is
considered short-term. The impact is negative and direct and the magnitude is
considered to be medium.
Impacts associated with maintenance dredging will be similar, although the

extent and duration would be lower.
The marine water quality is currently considered to be uncontaminated (see

Section 4.6) with normal levels of natural turbidity and has some buffering
capacity. The marine environment is not unique within the context of the
Western coast of Ghana. The sensitivity is therefore considered to be medium.
The overall impact on marine water quality due to increased turbidity during
construction is considered to be of moderate significance prior to mitigation.
Mitigation measures
Where feasible, the Project will develop the construction schedule so that
the breakwater and groyne are constructed before dredging activities to
contain the sediment plume as much as possible.
The Project will ensure that contractors implement international best

practice for dredging, which will entail:
minimising the extent of the area dredged and therefore the direct
disturbance to the seabed and the generation of a turbidity plume at the
seabed;

6-67
minimising the release of a turbid effluent from the dredging ship or
from the dredged effluent storage facility onshore , by ensuring a high
performance of the dredge spoil dewatering system;
planning the dredging campaign in such a way as to limit the risks of

generating a significant turbidity plume near marine habitats present in
the vicinity of the dredging operations; and
ensuring that the dredging vessels comply with the MARPOL 73/78
Convention (treatment process should achieve no floating solids, no
discolouration and a residual chlorine content of less than 1mg/l)
thereby ensuring that no untreated bilge water or sanitation effluent is
released to sea or into coastal waters.
The Project will take measures to avoid and minimise erosion from the site
to the marine environment.
The Project will implement an effective storm water management system

and ensure that discharge and runoff is treated for silt (eg silt traps).
The Project will dispose of dredged material such that this does not
mound or produce a pronounced cone of sediment on the seafloor.
Lonrho will commission a survey of potential disposal sites using an
echosounder bathymetry and biological (benthic) sampling and Remotely
Operated Vehicle (ROV) with a camera to capture images of the seafloor.
Lonrho will submit a method statement for dredge disposal operations to

EPA prior to the commencement of dredging activities.
Residual Impacts
Adherence with international best practice dredging techniques reduce the

magnitude of the impact to some degree, however the overall significance will
remain moderate.
Table 6.23 Impact Summary: Impacts on Marine Water Quality

Significance
Increased Turbidity MODERATE NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE
6.6.2 Impacts on Marine Sediment Quality and Benthic and Intertidal Ecology
The marine sediments and benthic and intertidal ecology (flora and fauna)
near the Project site will be disturbed from their natural state during the
marine-based construction and dredging activities which will involve physical
removal and other mechanical disturbance. Marine sediments are also

6-68
vulnerable to contamination through the settling of suspended harmful or
hazardous substances in the water column.
These organisms are also known for their role in maintaining good water
quality in the inshore regions as they feed on suspended excess nutrients. The
intertidal zone associated with the stretch of beach within Project site
(approximately 3 km) will be destroyed permanently during the construction
phase of the Project. The adjacent intertidal are expected to be affected by
dredging and marine construction activities.
The impacts of these Project activities on the marine sediments and benthic
and intertidal fauna are discussed in this section (Figure 6.22).
This removal of sediments will cause secondary impacts on marine water

quality (turbidity) as described in Section 6.6.1.
Impact Description
Dredging of the turning circle, entrance channel and berths will involve the
direct removal of marine sediment and associated benthic and intertidal fauna
to allow for deepening of these areas for access to the port. These sediments
will be dug up exposing deeper sediment layers of the seafloor and pumped
onshore for dewatering and use as infill on shore, where suitable.
Marine sediments in the Project site will be disturbed by the laying of rock for
the construction of the breakwater and groyne as well as construction of the
quays.
Sediments will also be affected at dredging disposal sites, where the dumping
of dredged material will result in additional material being added to the
existing marine sediments in these areas. The site for dumping of marine
sediment at sea will be identified in liaison with the regulator (likely the EPA)
who will need to approve of the selected site prior to the commencement of
dredging activities. Covering by dredge material will result in smothering of
benthic habitats and fauna as the suspended sediment settles onto the seabed.
Suspended sediments will also affect filter feeding organisms in the intertidal
zone by blocking their filtering systems.
Maintenance dredging will be carried out every three years and will result in
the removal and disturbance of the marine sediments within the port basin.
Similar the impacts associated with capital dredging, the disposal of the
sediments at the disposal site will result in disturbance and covering of the
existing marine sediment in these areas.
As with marine fish, the introduction of alien invasive species may result in a
decrease in biodiversity through competition in the intertidal and benthic
habitats. Alien invasive species are very successful pioneer species and will
easily populate a disturbed area where they are potentially able to out-
compete local species for resources such as food or space. This can eventually

6-69
cause decreases in local indigenous species as well as a decrease in
biodiversity in the region as the invasive species dominate the benthic biota
(Bax et al, 2003).
Figure 6.22 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Marine Sediment Quality and Benthic and
Intertidal Ecology
Impact Assessment
The spatial impacts on sediments are expected to be felt at the local level. In
terms of the temporal scale of the impact, the alterations to sediments are
considered to be permanent. The magnitude of this impact is therefore
considered to be medium.
The sensitivity of sediments and benthic and intertidal ecology to disturbance

is considered to be medium. Although the marine sediment is expected to be
in a state that is close to natural, these sediments are not known to be unique
and there are extensive areas of similar habitats occur (see Chapter 4). Many of
the benthic species are territorial species, with relatively small home ranges
and are dependent on the substrate in which they live. However, there are no
endangered species are known to occur in the region. In terms of sensitivity to
restrictions in movement, most (97 percent) of the larger benthic organisms
found during the baseline investigation were sessile organisms such as
bivalves. These occur commonly along the coast.
The overall significance of this impact is therefore considered to be moderate.
Mitigation Measures
The development of the project will require the direct removal of sediment at
the harbour area and this is unavoidable. Disposal will cause smothering of
sediment at the disposal site and over time the ecology may naturally restore.

6-70
The harbour however will undergo period maintenance dredging so
sediments will be regularly disturbed.
The following mitigation measures will be implemented:
Dredge disposal sites will be selected outside of areas of high ecological

value. The site will be selected in consideration of the compatibility of the
dredged materials with the disposal location.
The Project will liaise with the relevant authority (EPA or the Ghana
Maritime Authority (GMA)) to determine the location of suitable disposal
sites (1) to obtain the appropriate approvals(which may include a dredge
disposal permit in terms of the Marine Pollution Act which is due to be
promulgated.
The Project will implement and enforce regulations that protect against the
introduction of alien invasive species including specifications for
discharge of ship ballast water.
Residual Impacts
With implementation of the mitigation measures, including containing the

dispersion of the sediment plume, the magnitude would be reduced but will
still be considered medium. The impact significance would therefore remain
moderate.
Table 6.24 Impact Summary: Impacts on Marine Water Quality (Construction and
Operations)

Significance
Impacts on Marine Sediment MODERATE NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE
Quality and Benthic and
Intertidal Ecology
6.6.3 Impacts on Coastal Processes
This section discusses the impacts of the presence of the port breakwater and
groyne on normal coastal process. If processes are disrupted this could result
in changes in patterns of coastal erosion and accretion.
Changes could also cause disturbance to marine sediments and the benthic
and intertidal habitat as discussed in Section 6.6.2.
(1) In terms of the London Dumping Convention, the Government of Ghana is required to identify suitable disposal sites

6-71
Impact Description
The breakwater and groyne will extend from the shoreline to the sea, 2 km in
length towards the southeast and approximately 1 km to the southwest
respectively. The breakwater is designed such that it is angled from the shore
with the prevailing coastal current. Sediment transport along this stretch of
the coast is a slow, wave-driven littoral drift from west to east. Sediment
transport regime is eastwards and comprises 539,000 m3 per annum along the
coast.
To evaluate the effect of the Project on coastal processes, a study was carried
out to predict the effects. Based on technical studies the marine infrastructure
was found to affect the sediment transport regime over a distance of
approximately 5 km of coastline. As a result of the blocking effect of the
breakwater, increased sedimentation is expected to the west of the main
breakwater. As a result of the disruption of sediment transport, the eastern
side of the groyne would be ‘starved’ and erosion would occur. If the
imbalance of the pattern of accretion and erosion is not corrected, modelling
indicates that the breakwater would cause a buildup of sediment on the west
side of the breakwater at a rate of 70-90 m per year. Similarly, on the eastern
side, the beach would erode at a rate of 40-50 m per year, approximately 50
percent faster than the current erosion rate (Royal Haskoning, 2012) (Figure
6.23).
Note that the model was designed to be overly conservative and accretion and
erosion rates used are likely higher than those occurring. Estimates of rate
would have an uncertainty of approximately 50 percent.

6-72
Figure 6.23 Diagram of Effects on Coastal Processes
Figure 6.24 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Coastal Processes
Impact Assessment
The effect of alterations to the transport of sediment is expected to extend over

approximately 5 km. The zone of influence is likely somewhat greater
although effects at the farther reaches are less, however they may be felt over
time. Regardless, the effects are local. The temporal impact of these changes is
considered to be permanent as the marine infrastructure causing the changes to
the coastal processes will remain intact throughout the Project lifespan. The
impact is therefore considered to have a moderate magnitude.

6-73
The sensitivity of coastal processes is high. There are few natural or man-
made impediments to coastal processes presently and there would be a great
degree of sensitivity to new changes. While the assessment used scientific
means to predict the effects, there are other factors that could contribute to the
effects such as other coastal development and changes in global
environmental conditions.
Further the issue of coastal erosion is highly sensitive in the region as it affects
the living conditions and livelihoods of numerous communities and
individuals.
Thus the overall significance of this impact is considered to be major.
Mitigation Measures
The Project will closely monitor accretion and erosion during operations and
take corrective measures as follows:
As required, the Project should carry out actions to restore and maintain
the coastline around the Project site. This would likely include a
combination of groynes and sand nourishment ie a sand pumping system
to redistribute sand from areas of accumulation (or dredged material) to
areas of erosion or physical transport using excavators and trucks.
Residual Impacts
The direct impacts of changes to coastal processes can be mitigated with the
implementation of sand pumping/redistribution form the western to the
eastern side of the terminal area. This would result in decreased sensitivity of
the coast to erosion and would decrease the impact significance to moderate.
Table 6.25 Impact Summary: Impacts on Coastal Processes

Significance
Impacts on Coastal Processes MAJOR NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE
6.6.4 Impacts on Underwater Noise
This section describes the impacts of Project generated noise on the marine
environment. Changes in noise have the potential to affect sensitive receptors
in the marine environmental including fish, sea turtles and marine mammals.
This section describes changes in noise; impacts on receptors are discussed in
Section 6.6.5, Section 6.6.6 and Section 6.6.7.

6-74
Impact Description
As the marine environment surrounding the Project site is relatively

undisturbed and no major developments exist in the region, the present
underwater noise levels are low. Limited levels of underwater noise is created
by the waves breaking on the shore.
The construction of the breakwater and groyne as well as other marine

construction activities will generate noise in the marine environment.
Dredging activities associated with excavating the entrance channel, turning
circle and vessel berths will also cause an increase in underwater noise.
A major source of loud noise will be the driving piles during construction of
the jetty. Piling works may involve percussive piling which drives the pile
into the ground by means of hammering or other percussive means with great
force. The noise generated is extremely loud and actual levels are dependent
on several factors. These include seabed characteristics, equipment type used
and water depth in which the piling is undertaken (Nedwell et al, 2001 and
Nedwell et al, 2004 in Talisman, 2005). The major factor determining noise
levels is the type of equipment used.
During operation, there will be noise from the vessel traffic into the area as
well as the maintenance dredging every three years.
Figure 6.25 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Underwater Noise
Impact Assessment
The extent of this impact is expected to affect a local scale as noise attenuates
rapidly underwater although rates are lower in shallow water depths (<200
m). Based on studies, underwater noise levels caused by piling high enough
to cause avoidance behaviour would range 2 km to 10 km but the distance is
highly dependent on the equipment used. Noise levels that would cause
avoidance by whales would be greater than 10 km (Talisman, 2005) Noise
associated with construction activities is expected to continue for a short-term
period. The magnitude of this impact is thus expected to be small.

6-75
Although there is no other significant marine development in the region, there
are only few likely receptors in the area such as fish and other marine fauna,
within the affected area. These marine fauna are mobile and able to move
away from the noise source. As such the sensitivity of the marine
environment to increased noise levels is low.
Thus the overall significance of this negative and direct impact is therefore
Mitigation Measures
The Project will implement operational controls to reduce noise emissions as

described for general noise (Section 6.5.14). In addition, for marine noise the
Project will implement the following:
The Project will reduce underwater noise as much as possible through

equipment choice and limiting the amount of time it takes to carry out
noisy activities in the marine environment.
The Project will ensure that engines are not left to idle unnecessarily.
Vessels will be powered down to safe operational levels and switched off
where possible while in berths or moored in the terminal area.
The Project will use best practice and ‘soft start’ noisy activities (such as
piling). This involves the initiation of activities using a portion of the
power only, gradually ramping up to full power. This acts to allow for
mobile receptors to move away from noise sources and avoid effects. It
also acts to minimise impacts caused by startle effects.
Residual Impact
If these mitigation measures are adhered to the amount of underwater noise

associated with construction activities will be reduced to a residual
significance of negligible.
Table 6.26 Impact Summary: Impacts on Underwater Noise

Significance
Increased Underwater Noise MINOR NEGATIVE NEGLIGIBLE
6.6.5 Impacts on Marine Mammals
Project activities have the potential to have a direct effect on marine mammals
through interaction with structures and marine vessels (Figure 6.1). In
addition, marine mammals could be affected indirectly due to changes in

6-76
marine water quality (Section 6.6.1) and increased underwater noise (especially
during construction) (Section 6.6.4 ).
Impact Description
Ghana is reported to have a moderate diversity of cetacean species, and

although no critically endangered cetacean species occur, the sperm whale
(Physeter macrocephalus or Physeter catodon) is listed as vulnerable on the IUCN
endangered species list. Marine mammal checklists (Van Waerebeek et al,
2010) indicate that 18 cetacean species are likely to occur in the Gulf of Guinea.
The absence of an estuarine or mangrove habitat in the area is likely to
exclude the African Manatee. Sperm whale, beaked whale and pilot whale
families are unlikely to occur in the shallow coastal waters of the study area as
their preferred habitat is open seas beyond the continental shelf.
The continental shelf of Ghana (including possibly offshore of the Project site)
hosts a seasonal breeding/calving population of humpback whales during the
months of August to November. Collision with marine mammals will be
more likely with humpback whales in the near shore area in particular during
the breeding / calving season.
Marine mammals may be susceptible to major changes in marine

environmental quality although they would be able to tolerate minor changes
such as that caused by dredging or dredged disposal activities.
Figure 6.26 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Marine Mammals

6-77
Impact Assessment
The spatial extent of the decrease in habitat suitability during construction and
operation is considered to be local while the temporal scale is expected to be
continuous. The magnitude of this impact is thus considered to be small.
Local marine mammals are not expected to occur close to shore and would act
to avoid the Project area as a result of increased noise levels and decreased
visibility. The receptor sensitivity to this impact is therefore expected to be
low.

Mitigation Measures
The Project will implement measures to avoid or minimise effects on marine

water quality (Section 6.6.1) and noise emissions (Section 6.6.4). These
measures will act to reduce effects on marine mammals.
With regard to potential direct interactions, the Project will implement the
following:
The Project will ensure that marine contractors implement a suitable

system for spotting marine mammals while working in the sea. Work
activities and vessels will execute measures to avoid collision or
disturbance (while maintaining safe operation of the vessel).
The Project shall implement a programme for monitoring and recording

sightings of any injured or dead marine mammals, regardless of whether
the injury or death is caused by a Project vessel. Preferably the date and
location (latitude/longitude) of the animal and the species identification
or a description of the animal should be recorded. The Project will report
this information to the appropriate organisation and government
authority.
Residual Impacts

level of marine water contamination and underwater noise should be
significantly reduced, reducing the overall significance to negligible.
Table 6.27 Impact Summary: Impacts on Marine Mammals

Significance
Impacts on Marine Mammals MINOR NEGATIVE NEGLIGIBLE

6-78
6.6.6 Impacts on Sea Turtles
The Project and Project activities have the potential to impact seas turtles
directly and indirectly (Figure 6.27), the main being:
Direct disturbance of turtle nesting activities due to Project activities

especially lighting;
Loss of suitable nesting habitat due to the construction of the port; and
Potential increase in poaching activities due to increase in the number of

people in the general area during construction and operations.
Impact Description
Sea turtles are known to frequent the waters and beaches of the Western
Region of Ghana. Turtles play an important role in the marine ecosystems by
ensuring balance in the food web, promoting nutrient cycling from the sea to
the land and controlling jelly fish populations. All seven species of sea turtles
are either threatened or have endangered status. Five of the species are
reported to have frequented the beaches of Ghana although recent studies
indicate that it is now just the leatherback, olive ridley and green turtles that
do so. The decline in the populations is due to a variety of factors including
human predation, increased pollution, impacts from commercial fishing, and
habitat loss (from development and coastal erosion).
Light spill from temporary lighting during construction and permanent high
luminescent lighting for operation for safety and security and for work at
night could disturb newly hatched turtles and nesting females on nearby
beaches. Light affects sea turtle navigation from nests to the sea (see Annex
B7). Baby turtles find their way to the sea by the light reflected off the ocean
and artificial lighting has a disorienting effect on the hatchlings. Adult turtles
can mistakenly move inland after egg laying. Females tend to avoid areas
with unusual lighting on the approach to the beach and where beach lighting
is most intense. Turtles also abort nesting attempts more often in lighted areas.
The Project site falls within a turtle nesting area along the Western Region
coastline. Land take for the Project will result in a loss of the 3 km stretch of
sandy beach between Atuabo and Anokyi. While sea turtles were not
observed using the beach for nesting (although field surveys were towards the
end of the turtle-nesting season), the beach conditions provide suitable
habitat. Removal and dredging of the inshore and onshore areas as well as
construction activities, presence of heavy construction vehicles will disturb
turtle nesting sites, and also limit the availability of possible future nesting
sites. There will also be increased competition between adult females for good
nesting sites in the areas adjacent to the Project site as a result of the
displacement of nesting turtles to these beaches (see Annex B7).

6-79
Even though they are protected by Ghana law (as well as traditional rules)
and this protection status is widely known, sea turtles and turtle eggs are still
poached for food. Pressure on the local population and on food sources may
increase poaching. In addition, influx of people to the area may increase the
number of people poaching.
Figure 6.27 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Turtles
Impact Assessment
The spatial impact on nesting activity is regional. While direct effects would be
limited to the Project area (including the 3 km beach and some distance to
either side from lightspill) there would be ‘knock-on effects’ as turtles would
move to other beaches and possibly interact with other turtles. Poaching
would be a regional problem.
Nesting activities are reported to occur year-round, the main nesting periods
are between August and March (Ghana Sensitivity Mapping Atlas, 2004).
Disturbance to nesting sites will be permanent along the stretch of beach so
permanent in duration. The magnitude of this negative and indirect impact is
therefore considered to be medium.
The turtle species of concern include those that are reported to frequent the
beaches of Ghana: leatherback, olive ridley, leatherback and green. These sea
turtles populations are highly sensitive and have IUCN status of endangered,
vulnerable, and critically endangered respectively ( Chapter 4). In addition sea
turtles return to the same general location of their natal beach for nesting and
require undisturbed nesting sites to complete the reproductive cycle. The
sensitivity to this impact is therefore high.
The negative impact on sea turtles is therefore considered to be major prior to

mitigation.

6-80
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measure will be implemented to avoid direct interaction with sea

turtle nesting and to supporting the protection of sea turtles in Ghana in
general.
During the construction phase, prior to any activities that involve work
along sandy beach areas, the Project will conduct a pre-work inspection of
the area to determine whether there are turtles nesting. If sea turtle
nesting activity is discovered in the work area, Project will consult with an
ecology specialist to determine the appropriate course of action (ie
removal of eggs to a hatchery). Action may include relocation of the
turtle nest to a safe area.
Lighting for work areas in proximity to the nearshore waters and beach
will be aimed on the area it is required and at an adequate level of
illumination for work and excessive artificial light outside the direct work
area will be avoided.
Ground disturbance from site preparation and construction and any

temporary redistribution of the beach will be restored upon completion.
The Project will collaborate and support programmes to protect sea turtles
such as awareness campaigns, beach monitoring, and habitat protection
and restoration.
Residual Impacts
Actions to reduce impact and to carryout offsetting actions will act to reduce
impacts slightly to moderate.
Table 6.28 Impact Summary: Impacts on Turtles

Lighting, habitat loss, and MAJOR NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE
poaching
6.6.7 Impacts on Fish
The Project has the potential to impact fish indirectly through changes in
water quality which may in turn affect fish health. Changes in sediment
quality from dredging and dredge disposal would cause changes in the food
web, which could also in turn affect fish.
Fish could also be affected by accidental releases of hazardous materials,

waste, or contaminated media (eg untreated oily water) either directly
through exposure or ingestion or indirectly because degradation of habitat.
Accidental events are discussed in Section 6.1.

6-81
This section describes the effects of Project activities on fish which is largely
limited in extent to the area around the Project site.
Figure 6.28 Cause-Effect Diagram of Impacts on the Fish
Impact Description
Project activities during construction, mainly dredging, will cause changes to

water quality. High levels of turbidity from sediments suspended in the
water column could harm fish in the immediate vicinity. Dredging will also
result in removal of sediments and the associated benthic habitat and
organisms. Fish will be indirectly impacted by the decrease in phytoplankton,
zooplankton and small fish which interact with the benthic environment. The
effect would be on demersal species that frequent near shore areas and in
locations near the Project.

6-82
Project activities, including the dredging and piling during construction, and
ship movements during operations will result in an increase in underwater
noise. This has the potential to disturb fish that frequent the vicinity of the
Project.
Impact Assessment
The indirect effects on fish from turbidity, loss of benthic habitat, and
underwater noise would be local and in the direct vicinity of the Project.
Effects would occur over the duration of construction and operation so long-
term, however events will be intermittent so that fish could return after
periods of disturbance and they are not deterred by competing or predatory
species. Overall, the magnitude of the impact is therefore expected to be
medium.
Sensitivity of fish to effects is limited due to the restricted nature of Project

activities and the nature of fish behaviour as follows:
Fish are mobile and capable of moving away from adverse conditions such
as turbid water and noise.
Fish that occur in the Project area are common and widely distributed. No
sensitive species are known to be associated with the immediate area .
Known sensitive fish species (eg those on the IUCN Red List) occur in
offshore waters.
The abundance of local fisheries species in waters adjacent to the Project

site has reportedly declined in recent years. This is understood to be as a
result of overfishing within the Gulf of Guinea.
Overall sensitivity of affected fish is therefore considered to be medium. .
The overall significance of the negative impact of fish is considered to be

moderate.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures for impacts to fish will be focussed on avoiding and

minimising effects on the environment from turbidity, loss of habitat, and
noise through good practice and mitigation listed in Section 6.6.1, Section 6.6.2
and Section 6.6.4.
The Project will also implement a programme of monitoring fish catch in the
vicinity of the port and work with the Government of Ghana (Fisheries
Commission) to ensure protection of fish resources.
Residual Impacts
With implementation of the mitigation measures listed above, especially a

reduction in potential effects on the water column, the magnitude of the

6-83
impact on fish will be reduced such that the residual significance is considered
to be minor.
Table 6.29 Impact Summary: Impacts on Fish

Disturbance of Fish MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
6.7 IMPACTS ON THE SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT
The focus of this Section of the ESIA is on the impacts that the Project will
have on the socio-economic environment described in the Baseline section of
the Report (Chapter 5) and on ways in which these impacts can be prevented
and mitigated where negative or maximised where positive.
Inherent in impact assessments, is the tension between development and the

responsibility for consequences. In a number of the ESIA components (eg air
and noise, water, fauna and flora etc) the cause and effect relationship
between a project activity and its consequence is clear and even quantifiable,
thus making the identification of impacts, required mitigation measures and
the allocation of responsibilities for mitigation concrete. Unfortunately, this is
not the case for the social environment that may respond to activities in
unpredictable, complex and often intangible ways. Lonrho, as the developer,
and the EPA as permitting authority will need to agree on the extent to which
the developer and various government stakeholders will commit themselves
to implementing mitigation measures in conjunction with additional planning
and development activities that will be necessary to provide a socially healthy
environment. Development and management of the broader socio-economic
environment is outside of the developer’s ambit of responsibility, but failure
to implement appropriate measures to ensure controlled development and
change will have negative consequences for both the Project and existing and
new residents in the Study Area.
In presenting the socio-economic impacts anticipated to arise as a result of the

Project this chapter draws on participatory fieldwork interactions with
affected communities; stakeholder engagement at different levels; and
responses from government and specialist groups to the Scoping Report. In
addition, information and specialists’ understandings, accumulated during
other similar work in Ghana and other countries in Africa, have contributed to
this impact assessment. The areas of significant impact are presented and
assessed under the following groupings below:
national and regional economy;

economic and physical displacement;
natural resources;
livelihoods;

6-84
social infrastructure, governance and service delivery;
socio-cultural environment;
health; and
tourism.
Impacts that require compensation and livelihood restoration planning are

presented in this assessment but due to the significance of the issue a separate
specialised study (to develop a Livelihood Restoration Plan (LRP) (Annex I) is
currently taking place, under the auspices of SRC Limited, and will fully
address the scale of this impact and detail the approach to be taken in
addressing compensation and restoration measures.
The impacts on physical resources such as air, noise, surface water resources,
groundwater and soils as well as impacts on biological resources such fauna
and flora are assessed within the biophysical impacts in Section 6.5. The
assessment of the socio-economic impacts listed above takes the results of
these assessments on physical and biological receptors into account. Their
effects on the socio-economic receptors and their social implications are
included in the socio-economic impact assessment. These are cross-referenced
at appropriate locations within this Section.
6.7.1 Impacts on the National and Regional Economy
The Project will impact on the economy of the local towns, Atuabo, Anokyi,
Asemdasuazo, Ellembelle District, the Western Region and on Ghana in
numerous ways, both positive and negative. The Project will change the face
of the local area, from a sparsely populated rural area towards an industrial
area with potentially large settlements within a few years. This is in keeping
with Government Planning and Policies that have identified the Study Area to
become and industrial-coastal zone. This will have a significant impact on the
socio-economic characteristics of the local area over the medium to long term,
with a substantial change in demographics, livelihoods and living conditions.
The key sources of the Project’s impacts are land-take for the development,
encroachment into the marine environment, direct employment by the Project,
local procurement and an influx of job and opportunity seekers. On the
positive side, these will facilitate income growth, capacity development and
national level economic impacts. In addition, the Project will result in
infrastructure and service improvements, which will in themselves impact on
the local and District economy. These improvements are within the context of
increased pressure on government infrastructure and services, as described in
Section 6.7.5, so may partly be considered as a mitigation measure related to
potential negative impacts of the Project.
Increased Government Revenue: Construction
Impact Description
Increased government revenue refers to the tax payments that the Project will
make to the Government of Ghana. It also includes individuals’ taxes paid by

6-85
Project employees from construction through operations as well as substantial
expenses for local content that are then taxable through companies’ tax.
During construction there will be no taxes on the Project because of its status
as part of a “free zone” development. However, Ghanaian individuals
employed on the Project will be liable for personal taxes. A wage bill of
between 4,950,000 USD and 6.600,000 USD is anticipated during the 18 - 24
months of construction with Ghanaian employees taxed at a progressive rate
with the top marginal rate of 25 percent and non-resident individuals taxed at
15 percent (Deloitte, 2012).
In addition, the value of construction contracts is expected to be in the region

of 300 M USD for marine works and 100 M USD for onshore building works
for tenant areas. Within this amount local companies will have the potential to
supply and service elements of a number of contracts including supply of rock
and aggregate for breakwater and concrete structures; timber for temporary
works; provision of food and laundry services; medical, logistics and security
services; purchase of fuel, oil, lubes and cement.
Figure 6.29 Impact Diagram – Increased Government Revenue (Construction)
Impact Assessment
The scale of the impact will benefit the national economy and potentially parts
of the Western Region and Ellembelle District and is thus considered national.
The duration will be short-term for the 18-24 months of construction and is a
direct positive impact of high magnitude given the limited number of direct
employment opportunities in the context of the national economy and the
potential of Ghanaian companies to supply and service contracts.
The sensitivity is considered medium.
The overall impact is considered to be of moderate positive significance.
Mitigation Measures

6-86
There is very little that the Project can do to maximise the benefits of increased
government revenue. However, the Project should strive to make taxation
payments in a transparent, accurate and timely manner in accordance with the
law of Ghana and should ensure that sound financial principles and processes
are in place to achieve these objectives.
Residual Impact
The residual impact associated with increased government revenues for
construction and operation phases will remain unchanged as moderate
significance for construction. The management measures put in place should
result in good financial and business practice, but will not change the
significance of the impact on the economy.
Table 6.30 Impact Summary: Increased Government Revenue (Construction)
Phase Pre-mitigation Significance Residual Impact Significance

Increased government MODERATE POSITIVE MODERATE POSITIVE
revenue
Increased Government Revenue: Operation
Impact Description
The Project will be developed as part of a Free Zone and as such will only pay
taxes to the Government of Ghana after ten years of operation. However, after
ten years it will pay the legally required amount on anticipated port
operations of 165 M USD per annum and rig repair turnover from tenants, in
current terms, of approximately 300-400 M USD per annum. Other tenants
within the Project development will also contribute taxes to the government’s
revenue but these are unknown at this time. Between taxable profits for the
port operations and tenant rig repair annual tax of approximately 40 M USD is
expected to be paid annually to the Government of Ghana.
Government revenues from taxes are reallocated into various types of

expenditure including recurrent expenditure, grants, repayment of loans and
development spending, thus the increase in revenue for translation into
spending has multiplier impacts. The extent to which this increased
Government revenue will feed into development expenditure in the local area
is unknown, but various policies and plans for the Region, District and around
the oil & gas industry suggest a focus for the allocation of some of this income.
In addition, the Government of Ghana will be a shareholder in the Project, for

a percentage as yet undetermined. It will therefore benefit from profit
generated by the Project, in the form of dividends, which will further increase
the country’s revenue.
An additional area of increased revenue resulting directly from the Project

will be individuals’ tax payments on salaries earned off the Project. An

6-87
annual salary bill of US$1.5M is anticipated for operations, which will be
taxed at a progressive rate with the top marginal rate of 25 percent for
Ghanaian employees. Non-resident individuals are not required to pay taxes
when working for a Free Zone Enterprise subject to the rules and regulations
of the Free Zone Act however, companies servicing the Project will also
contribute to the national fiscus through taxation.
Figure 6.30 Impact Diagram – Increased Government Revenue (Operation)
Impact Assessment
The scale of the impact will benefit the national economy and potentially parts
of the Western Region and Ellembelle District and is therefore considered
national in extent. This is a positive contribution to overall revenue however
the likely dispersion of it to other parts of the country is unknown.
The increased government revenue and the translation of this into

government expenditure and economic development is a direct, indirect and
induced positive impact, likely to occur over the life of the Project (after ten
years for the Project and from the beginning of operations for individual and
Ghanaian company taxes) and is therefore long term. The Government of
Ghana, which has an increasingly good track record of sound financial
management (with some cautions about how it will deal with the large and
new oil and gas revenues), will absorb the taxes into their fiscal system. The
approximately 1.2 percent percentage contribution from Project taxes, together
with dividends paid to Government once profits accrue, makes the magnitude
of the impact high and makes the sensitivity of the receptor medium.
The overall positive impact on increased government revenue and the

national economy is considered to be moderate significance.
Mitigation Measures
As above, there is very little that the Project can do to maximise the benefits of
increased government revenue. However, the Project should strive to make
taxation payments in a transparent, accurate and timely manner in accordance

6-88
with the law of Ghana and should ensure that sound financial principles and
processes are in place to achieve these objectives.
Residual Impact
The residual impact associated with increased government revenues for
operation will remain unchanged as moderate significance.
Table 6.31 Impact Summary: Increased Government Revenue (Operation)

Increased government MODERATE POSITIVE MODERATE POSITIVE
revenue
Economic Development and Diversification of the Economy
Impact Description
The increased activity and population associated with the construction and
operation of the Project will result in significantly increased demand for goods
and services in the area. It is also likely to result in a flow of goods and service
providers, both formal and informal, to the area, thus resulting in economic
development. An absence of demand for goods and services is currently a
major constraint to economic development in the Project area, as well as in the
District, Region and, to a lesser degree, in Ghana as a whole. The
development of the Project will be an important factor in addressing this
constraint.
In addition, the increased demand will also result in increased diversification

of the economy in the broader Project area. This will be experienced through
access to a variety of economic opportunities on the Project, its supply chain
and in the businesses providing goods and services to the growing population
At a national level, the Project will contribute to economic diversification,

reducing the “over-dependence on raw materials”, one of the Government’s
goals as set out in the “Agenda for Shared Growth and Accelerated
Development for a Better Ghana (2010 – 2016)”. The establishment of a facility
to service the oil industry add a financial interaction between the oil
companies and the country (rather than merely having the primary product
extracted and exported), adds value into the national economy by increasing
the value of the industry within the borders of Ghana. This results in
retention of more income in Ghana’s economy, and hence can translate into
economic development in the country as a whole.
Although these impacts will, on the whole, be positive, the Project will
significantly change the way of living and socio-economic characteristics of
the broader project area (the Ellembelle District at least), bringing potentially
negative impacts to the communities (see Section 6.7.6). It is likely that many
local residents in the Study Area may not be able to access the opportunities
and benefits made available as a result of the Project. In addition, there will be

6-89
expectations around improved standards of living and economic development
and if these are not met there may be some community resentment and
unhappiness associated with the Project.
Contributing factors to the impacts on economic development and

diversification during the construction phase are the following:
There will be approximately 1000 employees involved in various

construction activities. Of this number it is anticipated that a peak of 500-
600 people would be employed at any one time. It is anticipated that the
majority of unskilled, semi-skilled and skilled non-local workers will be
housed in construction accommodation, away from the communities,
where the majority of their daily needs in terms of food, health and
hygiene and recreation will be provided. This will limit the demand for
goods and services in the Study Area by construction workers, however it
is anticipated that during shift breaks, construction workers may go to the
larger towns for shopping and entertainment. However the emphasis will
be to recruit the labour force from communities close to the project site.
Over the construction period (approximately 18-24 months), however,

larger enterprises are likely to be established in the local area, providing
goods and services to the Project, its workers and the Project’s tenants.
Although construction activities will provide much opportunity for
economic and business development, other constraints such as access to
finance, limited infrastructure and skills, limited private sector in the area
(as described in the social baseline section in Chapter 5) and the current
prevalence of subsistence farming and fishing will constrain the level and
sophistication of local development.
At a regional level (ie the Ellembelle District and towns such as Aiyinasi
and Nkroful and Takoradi), the Project may provide opportunities for
economic development. Again, this will be constrained by the limited
private sector capacity in the area and constraints that the businesses face,
including competition from companies in Accra and Cote D’Ivoire.
At a national level, the construction of the Project has the potential to

provide significant opportunities for economic development, given the
demands in the Project supply chain with a relatively stable income flow
and spending power. However, given the technical nature of aspects of
the Project and the small private sector in Ghana, it is likely that larger
proportions of supplies will be procured from outside of the country.
Contributing factors to the impacts on economic development and

diversification during the operational phase are the following:
Over the longer term, the operation of the Project, its tenants, associated
facilities, activities and employees (direct and indirect) will result in
significantly increased economic activity in the local area, and to a lesser
degree, at the regional and national level. The sources of demand for local

6-90
goods and services are likely to come from operational employees (around
1500), some settling with their families from outside of the Study Area.
There will also be procurement from the Project tenants and associated
facilities. As described in Chapter 3 of the Project Description, these will
likely include services such as catering services, food supply, maintenance
services for non-technical aspects, buildings and facilities maintenance
and security etc. This is likely to be a small percentage of the Project’s
overall spend, but can make a significant difference at the Study Area and
district level.
The receptor economy and population will have had some time during
construction to identify and attempt to meet the requirements of the
Project during operation, although it is likely that they will still be subject
to those constraints described above. Similarly during the construction
phase, it is likely that other more sophisticated, larger businesses, chain
stores and foreign-owned companies will take up the opportunity that the
Project provides.
In addition to increasing economic development in the area, the Project

will also result in diversification of the local and national economy. The
project area is currently highly reliant on subsistence farming and fishing.
The Project, its supply chain and businesses set up as a result of induced
spending and economic development will introduce an opportunity for
economic diversification away from subsistence livelihood activities.
At the national level, the project will contribute to value added in the
economy by the servicing the oil & gas industry. This will decrease the
dependence of the Ghanaian economy on raw materials, as described in
the impact description above.

6-91
Figure 6.31 Impact Diagram – Economic Development and Diversification of the
Economy
Impact Assessment
Construction Phase
During construction, the Project will provide some opportunities for economic
diversification and development at a local, regional and national level, as
described above. The development of the economy and diversification of
businesses is a direct and induced positive impact of short-term duration (18-24
months) and small-medium magnitude.
The country’s developing culture of entrepreneurship, but still limited

industrial, manufacturing, service sectors currently able to take advantage of
the Project, decrease the effectiveness of this impact; hence the ability to adapt
or sensitivity of the receptor is considered low-medium.
The overall impact is thus considered to be of minor significance.
Operational Phase
The development will mainly take place at a local level, although the
increased incomes, revenues, businesses and economic development will
affect the district, regional and national levels. Economic development will
continue throughout operations and is thus considered to be long term such
that the Project area becomes a hub of activity. The impact will be direct and
induced with a medium positive magnitude.
By the operations phase, the national to district culture of entrepreneurship,

industrial, manufacturing, service sectors, and businesses in general may have
adapted and sensitivity is therefore considered medium.

6-92
The overall impact is thus considered to be minor-moderate over the life of the
Project.
Mitigation
The Project should strive to maximise local procurement wherever possible
such that local companies who meet the stringent requirements will have a
fair opportunity to secure business with the Project. In addition, as part of its
required alternative livelihoods programmes, the Project should invest in
training and economic development such that the opportunities for
individuals and local companies to enter into the supply chain are enhanced.
This can also be done through the support of existing Government initiatives
and organisations whose mandate focuses on business development and
whom the Project anticipates will be funded through taxes.
In addition, the Project should:
Develop a local procurement policy and processes that encourages local

content in the Project activities.
Disseminate information regarding procurement opportunities and

requirements as early as possible.
Disclose quality standards required by the Project for provision of goods

and services to the Project.
Support the development of a supplier training programme to enhance the

capacity of existing suppliers.
Identify livelihood replacement projects that fit with the National agenda
for diversified but sustainable economic development.
Consider Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) activities that promote

sustainable projects, training and education to help communities to
develop alternative livelihoods and ensure that economic dependence on
the Project is limited.
Residual Impact
During construction, the implementation of these plans is unlikely to create
any increase in the number of economic opportunities, due to the short time
scale and the economy’s limited ability to adapt at this stage. The economic
development, diversification and value-added residual impact during
construction will remain minor positive.
During operations the implementation of these planned optimisation

measures could increase the significance of this positive impact by ensuring
that development is sustainable and permanent, and that the needs of the
vulnerable groups within the communities are considered particularly as part
of alternative livelihoods activities. Based on an approach that places
mitigation measures predominantly in the hands of Government institutions

6-93
and organisations, and limits the involvement of the Project to a support role,
the mitigation measures will remain minor positive.
If LRP and CSR activities are implemented as recommended the measures will
enhance the capacity of the communities to maximise opportunities made
available to them through the Project. The residual impact following
optimisation during operation is therefore considered to be of moderate-major
(positive) significance.
Table 6.32 Impact Summary: Economic Development and Diversification of the Economy

Construction MINOR POSITIVE MINOR POSITIVE
Operation MINOR-MODERATE MINOR POSITIVE

POSITIVE
MODERATE-MAJOR
POSITIVE (with Lonrho’s
intervention)
Increased Business Experience, Training and Skills
Ghana’s Local Content Policy requires that local content and participation
should be embedded in the planning and development phases of every oil &
gas-related project. The policy requires that a minimum of 90 percent of
supplies and services should be sourced within Ghana within ten years of the
commencement of a Project. These minimum local content requirements
increase from 10 percent at the commencement of the Project, to 20 percent in
the second year and a further 10 percent each year thereafter until the targeted
90 percent is reached.
The policy also outlines that the submission of a detailed annual recruitment
and training programme for recruiting and training Ghanaians within 12
months of receiving a grant or license. The staffing requirements of the policy
are as follows:
Management staff: at least 50 percent Ghanaian from start of Project

activities, increasing to a target of 80 percent in the first five years.
Core technical staff: 30 percent at commencement increasing to 80 percent

in five years and further to 90 percent in ten years.
Other staff: a target of 100 percent Ghanaians.
Impact Description
The construction and operation of the Project will require the purchase of
equipment and will generate large contracts. The majority of these will be for
specialised and technical work and will be provided by specialist providers of
goods and services. However, there is still potential for local businesses in the

6-94
region and nationally to feed into this supply chain by supplying goods or
services to the Project. Services that are likely to be provided by local
providers, such as catering services, food supply, maintenance services for
non-technical aspects, buildings and facilities maintenance, general vehicle
maintenance, laundry, employee transport and land management.
Locally owned businesses in the Study Area and District, and, to a lesser
degree in the Region, are relatively small in terms of business systems and
business infrastructure. This is currently recognised by national and regional
authorities as a major constraint to economic development and hinders the
potential of local businesses to benefit from this impact. The direct
procurement opportunities that can be taken up by companies around the
Study Area and the District in particular will be extremely limited. At a
regional and national level, this will be less limited, and may be developed
over time. For those national companies that do get the opportunity to be part
of the supply chain, there will be long lasting and sustained benefits to the
businesses and their employees through increased experience, capacity and
training, particularly in having to meet more stringent international
requirements.
Construction Phase
In particular, the construction phase impacts will be the following:
The value of contracts for the construction of the Project (marine and
onshore together) will be in the region of US$350M. This expenditure will
include the purchase of equipment and large works contracts, including
civil and structural construction, mechanical works, electrical and control
construction and ongoing service contracts, most of which will be
specialised and technical.
Due to the technical nature of marine construction (described in Section 3),

the limited time available prior to, and during construction, and the low
capacity of local businesses, the procurement of local goods and services
for the Project will be extremely limited. This is particularly the case in
the directly affected area and in the short term (ie during construction),
but also applies to businesses in the district, region and the country as a
whole. There will be opportunities for procurement from the region and
nationally for onshore construction activities.
Operational Phase
In particular, the operational phase impacts will be the following:
The direct procurement of local goods and services will occur during
operations, with associated indirect and induced impacts as benefits flow
down the supply chain.

6-95
Once the Project is operational, the annual operating, general and
administrative costs for the port will be around US$25M (1). Tenant costs
are currently unknown but would be added to this overall amount.
Initially, the majority of these costs will go to specialist providers of goods
and services. Local companies are unlikely to be able to take up many of
the opportunities available due to the limited size and capacity of the
private sector in the country. However, over time, local procurement
should increase as businesses change their modus operandi to meet the
requirements of the Project, and as economic development in the area
increases.
Even if local companies only receive around 1 percent of annual costs, this
would equate to in excess of US$250 000. There would be multiplier
effects of this investment, which would increase investment into the
economy. Both through targeted development policies and the unplanned
growth of interrelated industries, many ports have become the location for
industrial clusters. Economic multiplier effects of ports (even specialised
port as in the case of the Project) are recognised to include the petro-
chemical industry, value-added services, repair and maintenance,
telecommunications, banking, customs, warehouse and distribution,
waste management, security services and cleaning and laundry services.
Where local companies can harness procurement opportunities, this will

not only provide current opportunities in terms of revenue and business
growth, but also in terms of future opportunities due to experience gained
through this Project.
Figure 6.32 Impact Diagram – Increased Business Experience, Training and Skills
Impact Assessment
Construction Phase
Benefits would initially be felt at a nationally and regionally, with some
benefits accruing locally as the directly affected communities adapt to the
opportunities. The duration of the positive impact will be in the short term,
during construction. The procurement of local goods and services and
associated increase in business skills and experience during construction is
(1) This is based on projected average annual operating and maintenance costs for the first 50 years of operation.

6-96
positive, with associated direct, indirect and induced benefits flowing through
the supply chain of small magnitude.
The sensitivity or ability to harness these opportunities is, however, low due to
the relatively small nature of the locally owned businesses in the project area
and district and medium for the region and Ghana as a whole.
The impact is therefore considered to be of moderate positive significance.
Operational Phase
Benefits would be felt at a local level in terms of the provision of less technical
goods and services, and at a regional and national level for those businesses
that can respond to the higher technical requirements. The benefits associated
with the procurement during operations would be medium- and long-term,
depending on the nature of goods and services provided and the length of
contracts. The increase in business skills and experience will have long term,
or permanent impacts on businesses and their employees, through increased
experience, capacity development and training. The impact is positive and of
direct, indirect and induced medium magnitude, down the supply chain.
Due to the relatively small nature of the locally owned businesses in the
district the ability to harness these opportunities will be relatively low initially
however it will be higher than during construction and hence the ability to
take advantage of opportunities will increase to medium. For regional and
national businesses adaptability is medium.
The impact is therefore considered to be of moderate positive significance

during operations.
Mitigation
The mitigation measures for this impact are the same as for those under the
impact of Economic Development and Diversification of the Economy above.
Residual Impacts
The implementation of the management and mitigation measures would most
likely have little impact over the short-term of construction and the
significance of procurement would remain as moderate (positive) during
construction. During operation, the increased procurement and improvement
in skills and experience would change the significance rating from moderate -
major (positive).
Table 6.33 Impact Summary: Procurement of Local Goods and Services and Associated
Increased Business Experience, Training and Skills
Pre-mitigation Significance Residual Impact Significance

Construction MODERATE POSITIVE MODERATE POSITIVE
Operation MODERATE POSITIVE MAJOR POSITIVE

6-97
6.7.2 Economic and Physical Displacement
International development and finance organisations recognise that

development projects, which displace people or livelihoods involuntarily,
generally give rise to severe economic, social, and environmental problems.
Production systems are dismantled; productive assets and income sources are
lost;; people’s productive skills may be less applicable and the competition for
resources greater; community structures and social networks are weakened;
kin groups are dispersed; and cultural identity, traditional authority, and the
potential for mutual help are diminished. Involuntary resettlement may cause
long-term hardship, impoverishment, and environmental damage unless
appropriate measures are carefully planned and carried out.
The Project footprint covers approximately 514 ha of farming, agro-processing

and grazing land which will no longer be available to current users. Figure 1.1
shows the Project affected areas.
Most of the households that will experience economic displacement are

economically vulnerable by Ghana standards. Therefore all aspects of the
displacement and rehabilitation process must be designed to address poverty-
related issues. More specifically, attention needs to be paid to vulnerable
groups (women, the elderly, female-headed households).
Loss of Farming, Agro-processing and Grazing Land
Impact Description
The vast majority of the Study Area residents rely heavily on farming, agro-
processing (predominantly coconut oil and gin) and a small number of people
are involved in livestock rearing and herding. Produce is used as part of a
combined livelihood strategy of household subsistence use and cash sale.
Land-users’ rights to the different areas vary from ownership to rental to
sharecropping to employment, but all rely on their access to the land. The
LRP household survey and asset registration due to be completed in August
2012, will determine exactly how many households are affected and in what
manner.
In particular, the construction phase impacts are informed by the following:
Approximately 514 ha of land inside the Project footprint will be fenced

and this will be cleared for construction of the different on-shore
components of Phase 1 of the Project (see Chapter 3 for the Project
description and Figure 1.1 for the layout).
Numerous households from Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo will be

affected by the loss of fields and plantations, which lie within the area
being fenced off for Project development. Of the three communities
Asemdasuazo will experience the greatest impact of loss of land with

6-98
Atuabo and Anokyi losing significant, but smaller, portions of their land
respectively. Most of the households practice subsistence agriculture and
agro-processing. From the time of construction, access to this land and the
assets on it will be lost.
Some households employ seasonal labourers on an ad hoc basis during

planting and harvesting times. These labourers are not therefore
considered as an affected group eligible to measures in the Resettlement
and/or Livelihood Restoration Plan (Annex I). This position makes them
vulnerable.
There are relatively few cattle in the area (reportedly about 600 head) and
these are herded by a small number of herdsmen who rely on this
employment for their livelihoods. Without grazing lands in the area,
people may sell or relocate their cattle impacting on the herdsmen.
Land is not only valued for it productive capacity but also for its
inheritance value as it is passed down from one generation to the next.
Thus, this loss should be recognised in its socio-cultural context as well.
According to IFC Performance Standard 5, all parties affected by loss of

land are entitled to alternative land or restoration of livelihoods lost –
including those without title to the land. All individuals using land within
the affected area should therefore be considered for compensation (or
resettlement if no appropriate compensation measures can be found) as
part of the Project.
The acquisition of suitable alternative agricultural and grazing land for

the affected parties will be difficult given that there are no significant
portions of unallocated land within the stool. The Awulae is exploring
options for alternative lands but land-users have highlighted their strong
desires not to be given access to alternative land much further away from
their current plots and plantations.
The potential significance of this impact needs to be understood in terms

of the vulnerable position of many people and households in the Study
Area. Based on Ghana’s average per capita GDP of 3100 USD it is likely
that most people in Ghana are living off less than 258 USD per month.
Given the low level of economic activity and industrialisation in the Study
Area it is reasonable to expect that individuals here are living of much less
than that and are existing close to the poverty line of approximately 2
USD per day. Thus vulnerability relates to marginal living conditions and
insecure livelihood strategies, income stability, food security, household
instability, and poverty. It is anticipated that marginal households
(including elderly and female-headed households) and other vulnerable
land users will suffer the most from the loss of land because they seldom
have access to alternative fixed incomes.

6-99
Figure 6.33 Impact Diagram – Loss of Farming, Agro-processing and Grazing Land
Impact Assessment
The loss of access to agricultural land will affect many households within the
three towns and will therefore be an impact of local scale. It will occur during
construction and will continue through operations and is therefore considered
to be permanent and of large negative magnitude. This is a direct consequence
of Project activities, and given that communities are highly reliant on crop
farming and agro-processing (and to a much lesser degree on livestock
farming) for their subsistence, their ability to adapt (or sensitivity) to this loss
of access to land is considered to be high negative.
The impact of loss of access to agricultural, agro-processing and grazing land

among local residents in all three communities, particularly Asemdasuazo, is
considered to be of major negative significance.
Mitigation
The following are potential measures to address impacts on users of land lost
to the Project:
A comprehensive livelihood study should be undertaken and Livelihood

Restoration Plan (LRP) should be developed to identify all landowners
and users (with varying entitlements) and alternative livelihood options
should be explored in a participatory manner with affected land users
(refer to Annex I). Such options should include sourcing alternative land
of the same or higher agricultural value and within convenient distances
from current land; alternative compensation and sustainable livelihood
replacement mechanisms should be developed; and finally, if necessary,
the option of relocation should be considered.
The potential of acquiring alternative agricultural and grazing land

should be guided by the Awulae and other relevant authorities.
Although compensation in cash is not recommended, affected parties who

prefer cash (despite the potential availability of replacement land or

6-100
alternative options) should be given a number of investment options (eg
bursaries for their children, annuity, access to housing bonds etc) in order
to address the IFC requirements with regard to the restoration of income.
Affected parties (and especially vulnerable households) who prefer not to

continue with subsistence agriculture should be given a choice of
compensation options such as training in alternative sustainable skills,
employment, payment of school fees for their children and student
bursaries.
Full details of the management and mitigation measures with regard to the
loss of land and access to resources should be addressed in a comprehensive
LRP.
In terms of broader land use planning, the following should be considered:
In conjunction with local/district government and relevant planning

authorities and traditional authorities, the Project should participate in the
development of a sustainable land use and settlement plan for the area as
a way of addressing the changes to land use in the Project area.
Residual Impact
Full implementation of the mitigation measures described above, particularly
a successfully implemented LRP, will reduce the impact of loss of land for
farming, agro-processing and grazing to a minor impact – in particular, for
those who secure continued access to agricultural activities.
Among those that choose not to continue with subsistence activities, the
impact may be of minor negative significance, due to the vulnerability of cash
based livelihood strategies.
Table 6.34 Impact Summary: Loss of Farming, Agro-processing and Grazing Land

Construction MAJOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
Loss of Access to Fishing Areas and Related Resources
Impact Description
The vast majority of the Study Area residents rely heavily on fishing (marine
and fresh water). Catches and the processed fish make up a significant part of
a combined livelihood strategy of household subsistence use and cash sale.
Even though fishing catches are declining all along the coast, both men and
women in the Study Area are active in fisheries and the loss of access to
fishing areas (beaches for casting; landing site for pulling in nets, fresh water
fishing areas etc.) will impact on everyone in the supply chain.

6-101
The marine and freshwater fishing areas on and around the Project site are
shown in Figure 6.35 and Figure 6.36 below and are referred to in illustrating
the loss of access to fishery-related livelihoods in this impact.
The impacts can described as follows:
Restriction of Access to Beach: Approximately 2 km of beach will be used

in the construction and operation of the Project. In addition, the
establishment of the breakwater and groyne will protrude into the marine
environment restricting access into the port area.
Removal of Fishing Areas: Inland, the seasonal wetland and perennial

ponds that lie between the main road and Asemdasuazo will be used as
part of the land take described in Section 6.5.9 above. These fishing
grounds within the Project site will be removed by the site clearance and
construction areas and will no longer be accessible.
Affected Communities: Numerous households from Atuabo, Anokyi and

Asemdasuazo will be affected by the loss of access to the marine and
seasonal and perennial inland fishing sites, which lie within the port’s on-
and near-shore infrastructure as well as within the area being fenced off
for the Project. Of the three communities Anokyi will be most directly
affected by the loss of beach access, as this is the area from which
fishermen cast their nets. Atuabo too will be impacted as the Project
footprint and fence abut fishermen’s beach seining area and some of their
fishing activities take place along the directly affected section of beach.
Asemdasuazo will be most affected by the loss of access to their fishing
ponds, which are located south of Asemdasuazo and may lie within the
Project site and will be removed through infill. Most of the households
participate in fisheries activities and will lose their access to these areas
from construction.
Ownership and Vulnerability (Beach Fishing):

No one has legal title over the beach yet many people are directly
dependent upon such access for their livelihoods. In each fishing
company there could be as many as nine in a canoe crew and
between 25 and 70 on the onshore team. There are five companies in
Atuabo and four in Anokyi. This position makes them vulnerable to
the loss of access to fishing areas along the beach.
The wetland area/ area of inundation to the south of Asemdasuazo is

seasonal, although there are reportedly perennial ponds located to
the south of Asemdasuazo and possibly within the northern
boundary of the Project site. None of the fishermen own land in the
wetland and the ponds are used more communally than privately,
thus with no identifiable owner. This makes the inland fishers (men
and women) vulnerable to the loss of this resource.

6-102
The potential significance of this impact needs to be understood in
terms of the vulnerable position of many people and households in
the Study Area. This vulnerability relates to marginal living
conditions and insecure livelihood strategies, income stability, food
security, household instability, and poverty.
It is anticipated that marginal households (including the elderly and

female-headed households, seasonal fishing employees) and other
vulnerable fishers and fishmongers will suffer the most from the loss
of access because they seldom have access to alternative fixed
incomes.
Eligibility for Compensation: According to IFC Performance Standard 5,

all parties affected by loss of land are entitled to alternative land or
restoration of livelihoods lost – including those without title to the land.
“in such situations, affected persons frequently do not have formal ownership.
This may include freshwater and marine environments” (IFC, 2012). All
individuals using land or resources within the affected area should
therefore be considered for compensation (or resettlement if no
appropriate compensation measures can be found) as part of the Project.
Fishmongering: Fishmongering is directly dependent upon the marine

and freshwater catches and a loss of access or significant reduction of
catch size would have direct impacts on the subsistence of the
fishmongers and food security more broadly.
Figure 6.34 Impact Diagram – Loss of Access to Fishing Areas and Related Resources

6-103
Figure 6.35 Anokyi Net Casting and Tie-off Areas
Figure 6.36 Asemdasuazo Freshwater Fishing Areas (Indicative Locations)
Impact Assessment
The loss of access to beaches, casting and landing sites, and freshwater fishing
areas will affect most households within the three towns and will therefore be
an impact of local scale. The loss of access will occur during construction and
will continue through operations and is therefore considered to be a permanent
negative.
This is a direct consequence of Project activities, and given that communities

are highly reliant on fishing and fishmongering for their subsistence, their
ability to adapt (or sensitivity) to this loss of access is considered to be high
negative.
The impact of loss of access to fishing areas and related resources among
residents in all three communities is considered to be of major negative
significance.
Mitigation
The following are potential measures to address impacts on users of land lost
to the Project:
A comprehensive LRP should be undertaken to identify all fishers and

fishmongers who will be affected and alternative livelihood options
should be explored in a participatory manner with these groups. Such
options should include finding alternative ways of providing access to the
sea within convenient distances from current beach area; alternative
compensation and livelihood replacement mechanisms; and finally, if
necessary, the option of relocation should be considered.
For freshwater fisheries a comprehensive LRP should be undertaken to

identify all fishers and fishmongers who will be affected and alternative
livelihood options should be explored in a participatory manner with
these groups. This is particularly important, as no appropriate alternative
freshwater access is likely to be available in the area.
Mitigation could include the development of small-scale commercial fish

farming, with extension programmes for training and the establishment
of appropriately constituted community companies that would ensure
skills, resources and the fair distribution of income.
Improved levels of mechanisation (eg outboard motors) should be

explored as an option to allow fishers to access fishing areas further from
shore, thereby circumventing the loss of access to large areas of the beach.
This is in keeping with the expressed wishes of many fishermen who have
however also expressed some concern at the possibility of then competing
with fishermen already operating in deeper waters. If outboard motors
are provided as a mitigation measure, this should also be explored with
awareness that many people employed on beach crews of fishing
companies could then lose their jobs as this approach to fishing is less
labour-intensive than methods currently used.

6-106
Affected parties who prefer cash compensation (despite the potential
availability of alternative casting and landing sites) should be given a
number of investment options (eg bursaries for their children, annuity,
access to housing bonds etc.) in order to address the IFC requirements
with regard to the restoration of income.
Affected parties (and especially vulnerable households) who prefer not to

continue with subsistence fisheries should be given a choice of
compensation options such as training in alternative sustainable skills,
employment, payment of school fees for their children, student bursaries,
etc.
Limit exclusion zones around Project infrastructure as far as possible,

particularly around the outside of the breakwater. Exclusion zones should
be established with human safety as the primary objective. The developer
will also be looking to ensure the security of the facility through these
zones.
Full details of the management and mitigation measures with regard to the
loss of access to fishing areas and resources should be addressed in a
comprehensive LRP.
In terms of broader land use planning, as a way of addressing the changes to

land use in the Project area (including activities that will impact on beaches
and fisheries areas), the following should be considered:
In conjunction with local/district government and relevant planning

authorities and traditional authorities, the Project should participate in the
development of a sustainable land use and settlement plan for the area as
a way of addressing the changes to land use in the Project area.
Residual Impact
Full implementation of the mitigation measures described above, particularly
the successful implementation of the LRP, will reduce the impact of loss of
access to fishing areas and related incomes to a negligible impact for both
marine and freshwater fisheries. Among those that choose not to continue
with subsistence activities, the impact may be of minor negative significance,
due to the vulnerability of cash based livelihood strategies.
Table 6.35 Impact Summary: Loss of Access to Fishing Areas and Related Resources

Loss of access to fishing areas MAJOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
and related resources

6-107
6.7.3 Impacts on Ecosystem Services
The use of land, marine, freshwater and natural resources and the ecosystem
services is a key part of local livelihoods. Ecosystem services are used to
secure livelihoods, establish homes, water animals, undertake agricultural
activities, supplement incomes and for medicinal and food sources. Threats to
the availability and quality of these services have significant implications for
food security and survival. Furthermore, reduced access to such services
creates competition and potential conflict amongst local residents and
potentially with newcomers to the area.
The biophysical resources including terrestrial flora and fauna, fish and
intertidal ecology are assessed in Section 6.5 and Section 6.6. The impacts
assessed here are based on the conclusions reached in these sections.
Decreased Availability of Land for Settlement
Impact Description
Previous sections have discussed the decreased availability of agricultural and
grazing land as a direct result of the Project footprint and associated land take.
Housing demands directly related to the Project’s permanent workforce and
indirectly as a result of an in-migration of people would involve further land-
take in the proximity of Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo. This would
reduce land available to local residents for settlement. While there are
intentions to allow the towns to expand, the absence of detailed spatial land
use plans for the three affected towns may exacerbate the impact.
Staff and labour force will be housed in accommodation camps to be

constructed at the Project site within the concession area. Provision will be
made for 500 workers to be accommodated over the 18–24 month construction
period. For operations, medium and long stay accommodation for senior
executives will be provided in the Port Village, within the concession area.
The Project plans for other employee accommodation to be sourced from
within the surrounding communities and other towns as far away as Aiyinase,
without direct involvement from the Project.
The development of the Project will result in a large influx of people

(contractors, subcontractors, employees, job seekers, entrepreneurs and
others) wanting to take advantage of the Project and related development
opportunities in the area and surrounding communities. It is most likely that
people will try to settle as close as possible to project activities where
employment and economic opportunities are perceived to be highest. This
means that Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo are likely to become host
villages for the influx. This will happen even though current district planning
has identified Aiyinase as a node for denser housing development.
An influx of this nature will have consequences for land availability in the
area. As people struggle to find land for settlement, the risk of illegal land use
practices will increase and the land allocation system and official land-use

6-108
planning will come under pressure with illegal settlement encroaching on
other available land.
In summary, housing demands in the three towns surrounding the Project site
associated with the permanent Project workforce, coupled with the
accommodation needs of job seekers, will require significant land in the
surrounding communities for housing, business and related infrastructure
development.
The impact will be triggered during construction and is likely to increase in

the early stages of operations. The influx may level off once people
understand the reality of limited job opportunities and other spin-off
activities.
Figure 6.37 Impact Diagram – Decreased Availability of Land for Settlement
Impact Assessment
A decrease in land available for settlement will be felt in all three Study Area
communities. The scale of this impact is therefore local and permanent as it will
be triggered during construction and will continue through the operation
phase and beyond. The magnitude is assessed to be medium considering the
current community sizes (relatively small) and pressure for settlement land.
The availability of land will decrease as a direct and indirect consequence of
the Project as well as the in-migration of job-seekers and others requiring land
for accommodation. In the absence of mitigation, this will have a negative
impact on both existing residents and newcomers to the area of high
magnitude.
Among existing ‘land-owners’, their ability to adapt (sensitivity) will be low,

as they will already have their land allocations; however, existing residents
still seeking to acquire land, and migrants/job-seekers to the area, could face
severe difficulties in legally acquiring land (high negative).
The significance of a decreased availability of land for settlement is therefore


6-109
Mitigation
The following are potential mitigation measures to manage impacts on natural
resources:
Collaborate with traditional authorities, regional government and

planning authorities in the formulation and implementation of an
inclusive Spatial Development Framework for the broader area around
the Project (particularly District Planning and Coordinating Unit;
Department of Town and Country Planning, and Land Commission), in
order to support a functional settlement pattern through the identification
of key development nodes and district growth points. This will depend on
the support for and interest in such an approach from the relevant
authorities. Considering that such planning has already been initiated,
supporting its conclusion should be easily achieved.
Initiate the establishment of a capacity building and institutional

strengthening programme for both local and district government and
planning authorities to record and monitor the overall land use and
development process in the broader district.
Assist traditional authorities and government with the identification and

demarcation of transitional zones for settlement, business and informal
trading, in anticipation of the influx of people and associated housing
demands, in order to direct future settlement patterns and prevent illegal
settlement.
Promote the implementation of joint planning approaches with

government and other key stakeholders for strategically important
agricultural and housing projects. Such projects could include the
provision for housing development and infrastructure for the Project’s
needs and more broadly.
Promote/support the establishment of a joint stakeholder forum for the

broader Project area to discuss and address matters of common concern.
Residual Impact
If the Project is able to successfully partner with traditional authorities and
local, district and regional government, and other stakeholders and ensure
that government authorities accept and act on their responsibilities with
regard to influx management, the significance of decreased land available for
settlement will be reduced to minor.
If the partnerships do not materialise and government is unable to implement

their responsibilities, the impact will remain of moderate - major negative
significance, as the Project can only play a supporting role in addressing this
impact.

6-110
Table 6.36 Impact Summary: Decreased Availability of Land for Settlement
Pre-mitigation Significance Residual Impact Significance

Decreased availability for land MODERATE - MAJOR MINOR NEGATIVE (if
for settlement (Planning and NEGATIVE successful relationships are
Construction) established)
MODERATE -
MAJORNEGATIVE (without
government partnerships)
Decreased availability for land MODERATE - MAJOR MINOR NEGATIVE (if

for settlement (Operation) NEGATIVE successful relationships are
established)
MODERATE - MAJOR
NEGATIVE (without
government partnerships)
Reduced Access to / Increased Competition for Flora and Fauna
Impact Description
Project activities will reduce access to flora and fauna in a number ways.
During construction, parts of the project area will be cleared of all vegetation,
and what little fauna remains in the area is likely to move away to find
alternative habitat. Furthermore, areas under construction and during
operations will be fenced for safety and security reasons, thus preventing
access by local residents. In addition, as discussed above, an increase in
population, both directly from Project employees and indirectly with the
influx of newcomers, may, depending on the development of housing
infrastructure to accommodate people locally, reduce land currently used for
accessing fauna and flora in areas surrounding the communities. The
increased population size will also place more pressure on, and create
competition for, natural resources, which may result in an increase in tension
and conflict between local residents and newcomers.
The influx of people to the Project area will result in increased pressure on
fisheries as not everyone will find employment and many people may resort
to fishing activities, thus increasing competition for the resource and
increasing the demand for food. This would be most pronounced during
construction and possibly stabilise or reduce during operations as the
population size stabilises.
Project activities during construction will result in the clearing of large areas
of natural vegetation and the fencing of the remaining section of the footprint.
As highlighted in Chapter 5, communities rely heavily on natural resources
such a plants, wood and raffia palms for cooking; smoking fish; construction
of housing and roofing as well as for herbal medicines. In addition to these
types of subsistence activities, some households reportedly make a living from
gathering and selling natural materials or using them to generate

6-111
supplementary incomes. At least some of these resources are collected from
within the Project footprint and will no longer be available to communities.
This applies predominantly to flora as, aside from small crustaceans that
children collect from the beach, and to which they will lose access, there is
little fauna left in the area.
The significance of this loss needs to be understood within the context of the
limited skills and experience (as required by the Project) among local residents
– a factor which will limit the extent to which residents are able to secure job
opportunities associated with the Project as compensation for this loss of
natural resources.
During operations the loss of and competition for flora is likely to increase as
the population in the area grows, settlements expand and subsistence
activities continue to be art of people’s livelihood strategies.
This is also true for marine fauna. The dredging and construction activities
described in Chapter 3 and Section 6.7.2 above as well restricted access areas
around marine infrastructure will reduce access to fisheries (Section 6.7.2).
Restriction of access to the beach will also impact on the collection of crabs,
mainly undertaken by younger children. The crabs will likely move to new
areas but the impact should be understood, along with the other issues
highlighted above, as being compounded by the influx of people to the area,
which will create an increased exploitation from an increased population.
Figure 6.38 Impact Diagram – Access to/ Increased Competition for Flora and Fauna
Impact Assessment
The scale of this expected decrease in flora and fauna (and parallel increase
demand for the resources) is expected to be local given that the area around
the Project is likely to undergo a process of increased settlement as a direct
and indirect consequence of the Project from construction through operations
and thus is considered permanent. The decreased availability of flora in
particular (including firewood, building and some medicinal uses) will have a

6-112
negative impact on local residents, particularly in light of their dependence on
these resources for subsistence and income generating purposes as well as to
mitigate high costs of accessing health centres. The potential increased
competition for fish, and reduced access to them, will also have a negative
impact on local residents whose livelihoods are significantly dependent upon
fisheries-related income. The magnitude is considered to be large.
The ability of people to adapt (ie sensitivity to the impact) to a decrease in

flora and fauna is likely to be high negative, based on the abovementioned
dependence, and their current lack of skills required to secure jobs associated
with the Project that would alleviate this dependence.
The overall impact is considered to be of major negative significance prior to

any mitigation measures.
Mitigation
A number of possible mitigation measures have been identified that the
Project should implement:
Ensure communities participate in pre-construction harvesting of

resources as part of clearing activities. Identify optimal methods of storing
harvested materials.
Consider partnering district government and communities in establishing

nurseries to replace lost resources and to harvest and re-plant species of
local significance (particularly medicinal). The sustainability of such
projects should be assessed as part of a Social Development Plan. This
project could be part of community based natural resource management
projects run under district level programmes.
Consider fish farming (marine and/or freshwater) as an alternative way

of ensuring the availability of this important economic and food source.
See mitigation measures for Sections 6.7.2 related to compensation and

alternative livelihoods.
Include information and awareness programmes on conservation and

sustainable harvesting of natural resources into stakeholder engagement
strategies.
Work closely with local government (District Planning Co-ordinating

Unit; Department of Town and Country Planning, Land Commission etc.)
in planning settlement development to limit informal and unmanaged
settlement that will further diminish natural resources.
Promote environmentally and socially sound land use practices within the
Project through the sustainable use of renewable resources.

6-113
Explore solar power provision, as a supplementary source for employee
accommodation as well as in communities who will be hosts to the influx
of newcomers and as part of a Social Development Plan.
Residual Impact
In terms of the Project’s direct impact on flora and fauna, the implementation
of the above mitigation measures should reduce any direct impact on these
resources to minor negative.
However, in terms of an increased population (as brought about by the

Project) and the difficulties inherent in managing this occurrence, the impact
on flora and fauna may remain one of moderate negative significance,
particularly if people struggle to secure alternative, non-subsistence based
livelihoods but still choose to stay in the area.
Table 6.37 Impact Summary: Reduced Access to/Increased Competition for Flora and
Fauna

Construction and Operations MAJOR NEGATIVE MINOR - MODERATE
NEGATIVE
MODERATE NEGATIVE (with

no alternative non-subsistence-
based livelihoods)
6.7.4 Impact on Livelihoods
The manner in which people secure their livelihoods is not static. As

individual, family and community needs change, so too do the strategies
employed. Opportunities may arise out of altered social, economic and even
physical circumstances that, if embraced and seized, could improve livelihood
security. It is the risks of change for those less able to adapt that need to be
highlighted to ensure that livelihood security is not diminished.
Employment Creation
Impact Description
The development of the Project will result in employment creation in Ghana
from direct employment and indirect supply chain employment. This impact
is assessed only for direct employment with no indirect or dependency
numbers supplied (see Table 6.31). However, it is assumed that indirect and
induced employment will be created along the supply chain; and jobs created
in the country by employee spending. Literature suggests methodological
difficulties in assessing the multiplier effect of direct employment when
dealing with port developments. Therefore, existing figures will not be used
nor others estimated in this impact.

6-114
Table 6.38 Employment requirements for the Project
Employment Level Number

Construction Phase (Port only)
Senior managers 30
Technical staff 260
Skilled local personnel 330
Unskilled people 230
Dredging Operations
Senior staff 23
Technical crew operators 79
Semi and unskilled personnel 56
Operation Phase (Port only)

Senior expat staff 7
Senior/junior staff 37
Skilled and semi-skilled staff 180
Unskilled staff 106
Employees will be sourced locally and internationally. Where appropriate,

some of the Ghanaian team members will be trained at the Lonrho facility in
Luba, Equatorial Guinea.
Direct Employment During Construction

The construction of the Project will take place over an approximately 18-24
month period from late 2012 to mid-2014. The construction workforce for the
port will be approximately 1000 employees, with a peak workforce of about
500-600. It is estimated that between 60 percent and 70 percent of these jobs
will be filled by Ghanaians translating to between 600 and 700 positions.
Due to the technical nature of aspects of the Project’s marine construction, the
level of skills required for this aspect is high. Skilled occupations for both
marine and onshore construction will be approximately 39 percent of the
workforce, depending on the stage of the construction period. The remaining
61 percent will be made up of semi-skilled and un-skilled positions. The
majority of employment contracts during construction will be temporary,
ranging from a few months to two years.
The socio-economic baseline assessment shows that the levels of education,

skills and experience in construction or industrial sectors in the Project Area
are very low. In the Western Region, Ellembelle District and Ghana as a
whole experience in marine construction is limited, while onshore
construction skills and experience are present. Thus it has been assumed that a
limited number of Ghanaians, and an extremely limited number of people
from the broader Project area, would qualify for the skilled and semi-skilled
positions made available during construction, particularly on marine
construction.
This is exacerbated by the fact that some of the construction contractors are
likely to bring in their own crew who have specific experience in their

6-115
commissioned tasks (eg marine dredging operations and some breakwater
and quay works).
Indirect and Induced Employment During Construction

Indirect employment includes those employees of companies that are
providing goods and services for the Project, and their suppliers or sub-
contractors. As described in Chapter 5, the industrial, manufacturing, service
and business sector in Ghana is severely limited, with most large construction
contracts being filled by foreign companies. This will likely be the case on this
Project due to the technical nature of the requirements. Induced employment
refers to the jobs created through spending in the local economy by direct and
indirect employees on the Project.
Indirect employment through the construction supply chain will be extremely

limited in the broader Project area due to the virtually non-existent industrial
and services sector in the area, and small-scale and informal nature of the
businesses in the area. Induced employment is also expected to be limited in
the broader Project area due to the limited availability of goods and services.
In the Ellembelle District, indirect employment is also expected to be limited,
but induced employment may be slightly higher due to the greater level of
established markets and businesses. In Ghana as a whole, supply chain
employment will also be limited, while induced employment will be slightly
higher.
Direct Employment During Operation

Operation of the Project will start in around 2014 and approximately 1500
people will be employed fulltime at the port (including approximately 330
people on port operations and the remainder from tenant staff requirements).
For specific oil-rig maintenance jobs a specialised crew will be contracted
numbering about 500-600 people. The skills breakdown for jobs on port
operations (excluding tenant employment) is estimated to be 33 percent
unskilled; 55 percent semi-skilled; 10 percent skilled and 2 percent
supervisory. It is anticipated that Ghanaians will fill between 80-90 percent of
these positions with an intention of increasing this figure over time.
Indirect and Induced Employment During Operation

The indirect and induced employment created during operation is expected to
be higher than during construction for a number of reasons:
Operation of the port will begin in 2014. This gives businesses in Ghana
and the Project area some time to develop to meet the Project
requirements; and
It is likely that the population and associated economy in the Project area
will have grown over the construction period, with increased provision of
goods and services to meet the growing demand. This will allow for
increased spending on goods and services, and associated increased
employment.

6-116
Figure 6.39 Impact Diagram – Employment Creation
Impact Assessment
Construction
The impacts of this employment will be felt at a local, regional and national
level. It is more likely that employment in skilled and semi-skilled positions
will benefit those at a national or regional level, while non-skilled positions
will benefit those at a local project level and more broadly. The construction
employment will be a short term benefit, as it will last for 18-24 months. The
creation of employment will be direct and indirect and of medium positive
magnitude.
However, due to the short construction timescale, as well as the limited

education and applicable skills of the local population, the likelihood that
local residents will be able to adapt to take up the employment opportunities
provided is low, especially for more skilled positions This is more likely to
occur in terms of indirect and induced employment rather than direct
employment during construction.
The impact during construction is considered to be of moderate positive

significance, particularly given the low baseline of employment in the area.
Operation
Operational employment will be a positive impact in the local project area,
also felt at a more regional and national level. The impact will be for the long-
term/ permanent duration, as it will last for the life of the Project (50 years and
beyond). The creation of employment is a direct, indirect and induced
positive impact of medium magnitude.
The likelihood that the local population will be able to adapt to take up the
employment opportunities provided is relatively high due to the longer
timescale than construction and the presence of the other ongoing
developments in the country. This is therefore rated as medium-high positive
ability to adapt.
The impact during operation is considered to be of moderate-major positive

significance.
Mitigation

6-117
In order to optimise Project benefits, the following are potential mitigation
measures:
Recruitment
During construction, the requirement for maximising local employment
where possible should be written into the contractors’ contracts and made
binding.
Over the life of the Project, a recruitment principle of hiring first from the
directly affected area and neighbouring communities, then Ghana, should
be applied, against clear criteria. This should be required from
prospective tenants and included into the port rules. Hiring guidelines
should be developed that prioritise people resident in the Project area,
within the principles of non-discrimination, equal opportunity and fair
treatment.
The Project should support the undertaking of a skills audit of the Study
Area towns and neighbouring communities (particularly Jomoro) and
details should be kept on register for use by the Project and its contractors
and tenants.
A register of casual employees from the Project area should be kept and
referred to when casual labour is required to ensure transparency and
fairness.
Employment opportunities and associated skills requirements should be

well advertised locally and a recruitment centre should be easily accessible
to the local population. Current discussions suggest a recruitment agency
established by traditional leaders in the community. If this is supported by
the Project then measures should be put in place to ensure fair and
transparent recruitment processes, as dissatisfaction from within
communities will impact on the Project.
Advertising of job opportunities should be done in a timely manner to

allow potential recruits to receive the necessary training.
Training priorities should be identified early and pre-employment training

should begin as soon as possible.
There should be no requirement for applicants to make payments when

applying for, or securing, employment on the Project. If payment to a
recruitment agency is necessary the employer and not employee must
cover this and it should be done in a transparent manner.
Skills Development and Training:

Training priorities should be identified as early as possible.
Appropriate local candidates identified during construction could be

trained and employed during operations.

6-118
Training plans should be developed according to each permanent
employee’ work agreement and relevant to their job description.
A certificate of employment should be offered to each employee at the

conclusion of successful employment on the Project; and
In order to implement this strategy the Project should develop relationships

with vocational/ training institutions to develop courses and training
programmes that exactly meet the Project requirements.
Alternative Livelihoods Development

Over the life of the Project, the Project should encourage and support
investment in alternative livelihoods development such that the local area is
not overly reliant to any significant degree on the Project for employment and
economic opportunities.
These optimisation and mitigation measures should be implemented through

a human resources development strategy. These will ensure that the Project
complies with the national laws of Ghana, including those applying to trade
unions and employers organisations. The implementation of an effective and
sustainable livelihood replacement and enhancement process will also fulfil
the requirements of the IFC and the AfDB.
Residual Impact
The implementation of these optimisation strategies will marginally change
the impact rating significance for construction from moderate to moderate-
major positive. The main reason the impact will not be more positive is that
there is limited time available for the local community and economy to adapt
to the change and therefore take advantage of the available opportunities. This
will not change to major positive due to the limited ability to adapt over a
relatively short period of time.
The proposed strategies would increase the significance of the impact during
operation from moderate - major positive to major positive due to some
availability of time during the construction period and more significantly over
the early years of operations for local people to experience the recruitment
process, develop the required skills and training, and for the Project and its
contractors to conduct pre-employment training.
Table 6.39 Impact Summary: Employment Creation

Employment creation MODERATE POSITIVE MODERATE - MAJOR
(construction) POSITIVE
Employment creation MODERATE - MAJOR MAJOR POSITIVE (with pre-

(operation) POSITIVE employment training)

6-119
Impact on Prices and Exacerbation of Economic Vulnerability
Impact Description
Economic vulnerability occurs where the receptors’ existing status hinders
them from accessing the economic opportunities that will become available.
This includes a number of groups (eg women, female-headed households, the
elderly, youth, illiterate, non-skilled adults, and the poor). An increase in
prices as a result of an increased demand for the available goods and services
can exacerbate economic vulnerability as it may decrease affordability and
access to basic goods and services.
The project is likely to result in price inflation in the local area in the short
term, due to increased demand for goods and services by the workers and
their families (with limited supply) and their higher spending power due to
relatively good salaries. This may negatively affect people in terms of
affordability in the Study Area, where economic vulnerability is already
prevalent (refer to the Chapter 5 for a detailed discussion of this vulnerability
in the project area). It is thus likely to result in a higher cost of living for the
Project labour force and may put vulnerable groups at risk. It will also impact
on the cost of accommodation and leave people vulnerable to homelessness or
create the drive for informal settlement (see Section 6.7.5).
Construction Phase
The risk of price inflation in the Study Area and surrounding communities is
highest during construction, as this will occur over a relatively short term,
with limited time for developing and providing the goods and services that
the additional population will require.
Operational Phase
In the longer term, inflation associated with the Project and its workforce is
likely to be curtailed due to improved infrastructure, economic development
and market growth in the area, with associated competition and an improved
business environment.
Figure 6.40 Impact Diagram – Impact on Prices and Exacerbation of Economic

Vulnerability

6-120
Impact Assessment
The impact on prices will take place at the local level as an indirect and
induced negative consequence of the Project. The duration of this impact will
be short-medium term until the market has had time to adjust to the changed
economic environment and is of medium magnitude.
People’s ability to adapt (ie sensitivity) during the construction phase will be
high negative as vulnerable groups will struggle with decreased affordability
and the extremely limited ability to tap into the economic opportunities that
the Project will offer.
The overall impact of exacerbated prices for goods and services is therefore
considered to be of major negative significance during construction.
During operation, the impact remains at a local scale with an induced and
indirect negative impact of medium-term duration. However, this will give
rise to a positive impact over the longer term due to competition and an
improved business environment. The positive impact will therefore be
medium term to long term. The magnitude is considered to be medium.
The economically vulnerable in the Study Area, particularly in Asemdasuazo,

will have a medium negative ability to adapt. Others who are in a position to
exploit the opportunities available (eg through retailing and business
opportunities) will have a more positive ability to adapt to, and take
advantage of, the increased prices. However, the limited business sector and
its constraints will make it difficult for businesses to optimise the
opportunities made available, thus the ability to adapt to the impacts will be
low positive.
The impact is assessed to be of moderate negative significance for vulnerable

groups in the Study Area and of moderate positive significance for those able
to seize the opportunities.
Mitigation
Inflation at a local level is difficult to forecast or mitigate, except through
compensation in the form of wage increases, and investment in economic
development and infrastructure and services. Other measures may include
supporting relevant district departments to monitor the prices for critical
goods purchased by the most vulnerable sections of the community and seek
to collaborate with local government and others to find ways of decreasing
impacts.
In establishing alternative livelihoods through the LRP the Project should

ensure that new livelihood activities are robust and sustainable. Where
possible such activities should be established with potential spinoff
opportunities for other local residents in mind (eg the establishment of a
micro-enterprise around fish ponds could create other small-scale economic
activities transporting fish to consumers).

6-121
Assistance could be provided to vulnerable groups by:
Focussing social investment and some local economic development

activities on the vulnerable and developing ways to support existing
organisations to empower those vulnerable groups in the Study Area (eg
skills transfer around project planning; mentoring; support for existing
rural enterprise initiatives).
Ensuring ongoing dialogue with representatives of vulnerable groups and

identifying opportunities over the life of the Project that could reduce
vulnerability.
Residual Impacts
The implementation of the management and mitigation measures will
decrease the vulnerability of those particularly susceptible to price changes
and the rapid economic development in the area. Thus it will change the
significance of this impact from major negative during construction, to
moderate negative post mitigation.
During operation, the impact will change from a moderate negative to minor
negative following implementation of the measures. The minor positive
impact associated with longer term decrease in prices will likely remain the
same.
Table 6.40 Impact Summary: Impact on Prices and Exacerbation of Economic

Vulnerability

Construction MAJOR NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE
Operation MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE

(vulnerable groups)
MODERATE POSITIVE MODERATE POSITIVE

(those able to access (those able to access
opportunities) opportunities)
Changes to Livelihood Strategies
Impact Description
The combination of direct Project activities that result in a loss of land and
access to marine/ freshwater resources and the indirect but substantial
changes in the physical and social environment surrounding the Study Area
will require that many people change their existing livelihood strategies. This
has both positive and negative implications, with those most at risk being
already vulnerable groups least able to realign their livelihood strategies to a
changed environment.

6-122
Residents of the Study Area engage in a range of livelihood strategies as
discussed in Section 6.7.2 and Section 6.7.3 and including subsistence farming;
agro-processing; small-scale livestock farming; marine and freshwater fishing
and fishmongering (albeit that marine fisheries have reportedly been
declining over the past number of years);; and small-scale supplementary
business activities; civil service; obtaining income from family remittances and
a number of other informal income generating activities. Local residents are
also closely linked to one another through family relationships and trade with
ongoing formal and informal support structures and livelihood strategies
between communities. These trading relationships are presented in Figure
6.41.
Construction phase activities will include the restriction of access to land and
marine resources within the Project footprint as well as existing footpaths
between communities and along the beach. Existing access routes between
communities will be impacted and a re-routed road will link Atuabo with
Asemdasuazo and on to Anokyi. This route is longer than the current beach
road and will make travelling between areas, for trade and social interaction
more difficult. The footpaths between Asemdasuazo and Anokyi will be
disrupted by fenced sections of the Project footprint. This disruption to trade
and transport will increase travel distances between all communities to
varying degrees thereby increasing pressure on current livelihood activities.
As the Project moves into operations, the land take area will remain the same
and some of the contractors will slowly leave the area. A number of
permanent employees (up to 1500) will then take up positions, on their own or
with family members. Many will try to settle in the Study Area communities
adjacent to the Project, and others will find accommodation in the larger
towns as a result of local shortages of accommodation. Furthermore, during
both construction and operations, the anticipated influx of large numbers of
people (as highlighted in several of the impacts above) will swell the
population size.

6-123
Figure 6.41 Inter-community Relationships
In general, what has been a predominantly quiet and visually serene
environment, where livelihood strategies have been appropriate to and
dependent upon the nature of the area will now be significantly altered (see
impacts identified above). These changes will limit/curtail a number of
existing livelihood alternatives as land and natural resources come under
increasing pressure (with no alternative land yet identified) and beach access
is permanently altered. However, these changes will also create a wide range
of new livelihood options for people able to harness the associated
opportunities.
The loss of access to agricultural and agro-processing land is expected to have

the most significant effect on households in the Atuabo and Anokyi
communities. The households within these two communities will experience
the greatest loss of land and access to marine resources through reduced beach
access to current fishing areas and limited alternative sites. The influx of
newcomers who are most likely to settle as close to the Project as possible (in
the Study Area communities) will add further pressure on these livelihood
activities and resources (Section 6.7.3).
The presence of the Project will create enormous expectations of jobs and
related opportunities. However, the level of skills required will limit the
accessibility of these opportunities to local residents, particularly during the
early stages when high levels of skills will be required. Within this context,
there is a high risk of local residents abandoning their livelihood activities
based on the hope of accessing Project-related work and then finding
themselves jobless and without income. There will also be vastly increased
competition for job opportunities from the increased population, where many
newcomers will bring skills not available in the local communities.
There are other aspects, which may have negative consequences on

livelihoods and increase people’s vulnerability. As mentioned in Section 6.7.4,
there is the potential for income generation by renting out accommodation to
newcomers. Demand for residential space will put the costs at a premium.
However, the risk will be realised if people rent out their own homes only to
find themselves homeless in an environment where land availability is so
limited. Female-headed households seem most vulnerable to this risk as
security of access to the cash income may be an irresistible driver. The
incentive for women to get involved in sex work as an alternative livelihood
option for a quick and secure source of income is strong. The risks both to the
individual sex worker and to her broader family’s long-term survival must be
considered.
While changes in livelihood strategies and income generating activities may

be stressful, it is anticipated that many of the affected population and other
local inhabitants will be in a position to improve their living conditions by
tapping into the indirect economic opportunities to supply goods and services
to the Project and to the increased population in the area. For those able to
take advantage of these livelihood opportunities, the construction and

6-125
operations phase will provide increasing economic security. It is likely that
the entrepreneurial opportunities for new livelihoods will stretch beyond the
Study Area into the broader region.
Impact Assessment
The scale of this impact on livelihood strategies when confined to the
communities within the Study Area is local in scale and for entrepreneurs able
to take advantage of the opportunities the impacts will be regional and
national. The impact will occur during construction and through operations
and is of long term to permanent duration. The magnitude is considered to be
large.
The impact is a direct and indirect consequence of the Project and the ability of
affected residents to adapt to this loss of livelihood strategies will vary from
person to person, and household to household. Adaptability will therefore
range from high negative (eg for households that are heavily reliant on
subsistence agriculture and do not have skills sets required in more urban
areas) to high positive (eg among those that are entrepreneurial or who have
the right skills to secure work at the Project and/or other businesses).
The overall impact is therefore considered to be of major negative significance

for affected households and of moderate positive significance for successful
entrepreneurs.

6-126
Figure 6.42 Impact Diagram - Change in Livelihoods
Mitigation
The Project is working to IFC Performance Standards, which would require
appropriate livelihood restoration programmes to be implemented where
these have been negatively disrupted. This will be covered in detail by the
LRP process.
Following is potential mitigation measures to manage the impacts associated

with changes to livelihood strategies:
Commit to the principles of sound corporate governance, responsible

corporate citizenship, and transparent business interactions with affected
communities.
Ensure that those whose livelihoods are directly affected by the Project are
appropriately and responsibly compensated so that their livelihood
security is not diminished. This will be done through a consultative LRP
process.
Implement skills development and training programmes for those able to

be employed by the Project.
Support the undertaking of a skills survey and develop a localisation plan

for succession employment during construction and more specifically
during operations. This will increase the number of residents benefiting
from direct employment during operations.
Partner with government and relevant NGO programmes to support

sustainable livelihood practices.
Support and/or develop information and awareness programmes related

to economic entrepreneurialism and small business development. Work in
partnership with existing government and related organisations to
address these issues.
Support social welfare programmes and special projects that focus on

vulnerable groups to ensure they are not overlooked during Project
implementation and left worse off, particularly those who depend on
inter-community relationships that will be disrupted by Project
infrastructure and activities.
In partnership with relevant authorities and organisations, implement an

HIV/AIDS programme addressing factual health issues as well as
behaviour change issues around the transmission and infection of
HIV/AIDS as well as other communicable diseases. This programme
should be implemented amongst contractors, employees and, in
partnership with district structures and locally operating organisations, in
local villagers. In this way the most vulnerable local women engaging in

6-128
alternate livelihood strategies as sex workers (formal or informal) may be
additionally protected.
Make condoms easily available to all contractors and employees and work
with local health services to ensure condoms are accessible in the
communities.
Implement a grievance procedure that is easily accessible to local

communities, through which complaints related to loss of livelihood and
increased vulnerability can be lodged and responded to.
Residual Impact
With the implementation of the above measures, impacts on livelihood
strategies can be reduced to minor negative significance for all phases of the
Project. This is however dependent on the active involvement of government,
relevant NGOs and local residents in the design and implementation of many
of the above measures. For those able to take advantage of the changed
livelihoods the residual impact will remain unchanged as moderate positive.
Table 6.41 Impact Summary: Changes to Livelihood Strategies

Construction MAJOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE

(successful entrepreneurs) (successful entrepreneurs)
Operation MAJOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE

(successful entrepreneurs) (successful entrepreneurs)
Increased Potential for Income Stability
Impact Description
Employment at the Project will result in a more steady flow of income to those
employed, in the form of weekly and monthly wages or salaries. Contractual
employment may improve on this number. This impact will also be felt to a
certain extent by those employed indirectly in the Project’s supply chain.
A significant portion of the Study Area population are at risk of living in

poverty with income varying depending on seasonal agriculture and fishing
activities (see Chapter 5). Direct and indirect employment will result in the
enhancement and upgrade of skills and experience. This will mean greater
opportunities for employment beyond the Project creating some potential for
an increase in income stability on a more sustainable basis.
Construction Phase

6-129
As discussed, local employment opportunities will be limited, however, they
will still provide the opportunity for those employed to have a stable income
for the duration of their contract. Due to the limited business sector in the
country and in the Study Area in particular, particularly related to marine
construction, income stability provided by indirect employment, will be
extremely limited during construction.
Operational Phase
Approximately 1500 jobs in total (Project and tenant opportunities) will be
created during operations, with between 60 percent and 90 percent of
employees being Ghanaian over the life of the Project. This translates into
approximately 900 – 1350 permanent jobs. An additional 600 highly skilled
workers will be employed for specific rig repair activities on an ad hoc basis.
However, it is unlikely that many of these jobs would initially be available to
local job-seekers.
Furthermore, with the increasing capacity of local residents to gain experience

and thus access to job opportunities over time, direct employment figures
should increase and with them, the stability of income in the area. There will
also be indirect business and job opportunities in servicing the Project’s
tenants.
The direct, indirect and induced employment created during operations will
result in increased income stability for those employed, enhanced by the
experience and training received during employment.
Figure 6.43 Impact Diagram – Increased Potential for Income Stability
Impact Assessment
The direct and indirect nature of the impact will be positive on the local to
national scale over the short-term of construction activities. The magnitude is
considered medium based on the limited employment numbers but also on the
significance for those employed.
The low levels of relevant skills across the country make people’s adaptability
to available opportunities low positive.
The overall impact on income stability during construction is therefore

considered as minor positive significance during construction.

6-130
This positive impact of direct, indirect and induced nature will be experienced
from a local to national scale. The impact would be felt over the long-term and
potentially permanently with a large magnitude.
The construction period, as well as early operations, will play a role in

preparing people to take on the opportunities emerging from the Project and
adaptability is likely to improve as people become trained and skilled towards
Project requirements. Thus the operational phase is likely to show a medium
adaptability.
The overall impact of operations on income stability is considered to be of

moderate-major positive significance.
Mitigation
The maximising local employment will increase the significance of this benefit
over the life of the Project. Thus, the same mitigation measures identified in
Impact to Livelihood Strategies be put in place. These include maximising local
recruitment and training.
In addition, the approach and ethos of the Project in relation to local

employment and capacity building will hopefully influence the approach of
the Project’s tenants thereby maximising localisation wherever possible.
Residual Impacts
The implementation of the above management and optimisation measures
means that the potential for increased income stability as a result of the Project
will increase further. As with the employment impacts, the rating during
construction will change from minor positive to moderate positive due to the
increased local employment created as a result of intervention as proposed
above.
During operations, this will change from moderate - major positive to a major
positive impact over time (construction experience and early years of
operations) to develop the skills required through on-the-job training and a
commitment to localisation.
Table 6.42 Impact Summary: Increased Potential for Income Stability
Phase Significance (Pre-mitigation) Residual Impact Significance

Construction MINOR POSITIVE MODERATE POSITIVE
Operation MODERATE - MAJOR MAJOR POSITIVE (with on-

POSITIVE the-job training and
commitment to localisation)

6-131
6.7.5 Impact on Social Infrastructure, Governance and Service Delivery
The District Assembly in overseeing its established planning and coordinating

structures, is the highest political authority and is vested with powers to
deliberate, legislate, plan and develop the whole District through the
preparation and effective implementation of development plans and budgets.
The district planning co-ordinating units and various decentralized

departments (eg Ghana Education Services, Community Development and
Health) together with Area Councils are responsible for the delivery of basic
municipal services and facilities. The institutional capacity of traditional
authorities should also be recognised in its development and administrative
roles.
The Project is likely to result in the following impacts on social infrastructure,

governance and service delivery:
transfer of skilled and semi-skilled personnel from the public sector

entities to the Project;
increased pressure on basic infrastructure, services and local government

capacity; and
growth of informal settlements.
Transfer of Skilled and Semi-Skilled Personnel from Public Sector Institutions to the
Project
Impact Description
The private sector in Ghana is small. The majority of employment is created
within the Government sector, including employment within organisations for
the provision of services to the people of Ghana (eg schools, hospitals,
utilities). The Project will provide an opportunity for people to gain
employment and experience in a foreign-owned company, with international
level health and safety standards, protocols, and also paying market related
wages and salaries. As a consequence, people may leave their current jobs in
the Government or quasi-Government sector in favour of employment
opportunities on the Project.
The District Assembly has already recognised high vacancy of posts due to
limited skills availability, low remuneration, poor living conditions and low
morale. Local teachers in the Study Area have also expressed the possibility of
looking to the Project for employment opportunities as they struggle to secure
their own livelihoods and futures. The local health structures could
experience similar outflow of trained employees and volunteers. While this is
a natural consequence of economic development and relates to people’s
freedom of movement, it may have consequences for existing institutions in
Ghana. This is particularly where there are overlaps with the Project’s areas of

6-132
focus, which could lose a substantial proportion of their skilled or semi-skilled
workforce to the Project.
Construction Phase
The construction of the Project will create employment as described in Section
6.7.4. The majority of these contracts will be short term, from a few months to
a year and the anticipated division of opportunities related to skills levels is 30
percent unskilled; 55 percent semi-skilled; 10 percent skilled and 2 percent
supervisory. Of these positions 60-70 percent of jobs are anticipated to go to
Ghanaians. The limited number of skilled and semi-skilled Ghanaians may
create pressure on other existing and planned government development plans
and projects in the region, district and nationally.
Operational Phase
During operations the permanent workforce is estimated to be 1500 across the
Project and its tenants.
The Project will employ local people to the extent possible, depending on
relevant education levels, training and skills availability, which are limited in
Ghana. Thus it is anticipated that those local people who are employed at the
Project will have moved from existing organisations or institutions. The
security of these new positions together with private sector salary packages
are likely to attract semi-skilled and skilled personnel, including from existing
organisations, local government departments and institutions, to the Project.
There is also a risk of local teachers with their relatively high levels of skill
moving out of education and sourcing jobs on the Project. Initially the
movement of people out of their existing positions could be quite strongly felt
by government and private employers and would result in skills shortages
and the need to re-employ and/or retrain employees. However, over time
these gaps will be filled with new employees who will then have the
opportunity to gain access into the job market and the shift towards the
Project should become less debilitating, particularly for government
departments and institutions.
Figure 6.44 Impact Diagram – Transfer of Skilled and Semi-skilled Personnel from Public
Sector Institutions to the Project
Impact Assessment

6-133
The transfer of people will take place from other organisations, departments
and institutions from the broader Project Area, the district, region and all over
Ghana, depending on the types and levels of skills required and available.
The impact will therefore be felt on a local, regional and national scale and be
of short-term during construction. The impact will be of medium-term duration
stretching into operation, before new people with new training and skills
begin to fill the gaps. The impact is an indirect negative consequence of the
Project and is considered to be of medium magnitude.
The high demand for job opportunities in Ghana, together with the identified
capacity shortages in several government institutions and departments,
particularly at the Regional and District levels, will mean that the affected
groups would struggle to adapt. Their ability to adapt is therefore considered
as high negative initially and reducing over time to medium.
The overall impact is therefore considered to be of moderate negative

significance during construction and minor-moderate significance over the
course of operations.
Mitigation
Direct mitigation measures for this impact are difficult to establish, as people’s
freedom to take up economic opportunities should also not be compromised.
The areas of greatest risk around the Project would be the outflow of teachers
from local schools. The developer should therefore explore avenues to create
incentives to keep good local teachers in their positions. This should be
considered prior to construction so that measures would be in place for the
construction phase.
Residual Impacts
The mitigation measures regarding teachers would be put into effect during
construction, therefore the residual impact would reduce to minor negative in
the local schools but remain as moderate negative more broadly where
mitigation opportunities for the Project are limited. Given the limited ability
of the Project to mitigate the operational phase impact its significance would
remain unchanged at a minor-moderate negative rating.
Table 6.43 Impact Summary: Transfer of Skilled and Semi-Skilled Personnel from Public
Sector Institutions to the Project

Construction MODERATE NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE
MINOR NEGATIVE for local

education
Operation MINOR-MODERATE MINOR-MODERATE

NEGATIVE NEGATIVE

6-134
Pressure on Basic Infrastructure, Services and Local Government Capacity
Impact Description
The baseline study describes a project area within a rural setting with
relatively small communities. Provision of services and related infrastructure
in the area is limited. The development of the Project will prompt an increase
in pressure on these already limited resources through both direct Project
activities and due to extensive in-migration to the area.
In Ghana settlements are described according to their population size and

they are then graded by the services available in the settlement. By virtue of
their population numbers, all three Study Area communities would be
officially defined as villages (populations under 5000). In fact a population
size needs to be over 2000 people in order to be defined as sub-urban. None of
the Study Area settlements are that large. It is generally acknowledged (1)( ) hat
higher order services are often associated with settlements with larger
populations and lower order with smaller settlements. The Ellembelle
scalogram, which uses service provision to classify settlements, defines
Atuabo as a category 4 settlement (with an Area Council and a market) and
Anokyi and Asemdasuazo would be category 5 as they have fewer services
than Atuabo.
Service provision in the Study Area settlements is low (see Chapter 5) based
upon their hierarchy of settlements. None has a health clinic or Senior High
School. None has a public water closet or refuse bays/skip containers or
agricultural extension programmes or a police station. None of the affected
communities is served by regular and reliable public transport (including
taxis). Neither do residents have access to modern sport facilities. Some
cultural activities occur (mainly sporting), and some villages have organised
self-help groups for orphans and the destitute.
Direct Impacts
Increased demand for Project-related Infrastructure: In terms of direct
project impacts, the Project will generate increased demand for Project-
related infrastructure and services, all of which will be supplied by the
Project (eg road construction, electricity and water supply within the
project area required for construction and operating activities and
associated infrastructure).
Pressure on Housing Provision: However, permanent housing for most

Project employees is not planned as part of the Project. Rather, it is
anticipated that permanent employees will find accommodation within
the surrounding communities with local government taking responsibility
for management and service delivery. Thus, there will be an increased
pressure on local government to ensure service delivery and maintenance
of infrastructure as well as the supply of housing.
(1) www.ghanadistrict.com/districts/?r=3&_57&sa=2764

6-135
Indirect Impacts
In terms of indirect impacts, there will be other aspects of service delivery for
which Government will be directly responsible. All three settlements are
likely to be significantly impacted by the influx of people during construction
and early operations and this will put strain on the limited facilities and
services currently available to residents. The new population will
substantially increase the demands on water, sewerage and waste facilities,
health and education facilities, and telecommunications. These are described
below:
Need to Transport Infrastructure: People will need accessible transport on

upgraded roads, convenient access to food stuffs, convenient banking
facilities amongst a host of other requirements.
Demand for Services and Banking Facilities: Some of these needs will be
immediate (like health and education), while others (like banking) will
emerge more gradually as people engage with the cash economy at a
greater level than at present.
Pressure on Health Services: To date, the communities seem to have been

sheltered from high levels of migrant labour, trucks passing by or
stopping in the towns. The abuse of alcohol and drugs seems limited, as is
domestic violence. However the high rate of teenage pregnancies (with
the exception of Asemdasuazo) suggests an already sexually active young
population. The establishment of a port (albeit a managed Free Zone with
international security standards) is likely to increase the movement of
people, illicit substances and the potential for human trafficking. In
addition, road traffic and other Project-related activity is likely to result in
an increased incidence of alcohol and drug abuse as well a sex work,
which will have spin-off implications for people’s health with a direct
impact on the delivery of health services locally and further away (eg
Eikwe Hospital, 7 km away and Aiyinase Hospital).
Monitoring of Illegal Activities:

As more cash and material wealth emerges in the area the likelihood
for increased criminal activity will also increase and this will require
more substantial policing and judicial infrastructure.
There are a number of children involved in fishing in the Study Area
and teachers reported peak fishing season as a time where many boys
are absent from schools. Child labour (often in the form of slavery) in
the fishing industry is common in the Volta Lake region and this
form of abuse needs to be monitored in the Study Area, particularly if
men start moving into other income generating activities related to
the Project and other developments, and younger boys become
increasingly drawn into the fisheries to fill that gap. Government
agencies involved in this issue will be stretched to monitor and act on
illegal child labour in the area.

6-136
Figure 6.45 Impact Diagram – Pressure on Basic Infrastructure, Services and Local
Government Capacity
Impact Assessment
The increase in population in the Study Area and perhaps slightly more
broadly, and associated sustained pressure on local infrastructure and
services, will begin with construction but is likely to be long-term and negative
on a local scale. Influx of people to the area is likely to begin as soon as the
information of an approval is made public. Therefore the pressure on
services, infrastructure and local government capacity will also commence.
The initial shock of the increased demand on local government capacity and
infrastructure and services will be felt with increasing severity as the influx
reaches a peak, probably during early operations, and will then level out,
maintaining a fairly constant pressure if the population size stabilises. The
impact will occur as a direct and indirect consequence of Project employment
and an influx of newcomers seeking Project-related opportunities. The impact
is considered to have a large magnitude.
District authorities’ ability to adapt to this increased pressure during

construction and early operations will be a high negative based on limited
resources and personnel. For local residents, in the absence of improved
infrastructure and services, people’s ability to adapt to over-stretched
infrastructure and services is likely to be high negative, given the existing
inadequacies in the Project area.
The significance of increased pressure on already limited infrastructure and

services in the Study Area and slightly beyond, as caused by in-migration, is
considered to be major negative.
Mitigation
The following potential mitigation measures have been identified for the
Project to address the impacts on infrastructure and Government capacity:
Meet all practical needs of employees within the Project footprint for
access to services and infrastructure (such as health facilities, piped water)
so that no additional pressure is placed on existing capacity.

6-137
Initiate discussions with the Ministry of Health in order to plan for
anticipated increased demands on local health facilities from the Project as
well as newcomers to the area. The presence of acceptable health facilities
in the vicinity of the Project is in the interest of the Project and its
employees. Therefore consideration should be given to supporting
government efforts to upgrade the local Ekabaku Health Centre into an
appropriately scaled facility that could service the Project’s more specific
health needs (ie those beyond the scope of the on-site private medical
services).
Develop a Community Health, Safety and Security Management Plan (as

per IFC requirements) that should place emphasis on establishing
partnerships between the Project, government and relevant local and
national organisations to address the increased pressure on health
infrastructure and the requirements for proactive community health
programmes, particularly focusing on HIV/AIDS and drug and alcohol-
related issues.
Support government initiatives that ensure local education’s capacity to

meet increased pressure on schools in the area. An adequately educated
population is of interest to the Project as it will facilitate local employment
in the longer-term and foster a healthy social and economic environment
in which the Project will operate.
Although road maintenance is the responsibility of the Department of

Transport, ensure that contractors maintain transport routes in the area
that are directly impacted by Project vehicles. Project vehicles should be
forced to use specified routes only so as to limit impacts to local roads,
particularly by large vehicles.
Explore partnering with government in providing higher quality drinking

water to communities most affected by the increased demands on water
from an influx of newcomers. Many residents have already highlighted
poor water quality in communities.
Implement the International Ship and Port Facility security code and
system to reduce opportunities for trafficking in people and illicit
substances.
Explore ways in which to support local policing if there is increased

pressure on the limited resources as a result of the Project.
Place emphasis on sustainability in any social development activities and

through selected Corporate Social Responsibility projects to boost
potential for the area to develop and thrive.
Promote the implementation of joint planning approaches with

government and other key stakeholders for strategically important

6-138
housing projects that will facilitate the influx of Project employees and
their families as well as other newcomers.
Promote the faster transfer of revenues generated from the stool land
revenues to allow the District Assembly to deliver on infrastructure plans
efficiently.
Consider forming partnerships with government and organised business

to address the provision of bulk services and infrastructure, transportation
services, sites for informal trading and related community services. Such
partnerships should also include the establishment of a capacity building
and institutional strengthening programme for local/district government.
This would appropriately fall within a CSR ambit.
It is impossible for existing infrastructure and services to cater for the

increased demands. However, the social, environmental and health risks that
would arise from a failure to adequately provide for most of these needs could
have serious consequences for the Project, local host communities, the
newcomers and for government.
It is important to emphasise that the Project, while meeting its own

infrastructure and service requirements, should not take on the government’s
responsibility as service provider to communities. However, an approach to
partnering departments and institutions on appropriate projects will
contribute to the Project’s “social licence to operate”.
Infrastructure and service delivery should be efficiently provided and

government capacity comfortably meeting local demand by mid-way into the
operations (based on a Project life of at least 50 years). This will be of
significant value to the lives of local residents.
Residual Impact
In terms of the Project’s direct impact on local services and infrastructure, the
implementation of the above mitigation measures should reduce any direct
impact on these resources to negligible. However, in terms of in-migration (as
brought about indirectly by the Project) and the difficulties inherent in
managing this occurrence, the impact on local services and infrastructure may
remain one of major negative significance for the duration of the Project,
particularly if government is unable to partner effectively with the Project in
fulfilling the above management measures.
Table 6.44 Impact Summary: Pressure on Basic Infrastructure, Services and Local
Government Capacity

Pressure on Basic MAJOR NEGATIVE NEGLIGIBLE NEGATIVE (for
Infrastructure, direct impacts)
Services and Local
Government MAJOR NEGATIVE (for indirect

6-139
Capacity impacts associated with in-
migration)
Growth of Informal Settlements
Impact Description
A growing population, land use densification and limited land availability
will probably result in informal and unplanned settlements, increasing the
strain on existing physical, social and human resources as well as governance
systems.
The impacts during construction and operation are outlined as follows:
As emphasised throughout this assessment, there will be a significant

influx of people to the Project area, all of whom will have the intention of
settling near potential work and economic opportunities. Land available
for formal settlement is already limited, while initial exploration for
alternative agricultural land has highlighted the shortage of such areas in
the vicinity of the affected communities.
Planning for the housing of contractors and employees includes provision

of a contractors’ camp (for construction) within the Project boundaries,
but the anticipation that most operations’ employees will either come
from the area or will find accommodation within local communities
brings with it risks of contributing to unplanned settlement, which will
then require traditional and district authority intervention and
management.
Planned settlement brings with it some challenges but creates an

environment where service delivery and required infrastructure can be
supplied and where concomitant benefits for the broader community can
even emerge.
In contrast, unplanned and/or illegal settlements create the potential for a

host of problems (eg health risks associated with poor living conditions,
conflict, homelessness etc) that authorities will need to consider and
manage, and may highlight additional vulnerable groups in need of
government support.
Informal and illegal settlement is likely to result from two main trends.
Firstly, the high demand for accommodation from the influx of people to
the area may entice residents in communities close to the Project
(particularly Atuabo, Anokyi and Asemdasuazo) to rent out their homes
for high returns. While the income generated is a positive opportunity for
some homeowners, the risk is that this may leave many existing residents
homeless and more likely to “squat” on vacant land (or around the beach)
or significantly increase the density of people living in makeshift houses

6-140
in current households. Secondly, where no land is available for formal
settlement and where people are unable to rent accommodation the risk of
illegal settlement is high.
It is single, female-headed households and other families vulnerable to

poverty that would be most at risk from such actions, and becoming
homeless would significantly exacerbate vulnerability.
Whatever the cause, illegal and unplanned settlement increases a number

of governance challenges ranging from proactively planning service
delivery and infrastructure to reactively managing impacts of unsanitary
conditions from poor waste disposal to groundwater pollution and
resultant diminished levels of health. Illegal settlement encroaching on
host communities’ agricultural land also increases the likelihood of
conflict between residents and newcomers, again placing pressure on local
authorities responsible for providing safety and security as well as social
welfare.
Failure by government and traditional authorities to control illegal

settlement and its consequences may have the additional effect of
undermining the authority of local government traditional leadership to
govern and thereby undermine the rule of law. This is of particular
concern in an area that will already be undergoing rapid social and
economic transformation, where maintenance of stability for local
residents would be important to buffer the impacts of this change.
Figure 6.46 Impact Diagram – Growth in Informal Settlements
Impact Assessment
The development of informal settlements, with their associated challenges and
problems, will occur on a local scale, predominantly within the vicinity of
Atuabo, Anokyi an Asemdasuazo. The negative impact is likely to be long-
term to permanent, and of large magnitude.
The ability of local government to adapt to the challenges raised by the

development of informal settlements is likely to be high negative and for
existing local residents, their ability to adapt is likely to be low negative based
on already poor service infrastructure. Traditional authorities have structures

6-141
in place to deal with settlement issues however the likely scale of the demand
would be larger than anything previously experienced and their adaptability
would therefore be considered low negative.
The development of informal settlements within the broad project area is thus
Mitigation
Following is potential mitigation measures to manage the growth of informal
settlements:
Consider implementing planned settlement of construction contractors

and employees within the Project footprint during construction.
Support District Planning Co-ordination Unit, Land Commission and

other relevant district and traditional authorities to prepare a Land Use/
Spatial Development Plan to support a functional district settlement
pattern through the identification of key development nodes and growth
points. Some of this planning is already underway.
Ensure community awareness and safety in terms of Project operational

areas, hazardous areas, and future development areas. This should
prevent inappropriate and unsafe settlement near to Project activities.
Operations should be securely fenced and policed to discourage informal

settlement on its premises.
Prohibit informal recruitment at the Project gate ensuring all applications

go through a formal recruitment agency structure.
Residual Impact
With the implementation of measures relating to formalised housing of Project
employees and contractor workforce within the Project footprint, potential
impacts associated with informal settlement by these personnel will be
negligible during construction and moderate during operations as leaving
operations’ employees to their own devices for housing maintains some risk of
Project-induced informal settlement.
Even with the implementation of the above mitigation measures it is unlikely

that authorities will be able to prevent the development of informal
settlements. The extent to which informal settlements do occur will be highly
dependent on the willingness and capacity of government to address the
broader spatial planning, infrastructure provision and governance issues. The
adaptability or sensitivity is therefore considered to be high negative.
This impact is thus considered to be of moderate-major negative significance

depending on the successful implementation of mitigation measures.

6-142
Table 6.45 Impact Summary: Growth of Informal Settlements

Growth of informal MAJOR NEGATIVE NEGLIGIBLE NEGATIVE (for
settlements direct impacts associated with
(construction) Construction workforce and
contractors)
Moderate - major NEGATIVE (for

indirect impacts associated with in-
migration)
Growth of informal MAJOR NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE (for

settlements (operation) direct impacts associated with
Project workforce)
Moderate - major NEGATIVE (for

indirect impacts associated with in-
migration)
6.7.6 Socio-Cultural Impacts
Social systems and structures that have evolved in the Project area over
generations are not static and have responded dynamically to the changing
social environment. Any development of the scale of the proposed Project
will mean significant social change and the influence of the Project on the
various intra- and inter-settlement social systems and structures is likely to be
experienced in a number of ways, both positive and negative. It is important
for the Project to pay particular attention towards ensuring that where
negative impacts occur, strategies can be developed to ensure that people
(vulnerable groups in particular) are not left worse off as a result.
Changed Sense of Place
Impact Description
Superimposing a project of this type and magnitude onto an environment that
is a currently a combination of rural towns, micro-informal economies and
subsistence agricultural, fisheries and agro-processing will significantly alter
the sense of place of local residents. This will have positive impacts for some;
however, care must be taken to recognise the negative impacts, particularly on
vulnerable groups. All residents welcomed the idea of the Project and its
potential to modernise the area but they also emphasised the peace and
tranquillity of the place as important.
Construction Phase
From the beginning of construction, when large-scale machinery and
hundreds of contractors begin project activities, the nature of the area will be
transformed (see Chapter 3). Most of the contractors from outside the area will
be housed within the fenced Project footprint area but they will obviously
interact with local communities, economically and socially. All three towns
are in very close proximity to the Project and will experience these changes

6-143
and while many residents have expressed optimism about an influx of
outsiders and a broadening of social experiences, many also expressed
concern about increased levels of crime.
Construction activities will increase ambient air, noise and light pollution as
well as traffic along local roads and will impact visually on the nature of the
area. These are assessed within Section 6.5.13, Section 6.5.16 and Section 6.5.17
People’s loss of access to farming, agro-processing and to a small degree,

grazing areas, even when compensated in kind, will result in a significant shift
away from known activities into the unknown and will alter their sense of
identity. This is also applicable to those losing access to fisheries (either to
beach casting and landing sites, or inland freshwater ponds). Furthermore,
the number of people living in the towns around the Project area will
drastically increase in a very short space of time as a result of contract work
and the influx of other newcomers to the area settling predominantly in the
three Study Area towns and possibly in informal settlements.
This changed sense of place has both positive and negative implications for
residents, depending on individual perspectives.
From a positive perspective, the sense of place of the area will be redefined as
a hub of activity and economic opportunity. This may inject a new level of
energy into local communities who may be inspired to find ways to adapt to
and benefit from the host of activities and opportunities, which will be
evident. Already, the baseline study identified the desire amongst many
respondents to move away from current subsistence and rurally defined
lifestyles to more economically engaged and active ones. For these
individuals the change in the sense of place and identity will be welcomed.
In contrast, for the older generation, with a lifetime of rural living, who have
selected to stay in the area partly because of its quiet and natural setting, the
change will be dramatic and potentially difficult to adjust to. For residents
less likely to benefit from the urbanisation of the area (eg the elderly, the sick,
those unable to secure employment etc), this dramatic change in sense of place
could be accompanied by a sense of loss for the “way things were”, with
possible mental health issues arising (eg depression). This could be
heightened by the social pathologies typically associated with rapid
urbanisation.
Operational Phase
Following the initial construction phase changes (over the 18-24 month
period) the pace at which the sense of place will change is likely to be
significantly less dramatic and people will have adapted to some degree to the
new lifestyle of the area. However, this does not imply that the changes will
immediately stop or reverse, but rather that coping mechanisms, amongst the
less vulnerable groups at least, will have been engaged. Over time this change

6-144
will cease to be an impact, as the new sense of place of the area will become
the “norm”.
A new addition to the local environment will be regular aircraft activities

(small aeroplanes and helicopters) taking off and landing inside the Project
footprint. Based on the technical assessment of the noise impact, both Atuabo
and Asemdasuazo will be able to hear this noise intruding into an otherwise
rural audio landscape.
Figure 6.47 Impact Diagram – Change in Sense of Place
Impact Assessment
Construction Phase
During construction, the changed sense of place will be experienced locally,
affecting the Study Area towns and perhaps a few further away, but on the
transport route. The impact will be as an indirect result of the Project and will
occur during construction and will be permanent. For vulnerable groups (eg
the elderly, the sick, those unable to secure unemployment) the change of
sense of place may, in many instances, be anticipated as a negative impact,
although this perception may change once the Project gets underway and the
anticipated negative impacts of a changed sense of place are not realised. For
others, a changed sense of place and the opportunities this brings will be
perceived as a positive impact. The change in sense of place is considered to
be of medium magnitude.
The ability to adapt to this changed sense of place is likely to be high negative
among vulnerable groups and the elderly; low positive among those who
eagerly await the changes of urbanisation (but who may find they lack the
skills and expertise to fully adapt to these changes); and high positive among
those who have the skills and expertise to fully embrace the changed sense of
place brought about by the Project.
Among the elderly and some vulnerable groups, the changed sense of place is
considered to be of major negative significance. Among those eagerly
awaiting the Project, the changed sense of place is considered as moderate
positive significance.

6-145
Operational Phase
During operation, the changed sense of place will be experienced locally,
affecting the Study Area towns. Impacts along the transport route may cease,
as construction activities related to transporting of machinery and resources
will have ended. The impact will be as an indirect result of the Project and
will occur during operations and will be permanent. For vulnerable groups (eg
the elderly, the sick, those unable to secure unemployment) the change of
sense of place may, in many instances, be anticipated as a negative impact but
of medium to low magnitude as the impacts of a changed sense of place are
“normalised”. For others, the opportunities this brings will be perceived as a
positive impact. The introduction of aircraft-related noise will exacerbate the
changed sense of place and based on the assessment of the noise impact as
moderate the magnitude will remain medium to low.
The ability to adapt to this impact is likely to improve as residents become

accustomed to the shift from rural to urban setting and is therefore likely to
shift from a low negative to a low positive.
For those who have the skills and expertise to fully embrace the changed sense
of place brought about by the Project their adaptability become low positive or
possibly even low negative as the urban environment normalises and the
excitement of opportunities, and their limitations, become reality.
Among the elderly and some vulnerable groups, the changed sense of place is
considered to be of moderate negative significance.
Among those eagerly awaiting the Project, the changed sense of place is
considered moderate positive impact.
Mitigation
Following are potential mitigation measures to manage impacts associated
with a changed sense of place:
Manage the location of contractor accommodation to limit the impact of

high numbers of outsiders converging on local towns.
Pursue a proactive Stakeholder Engagement Programme that is built on

openness, mutual trust and inclusiveness in terms of its operational
activities and community-based development initiatives. This
involvement will empower communities to identify and address issues of
concern to them and will facilitate solutions to some of the manageable
changes resulting from the Project.
Through the LRP identify ways in which alternative livelihood

opportunities may feed into existing culture and sense of place (eg
exploring alternative agricultural, agro-processing and fisheries activities
that would see some maintenance of the role of these activities in people’s
lives).

6-146
Where opportunities exist to maximise the benefits of changed sense of
place, consider these as part of a social development plan (to be initiated
and, where possible driven, by interested local residents).
Work closely with local health services in monitoring changes in levels of

community health and wellbeing. Where significant changes to wellbeing
are identified (particularly amongst the most vulnerable groups) explore
partnerships with local health services to attempt to address such changes
(eg consider supporting additional social welfare/social worker positions
in the area to assist people struggling with the transition).
Residual Impact
As already stated, a changed sense of place is an indirect and unavoidable
consequence of the Project. However, with implementation of the above
measures, combined with measures designed for other impacts that are likely
to change the sense of place (eg in-migration, loss of agricultural and agro-
processing livelihoods, changed access to fisheries etc), the impact on sense of
place may be reduced to one of moderate negative significance for vulnerable
groups during construction and operation.
For those experiencing the change as positive mitigation measures will leave
the residual impacts unchanged as moderate positive.
Table 6.46 Impact Summary: Changed Sense of Place

Change in sense of place MAJOR NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE
(especially elderly and
vulnerable)
Change in sense of place MODERATE POSITIVE MODERATE POSITIVE

(those eagerly desiring
change)
Changes to Cultural and Social Norms
Impact Description
Previous experience in large developments worldwide highlights a number of
areas in which cultural and social norms of host communities are affected by
the presence of a project, particularly in instances where there is a large-scale
presence of non-local construction staff, as well as in-migration of job-seekers
to the area. The development of the Project within a predominantly rural and
traditional environment will heighten these influences and is likely to bring
about significant changes to social and cultural norms and people’s sense of
identity.

6-147
The influx of people, combined with the rapid urbanisation of the area, is
likely to bring about cultural changes within the three affected towns. In
particular, the following changes are anticipated during construction:
challenges to cultural and social norms;

challenges to traditional leadership; and
changes to formal and informal support structures.
Construction Phase: Challenges to Cultural and Social Norms

The influx of people to the Project area, each with their associated cultural and
social norms, is likely to have an influence on existing norms and sense of
identity that exist as a result of living in a rural and largely traditional
environment. Although cultural norms and identities are dynamic and are
constantly subject to change depending on the context within which people
find themselves, there is the potential for unease among the host communities
given the extent and pace of these new influences, and their ability or lack
thereof to respond and assimilate these changes. Stakeholders that are likely
to be most vulnerable include the elderly, some traditional leaders, and the
unskilled/unemployed who are not able to link a changed sense of identity (ie
urban versus rural) with real benefits (eg employment).
The cultural and social norms of newcomers to the area may also clash with
those held within the host community, causing possible tension and unease,
particularly among those who perceive their sense of identity and sense of
belonging being under threat by the pace of change in the Project area.
Perhaps the most vulnerable town in relation to these changes is

Asemdasuazo, which has managed to maintain a level of what could be
described as “wholesome” in relation to culture and tradition (eg no one in the
community smokes and there have been no teenage pregnancies).
Urbanisation and related social changes are thus likely to be of greatest shock
to this community.
Construction Phase: Challenges to Traditional Leadership

With the high levels of influx that are expected, the traditional leadership will
also be challenged to redefine and/or assert itself on the population of the
area, many of who will now be outsiders, some neither accustomed to, nor
bound by, allegiance to traditional leadership structures. Other newcomers
will be familiar with traditional leadership structures and roles but may not
feel particular allegiance to leaders in the Study Area (as opposed to leaders
from their hometowns). Such challenges are not uncommon across the
country, or in fact, the continent, as “modernity” takes hold in some of the
most remote areas. Ghana has already seen significant changes to the roles of
traditional leaders and seems to have found ways of making space for both
the “traditional” and the “modern”. Within the three affected towns
traditional leadership has played an important communication and facilitation
role and the Awulae in particular has been a conduit between the Project and
local communities during feasibility activities and ESIA activities. Residents
have expressed dissatisfaction with the perceived favouritism within some

6-148
traditional structures and the desire for more representative structures
through which to engage the Project have been emphasised for the future.
Construction Phase: Challenges to Support Structures

Adapting to the changed sense of place and identity will be particularly
difficult for the more vulnerable groups within villages. Where familiar
formal and informal social welfare structures create stability and security, the
disruption/upheaval is likely to create anxiety and insecurity. This is perhaps
most relevant for groups like the elderly, the ill, and the few orphans
dependent on these social structures and organisations for support and
livelihood security. While these social structures may not change, and may in
fact even be enhanced by developments in the Project area, the possibility of
change and loss will be disturbing to the most vulnerable.
Community meetings in the Project area have suggested openness to some of

the anticipated changes and even an excitement at the opportunity to be
exposed to different people, a broader range of life experiences and a very
different type of economic activity. Of course the reality of this may be very
different to anything that could have been anticipated prior to Project
activities. During these same meetings, older members of the communities
warned of the possible risks of change like a breakdown in the sense of
community cohesion and the undermining of traditional social values and
norms.
For people who are well equipped to maximise the benefits of the Project (eg
through employment), and who see an opportunity to escape their rural
identity and become urbanised, these changes in cultural and social norms are
likely to be embraced as a positive impact.
Operational Phase
Following the initial construction phase changes, the pace at which cultural
and social norms are likely to change should be significantly less dramatic and
people will have adapted to some degree to the new norms and sense of urban
identity of the area. However, this does not imply that the changes will
immediately stop or reverse, but rather that coping mechanisms, amongst the
less vulnerable groups at least, will have been engaged. Over time, this
change will cease to be an impact, as the new social and cultural norms and
sense of identity will become the “norm”.

6-149
Figure 6.48 Impact Diagram – Changes to Social and Cultural Norms
Impact Assessment
Construction Phase
It is anticipated that the changes to social and cultural norms will have
impacts at the local scale, be of a permanent nature, starting at construction
with the initial change from a rural to more urban setting, and continuing into
operations and beyond. Depending on the stakeholders involved, these
changes could have a negative impact as people struggle to assimilate the
rapid pace of change in the area. For others, who are able to embrace this
change and actively seek to escape their rural identity, the impact will be
perceived as positive. The magnitude of the impact is assessed as medium.
The ability of local residents to adapt is likely to vary depending on their

levels of vulnerability - most difficult (high-low negative) for the elderly, some
traditional leaders and the unskilled/ unemployed. Among those eager and
able to embrace this change, their ability to adapt is likely to be low- medium
positive.
The impact is considered to be of major negative significance for most groups

and of minor positive significance for those eager for change.
Operational Phase
The scale of the impact is local, as it will affect the three Study Area towns. It
will take place during operations and is of permanent duration with an
assessed magnitude of low negative. The adaptability of local residents is
likely to vary depending on individuals’ levels of vulnerability –

6-150
predominantly the elderly, some traditional leaders, and the unemployed and
be low negative.
On the one hand, the operation phase may bring about a stabilisation of
cultural and social norms, and with this, an increased ability among local
residents to adapt to these changes – as such, this impact is considered to be of
moderate negative significance.
Mitigation
Following are potential mitigation measures to help address changes to social
and cultural norms and identity, as brought about by massive social changes
in the Project area:
Develop and implement induction programmes, including a Code of

Conduct, for all newcomers directly related to the Project. This would
increase sensitivity to local norms and customs and would ensure that
contractors and employees are aware of appropriate and acceptable
behaviours.

the high numbers of outsiders converging on local towns.
Work closely with local health services and HIV/AIDS structures in

monitoring changes in levels of community health and wellbeing. Where
appropriate the project should explore partnerships with local health
services to attempt to address such changes (eg supporting local social
welfare/social worker/counsellor positions to assist people affected by
HIV/AIDS or alcohol and drug addictions, or those suffering from
depression).

residents, through which complaints related to contractor or employee
behaviour can be lodged and responded to. The Project should respond in
a serious manner to any such complaints.
Assist in the development of cultural programmes that celebrate the

Nzema culture.
Residual Impact
Changes and challenges to social and cultural norms often accompany a
sudden influx of outsiders and rapid urbanisation. Responses to this change
can vary dramatically from person to person and can change over time, as
someone either adapts, or doesn’t, to this change. Blanket mitigation
measures therefore often don’t apply.
However, with the Project’s commitment to management of its workforce and

contractors, combined with people’s tendency to adapt to and accommodate
change, the impacts of this change may be reduced to one of moderate - major

6-151
negative significance during construction and minor negative significance
during operations.
Table 6.47 Impact Summary: Changes to Cultural and Social Norms

Changes to Cultural and MAJOR NEGATIVE (most MODERATE - MAJOR
Social Norms (construction) groups) NEGATIVE
MINOR POSITIVE (those MINOR POSITIVE

eager for change)
Changes to Cultural and MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE

Social Norms (operation)
Increase in Social Pathologies
Impact Description
The introduction of large-scale developments in relatively remote, rural
environments can bring about massive social change and sometimes social
disorganisation. This change is brought about by the large numbers of
contractors and job-seekers that move into the area, and the rapid pace of
urbanisation as the economic opportunities associated when these large scale
developments are realised. Associated with this change is an increased
vulnerability and susceptibility of host communities to “social pathologies”(1),
including criminality, drug and alcohol abuse, increased incidence of
commercial sex work, teenage pregnancies, and domestic violence. The
existing environment is particularly susceptible to these changes as the
baseline environment is relatively free of such activities.
Construction Phase
Increased presence of mainly non-resident, single men with disposable
incomes entering the area for a short-term contract will trigger changes of
behaviour in the local towns. So too will the rapid rate of urbanisation and in-
migration that is expected to take place (with associated informal settlements)
and with the Project area shifting from a predominantly rural environment to
an urbanised area reliant on wage-based livelihoods. All of these factors point
to an increased vulnerability among the host community (and new arrivals) to
the social pathologies that characterise such massive change.
In terms of the impacts that the construction staff are expected to have, it
should be noted that current planning for accommodating these contractors is
focused on the contractor camp situated within the fenced Project footprint
area. However, contractors will be free to move around within the local
communities outside of working hours.
1) The term “social pathologies” is used in this context to refer to social problems arising from a breakdown in social
structures and organisation and resulting in the inhibition of personal adjustment caused by these social changes

6-152
There are a number of ways in which contractors will impact negatively on the
social environment if appropriate management is not implemented:
Increase of Local Sex Industry: The link between contractors’ camps and
a formal sex industry are common knowledge on large-scale
developments. It is highly likely that this will be the case on the Project,
even though contractors will be accommodated within the Project
footprint.
Risk of sexually transmitted infections and HIV/AIDS: Aside from

formal sex workers who will be drawn to the Project area, it is single
women, female teenagers and adolescents, particularly those living in
conditions of poverty, and those female-headed households (where
responsibility for ensuring the entire family’s survival rests on the
household head) who will be most vulnerable to the perceived benefits
and very real risks of commercial sex work. Furthermore, the likelihood
of multiple sexual partners associated with such situations indicates the
risk of increased sexually transmitted infections (STIs) as well as
HIV/AIDS infections if exposed communities do not take appropriate and
effective measures to protect those at risk.
Increased Vulnerability: Some contractors may form relationships with

local women, resulting in some instances, in children. Given the
temporary nature of contract work, it is possible that both the women and
children will be abandoned when the construction phase ends and the
contractors move on, leaving a new group of single female-headed
households often dependent upon their extended family support
networks.
Increased Tension: In some instances local married women may also

become involved with contractors. Such situations are likely to create
tension and conflict between local men and the contractors in question. It
is possible that domestic violence and family disintegration may result
with consequences for livelihood stability.
Increased Drug Abuse: In terms of increased crime, drug and alcohol

abuse, the baseline study (Chapter 5) documented what is reported to be a
very low incidence of crime and drug use in the Study Area, with some
reports of the use of marijuana but no reports of hard drugs like heroin or
cocaine. Around the world the presence of ports or harbours are
recognised as locations for increased transport and use of illicit drugs. It
is unlikely that this port, (although a specialised facility rather than
general import and export location) will be an exception. The presence of
contract workers may also increase the potential for drug abuse in the area
as the contractor workforce will originate from a variety of urban areas
and may have greater access to drugs, which could then be introduced
into the local area.

6-153
Increased Domestic Violence: Existing levels of alcohol abuse are low
with concomitant low levels of domestic violence. The Ekabaku Health
Centre reported treating incidents of domestic or other violence only
every few months, and confirmed that alcohol abuse was insignificant,
even amongst the unemployed who are often vulnerable to its misuse.
Increased Vulnerability to Social Pathologies:

The Project (and associated urbanisation) will assist in addressing the
current unemployment, but will also result in the loss of access to
subsistence livelihoods (and associated safety net). In addition,
relatively low percentage of locals that are likely to secure long-term
employment with the Project (due in part to the low skills level in the
area). This points to the possibility that current unemployment rates
will not improve significantly among the majority of the population,
at least in the immediate future.
Unmet expectations of employment, and associated feelings of

despair, could trigger higher levels of alcohol abuse. Alcohol abuse
could increase among the employed, due to sudden disposal incomes
and higher numbers of recreational facilities associated with
urbanisation.
Those most vulnerable to drug and alcohol abuse would include the
youth and unemployed as well as the contractors, isolated from
family and familiar support structures and with limited recreational
and social opportunities. Abuse of alcohol and drugs often correlates
with increased levels of criminal behaviour and violence both while
under the influence of the substance, or as a desperate measure to
find financial or material means with which to support the habit.
Such behaviour increases the number of people indirectly affected by,
or vulnerable to, alcohol and drug abuse.
The dramatic change from a rural to an urban setting could

destabilise the household unit, particularly if key income earners are
not able to maintain their levels of livelihood. This has the potential
to result in domestic violence, substance abuse and/or infidelity,
further fuelling household tension and conflict.
The social and cultural changes discussed in Section 0, could also

increase people’s vulnerability and susceptibility to the social
problems discussed above, as people struggle to establish a new
sense of identity amidst rapid social change. As people redefine
themselves in relation to their urban habitat, and become accustomed
to changed ways of living, some may turn to substance abuse as a
way of coping with this change. For others who are unable to secure
a livelihood, they may be susceptible to the temptations of crime as a
way of surviving. The increase in local inhabitants with money or
material possessions also exacerbates the potential for crime as

6-154
suddenly the difference between “haves” and “have-nots” becomes
visible and the presence of desirable material objects increases.
Perhaps the most vulnerable town in relation to these changes is

Asemdasuazo, which has managed to maintain “wholesomeness” in relation
to culture and tradition (eg no one in the community smokes and there have
been no teenage pregnancies etc). Urbanisation and related social changes are
thus likely to be of greatest shock to this community. Alternatively they may
have surprising social resilience that has enabled them to maintain the
particular sense of community and identity that they have.
Operational Phase
Increased Social Stability due to Permanent Workers: During operations,
the Project will increasingly employ local workers (Ghanaian in general
and local residents trained to increasingly fill permanent positions in
particular). This will increase the stability of the workforce, while the
permanence of employees settling within local villages will increase
people’s sense of belonging and commitment to broader community
interests. This is in contrast to what will have been experienced from the
temporary, outsider contract workers. Permanent employees are also
more likely to settle with their family members, again adding to the
stability of social structures. Furthermore, relationships between local
residents and permanent employees are likely to have longer-term
possibilities than those described above and may therefore also provide
increased security for the affected women.
Continued Social Pathologies: Alcohol and drug abuse may continue to

escalate as a result of increased wealth in the area with which to finance
these substances. Increased abuse by local residents, including domestic
violence, is also possible if people’s expectation of employment and local
development benefits are not met, and the youth and unemployed become
disillusioned, frustrated or hopeless, and if main income earners still
struggle to secure a satisfactory livelihood. In addition, if the influx of
people to the area has resulted in unplanned and illegal settlement and in
a generally reduced quality of life and sense of wellbeing for residents, the
abuse of substances and the related issues of violence and crime will put
an increasing number of people at risk.
Decreased in Sex Industry: The stability resulting from permanent

employment and increased presence of family units may result in a
decrease in commercial sex work that had catered to temporary workers.
Moderation of Tension: There may still be tension between local male

residents who feel threatened by the real or perceived attraction of local
women to these newcomer employees (and their secure incomes).
However, as localisation of employment increases over time and as local
men feel empowered both financially and skills wise, distinctions between
locals and newcomers may dissipate and so too may the related tensions.

6-155
Figure 6.49 Impact Diagram - Increase in Social Pathologies
Impact Assessment
Construction Phase
This impact will occur on a local scale affecting the Study Area towns and will
be permanent as the changes will begin with construction and continue. The
impact is indirect, negative and of medium magnitude.
The ability of local residents to adapt to the changes, and associated social
pathologies, is likely to vary depending on their levels of vulnerability.
Ability to adapt is likely to be worst (high- low negative) for the elderly, the
unemployed, single women, female teenagers and adolescents.
The impact is therefore considered to be of major- moderate negative

significance.
Operational Phase
The impact of increased social pathologies is deemed to be permanent at a local
scale and will continue through operations. It remains an indirect negative
impact but during this phase is considered to be of low magnitude.
The ability of residents to adapt is likely to be slightly improved from the

construction phase as people will have developed some coping mechanisms
and is therefore assessed to be low negative.
Overall the impact is considered to be of moderate negative significance

during the operation phase.
Mitigation
Following are potential mitigation measures to help address the social
pathologies associated with the Project and the massive social change in the
project area:

6-156
the high numbers of outsider workers converging on local towns.
Develop and implement induction programmes, including a Code of

Conduct and cultural awareness programme, for all newcomers directly
related to the Project. This should be initiated during the construction
phase but should be reinforced at regular intervals through operations.
This will increase sensitivity to local norms and customs and will ensure
that contractors and employees are aware of appropriate and acceptable
behaviours.
Develop a Community Health Safety and Security Management Plan that

will identify programmes and actions to address the health, safety and
security impacts directly related to the Project.
Implement a Project HIV/AIDS programme addressing factual health

issues as well as behaviour change issues around the transmission and
infection of HIV/AIDS as well as other communicable diseases. This
programme should be implemented amongst contractors and employees
and the Project should partner with appropriate authorities and NGOs to
implement such a programme in the Study Area towns.
Make condoms freely available to all contractors and employees and

partner with local health services to ensure the accessibility of condoms in
the communities.
Work closely with local health services and HIV/AIDS structures in

monitoring changes in levels of community health and wellbeing. Where
appropriate, explore partnerships with local health services to attempt to
address such changes (eg supporting local social welfare/social
worker/counsellor positions to assist people affected by HIV/AIDS or
alcohol and drug addictions, or those suffering from depression).

residents, through which complaints related to contractor or employee
behaviour can be lodged and responded to. The Project should respond in
a serious manner to any such complaints.
Provide a range of sport and recreational facilities for employees.
Residual Impact
Social pathologies often accompany a large influx of outsiders and rapid
urbanisation. Responses to this change can vary dramatically from person to
person and can change over time, as someone either adapts, or doesn’t, to this
change. Blanket mitigation measures therefore often don’t apply.
However, with the Project’s commitment to management of its workforce and

contractors, combined with people’s tendency to adapt to, and accommodate

6-157
change, the impacts of this may be reduced to one of minor-moderate negative
significance during both construction and operation.
Table 6.48 Impact Summary: Increase in Social Pathologies

Construction MODERATE - MAJOR MINOR - MODERATE
NEGATIVE NEGATIVE
Operation MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR - MODERATE

NEGATIVE
Tension and Conflict between Towns (and possibly Districts)
Impact Description
Three towns were initially identified as directly affected by the Project. All
three have been equally engaged during the feasibility/ ESIA stage of the
Project. However, as construction and operations begin certain towns will be
more directly affected (positively and negatively) than others and will need to
be given particular attention, thereby setting up the possibility for jealousy,
tension and conflict between the towns.
In addition, if one district is seen to be benefiting while a neighbouring district

does not, the potential for anger and conflict will arise.
In order to develop and operate the Project, it will be necessary to upgrade

and develop appropriate road infrastructure, as well as supplying services like
water and electricity to the site. In doing so, there could be indirect benefits for
surrounding towns through access to some of this infrastructure.
The location of the Project is likely to trigger increased attention and planning
by the District Planning Co-ordination Unit in anticipation of indirect impacts,
like an influx of people and increased demands on services and infrastructure.
Whether these are evenly distributed, or whether planning suggests trying to
concentrate development in one rather than another town is unknown.
However, the provision of services that are seen to favour one town over
another will likely result in tension between residents and government and
between affected towns.
To date, communities have felt equally engaged in the Project’s development

process, but construction and operation activities that highlight differential
benefits may result in increased tensions and conflict between towns around
real and perceived access to Project risks and opportunities. This could in
turn have an impact on relations between the Project and those towns that feel
excluded from the Project benefits.
In relation to inter-District tension, this has already been seen in anger and
threats of conflict from Jomoro communities over the location of the GNGC

6-158
Gas Processing Plant. Original planning suggested it would be located in
Jomoro but the plant is now planned for the Atuabo area, adjacent to the
planned Project site. Cumulative benefits to the Project area may exacerbate
this tension between the two districts, or from residents in nearby
communities towards the Study Area towns.
Figure 6.50 Impact Diagram – Tension and Conflict between Towns (and possibly
Districts)
Impact Assessment
The impact will be felt on a local scale (and possibly more broadly as
neighbouring communities respond to the developments in the Study Area
towns) and will range from short to long-term depending on whether
development takes place in parallel in different communities. It will be
triggered during construction and will continue into operations. The impact
of increased tension and/ or conflict between affected communities is a
negative impact of medium magnitude.
People’s ability to adapt, given high levels of expectation is considered a low

negative.
The possibility of increased tensions between Jomoro communities and the

Study Area communities are anticipated to be short-term as people from
Jomoro begin to take advantage of the changed neighbouring environment.
However given the existing relationships between some of the communities,
such tension may have a negative effect of low magnitude.
People’s ability in the two sets of communities to adapt is considered medium

negative.
Overall the impact of tension and possible conflict between affected towns,
and the likely impact that this would have on relationships between the towns
and the Project is considered to be of moderate negative significance. The
impact on relationships between communities in Jomoro and those of the
Study Area, or between the two Districts is considered minor negative.

6-159
Mitigation
Following are potential mitigation measures to address the potential for
community tension and conflict:
Partner with District Planning to encourage settlement planning and

development, for the in-migration induced by the Project, that benefits the
Study Area communities as evenly as possible.
Any Project and government actions regarding spatial development

framework planning should involve on-going consultations with local
communities at grassroots level.
Ensure that all affected towns receive equal access to opportunities in

terms of local recruitment, training, small business development,
procurement and community outreach programmes. This will also apply
to any social development plan projects, which will focus on all affected
towns.
Establish a local information office and appoint a permanent community

liaison officer accessible to all communities.
Work through an appropriate recruitment process to ensure transparent

and equitable distribution of job opportunities.
Establish a site-based grievance/complaints office and associated

procedure for addressing social, environmental, technical and operational
issues.
Mitigating possible tensions between Jomoro and the Study Area are not
within the Project’s sphere of influence, however, when considering
employment opportunities that cannot be filled from the local area it
would be valuable to include neighbouring communities, with
appropriate skills. This measure has already, in principle, been proposed
by the Awulae.
Residual Impact
Although unmet expectations, and associated tensions between and within
towns, is likely to accompany a Project of this scale, it is anticipated that the
implementation of the above measures will assist in reducing this impact to
one of minor significance.
Over time, the tension between neighbouring towns and neighbouring Jomoro
District communities should dissipate, as some opportunities are afforded to
those residents and as the changed environment becomes the “norm”. This is
considered to be of negligible negative significance.

6-160
Table 6.49 Impact Summary: Tension and Conflict between Towns (and possibly
Districts)

Tension and Conflict between MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
Towns (and possibly Districts) (for inter-town tension and
conflict)
MINOR NEGATIVE NEGLIGIBLE NEGATIVE

(for inter district tension and
conflict)
Unmet Expectations Resulting in Community Anger and Resentment towards the

Project
Impact Description
Due to the size of the Project within the context of current industrial
developments in the area and District, the expectations around employment
and economic opportunities for people in the local and broader Project area
will be high. The previous sections have highlighted that while there will be
some local employment and procurement during construction it might not
meet expectations. This has the potential to create community resentment and
anger, particularly where communities feel that they are being negatively
impacted, but are not receiving any Project benefits. It should be remembered
that the Project’s ongoing “social licence to operate” is closely related to the
opinions and experiences of affected communities. Sharing in Project benefits
is a key indicator (informal and often un-measured) for Project–affected
communities.
Consultation has highlighted that people in the Study Area have extremely
high expectations and are hopeful around employment opportunities, and
want to be prioritised in this regard. In a youth focus group meeting in
Atuabo there was a demand that 70 percent of jobs should go to that town.
However, most people seem to be realistic about the discrepancy between
levels of education and skills in the Study Area, and those required for
employment on the Project. People have though, emphasised that training
should be implemented to ensure that local Ghanaians are eligible for jobs in
the short to medium term.
Construction Phase
Local employment and procurement during construction is going to be
limited for a number of reasons, including the technical nature of the project,
the size of the contracts and the limited time available for training of people
with low levels of skill and experience. However, the Project estimates that
out of the 500-600 construction employees at peak, 60-70 percent will be
Ghanaian. Overall employment during construction is estimated at about
1000 people.
Operational Phase

6-161
As described in Impact 6.7.4 employment associated with operation of the
Project will be larger than that of construction at approximately 1500
permanent employees. Procurement and business opportunities during this
phase may increase in comparison to construction as businesses will have had
time to tailor themselves to the Project’s service needs. There will be fewer
jobs available for non-skilled people, but the construction period will have
provided some locals with skills and experience that may be applied during
operation. In addition, the construction period timeframe will allow some
local people to be trained to meet the needs of the Project and expectations
will decrease over time as adaptation continues and other economic
opportunities arise. Over the longer term, the process of localisation that will
be applied during operation is likely to allow for more local employment and
business opportunities on the Project.
Figure 6.51 Impact Diagram - Unmet Expectations Resulting in Community Anger and
Resentment towards the Project
Impact Assessment
Construction Phase
The impact will occur particularly in the Study Area but also more broadly
and is thus of local and regional scale, possibly national. It is likely to take place
in the short term when recruitment and procurement opportunities for people
and businesses from Ghana and in the directly affected Study Area are more
limited but where there will be a significant external, skilled workforce clearly
visible on site. If communities in the Study Area perceive that they are not
sharing Project benefits resentment is likely to continue, thus being of short to
medium term duration. The nature of the impact is direct as it is related to real
employment/ contracts and perceived missed opportunities and is considered
to be of medium negative magnitude.
It is likely that the communities in and adjacent to the directly affected Project
area will initially find it difficult to accept the unmet expectations thus ability
to adapt is considered low-medium negative.
The overall impact of community anger and resentment towards the Project as
a result of unmet expectations is considered to be of moderate negative
significance.

6-162
Operational Phase
The impact will occur at the local level with some potential for it to be felt at
the regional level and is likely to last for the duration of operations, therefore it
will be long term. The magnitude is assessed as small-medium negative and will
be as a direct consequence of the Project.
However, it is likely that over the longer term, the ability to adapt by directly
affected project communities’ adaptability will be higher than during the
construction phase as people gear their education and training to meet the
needs of the Project and surrounding communities. In addition their
expectations will be more realistic than during construction. Thus this is rated
as low negative adaptability.
The overall impact is considered to be of minor -moderate negative

significance.
Mitigation
The Project should strive to ensure realistic expectations about employment
and general Project benefits, thus minimising the potential for anger and
resentment; and ensure that, where possible, local communities can
participate in employment and other economic opportunities. This could be
achieved through ongoing partnerships with relevant NGOs, training
organisations and educational services and Government organisations. The
following potential mitigation measures are recommended during
construction and operation:
Communicate the skills and experience requirements for the Project in a

transparent, timely and accessible manner.
Where possible institute pre-construction training to empower local

residents to meet Project employment standards.
Communicate pre-employment and internal training efforts at the Project

in a transparent, timely and accessible manner.
Highlight achievements or milestones in local employment wherever

possible.
Identify skills requirements for construction and operation, and related

timescales for appropriate training.
Identify local capacity to meet Project requirements through a skills audit

and audit conducted in the Study Area towns, and work with
Government to identify other relevant available skills in Ghana.
Work with existing educational and training institutions to identify

existing training capacity and explore the potential for making training
more accessible in and adjacent to the directly affected Project area.

6-163
Invest in education and training as described under ‘Skills Development
and Training’ in Section 6.7.4.
These measures could be addressed through the development and

implementation of a social development plan.
Residual Impact
The management of expectations and development of employment
opportunities for people in the local area is likely to change this impact from
being moderate negative to minor negative during construction, and from
minor-moderate negative to minor negative during operation. The residual
impacts following mitigation are therefore considered to be of minor
significance.
Table 6.50 Impact Summary: Community Anger and Resentment over Not Sharing in
Project Benefits

Community Anger and MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
Resentment over Not Sharing
in Project Benefits
(construction)
Community Anger and MINOR TO MODERATE MINOR NEGATIVE

Resentment over Not Sharing NEGATIVE
in Project Benefits (operation)
6.7.7 Impacts on Health
There are numerous ways in which the development of the Project could
impact on community and individual levels of health. The term “health” can
be used broadly to include physical and mental health and well-being.
However, in this section of the Impact Assessment it refers specifically to
physical health as mental health and well-being have been discussed under
socio-cultural impacts above.
Impact on health arising from the Project (directly and indirectly) can be both
positive and negative. While highlighting some positive impacts the focus of
the Project should be to address the negative ones, particularly with
consideration of groups most vulnerable to identified health risks.
Increased Prevalence of Sexually Transmitted Infections, HIV/ AIDS and other

Communicable Diseases
Impact Description
HIV/Aids is seen as a critical issue in Africa with disastrous consequences. It
is well known that the disease follows transport corridors and spreads more

6-164
rapidly in areas where there is an influx of migrant workers. In southern
Africa HIV/Aids is placing considerable pressure on those caring for ill or
disabled, typically family members. In households, the impacts are immense.
Breadwinners are dying with little or no provision for their families – some of
whom are also likely to be, or to become, infected.
While this is not the case in Ghana the risk should not be under-estimated. In
2010, Ghana’s HIV/AIDS infection rate was recorded as 1.7 percent, the
lowest rate in West Africa. The prevalence rate was reported to have dropped
from three percent in 2004 to 2.7 percent in 2005 and to 1.7 percent in 2010.
Already (in 2008) Ellembelle District has a significantly higher HIV prevalence
that the national average with rates of 14.8 percent as compared to 3.2 percent.
In 2011, 11 percent of blood donors at Eikwe Hospital tested HIV+; 25 percent
of those coming for diagnosis tested positive; 17 percent of people voluntarily
approaching the HIV Testing and Counselling programme and 4 percent of
mothers participating in the Prevention of Mother to Child Transmission
programme tested positive for HIV1. The reason for this significant
discrepancy is not clear but suggests that the District is already vulnerable.
The Ekabaku Health Centre and Eikwe Hospital reported that the incidence of
HIV is not high (although the stigma attached to HIV/Aids would contribute
to non-disclosure thus probably reducing diagnosed cases) but Sexually
Transmitted Infections (STIs) are prevalent. From the District Annual Review
data three people in Atuabo and one person in Anokyi are on anti-retroviral
treatment. No one from Asemdasuazo is currently on treatment although in
2012 one person was.
All health workers interviewed reported views that the development of the
Project and related influx of people and social changes in behaviour would
almost certainly increase the prevalence of HIV/AIDS and other STIs in the
area. There is increasing teenage pregnancy in local communities and
exchanges of sexual relations for material goods as explained in the baseline
description could increase, as more cash becomes available and more single
“affluent” men enter the area. In addition, all transport routes utilised by
Project (particularly the construction traffic between the Project site and the
mining areas close to Tarkwa) could prove to be a mechanism for the spread
of HIV/AIDS.
Based on the age and gender profile of the local population it is also evident
that this would be a high-risk group. In African countries with high incidents
of HIV/AIDS the population most affected are between 16-36/40 years of age,
the age of males most likely to seek employment. Local health workers
already report a higher rate of infection amongst women than men in the area.
The impact that increased rates of HIV/AIDS would be significant for families
and communities in the Study Area, which have so far reported extremely low
(1) 1 District Annual Review, Eikwe Hospital. January 2012

6-165
infection rates. Increased prevalence of HIV/AIDS could also impact on the
Project over time. Significant time and resources will be spent in developing
local skills amongst residents to fulfil many of the jobs required by the Project
– particularly with the intention of localisation of employment opportunities.
Increased levels of sickness and higher rates of morbidity and mortality
associated with HIV/AIDS will have costs in the financial and productivity
arenas as well as having psychological effects on the Project’s workforce and
host communities.
The development of the Project will be the catalyst for a significant in-
migration of people to the area that is likely to fuel an increase in STIs,
HIV/AIDS and communicable diseases. Of particular relevance in the Project
area is Tuberculosis (TB) because of its opportunistic relationship to
HIV/AIDS. Already in Ellembelle District and in the Study Area, Acute
Respiratory Infections (ARIs) rank second only to malaria for morbidity.
In-migration will be as a result of direct project employment, indirect job-

seekers and others wanting to explore the economic opportunities related to
the development. The segments of people likely to move to the project area
during the construction and operation phases are:
Direct migrants
Workers involved directly in the Project (groups of contactors during
construction and others supplying ancillary services (like raw material
transporters, vendors of temporary services)). This group will be mainly men
on contracts of 3-6 months on average over an 18-24 month period.
Induced migrants
This group consists of people who are not employed by the Project and will be
made up of job seekers, medium and small-scale traders and commercial sex
workers.
The instability of the social environment, with high levels of movement of

contractors and other temporary migrants and the few or no social and family
ties to the local communities increases the likelihood of the spread of
communicable diseases such as HIV. This spread would happen within the
local area, as a result of sexual interactions between residents and in-migrants,
and further afield as migrants leave the area for other districts, regions or
countries.
To understand the potential spread of HIV it is important to remember that

the three Study Area communities likely to be most directly affected are rural,
largely dependent upon the land (which will be diminished as a result of the
Project) and sea (where access will be reduced and competition for resources
increased), and are generally living below or very close to the poverty line.
Arguably this makes local residents particularly attracted to all potential
sources of a cash income to enhance their livelihoods. The potential for local
women (and women from beyond the area) to engage in commercial or
informal sex work and casual sex is, therefore, considerable.

6-166
During the operations phase there is likely to be an increased level of stability
as permanent employees settle in the area, many accompanied by their
families, and over time, an increasing number of local people should be able to
access Project jobs as a result of training opportunities and the aim for
localised employment. While this is likely to reduce the speed of transmission
of infections that may have occurred during the construction phase, it is
during operations that the impacts of people becoming infected with HIV
would begin to be felt. There may be an increasing number of people living
with HIV/AIDS needing treatment, thus placing increased stress on
government health services and infrastructure as well as family resources.
Figure 6.52 Impact Diagram – Increased Prevalence of Sexually Transmitted Infections,

HIV/ AIDS and other Communicable Diseases
Impact Assessment
An increase in the spread of STIs, HIV/AIDS and other communicable
diseases will not be confined to the Study Area communities and is therefore
considered to be local, regional, national and international as migrants return
from the Project area to their homes or travel in search of new economic
opportunities. The impact is likely to be long term as it would be initiated
during construction and would continue through operations. It is both direct
and induced by the Project’s development with a negative implication of high
magnitude.
Adaptability during the construction phase is considered to be low negative

based on current infection rates and limited exposure to communicable
diseases to date. It is highly likely that single and young women in the Project
area would be more vulnerable and have lower adaptability.
The overall impact is considered to be of major negative significance in the

absence of mitigation measures.

6-167
Mitigation
Mitigation for the potential spread of STIs, HIV/AIDS and other
communicable diseases is difficult and complex. All mitigation measures
should be a joint effort between the Project, health authorities and community
leadership.
The following potential mitigation measures are recommended during

construction and operation:
Develop and implement a Project policy for HIV/AIDS and other

communicable diseases.
Develop a management plan for HIV and other communicable diseases.
Establish and implement an employees’ Code of Conduct to limit the

direct impact of the Project on communicable diseases in the Study Area.
All workers should undergo thorough HIV/AIDS awareness and

education programmes, possibly as part of induction during construction
and on an ongoing basis. Educational programmes have been developed
internationally and in numerous African countries to specifically change
individual behaviour patterns of condom use and multiple sexual
partners. These could be looked at in combination with the National
HIV/AIDS Strategic Framework as a starting point for a locally
appropriate programme. Ghana has already seen an increase in condom
use from 17 to 23 percent in the past three years. This suggests the
existence of successful local strategies to draw from.
Support local school education initiatives by government and NGOs.

Experts agree that education and awareness is an important tool for
reducing the spread of disease. Importantly the education should target
youth as young as 11 years old in order to prepare them for when they
engage in sexual practices. From the reported cases of teenage
pregnancies, this is already taking place in early teenagers.
Support, or if necessary facilitate, the development of an ongoing

accessible and culturally appropriate awareness programme with the local
residents and workers around the dangers of STDs and about the risks of
HIV/AIDS. This should be implemented in conjunction with District
initiatives and programmes initiated through the Ghanaian National
HIV/AIDS Strategic Framework.
Free condoms should be provided to all workers.
Support awareness initiatives amongst Project and tenant employees and

local residents around communicable diseases and basic steps to avoid or
limit the spread of such diseases.

6-168
Residual Impact
It will be highly unlikely that the transmission of HIV/AIDS can be
completely prevented, even with strong and effective Project and government
interventions. However, the existing government and community structures
and programmes will, to some extent, lessen the impact that HIV and other
communicable diseases will have on the communities in the Study Area and
along the transport route. The implementation of a Project-wide policy and
programmes will assist in limiting direct Project impacts.
Ghana has demonstrated a reduction of HIV infection rates over the past
number of years. Thus its programmes seem to have a positive impact, and
more focused programmes in the Study Area and surrounding communities
should have the similar effects. Health education for the communities will
therefore probably have a positive impact on sexual behaviour, but residual
transmission of infections is still likely.
The post-mitigation negative impacts during construction and operation will

therefore probably be of moderate negative significance.
Table 6.51 Impact Summary: Increased Prevalence of STIs, HIV/AIDS and other

Increased Prevalence of STIs, MAJOR NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE
HIV/AIDS and other
Nuisance and Irritants related to Air Emissions
Impact Description
Construction and Operation Phases

Project activities will result in pollutants released to the air. During
construction this will include pollutants in exhaust gases from engines,
including greenhouse gases (GHG) (assessed in Section 6.5.12) and dust
(Section 6.5.10). During operations, sources of air pollutants will include
marine vessels; vehicles; power generators; waste incineration; and aircraft
and helicopters.
Emissions have the potential to degrade air quality and to cause indirect
effects on community health including eye irritations and allergies as well as
respiratory problems.
The technical details of pollutants to be released during construction and

operations of the Project as well as dust particles are discussed in Section
6.5.10. The assessment concludes that the increased levels of emissions in the
Study Area and the concomitant reduction in air quality will be of minor
negative significance for both construction and operations.

6-169
Figure 6.53 Impact Diagram – Nuisance and Irritants related to Air Emissions
Impact Assessment
Air Pollutants
The impact of a minor reduction in air quality on people’s eyes and
respiratory functioning is considered to be long-term in duration, starting from
construction and continuing through operations. It will be local in spatial
extent, as the pollutants will not extend beyond the Study Area, and the
magnitude of this indirect negative impact is considered small.
Current low levels of pollutants in the surrounding environment and the

proximity of local communities to the Project site suggest that people’s
adaptability to the impact would be medium.
The impact is considered to be of minor negative significance.
Dust
The construction period is expected to last approximately 18 months and the
dust-generating activities are likely to occur for the duration of this period but
will cease after the construction period ends and are thus considered short-
term.
Dust would travel less than 200 m from the source area and areas that would
be predicted to be worst affected are those to the north east of the Project site
(ie including the community of Asemdasuazo) as a result of the prevailing
south-westerly wind direction. Therefore the spatial extent of degradation in
air quality resulting from emission sources and activities on the site will be
local. However, because there will be a significant amount of rock and
equipment transported along gravel and national roads to the Project site the
spatial extent of the effects is regional. The magnitude of this impact is
therefore expected to be medium.
In terms of sensitivity, air quality in the Project area is good. Dust already
occurs from existing natural areas, cleared areas and along roads. It is

6-170
however currently low with capacity for buffering additional inputs.
However, respiratory complaints have however been noted as one of the more
common health complaints at the Ekabaku Health Centre suggesting that
people’s adaptability to an increase in dust would therefore be medium.
The significance of the impact is thus moderate.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigations measures associated with pollutants are focussed on minimising
emissions from equipment.
The Project will ensure that all equipment and engines are maintained and
operated as originally designed and not allow use of out-dated, poorly
operated equipment for Project activities.
Mitigation measures for dust are designed to reduce potential release through
management approaches.
The Project will monitor dust emissions at onsite and offsite sources. If it
is determined that dust is a problem, the Project will implement a
programme to control dust emissions including measures such as wetting
and covering.
Residual Impacts
While emissions during construction are already predicted to be low, the
Project will ensure environmental protection through monitoring and
implementation of controls as required. The significance of this impact
remains minor for pollutants and reduces to minor for dust.
Table 6.52 Impact Summary: Irritated and Allergic Eye Conditions and Respiratory
Problems

Significance
Construction and Operation MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
Degradation of air quality: air
pollutants
Construction and Operation MINOR – MODERATE MINOR NEGATIVE

Degradation of air quality: dust NEGATIVE
Impact on Tourism
Impact Description
Tourism development in the area is extremely limited. Fort Appolonia (built
by the British in 1770) is the only fort in close proximity to the Study Area in
the town of Beyin (approximately 1 km away from Atuabo). The other

6-171
recognised tourist attraction in the area is Nzulezu Stilted Village on Lake
Amansuri about 3.5 km inland of Atuabo and Anokyi.
Project activities will not impact directly on tourist sites. However, during
construction activities access to the two tourist attractions will be somewhat
disrupted as a result of the rerouting of the main road currently running
between Anokyi and Atuabo. There will also be increased noise levels during
construction. However, it is unlikely that these activities will impact in any
significant way.
During operations, the port may even become a local tourist attraction in itself
with people stopping over en route to Appolonia and Nzuleze.
As discussed in Section 6.5.4, the Amasuri Lake receives perennial flow from
two upstream rivers, and therefore impacts with respect to changes in surface
water levels or quality of the lake due to the Project are considered to be
negligible.
Figure 6.54 Impact Diagram – Impacts on Tourism
Impact Assessment
Over the long-term, during operations, the impact of the road rerouting will be
eliminated and the quality of the road will be significantly improved making
general access easier. This will remain on a local scale. However, the presence
of the port may act as a positive local attraction as a direct result of the Project
of medium magnitude.
Although the port will become a conspicuous feature in the landscape, and
visible from the Fort, tourists’ adaptability (sensitivity) to the presence of the
port is likely to be low as it will be seen as part of the environment rather than
a sudden change.

6-172
The overall impact of the Project on tourism is therefore considered to be of
minor negative significance.
Mitigation
Mitigation measures should include the following:
During construction the Project should ensure that the road rerouting is
safe and easily visible for tourists and could assist the tourist operators by
placing additional signage at the beginning of the construction works to
assure tourists that the sites are accessible.
Efforts should be made to reduce the visual impacts of the construction

works using techniques such as visual screening by planning vegetation
removal to maximise screening effects of landscaping.
Residual Impacts
Residual impacts overall will considered to remain of minor negative
significance.
Table 6.53 Impact Summary: Impact on Tourism

Construction MINOR NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
Operation NEGLIGIBLE TO MINOR NEGLIGIBLE TO MINOR

POSITIVE POSITIVE
6.1 UNPLANNED AND ACCIDENTAL EVENTS
The following section presents the assessment of impacts resulting from

unplanned or non-routine events and those which are as a result of accidents.
These are different than impacts from effects that would reasonably be
predicted to occur in the normal course of activities during construction and
operations.
Unplanned and accidental events have the potential to occur and therefore the
evaluation of impacts for unplanned and accidental event takes into account
the likelihood of the event occurring into the impact magnitude. Likelihood is
determined as unlikely, possible, or likely based in professional judgement and
quantitative information where available.
Given the nature of Project activities, unplanned and accidental events might
include:
accidental spills of chemicals, oil and hazardous materials;

fires and explosions;
accidents related to waste handling; and

6-173
vehicle traffic accidents.
Aircraft Accidents
If unplanned and accidental events did occur, there would be effects on the
biophysical and social environment. The risk of unplanned and accidental
events and the potential impacts are described in this section.
Figure 6.55 Impact Diagram – Unplanned and Accidental Events
6.1.1 Accidental Spills
Various hazardous materials will be used in the course of carrying out Project
activities, the main ones being chemicals used in various industrial activities
and hydrocarbon fuels and lubricating oils. There is the potential for
accidental release in the course of material storage and handling.
Impact Description
During construction there is the potential for spills of fuels and oils during
fuelling and maintenance of machinery and vehicles. Spills could also occur
as a result of dirty wash water from washing of equipment. Spills could occur
in a number of locations around the site including areas used for maintenance,
material and equipment laydown, parking, fuel storage, and fuelling. Spills
could also occur along the roads adjacent to the Project site and along the
route for construction traffic. Spills on the site have the potential to impact the
terrestrial environment. Spills could also occur on or near the marine
environment from equipment and marine vessels including the dredge vessel.

6-174
Operations will include activities that require handling and storage of
chemical and fuels as well including repair and fabrication, and marine
operations of rigs, support and supply vessels and oil tankers. Spills could
occur during operation and maintenance of equipment and vessels.
During operations the port facilities will include a bulk storage facility with
storage tanks to store hydrocarbon fuels for vessels and other port operations.
The storage tanks will also be used for temporary storage of tank slops. The
fuels stored will include gasoline, diesel heavy fuel oil, aviation turbine
kerosene, marine gas oil and lubricants and greases. Vessels would be
refuelled via a pipeline from the tank farm to the berths. Other fuelling
operations will be conducted at designated locations on the site. Accidental
spills from the storage tanks or during handling would affect the terrestrial
and marine environments and result in a change in the quality of water, soil,
and sediment. This would in turn have adverse effects on flora and fauna and
local community users.
Impact Likelihood
Incidental spills of fuels are infrequent but do occur, most frequently due to
malfunction of handling systems and poor practices of workers. Spills are
most likely to occur during fuel transfers. Large releases of hazardous
materials from storage vessels are rare because storage containers are
designed and built specifically to prevent release. Storage specifications are
regulated and monitored by the Government of Ghana.
Spills of chemicals are less frequent due to the small quantities that would be
used during construction and operation and the careful handling practices
that will be implemented.
Overall it is unlikely that a spill would occur. This is factored into the impact
assessment description.
Impact Assessment
The following sections describe and assess the potential consequence of an

accidental spill on specific media.
Potential Impacts on Soils

Soil analysis indicated that soils in the Project area are relatively free of
contaminants including hydrocarbons. Levels of metals, in particular nickel,
copper and aluminium, were elevated likely due to natural occurrence.
If hazardous materials such as fuel were to be released to soil, spread would

be mostly limited in extent to the immediate area, however depending on
volume and soil permeability at the specific location, material could spread
into the subsurface for some depth, mostly in the upper 1-2 m. The spatial
scale is therefore considered to be local. The temporal scale of the negative
and direct impact would be long-term and is expected to be continuous.

6-175
A spill is unlikely.
The overall magnitude of the impact is considered to be medium.
Since the potentially affected soils would be within the Project footprint and
the site is intended for industrial activities (and not, for example, for
agriculture), sensitivity of the soils is considered to be low.
Therefore the overall significance of potential negative impacts of spill on soils

is considered to be minor.
Potential Impacts on Surface Water

Dry season sampling indicates that the nearest major perennial surface water
body is more than 1 km away to the north of the site (Chapter 4). There are
small areas of seasonal water inundation at locations within the Project
footprint and off-site to the north. Project activities with the potential for
accidental spills will generally not occur or be limited in these locations, so the
risk of a direct release to the surface water is very unlikely. It is possible
however, that rainfall could transport materials spilled on the ground to the
surface water depending on location and drainage patterns.
If a spill did occur, components of the hazardous material that were soluble
would dissolve in the water column. Insoluble or low solubility material
would sink to the bottom and mix with the sediments. Some components may
be harmful to the water ecology (Section xx). Except for persistent pollutants,
components would attenuate through natural processes over time.
If a spill were to impact a surface water body, it would be limited to the local
scale and short term. As above, a spill is considered unlikely. The impact
magnitude is therefore considered to be small.
Quality of surface water is currently good and water is used by communities

for a number of purposes including fishing. Surface water is considered to be
a medium sensitivity.
The potential impact is therefore considered to be minor in significance.
Potential Impacts on Groundwater

Groundwater in the Project area consists of an upper fresh water aquifer that
occurs in the upper 5 m below ground level. Below this is a more saline water
layer that occurs to between 5 m and approximately 100 m in sands and clays.
Below that (more than 100 m) is a deep freshwater layer that occurs in
limestone. The groundwater table (ie the top of the groundwater) varies
seasonally and is higher in the wet season, where it even rises above the
ground in some areas and creates localised flooded (inundated) areas within
the Project site. The groundwater is fed from the surface by rain water. The
extent of the area of inundation will be confirmed during the wet season
sampling and presented with the Final ESIA Report.

6-176
Spills have the potential to impact the groundwater if hazardous material
moved through the soil and reached the groundwater layer. Insoluble
material would remain mostly near the source of the spill. Soluble
components would dissolve in the water and move with the groundwater in
the direction of the natural flow which varies across the site.
Because groundwater movement is low, any spill would remain local in extent.
Small spills would be short-term as contaminants would naturally attenuate
although a large constant release (such as an undetected leak) could last for
longer). A spill is unlikely. The magnitude of the potential impact is therefore
considered to be small.
The upper fresh water aquifer is used as a water source in the local
communities although water wells are mostly away from areas of Project
activities (>500 m) so the resource is of medium sensitivity.
The potential impact is of minor significance.
Potential Impacts on Marine Water Quality and Sediments

Accidental spills of hazardous material could occur in marine waters due to
normal ship activities, fuelling and at locations where repairs are done over
water.
If hazardous materials were accidentally spilled, some components would

float on the water surface and disperse and some would dissolve in the water
column. For heavier fuels, insoluble components may sink to the seabed and
mix with the sediments. For small spills the dissolved components will
disperse and be diluted and would pose little threat people or ecological
receptors although there could be risks to community health as a result of
people accumulated contaminants (eg heavy metals) in fish. Of concern
would be accumulation of floating material (including solids) which would
pose a hazard to fish and birds.
Accidental (or illegal) discharge of ballast water in the port area poses specific
concerns. Ships use ballast water to maintain draft and to stabilise the vessel
by lowering the centre of gravity. Typically ballast water is taken on in coastal
locations after offloading cargo and is discharged when new cargo is loaded.
Ships using the port will be required to undertake ballast water management
measures in accordance with the requirements of the International Convention
for the Control and Management of Ships Ballast Water and Sediments. This
includes requirements for a ballast water management plan on each vessel
and ballast water exchange at least 200 nm from the nearest land and in water
at least 200 m deep to reduce the transfer of organisms. This is unless vessels
are discharging ballast water into dedicated port receptor facilities (eg for
treatment).
If however ballast water is not managed appropriately it can have a potential

impact on the marine environment as it can contain traces of oil or other

6-177
potential polluting chemicals or foreign (alien) invasive species and
pathogens. Invasive species are a potential threat to local biodiversity through
predation on local species and increased competition in the intertidal and
benthic habitats (assessed in Section 6.6.2).
Ships typically contain large volumes of ballast water and release would be
regional in extent. Duration of the impact would be medium as invasive species
could persist. A spill is unlikely. The magnitude of the impact would
therefore be medium.
The sensitivity of the marine waters is low as it has significant buffer capacity.
The overall significance of potential impact is therefore considered to be

minor.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigations for accidental spills are designed to provide proper prevention

and to ensure capability for response and clean-up in the event of an accident.
Spill Prevention
Hazardous material storage facilities will be designed and built to
international specifications with regard to spill and leak prevention and
containment. Hazardous material storage will be on hard standing and
impermeable surface and the bulk storage facility will be bunded. The
Project will restrict storage and handling of hazardous materials and fuels
to bunded areas of sufficient capacity to contain a release.
Refuelling of equipment and vehicles will be carried out in designated

areas on hard standing ground to prevent seepage of any spillages to
ground. Collection systems will be installed in these areas to manage any
spills, fuels will be collected and either reused, treated by incineration or
removed by a local contractor. Drip trays must be used when refuelling
and servicing vehicles or equipment, where it is not on a hardstanding
Spill Response
The Project will develop a detailed hazardous material spill response plan
with includes community sensitisation/ notifications when requried. The
Project will maintain spill clean-up and response capability adequate for
addressing spills for all phases of the Project and for both spills on the land
and for spills in the marine environment. All spills will be immediately
contained and cleaned up. Contaminated areas will be remediated and
post remediation verification will be carried out.
Mitigation Ballast Water and Ship Discharges

All vessels entering the port will be required to comply with regulations
associated with the MARPOL 73/78 Convention. Ballast, bilge and
sanitation water disposed of at port reception facilities would need to be
treated (via a combination of filtration, sterilisation - exposure to ozone of

6-178
ultra violet light - and or chemical treatment techniques using biocides).
Alternatively ballast water exchange will be undertaken in deep water as
far offshore as possible, to avoid the transfer and survival of alien invasive
species as well as the contamination of coastal waters.
Project marine vessels and visiting export tankers (whilst in the terminal
restricted areas) will treat oily water (eg from open and closed drain
systems, bilges and slop tank water) in accordance with the MARPOL
Annex I requirements (15 ppm oil and grease as a maximum limit) and
discharge to sea. The Project will ensure that oil discharge monitors are on
all vessels to monitor discharge and keep records of oil content to verify
effective controls are in place.
Marine vessels will not be allowed to discharge sewage whilst in the port
restricted areas and all port vessels (including dredging vessels) should
treat sewage prior to discharge to sea.
Port vessels (including dredging vessels) operating within 12 nm should

not be allowed to discharge food waste whilst in the port restricted areas
and should discharge food wastes at the port or in deeper waters. Organic
food wastes generated should be macerated to pass through a 25 mm
mesh and discharged more than 12 nm from land with no floating solids
or foam.
Marine water quality and sediments should be monitored periodically,

with a particular focus on monitoring the contaminants likely to arise from
effluent from the water treatment facility (eg total hydrocarbons, and total
suspended solids). Monitoring should be conducted to detect any changes
to seawater quality (and benthos). If environmental quality is shown to be
degrading as a result of Project activities, corrective action should be taken
to upgrade the treatment system. This should be done in coordination
with the authorities in charge of the environment and public health with
the provision of public information where necessary.
Residual Impact
With the implementation of control and containment systems, the chance of a

spill occurring is maintained as unlikely. The potential impact residual
significance will remain minor as summarised in Table 6.54.
Table 6.54 Impact Summary: Potential Impacts from Accidental Spills
Impacted Media Pre-mitigation Significance Potential Impact Residual

Significance
Soils MINOR MINOR
Surface water MINOR MINOR
Ground water MINOR MINOR

6-179
Impacted Media Pre-mitigation Significance Potential Impact Residual
Significance
Marine water and sediments MINOR MINOR
6.1.2 Fires and Explosions
Some Project activities during construction have the potential for accidental
fires and explosion. These would have the potential for impact on human and
ecological receptors.
Impact Description
Welding, cutting and other activities involving heat and spark have the
potential to start a fire. Poorly maintained machinery and combustion engines
also have a risk of catching fire.
Fire and explosion risk exists at temporary fuels storage facilities as well as the
permanent bulk storage facility in relation to hydrocarbon storage tanks and
piping infrastructure. Fire and explosion could result from the presence of
combustible gases and liquids, oxygen and ignition sources during loading
and unloading activities and/or leaks and spills of flammable products. Fire
and explosion hazards at onshore facilities may result from loss of
containment a storage tank due to a catastrophic rupture, a local failure or
overfilling of a tank. There are also risks of loss of containment due to a local
failure at the pump station, rupture of the pipeline or leaks from the loading
arm or hoses during loading and unloading activities.
Explosions and fires could pose a risk to workers and the public, especially
neighbouring communities. This may include people and structures of the
neighbouring communities, particularly Asemdasuazo which is located north
of (and closest to) the proposed bulk storage facility location. Workers as well
will be within hazard zones and at risk to fires and explosions.
Accident scenarios and consequences according to equipment that are

identified are included in Table 6.55. Pool fires, flash fires and jet fires from
pipeline ruptures, pump station failures and loss of containment at smaller
temporary tanks would result in smaller fires.
Table 6.55 Events and Potential Consequences at Fuel Storage Facility
Equipment Loss of Containment Consequence

Storage tank Catastrophic rupture Pool fire
Local failure Explosion
Tank fire
Boil over
Overfilling Explosion
Bund fire
Pump station Local failure Jet fire
Pool fire

6-180
Equipment Loss of Containment Consequence
Pipeline Rupture Pool fire
Jet fire
Flash fire
Impact Likelihood
While rates of fires from construction and operations associated with

industrial activities are low, they are possible. Incidents of fires and explosion
at the bulk storage facility are also regarded as possible.
Impact Assessment
The extent of any impact would be local and would remain close to the source.
Duration of the effects would range from short-term to permanent depending
on the consequence. The likelihood is possible. The magnitude of a potential
impact would therefore be medium.
Although the likelihood of a fire or explosion is low (but possible), if one did
occur the potential consequences could be great, in particular to offsite
receptors where infrastructure is poor and building materials potentially
readily flammable. Fire response capabilities in the area are rudimentary or
non-existent.
The most sensitive receptors would be those communities nearest sources of

potential fires and explosion, in particular community of Asemdasuazo which
is located approximately 400 m to the northwest of the bulk storage facility.
This distance would generally provide adequate safety buffer given the size of
the facility and the volume and types of material stored there. The sensitivity
of receptors is considered to be medium.
The overall significance of a potential fire or explosion is therefore assessed to

be moderate.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures are focused on: designing and constructing facilities to

ensure that the risk of fires and explosions is minimised; siting facilities to
ensure adequate safety buffer between hazards and people; implementing
proper storage and handling procedures; and ensuring that there are adequate
contingency measures.
Facilities and equipment for the storage and handling of flammable

materials will be constructed and operated in accordance with applicable
Ghana laws and with international good practice. Standards and codes
provided by the UK Fire Protection Association will be applied.
For the bulk storage facility, the Project will carry out a Quantitative Risk
Assessment (QRA) during the final design to determine risk scenarios and

6-181
hazard zones. The siting of the bulk storage facility will then be refined to
allow for an adequate safety buffer from residential areas.
Temporary storage of flammable materials will be in accordance with

Ghanaian laws and with international good practice.
Workers who handle flammable materials or who conduct work where

there is a risk of fire shall be properly trained for their duties and in
methods of fire prevention and fire response.
All workers will be sensitised to fire safety issues including fire protection
measures and proper housekeeping such as the removal of flammable
materials (including rubbish, dry vegetation, and hydrocarbon-soaked
soil) from the vicinity of the bulk fuel storage facility or areas where
flammable materials are stored.
The Project shall ensure that adequate fire response equipment and
systems are in place at all stages of the project and at all locations where
fire is a risk. The Project shall commission a fire and life safety assessment
prior to commencement of operations to ensure that systems and
procedures are adequate. The assessment will be carried out by a
competent professional.
Regular inspections will be carried out to inspect and test fire fighting
equipment and systems.
Suggest insertion here of stakeholder awareness programme, in case of

fire.
Residual Impacts
With the implementation of mitigation measures, the risk of fire and explosion
is further reduced and the residual potential impact is minor.
Table 6.56 Impact Summary: Potential Impacts from Fire and Explosions
Impact Pre-mitigation Significance Residual Potential Impact

Significance
Potential fire or explosion MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
(damage to buildings and harm
to people)
6.1.3 Waste
A variety of wastes will be created during the course of Project activities

during construction and operations. These include:
hazardous and non-hazardous solid waste;

6-182
sanitary sewage and grey water from living facilities;
hazardous liquid wastes such as used oils and spent chemicals; and
treated drill cuttings from the operation of the treatment facility.
The Project will have systems for handling, storing, treating and ultimately
disposing of Project waste. If systems are implemented and used properly,
impacts from waste would be minimal. However, if waste management
systems were not properly designed and/ or operated there is the potential
for impacts on people and the environment.
Potential impacts associated with waste are discussed in this section.
Impact Description
Construction
Wastes generated during construction will comprise a significant amount of
organic material in the way of trees, shrubs, and vegetation cleared during site
preparation. Other wastes will be created during construction activities
including a variety of non-hazardous materials such as wood (un-used
lumber, wooden pallets), plastic, paper, and cardboard from the delivery of
the equipment and machinery. In addition, general refuse will be generated
by the construction workforce at the work site, comprising food residues,
paper, used bottles and cans, packaging and broken furniture.
Small amounts of hazardous solid wastes will be generated such as excess

cement, vehicle tyres, paints, vehicle batteries, fluorescent light bulbs and
contaminated containers (eg empty paint tins), used lubricating and hydraulic
oils (from vehicles and machinery), filters: air and oil filters, batteries (mainly
lead-acid batteries).
Liquid wastes will include washout water from concrete mixing plant
maintenance and other washing operations such as cleaning of vehicles and
washdown from equipment.
Sewage and other wastewater will be generated by the sanitation facilities

provided for the construction workforce.
Operations
Operations will generate non-hazardous solid waste including metal, paper,
plastic, wood, glass. Waste from domestic activities will include organic and
food wastes, office waste from the administrative facilities, and sludge from
waste treatment. Industrial operations will generate metal scraps from
machinery and parts.
Hazardous solid wastes will include empty chemical containers, oily rags,
spent oil, sludge and oil from oil-water separators, used lubricating oils from
machinery and vehicles, and medical wastes.
Waste Management

6-183
During operations, the Project will operate waste management facilities for
wastes generated as part of port operations as well as wastes generated
offshore. Specifically the waste management facilities at the port will include:
waste collection, sorting and staging areas (including hazardous waste);

wastewater treatment plant; and
incinerator.
Drill Cuttings
One of the port tenants is expected to operated facilities to treat contaminated
drill cuttings, a specific kind of waste generated from offshore drilling
activities. Drill cuttings are the solid material removed from the drilling
activities offshore and comprise dirt and rock. In the course of drilling the
cuttings can also become contaminated with drilling fluids. Cuttings from oil
bearing layers can also contain oil. Drill cuttings are sometimes treated on the
drill rig through physical means followed by disposal to the sea once cuttings
are treated to permitted levels. Disposal of cuttings with oil contamination
does however pose risks to the environment and land-based treatment (which
is not available in many countries) is preferred in some situations.
The port’s facility would receive cuttings in drums or skips and treat them
through a thermal process to ‘desorb’ contaminants from the dirt and rock.
The treated cuttings are then handled as non-hazardous waste and disposed
in a landfill or in some cases mixed with building material such as cement.
Wastes from Ships

During operations, the port facilities would receive, handle and treat waste
from ship operations. This would include domestic waste generated by
workers operations such as general trash as well as wastes that could not be
treated and disposed at sea (as per MARPOL requirements) such as some
galley wastes, sewage, tank slops, and contaminated bilge water.
Non-hazardous solid waste and sewage would be handled through the port’s
operations systems. Slops and bilge water contaminated with oils would be
treated at the drill cuttings facility by incineration. Some amounts of liquid
wastes would be stored in the bulk storage facility pending treatment and
disposal.
Impact Assessment
Incorrect disposal of wastes could result in leaching and the contamination of

soil and water resources, which could have secondary impacts on local
community health, and restrict the use of the water obtained from these
sources. This potential contamination of surface water and ground water
resources and soils could also have negative impacts on ecosystem
functioning and also on human health for those using these resources.
The use of existing dumpsites could exacerbate existing environmental

problems at these sites, namely windblown litter, vermin and other disease

6-184
vectors as well as potential health impacts from the direct contact of
scavengers with the waste. In addition, there are nuisance impacts related to
the dust creation and impacts from the transport of rubble to disposal sites.
The scale of the potential impact of the incorrect disposal of wastes generated
during construction is regional, as the impacts of disposal would extend
beyond the Project site and immediate vicinity. The impacts are deemed to be
long-term as the impacts will be felt after the end of the construction phase.
The magnitude is therefore considered to be medium.
The sensitivity of the receptors is considered to be moderate.
The overall impacts of waste creation, handling and disposal are therefore
considered to be of moderate significance prior to mitigation.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation for impacts associated with waste are focussed on ensuring that
systems are planned and facilities designed, constructed and operated to high
standards.
The Project will prepare a comprehensive waste management plan for all
phases of the Project. The plan will consider the types and volumes of
waste that will be generated and will specify measures for handling,
treatment and disposal of all wastes.
Should a land fill be constructed it will be designed to industry best

standards for wastes generated at the site. This will include the
installation of natural or synthetic liners and management of surface
water to prevent overflow of the system.
The sewage treatment plant shall be designed to industry best practice

and will be designed in a way that reduces seepage to groundwater. The
facility will treat the waste water to standard suitable for discharge to the
marine environment or re-use on site.
A sewage outfall will be designed and constructed to industry best

practice to dispose of wastewater to the marine environment in such a
way as to protect the marine environment from contamination and
changes in sediment processes.
Storage of waste products on the Project site should only be permitted

within designated areas with hard standing so as to limit contamination
of soils and groundwater. These wastes should be disposed of at an
appropriately licensed facility.
All effluent discharge from terrestrial sources should meet IFC EHS
guideline limits and undertake monthly monitoring of effluent released,
with corrective actions implemented for non-compliance.

6-185
Effluent associated with vessel repair facilities and washdown areas
should be contained and treated to ensure no direct discharge into the
marine environment.
Residual Impacts
With the implementation of the mitigation measures, the likelihood of the

impact occurring and therefore impact significance would be reduced. The
residual impact is therefore considered to be minor.
Table 6.57 Impact Summary: Impacts due to Waste Management Activities

Significance
Impacts related to incorrect MODERATE NEGATIVE MINOR NEGATIVE
waste disposal
6.1.4 Vehicle Accidents
Impact Description
The presence of Project vehicles during construction and operations could

increase the risk of accidents along the roads outside for the Project site used.
Degradation and damage to regional and local roads from Project vehicles also
has the potential to increase the risk of accidents. The potential impacts of
vehicle accidents are discussed in this section (Figure 6.56).
Traffic volumes (consisting of 32t HDVs, saloon cars and other plant and
vehicles) will increase dramatically during the construction phase of the
Project in areas surrounding the Project site as well as those in the vicinity of
existing major transport routes. The roads expected to be affected during the
transport of construction material are the Tarkwa-Esiama road and the
Angona-Elubo road as well as the adjoining route to Atuabo (maximum 140
km route). During construction, approximately 62,500 trips between the site
of the rock source and the Project site are expected, an equivalent of
approximately 90 HDV trips per day. HDVs will also be used to transport the
equipment and building materials from Takoradi. The increase in heavy
traffic levels on roads will also increase the rate of road wear and could result
in damaged road surfaces, breaks in the paved surface (eg potholes, damage at
the road shoulders) which also increases the risks of road accidents. The
increased congestion, at intersections and near business centres could also
result in the increased risks of traffic accidents.
There are a number of communities located on these traffic routes, with

houses, businesses, schools, footpaths situated close and adjacent to the roads,
which will be used for heavy vehicle traffic. Apart from low levels of existing
vehicle traffic, people (including children) walk along these roads and

6-186
numerous livestock which are observed moving freely across the roads. There
are HDVs current using certain stretches of the road. The number of these
sensitive receptors so extremely close to the roads results in risks of vehicle
accidents, which could be compounded by the damaged roads such as
potholes. The vehicle accidents could be caused by collisions with other
vehicles, as well as collisions between vehicles and people or livestock.
Impact Likelihood
Given the steep increase in traffic around the site (especially during
construction) and the large numbers of sensitive receptors close to the roads,
traffic accidents are considered to be as possible.
Figure 6.56 Impact Diagram – Traffic Accidents
Impact Assessment
The spatial extent of the increase in traffic vehicle accidents is considered to be

regional as the impacts are experienced around the Project site and along the
construction routes which extend beyond the Project site. The temporal scale
of this impact could be expected to be long-term as it will be experienced
throughout the operation of the Project. The likelihood of the impact is
considered possible.
The magnitude of these negative, direct and indirect impacts are considered to
therefore be medium.
The existing traffic in the area is comprised of light truck and passenger
vehicles, pedestrians, animals and few heavy vehicles. The regional roads
(and sections of the haulage route) are tarred but are not necessarily designed
to handle the pressures of high traffic volumes. In addition, considering also
the density of settlements along the route and the proximity of community
activities and buildings to the roads, the sensitivity of impact is considered to
be high.

6-187
The significance of vehicle accident risks in the region prior to mitigation is
therefore considered to be major.
Mitigation Measures
In addition to the general mitigation measures identified for traffic impacts

(Section 6.5.16 and Section 6.5.17) should include the following:
All new drivers employed throughout the course of the Project’s operation
(including contractors for quarry transportation) will be required to
undergo training as required for the operational phase and as stipulated
by the TMP. Speed limits will be enforced for all Project vehicles.
The Project will implement a monitoring programme, whereby any road

degradation is reported to the relative authority promptly. The Project
will work closely with the local and regional governments to ensure that
poor road conditions such as these are addressed as quickly as possible.
The Project will work with the relevant local and regional government to
ensure the roads used by Project vehicles are well maintained, and that
potential problems or hazards are communicated to the relevant authority
timeously. Project planning and operations will be done in consultation
with the government.
The Project will commission a specific Traffic Impact Assessment (TIA)

study after the completion for the ESIA to further quantify the impacts of
the Project on the specific routes used for construction traffic. This study
will provide a baseline description of the status of the integrity of Project
transportation routes with respect to structural properties (load limits,
traffic volume limits), functionality (condition of road surface) and safety
(signage, markings, and potential public safety hazard areas). The TIA
will also identify additional mitigation measures required to reduce traffic
safety.
The Project will undertake sensitisation in the local communities

(including along the construction route), including appropriate warning
signs and notifications of the risks of traffic accidents.
Residual Impacts
The implementation of mitigation measures will assist to decrease the

magnitude of the impacts, but the residual significance of this negative impact
is therefore considered to remain be moderate.
Table 6.58 Impact Summary: Vehicle Accidents

Significance
Traffic accidents MAJOR NEGATIVE MODERATE NEGATIVE

6-188
6.2 CUMULATIVE IMPACTS
6.2.1 Defining Cumulative Impacts
In theory, any development such as the proposed Project may be taking place
at the same time as other developments, causing impacts affecting the same
resources or receptors, such that the impacts on these resources and receptors
from all potential development will be cumulative. The Performance
Standard provides a definition for cumulative impacts, as impacts that:
“result from the incremental impact, on areas or resources used or

directly impacted by the project, from other existing, planned or
reasonably defined developments at the time the risks and impacts
identification process is conducted.”
Cumulative impacts are generally considered to be impacts that act with

impacts from other projects such that:
the sum of the impacts is greater than the parts; or

the sum of the impacts reaches a threshold level such that the impact
becomes significant.
The types of cumulative impacts that may be relevance are detailed in Box 6.6
below.
Box 6.6 Types of Cumulative Impacts Relevant to the Project
Accumulative: the overall effect of different types of impacts at the same location. An example
would be fugitive dust emissions, construction noise and construction traffic all impacting the
three local communities as a nuisance/ disturbance.
Interactive: where two different types of impacts (which may not singly be important) react
with each other to create a new impact (that might be important) (eg water abstraction from a
watercourse might exacerbate the impacts caused by increased sediment loading).
Additive or In-combination: where impacts from the primary activity (ie the construction and
operation of the Project) are added to impacts from third party activities eg other major projects
in the vicinity of the Project which are already occurring, planned or may happen in the
foreseeable future).
Source: As adapted from ERM, 2006
In identifying cumulative impacts, the Performance Standard suggests that

“cumulative impacts are limited to those impacts generally recognised as important on
the basis of scientific concerns and/or concerns from Affected Communities”.
The approach taken in this ESIA process from the scoping phase onwards was
intended to be an integrated assessment of various impacts and facilitates the

6-189
identification of the first two types of cumulative impacts described, namely
‘accumulative’ and ‘interactive’ impacts (Box 6.6). Impact assessment
considered the overall cumulative impacts as part of the assessment
descriptions within Chapter 6, and therefore discussed no further in this
chapter. This section is therefore concerned with additive/in-combination
cumulative impacts, as defined by the Performance Standard.
6.2.2 Identifying of Relevant Development(s)
The proposed Project is a ‘greenfield’ development in that it will be located on

a site that has not been developed. It will also be located in an area where
there is limited other industrial activity. Cumulative impacts would thus not
be related to the Project impacts in addition to existing impacts. The focus of
the cumulative impact assessment is on the in-combination effects of the
Project with potential future development in the immediate area around the
Project site. How the cumulative impacts are assessed here depends on the
status of other Projects and the level of data available to characterise the
magnitude of the impacts.
Given the limited detail available regarding such future developments, the
assessment that follows is necessarily of a generic nature and focuses on key
issues and sensitivities for this Project and how these might be influenced by
cumulative impacts with other developments.
Relevant and significant developments were identified through searches of

relevant documents (ie regional planning documents) and consultations with
local and state authorities. The main development identified was a proposed
gas plant being advanced by the Ghana National Gas Company (GNGC). The
gas plant project is planned for a 2.5 ha (6.2 acres) portion of land to the
northeast of the Project site (Figure 1.1). The status of the gas plant
development in terms of design and government approvals is not fully known
however work has commenced on site and GNGC are advising that they
expect to be operational early 2013.
6.2.3 Cumulative Impact Assessment
Gas Plant Activities
Assessment of cumulative impacts assumes that gas plant will include

clearing of the site with site levelling to prepare for the construction of the
necessary facilities and buildings. The operational phase will likely to require
additional water, electricity for operation and some effluent, sewage and solid
wastes as well as air emissions will be produced. Suitable access roads may be
required.
The gas plant is assumed to operate to receive, treat, and purify natural gas
from offshore wells. The treated gas would be delivered to commercial and
industrial users via pipeline. In the gas plant, various gas contaminants are
removed and heavier hydrocarbons are captured for other uses. We are

6-190
assuming that the plant would deliver finished, high grade gas and not as an
intermediate product, although the impacts would not vary greatly. We also
assume that the plant will deliver gas under compression which will require
boosting with engine powered compressors. The size of the plant is unknown
so the discussion of emissions is necessarily general but based on professional
judgment and experience with on-shore gas plant in other parts of West
Africa.
Once further detailed information is available on the Regional and District

Plans for the industrial development plans for the area, it is recommended
that the Government authorities undertake further strategic level planning.
6.2.4 Cumulative Impacts of the Biophysical Environment - Terrestrial
Soils and Geology
The implementation of the Project will result in the removal of vegetation and
soil of a 514 ha area during the construction phase, changes in drainage
regime and increased erosion potential offsite and increased runoff and
siltation during construction, operation and decommissioning. The gas plant
will require clearing of a smaller portion of land and in the context of potential
further clearing for replacement agricultural land in the area, the cumulative
impacts on soils and geology is considered to be minor (with mitigation).
Surface Water and Groundwater Resources
The physical presence of the gas plant will cause only incremental effects to
surface water resources and drainage patterns. Water requirements for a gas
plant are not great and the plant will likely install a deep borehole to extract
water for routine use and presumably not for gas processing or for cooling.
Cumulative impacts on surface water and groundwater will be minor.
Terrestrial Biodiversity
The Project site as well as the surrounding area consists of secondary forest,
functional subsistence agriculture, seasonal wetland areas but limited natural
vegetation or habitat. Although the Project site is not considered an area of
high biodiversity status, faunal and floral species of ecological significance
were identified and further developments such as the gas plant will contribute
to the conversion of the land from natural/semi-natural to industrial use. This
will further reduce habitat and contribute to more habitat fragmentation.
A result of additional development around the Project area would be a

cumulative increase in the general level of disturbance to species that are
present in the terrestrial habitats surrounding the Project site. The main
sources of disturbance would include the habitat loss, increased noise levels,
visual intrusion from traffic or people, potentially increased levels of air
pollution and possibly an increase in hunting of certain species.

6-191
With the implementation of mitigation measures the cumulative impacts on
biodiversity are therefore considered to be minor.
Noise, Vibration and Light
The gas plant will likely be lit for safety reasons and this will add another
source of light to the area and in a location near communities especially
Anokyi and Asemdasuazo, which are closer to the gas plant site.
Gas plant process equipment will likely include large gas compressors which
generate a significant volume of noise from engines that power the systems
(presumably gas fuelled). The plant could have multiple compressors systems
operating 24 hours per day. The Project will not have similar equipment but
there will be various sources of stationary and mobile noise including the
engines at the power plant, vehicles and marine vessels. The cumulative
emissions of noise from the gas plant and the Project could cause ambient
noise levels to be raised above those that would be detectable (or even to those
regulated by the Government of Ghana and those specified in the
Performance Standard) and also cause a nuisance to local community
receptors.
Light and noise effects are of particular concern during the night, as sleep
disturbance among community members close to the fence lines could occur.
This in turn could lead to a rise in stress levels, depression and behavioural
problems as well as a further change in the sense of place.
The sensitive receptors to noise and light are within the three local
communities, and the cumulative impacts (after mitigation) are expected to be
moderate.
Air Quality
The combined effects of emissions and atmospheric pollutants of several

industrial developments (even when each is singly compliant with regulatory
limits or standards) could result in an elevation of ground level concentrations
of pollutants and have an impact on the health of workers, local communities
and habitats.
The gas plant would be reasonably expected to generate emissions of air

pollutants from operation of machinery and engines. Presumably power
systems will be fuelled by natural gas which has relatively lower levels of
pollutants emissions as compared to fuels such as diesel but emissions would
occur nonetheless. Some emissions to air would be expected from gas
processing as well but these also are limited as modern gas processing
systems are designed to minimise emissions to the air.
In addition to emissions from the gas plant, future developments would likely
result in an increase in traffic and vehicles movements during construction
and operations and thus vehicle-related emissions such as PM10 and NOx.

6-192
Dust would be generated in the construction phase in particular. The dust
produced during construction will not be additive, unless the scheduling of
the construction phases are concurrent, which is not expected.
In terms of human health, emissions are particularly a concern for impacts to

vulnerable people such members of the communities residing close to the
industrial activities, and especially people with health problems.
As with the proposed Project, the gas plant is not expected to generate high
levels of point source emissions. Assuming mitigation is effective the
cumulative impacts would be minor.
Landscape and Visual Quality
The proposed further industrialisation of the area would result in increased

visual impact to the same sensitive receptors over a similar geographical area.
There would be a concomitant landscape impacts as a result of further
buildings and equipment laydown areas, industrial facilities and equipment
and lighting installed for the gas plant. Any requirement for additional
housing related to the gas plant would also have an impact on the visual
character due to the additional buildings.
Although there are a number of sensitive receptors, the change in the sense of
place as a result of the port Project may reduce the sensitivity of receptors.
Significance of further changes to the landscape and visual impacts would be
less and cumulative impacts of further development would therefore be
minor.
6.2.5 Cumulative Impacts of the Biophysical Environment – Marine
Marine Water and Sediment Quality
The gas plant would be constructed some distance from the coastline and once
constructed direct physical interaction with the marine environment would
not generally occur. During construction, the supply pipeline would be
installed from the sea, across the beach, and to the plant. Pipelines are
typically installed by trenching and by laying the pipeline from a vessel, both
methods causing temporary disturbance effects to marine sediments and
intertidal areas. Apart from direct disturbance of marine sediments, the
cumulative marine impacts would be related to increased potential for
contamination as a result of onshore accidents and spills as well as additional
effluent released into the marine environment. Deterioration in marine water
quality could impact biodiversity, fisheries and local communities.
Contaminants within the water column are likely to settle out and accumulate
within the marine sediments, and negatively affect the benthic habitat and
fauna.

6-193
The magnitude of cumulative contamination due to spills and effluent is
expected to small and the negative cumulative impacts on marine water and
sediment quality to be minor.
6.2.6 Cumulative Impacts on the Socio-economic Environment
Employment and Income Stability
An increase in the number of people with jobs within the area and thus
earning wages and salaries would increase average household incomes and
levels of disposable income. This will increase local spending power, would
increase the demand for goods and services and attract further investment,
secondary businesses. This would also increase income stability in the area.
The significance of this positive cumulative impact is considered to be minor.
Governance and Service Delivery
Project tenants and other developments in the area will increase labour
requirements above those of the Project. This will enhance skills transfer in
the economy but the increased labour requirements could also draw public
sector employees into the private sector creating pressure on Government
institutions and the provision of essential services, infrastructure and utilities.
The significance of this cumulative impact is considered to be minor.
Inflation and Exacerbation of Economic Vulnerability
The larger population and worker presence both from the Project and other
possible developments in the Project area could increase the demand for
goods and services in the area. Although this has positive economic benefits
for secondary business development, this may exacerbate price increases for
accommodation and foods and other retail goods within the surrounding area
which could affect the vulnerable within the communities. In response to this,
however, there may be an increase in secondary businesses exploiting new
local markets by bringing in larger quantities of goods at lower prices. This is
expected to temper the inflationary action and reduce the minor impact over
the short term, to one of negligible significance.
Livelihoods and Ecosystem Services
The accelerated influx of people to the area as a result of developments in the

area will be associated increased pressure on land, resources and services; as
well as the potential for informal settlement and associated problems of
overcrowding and health impacts.
Mitigation will include working with local and regional development in

developing effective measures and procedures to encourage sustainable
resource management, spatial planning and land development as well as
efficient land administration by relevant authorities.

6-194
The cumulative impacts on ecosystem services and livelihoods after
mitigation are considered to be moderate.
Socio-cultural Impacts
The introduction of large scale developments in relatively remote and rural

environments can bring about substantial social change as a result of the large
numbers of contractors and job-seekers that move into the area. This rapid
pace of urbanisation results in increased vulnerability and susceptibility of
local communities to social pathologies. These could include drug and alcohol
abuse, increased incidence of sex workers, teenage pregnancies, and domestic
violence and other crimes.
In considering the cumulative impacts of the Project and the gas plant, these
are assessed to be of minor significance.
Community Health and Safety
Increase in traffic on local and national roads, air emissions as a result of the
Project and other potential developments as well as additional risks of
industrial accidents and explosions will result in cumulative impacts on
community health and safety. These increases put additional pressure on
existing infrastructure and pose risks to health and safety of general road
users, traders and of pedestrians (school children whose schools are also close
to the roads along transport routes). Increased traffic also increases levels of
noise and dust generated in the area.
The influx and the potential increase of social pathologies could result also in
the increase in the spread of diseases such as HIV/AIDS and diseases related
to the densification of settlement patterns and unhygienic living conditions
(eg water-borne diseases).
Appropriate maintenance of roads by relevant parties (projects and

government) and mitigation such as development of project health and safety
plans and support of government and NHO programmes would ensure that
the impacts would remain minor.

6-195
7 MITIGATION AND MANAGEMENT MEASURES
7.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides a summary of the mitigation and management

measures identified through the impact assessment process. Mitigation
measures have been identified where necessary to avoid, reduce, remediate or
compensate for negative impacts. In addition, actions are specified to ensure
or enhance positive benefits. These mitigation measures are in addition to
environmental and social protection technologies and controls embedded on
the Project design (Chapter 3).
This tables which follow specify the mitigation, monitoring and management
of environmental and social impacts that the Project will undertake during the
detailed design, site preparation, construction and operational phases of the
Project.
The table is organised as follows:
Resource/ receptor: the environmental or social component that would be

impacted (eg human health, marine water quality and terrestrial fauna).
Desired outcome: the objectives of the specified mitigation measures.
Description of mitigation action: the specific action that the Project will
undertake.
Performance indicator: the standard to be met (eg Ghanaian emission

limits).
Documentation and monitoring: description of the activities that will be

undertaken to ensure that mitigations are implemented and/or are
effective and specification of corrective action and documentation.
Timing and frequency: the phase of the Project and frequency which the
specification applies.
Responsibility: the functional level of accountability for implementing the

mitigation action.

7-1
Table 7.1 Design Phase: Environmental and Social Management Measures
Ref Resource/ Desired Description of mitigation Performance Documentation Timing/ Responsibility

# Receptor Outcome Indicator and Monitoring Frequency
1.1 Impacts on Soil Prevent • Develop and implement a site drainage plan to reduce Performance Site drainage plan Developed Lonrho
destruction of runoff across the site and minimise erosion Standard during the design Contractor
soil resources Three phase and
and increased implemented
soil erosion throughout the
project lifecycle
1.2.1 Impacts on Minimise Ensure that Project water use considers technologies Performance Groundwater Once-off and EHS co-ordinator,
Groundwater water use and operational controls to minimise water use and Standard Management annual review Contractor
Resources abstraction (eg low-flow devices). Three Plan
1.2.2 Impacts on Protection of Undertake a comprehensive study of groundwater World Health Review Monthly EHS co-ordinator,
Groundwater groundwater resources to inform the final design of water supply Guidelines, Groundwater Contractor
Resources resources and systems. Performance survey and
provision of Standard ensure
potable water Implement alternative measures to supplement the Three recommendations
potable water use requirements of Lonrho and local are implemented,
communities, if necessary. Water quality
monitoring
results
1.3 Impacts on Protect soil and Develop a site drainage and storm water management Performance Site drainage and Developed Lonrho,
Surface Water water plan for all phases of the Project. Standard storm water during the design Contractor
resources Three management plan phase and
implemented
throughout the
project lifecycle.
1.4 Impacts on Air Reduce dust Design the incineration plant in accordance with Ghanaian Approved design Prior to Lonrho,
Quality emissions, emission limits set out in the European Waste EPA, WHO specifications/ Construction of Contractor
degradation in Incineration Directive (WID), as cited by the EHS Air Quality plans the individual
air quality and Guidelines: Environmental Air Emissions and Ambient standards, specific facilities
contribution to Air Quality. Performance
Greenhouse Design electricity generation and waste incineration Standard
gases plants to ensure that air quality standards are not Three
European
exceeded. Waste
Incineration
Directive
(WID)
EHS
Guidelines:
Environmenta
l Air
Emissions and
Ambient Air
Quality
1.5 Noise and Reduce noise Refine the design of site layout to limit noisy activities Ghanaian Traffic Prior to Lonrho,
Vibration and vibration close to sensitive receptors. EPA, Management construction Contractor
Impacts levels around Select lowest noise producing equipment and Performance Plan, Noise
sensitive construction and operation methods. Standards monitoring
receptors Use alternatives to diesel/petrol engines where feasible results, Site
and reasonable layout and
Buildings housing noisy equipment will be designed building design
appropriately.
Design a noise monitoring programme, to ensure that
noise levels remain below relevant limits at local
receptors, with corrective actions..
1.6 Impacts on Limit increases Undertake a Traffic Impact Assessment (TIA) for the Performance Traffic Prior to Lonrho,
Traffic in traffic flows construction phase traffic. Standard Four Management construction Contractor
and Based on these results, design and implement a traffic Grievance Plan
degradation to management plan, including any road maintenance mechanism Minutes of
local roads activities (in cooperation with local and regional interactions with
government). government
representatives
1.7 Impacts on Reduce Design construction work schedule to limit work at Performance Construction Prior to Lonrho,
Visual changes to night. Standard planning and construction Contractor
Character visual Design site lighting to minimise light spill to adjacent Eight design
character of the areas. Grievance documentation
region mechanism
1.8 Marine Water Minimise Design construction schedule to ensure that the Ghanaian Construction Prior to Lonrho,
Quality Impact impacts to breakwater and groyne are started before commencing Marine schedule, construction Contractor
water quality dredging activities. Quality Water Results of
by minimising Model potential dredging plume to confirm dredging Standards, dredging plume
turbidity and disposal location. Performance modelling,
potential Develop a site drainage and storm water management Standard Storm water
contamination. plan for all phases of the Project. Three management plan
1.9.1 Marine Minimise Design construction schedule to ensure that the Ghanaian Construction Prior to Lonrho/
Sediment marine breakwater and groyne are started before commencing Marine Schedule construction dredging
Quality sediment dredging activities. Quality Water contractor
contamination Standards,
Performance
Standard
Three
1.9.2 Marine Ensure Conduct survey with grab sampling to confirm dredge EPA or Ghana Dredge disposal Prior to Lonrho/
Sediment responsible disposal site location, sited out of ecologically sensitive maritime permit construction dredging
Quality disposal of areas and spawning areas. Authority contractor
dredging Liaise with EPA and local fishers to obtain necessary (GMA),
material permits for the disposal dredge disposal site. Performance
Standard
Three
1.10 Impacts on Ensure Compile a procedure for dealing with nesting turtles Performance Turtle Prior to Lonrho,
Turtles minimal identified within the Project area during construction Standard Six Management construction Lonrho/ EHS co-
impacts on activities including involving a specialist ecologist and Plan ordinator
turtles through removal of hatchlings or eggs. Copies of
minimising Liaise with local NGOs in promoting education in local correspondence
habitat communities on the importance of turtles. Meeting Minutes
disturbance
and decreasing
risk of
predation
1.11 Loss of Minimise the Undertake livelihood study and livelihood Restoration Awulae LRP Prior to Lonrho
Farming, Agro- effects of the Plan (LRP) that provides alternative livelihood and Relevant construction
processing and loss of land compensation options, including investment options Authorities
Grazing Land: and livelihoods (cash compensation as a secondary option). Performance
Investigate acquiring alternative agricultural and Standard Five
grazing land, and to be guided by the Awulae and
Livelihood Restoration Sub Committee tasked with
identifying alternative farmlands and other relevant
authorities.
1.12 Broader land Sustainable Participate in the development of a sustainable land use Relevant Minutes of any Prior to Lonrho
use planning land use and settlement plan for the area by any local/ district planning meetings construction
planning government authorities. policies,
Performance
Standard Five
1.13 Loss of access to Minimise Limit exclusion zones around Project infrastructure as Relevant LRP, Prior to Lonrho
fishing areas disturbance of far as possible. planning Minutes of any construction
and related fishing areas Undertake livelihood study and livelihood Restoration policies, meetings
resources Plan (LRP) that provides a choice of compensation Performance
Provide options, including investment options (cash Standard Five
compensation compensation as a secondary option).
and/ or access Ensure that alternative livelihoods options are explored
to alternative in a participatory manner.
livelihoods Consider assistance with relocation of fishers, if found
to be necessary.
Explore development of small-scale commercial fish
farming, with extension programmes and the
establishment of appropriately constituted community
companies, if found to be necessary.
Assist in improving levels of mechanisation to allow
fishers to access fishing areas further from shore , if
found to be necessary and appropriate.
1.14 Decreased Manage Collaborate with traditional authorities, regional SDF SDF Prior to Lonrho
availability of impacts on government and planning authorities in the Current Joint stakeholder construction
land for natural formulation and implementation of an inclusive Spatial regional forum minutes,
settlement resources Development Framework (SDF) for the broader area planning Minutes of any
around the Project. policies, meetings
Initiate the establishment of a capacity building and Performance
institutional strengthening programme within the three Standard
local communities. Three
Provide technical support to the relevant government
bodies, where possible, and promote the
implementation of joint planning approaches with
government and other key stakeholders for
strategically important agricultural and housing
Projects.
Assist traditional authorities and government with the
identification and demarcation of transitional zones for
settlement, business and informal trading within the
three communities.
Promote/support the establishment of a joint
stakeholder forum for the broader Project area.
1.15 Reduced Access Ensure Implement mitigation measures referred to in 1.11, 1.13 Social Social Prior to Lonrho
to / Increased minimum loss and 1.14 . Development Development construction, District
Competition for of Flora and Ensure communities participate in pre-construction Plan Plan Construction and Government
Flora and Fauna Fauna harvesting of resources as part of clearing activities. Stakeholder Tenants’ operational phase
Identify optimal methods of storing harvested engagement contractual
materials. strategies obligations
Consider partnering with district government and Stakeholder
communities in establishing nurseries to replace lost engagement
resources and to harvest and re-plant species of local strategies
significance.
Implement fish farming activities.
Develop codes of conduct for Project contractors and
employees regarding the exploitation of natural
resources and include into contractual documentation
for all contractors.
Include information and awareness programmes on
conservation and sustainable harvesting of natural
resources into stakeholder engagement strategies.
Work closely with local government in planning
settlement development to limit informal and
unmanaged settlement.
Promote environmentally and socially sound land use
practices within the Project.
1.16 Unplanned and Minimise the Undertake a Quantitative Risk Assessment (QRA) to Performance QRA to Prior to Bulk Fuel Tenants
accidental likelihood of quantitatively assess the explosion and fire risks Standard Four determine construction / Lonrho
events: an explosion associated with the bulk storage facility and location of tanks
Explosions infrastructure. farms,
Use QRA results to refine the location of the tank farm Final site plans
in location to the neighbouring communities.
1.17 Cumulative Minimise the Lonrho to participate any strategic level planning Regional Regional Design Phase Lonrho,
Impacts cumulative efforts by the local and regional government Planning Planning Ghanaian
effects of the authorities. Frameworks Framework Government
Project with Appropriate maintenance of roads by relevant parties and documents,
potential (projects and government) and mitigation such as Regulations Minutes of
future development of project health and safety plans and Meetings
development support of government and NHO programmes must be
in the vicinity developed.
of the Project Work with local and regional development bodies to
site encourage sustainable resource management, spatial
planning and land development as well as efficient
land administration by relevant authorities.
Table 7.2 Site Preparation and Construction: Environmental and Social Management Measures
Ref # Resource/ Desired Description of mitigation Performance Documentation Timing/ Responsibility

Receptor Outcome Indicator and Monitoring Frequency
2.1.1 Impacts on soil Prevent Rehabilitate and revegetate cleared areas on site that Performance Monitoring ASAP after site EHS Coordinator,
destruction of will not be developed further. Standard associated with clearance or Onshore
soil resources Three site drainage plan construction Contractor
and increased
soil erosion
after site
clearance
2.1.2 Impacts on soil Prevent loss of Remove and stockpile topsoil for later use. Store, shape Performance Visual inspection Daily Contractor,
soil resources (eg less than 4m high and side slope of < 3:1) and Standard and photographic Lonrho
and increased situate the stockpiles in an appropriate manner so as Three record
soil erosion not to interfere any watercourse.
during site Restrict preparation and clearing activities and vehicles
clearing using the site to demarcated construction and work
activities areas respectively.
2.1.3 Impacts on soil Prevent Implement site drainage plan including monitoring of Performance Monitoring Continuous Lonrho,
destruction of over land run-off and sedimentation in watercourses Standard associated with Contractor
soil resources and the effectiveness of erosion control measures (ie Three site drainage plan
and increased netting, sand bags etc).
soil erosion
2.2.1 Impacts on Minimise Implement Spill Response Plan developed during the Performance Spill Response Continuous Lonrho,
Groundwater water use design phase. Standard Plan Contractor
Resources Three
2.2.2 Impacts on Prevent Develop and implement a groundwater monitoring Performance Monitoring Continuous Lonrho,
Groundwater deterioration of programme to evaluate groundwater conditions and Standard documentation Contractor
Resources water quality water quality, with corrective actions. Monitor Three
groundwater near the harbour as well as in the
communities and both the sand and limestone aquifers.
2.3.1 Impacts on Minimising Implement the site drainage and storm water Performance Site drainage and Continuous Lonrho,
Surface Water changes in management plan developed during the design phase Standard storm water Contractor
local drainage (refer to 1.3 above). Three management plan
patterns and
the disturbance
of Surface
Water Bodies
2.3.2 Impacts on Prevent Implement best practice erosion and sediment control Performance Visual inspection Daily Lonrho,
Surface Water siltation during measures during construction (eg silt traps and Standard and photographic Contractor
construction controlling site drainage). Three record
activities
2.4 Impacts on Minimise Minimise vegetation clearance area. Ghanaian Visual inspection Daily Lonrho,
Terrestrial habitat loss, Clearly demarcate work areas and avoid working EPA, and photographic Contractor
Flora and potential soil/ outside of these areas. Performance record
Habitats water Rehabilitate and revegetate areas cleared for temporary Standard
contamination facilities that will not be developed further using locally Three
and sourced indigenous plants.
disturbance of Plan clearing such that it retains habitat corridors for
fauna areas where disruption will cause the likely
fragmentation of species habitats.
2.5.1 Impacts on Minimise Staff induction including awareness on the impacts Ghanaian Meeting minutes, During induction Lonrho,
Terrestrial disturbance caused to fauna during construction activities. EPA, Attendance lists. and on a regular Contractor
Fauna and potential Develop an anti-poaching policy and communicate this Performance basis in staff
mortality of to staff. Standard Six meetings.
local faunal Provide all drivers with training on the ecological
species sensitivities and driving techniques required to
minimise disturbance to fauna, which may be nocturnal
or have specific migratory routes during the day.
Establish and enforce appropriate speed limits on site.
2.5.2 Impacts on Reduce noise Ensure that all vehicles and machinery used on site are Ghanaian Noise monitoring Weekly Lonrho,
Terrestrial nuisance at fitted with appropriate noise reducing devices, where EPA, at sensitive Contractor.
Fauna sensitive feasible and appropriate. Performance receptors
receptors Standards Six
2.6 Impacts to Maintaining Implement mitigation measures for surface water Against Results from fish Continuous EHS co-ordinator
Freshwater the suitability management. mitigation monitoring Bi-monthly
Fish of nearby Develop and implement a fish monitoring programme, measures programme. monitoring
habitats for with corrective action, in freshwater bodies identified
freshwater fish offsite (north of Asemdasuazo) to evaluate the
effectiveness of the mitigation measures described
above.
2.7 Impacts on Air Reduce dust Maintain and operate equipment and engines in Ghanaian Photographic During Lonrho
Quality emissions, accordance with design specifications and prevent the EPA and evidence construction Onshore
degradation in use of out-dated, poorly operated equipment. WHO Air Contractor
air quality and Select project equipment taking energy efficiency into Quality Equipment
contribution to account. Standards design plans
Greenhouse Monitor GHG emissions and implement a programme
gases for identifying and implementing GHG reduction GHG emissions
actions. programme
Monitor dust emissions from onsite offsite sources.
Implement a programme to control dust emissions if Results of dust
necessary. monitoring
programme
2.8 Noise Impacts Reduce noise Maintain and operate equipment and engines in Ghanaian Results of noise Continuous Lonrho
levels around accordance with design specifications in terms of noise EPA, monitoring Onshore
sensitive rating. Performance Contractor
receptors Operate equipment with original noise baffling Standards Equipment Offshore
systems. Four and Six design plans contractor
Schedule construction activities (including vehicle
movements) for local daylight hours and limit noisy Work schedule
activities outside of these hours.
Do not conduct activities that generate high levels of Records from
noise at night. grievance
Plan and schedule construction activities in consultation mechanism
with local communities and taking into account
important social activities (eg religious ceremonies and
festivals). Communicate work schedules to interested
and affected parties.
Undertake on-going noise monitoring and consultation
with local communities to determine whether
additional noise reduction measures or operational
controls are necessary.
2.9 Traffic Impacts Limit increases Undertake a TIA which identifies appropriate HSE Performance Traffic Continuous Lonrho
in traffic flows measures to minimise risks to local people and fauna. Standard Four Management Contractor
along narrow sections of regional roads Plan
Drivers will undergo training on local road rules and
hazards and comply with other measures suggested by
the Traffic management plan.
Ensure roadside communities are aware of increased
traffic levels and the associated risks.
2.10 Impacts on Reduce During vegetation clearing, retain sections of existing Performance Visual inspection During site Lonrho
Visual changes to vegetation to act as screening. Standard and photographic preparation and Contractor
Character visual Minimise vegetation clearance. Eight record construction
character of the Avoid clearing sections of the site that are not expected
region to be developed in the operational phase of the Project.
Reduce light spill by using direction covers on lights.
Reduce need for light by limiting work at night.
2.11 Impacts on Minimise Minimise vegetation clearance and re-vegetate cleared Performance Visual inspection During Lonrho,
marine water degradation of areas as soon as possible. Standard and photographic construction Contractor
quality marine water Use silt traps for runoff from terrestrial construction Three, records, phase
quality activities. MARPOL Vessel effluent
Minimise the extent of the area dredged. 73/78 inspection
Ensure high performance of dredge spoil dewatering Convention records
system.
Minimise turbidity plume, especially near marine
habitats in the vicinity of the dredging operations.
Dredging vessels will comply with the MARPOL 73/78
Convention.
2.12 Impact on Minimise Lonrho (and their contractors) will adhere to dredging EPA or the Dredge Disposal During Lonrho,
marine disturbance of best practice as described in 2.11 above (marine water Ghana Permit construction Contractor
sediment marine quality impact). maritime phase
sediment Dredging activities to be carried out in line with the Authority
conditions of the dredge disposal permit. (GMA)
marine
pollution
regulations,
Performance
Standard
Three
2.13 Underwater Minimise Begin noisy activities (including piling) slowly, Ghanaian and Noise monitoring Continuous Lonrho,
Noise underwater ramping up the noise over a period of time. WHO noise results at Contractor
noise levels Ensure careful equipment choice and limit the amount limits sensitive
of time it takes to carry out noisy activities. receptors
Vessels will be powered down to safe operational levels
and switched off where possible while in berths or
moored in the terminal area.
2.14 Impacts on Minimise Mitigation measures include those listed for sections Performance Results of effluent During Lonrho,
marine disturbance of outlining the potential impacts on marine water quality Standard Six monitoring construction Contractor
mammals marine (see 2.11) and underwater noise (see 2.13) results phase
mammals Develop and implement a system for spotting marine
mammals while at undertaking marine work. Avoid Results of marine
collisions or disturbance of marine mammals (while mammal
maintaining safe operation of the vessel). monitoring
Develop and implement a programme for monitoring programmes and
and recording sightings of any injured or dead marine records.
mammals. Report this information to the appropriate
organisation, local communities and government
authority.
2.15 Impacts on Ensure Prior to and during construction undertake daily Performance Turtle During Lonrho,
Turtles minimal inspections of the work area. If a nest is identified, a Standards Management construction Contractor
impacts on marine ecologist needs to be consulted. Plan, phase (daily)
turtles through Lighting infrastructure positioned near the beach will Record of
minimising be fitted with directional covers and where possible correspondence/
habitat Meeting Minutes
disturbance feasible sodium lamps.
and decreasing Restore any temporary redistribution of the beach upon Visual inspection
risk of completion of construction activities. and photographic
predation Lonrho will support local NGOs in their efforts to records
promote education on the importance of turtles.
2.16.1 Impacts on Minimise Ensure effective terrestrial and marine waste water Performance Fish catch survey During Contractor
marine fish physical management during construction. Standard Six and monitoring construction
disturbances to Reduce underwater noise (see 2.13). results
fish Ensure dredging activities are efficient and limited to
the smallest practical area.
Determine levels of contamination in fish through fish
catch surveys and monitoring.
2.16.2 Impacts on Minimise All construction and dredging vessels entering the IMO Ballast Water During Contractor
marine fish potential terminal areas will have an on-board ballast water requirements, Management construction
contamination management plan. Guidelines for Plan
impacts to fish No release of ballast water will be permitted in the port. the Control
and
Management
of Ships
Ballast Water,
Performance
Standard Six
2.16.3 Impacts on Minimise Implement a programme to monitor marine fish catch Performance Examine results Continuous EHS Coordinator
marine fish potential in the vicinity of the port. Standard Six from the marine
contamination Work with the Fisheries Commission to ensure fish monitoring
impacts to fish protection of fish resources. programme.
2.17 Impacts on Minimise Dredging dump sites will be authorised and as similar EPA/GMA/ Dredging Permit During Lonrho, EHS
Benthos and disturbance as possible to original substrate. Marine Construction Coordinator
Intertidal and impacts of Dredging methods will follow international best Pollution Act,
Fauna alien invasion practice, as described in 2.11. Performance
on benthos and Ballast water will not be permitted to be released into Standard 6
intertidal fauna Port waters, and will be pumped ashore into a shore-
based facility.
Mitigations in 2.11 (Marine water quality impact).
Lonrho will support local NGOs to promote public
awareness of government regulations regarding the
collection of intertidal organisms.
2.18.1 Impacts on the Maximise Make taxation payments in a transparent, accurate and Ghana Financial At intervals Lonrho
National and benefits of timely manner. taxation law reporting required by
Regional increased Ghanaian law
Economy: government
Increased revenue
Government
Revenue
2.18.2 Impacts on the Maximise local Disseminate information regarding procurement Alternative Alternative During Lonrho,
National and procurement opportunities and requirements as early as possible. livelihoods livelihoods construction and Contractors
Regional Provide quality standards required by the Project for programme programme operation
Economy: provision of goods and services to the Project. or Existing or Existing
Economic Support the development of a supplier training government government
Development programme. initiatives initiatives/progra
and Encourage unbundling of certain contracts by its mmes
Diversification selected D&B contractors.
of Economy Identify and implement livelihood replacement Projects
that fit with the National agenda for diversified but
sustainable economic development.
2.18.3 Impacts on the Maximise Same as mitigation measures described in 2.18.2 Ghana’s Local Recruitment and During Lonrho,
National and business (Economic Development and Diversification of Content training construction and Contractor
Regional experience, Economy) Policy programme operation
Economy: training and
Increased skills Training records
Business opportunities
Experience,
Training and
Skills
2.19.1 Economic and Minimise the Implement mitigation measures within the LRP. LRP LRP During Lonrho
Physical impacts on Participate (in conjunction with local/district recommendations construction
Displacement: land users. government and relevant planning authorities and .
Loss of traditional authorities) in the development of a
Farming, Agro- sustainable land use and settlement plan for the area.
processing and
Grazing Land:
2.19.2 Economic and Minimise the Implement and monitor codes of conduct for Project Lonrho’s Tenants’ Construction and Lonrho
Physical reduced access contractors and employees regarding the exploitation internal contractual operational phase District
Displacement: to / Increased of natural resources. policies obligations Government
Reduced Competition Encourage programmes on conservation and
Access to / for Flora and sustainable harvesting of natural resources through SEP
Increased Fauna stakeholder engagement strategies.
Competition
for Flora and
Fauna
2.20.1 Impacts on Optimise Maximise local employment where possible. This will Performance Contractors’ Before Lonrho and sub-
Livelihoods: Project related be written into the contractors’ contracts and made Standard Two contract , construction contractor, HR
Employment employment binding. Skills audit , Biannual audits Over the lifespan
Creation benefits Over the life of the Project, a recruitment principle of Register of casual of the Project
hiring first from the directly affected area and employees,
neighbouring communities, then Ghana, will be Audits of
applied. recruitment
Undertake a skills audit of the towns and surrounding agencies
communities.
Assist in the development of a Community Based
Manpower Agency that focuses developing the skills of
people from the area to match the potential
requirements of the port users and offer their services
in a sustainable manner and develops a database of
casual labour for the Project.
Employment opportunities and associated skills
requirements to be well advertised locally and a
recruitment centre to be easily accessible to the local
population.
Advertising of job opportunities to be done in a timely
manner.
Ensure that there is no requirement for applicants to
make payments when applying for, employment on the
Project. If payment to a recruitment agency is
necessary, the employer and not employee must cover
this.
2.20.2 Impacts on Skills Identify training possibilities and develop training Performance Training plans Construction and Lonrho- HR
Livelihoods: development plans as early as possible. Standard Two Certificate of operational phase Over the lifespan
Employment and training Appropriate local candidates identified during , Ghanaian employment of the Project
Creation construction to be trained and employed during Local Content Alternative
operations. Legislation Livelihoods
Offer certificates of employment to each employee at Development
the conclusion of successful employment on the Project.
2.20.3 Impacts on Reduce Focussing social investment and some local economic Performance Construction and Lonrho
Livelihoods: vulnerability to development activities towards the most vulnerable Standard Two operational phase
Impact on impacts on groups.
Prices and inflation On-going dialogue with representatives of vulnerable
Exacerbation of groups through a stakeholder forum.
Economic
Vulnerability
2.20.4 Impacts on Reduce Commit to the principles of sound corporate Performance Livelihood Construction and Lonrho- HR
Livelihoods: disruption to governance, responsible corporate citizenship, and Standard Restoration operational phase Lonrho- OHS
Changes to local transparent business interactions with affected Two, Programme(LRP) Manager
Livelihood livelihoods communities. Livelihood ,
Strategies Compensate those whose livelihoods are directly Restoration Skills survey,
affected by the Project through the LRP. Programme Visual and
Implement skills development and training (LRP) photographic
programmes for Project employees. records,
Support the undertaking of a skills survey in local HIV/AIDS
communities. Develop a localisation plan for programme,
succession employment during construction and more Grievance
specifically during operations. mechanism
Support sustainable livelihood practices, where record
possible and practical, in line with the LRP.
Support and/or develop information and awareness
programmes related to economic entrepreneurialism
and small business development within the local
communities.
Support social welfare programmes and special
Projects that focus on vulnerable groups.
Develop and implement an HIV/AIDS programme for
contractors, employees and local villagers.
Make condoms easily available to all contractors and
employees and work with local health services to
ensure condoms are accessible in the communities.
2.20.5 Impacts on Maximise local Maximise local recruitment and training. Ghanaian Training plans Throughout Lonrho- HR
Livelihoods: employment Implement mitigation measures in 2.20.2 (employment Local Content Certificates of construction Over the lifespan
Increased creation) above. Legislation, employment of the Project
potential for Performance Alternative
income Standard Two Livelihoods
stability Development
2.21 Impact on Manage the Implement planned settlement of construction Land Use/ Land Use/ Construction and Lonrho
Social growth of contractors and employees within the Project footprint Spatial Spatial operational phase Lonrho - HSE
Infrastructure, Informal during construction. Development Development
Governance Settlements Support District Planning Co-ordination Unit, Land Plan Plan
and Service Commission and other relevant district and traditional
Delivery: authorities to prepare a Land Use/ Spatial
Growth of Development Plan.
Informal Ensure community awareness and safety in terms of
Settlements Project operational areas, hazardous areas and future
development areas.
Operations will be securely fenced and policed to
discourage informal settlement on its premises.
Prohibit informal recruitment at the Project gate.
2.22.1 Socio-Cultural Minimise the Manage the location of contractor accommodation. LRP Stakeholder Construction and Lonrho
Impacts: negative Pursue a proactive Stakeholder Engagement Engagement operational phase
Changed Sense impacts of a Programme with guidance from the SEP. Programme
of Place changed sense Through the LRP, identify ways in which alternative LRP
of place and livelihood opportunities may feed into existing culture
ensure that and sense of place.
people Where opportunities exist to maximise the benefits of
(vulnerable changed sense of place, consider these as part of a
groups in social development plan.
particular) are Work closely with local health services in monitoring
not left worse changes in levels of community health and wellbeing.
off
2.22.2 Socio-Cultural Minimise Develop and implement induction programmes, Performance Code of Conduct Throughout Lonrho
Impacts: impacts of a including a Code of Conduct, for all employees, Standard Two Grievance construction
Changes to new workforce including contractors. mechanism
Cultural and on community Work closely with local health services and HIV/AIDS record
Social Norms health and structures in monitoring changes in levels of
wellbeing community health and wellbeing.
during Implement a grievance procedure and continued
construction engagement with local communities as guided by the
SEP.
2.22.3 Socio-Cultural Minimise Develop and implement induction programmes, Performance Grievance Throughout Lonrho
Impacts: impacts of a including a Code of Conduct and cultural awareness Standard Two mechanism construction
Increase in new workforce programme. record
Social on community Include the Code of Conduct in contractual agreements
Pathologies wellbeing. with tenants.
Develop a Community Health Safety and Security
Management Plan.
Implement a Project HIV/AIDS programme.
Make condoms freely available to all contractors and
employees and partner with local government health
services and NGO’s to ensure the accessibility of
condoms in the communities.
Work closely with local health services and HIV/AIDS
structures in monitoring changes in levels of
community health and wellbeing.
Provide a range of sport and recreational facilities for
employees.
2.22.4 Socio-Cultural Minimise Partner with District planning schemes to encourage Performance Grievance Throughout Lonrho
Impacts: unmet settlement planning and development. Standard mechanism construction
Tension and expectations Any Project and government actions regarding spatial Two, record
Conflict and associated development framework planning will involve on- Ghanaian
between Towns tensions going consultations with local communities at Local Content
(and possibly grassroots level. Legislation
Districts) Ensure that all affected towns receive equal access to
opportunities.
Establish a local information office and appoint a
permanent community liaison officer accessible to all
local communities.
Ensure transparent and equitable distribution of job
opportunities.
Establish a site-based grievance/complaints office.
When considering employment opportunities that
cannot be filled from the local area include
neighbouring communities, with appropriate skills.
2.22.5 Socio-Cultural Strive to ensure Communicate the skills and experience requirements Performance Stakeholder During Lonrho
Impacts: realistic for the Project in a transparent, timely and accessible Standard Two Engagement Construction and
Unmet expectations manner. Programme Operational
Expectations about Where possible institute pre-construction training to Phase
Resulting in employment empower local residents to meet Project employment
Community and general standards.
Anger and Project benefits Communicate pre-employment and internal training
Resentment efforts at the Project in a transparent, timely and
towards the accessible manner.
Project Highlight achievements or milestones in local
employment wherever possible.
Identify skills requirements for construction and
operation, and related timescales for appropriate
training.
Identify local capacity to meet Project requirements
through a skills audit and audit conducted in the Study
Area towns.
Implement mitigation measures as set out in 2.20.2.
2.23.1 Unplanned and Minimise the Confine storage and use of fuels and lubricants to WHO Visual inspection During Operation Lonrho/ EHS
accidental potential of bunded areas. Standards, and photographic Coordinator
events: Spills soil, surface All chemical storage areas will have impermeable Performance record,
and accidents water and bases. Standard Spill Response
groundwater The bunded areas will have outflow pipes. Three Plan
contamination Bunds will be regularly checked for any blockages of Storm water
these outflow pipes. management
A detailed spill response plan appropriate for all plan,
phases of the Project needs to be developed. Ground and
Any spills to ground will be remediated immediately surface water
by an appropriately qualified person and post Monitoring
remediation verification carried out. Programme
Develop and implement a storm water management
plan.
Ensure that proper drainage systems (including oil-
water separators) are in place and maintained.
Ensure sufficient silt traps are installed on the Project
site.
Refuelling of equipment and vehicles will be carried
out in designated areas on hard standing ground, or
use appropriate spill protection measures.
Collection systems will be installed in the refuelling
areas. Fuels will be collected and either reused, treated
by incineration or removed by a local contractor
Develop and implement a ground and surface water
monitoring programme.
Drip trays must be used when servicing vehicles or
equipment that could result in spillage of hydrocarbon
products.
All effluent water from construction activities will be
disposed of in a constructed storm water system with
fitted oil silt traps.
2.23.2 Unplanned and Ensure Develop a waste inventory. Industry Best Waste inventory, During Lonrho, EHS
accidental responsible A Waste Management Plan will be developed and Standards, Waste Construction, Coordinator
events: Waste waste disposal implemented. Performance Management Monthly
and minimise If a land fill is constructed it will be designed to Standard Plan monitoring of
potential industry best standards for wastes generated at the site. Three effluent released
contamination The incinerator built on site will be built according to
international best practice standards.
The sewage treatment plant shall be designed to
industry best practice.
A sewage outfall will be designed and constructed to
industry best practice.
The onsite accommodation, waste management
facilities and roads must be paved/compacted.
Storage of waste products on the Project site will only
be permitted within designated areas with hard
standing.
Wastes will only be disposed of at an appropriately
licenced facility.
All effluent discharge from terrestrial sources will meet
IFC EHS guideline limits.
Effluent associated with vessel repair facilities and
washdown areas will be contained.
Table 7.3 Operational Phase: Environmental and Social Management Measures

3.1 Impacts on Prevent Implement the groundwater monitoring programme Performance Ensure that Continuous EHS co-ordinator
Groundwater deterioration of developed during the construction phase (Refer to in Standard measures
Resources water quality 2.2.1 above). Three identified in site
groundwater
monitoring
programme are
implemented.
3.2 Impacts on Protection of Implement the site drainage and storm water WHO Implementation Continuous EHS co-ordinator
Surface Water soil and water management plan developed during the design phase. Guidelines, of site drainage
resources Capture and treat contaminated stormwater (eg has Performance and storm water
come in contact with industrial areas, equipment, Standard management plan
highly silted areas) so that it meets applicable Three
regulatory standards prior to discharge. Test quality of
contaminated
stormwater prior
to discharge and
review results.
3.3 Impacts on Minimise Same as mitigation measures described in 2.3.1 and Performance Ensure that Daily EHS Coordinator,
Terrestrial Flora disturbance of 2.3.2. Standard measures Lonrho contractor
and Habitats fauna Three identified in site
drainage and
storm water
management plan
are implemented.
Visual inspection
and photographic
record
3.4.1 Impacts on Minimise Ensure that flight paths and flight schedules are Performance Ensure that such Bi-annually EHS co-ordinator
Avian Fauna strikes on bird coordinated (in an Aircraft Control Plan) with input Standard Six considerations
species that from an appropriately qualified ornithologist/ecologist have been taken
inhabit the area to reduce impacts on local avian fauna. into account
when reviewing
flight paths and
schedules.
3.4.2 Impacts on Minimise Employ the following measures to reduce the impact of Performance Visual inspection Continuous EHS co-ordinator
Avian Fauna amount of bird strikes as a result of aircraft movement: Standard Six and photographic
birds present record
in the airstrip Maintain vegetation around the airstrip and helipad
area such that grass short along the length of the airstrip and
helipad is kept short.
Ensure good housekeeping.
Reduce birds’ access to waste storage areas.
Level and drain areas around the airstrip and helipad to
avoid ponding.
Design buildings to avoid perching and nesting of
birds.
Use innovative scaring techniques to dissuade birds
away from the airstrip.
Implement a bird strike monitoring programme.
3.5 Impacts on Air Reduce dust Maintain and operate equipment and engines in Ghanaian Emissions Continuous Lonrho,
Quality emissions, accordance with design specifications and prevent the EPA, WHO, monitoring Onshore
degradation in use of out-dated, poorly operated equipment. Performance results Contractor
air quality and Select project equipment taking energy efficiency into Standard
contribution to account. Three Approved design
Greenhouse Monitor GHG emissions and implement a programme specifications/
gases for identifying and implementing GHG reduction plans
actions.
Implement operational rules to ensure that engine GHG emissions
emissions by port users are minimised (eg restricting programme
engine idling, ensuring that only properly maintained
equipment, vehicles, and vessels are allowed in the Port operational
port). rules policy
Electricity generation equipment should be compliant
with EHS Guidelines (World Bank Group, 2007a).
3.6 Noise Impacts Reduce noise Minimise noisy activities near communities (ie near the GCAA, Noise modelling Continuous Lonrho,
levels around Project boundaries). Performance and monitoring Onshore
sensitive Limit industrial activities that create noise to daytime Standards Six results Contractor,
receptors hours. Avoid conducting noisy activities at night, and Four Offshore
especially those that are carried out outdoors. Visual inspection Contractor
Develop work guidelines for port tenants and users that and photographic
specify noise emission limits and provide guidance for record
minimising noise from activities (include requirements
for equipment maintenance and operation and Meeting minutes
operational controls such as specification of limits to or complaint
engine idling). register
Carry out regular monitoring of noise levels at the
facility boundary and at sensitive receptors. Implement Flight path plan
corrective measures, including operational controls and
use of sound baffling devices or techniques if necessary. Work guidelines
report
Monitor for public complaints about noise and take
corrective measures where required.
Minimise flights at night.
Plan and implement flight paths that do not fly over
local communities. Monitored and enforced approved
flight paths.
Carry out ground operations in a manner that
minimises noise, especially from aircraft engines.
3.7.1 Traffic Impacts Limit increases Update the Traffic management plan to consider Performance Traffic Monthly Lonrho,
in traffic flows specific operations requirements (including increased Standard Four management Onshore
and strain on traffic volumes and local and regional traffic flows). plan, Road contractor
road Ensure all new drivers employed during operation quality
infrastructure undergo appropriate training, as required by the traffic monitoring
management plan. results
Ensure road quality monitoring is undertaken on a
regular basis.
3.7.2 Traffic Impacts Ensure Co-operate with local government to ensure proper Performance Traffic Monthly Lonrho,
improved road maintenance and timely repair of all roads used by Standard Four management plan Onshore
conditions Project vehicles. contractor
3.8 Impacts on Reduce Limit security lighting at night and ensure the use of Performance Inventory Once off Lonrho
Visual changes to directional covers. Standard Onshore
Character visual Eight contractor
character of the
region
3.9 Impact on Reduce Implement effective storm water management plan. Performance Storm water Operational Lonrho, EHS
Marine water degradation of During maintenance dredging ensure that dredging Standard management phase Contractor
Quality marine water best practice, as described for the construction phase Three, plan, Dredging
quality (see 2.11) is adhered to. Ghanaian Disposal Permit
Marine
Pollution
legislation
3.10 Impact on Minimise During maintenance dredging, Lonrho (and their EPA or the Dredge Disposal Every three years Lonrho/ EHS
Marine disturbance contractors) will adhere to dredging best practice as Ghana Permit Contractor
Sediments and described in 2.11. maritime
contamination Authority
of marine (GMA)
sediment marine
Pollution
legislation,
Performance
Standard
Three
3.11 Impacts on Manage coastal Ongoing monitoring of coastal erosion, with corrective Performance Photographic During operation Lonrho,
Coastal erosion action including sand pumping or physical transport Standard evidence and Offshore
Processes and redistribution as part of sand nourishment Three records Contractor
activities.
3.12 Underwater Minimise noise Reduce underwater noise as much as possible through Ghanaian Noise monitoring Continuous HSE Coordinator
Noise nuisance to careful equipment choice and limiting the amount of EPA and at sensitive
sensitive time it takes to carry out noisy activities in the marine WHO noise receptors
receptors environment. limits
Vessels will be powered down to safe operational levels
and switched off while in berths or moored in the
terminal area.
3.13 Impacts on Minimise Mitigation measures include those listed for sections Performance Storm water During operation Lonrho
Marine disturbance to outlining the potential impacts on marine water quality Standard Six, management
Mammals marine (see 3.9) and underwater noise (see 3.12). Ghanaian and plan,
mammals Avoid collisions or disturbance of marine mammals WHO noise Noise monitoring
through implementing through implementing the limits results
mammal spotting system developed during the
construction phase. Results of marine
Implement programme for monitoring and recording mammal
sightings of any injured or dead marine mammals. monitoring
Report relevant information to the appropriate programmes and
organisation and government authority. records.
3.14 Impacts on Ensure Implement a turtle management plan. Performance Turtle During Lonrho/ EHS
Turtles minimal Lonrho will support local NGOs in their efforts to Standard Six Management operational phase Coordinator
impacts on promote education on the importance of turtles. Plan
turtles through
minimising
habitat
disturbance
and decreasing
risk of
predation
3.15 Impacts on Minimise Fish catch surveys and monitoring will be undertaken EPA or the Fish catch Operational Lonrho, EHS
marine fish impacts on fish to test and monitor contamination levels. Ghana surveys and Phase Coordinator
from potential All vessels entering the terminal areas will have an on maritime monitoring
contamination board ballast water management plan. Authority results,
No release of ballast water will be permitted in the port (GMA) Ballast Water
directly to the sea. Marine Management
Pollution Plan
legislation,
IMO
Requirements
Guidelines for
the Control
and
Management
of Ships
Ballast Water
3.16 Impacts on Minimise Dredging dump sites will be as similar as possible in EPA/GMA/ Dredging Permit, During Lonrho, EHS
Benthos and disturbance terms of substrate type to the area that is being Marine Photographic Operation, Coordinator
Intertidal Fauna and dredged. Pollution evidence and Maintenance
contamination Dredging maintenance activities will be efficient and legislation, records dredging
of benthos and kept to a minimum. Performance activities are
intertidal fauna Dredging maintenance methods will follow Standard Six expected to occur
international best practice, as described in 2.11. every 3 years.
Ballast water will not be permitted to be released into
Port waters, and will be pumped ashore into a shore-
based facility.
Mitigations in 3.9 will be adhered to (Marine water
quality impact).
Lonrho will work with local NGOs to promote public
awareness of government regulations regarding the
collection of intertidal organisms.
3.17. Impacts on the Maximise Make taxation payments in a transparent, accurate and Ghanaian Financial reports During Lonrho
1 National and benefits of timely manner. Local Content construction and
Regional increased legislation, operation
Economy: government Performance
Increased revenue Standard Two
Government
Revenue
3.17. Impacts on the Maximise local Disseminate information regarding procurement Alternative Alternative During Lonrho
2 National and procurement opportunities and requirements as early as possible. livelihoods livelihoods construction and
Regional Provide quality standards required by the Project for programme programme operation
Economy: provision of goods and services to the Project. Or Existing Or Existing
Economic Support the development of a supplier training government government
Development programme. initiatives initiatives
and Encourage unbundling of certain contracts by its
Diversification selected D&B contractors.
of Economy Identify livelihood replacement Projects that fit with
the National agenda for diversified but sustainable
economic development.
Consider Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR)
activities that promote sustainable Projects, and
training.
3.17. Impacts on the Maximise Same as mitigation measures described in 3.17.2 Ghana’s Local Recruitment and During Lonrho
3 National and business (Economic Development and Diversification of Content training construction and
Regional experience, Economy) Policy programme operation
Economy: training and
Increased skills Training records
Business opportunities
Experience,
Training and
Skills
3.18 Economic and Minimise the Implement and monitor codes of conduct for Project Performance Tenants’ Construction and Lonrho
Physical destruction/di contractors and employees regarding the exploitation Standard Six contractual operational phase District
Displacement: sturbance to of natural resources. obligations Government
Reduced Access Flora and . Stakeholder
to / Increased Fauna engagement
Competition for strategies, Visual
Flora and Fauna and photographic
records
3.19. Impacts on Optimise Maximising local employment where possible. This Performance Contractors’ Construction Lonrho-HR
1 Livelihoods: Project benefits will be written into the contractors’ contracts and made Standard Two contract phase Over the lifespan
Employment binding. Skills audit of the Project
Creation Over the life of the Project, a recruitment principle of Register of casual
hiring first from the directly affected area and employees
neighbouring communities, then Ghana, will be
applied.
Undertake a skills audit of the Study Area towns and
surrounding communities.
Assist in the development of a Community Based
Manpower Agency that focuses developing the skills of
people from the area to match the potential
requirements of the port users and offer their services
in a sustainable manner and develops a database of
casual labour for the Project.
Employment opportunities, associated skills
requirements to be well advertised locally, and a
recruitment centre to be easily accessible to the local
population.
Advertising of job opportunities done in a timely
manner.
No requirement for applicants to make payments when
applying for, employment on the Project. If payment to
a recruitment agency is necessary, the employer and
not employee must cover this.
3.19. Impacts on Skills Training priorities will be identified as early as Ghanaian Training plans Construction Lonrho- HR
2 Livelihoods: development possible. Local Content Certificate of phase Over the lifespan
Employment and training Appropriate local candidates identified during legislation, employment Operational of the Project
Creation construction to be trained and employed during Performance Alternative phase
operations. Standard Two Livelihoods
Develop training plans. Development t
Each employee at the conclusion of successful
employment on the Project to receive a certificate of
employment.
3.19. Impacts on Skills Identify training possibilities as early as possible. Ghanaian Training plans Construction and Lonrho- HR
3 Livelihoods: development Appropriate local candidates identified during Local Content Certificate of operational phase Over the lifespan
Employment and training construction to be trained and employed during legislation, employment of the Project
Creation operations. Performance Alternative
Develop training plans. Standard Two Livelihoods
Offer certificates of employment to each employee at Development t
the conclusion of successful employment on the Project.
3.19. Impacts on Reduce Focussing social investment and some local economic Performance Visual inspection Construction and Lonrho- CSI
4 Livelihoods: vulnerability to development activities towards the most vulnerable Standard Two and photographic operational phase
Impact on impacts on groups. record
Prices and inflation Ongoing dialogue with representatives of vulnerable
Exacerbation of groups.
Economic Identify opportunities that could reduce vulnerability.
Vulnerability
3.19. Impacts on Ensure good Commit to the principles of sound corporate Performance Livelihood Construction and Lonrho- HR
5 Livelihoods: communication governance, responsible corporate citizenship, and Standard Restoration operational phase Lonrho- OHS
Changes to between transparent business interactions with affected Two, Programme Manager
Livelihood Lonrho and communities. Livelihood Skills survey
Strategies local Ensure that those whose livelihoods are directly Restoration Visual and
communities affected by the Project are appropriately and Programme photographic
responsibly compensated. records
Implement skills development and training HIV/AIDS
programmes for Project employees. programme
Support the undertaking of a skills survey and develop Grievance
a localisation plan for succession employment during mechanism
construction and more specifically during operations. record
Support sustainable livelihood practices.
Support and/or develop information and awareness
programmes related to economic entrepreneurialism
and small business development
Support social welfare programmes and special
Projects that focus on vulnerable groups.
Implement an HIV/AIDS programme for contractors,
employees and local villagers.
Make condoms easily available to all contractors and
employees and work with local health services to
ensure condoms are accessible in the communities.
3.19. Impacts on Maximise local Maximising local recruitment and training. In accordance Training plans Construction and Lonrho- HR
6 Livelihoods: employment Implement mitigation measures in 3.19.3 (employment with Ghana Certificate of operational phase Over the lifespan
Increased creation) legislation employment of the Project
potential for Alternative
income stability Livelihoods
Development
3.20. Impact on Social Reduce No direct mitigation measures. n/a n/a n/a n/a
1 Infrastructure, Transfer of
Governance and Skilled and
Service Delivery Semi-Skilled
Personnel from
Public Sector
Institutions to
the Project
3.20. Impact on Social Minimise any Meet all practical needs of employees within the Project Performance Community Construction Lonrho in
2 Infrastructure, degradation of footprint for access to services and infrastructure. Standard Four Health, Safety Phase partnership with
Governance and infrastructure Initiate discussions with the Ministry of Health in order and Security relevant
Service and services to plan for anticipated increased demands on local Management government
Delivery: health facilities from the Project as well as newcomers Plan. authorities.
Pressure on to the area. Corporate Social
Basic Develop a Community Health, Safety and Security Responsibility
Infrastructure, Management Plan. Projects
Services and Support government initiatives that ensure local
Local education’s capacity.
Government Ensure that contractors maintain transport routes in the
Capacity area that are directly impacted by Project vehicles.
Explore partnering with government in providing
higher quality drinking water to communities most
affected by the increased demands on water.
Explore ways in which to support local policing if there
is increased pressure on the limited resources as a
result of the Project.
Place emphasis on sustainability in any social
development activities.
Promote the implementation of joint planning
approaches with government and other key
stakeholders for strategically important housing
Projects.
Consider forming partnerships with government and
organised business to address the provision of bulk
services and infrastructure, transportation services,
sites for informal trading and related community
services.
3.20. Impact on Social Minimise Ensure community awareness and safety in terms of Performance Community Construction Lonrho
3 Infrastructure, potential for Project operational areas, hazardous areas and future Standard Four Health, Safety Phase
Governance and the development areas. and Security
Service establishment Operations will be securely fenced and policed to Management
Delivery: of informal discourage informal settlement on its premises. Plan.
Growth of settlements Prohibit informal recruitment at the Project gate.
Informal
Settlements
3.21. Socio-Cultural Minimise Partner with District Planning to encourage settlement Performance Grievance Throughout Lonrho
1 Impacts: unmet planning and development. Standard Four mechanism construction
Tension and expectations Any Project and government actions regarding spatial record
Conflict and associated development framework planning will involve on-
between Towns tensions going consultations with local communities at
(and possibly grassroots level.
Districts) All affected towns will receive equal access to
opportunities.
Establish a local information office and appoint a
permanent community liaison officer accessible to all
communities.
Establish a site-based grievance/complaints office.
When considering employment opportunities that
cannot be filled from the local area include
neighbouring communities, with appropriate skills.
3.21. Socio-Cultural Strive to ensure Communicate the skills and experience requirements Performance Stakeholder During Lonrho
2 Impacts: Unmet realistic for the Project in a transparent, timely and accessible Standard Four Engagement Construction and
Expectations expectations manner. Programme Operational
Resulting in about Where possible institute pre-construction training to Phase
Community employment empower local residents to meet Project employment
Anger and and general standards.
Resentment Project benefits Communicate pre-employment and internal training
towards the efforts at the Project in a transparent, timely and
Project accessible manner.
Highlight achievements or milestones in local
employment wherever possible.
Identify skills requirements for construction and
operation, and related timescales for appropriate
training.
Area towns.
Area towns,
Implement mitigation measures as set out in 2.20.2.
3.22 Impacts on Minimise Develop and implement a Project policy for HIV/AIDS Performance Project policy for Throughout Lonrho
Health: impacts to and other communicable diseases. Standard Four HIV/AIDS and construction and
Increased health as a Develop a management plan for HIV and other other operation
Prevalence of result of communicable diseases. communicable
Sexually worker and Establish and implement an employees’ Code of diseases.
Transmitted jobseeker Conduct to limit the direct impact of the Project on HIV
Infections, influx communicable diseases in the Study Area.
HIV/AIDS and All workers will undergo thorough HIV/AIDS
other awareness and education programmes, possibly as part
Communicable of induction.
Diseases Support local school education initiatives by
government and NGOs.
Support, or if necessary facilitate, the development of
an ongoing accessible and awareness programme with
the local residents and workers around the dangers of
STDs and about the risks of HIV/AIDS.
Free condoms to be provided to all workers.
Support awareness initiatives amongst Project and
tenant employees and local residents around
communicable diseases and basic steps to avoid or limit
the spread of such diseases.
3.23 Tourism Impact Minimise During construction, the Project will ensure that the Performance Visual inspection Throughout Lonrho
negative road rerouting is safe and easily visible for tourists. Standard Four and photographic construction
impacts on Efforts will be made to reduce the visual impacts of the record
Tourism construction works.
3.24. Spills and Minimise the Confine storage and use of fuels and lubricants to WHO Visual inspection During Operation Lonrho/ EHS
1 accidents potential of bunded areas. Standards, and photographic Coordinator
soil, surface All chemical storage areas will have impermeable Performance record,
water and bases. Standard Spill Response
groundwater The bunded areas will have outflow pipes. Three Plan
contamination Bunds will be regularly checked for any blockages of Storm water
these outflow pipes. management
A detailed spill response plan appropriate for all plan,
phases of the Project needs to be developed. Ground and
Any spills to ground will be remediated immediately surface water
by an appropriately qualified person and post Monitoring
remediation verification carried out. Programme
Develop and implement a storm water management
plan.
Ensure that proper drainage systems (including oil-
water separators) are in place and maintained.
Ensure sufficient silt traps are installed on the Project
site.
Refuelling of equipment and vehicles will be carried
out in designated areas on hard standing ground, or
use appropriate spill protection measures.
Collection systems will be installed in the refuelling
areas. Fuels will be collected and either reused, treated
by incineration or removed by a local contractor
Develop and implement a ground and surface water
monitoring programme.
Drip trays must be used when servicing vehicles or
equipment where there is a risk of hydrocarbon
spillage.
All effluent water from construction activities will be
disposed of in a constructed storm water system with
fitted oil silt traps.
3.24. Spills and Minimise the Vessel effluents will be treated appropriately and MARPOL Records of oil During Operation Lonrho/ EHS
2 accidents potential of accordance with MARPOL requirements. Annex 1 for content, Coordinator
marine water Ensure that oil discharge monitors are placed on all all discharges Oil spill
quality vessels used during construction. from vessels contingency plan
contamination Develop an oil spill contingency plan. using the port
as well as All vessels entering the terminal are to comply with International
marine regulations associated with the MARPOL 73/78 Convention
sedimentation Convention. for the
contamination Ballast, bilge and sanitation water will need to be Control and
disposed of at port reception facilities. Management
Marine vessels will not be allowed to discharge sewage of Ships
or food waste whilst in the marine terminal restricted Ballast Water
areas. and
Sediments,
Performance
Standard
Three
3.25 Cumulative Minimise Work with local and regional development to Ghana Spatial Copies of During operation Lonrho
impacts impacts on encourage sustainable resource management, spatial Development correspondence,
livelihoods and planning and land development as well as efficient Plans and Meeting Minutes
ecosystems land administration by relevant authorities. legislation
8 DECOMMISSIONING
8.1 INTRODUCTION
Although the port will be constructed for a fifty year lifespan, it is envisioned
that the project will become a permanent feature of the coastline in Ghana’s
Western Region, attracting industrial development and economic growth in
the surrounding area. The Project is thus not expected to be decommissioned,
but for Lonrho to pass the operation of the port to the Government of Ghana
for continued operation into the future, in line with the conditions laid out in
the Concession Agreement.
However, should decommissioning be required as a result of unforeseen

circumstances, the site will be restored to a safe condition that minimises
potential residual environmental and social impacts. Furthermore, the site
will be decommissioned with consideration of future onshore and offshore
land use.
8.2 REGULATIONS AND AUTHORITY
Decommissioning will be carried out in accordance with the prevailing

national regulations and good practice standards at the time. These are likely
to include:
EPA requirements and environmental regulations as listed in Table 2.1

related to environmental protection, pollution and discharge controls and
biodiversity and water conservation;
other applicable Ghanaian laws related to marine requirements;
international laws and conventions to which Ghana is a signatory; and
industry good practice standards.
Prior to decommissioning, the port operators will conduct a review of the

applicable legislative requirements at the time, and ensure that the
decommissioning planning and activities conform to these requirements.
8.3 INTERNATIONAL CONVENTIONS AND GUIDELINES
There are a number of International Conventions pertaining to the

decommissioning of ports and terminals which include provisions for the
removal of installations and disposal of wastes. These are summarised in
Chapter 2 and
include the following:
World Bank Group Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines for

Ports, Harbours and Terminals; and

8-1
The Basel Convention, 1989 and Bamako Convention, 1998 in relation to
the control, movement and disposal of hazardous wastes.
It should be noted that there are currently no international guidelines on the

decommissioning of disused pipelines, therefore, good industry practice will
be applied at the time of decommissioning.
8.4 DECOMMISSIONING PLAN
The port operators will develop a detailed and project-specific

Decommissioning Plan. This plan will be based on national regulations,
licence requirements and international standards and will consider the latest
decommissioning techniques.
The plan will include details on all aspects of onshore and offshore facility
decommissioning and abandonment. The plan will also address issues
identified by a health and safety risk assessment of the decommissioning itself
and the abandonment phase, including provisions for the short and longer
term risks. Potential environmental and social risks will also be addressed by
the plan.
The plan will include details on a post-decommissioning survey and

monitoring programme to ensure that procedures were properly followed and
that they were effective. The plan will also include a detailed budget for the
decommissioning activities.
In particular, the plan will address the:
details of the project and the degree of decommissioning (partial/wholly);

methods to be used for the removal of the structure (eg explosives,
mechanical cutting and high pressure jetting);
disposal of removed structures, debris and associated wastes; and
environmental safeguards, monitoring, and restoration and remediation
plans.
8.4.1 Approval Process
At the end of the Project life and prior to decommissioning activities, the
Project will seek approval from the EPA to decommission the onshore and
offshore facilities. The plan will be submitted to EPA for review and approval
prior to commencing decommissioning activities. Once approval for
decommissioning is granted, the project will finalise and implement the
detailed plan for facility decommissioning and abandonment within at least
one year prior to abandonment.

8-2
8.5 DECOMMISSIONING METHODS
8.5.1 General Approach
The selection of appropriate decommissioning methods and procedures for

individual components of the Project infrastructure and facilities will take into
account a variety of factors including:
safety;
environmental impacts;
technical feasibility,
complexity and technical risks;
cost and economics;
impacts to other users of the surrounding area; and
legal compliance.
As above, the final DAP will be submitted to EPA and relevant authorities for
review and approval before commencement of decommissioning activities.
This will include evaluation of the decommissioning options based on the
selection criteria listed above.
At the time of decommissioning, the project is expected to comprise the

following elements:
Port, comprising a harbour protected by a rock breakwater to the west and

a rock groyne to the east, a dredged approach channel, a turning circle,
berth pockets, and quays;
Service Facilities, located in the port along the quays providing support
facility;
Airstrip, located near the port to facilitate aircraft and helicopter transport;
and
Infrastructure, including supporting facilities (accommodations, offices;

naval logistics support base, hydrocarbon fuels storage area) and roads
(internal to the port and the public road).
The above infrastructure will have a total footprint of approximately 118 ha.
There may have been subsequent development phases by the time of
decommissioning that will increase the footprint, and these will be accounted
for within the DAP.

8-3
Onshore Facilities and Infrastructure
Removal operations of the onshore facilities (tank farm, connected piping,

airstrip and helipad facilities, offices, warehouses, yards and other structures)
will include the following procedures:
Residual fuel will be removed from the tanks and all associated pipes, and
managed as a hazardous waste in accordance with WMP requirements.
Before commencing tank removal operations the tanks and associated

pipes will be inerted (1) to remove the risk of explosion. Proven inerting
methods include fire-fighting foam fill, nitrogen foam fill, nitrogen gas
purging, water fill, dry ice, combustion of gas, and cleaning-degassing. If
tanks and piping are left in situ, filling with sand and cement slurry,
hydrophobic foams or foamed concrete will be considered once the
residual product has been removed and the infrastructure inerted.
Warehouses, effluent, sewage treatment plants, repair yards, associated

equipment and as much infrastructure and equipment shall be removed
off site as is practical.
If the facility is abandoned, buildings, warehouses. Buildings will be left

on site while as much as possible equipment will be dismantled and
removed. Lonrho will ensure that all hazardous conditions on site that
cannot be controlled effectively with site access restrictions have been
mitigated or removed.
Other structures such as buildings, bunding, concrete hardstanding and

stormwater systems will be decommissioned and removed as appropriate
with consideration of future land use.
Waste will be managed according to a WMP which set out an approach to

reduction of waste, reuse or recycling of metals and other materials and
disposal of non-hazardous wastes, including disposal methods and
appropriate disposal sites.
8.5.2 Marine Infrastructure
Removal operations of the offshore breakwater and quays will include the
following procedures:
Infrastructure and buildings and associated equipment within the quay

areas will be dismantled and removed as per onshore facilities before
decommissioning and demolition activities are started on the breakwater.
The breakwater and groyne will be blasted through in areas to allow

natural sediment transfer and inshore currents to resume. Any sub-surface
(1) To make chemically inactive in order to prevent fires or explosions.

8-4
concrete structures will be left in situ and protrusions removed to protect
where likely to snag or entangle fishing gear or anchors and interfere with
marine vessels. The mooring systems, including anchors, chains and
buoys will be recovered.
Waste will be managed according to a WMP which set out an approach to

reduction of waste, reuse or recycling of metals and other materials and
disposal of non-hazardous wastes, including disposal methods and
appropriate disposal sites.
The project will dismantle and remove as much of the infrastructure as is

practical. The approach and techniques for abandonment shall consider
industry best practice, which is continuously being developed, as well as
prevailing regulations at the time. Abandonment methods will be specified in
the decommissioning plan.
8.5.3 Wastes
A variety of different types of wastes will be generated by the

decommissioning and demolition of the port facilities, buildings and marine
infrastructure. Demolition wastes will comprise mainly inert materials from
the fabric of the buildings but will also include wood, plastics, metals. A large
proportion of the wastes generated would be demolition waste and rubble. It
may be possible to recycle demolition waste (eg rubble) if there is a suitable
construction project or road building scheme nearby. Alternatively the
demolition rubble could be used it to construct access roads or as daily cover
for the local dumpsites, thereby improving the dump site’s environmental
conditions.
Other wastes include machinery, metal (mainly ferrous) and electrical

equipment. Where possible, the redundant machinery and electrical
equipment will be sold for reuse. Remaining equipment will probably be sold
for scrap along with the majority of the ferrous metal wastes.
Lubricating, hydraulic and transformer oils from machinery, fuel and

chemical containers and sludge residues may need to be removed prior to
transport and disposal of the machinery.
The incorrect handling and disposal of these wastes may result in the
contamination of soils and water resources. Lonrho will develop a detailed
waste management plan (WMP) for the decommissioning and demolition
activities, indicating requirements for waste sorting, storage and disposal of
the various waste streams.
8.5.4 Contaminated Soil
Lonrho will develop formal procedures to address and manage the planned or
unplanned discovery of decommissioning waste, as well as to address the
discovery of more extensive evidence of environmental contamination.

8-5
Contaminated soils and water may be encountered around fuel dispensers,
piping and tanks during excavation for decommissioning within parking
areas, waste management areas and within the rig repair and fabrication
areas.
Depending on the type and concentration of contaminants present, small

quantities of soils or liquids may need to be managed as a hazardous waste.
Larger quantities of affected soils and other environmental media, including
sediment and groundwater, would require risk screening, on-site or off-site
treatment and other risk management strategies. The strategy for land
decontamination will be to reduce the level of contamination at the site while
introducing measures to reduce and prevent human exposure.

8-6
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ESMP)
9.1 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE
9.1.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the outline Environmental and Social Management

Plan (ESMP) for the ESIA. The ESMP describes the mitigation and
enhancement measures identified through the ESIA process that the Project
will undertake and the organisation and systems that will be developed to
ensure the effective implementation. This ESMP describes the delivery
mechanism for the environmental and social mitigation measures identified
through the ESIA process.
The ESMP has been developed and structured in accordance with Ghana EIA
requirements. It is also structured to meet the environmental and social
management requirements specified by international lenders, specifically the
Performance Standards and those of the African Development Bank (AfDB).
The ESMP will be further refined and updated through the Project
development process, especially following completion of detailed design and
prior to commencement of construction. Ultimately, this plan will be
incorporated into a comprehensive Environmental and Social Management
System (ESMS) that will be developed by Lonrho to incorporate policies, plans
and procedures to address all environmental and social protection measures,
regulatory requirements, and lender requirements that pertain to the Project.
9.1.2 Objectives
The objectives of the ESMP are to:
incorporate environmental management into project design and operating

procedures;
address concerns and issues raised in the ESIA’s stakeholder consultation

process and those that will likely continue to arise during the project’s
lifetime;
serve as an action plan for managing the significant environmental

impacts associated with the Project;
ensure that all workers, contractors, tenants and others involved in the
Project meet legal and other requirements with regard to environmental
and social management;
provide a framework for implementing project environmental and social

commitments (ie mitigation measures identified in the ESIA); and

9-1
prepare and maintain records of project environmental and social
performance (ie monitoring, audits and non-compliance tracking).
9.1.3 Scope
Application
This ESMP was developed for the mitigations identified through the ESIA
process (Chapter 6) for those activities specifically described in Chapter 3 of the
ESIA. As such this ESMP covers onshore and offshore project activities
during construction and operations. It does not cover any activities related to
offsite equipment fabrication or production of supply materials. Also, it does
not cover measures specific to Project livelihood restoration activities.
The mitigation and management measures are also additional to a number of

embedded controls already included in the design of the Project. These
embedded controls are included in Chapter 3.
Construction Approach
he ESMP during construction focusses on minimising adverse, and

maximising positive environmental and social impacts as a result of
construction activities. The measures apply to activities undertaken by
Lonrho as well as their onshore and offshore contractors. The ultimate
responsibility for the implementation of the ESMP will rest with Lonrho.
Lonrho will delegate the responsibilities for day-today implementation to
their marine and onshore construction contractors in accordance with the
environmental management organisation (Section 9.4.1).
Although the main focus is on construction of the new port, any additional
construction in the port after its completion would also need to comply with
the conditions of this ESMP for such activities.
Operations Approach
The ESMP during operations is focussed on the management interventions

related to minimising the adverse and maximising the positive environmental
and social impacts of the operation of the port. Although the ESMP defines
that Lonrho as the port operator will retain overall responsibility for the
implementation of these measures, it is expected that many of these measures
will be implemented by the port tenants and any operational phase
contractors. This means that the tenants/ contractors will be expected to
implement the various controls included within the ESMP. These
responsibilities are defined within the mitigation/ management tables within
Chapter 7.

9-2
9.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
9.2.1 Introduction
This ESMP has been developed in line with applicable legal and policy
requirements. These included the Ghanaian requirements in terms of the
Environmental Assessment Regulations and the requirements of the
Performance Standards as well as the AdDB’s environmental and social
performance requirements.
9.2.2 Ghanaian Regulatory Requirements
Requirements for an ESMP are contained in the Environmental Assessment

Regulations of 1999. Under Part II, Section 9, a ‘provisional environmental
management plan’ (referred to as an outline ESMP in this document) is a
required element of an ESIA Report/ EIS.
In Section 24, the Regulations further require:
“(1) The person responsible for an undertaking in respect of which a

preliminary environmental report or an environmental impact statement
has been approved shall submit to the Agency an environmental
management plan in respect of his operations within 18 months of
commencement of operations and thereafter every 3 years.”
Further:
“(3) The environmental management plan shall be a document in such

form as shall be determined by the Agency.
(4) The environmental management plan shall set out steps that are
intended to be taken to manage any significant environmental impact
that may result from the operation of the undertaking.”
This chapter of the ESIA Report serves to satisfy the requirement for an
outline (or provisional) ESMP. A standalone Project ESMP (as per Section 24,
Item 1) will subsequently be developed and submitted to the EPA for
approval.
9.2.3 Performance Standards
Performance Standard 1, 2012 (1) requires that the environmental management

system be part of the client’s overall management system for the project. It
should include the organisational structure, responsibilities, policies,
procedures and practices, and resources. Performance Standard 1 underscores
the importance of on-going management of social and environmental
performance to achieve continuous improvement.
(1) Performance Standard 1: Social and Environmental Assessment and Management Systems from IFC Performance
Standards on Social and Environmental Sustainability (2012)

9-3
The Performance Standard requires that a management system be in place at
the level where their investment is utilised. In this case, it is at the level of the
project. It requires a plan for implementing the project-specific management
programme developed through the social and environmental assessment.
9.2.4 AfDB Requirements
Under the Environmental Review Procedures for Private Sector Operations of the
African Development Bank, an ESMP is required for a Category 1 Project.
A proposed project is classified as Category 1 if it is likely to have significant

adverse impacts that are sensitive, diverse, or unprecedented. These projects
may affect an area broader than the sites or facilities subject to physical works.
For a Category 1 project, the project sponsor is responsible for preparing a full
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report. Once the EIA has been
finalised, the project sponsor will prepare an Environmental Management
Plan (EMP). The Bank’s requirements for the EMP generally follow that
specified by the World Bank in Annex C to the OP 4.01 - Environmental
Assessment (1999).
This ESMP was developed to be consistent with these requirements.
9.2.5 Project Standards
This ESMP has been developed to be consistent with the elements and
expectations of Lonrho’s Project-level Environmental and Social Management
System (ESMS) and the Lonrho Environmental Policy (Box 9.1). The HSE
Policy is both Project-specific and part of Lonrho’s commitment to developing
environmentally, socially and health & safety sound and conscious projects
globally.
Box 9.1 Lonrho Environmental Policy
Lonrho Ghana Ports Ltd expects all parties involved in his projects (Self-perform and Sub-
Contractors) to comply with all applicable environmental, health and safety legislation as a
minimum standard. The adoption of best practice will be positively encouraged, and all parties
will be required to demonstrate their application of best practice and innovation in order to
reduce adverse environmental impacts.
On top of the applicable legislation, this document identifies relevant environmental protection,
which is applicable to all Lonrho Ghana Ports Operations and any other commitments. It details
action to be taken to meet the target of 100% Environmental Compliance.
Source: Environmental / Waste Management and Emergency Response Procedures (Lonrho, 2012)
The policies are designed to ensure limited negative impacts on the

environment and local communities during the construction and operational
phases of the proposed Project.

9-4
In the context of accepted international frameworks for quality and
environmental management systems, including ISO 14001, the ESMS process
can be summarised as four steps, namely: plan, do, check and act. These are
described further below (Box 9.2).
As part of this, the ESMS will include the ESMP with related detailed
management plans and procedures that lay out the specifications for
compliance with specific environmental and social elements.
Box 9.2 ESMS Process
Plan
define policies and objectives for environmental and social performance;
identify environmental and social impacts and risks of the operations;
develop mitigations and operational controls to address impacts and risks; and
develop a management plan to achieve these objectives.
Do
implement management plan; and
implement mitigations and operational controls.
Check
monitor performance against policies and objectives; and
check that mitigations and operational controls are effective.
Act
make corrections to plans, mitigations, or controls in response to performance monitoring
or out of control events.
9.3 PLANNING
9.3.1 Impact Assessment
The Project has utilised the impact assessment through the ESIA process as a
tool within the planning process. The impact assessment has been conducted
for the construction and operation of the port as well as the operation of the
various planned activities by tenants.
The Project will continue to use the impact assessment process as a planning
tool for any future development activities including significant expansions or
ancillary projects. The mitigation hierarchy applied in this ESIA will also be
applied.
9.3.2 Project Commitments
Through the project development and ESIA process, mitigations have been
identified to address environmental and social impacts associated with Project
activities. The Project has made a commitment to implement these to ensure
or improve environmental and social performance. These are not

9-5
recommendations; they are binding. The commitments take a number of
forms as summarised in Box 9.3, with the specific actions intended to address a
particular environmental or social issue.
The commitments are detailed in tabular form in Chapter 7 of the ESIA report,
where they are organised by Project development stage within reference to the
impact assessment in Chapter 6.
Box 9.3 Type of Commitments
Avoidance
During the planning phases, potential impacts to sensitive resources are identified. Where
feasible, locations or processes can be changed during the planning or design phases to avoid
impact to these areas.
Minimisation
Minimisation involves measures to reduce proposed impacts to a resource. Minimisation can
include for example, vessels slowing down in the vicinity of marine mammals.
Management
Management commitments include development of plans and procedures for ensuring that
measures to protect the environment actually take place and are of the desired standard of
practice. Training is another commitment in this category.
Monitoring
Commitments to monitoring are primarily to ensure the above measures are working properly
and delivering the desired (and anticipated) results.
Additionality
Additionality involves actions and contributions which are designed to provide a positive
benefit. Examples include assisting with additional domestic water supply to surrounding
towns.
9.3.3 Management Plans
Outline Environmental and Social Management Plan
This outline ESMP describes provides the mechanism for implementation of

mitigation and monitoring actions described in Chapters 7. This ESMP is
based on the results of the ESIA process and the available design information.
The goal of this outline ESMP is to ensure full compliance with the project’s
policies and with mitigation, monitoring and other commitments made in the
ESIA report. This document outlines the actions necessary to attain this goal,
and describes the means, and designation of responsibility required for
compliance and conformance.
Project Environmental and Social Management Plan
Lonrho will develop a standalone Project ESMP which will build on and
replace this outline ESMP. The Project ESMP will be a ‘live’ document, subject
to review and re-issue, as design is finalised or amended and in the event of

9-6
any significant changes to the Project’s environmental and social impacts
occur, following the Management of Change process (Section 9.4.7). The
Project ESMP will be developed for the site preparation and construction
phase, as Project design and construction planning is finalised. The ESMP will
be modified as the Project moves into the operational phase, to include the
additional operational activities.
The key element of the ESMP will be a series of environmental and social
management and monitoring tables presenting potential Project impacts
(Chapter 6), the proposed mitigation/management actions to address them
and associated monitoring actions. Provisional tables include all mitigation
and monitoring requirements identified in this ESIA Report/ EIS and these
will be further developed and included in the Project ESMP as the design is
finalised and when the Project moves into the operational phase.
The Project ESMP will be structured in line with this outline ESMP and the
mitigation and monitoring tables will be constructed as per those included in
Chapter 7. In line with Ghanaian regulation, the Project ESMP will be
submitted to the EPA within 18 months of commencement of operations and
at least every three years thereafter (Section 9.2.2).
Monitoring requirements will include specific parameters to be monitored

with references provided to plans, procedures and specifications that inform
the measurements to be made, monitoring methodologies, frequency and
responsible parties.
Specific Management Plans and Procedures
Additional specific plans and policies will need to be developed to support the
implementation of this ESMP. These specific management plans will lay out
the specifications for compliance with specific environmental and social
elements and will also describe the plans and processes required.
The specific management plans are listed in Table 9.1 (within the hierarchy of
key plans) along with links to how these related to the activities and impacts
described within Chapter 3 and Chapter 6 as well as the identified responsible
party for each.
Table 9.1 Summary and Hierarchy of ESMP Document and Specific Management Plans
Plan Name Includes Plan Owner

Outline ESMP Provides a delivery mechanism for environmental and Lonrho
social mitigation and monitoring identified through the Health,
ESIA and designed to provide a framework for linkages to Safety and
the Project ESMS. The outline ESMP is based on the Environment
outcomes of the ESIA process and design information Manager
available.

9-7
Project ESMP A ”live” document, the Project ESMP will be developed in Lonrho
the finalisation of the Project design, and in moving from Health,
construction to operational phase. The Project ESMP Safety and
includes specific management plans for implementation Environment
and functions as an overarching plan linking other plans Manager
with the Project ESMS.
Specific Management Plans

Waste Project-related waste handling procedures for hazardous HSE
Management and non-hazardous wastes. Including chemical handling Manager
Plan procedure.
Emergency Administration (policy, purpose, distribution, definitions Technical

Preparedness etc), organisation of emergency areas (command centres, Manager(s)
and Response medical stations, etc), roles and responsibilities,
Plan communication systems, emergency response procedures,
emergency resources, training and updating, checklists
(role and action list and equipment checklist) and
business continuity and contingency. Will also include
specification for emergency communications as well as
on-going public and community communication and
disclosures.
Spill Response Spill preventative measures and spill response procedures Technical
Plan Manager(s)
Traffic Controls over prescribed routes, driver training, vehicle Technical

Management maintenance, speed restrictions, appropriate road safety Manager(s)
Plan signage, and vehicle loading and maintenance measures
and vetting procedures. Will also include specification for
community awareness and safety programmes.
Marine Marine transport risk assessment, water transport routes Technical

Logistics Plan transport rules. Manager(s)
Aircraft Controls governing aircraft flight paths and surrounding Technical

Control Plan towns. Manager(s)
Stakeholder SEP (included in Annex A) addressing interactions with External

Engagement community and other stakeholders, and the grievance Affairs
Plan (SEP) procedure. Community and Employee awareness Manager
training and code of conduct procedures.
Chance Finds Description of protection measures and chance find HSE

Procedure procedures in case cultural or archaeological resources are Coordinator
encountered..
Employment Plan for local training and procurement for port Human
and Workforce operations. Also specifies requirements for contractors Resources
Management during construction and tenants during operation. (HR)
Plan Manager
Occupational Procedures on chemical hazards, fire and explosions, Technical

Health and confined spaces and on site-traffic hazards. Manager(s)
Safety Plan Communication and training programmes. Safety
analysis to and industrial hygiene surveys procedures.
Monitoring, record-keeping and audit procedures

9-8
Influx Plan of actions Lonrho will take to mitigate project- Technical
Management induced influx and the associated indirect impacts. Plan Manager(s)
Plan will include policies and procedures for hiring and actions
it will take in association with communities and the
government.
Preventative Maintenance procedures and description of the Technical

Maintenance maintenance management system for port operations. Manager(s)
Plan Also specifies requirements for contractors during
construction and tenants during operation.
Note: please refer to Section 9.4.2 for roles and responsibilities of plan owners
The timing of the development of the plans may be staged, ensuring that the
appropriate focus and level of detail is provided for construction and
operational activities, and as detailed design information becomes available.
9.3.4 Contractor and Tenant Environmental and Social Management Plan(s)
The Project will engage contractors to carry out project activities during both
the construction and operational phases (eg waste removal contractors).
During operations, tenants will conduct business activities at the port.
Contractors and tenants contractors will be responsible for performing all
work:
in compliance with relevant national and international HSE legislation and

regulations, and with other requirements to which the Project subscribes;
in conformance with the Project ESMS, ESMP, and related management

plans for specific aspects; and
in accordance with contractual technical and quality specifications.
The Project’s ESMS and related documentation will be the main contractual
documentation to which the contractor and tenant environmental and social
documentation and procedures will be bridged. Contractors and tenants will
be required to develop their own management plans which show how they
will comply with these environmental and social requirements.
In this way, the ESMS will be implemented and controlled using both
Lonrho’s and the contractor or tenants’ management systems. The contractor
or tenant’s management systems will therefore:
provide the framework that regulates the their activities;
define responsibilities and reporting relationships for expediting,

mitigation and monitoring actions detailed in the ESMS; and

9-9
specify the mechanisms for inspecting and auditing to ensure that the
agreed actions are implemented.
Contractors and tenants will be required to self-monitor against their plan and
compliance with the plan will be routinely monitored by Lonrho directly or by
third-parties. Contractors and tenants will be required to submit regular
reports of monitoring activities and the project will review these on a regular
basis.
Contractor and tenant plans will be reviewed and approved by Lonrho. An

external audit and assurance process will be conducted of the contractors’ and
tenants’ HSE documentation on an annual basis, the results of which will be
disclosed at completion of the process.
9.4 IMPLEMENTATION
Lonrho is committed to providing resources and establishing the systems and

components essential to the implementation and control of the ESMP. These
include appropriate human resources and specialised skills, training
programmes, communication procedures, documentation control and a
procedure for the management of change.
9.4.1 Environmental and Social Management Organisation
Lonrho is ultimately responsible for the management and supervision of all

Project activities and will have principal responsibility for implementing this
ESMP and the mitigation measures.
Lonrho will have an HSE department with an External Affairs function, with
competent staff on the basis of appropriate education, training and experience.
The organisational structure HSE management is provided in Figure 9.1.
During construction, Lonrho will delegate some responsibility to construction

contractors. Lonrho will be responsible for the operation of the port
infrastructure but may engage contractors for certain operational aspects and
in these cases, contractors would be delegated some responsibility. For the
operation of the various planned facilities, Lonrho will delegate the
environmental and social responsibilities to its tenants. As a contractual
requirement, the contractors and tenants will be required to demonstrate
compliance of their activities against the ESMP. This includes providing
resources to ensure compliance of next tier contractors and a process for
emergency stop-work orders in response to monitoring triggers.
Lonrho will manage its contractors and work with tenants to ensure that this
ESMP is implemented and monitored effectively through contractual
mechanisms regular direct oversight. Lonrho will have its own supervisory
personnel and the Government of Ghana will have an oversight of the project
through various agencies, notably the EPA.

9-10
Figure 9.1 HSE Organisational Structure (Construction and Operation)
Lonrho Ghana Ports

Chief Executive Officer
Lonrho Technical Lonrho Health, Safety,

Manager(s) and Environment (HSE)
Manager
Lonrho Compliance
and Permits Manager
Lonrho External Affairs Lonrho HSE

Manager Coordinator
Lonrho Community Lonrho HSE

Liaison Officers Compliance Officers
The Lonrho Ghana Ports Ltd Chief Executive Officer for the Project will be
located in Accra. The Lonrho HSE department (and the External Affairs staff)
will be headquartered at the Project site to facilitate HSE oversight of
contractors as well as to allow direct interface and access for Project
stakeholders. These functions will manage the successful implementation of
the ESMP and the continuation of the stakeholder consultation process.
During construction, the Lonrho Technical Manager (in this case the Client’s
representative during construction) HSE will be placed locally at the Project
site to monitor contractors during construction. During operations the Lonrho
Technical Manager (in this case the Port Operations Manager) will monitor
HSE contractors and tenants during operational activities and will also be
located at the Project site.
The environmental and social organisation also includes a Lonrho CLO placed
locally at the Project site. The CLO’s role is crucial to the successful
implementation of the ESMP (and SEP, included as Annex A) and the
continuation of liaison with the local community.
9.4.2 Roles and Responsibilities
The roles and responsibilities of the Lonrho, contractor and tenant HSE staff
are provided in Table 9.2 below.

9-11
Table 9.2 Environmental and Social Management Organisation Roles and
Responsibilities
Position Responsibility
Lonrho Project Team
Chief Executive Officer (CEO) Oversee and coordinate all activities pertaining to the project;
ultimately responsible for HSE. Ensure delivery by the asset
of its HSE and operational targets. Oversee and coordinate
the implementation of the Livelihood Restoration
Program/Plan and ensure effective engagement with all
stakeholders.
Compliance and Permits Determine applicable permit and compliance requirements.

Manager Liaise with government regulators (with the external affairs
manager) to obtain necessary permits. Responsible for
compliance with applicable regulations, including HSE, with
assistance from HSE Manager and HSE Coordinator.
Health, Safety, and Environment Oversee and coordinate all activities pertaining to the HSE
(HSE) Manager and community aspects of the Project.
Ensure delivery of HSE and operational targets.
Ensuring that the Project and contractors operate in
accordance with applicable regulatory environment, health
and safety requirements and plans.
Responsible for the execution of Emergency Response Plan
execution.
Ensure implemention of the Livelihood Restoration Plan and
ensure effective engagement with all stakeholders.
Provide the necessary resources (including financial and
manpower) to satisfactorily implement and successfully
complete the proposed HSE management controls and
initiatives.
External Affairs Manager Liaise with government regulators and other stakeholders
including the public on the Project’s behalf.
Responsible for the implementation of the SEP.
Responsible for the implementation of the Livelihood
Restoration Plan.
Employment/deployment of Community Liaison Officer(s).
Community Liaison Officer(s) Liaise with local communities, fishermen and government
regulators on the Project’s behalf.
Implement HSE awareness and education programmes with
communities and SEP requirements
HSE Coordinator Ensuring that the project and contractors operate in

and safety requirements and plans
Monitor implementation of environmental and social
protection measures
Technical Manager(s) Technical aspects of the project including contractor

supervision.
This will include a Client’s Representative during
construction and a Port Operations Manager during
operation. The Technical Manager(s) will be based at the
Project site.

9-12
Contractors/ Tenant
Contractor Project Manager or Responsible for contractor or tenant technical performance
Tenant Operations Manager and HSE compliance.
Contractor or Tenant HSE Ensure that environment, health and safety regulatory
Manager requirements are met and that ESMP requirements are
properly implemented and in a timely manner
Ensure that all HSE reporting requirements stipulated by
Lonrho, and all/any HSE bridging requirements are met in a
timely manner.
Ensuring that the subcontractor/ tenant activities are in
and safety requirements and plans.
Monitor implementation of environmental and social
protection measures.
9.4.3 Competence, Training and Awareness
Lonrho will identify, plan, monitor, and record training needs for personnel
whose work may have a significant adverse impact upon the environment or
social conditions. The Project recognises that it is important that employees at
each relevant function and level are aware of the Project’s environmental and
social policy; potential impacts of their activities; and roles and responsibilities
in achieving conformance with the policy and procedures. Training and
awareness-raising therefore forms a key element of both HSE and the
expediting of this ESMP.
Key staff will, therefore, be appropriately trained in key areas of HSE

management and operational control with core skills and competencies being
validated on an on-going basis. The identification of training and awareness
requirements and expediting of the identified training/awareness events will
be the responsibility of the Lonrho HR department with input from relevant
departments.
A training and awareness gap analysis will be performed for each key
member of staff and a training and awareness matrix will be constituted as a
method of managing and expediting the identified training requirements.
Training documentation will be retained on file. Training will be tailored for
the specific job requirements and as applicable will include awareness and
competency with respect to:
general awareness relating to activities on site, including environmental

and social impacts that could potentially arise from Project activities;
legal requirements in relation to environmental and social performance;
necessity of conforming to the requirements of the ESIA and ESMP,

including reporting requirements (ie such as incident reporting);

9-13
activity-specific training on waste water and waste management practices,
documentation systems and community interactions; and
roles and responsibilities to achieve that conformity, including change

management and emergency response.
Specific environmental and social impact and HSE related training will be
offered to improve Lonrho’s environmental and social performance and could
be extended also to contractors and tenants. Examples of training events
which will be undertaken include:
HSE induction programme for all incoming personnel including visitors;

Emergency Response Plan training courses; and
ESMP training.
Similarly, Lonrho will require that each of the contractors and tenants
implement measures to ensure that workers are competent in their duties with
respect to HSE matters and that they are aware of specific HSE requirements.
As necessary this may require specific training and contractors will be audited
to ensure that:
worker competency is being verified and documented; and

awareness and/or training programmes are adequate.
9.4.4 Communication
Lonrho will maintain a formal procedure for communications with the

regulatory authorities and communities with guidance from the updated SEP
prepared for the Project. The External Affairs Manager is responsible for
communication of HSE issues to and from regulatory authorities. The Lonrho
Project manager is kept informed of such communications and pertinent
information arising from such interactions will be communicated to
contractors and tenants through the HSE Manager.
Meetings will be held, as required, between Lonrho and the appropriate

regulatory agency and community representatives to review HSE
performance, areas of concern and emerging issues. These interactions will be
transparent and stakeholders will have access to relevant personnel and
information to address concerns raised.
The External Affairs Manager is responsible for engagement with the public
and with public stakeholder organisations. Stakeholder engagement will
follow formal written procedures to document these communications. With
regard to HSE issues, the External Affairs Manager is responsible for
facilitating dissemination of information necessary to mitigate impacts
through coordinating community notifications (eg meetings, media
announcements, written postings) and through stakeholder interaction.

9-14
In line with the SEP, the Project will maintain a written register of stakeholder
interactions to effectively track communications so that commitments made to
follow up actions can be tracked and implemented. This includes grievances,
which are tracked through the formal grievance procedure. This will be
administered by the External Affairs Manager (Section 9.6).
9.4.5 Documentation
Lonrho will control HSE documentation, including management plans;

associated procedures; and checklists, forms and reports, through a formal
document control procedure. The document control procedure will describe
the processes that the project will employ for official communication of both
hardcopy and electronic (through the internet) document deliverables. In
addition, it will describe the requirement for electronic filing and posting and
for assignment of a document tracking and control numbers (including
revision codes). Copies of relevant environmental and social documentation
(including correspondence with the environmental regulators) will be kept on
file for a minimum of three years.
The HSE Manager is responsible for maintaining a master listing of applicable

HSE documents and making sure that this list is communicated to the
appropriate parties. The HSE Manager is responsible for providing notice to
the affected parties of changes or revisions to documents, for issuing revised
copies and for checking that the information is communicated within that
party’s organisation appropriately. The HSE Manager will keep a record of all
environmental incidents and remedial actions in an Environmental Incident
Logbook.
Contractors and tenants will be required to develop a system for maintaining

and controlling their own HSE documentation and describe these systems in
their respective HSE plans.
Indicative Environmental Incident Report Form and Monthly Audit Summary

Sheet are included in Figure 9.2 and Figure 9.3.

9-15
Figure 9.2 Draft Environmental Incident Report Form
Figure 9.3 Draft Monthly Environmental Audit Summary Sheet

9-16
9.4.6 Development of Procedures
Operational Control Procedures
Each potentially significant impact identified in the ESIA will have an

operational control associated with it that specifies appropriate procedures,
work instructions, best management practices, roles, responsibilities,
authorities, monitoring, measurement and record keeping for avoiding or
reducing impacts. Operational controls are monitored for compliance and
effectiveness on a regular basis through a monitoring and auditing procedure
described in the ESMP.
Operational control procedures will be reviewed and, where appropriate,

amended to include instructions for planning and minimising impacts, or to at
least reference relevant documents that address impact avoidance and
mitigation.
Emergency Preparedness and Response
Lonrho will develop plans and procedures to identify the potential for and
response to environmental accidents and health and safety emergency
situations and for preventing and mitigating potentially adverse
environmental and social impacts that may be associated with these.
Emergency preparedness and response planning and implementation will be

reviewed by Lonrho at least annually and after the occurrence of any
accidents or emergency situations to ensure that lessons learnt inform
continuous improvement. Emergency exercises will be undertaken on a
regular basis to confirm adequacy of response strategies. Investigations of
accidents or incidents will follow formal documented procedures.
9.4.7 Management of Change
Changes in the Project may occur due to unanticipated situations as well as

adaptively, during the course of final design, commissioning or even
operations. These changes could include the following:
facility, plant and equipment modification;

design change and design development;
procedural and activity changes; and
organisational and operational change.
The objective of the management of change procedure is to ensure that the

impact of changes on the health and safety of personnel, the environment,
plant and equipment are identified and assessed prior to changes being
implemented. The Project will develop and implement a formal procedure to
manage changes in the project that will apply to all project activities.
The management of change procedure will ensure that:

9-17
proposed changes have a sound technical, safety, environmental, and
commercial justification;
changes are reviewed by competent personnel and the impact of changes

is reflected in documentation, including operating procedures and
drawings;
hazards resulting from changes that alter the conditions assessed in the
ESIA have been identified and assessed and the impact(s) of changes do
not adversely affect the management of health, safety or the environment;
changes are communicated to personnel who are provided with the

necessary skills, via training, to effectively implement changes; and
the appropriate Lonrho person accepts the responsibility for the change.
As information regarding the uncertainties becomes available, the Project

ESMP will be updated to include that information in subsequent revisions.
Environmental and social, as well as engineering feasibility and cost,
considerations have been and will continue to be taken into account when
choosing between possible alternatives.
9.4.8 Stakeholder Engagement
In addressing the different needs of stakeholders, the Project has developed a

stakeholder engagement strategy and a SEP, which will be modified and
updated as required. Implementation will rest with the External Affairs
Manager and the CLO(s).
The stakeholder engagement strategy includes the following:
A Community Forum – recognising and ensuring active participation of

differentiated interest groups within the affected communities. This
would be held at least monthly during construction and early operations
and will be scheduled less frequently and as required after the first five
years of operations.
An Authorities Engagement Forum – this will facilitate integration

between project activities (including CSR projects) with on-going Regional
and District planning and implementation. It will also allow partnerships
where appropriate (eg HIV/AIDS prevention programmes). This would
take place bi-monthly during construction (or more frequently at specific
periods of activity) and then quarterly from the start of operations. This
will be assessed and fine-tuned as required. These meetings should be
scheduled to coincide with community forum meetings.
A Special Interest Group Forum – to ensure on-going engagement and

where possible integration of activities with local NGOs, CBOs working in
the area. Business groups and other interest groups that may emerge

9-18
during the Project will also be engaged in an on-going manner. This
would take place on a regular basis during construction (eg timed with
the community meetings) and thereafter quarterly unless convened for a
particular issue.
An information centre will be established in the Project area, which will

provide relevant Project information appropriate for the Project phases and
activities. In addition, on-going verification and monitoring activities will be a
key component of continued stakeholder engagement, ensuring reporting on
compliance and performance regarding environmental and social
commitments.
Further details of the approach to stakeholder engagement as well as planned

activities are provided in the SEP (Annex A) and integrated into the
mitigation/ monitoring tables in Chapter 7. Additional engagement activities
and requirements will be identified through the development of the
Livelihood Restoration Programme (LRP).
9.5 CHECKING AND CORRECTIVE ACTION
Checking includes inspections and monitoring activities as well as audits to

confirm effectiveness of the mitigation measures and proper implementation
of checking systems.
Corrective actions include responses implemented due to non-compliances,

and non-conformances as well as those actions intended to improve
performance.
9.5.1 Inspection
HSE self-inspections will be conducted by contractors and tenants on a daily

basis. The results of inspection activities will be communicated on a monthly
basis (or more frequently if requested) to the Lonrho HSE Manager. Examples
includes feedback on any incidents and status of pro-active HSE activities.
Lonrho will conduct spot inspections on a periodic basis.
9.5.2 Monitoring
Monitoring will be conducted to ensure compliance with regulatory

requirements as well as to evaluate the effectiveness of operational controls
and other measures intended to mitigate potential impacts.
Lender requirements may include other forms of external monitoring.
With respect to the impacts identified through the ESIA process, Lonrho has
laid out on-going monitoring activities which are included into the mitigation
tables in Chapter 7. Although this includes details of what effects and
parameters are to be measured and at what frequency, detailed monitoring

9-19
methodologies or processes must be put in place in order to ensure the
efficacy of the mitigation measures identified in the ESIA. These monitoring
methodologies should be designed to address the following:
alteration to the biological, chemical, physical, social and health

characteristics of the recipient environment;
alterations in the interactions between Project activities and environmental

and social sensitivities, and interactions among the various sensitivities;
to monitor the effectiveness of the mitigation measures;
determination of long term and residual effects; and
identification of Project specific cumulative environmental effects.
Monitoring is carried out by the HSE coordinator and/or by contractors or

tenants under contractual obligations.
9.5.3 Auditing
Beyond the routine inspection and monitoring activities conducted, audits

will be carried out internally by Lonrho to ensure compliance with regulatory
requirements as well as their own HSE standards and policies. Audits to be
conducted will also cover the subcontractor self-reported monitoring and
inspection activities. The audit shall be performed by qualified staff and the
results shall be communicated to the Lonrho CEO.
The audit will include a review of compliance with the requirements of the
ESIA and of this ESMP and include, at minimum, the following:
completeness of HSE documentation, including planning documents and

inspection records;
conformance with monitoring requirements;
efficacy of activities to address any non-conformance with monitoring

requirements; and
training activities and record keeping.
There will be a cycle of audits into specific areas of the project such as waste
management, and effectiveness of local content plans and discharge controls.
The frequency of audits will be risk based and will vary with the stage of the
project (more frequent during construction and in the early stages of the
project) and will depend on the results of previous audits.

9-20
9.5.4 Corrective Action
Impacts will be identified and associated risks addressed before an incident

occurs. Investigating a ‘near miss’ or actual incident after it occurs can be
used to obtain valuable lessons and information that can be used to prevent
similar or more serious occurrences in the future.
Lonrho will implement a formal non-compliance and corrective action

tracking procedure for investigating cause and identifying corrective actions
in response to accidents or environmental or social non-compliances. This
will ensure coordinated action between Lonrho and its contractors and
tenants. The HSE coordinator will be responsible for keeping records of
corrective actions and for overseeing the modification of environmental or
social protection procedures and/or training programs to avoid repetition of
non-conformances and non-compliances.
9.5.5 Reporting
Throughout the project, Lonrho will keep regulatory authorities informed of

the project performance with respect to HSE matters by way of written status
reports and face-to-face meetings.
Lonrho will prepare a monthly report on environmental and social

performance and submit this to the EPA. Copies of the monthly report may
be made available to other interested authorities on request and agreement
with EPA. In addition, quarterly reports on environmental and social
performance will be compiled and submitted to the Ellembelle District
Assembly and the Western Region Regional Coordinating Council.
In addition to any regular reporting, official notification shall be made to the

government for any of the following:
significant modifications to this ESMP or the ESIA;

significant design, routing or implementation changes;
results of environmental monitoring;
community incidents; and
safety incidents or accidents.
Lonrho will make the following available: appropriate documentation of HSE

related activities (including internal inspection records, training records, and
reports) or provide on request. Contractors and tenants are also required to
provide HSE performance reporting to Lonrho on a regular basis through
monthly reports. These will be used as input to the above.

9-21
9.6 GRIEVANCE MECHANISM
Grievances may be verbal or written and are usually either specific claims for
damages/injury or complaints or suggestions about the way that the Project is
being implemented.
When a grievance has been brought to the attention of the Project it will be
logged and evaluated. The person or group with the grievance is required to
present grounds for making a complaint or claiming loss so that a proper and
informed evaluation can be made. Where a complaint or claim is considered
to be valid then steps are require to be undertaken to rectify the issue or agree
compensation for the loss. Where there remains disagreement on the outcome
then an arbitration procedure may be required to be overseen by a third party
(eg government official). Local community stakeholders will be informed of
the grievance procedure.
A Grievance Mechanism has been developed as part of the SEP (Annex A), in
accordance with the Performance Standards. The Grievance Mechanism and
procedure is included as Annexure J to the SEP. This procedure will be
implemented by the Project to manage and address all public grievances
including those specific to livelihood compensation and restoration .
Labour-related grievances will be dealt with internally through Lonrho’s HR

department. Lonrho will manage grievances of its employees in accordance
with Ghana regulatory requirements. Contractors and tenants will be
expected to comply with Ghana regulations as well.

9-22
10 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
10.1 THE ESIA PROCESS
This ESIA for the proposed Lonrho Exclusive Deepwater Petroleum and
Hydrocarbon Logistics Base Port was undertaken in accordance with the
Ghanaian Environmental Assessment Regulations (1999), the African
Development Bank’s standards as well as the Equator Principles which refer
to the International Finance Corporation’s Performance Standards on Social
and Environmental Sustainability. The aim of the ESIA process is to provide
information for decision-making to contribute to environmentally sound,
socially responsible and sustainable development. The overall ESIA process
comprised of a number of key steps, namely:
screening and scoping;

baseline data collection;
stakeholder consultation;
impact assessment;
mitigation and management planning; and
reporting and disclosure.
This Draft ESIA report provides a description of the ESIA process followed to
date. It also provides a description of the stakeholder engagement process
that was undertaken during the ESIA whereby stakeholders were notified and
consulted regarding the Project and its anticipated consequences. In addition,
biophysical and socio-economic baseline information on receptors and
resources was collected from available secondary data sources as well as field
surveys. Biophysical fieldwork surveys were undertaken during the dry
season (April 2012) and the results are included within the Draft ESIA Report,
while wet season sampling results (available during September 2012) will be
included as an addendum to the Final ESIA Report.
A description of the existing environmental and socio-economic conditions is

provided, and is used as a basis against which the impacts of the Project are
assessed. From this assessment, mitigation measures are identified to avoid or
reduce adverse impacts and enhance positive impacts. A register of
mitigation measures and monitoring requirements is included in Chapter 7.
10.2 SUMMARY OF IMPACTS AND MITIGATION
A total of 60 impacts were identified through the impact assessment process

and 15 of these were identified as positive impacts, while 45 negative impacts
were identified. The ESIA used a standard methodology to assess the impacts
identified and provide a significance rating prior to and after the
implementation of mitigation measures.

10-1
A range of positive impacts of the Project are identified through the ESIA.
These include a number of impacts of major positive significance, namely:
increased business experience, training and skills during operation

(forming part of the impact on the national and regional economy);
impacts on livelihoods related to employment creation during

construction and operation; and
impacts on livelihoods during the operational phase, related to increased

potential for income stability.
With enhancement measures, there are also a number of positive impacts

which are considered of moderate–major significance. These are impacts on
national and regional economy as a result of economic development and
impacts on livelihoods in the form of diversification of the economy and
employment creation.
The assessment identified a number of impacts that are considered to be of

major negative significance prior to mitigation (Box 10.1). The contribution of
the Project to greenhouse gases is also considered to be significant.
Box 10.1 List of Major Negative Impacts (Pre-mitigation)
impacts on traffic related to strain on the road network and deterioration of infrastructure
during construction;
impacts on visual character;
impacts on coastal processes;
impacts on sea turtles;
economic displacement (fishing and farming);
impacts on ecosystem services caused by increased competition for fauna/ flora during
operation;
impacts on prices and increased economic vulnerability during construction (part of
impacts on livelihoods);
impacts on livelihoods and changes in livelihood strategies;
impacts on social infrastructure, governance and services delivery and pressure on basic
infrastructure in particular;
impacts on social infrastructure, governance and services delivery (as a result of the growth
of informal settlements associated with in-migration);
impacts on the sense of place during construction;
impacts on social and cultural norms;
impacts on health as a result of the increased prevalence of STI, HIV/ AIDS and other
communicable diseases; and
vehicle accidents.
These negative impacts require careful implementation of effective mitigation

measures and ongoing monitoring as outlined in Chapter 7, including the
development of a Livelihood Restoration Plan (LRP).

10-2
Only one impact remains major negative after mitigation, namely the impacts
on social infrastructure, governance and services delivery and pressure on
basic infrastructure in particular. The mitigation measures depends on the
local government authorities’ planning for this increased pressure on their
infrastructure and services and Lonrho will need to engage closely with Local
and District authorities and provide input and offer support to the
implementation of their mitigation measures where possible and appropriate.
The remainder of these major negative impacts are reduced to at most

moderate significance with the implementation of mitigation measures, while
the following are reduced to moderate-major:
impact on social infrastructure, governance and services delivery (as a

result of the growth of informal settlements associated with in-migration);
changes to social and cultural norms; and
impacts on health: increased prevalence of STI, HIV/ AIDS and other

communicable diseases.
The impact on ecosystem services in the form of decreased availability of land

for settlement is also considered moderate-major after mitigation. Impacts on
groundwater (deterioration of water quality), impacts on noise and vibration
from the airstrip during operation, impacts on marine quality and impacts on
marine sediment quality and benthic and intertidal ecology are identified as
negative impacts and considered to be of moderate significance after
mitigation.
The proposed gas plant planned for an area adjacent and to the east of the
Project site was considered in the assessment of cumulative impacts of the
Project. Increased employment and income stability in the area is identified as
a cumulative positive impact of minor significance. Apart from those
cumulative negative impacts considered to be minor, cumulative impacts on
noise, vibration and light and negative impacts on livelihoods and ecosystem
services related to additional influx are considered to be of moderate
significance.
All mitigation and monitoring measures identified through the impact

assessment are summarised into Chapter 7 and form the basis of Lonrho’s
commitments to reducing the significance of negative impacts and enhancing
Project benefits. The ESMP (Chapter 9) provides the overarching framework
for implementation of these environmental and social mitigation measures,
monitoring requirements as well as designating the organisation and
responsibilities of Project and contractor personnel. The ESMP also includes a
list of detailed management plans to be developed. Together with the
Stakeholder Engagement Plan (Annex A), these detailed plans will provide
further detail and support for the implementation of Lonrho’s commitments
in the construction and operation of the Project.

10-3
11 REFERENCES
Aggrey-Fynn J, Galyuon I, Aheto DW, Okyere I. (2011). Assessment of the

environmental conditions and benthic macroinvertebrate communities in two
coastal lagoons in Ghana. Annals of Biological Research 2(5) 413-424.
Akoto, F. (2012). GhanaWeb

http://www.ghanaweb.com/GhanaHomePage/aboutus.php (Baseline info)
Accessed July 2012.
Allotey JA. (2007). Status of biodiversity and impact assessment in Ghana.

Environmental Protection Agency 18 pp.
Anderson DM, Andersen P, Bricelj VM, Cullen JJ, Rensel JEJ. (2001).
Monitoring and management strategies for harmful algal blooms in coastal waters.
APEC #201-MR-01.1, Asia Pacific Economic Program, Singapore and
Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission Technical Series No. 59, Paris.
Armah AK, Darpaah GA, Wiafe G, Adomako JK, Quartey SQ, Abotchie C,
Ansah F, Fiagbedzi S. (1997). Traditional and modern perspectives of marine turtle
conservation in Ghana Biodiversity Conservation: traditional knowledge and modern
concepts (eds. Amlalo DS, Atsiatorme LD and Fiati C), EPA/MAB/UNESCO
80-87 pp.
Armah AK, Amlalo DS. (1998). Coastal Zone Profile of Ghana. Ministry of
Environment, Science and Technology/Large Marine Ecosystems Project of
the Gulf of Guinea. Ghana Ministry of Environmental Science and
Technology, Accra, Ghana.
Armah AK, Amlalo DF, Tetteh K, Wellens-Mensah. (2003). Ghana National

Report Phase 1. Intergrated Problem Analysis GEFMFP Sub-Saharan African
Project (DF/6061-0016) 94 pp.
Attuquayefio DK. (2001). Baseline biodiversity survey -herpetofauna and mammals

of the Amanzuri Wetlands. An unpublished technical report submitted to the
Ghana Wildlife Society, Accra.
Basel Convention. (2012). Wastes from Ships UNEP

http://www.basel.int/Implementation/LegalMatters/Ships/tabid/2405/Def
ault.aspx) Accessed May 2012.
Basset A, Galuppo N, Sabetta L. (2006). Transitional Waters Bulletin 1 48-63 pp.
Bax N, Williamson A, Aguero M, Gonzalez E, Geeves W. (2003). Marine

invasive alien species: a threat to global biodiversity. Marine Policy 27 313 –
323 pp.

11-1
Benneh, G. and Dickson, B.K. (1988). A New Geography of Ghana. London:
Longman Group UK Ltd.
Bernacsek GM. (1986). Profile of the marine resources of Ghana.

CECAF/TECH/71 (En) Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO) 118 pp.
Boere GC. (2006). The African Eurasian Migratory Waterbird Agreement: a review.
Wetlands International.
Boateng I. (2006). Shoreline Management Planning: Can It Benefit Ghana? A Case

Study ofUK SMPs and Their Potential Relevance in Ghana.
https://www.fig.net/pub/accra/papers/ts16/ts16_04_boateng.pdf. Accessed
March 2014.
Brushares JS, Arcese P, Sam MK, Coppolillo PB, Balmford A. (2004). Bushmeat
Hunting, Wildlife Declines, and Fish Supplies in West Africa. Science 306 1180-
1183 pp.
Birdlife International. (2012). Important Bird Areas (IBAs) www.birdlife.org .

Accessed May 2012.
Boateng I. (2009). Development of an Integrated Shoreline Management Planning: A

case study of Keta, Ghana. Coastal Zone Management. Coastal Zone
Management. FIG working Week, Eilat, Israel.
Burser MD, Parnell CB, Auvermann BW. (2001). Inherent biases of PM10 and
PM2.5 samplers based on the interaction of particle size and sampler
performance characteristics. The society for engineering in agricultural, food,
and biological systems. ASAE Meeting Presentation paper number: 01-1167
Accessed at: http://naldc.nal.usda.gov/download/2647/PDF . Accessed
August 2012.
Caseley-Hayford. (2004). A Social Appraisal of the Education Strategic Plan for

Ghana. unpublished. Associates for Change Working Document #1.
COMEAP. (2012). Review of the UK Air Quality Index. Crown.

http://comeap.org.uk/images/stories/Documents/Reports/comeap%20revi
ew%20of%20the%20uk%20air%20quality%20index.pdf PDF Accessed 25 July
2012.
CRC-URI. (2010). Our Coast, Our Future. Western Region of Ghana, Building
capacity for adapting to a rapidly changing coastal zone. HeN Mpoano.
Prepared by Coastal resources centre – University of Rhode Island (CRC-URI)
and SustainaMetrix 66 pp.
EarthTrends. (2003). http://www.wri.org/project/earthtrends/. Accessed

June 2012.

11-2
Ecotech. 2012. Ecotech environmental monitoring systems, Particulates
information page. http://www.ecotech.com/gases-measured/particulates-
pm10-pm2-5-tsp . Accessed August 2012.
Ellembelle District Profile. (2012). Ellembele District Information.

http://ghanadistricts.com. Accessed June 2012.
Elgood HJ, Heigham BJ, Moore MA, Nason MA, Sharland ER, Skinner JN.
(1994). The birds of Nigeria, B.O.U Check-list No.4 (second edition), British
ornithologists´ union.
Enu-Kwesi L, Vordzogbe VV. (2001). Flora diversity inventory and utility

assessment towards development of a sustainably managed community reserve.
Report.
GCLME. (2012). Guinea Current large Marine Ecosystem Information.

http://gclme.org/ . Accessed May 2012.
FAO. (2012). Negotiation and mediation techniques in action: the diversion of

Bosoko river in the Amansuri wetland,
Ghana. http://www.fao.org/forestry/37266/en/ . Site Accessed August
2012.
Flegg J. (2004). Time to Fly. Exploring Bird Migration. BTO, Thetford.
Fontaine B, Janicot S, Roucou P. (1999). Coupled ocean-atmosphere surface

variability and its climate in the tropical Atlantic region. Climate Dynamics 15:
451-473.
Fretey J. (2001). Biogeography and Conservation of Marine Turtles of the Atlantic

Coast of Africa. CMS Technical Series Publication 6, UNEP/CMS Secretariat,
Bonn, Germany.
Froese R,Pauly D (Eds). (2009). FishBase .World Wide Web electronic

publication. www.fishbase.org. Accessed March 2009.
Ghana Free Zones Board. (2012). Information about the Ghana Free Zones Board.
http://www.gfzb.com.gh/index.php Accessed July 2012.
Ghana Meteorological Agency. (2012). Meteorological Data.

http://www.meteo.gov.gh/. Accessed June 2012.
Djokoto G, Opoku K. (2010). Land tenure in Ghana: making a case for

incorporation of customary law in land administration and areas of intervention by
the growing forest partnership. International union for the conservation of nature
and growing forest partnership.
http://www.growingforestpartnerships.org/sites/growingforestpartnerships
.org/files/gfp_a_land_tenure-gfp_project.pdf Accessed May 2012.

11-3
Ghana Wildlife Society, (GWS). (2006). Biodiversity Management Plan of the
Amanzuri Wetland.
Hall JB, Swaine MD. (1981). Distribution and Ecology of Vascular Plants in Ghana.
W. Junk, The Hague.
HPI. (2009). Takoradi Thermal Power Plant Expansion Project (T3).

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) for Volta River Authority. Prepared by
HPI. 311 pp.
IFC and World Bank. (2007a). Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS)
Guidelines: General EHS Guidelines: Introduction.
http://www1.ifc.org/wps/wcm/connect/Topics_Ext_Content/IFC_External
_Corporate_Site/IFC+Sustainability/Sustainability+Framework/Environmen
tal,+Health,+and+Safety+Guidelines/ . Accessed June 2012.
IFC and World Bank. (2007b). Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines:
Ports, Harbors & Terminals
IFC and World Bank. (2007c). Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines:
Airports
IFC and World Bank. (2007d). Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines:
Waste Management Facilities
IFC and World Bank. (2007e). Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines:
Shipping
International Monetary Fund Report. (2004). Ghana Counrty Report.

http://www.imf.org/external/publications/index.htm . Accessed May 2012.
IUCN. (2011). IUCN Red List of Threatened Species.

http://www.iucnredlist.org/. Accessed June 2012.
Jachmann H. (2008). Monitoring law-enforcement performance in nine

protected areas in Ghana. Biological Conservation 141 (1) pp 89-99.

11-4
Johnson L. (2010). “Ghana: Where'd all the men go? Husbands desert their wives
and children in poor villages, and seek work in the cities”. East Carolina University.
Jubilee EIA. (2009). Ghana Jubilee Field Phase 1 Development. Environmental

Impact Statement.
Karikari AY, Asante KA, Biney CA. (2006). West African Journal of Applied
Ecology 10 73-85 pp.
Koranteng KA. (1991). Some aspects of the Sardinella fishery in Ghana.

In:.Cury H, Roy C. (eds.) Pêcheries Ouest-Africaines Variabilité,
Instabilité et Changement. Editions de I’ORSTOM, Paris. 269-
277 pp.
Koranteng KA. (2001). Structure and Dynamics of Demersal Assemblages on

the Continental Shelf and Upper Slope off Ghana, West Africa, Mar-Ecol-Prog-
Ser. 220: 1-12 pp.
Kortatsi BK. (1994). Groundwater utilisation in Ghana. Future Groundwater

Resources at Risk (Proceedings of the Helsinki Conference, June 1994). Pdf available
at http://itia.ntua.gr/hsj/redbooks/222/iahs_222_0149.pdf - Accessed July
2012.
Kraan ML. 2009. Creating space for fishermen’s livelihoods: Anlo-Ewe beach seine
fishermen’s negotiations for livelihood space within multiple governance structures in
Ghana. PhD Thesis. African Studies Centre Leiden University, African Studies
Collection, vol. 19. Available at
https://openaccess.leidenuniv.nl/handle/1887/13977 . Accessed August
2012.
Laibi, R.A., Anthony E.J., Almar, R, Castelle, B, Senechal, N, Kestenare, E

(2014). Longshore drift cell development on the human-impacted Bight of Benin sand
barrier coast, West Africa. http://www.legos.obs-
mip.fr/almar/ICS2014_LaibiBightofBenincoast_29_11_13_Revised.pdf?lang=e
n. Accessed March 2014.
Ly, c. K.. (1980). The role of the Akosombo dam on the Volta River in causing coastal
erosion in central and eastern Ghana (west Africa). Marine geology. 37: 323-332
Martos AR, Yraola IS, Peralta, Gonzales JF. (1991). The “Guinea 90” Survey
CECAF/ECAF SERIES 91/52 FAO Rome at
http://www.fao.org/docrep/003/U1509E/U1509e00.htm Accessed June
2009.
Mensah MA, Anang E. (1998). The state of the Coastal and Marine
Environment of Ghana. In, Ide A. C. and Zabi S. G. (Eds) State of the Coastal and
Marine Environment of the Gulf of Guinea. 69-74 pp.

11-5
Merle J, Arnault S. (1985). Seasonal variability of the tropical South Atlantic
and linkages to the Pacific. Geophysical Research Letters 13: 1039-1092 pp.
Ministry of Energy. (2012). Aims and Objectives of the Ministry of Energy.

http://www.energymin.gov.gh/index.php Accessed July 2012.
Ministry of Finance and Economic Planning. (2012). Aims and Objectives of the
Ministry of Finance and Economic Planning. http://www.mofep.gov.gh/ -
Accessed July 2012.
Minta FO. (2003). An Assessment of vulnerability of Ghana’s Coastal artisanal

fishery to Climate Change. MSc thesis. Norwegian College of Fishery Science
NFU, University of Tromso. Norway.
Modern Ghana. (2012). http://ModernGhana.com . Accessed July 2012.
National Population Census. (2010). Census Data. www.statsghana.gov.gh.

Accessed May 2012.
Nedwell JR, Edwards B, Needham K. (2001). Noise measurements during

pipeline laying operations around the Shetland Islands for the Magnus EOR project.
A report for BP, Subacoustech Report Reference: 473R0112.
Nedwell JR, Langworthy J, Howell D. (2004a). Assessment of sub-sea acoustic

noise and vibration from offshore wind turbines and its impact on marine wildlife;
initial measurements of underwater noise during construction of offshore windfarms,
and comparison with background noise. In Talisman (2005) Environmental
Statement. Subacoustech Report Reference: 544R0424, November 2004, to
COWRIE. http://www.beatricewind.co.uk/environmental_statement.pdf
Accessed July 2012.
Noble Denton. (2008). Offshore Ghana MetOcean data report. Report No:
L22898/NDC/IGA 45pp.
Pethick J. (1984). An Introduction to Coastal Geomorphology. Edward Arnold Ltd.

London.
Ramsar. 2012. Ramsar information site, wetlands portal, Ghana.

http://ramsar.wetlands.org/Portals/15/GHANA.pdf . Accessed July 2012.
Strategic National Energy Plan (SNEP) (July, 2006). Ghanaian Energy

Commission. http://www.energycom.gov.gh/old/pgs/reports.php Accessed
May 2013.
Tsidzi, K.E.N. and Kumapley, N.K. (2001). Coastal erosion in Ghana: Causes and
mitigation strategies in Marinos, Koukis, Tsiambaos and Stourmaras (2001).
Engineering Geology and the Environment.
http://books.google.co.za/books?id=jYXDC9sc6PUC&pg=PA3943&lpg=PA3
943&dq=littoral+drift+ghana&source=bl&ots=cbBk8MrudV&sig=cNhPAaQx

11-6
M2OlqyeFqWW0C_p7I1I&hl=en&sa=X&ei=f-
EyU5ymBKyw7AbJ5YD4Ag&redir_esc=y#v=onepage&q=littoral%20drift%20
ghana&f=false. Accessed March 2014.
UNESCO – WCMC. (2008). Protected Areas database.

http://gcmd.gsfc.nasa.gov/KeywordSearch/Metadata.do?Portal=gosic&Met
adataType=0&MetadataView=Brief&KeywordPath=&EntryId=WCMC_148
Accessed May 2012.
University of California, San Fancisco. (2009).

http://hivinsite.ucsf.edu/global?page=cr09-iv-00 . Accessed June 2012.
US EPA, (2012). United stated environmental protection agency drinking water

limits. http://water.epa.gov/drink/contaminants/index.cfm Accessed
August 2012
USGS. (2003). http://pubs.usgs.gov/circ/2003/circ1262/ Accessed 24 July

2012
VibeGhana.com April. (2012). Article www.vibeghana.com Accessed June

2012.
WAGP. (2004). West African Gas Pipeline Project- Environmental Baseline

Study. Vols. I & II.
Wiafe G. (2002). Spatial and temporal dynamics of plankton communities in the Gulf
of Guinea ecosystem. PhD Thesis, University of Ghana (Ghana), 200 pp.
WHO, (2012). Zinc in Drinking Water.

http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/chemicals/zinc.pdf. Site
Accessed August 2012
World Bank. (2006). Ghana Country Environmental Analysis (report number:

36985-GH). Prepared by the Environmentally and Socially Sustainable
Development Department (AFTSD) Africa Region 227 pp.
World Bank Group. (2007). Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines

General EHS Guidelines: Environmental Air Emissions And Ambient Air Quality.
World Bank Ghana. (2011a). Ghana Looks to Retool Its Economy as it Reaches
Middle-Income Status. Available online:
http://web.worldbank.org/WBSITE/EXTERNAL/COUNTRIES/AFRICAEX
T/GHANAEXTN/0,,contentMDK:22964653~menuPK:50003484~pagePK:2865
066~piPK:2865079~theSitePK:351952,00.html Accessed 9 May 2012.
World Bank. (2012a). Global Economic Prospects 2012. Available online:

http://web.worldbank.org/WBSITE/EXTERNAL/EXTDEC/EXTDECPROSP
ECTS/EXTGBLPROSPECTS/0,,menuPK:615470~pagePK:64218926~piPK:6421
8953~theSitePK:612501,00.html Accessed 9 May 2012.

11-7
Yankson K. (1999). EA Obodai. Journal of the Ghana Science Association 2(26) 26-
31 pp

11-8
ERM has 145 offices
across the following
countries worldwide
Argentina The Netherlands

Australia New Zealand
Belgium Panama
Brazil Peru
Canada Poland
Chile Portugal
China Puerto Rico
Colombia Romania
France Russia
Germany Singapore
Hong Kong South Africa
Hungary Spain
India Sweden
Indonesia Taiwan
Ireland Thailand
Italy United Arab Emirates
Japan UK
Kazakhstan US
Korea Venezuela
Malaysia Vietnam
Mexico
ERM’s Johannesburg Office

Building 32, The Woodlands Office Park
Woodlands Drive, Woodmead
Sandton, 2148
South Africa
T: +27 11 798 4300
www.erm.com
ERM consulting services worldwide www.erm.com

Ghana Oil Services Terminal ESIA Report

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ghana Oil Services Terminal ESIA Report

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ghana Oil Services

Final ESIA Report and

Delivering sustainable solutions in a more competitive world

Ghana Oil Services Terminal:

For and on behalf of

Approved by: Henry Camp

Date: 03 April 2014

This report has been prepared by Environmental Resources

We disclaim any responsibility to the client and others in respect of

This report is confidential to the client and we accept no responsibility

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY XVII

1 INTRODUCTION AND PURPOSE OF REPORT 1-1

1.1 OVERVIEW 1-1

2 LEGAL AND POLICY FRAMEWORK 2-1

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2-1

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 3-1

3.1 INTRODUCTION 3-1

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

4 BIOPHYSICAL BASELINE 4-1

4.1 INTRODUCTION 4-1

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC BASELINE 5-1

5.1 DEFINING THE SOCIO-ECONOMIC STUDY AREA 5-2

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

6 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT 6-1

6.1 INTRODUCTION 6-1

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

7 MITIGATION AND MANAGEMENT MEASURES 7-1

7.1 INTRODUCTION 7-1

8.1 INTRODUCTION 8-1

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ESMP) 9-1

9.1 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE 9-1

10 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS 10-1

10.1 THE ESIA PROCESS 10-1

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

Figure 2.1 Relationship between Lender Requirements 2-37

Figure 3.1 Layout of the proposed Project 3-3

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

Figure 6.1 Prediction, Evaluation and Mitigation of Impacts 6-5

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

Figure 9.1 HSE Organisational Structure (Construction and Operation) 9-11

Table 1.1 Primary and Secondary Stakeholder Groups 1-11

Table 2.1 List of Relevant National Environmental Legislation 2-17

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

Table 6.1 Biophysical and Species Value / Sensitivity Criteria 6-8

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

Box 1.1 Key Components of an Effective Grievance Mechanism 1-22

Box 2.1 “Better Ghana Agenda” priority interventions 2-12

Box 5.1 Key Aspects of the National Economy 5-19

Box 6.1 Impact Characteristics 6-5

Box 9.1 Lonrho Environmental Policy 9-4

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

LONRHO GHANA PORTS LIMITED FINAL ESIA REPORT

The proposed Project involves the development of an ‘Exclusive Deepwater

According to Ghanaian Environmental legislation the proposed Project requires

1.1.1 Project Overview

The development of the Project will comprise the construction of two

1.1.2 Project Justification